----

FM 3-05.222
(TC 31-32)
Special Forces Sniper
Training and Employment
DISTRIBUTIONRESTRICTION:
Distributionauthorizedto U.S. rnment agenciesandtheir contr onlyto protect technical or
operational informationfromautom disseminationunderthe 'ationalExchangeProgramor by
other means. This determinationwas de on 5 Decemb ,. 03. Other requestsfor this document
must be referredto Commander,Unite tes Arm~ F. KennedySpecial WarfareCenter and
School, ATTN: AOJK-DT-S 99, NorthCarolina28310-5000.
April 2003
Headquarters, Department of tlii Army
Field Manual
No. 3-05.222
Chapter 1
Chapter2
*FM 3-05.222 (TC31-32)
Headquarters
Department of the Army
Washington. DC, 25 April 2003
Special Forces Sniper
Training and Employment
Contents
Page
PREFACE iv
THE SPECIALFORCESSNIPER 1-1
Mission 1-1
Selectionof Personnel 1-1
Qualificationsof SOTICGraduates 1-5
The Sniper Team 1-5
Sniper Team Organization... 1-6
Sniper Training.. 1-6
EQUIPMENT 2-1
Sniper WeaponSystem 2-1
TelescopicSights. 2-6
Leupoldand StevensM3ATelescope 2-7
Ammunition 2-10
ObservationDevices 2-13
Sniper Team Equipment 2-29
Care and Cleaningof the SniperWeaponSystem 2-33
Troubleshootingthe SniperWeapon System 2-41
.This publication supersedes TC 31-32, 29 September 1997.

FM 3-05.222
ii
Page
Chapter 3 MARKSMANSHIP TRAINING.................................................................................3-1
Firing Positions ........................................................................................................3-1
Team Firing Techniques........................................................................................3-17
Sighting and Aiming...............................................................................................3-19
Breath Control ........................................................................................................3-28
Trigger Control .......................................................................................................3-29
The Integrated Act of Firing One Round................................................................3-31
Detection and Correction of Errors ........................................................................3-34
Application of Fire ..................................................................................................3-37
Ballistics .................................................................................................................3-40
Sniper Data Book...................................................................................................3-48
Zeroing the Rifle.....................................................................................................3-51
Environmental Effects............................................................................................3-59
Slope Firing............................................................................................................3-66
Hold-Off..................................................................................................................3-69
Engagement of Moving Targets.............................................................................3-72
Common Errors With Moving Targets ...................................................................3-76
Engagement of Snap Targets................................................................................3-76
Firing Through Obstacles and Barriers..................................................................3-77
Cold Bore First-Shot Hit .........................................................................................3-78
Limited Visibility Firing............................................................................................3-78
Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical Firing ...............................................................3-79
Chapter 4 FIELD SKILLS.........................................................................................................4-1
Camouflage..............................................................................................................4-1
Cover and Concealment ........................................................................................4-10
Individual and Team Movement.............................................................................4-12
Tracking and Countertracking................................................................................4-25
Observation and Target Detection.........................................................................4-43
Range Estimation...................................................................................................4-57
Selection and Preparation of Hides .......................................................................4-67
Sniper Range Card, Observation Log, and Military Sketch ...................................4-80
KIM Games............................................................................................................4-91
Chapter 5 EMPLOYMENT .......................................................................................................5-1
Methods ...................................................................................................................5-1
Planning...................................................................................................................5-2
Organization.............................................................................................................5-5

FM 3-05.222
iii
Page
Command and Control ............................................................................................ 5-7
Target Analysis...................................................................................................... 5-10
Mission Planning ................................................................................................... 5-14
Sniper Support in Special Operations Missions and Collateral Activities.............. 5-18
Countersniper ........................................................................................................ 5-30
Conventional Offensive Operations....................................................................... 5-32
Conventional Defensive Operations...................................................................... 5-35
Civil Disturbance Assistance................................................................................. 5-37
Chapter 6 SNIPER OPERATIONS IN URBAN TERRAIN....................................................... 6-1
Urban Terrain .......................................................................................................... 6-1
Sniper Support in Urban Operations ....................................................................... 6-9
Urban Hides .......................................................................................................... 6-14
Weapons Characteristics in Urban Terrain........................................................... 6-23
Engagement Techniques ...................................................................................... 6-24
Appendix A WEIGHTS, MEASURES, AND CONVERSION TABLES....................................... A-1
Appendix B MISSION-ESSENTIAL TASKS LIST...................................................................... B-1
Appendix C SUSTAINMENT PROGRAM...................................................................................C-1
Appendix D MISSION PACKING LIST.......................................................................................D-1
Appendix E M82A1 CALIBER .50 SNIPER WEAPON SYSTEM............................................... E-1
Appendix F FOREIGN/NONSTANDARD SNIPER WEAPON SYSTEMS DATA...................... F-1
Appendix G SNIPER RIFLE TELESCOPES ............................................................................. G-1
Appendix H BALLISTICS CHART..............................................................................................H-1
Appendix I SNIPER TRAINING EXERCISES............................................................................ I-1
Appendix J RANGE ESTIMATION TABLE ............................................................................... J-1
Appendix K SNIPERS LOGBOOK............................................................................................ K-1
Appendix L TRICKS OF THE TRADE ....................................................................................... L-1
Appendix M SNIPER TEAM DEBRIEFING FORMAT ............................................................... M-1
Appendix N SNIPER RANGE COMPLEX ..................................................................................N-1
Appendix O AERIAL PLATFORMS........................................................................................... O-1
GLOSSARY ................................................................................................ Glossary-1
BIBLIOGRAPHY....................................................................................Bibliography-1
INDEX............................................................................................................... Index-1



Preface
This field manual (FM) provides doctrinal guidance on the mission, personnel,
organization, equipment, training, skills, and employment of the Special Forces
(SF) sniper. It describes those segments of sniping that are unique to SF soldiers
and those portions of conventional sniping that are necessary to train indigenous
forces. It is intended for use by commanders, staffs, instructors, and soldiers at
training posts, United States (U.S.) Army schools, and units.
FM 3-05.222 (formerly TC 31-32) addresses three distinct audiences:
Commanders. It provides specific guidance on the nature, role, candidate
selection, organization, and employment of sniper personnel.
Trainers. It provides a reference for developing training programs.
Snipers. It contains detailed information on the fundamental knowledge,
skills, and employment methods of snipers throughout the entire
operational continuum.
The most common measurements that the sniper uses are expressed throughout
the text and in many cases are U.S. standard terms rather than metric.
Appendix A consists of conversion tables that may be used when mission
requirements or environments change.
The proponent of this manual is the United States Army John F. Kennedy
Special Warfare Center and School (USAJFKSWCS). Submit comments and
recommended changes to Commander, USAJFKSWCS, ATTN: AOJK-DT-SFA,
Fort Bragg, NC 28310-5000.
Unless this publication states otherwise, masculine nouns and pronouns do not
refer exclusively to men.
iv


Chapter 1
The Special Forces Sniper
The SF sniper is a selected volunteer specially trained in advanced
marksmanship and fieldcraft skills. He can support special operations
(SO) missions and is able to engage selected targets from concealed
positions at ranges and under conditions that are not possible for the
normal rifleman.
MISSION
1-1. Specially organized, trained, and equipped military and paramilitary
forces conduct SF missions. Their goal is to achieve military, political,
economic, or psychological objectives by unconventional means in hostile,
denied, or politically sensitive areas. SF conduct missions in peacetime
operations and war, independently or in coordination with operations of
conventional forces. Politico-military considerations frequently shape SF
operations, requiring clandestine, covert or low-visibility techniques, and
oversight at the national level. SF operations usually differ from
conventional operations in their degree of risk, operational techniques, mode
of employment, independence from friendly support, and dependence upon
operational intelligence and indigenous assets. Figure 1-1, page 1-2, lists the
SF principal missions and collateral activities and the support that a sniper
provides. Appendix B contains the sniper mission-essential task list.
SELECTION OF PERSONNEL
1-2. Commanders and assessors must carefully screen all candidates for
sniper training. The rigorous training program and the great personal risk in
combat require high motivation and the ability to learn a variety of skills. The
proper mental conditioning cannot always be taught or instilled by training.
1-3. It is important for the commander to monitor evaluation and selection
procedures, since each unit may have a different mission. There are no
absolutes for selecting SF snipers. However, there are diagnostic tests,
organizational indicators, and trends that help the commander identify
potential snipers.
1-4. There are also several concrete prerequisites that should be met by the
candidates before being accepted into the sniper program. Figure 1-2, page
1-2, lists the administrative prerequisites that the sniper candidate must meet.
1-5. The commander can determine personal qualities through background
checks, interviews, records review, and counseling sessions. Recommended
personal qualities should include, but are not limited to, those shown in
Figure 1-3, page 1-3.
1-1
FM 3-05.222
Figure 1-1. Special Forces Functions and How the Sniper Supports Them
Figure 1-2. Administrative Prerequisites
NOTE: Most of the prerequisites listed in Figure 1-2 are required to enter
the Special Operations Target Interdiction Course (SOTIC) conducted at the
USAJFKSWCS, Fort Bragg, North Carolina.
1-2
FM 3-05.222
Figure 1-3. Personal Qualities
1-6. The first three personal qualities are particularly important when it
comes to sustaining sniper skills, because the sniper with these
characteristics will have a greater desire to practice these tasks as they are
part of his avocation.
1-7. Commanders may implement diagnostic and aptitude testing. Certain
testing procedures may be lengthy and tedious and are therefore subject to
limitations of time, equipment, and facilities. It is recommended that the
psychological evaluation of a candidate be at least partially determined
through the use of the MMPI-2. This test, if properly administered, gives the
commander a personality profile of the candidate. It helps him decide
whether the candidate can function in confined spaces, work independently,
and has the potential to be a sniper.
1-8. The tests are more than simple mental analyses. Psychological
screening establishes a profile of characteristics that indicate if an individual
would be a successful sniper. Testing eliminates candidates who would not
perform well in combat. Psychological screening can identify individuals who
have problems.
1-9. To select the best candidate, the commander talks to a qualified
psychologist and explains what characteristics he is looking for. That way,
once a candidate is tested, the psychologist can sit down with the
commander and give him the best recommendation based on the candidates
psychological profile.
1-3
FM 3-05.222
1-10. After the commander selects the sniper candidate, he must assess the
individuals potential as a sniper. He may assess the candidate by conducting
a thorough review of the candidates records, objective tests, and subjective
evaluations. The length of time a commander may devote to a candidates
assessment will vary with his resources and the mission. Normally, 2 or 3
days will suffice to complete an accurate assessment.
1-11. Assessment should include both written and practical tests. Practical
examinations will actively measure the candidates physical ability to
perform the necessary tasks and subtasks involved in sniping. Written
examinations will evaluate the candidates comprehension of specific details.
1-12. Assessment testing must objectively and subjectively determine an
individuals potential as a sniper. Objectivity measures the capacity to learn
and perform in a sterile environment. Subjectivity assesses actual individual
performance.
1-13. Objective assessment tests are presented as a battery grouped by
subject matter and may be presented either as practical or written
examinations. Some examples of objective testing are
Shooting battery tests that evaluate the theoretical and practical
applications of rifle marksmanship.
Observation and memory battery tests that measure the candidates
potential for observation and recall of specific facts.
Intelligence battery tests that consist of standard military tests and
previously mentioned specialized tests.
Critical decision battery tests that evaluate the candidates ability to
think quickly and use sound judgment.
Motor skills battery tests that assess hand-eye coordination.
1-14. Subjective assessment tests allow the assessor to gain insight into the
candidates personality. Although he is constantly observed in the selection
and assessment process, specific tests may be designed to identify desirable
and undesirable character traits. A trained psychologist (well versed in
sniper selection) should conduct or monitor all subjective testing. Examples
of possible subjective tests include, but are not limited to, the following:
The interviewcan identify the candidates motivation for becoming a
sniper and examine his expectations concerning the training.
The suitability inventorybasically compares the candidate to a
predetermined profile containing the characteristics, skills,
motivations, and experience a sniper should possess.
1-15. A committee of assessors conducts the candidate selections at the end
of the assessment program. While the commander should monitor all
candidate selections, it is important for the committee to make the decision
to preserve consistency and to rule out individual bias. The procedure for
selection should be accomplished by a quorum during which the candidates
are rated on a progressive scale. The committee should choose candidates
based on their standing, in conjunction with the needs of the unit. At this
time, the best-qualified soldiers should be selected; alternate and future
1-4
FM 3-05.222
candidates may also be identified. The committee should also adhere to the
following guidelines:
Do not apprise the candidates of their status during selection.
Do not consider nonvolunteers.
Select the best-qualified candidates first.
Do not allow soldiers who do not meet set prerequisites into the
program.
Continue selection after SOTIC for best qualified determination and
mission selection.
QUALIFICATIONS OF SOTIC GRADUATES
1-16. Upon completion of the SOTIC, the sniper has obtained a minimum
of 700 course points and passed the must pass events to graduate. He must
be able to
Detect, determine distances to, and engage multiple targets at
distances between 150 to 800 meters.
Stalk and reach a concealed position located no further than 220
meters from an observer as an individual or 330 meters as a team.
Engage opportunity targets at 800 meters.
Precisely engage snap targets at 200 and 400 meters with a 3-second
exposure, and at 300 meters with a 6-second exposure.
Engage moving targets at 200 and 300 meters.
Understand camouflage and concealment, observation techniques,
reporting techniques, hide site selection, and hide construction.
Make first-round hit on man-sized targets out to 600 meters 90 percent
of the time, and out to 800 meters 50 percent of the time.
1-17. The only way the sniper can improve is through a comprehensive
sniper sustainment training program (Appendix C). This program is not just
to sustain the sniper at his present level, but it must challenge him to
improve his skills. The program is mandatory IAW U.S. Army Special
Operations Command (USASOC) Regulation 350-1, Training. It should be
used as frequently as possible, at a minimum of 2 weeks every 6 months.
Sniping skills are extremely perishable and without this program the sniper
will rapidly lose his skills and become ineffective. Participating also aids in
sniper selection after training.
THE SNIPER TEAM
1-18. Snipers conduct missions in pairs to enhance the teams effectiveness,
provide mutual security, and maintain constant support for each other. Due
to lowered stress, sniper pairs can engage targets more rapidly and stay in
the field for longer periods of time than a single sniper due to lowered stress.
1-19. The more experienced of the pair will act as the observer during the
shot. This method is especially important on a high priority target. The more
experienced sniper is better able to read winds and give the shooter
a compensated aim point to ensure a first-round hit. Also, a high-priority
1-5
FM 3-05.222
target may warrant that both snipers engage the target at the same time.
The two-man concept allows this flexibility.
1-20. Past experience has shown that deploying as a sniper/observer team
significantly increases the success rate of the missions. With few exceptions,
snipers who are deployed singly have shown a marked decrease in their
effectiveness and performance almost immediately after the start of the
mission. This decrease is due to the sniper becoming overwhelmed with
concern for his security, the tasks to be accomplished, and his own emotions
(fear, loneliness).
SNIPER TEAM ORGANIZATION
1-21. Either member of the sniper team can perform the function of the
sniper (with the M24 or a specially selected weapon); the other member
performs the function of the observer. The two-man team is the smallest
organization recommended. It offers mobility, concealment, and flexibility.
The sniper team can maintain continuous observation of an area while
alternating security, sleeping, eating, and relieving the stress inherent in a
single-man operation. The sniper/observer relationship of the sniper pair is
invaluable in target acquisition, estimation of range to targets, observation of
bullet trace and impact, and in offering corrections to targets engaged. Also,
the mutual support of two snipers working together is a significant morale
factor in combat environments or extended missions.
1-22. Under certain circumstances the team may be augmented with a
squad- to platoon-sized element. This element may be used for security, hide
construction, or as a cover for a stay-behind operation. If the augmentation is
for security purposes, the security element must be located far enough away
from the team to prevent its compromise. A starting guideline is 800 to 1,000
meters that must be modified according to the situation and the terrain. It is
critical to mission success that the sniper team and the augmentation unit be
thoroughly familiar with each other and have well-developed standing
operating procedures (SOPs).
1-23. Units may task-organize snipers for specific missions as opposed to
sniper teams working independently. Regardless of any provisional or
temporary sniper grouping, sniper teams should not be split. They are most
effectively employed in the pairs in which they have been trained.
1-24. Sniper teams may also be augmented with additional observers or
snipers. The additional personnel spread out the interval of observation
periods and allow for longer rest cycles, which is important during extended
missions with 24-hour observation. The primary team will act as the
sniper/observer pair if a shot is required. The augmentees act only as
observers during an observation cycle.
SNIPER TRAINING
1-25. Sniper training is conducted through two separate environments. The
formal schoolhouse environment (SOTIC) is conducted by the USAJFKSWCS
at Fort Bragg, North Carolina. This course produces Level I snipers for the
SO community. The graduates receive a W3 identifier.
1-6
FM 3-05.222
1-7
1-26. The second environment is the Unit Training Special Operations
Target Interdiction Course. This course enables the unit commander to fill
his needs within his mission parameters. A graduate of this course becomes a
Level II sniper and is fully capable of filling an assigned team slot as a
sniper. He also meets the requirements established by USASFC 350-1 for two
snipers, either Level I or II, to be assigned to each Special Forces operational
detachment A (SFODA). Once a sniper (Level I or II) is assigned to an
SFODA, he is then a Category (CAT) I sniper for requesting training
ammunition, equipment, and ranges.
1-27. Twice a year USAJFKSWCS conducts a 1-week Challenge Course.
Level II snipers who successfully complete the Challenge Course will be
awarded a SOTIC diploma and the Level I designator.
1-28. The primary differences in Levels I and II snipers are that Level I
snipers are required to fire within close proximity of non-combatants and
friendly forces in a Close Combat Situation. Level I snipers are required to run
the SF Group Sustainment Program, which is usually conducted in conjunction
with a Level II train up. Level I are required to train U.S. forces in Level II
courses. Level II snipers may not train other U.S. forces to a Level II status.
The Level II sniper may conduct sniper training for host nation courses.
1-29. The Level I sniper is tested to the maximum effective range of the M24
Sniper Weapon System 800 meters, while the Level II sniper furthest required
range is 600 yards. However, the unit commander may designate his Level II
snipers to be trained to a higher degree of efficiency and accuracy. The unit
commander may have his Level II course mirror the Level I course or add
greater emphasis in areas he feels are necessary to complete his assigned
mission parameters. While the Level I course is a program-of-instruction-
driven, 6-week course, the unit course may be 2 weeks or longer depending on
the requirements of the command.
1-30. The Level I designation is to identify those snipers that have met a
specific standard of training. These snipers have been trained by a cadre of
instructors that have gone through the Instructor Training Course conducted
by the SOTIC designators. The instructors sole function is to train sniper
students; he does not have to participate in the line units operations tempo.
1-31. The units Level II courses may train to a higher or lower standard
depending upon the commanders needs and assessments. The instructors for
the unit Level II course need to be identified as soon as possible, usually 6 to 8
weeks out, and permitted to prepare for the coming course. This lead time may
not be possible due to the units operations tempo and red-cycle requirements.
The longer the lead time, the better the course preparation and instruction.
1-32. Once a sniper is trained, whether Level I or II, he must maintain
proficiency. His maintenance training must include the school learning
environment and the unit training environment. The school must teach a
skill and thus remove variables so that the student may learn. Once the
sniper has graduated, he must train in these skills with the variables
added. Only imagination and desire on the snipers part can limit the
training scenarios.

2-1
Chapter 2
Equipment
Sni pers, by the nature of thei r mi ssi on, must l earn to expl oi t the
maxi mum potenti al from al l thei r equi pment. The organi zati onal l evel of
empl oyment and the mi ssi on wi l l determi ne the type and amount of
equi pment needed (Appendi x D). Sni pers wi l l carry onl y the equi pment
necessary for successful l y compl eti ng thei r mi ssi on. Appendi x E descri bes
the M82A1 cal i ber .50 sni per weapon system (SWS). Appendi x F
descri bes the types of SWSs i n other countri es.
SNIPER WEAPON SYSTEM
2-1. The current SWS i s the M24 sni per ri fl e wi th the Leopol d & Stevens
(L&S) ul tra 10x M3A ri fl e scope. The M24 i s based on the Remi ngton Model
700 l ong acti on wi th an adjustabl e tri gger. The barrel i s a heavy, 5 groove,
11.2-i nch twi st, stai nl ess steel target barrel . The stock i s made of fi bergl ass,
graphi te, and Kevl ar wi th an adjustabl e butt pl ate. The weapon i s
constructed to be accurate wi thi n 1/2 mi nute of angl e (MOA) or 1/2-i nch
groups at 100 yards. The M24 i s currentl y chambered for the 7.62-mi l l i meter
(mm) North Atl anti c Treaty Organi zati on (NATO) cartri dge. Two M24s are
i ssued per operati onal detachment. The parts of the M24 ri fl e i ncl ude the bol t
assembl y, tri gger assembl y, adjustabl e stock, barrel ed acti on (H 700), and
tel escopi c and i ron si ghts. Because thi s weapon i s the sni pers best fri end, he
must be profi ci ent i n i nspecti ng and l oadi ng i t. However, duri ng the
i nspecti on, the extent of the sni pers repai rs i s l i mi ted. Fi gure 2-1 l i sts the
M24 SWS components.
Figure 2-1. Components of the M24 SWS
FM 3-05.222
2-2
SAFETY
2-2. The safety i s l ocated on the ri ght rear si de of the recei ver and, when
properl y engaged, provi des protecti on agai nst acci dental di scharge under
normal usage. The sni per shoul d fol l ow the rul es bel ow:
To engage the safety, pl ace i t i n the S posi ti on (Fi gure 2-2).
Al ways pl ace the safety i n the S posi ti on before handl i ng, l oadi ng, or
unl oadi ng the weapon.
When the weapon i s ready to be fi red, pl ace the safety i n the F
posi ti on (Fi gure 2-2).
Figure 2-2. The M24 Sniper Weapon System in the SAFE and FIRE Modes
BOLT ASSEMBLY
2-3. The bol t assembl y l ocks the round i nto the chamber as wel l as extracts
i t. The sni per shoul d fol l ow the rul es bel ow:
To remove the bol t from the recei ver, pl ace the safety i n the S
posi ti on, rai se the bol t handl e, and pul l i t back unti l i t stops. Push the
bol t stop rel ease up (Fi gure 2-3, page 2-3) and pul l the bol t from
the recei ver.
To repl ace the bol t, ensure the safety i s i n the S posi ti on, al i gn the
l ugs on the bol t assembl y wi th the recei ver (Fi gure 2-4, page 2-3),
sl i de the bol t al l the way i nto the recei ver, and then push the bol t
handl e down.
TRIGGER ASSEMBLY
2-4. Pul l i ng the tri gger fi res the ri fl e when the safety i s i n the F posi ti on.
The sni per may adjust the tri gger pul l force from a mi ni mum of 2.5 pounds to
a maxi mum of 8 pounds. He can make thi s adjustment usi ng the 1/16-i nch
Al l en wrench provi ded i n the depl oyment ki t. Turni ng the tri gger adjustment
screw (Fi gure 2-5, page 2-3) cl ockwi se wi l l i ncrease the force needed to pul l
the tri gger. Turni ng i t countercl ockwi se wi l l decrease the force needed. Thi s
change i s the onl y tri gger adjustment the sni per wi l l make. The tri gger
cannot be adjusted l ess than 2.5 pounds. The screw compresses an
i ndependent spri ng that i ncreases the requi red pressure to make the sear
di sengage.
FM 3-05.222
2-3
Figure 2-3. Bolt Stop Release
Figure 2-4. Bolt Lugs Aligned With the Receiver
Figure 2-5. Location of the Trigger Adjustment Screw
FM 3-05.222
2-4
STOCK ADJ USTMENT
2-5. The M24 has a mechani sm for maki ng mi nor adjustments i n the stocks
l ength of pul l . The thi ck wheel provi des thi s adjustment. The thi n wheel i s for
l ocki ng thi s adjustment (Fi gure 2-6). The sni per shoul d turn the thi ck wheel
cl ockwi se to l engthen the stock or countercl ockwi se to shorten the stock. To
l ock the posi ti on of the shoul der stock, he shoul d turn the thi n wheel
cl ockwi se agai nst the thi ck wheel . To unl ock the posi ti on of the shoul der
stock, he shoul d turn the thi n wheel countercl ockwi se away from the thi ck
wheel . The sni per can adjust the l ength of pul l so that the stock may be
extended, but no more than three fi nger wi dths. Beyond thi s, the butt pl ate
becomes unstabl e.
Figure 2-6. Stock Length Adjustment Mechanism
IRON SIGHTS
2-6. The M24 has a backup si ghti ng system consi sti ng of detachabl e front
and rear i ron si ghts. To i nstal l the i ron si ghts, the sni per must fi rst remove
the tel escope. The sni per shoul d
Al i gn the front si ght and the front-si ght base dovetai l and sl i de the
si ght over the base to attach the front si ght to the barrel .
Ensure the fi ngernai l projecti on of the front si ght fi ts securel y i nto the
fi ngernai l groove on the front-si ght base.
Ti ghten the screw sl owl y, ensuri ng that i t seats i nto the recess i n the
si ght base (Fi gure 2-7, page 2-5.).
To attach the rear si ght to the recei ver, remove one of the three
setscrews, and al i gn the rear si ght wi th the rear-si ght base l ocated on
the l eft rear of the recei ver (Fi gure 2-8, page 2-5). Ti ghten the screw to
secure the si ght to the base. There are three screw hol es and two
posi ti ons for the si ght screw to faci l i tate adjusti ng shooter eye rel i ef.
FM 3-05.222
2-5
Figure 2-7. Front-Sight Mounting Screw
Figure 2-8. Attaching the Rear Sight Assembly
2-7. The sni per shoul d al so make sure the other setscrews are bel ow the l evel
of the face of the rear si ght base. I f not, he shoul d remove and store them.
INSPECTION
2-8. The M24s desi gn enabl es the sni per to make some repai rs. Defi ci enci es
that the sni per i s unabl e to repai r wi l l requi re manufacturer warranty work.
When i nspecti ng the M24, the sni per shoul d check the
Appearance and compl eteness of al l parts.
Bol t to ensure i t has the same seri al number as the recei ver and that i t
l ocks, unl ocks, and moves smoothl y.
FM 3-05.222
2-6
Safety to ensure i t can be posi ti vel y pl aced i nto the S and F
posi ti ons wi thout bei ng too di ffi cul t or too easy to move.
Tri gger to ensure the weapon wi l l not fi re when the safety i s i n the S
posi ti on and that i t has a smooth, cri sp tri gger pul l .
Acti on screws (front of the i nternal magazi ne and rear of the tri gger
guard) for proper torque (65 i nch-pounds).
Tel escope mounti ng ri ng nuts for proper torque (65 i nch-pounds).
Stock for any cracks, spl i ts, or any contact i t may have wi th the barrel .
Tel escope for obstructi ons such as di rt, dust, moi sture, and l oose or
damaged l enses.
LOADING
2-9. The M24 has an i nternal , fi ve-round capaci ty magazi ne. To l oad the
ri fl e, the sni per shoul d
Poi nt the weapon i n a safe di recti on.
Ensure the safety i s i n the S posi ti on.
Rai se the bol t handl e and pul l i t back unti l i t stops.
Push fi ve r ounds of 7.62-mm ammuni ti on one at a ti me thr ough the
ejecti on por t i nto the magazi ne. Ensur e that the bul l et end of the
r ounds i s al i gned towar d the chamber .
Push the rounds ful l y rearward i n the magazi ne.
Once the fi ve rounds are i n the magazi ne, push the rounds downward
whi l e sl owl y pushi ng the bol t forward over the top of the fi rst round.
Push the bol t handl e down. The magazi ne i s now l oaded.
To chamber a round, rai se the bol t and pul l i t back to ful l y seat the
round. Stoppi ng the bol t earl y wi l l cause an overri de si tuati on.
Push the bol t forward. The bol t stri ps a round from the magazi ne and
pushes i t i nto the chamber.
Push the bol t handl e down unti l i t i s ful l y seated. Fai l ure wi l l cause a
l i ght stri ke on the pri mer and a mi sfi re.
2-10. To fi re the ri fl e, pl ace the safety i n the F posi ti on and squeeze
the tri gger.
NOTE: See TM 9-1005-306-10, Operators Manual for 7.62-mm M24 Sniper
Weapon System (SWS), for shi ppi ng uncorrectabl e mai ntenance i tems.
TELESCOPIC SIGHTS
2-11. A tel escopi c si ght mounted on the ri fl e al l ows the sni per to detect and
engage targets more effecti vel y than he coul d by usi ng the i ron si ghts. Unl i ke
si ghti ng wi th i ron si ghts, the targets i mage i n the tel escope i s on the same
focal pl ane as the ai mi ng poi nt (reti cl e). Thi s evenness al l ows for a cl earer
pi cture of the target and reti cl e because the eye can focus on both
si mul taneousl y. However, concentrati on on the reti cl e i s requi red when
engagi ng a target.
FM 3-05.222
2-7
2-12. Another advantage of the tel escope i s i ts abi l i ty to magni fy the target,
whi ch i ncreases the resol uti on of the targets i mage, maki ng i t cl earer and more
defi ned. The average unai ded human eye can di sti ngui sh detai l of about 1 i nch
at 100 yards or 3 centi meters at 100 meters (1 MOA). Magni fi cati on combi ned
wi th wel l -desi gned opti cs permi ts resol uti on of thi s 1 i nch di vi ded by the
magni fi cati on. Thus, a 1/4 MOA of detai l can be seen wi th a 4x scope at 100
meters, or 3 centi meters of detai l can be seen at 600 meters wi th a 6x scope.
2-13. I n addi ti on, tel escopi c si ghts magni fy the ambi ent l i ght, maki ng shots
possi bl e earl i er and l ater duri ng the day. Al though a tel escope hel ps the
sni per to see better, i t does not hel p hi m to shoot wel l . Appendi x G provi des
further i nformati on on sni per ri fl e tel escopes.
LEUPOLD AND STEVENS M3A TELESCOPE
2-14. The M3A i s a fi xed 10x tel escope wi th a bal l i sti c drop compensator di al
for bul l et trajectory from 100 to 1,000 meters. The el evati on knob i s marked
i n 100-meter i ncrements to 600 meters, i n 50-meter i ncrements 600 to 1,000
meters, and has 1 MOA el evati on adjustment. The wi ndage
1/2-MOA i ncrements and a thi rd knob provi des for focus and paral l ax
adjustment. The reti cl e i s a dupl ex crosshai r wi th 3/4-MOA mi l dots (Fi gure
2-9, page 2-8). The mi l dots are 1 mi l apart, center to center, wi th a possi bl e
10 mi l s verti cal and 10 mi l s hori zontal . The sni per uses mi l dots for range
esti mati on, hol dover, wi ndage hol ds, mover l eads, and reference poi nt hol ds.
2-15. The M3A consi sts of the tel escope, a fi xed mount, a detachabl e
sunshade for the objecti ve l ens, and dust covers for the objecti ve and ocul ar
(eyepi ece) l ens. The tel escope has a fi xed 10x magni fi cati on that gi ves the
sni per better resol uti on than wi th the adjustabl e rangi ng tel escope (ART)
seri es. There are three knobs l ocated mi dway on the tubethe
focus/paral l ax, el evati on, and wi ndage knobs (Fi gure 2-10, page 2-8).
ADJ USTMENTS
2-16. The sni per shoul d al ways focus the reti cl e to hi s eye first. He shoul d
turn the ocul ar eyepi ece to adjust the reti cl e unti l i t i s sharp, but shoul d not
force-focus hi s eye. He can adjust the eyepi ece by turni ng i t i n or out of the
tube unti l the reti cl e appears cri sp and cl ear. The sni per shoul d focus the
eyepi ece after mounti ng the tel escope on the ri fl e. He shoul d grasp the
eyepi ece and back i t away from the l ock ri ng. He shoul d not attempt to l oosen
the l ock ri ng fi rst; i t wi l l automati cal l y l oosen when the eyepi ece i s backed
away (no tool s are needed). The sni per shoul d rotate the eyepi ece several
turns to move i t at l east 1/8 i nch. He wi l l need thi s much change to achi eve
any measurabl e effect on the reti cl e cl ari ty. The sni per then l ooks through
the scope at the sky or a bl ank wal l and checks to see i f the reti cl e appears
sharp and cri sp. He must do thi s before adjusti ng the focus and paral l ax.
FM 3-05.222
2-8
Figure 2-9. The M24 Optical Day Sight Reticle
Figure 2-10. Focus/Parallax, Elevation, and Windage Knobs
2-17. The focus/paral l ax knob si ts on the l eft si de of the tube. The sni per uses
i t to focus the targets i mage onto the same focal pl ane as the reti cl e, thereby
reduci ng paral l ax to a mi ni mum. Paral l ax i s the apparent movement of the
FM 3-05.222
2-9
si ght pi cture on the reti cl e when the eye i s moved from si de to si de or up and
down. The paral l ax adjustment knob has two extreme posi ti ons i ndi cated by
the i nfi ni ty mark and the l argest of four dots. Adjustments between these
posi ti ons focus i mages from l ess than 50 meters to i nfi ni ty. These marki ngs are
for reference onl y, after the sni per has i ni ti al l y adjusted hi s scope for paral l ax.
He then sl i ps the scal e to match hi s requi rements (for exampl e, bi g bal l
references 100 or 200 meters). The sni per then wri tes each i tem and i ts
di stance i n hi s l og for reference whenever he engages targets at that range. Any
change i n reti cl e focus requi res the sni per to readjust the focus/paral l ax setti ng.
2-18. The el evati on knob si ts on top of the tube. Thi s knob has cal i brated
i ndex marki ngs from 1 to 10. These marki ngs represent the el evati on setti ng
adjustments needed at varyi ng di stances; for exampl e, 1 = 100 meters,
10 = 1,000 meters. There are smal l hash marks between the 100-meter
i ncrements after 600 meters; these represent 50-meter i ncrements. Each cl i ck
of the el evati on knob equal s 1 MOA.
2-19. The wi ndage knob si ts on the ri ght si de of the tube. The sni per uses
thi s knob for l ateral adjustments. Turni ng the knob i n the di recti on i ndi cated
moves the poi nt of i mpact (POI ) i n that di recti on. Each cl i ck on the wi ndage
knob equal s 1/2 MOA.
LEUPOLD VARI-X III, M3A-LR
2-20. I ncorporati ng the best features of the Mark 4 M3 and Vari -X I I I
scopes, the Leupol d Vari -X I I I 3.5-10 x 40-mm Long-Range M3 features M3-
styl e adjustment di al s that are speci al l y cal i brated and i nterchangeabl e for
bul l et drop compensati on. Adjustment i ncrements of 1-MOA el evati on and
1/2-MOA wi ndage al l ow for easy adjustment. A paral l ax adjustment di al
al l ows paral l ax el i mi nati on from a shooti ng posi ti on. Thi s scope has a 30-mm
tube di ameter, a mi l -dot reti cl e, and mul ti coated l ens.
SCOPE MOUNT
2-21. The scope mount consi sts of a basepl ate wi th four screws and a pai r of
scope ri ngs (each wi th an upper and l ower ri ng hal f) wi th ei ght ri ng screws
(Fi gure 2-11, page 2-10). The sni per mounts the basepl ate to the ri fl e by
screwi ng the four basepl ate screws through the pl ate and i nto the top of the
recei ver. He shoul d have two short and two l ong basepl ate screws. The l ong
screws go to the rear mounti ng poi nts, the short screws go to the front. The
screws must not protrude i nto the recei ver so they do not i nterrupt the
functi oni ng of the bol t. Medi um-strength Locti te may be used on these four
basepl ate screws for a more permanent attachment. After mounti ng the
basepl ate, he then mounts the scope ri ngs.
2-22. When the sni per mounts the scope ri ngs, he shoul d sel ect one of the
sl ots on the mounti ng base and engage the ri ngbol t spl i ne wi th the sel ected
sl ot. He shoul d push the ri ng forward to get spl i ne-to-base contact as the
mount ri ng nut i s ti ghtened. He checks the eye rel i ef. I f the tel escope needs to
be adjusted, the sni per l oosens the ri ng nuts and al i gns the ri ngbol ts wi th the
other set of sl ots on the base; he then repeats the process. He makes sure that
the crosshai rs are perfectl y al i gned (verti cal l y and hori zontal l y) wi th the ri fl e.
Any cant wi l l cause mi sses at l onger ranges. To ensure that the reti cl e i s not
FM 3-05.222
2-10
canted i n the ri ngs, the sni per wi l l need a l evel and pl umb l i ne. He uses the
l evel to ensure the weapon i s i ndeed l evel l eft to ri ght. Once l evel ed, he hangs
a pl umb l i ne on a wal l and matches the reti cl e to the pl umb l i ne. When
sati sfi ed wi th the eye rel i ef obtai ned (approxi matel y 3 to 3 1/2 i nches), the
sni per then ti ghtens the ri ng nuts to 65 i nch-pounds usi ng the T-handl e
torque wrench (found i n the depl oyment case).
Figure 2-11. The M3A Leupold and Stevens Scope Mount
OPERATION
2-23. When usi ng the tel escope, the sni per si mpl y pl aces the reti cl e on the
target, determi nes the di stance to the target by usi ng the mi l dots on the
reti cl e, sets paral l ax, and then adjusts the el evati on knob for the esti mated
range. He then pl aces the crosshai r on the desi red POI or quarters the target.
The sni per then gi ves the observer a READY and awai ts the wi nd cal l .
AMMUNITION
2-24. Sni pers shoul d al ways attempt to use match-grade ammuni ti on when
avai l abl e because of i ts greater accuracy and l ower sensi ti vi ty to
envi ronmental effects. However, i f match-grade ammuni ti on i s not avai l abl e,
or i f the si tuati on requi res, he may use a di fferent grade of ammuni ti on.
Standard-grade ammuni ti on may not provi de the same l evel of accuracy or
POI as match-grade ammuni ti on. I n the absence of match-grade ammuni ti on,
the sni per shoul d conduct fi ri ng tests to determi ne the most accurate l ot of
ammuni ti on avai l abl e. Once he i denti fi es a l ot of ammuni ti on as meeti ng the
requi rements, he shoul d use thi s l ot as l ong as i t i s avai l abl e.
FM 3-05.222
2-11
TYPES AND CHARACTERISTICS
2-25. The sni per shoul d use 7.62- x 51-mm (.308 Wi nchester) NATO M118
Speci al Bal l (SB), M852 Nati onal Match, or M118 Long Range (LR)
ammuni ti on wi th the SWS. He must rezero the SWS every ti me the type or
l ot of ammuni ti on changes. The ammuni ti on l ot number appears on the
cardboard box, metal can, and wooden crate that i t i s packaged i n. The sni per
shoul d mai ntai n thi s i nformati on i n the weapons data book.
M118 Special Ball
2-26. The M118SB bul l et consi sts of a metal jacket and a l ead anti mony
sl ug. I t i s a boat-tai l ed bul l et (the rear of the bul l et i s tapered to reduce drag)
and has a nomi nal wei ght of 173 grai ns. The ti p of the bul l et i s not col ored.
The base of the cartri dge i s stamped wi th the NATO standardi zati on mark
(ci rcl e and crosshai rs), manufacturers code, and year of manufacture. I ts
pri mary use i s agai nst personnel . I ts accuracy standard requi res a 10-shot
group to have an extreme spread of not more than 12 i nches at 600 yards or
33 centi meters at 550 meters (2 MOAs) when fi red from an accuracy barrel i n
a test cradl e. The stated vel oci ty of 2,550 feet per second (fps) i s measured at
78 feet from the muzzl e. The actual muzzl e vel oci ty of thi s ammuni ti on i s
2,600 fps. M118SB i s the pri mary choi ce for the M24 SWS because the
tel escopi c si ghts are bal l i sti cal l y matched to thi s ammuni ti on out to 1,000
meters. Thi s ammuni ti on i s bei ng repl aced by M118LR.
M852 National Match (Open Tip)
2-27. As of October 1990, the Department of State, Army General Counsel ,
and the Offi ce of the Judge Advocate General concl uded that the use of open-
ti p ammuni ti on does not vi ol ate the l aw-of-war obl i gati on of the Uni ted
States. The U.S. Army, Navy, and Mari ne Corps may use thi s ammuni ti on i n
peaceti me or warti me mi ssi ons.
2-28. The M852 bul l et (Si erra Match Ki ng) i s boat-tai l ed, 168 grai ns i n
wei ght, and has an open ti p. The open ti p i s a smal l aperture (about the
di ameter of the wi re i n a standard-si zed strai ght pi n or paper cl i p) i n the nose
of the bul l et. Descri bi ng thi s bul l et as a hol l ow poi nt i s mi sl eadi ng i n l aw-of-
war terms. A hol l ow-poi nt bul l et i s typi cal l y thought of i n terms of i ts abi l i ty
to expand upon i mpact wi th soft ti ssue. Physi cal exami nati on of the M852
open-ti p bul l et reveal s that i ts openi ng i s smal l i n compari son to the aperture
of hol l ow-poi nt hunti ng bul l ets. I ts purpose i s to i mprove the bal l i sti c
coeffi ci ent of the projecti l e. The swagi ng of the bul l et from the base by the
copper gi l di ng l eaves a smal l openi ng i n the nose; i t does not ai d i n
expansi on. The l ead core of the M852 bul l et i s enti rel y covered by the copper
bul l et jacket.
2-29. Accuracy standard for the M852 ammuni ti on i s 9.5 i nches average
extreme spread (or sl i ghtl y over 1.5 MOAs) at 600 yards. Other than i ts
superi or l ong-range accuracy capabi l i ti es, the M852 was exami ned wi th
regard to i ts performance upon i mpact wi th the human body or i n arti fi ci al
materi al that approxi mates soft human ti ssue. I n some cases, the bul l et
woul d break up or fragment after entry i nto soft ti ssue. Fragmentati on
depends on many factors, i ncl udi ng the range to the target, vel oci ty at the
FM 3-05.222
2-12
ti me of i mpact, degree of yaw of the bul l et at the POI , or the di stance travel ed
poi nt-fi rst wi thi n the body before yaw i s i nduced. The M852 was not desi gned
to yaw i ntenti onal l y or break up upon i mpact. There was l i ttl e di scerni bl e
di fference i n bul l et fragmentati on between the M852 and other mi l i tary
smal l -arms bul l ets. Some mi l i tary bal l ammuni ti on of forei gn manufacture
tends to fragment sooner i n human ti ssue or to a greater degree, resul ti ng i n
wounds that woul d be more severe than those caused by the M852 bul l et.
NOTE: M852 i s the best substi tute for M118 taki ng the fol l owi ng l i mi tati ons
i nto consi derati on:
The M852s trajectory i s not i denti cal to the M118s; therefore, i t i s not
matched bal l i sti cal l y wi th the M3A tel escope. The di fference to 600
meters i s mi ni mal , predi ctabl e 700 becomes 725, and 800 requi res 850.
These are start-poi nt ranges onl y.
The M852 i s not sui ted for tar get engagement beyond 700 meter s
because the 168-gr ai n bul l et i s not bal l i sti cal l y sui tabl e. Thi s bul l et
wi l l dr op bel ow the sound bar r i er just beyond thi s di stance. The
tur bul ence that i t encounter s as i t becomes subsoni c affects i ts
accur acy at di stances beyond 700 meter s.
M118 Long-Range (Open Tip)
2-30. The M118LR bul l et (Si erra Match Ki ng) i s boat-tai l ed, 175 grai ns i n
wei ght, and has an open ti p. The open ti p i s the same as the M852.
2-31. Accuracy standard for the M118LR ammuni ti on i s an average extreme
hori zontal spread of 10.3 i nches and an average extreme verti cal spread of
14.0 i nches at 1,000 yards or sl i ghtl y over 1 MOA hori zontal and 1.4 MOAs
verti cal extreme spread. Thi s data i s stated i n the Detai l Speci fi cati ons dated
3 March 1998. The trajectory of the M118LR wi l l cl osel y match the M118SB.
Compl ete i nformati on i s not avai l abl e at thi s ti me. Thi s i s new ammuni ti on
bei ng devel oped through the Navy and Mari ne Corps. I t i s schedul ed to
repl ace al l l ots of the M118SB and M852.
M82 Blank
2-32. Sni pers use the M82 bl ank ammuni ti on duri ng fi el d trai ni ng. I t
provi des the muzzl e bl ast and fl ash that trai ners can detect duri ng the
exerci ses that eval uate the sni pers abi l i ty to conceal hi msel f whi l e fi ri ng hi s
weapon and acti vates the mul ti pl e i ntegrated l aser engagement system
(MI LES) trai ni ng devi ces. MI LES devi ces are an excel l ent tool for trai ni ng
the commander on the use of a sni per. However, these devi ces can cause
probl ems i n the sni pers trai ni ng, because he does not have to l ead targets or
compensate for wi nd or range.
ALTERNATIVES
2-33. I f match-grade ammuni ti on i s not avai l abl e, sni pers can use the
standard 7.62- x 51-mm NATO bal l ammuni ti on. However, the M3A bul l et
drop compensator (BDC) i s desi gned for M118SB, so there woul d be a
si gni fi cant change i n zero. Sni pers shoul d al ways test-fi re standard
ammuni ti on and record the bal l i sti c data i n the data book. They shoul d use
standard bal l ammuni ti on i n an emergency si tuati on onl y. Sni pers shoul d
FM 3-05.222
2-13
test-fi re al l ammuni ti on for accuracy. Even match-grade ammuni ti on can
have a bad l ot.
M80/M80E1 Ball
2-34. The M80 and M80E1 bal l cartri dge bul l et consi sts of a metal jacket
wi th a l ead anti mony sl ug. I t i s boat-tai l ed and wei ghs 147 grai ns. The ti p of
the bul l et i s not col ored. Thi s bul l et i s pri mari l y used agai nst personnel . I ts
accuracy standard requi res a 10-shot group to have an extreme spread of not
more than 4 MOAs or 24 i nches at 600 yards (66 centi meters at 550 meters)
when fi red from an accuracy barrel i n a test cradl e. The muzzl e vel oci ty of
thi s ammuni ti on i s 2,800 fps. The base of the cartri dge i s stamped wi th the
NATO standardi zati on mark, manufacturers i ni ti al s, and the date of
manufacture. The sni per shoul d test-fi re several l ots before usi ng them due to
the reduced accuracy and fl uctuati on i n l ots. The most accurate l ot that i s
avai l abl e i n the l argest quanti ty (to mi ni mi ze test repeti ti on) shoul d be
sel ected for use.
M62 Tracer
2-35. The M62 tracer bul l et consi sts of a metal -cl ad steel jacket, a l ead
anti mony sl ug, a tracer subi gni ter, and i gni ter composi ti on. I t has a cl osure
cap and wei ghs 141 grai ns. The bul l et ti p i s pai nted orange (NATO
i denti fi cati on for tracer ammuni ti on). I t i s used for observati on of fi re,
i ncendi ary, and si gnal i ng purposes. Tracer ammuni ti on i s manufactured to
have an accuracy standard that requi res 10-shot groups to have an extreme
spread of not more than 6 MOAs or 36 i nches at 600 yards (99 centi meters at
550 meters). The base of the cartri dge i s stamped wi th the NATO
standardi zati on mark, manufacturers i ni ti al s, and date of manufacture. The
amount of tracer ammuni ti on fi red through the SWS shoul d be mi ni mi zed
because of i ts harmful effect on the preci si on-made barrel .
ROUND COUNT BOOK
2-36. The sni per mai ntai ns a runni ng count of the number and type of
rounds fi red through the SWS. I t i s i mperati ve to accuratel y mai ntai n the
round count book. The SWS has shown to have a barrel l i fe of about 8,000 to
10,000 rounds. The sni per shoul d i nspect the barrel at thi s ti me, or sooner i f a
l oss of accuracy has been noted. He i nspects the barrel for throat erosi on and
wear, and i f excessi ve, schedul es the SWS to be rebarrel ed. Thi s i nspecti on
shoul d be accompl i shed I AW the depl oyment schedul e of the uni t and the
requi red break i n ti me needed for the new barrel .
OBSERVATION DEVICES
2-37. Asi de from the ri fl e and tel escopi c si ght, the sni pers most i mportant
tool s are opti cal devi ces. The categori es of opti cal equi pment that sni pers
normal l y use are bi nocul ars, tel escopes, ni ght vi si on devi ces (NVDs), and
range fi nders. The fol l owi ng paragraphs di scuss sel ected opti cal equi pment
for speci al purposes.
FM 3-05.222
2-14
BINOCULARS
2-38. Every sni per shoul d be i ssued bi nocul ars; they are the sni pers
pri mary tool for observati on. Bi nocul ars provi de an opti cal advantage not
found wi th tel escopes or other monocul ar opti cal devi ces. The bi nocul ars
typi cal l y l arger objecti ve l ens, l ower magni fi cati on, and opti cal characteri sti cs
add depth and fi el d of vi ew to an observed area. Many types of bi nocul ars are
avai l abl e. Sni pers/observers shoul d take the fol l owi ng i nto account when
sel ecti ng bi nocul ars:
Durability. The bi nocul ars must be abl e to wi thstand rough use under
fi el d condi ti ons. They must be weatherproofed and seal ed agai nst
moi sture that woul d render them usel ess due to i nternal foggi ng.
Bi nocul ars wi th i ndi vi dual l y focused eyepi eces can more easi l y be made
waterproof than central l y focused bi nocul ars. Most waterproof
bi nocul ars offered have i ndi vi dual l y focused eyepi eces.
Size. A sni pers bi nocul ars shoul d be rel ati vel y compact for ease of
handl i ng and conceal ment.
Moderate magnification. Bi nocul ars of 6 to 8 power are best sui ted for
sni per work. Hi gher magni fi cati ons tend to l i mi t the fi el d of vi ew for
any gi ven si ze of objecti ve l ens. Al so, hi gher magni fi cati ons tend to
i ntensi fy hand movements duri ng observati on and compress depth
percepti on.
Lens diameter. Bi nocul ars wi th an objecti ve l ens di ameter of 35 to
50 mm shoul d be consi dered the best choi ce. Larger l enses permi t more
l i ght to enter; therefore, the 50-mm l ens woul d be more effecti ve i n l ow-
l i ght condi ti ons.
Mil scale. The bi nocul ars shoul d have a mi l scal e i ncorporated i nto the
fi el d of vi ew for range esti mati on.
2-39. The M22 bi nocul ars are the newest i n the i nventory and are general
i ssue. These bi nocul ars have the same features as the M19, pl us fol d-down
eyepi ece cups for personnel who wear gl asses, to reduce the di stance between
the eyes and the eyepi eces. They al so has protecti ve covers for the objecti ve and
eyepi ece l enses. The bi nocul ars have l aser-protecti ve fi l ters on the i nsi de of the
objecti ve l enses. Direct sunlight reflects off these lenses! The reti cl e
pattern (Fi gure 2-12, page 2-15) i s di fferent from the M19s reti cl e. Laser fi l ter
al so l owers the M22s l i ght transmi ttance, whi ch l owers i ts abi l i ty to gather
l i ght at dusk and dawn. Characteri sti cs of the M19 and M22 are as fol l ows:
M19 Opti cal Characteri sti cs:
Objecti ve l ens: 50 mm.
Magni fi cati on: 7x.
Fi el d of vi ew: 130 mi l s130 meters at 1,000 meters.
M19 Physi cal Characteri sti cs:
Wi dth (open posi ti on): 190.5 mm/7.5 i nches.
Length: 152.4 mm/6 i nches.
Wei ght: 966 kg/2.125 pounds.
Thi ckness: 63.5 mm/2.5 i nches.
FM 3-05.222
2-15
M22 Opti cal Characteri sti cs:
Objecti ve l ens: 50 mm.
Magni fi cati on: 7x.
Fi el d of vi ew: 130 mi l s130 meters at 1,000 meters.
Depth of fi el d: 12.5 meters to i nfi ni ty.
M22 Physi cal Characteri sti cs:
Wi dth (open posi ti on): 205 mm/8.1 i nches.
Length: 180 mm/7.1 i nches.
Wei ght: 1.2 kg/2.7 pounds.
Figure 2-12. The Reticle Pattern in the M22 Binoculars
Method of Holding Binoculars
2-40. Bi nocul ars shoul d be hel d l i ghtl y, resti ng on and supported by the
heel s of the hands. The thumbs are posi ti oned to bl ock out l i ght that woul d
enter between the eyes and the eyepi eces. The eyepi eces are hel d l i ghtl y to
the eyes to avoi d transmi tti ng body movement. Whenever possi bl e, a
stati onary rest shoul d support the el bows. An al ternate method for hol di ng
the bi nocul ars i s to move the hands forward, cuppi ng them around the si des
of the objecti ve l enses. Thi s method keeps l i ght from refl ecti ng off the l enses,
whi ch woul d reveal the sni pers posi ti on. The sni per shoul d always be aware
of refl ecti ng l i ght. He shoul d operate from wi thi n shadows or cover the l ens
wi th an extensi on or thi n vei l , such as a nyl on stocki ng.
FM 3-05.222
2-16
Adjustments
2-41. I nterpupi l l ary di stance i s the space between the eyes. I nterpupi l l ary
adjustment i s movi ng the monocl es to fi t thi s di stance. The monocl es are hi nged
together for ease of adjustment. The hi nge i s adjusted unti l the fi el d of vi si on
ceases to be two overl appi ng ci rcl es and appears as a si ngl e, sharpl y defi ned
ci rcl e. The setti ng on the hi nge scal e shoul d be recorded for future use.
2-42. Each eye of every i ndi vi dual requi res a di fferent focus setti ng. The
sni per shoul d adjust the focus for each eye as fol l ows:
Wi th both eyes open, l ook at a di stant object, then through the
bi nocul ars at thi s same object.
Pl ace one hand over the objecti ve l ens of the ri ght monocl e and turn
the focusi ng ri ng of the l eft monocl e unti l the object i s sharpl y defi ned.
Uncover the ri ght monocl e and cover the l eft one. Rotate the focusi ng
ri ng of the ri ght monocl e unti l the object i s sharpl y defi ned.
Uncover the l eft monocl e. The object shoul d be cl ear to both eyes.
The sni per shoul d gl ance frequentl y at the di stant object duri ng thi s
procedure to ensure that hi s eyes are not compensati ng for an out-of-focus
condi ti on. He then reads the di opter scal e on each focusi ng ri ng and records
the readi ng for future reference. Correctl y focused bi nocul ars wi l l prevent
eyestrai n when observi ng for extended peri ods.
Eye Fatigue
2-43. Prol onged use of the bi nocul ars or tel escope wi l l cause eye fati gue,
reduci ng the effecti veness of observati on. Peri ods of observati on wi th opti cal
devi ces shoul d be l i mi ted to 30 mi nutes fol l owed by a mi ni mum of 15 mi nutes
rest. A sni per can mi ni mi ze eyestrai n duri ng observati on by gl anci ng away at
green grass or any other subdued col or.
M48/M49 OBSERVATION TELESCOPES AND TRIPOD
2-44. The M48/M49 observati on tel escopes are pri smati c opti cal i nstruments
of 20x magni fi cati on. Both scopes are essenti al l y i denti cal and thi s manual
wi l l refer mai nl y to the M49 from thi s poi nt on. The l enses are coated wi th
magnesi um fl uori de for i mproved l i ght-transmi tti ng capabi l i ty. The sni per
team carri es the M49 when needed for the mi ssi on. The desi gnated observer
uses the tel escope to assi st i n observati on and sel ecti on of targets whi l e the
sni per i s i n the fi re posi ti on. Properl y used, the M49 tel escope can
si gni fi cantl y enhance the success of the teams mi ssi on by al l owi ng i t to
conduct a superi or target anal ysi s, read the current envi ronmental
condi ti ons, and make spot correcti ons by observi ng bul l et trace and i mpact.
The hi gh magni fi cati on of the tel escope makes observati on, target detecti on,
and target i denti fi cati on possi bl e where condi ti ons such as range woul d
otherwi se prevent i denti fi cati on. Camoufl aged targets and those i n deep
shadows are more readi l y detected. Characteri sti cs of the M48/M49 are as
fol l ows:
M48 Observati on Tel escope:
Tri pod: M14.
Carryi ng case (scope): M26.
FM 3-05.222
2-17
Carryi ng case (tri pod): M31.
Magni fi cati on: 19.6x.
Fi el d of vi ew: 37.2 mi l s.
Exi t pupi l : 0.100 i nches.
Effecti ve focal l ength (EFL) of objecti ves: 13.004 i nches.
EFL of eyepi ece: 0.662 i nches.
Length: 13.5 i nches.
M49 Observati on Tel escope:
Tri pod: M15.
Carryi ng case (scope): M27.
Carryi ng case (tri pod): M42.
Magni fi cati on: 20x.
Fi el d of vi ew: 38.37 mi l s.
Exi t pupi l : 0.108 i nches.
EFL of objecti ves: 14.211 i nches.
EFL of eyepi ece: 0.716 i nches.
Length: 14.5 i nches.
Operating the M49
2-45. An eyepi ece cover cap and objecti ve l ens cover protect the opti cs when
the tel escope i s not i n use. Sni pers must take care to prevent cross-threadi ng of
the fi ne threads. They shoul d turn the eyepi ece focusi ng-sl eeve cl ockwi se or
countercl ockwi se unti l the i mage i s cl earl y seen.
Operating the M15 Tripod
2-46. The sni per uses the hei ght adjusti ng col l ar to mai ntai n a desi red
hei ght for the tel escope. The sni per keeps the col l ar i n posi ti on by ti ghteni ng
the cl ampi ng screw. He uses the shaft rotati on l ocki ng thumbscrew to cl amp
the tri pod shaft at any desi red azi muth. The el evati ng thumbscrew enabl es
the sni per to adjust the cradl e of the tri pod and to i ncrease or decrease the
angl e of el evati on of the tel escope. He can then ti ghten the screw nut at the
upper end of each l eg to hol d the tri pod l egs i n an adjusted posi ti on.
Setting Up the M49 and Tripod
2-47. The sni per spreads the tri pod l egs and pl aces i t i n a l evel posi ti on on
the ground so the cradl e i s l evel wi th the target area. He pl aces the tel escope
through the stri p l oop of the tri pod and ti ghtens the strap to keep the
tel escope steady and i n pl ace. I f the tri pod i s not carri ed, he uses an
expedi ent rest for the scope. The sni per shoul d al ways make sure the scope i s
i n a steady posi ti on to maxi mi ze i ts capabi l i ti es and mi ni mi ze eyestrai n.
M144 OBSERVATION TELESCOPE
2-48. The M144 observati on tel escope i s the new U.S. Army observati on
tel escope and has a vari abl e power eyepi ece. The sni per/observer can adjust
FM 3-05.222
2-18
the eyepi ece from 15x to 45x. Thi s range permi ts the observer to adjust for a
wi der fi el d of vi ew or for magni fi cati on for cl earer target i denti fi cati on. The
observer shoul d ensure that whi l e readi ng wi nds or spotti ng trace, the scope
shoul d not be pl aced at a hi gher magni fi cati on than 20x. He can use the
M144 i n the same manner as the M49 scope that i t repl aces. Characteri sti cs
of the M144 are as fol l ows:
Objecti ve l ens: 60 mm.
Magni fi cati on: 15x to 45x.
Fi el d of vi ew: 125 ft at 15x and 62 ft at 45x at 100 meters.
Focus range: 30 ft to i nfi ni ty.
Exi t pupi l : 4 mm at 15x and 1.4 mm at 45x.
Eye rel i ef: 20.5 mm at 15x and 13.5 mm at 45x.
2-49. The Army wi l l soon repl ace the M144 observati on tel escope wi th a
newer scope that i s waterproof and more durabl e. The next scope wi l l be a
vari abl e and possess better opti cs.
NIGHT VISION DEVICES
2-50. Sni pers use NVDs to accompl i sh thei r mi ssi on duri ng l i mi ted vi si bi l i ty
operati ons. They can use NVDs as observati on ai ds, weapons si ghts, or both.
Fi rst- and second-generati on NVDs ampl i fy the ambi ent l i ght to provi de an
i mage of the observed area or target. These NVDs requi re target i l l umi nati on
(wi th the excepti on of the NADS 750); they wi l l not functi on i n total darkness
because they do not project thei r own l i ght source. NVDs work best on bri ght,
moonl i t ni ghts. When there i s no l i ght or the ambi ent l i ght l evel i s l ow (as i n
heavy vegetati on), the use of arti fi ci al or i nfrared (I R) l i ght i mproves the
NVDs performance.
2-51. Fog, smoke, dust, hai l , or rai n l i mi t the range and decrease the
resol uti on of NVDs. NVDs do not al l ow the sni per to see through objects i n
the fi el d of vi ew. The sni per wi l l experi ence the same range restri cti ons when
vi ewi ng dense wood l i nes as he woul d when usi ng other opti cal si ghts.
2-52. I ni ti al l y, a sni per may experi ence eye fati gue when vi ewi ng for
prol onged peri ods. He shoul d l i mi t i ni ti al exposure to 10 mi nutes, fol l owed by
a 15-mi nute rest peri od. After several peri ods of vi ewi ng, he can safel y extend
the observati on ti me l i mi t. To hel p mai ntai n conti nuous observati on and to
reduce eye fati gue, the sni per shoul d often al ternate hi s vi ewi ng eyes.
Night Vision Sight, AN/PVS-2
2-53. The AN/PVS-2 i s a fi rst-generati on NVD (Fi gure 2-13, page 2-19). I t can
resol ve i mages i n l ow, ambi ent l i ght condi ti ons better than second-generati on
NVDs. However, fi rst-generati on NVDs are l arger and heavi er. Characteri sti cs
of an AN/PVS-2 i ncl ude the fol l owi ng:
Length: 18.5 i nches.
Wi dth: 3.34 i nches.
Wei ght: 5 pounds.
FM 3-05.222
2-19
Magni fi cati on: 4x.
Range: vari es dependi ng on ambi ent l i ght condi ti ons.
Fi el d of vi ew: 171 mi l s.
Focus range: 4 meters to i nfi ni ty.
Figure 2-13. Night Vision Sight, AN/PVS-2
Night Vision Sight, AN/PVS-4
2-54. The AN/PVS-4 i s a portabl e, battery-operated, el ectro-opti cal
i nstrument that can be used for vi sual observati on or weapon-mounted for
preci si on fi re at ni ght (Fi gure 2-14, page 2-20). The sni per can detect and
determi ne di stant targets through the uni que capabi l i ty of the si ght to
ampl i fy refl ected ambi ent l i ght (moon, stars, or sky gl ow). The si ght i s
passi ve; thus, i t i s free from enemy detecti on by vi sual or el ectroni c means.
Wi th the correct adapter bracket, the sni per can mount thi s si ght on the M4,
M16, M21, or M24. Characteri sti cs of the AN/PVS-4 are as fol l ows:
Length: 12 i nches.
Wi dth: 3.75 i nches.
Wei ght: 3.5 pounds.
Magni fi cati on: 3.6x.
Range: 400 meters/starlight, 600 meters/moonlight, for a man-sized target.
Fi el d of vi ew: 258 mi l s.
Focus range: 20 feet to i nfi ni ty.
FM 3-05.222
2-20
Figure 2-14. Night Vision Sight, AN/PVS-4
2-55. Second-generati on NVDs such as the AN/PVS-4 possess the advantage
of smal l er si ze and wei ght over fi rst-generati on NVDs. However, they do not
possess the extreme l ow-l i ght capabi l i ty of the fi rst-generati on devi ces. The
AN/PVS-4 al so offers advantages of i nternal adjustments, changeabl e reti cl es,
and protecti on from bl oomi ng, whi ch i s the effect of a si ngl e l i ght source, such
as a fl are or streetl i ght, overwhel mi ng the enti re i mage.
2-56. When mounted on the M4 or M16 ri fl e, the AN/PVS-2/4 i s effecti ve i n
achi evi ng a fi rst-round hi t out to and beyond 300 meters, dependi ng upon the
l i ght and wi nd condi ti ons. The AN/PVS-2/4 i s mounted on the M4 or M16
si nce the NVDs l i mi ted range does not make i ts use practi cal for the 7.62-mm
SWS. Thi s practi ce prevents probl ems that may occur when removi ng and
repl aci ng the NVD. The NVD provi des an effecti ve observati on capabi l i ty
duri ng l i mi ted vi si bi l i ty operati ons. The NVD does not gi ve the wi dth, depth,
or cl ari ty of dayti me opti cs. However, a wel l -trai ned sni per can see enough to
anal yze the tacti cal si tuati on, detect enemy targets, and engage targets
effecti vel y. The sni per team uses the AN/PVS-2/4 to
Enhance ni ght observati on capabi l i ty.
Locate and suppress hosti l e fi re at ni ght.
Deny enemy movement at ni ght.
Demoral i ze the enemy wi th effecti ve fi rst-round hi ts at ni ght.
2-57. When gi ven a choi ce between AN/PVS-2 and AN/PVS-4, sni pers shoul d
wei gh thei r advantages and di sadvantages. The proper trai ni ng and
knowl edge wi th NVDs cannot be overemphasi zed. The resul ts obtai ned wi th
NVDs wi l l be di rectl y attri butabl e to the sni pers ski l l and experi ence i n thei r
FM 3-05.222
2-21
use. General l y the PVS-2 i s better for very l ow-l i ght observati on whi l e the
PVS-4 i s better for bui l t-up areas.
KN200(PVS-9)/KN250(PVS-9A) Image Intensifier (SIMRAD)
2-58. The KN200/250 i mage i ntensi fi er (Fi gure 2-15) i ncreases the use of the
exi sti ng M3A tel escope. I t i s mounted as an add-on uni t and enabl es the
sni per to ai m through the eyepi ece of the day si ght both duri ng day and
ni ghtan advantage not achi eved wi th tradi ti onal types of NVDs. Sudden
i l l umi nati on of the scene does not affect si ghti ng abi l i ti es. Dependi ng on date
of manufacture, these i mage i ntensi fi ers can be ei ther second- or thi rd-
generati on i mage i ntensi fi er tubes. Due to thei r uni que desi gn, the exact
posi ti on of the i mage i ntensi fi er rel ati ve to the day si ght i s not cri ti cal . The
mounti ng procedures take onl y a few seconds; however, boresi ghti ng wi l l be
requi red. The KN200/250 techni cal speci fi cati ons i ncl ude
Wei ght (excl udi ng bracket): 1.4 kg/0.7 kg
Magni fi cati on: 1x, +/ 1 percent.
Fi el d of vi ew: 177/212 mi l s.
Focus range: Fi xed and adjustabl e.
Objecti ve l ens: 100 mm/80 mm.
Mounti ng tol erance: +/ 1 degree.
Battery l i fe: 40 hours at 25 degrees centi grade (C) wi th two AA
al kal i ne cel l s.
Operati ng temperature: 30 to +50 degrees C.
Figure 2-15. KN200(PVS-9)/KN250(PVS-9A) Image Intensifier (SIMRAD)
FM 3-05.222
2-22
NADS 750, 850, 1000 Night Vision Imaging System
2-59. Thi s system (Fi gures 2-16 and 2-17) i s si mi l ar to the PVS-9 SI MRAD
system as far as mounti ng and use. I ts characteri sti cs are as fol l ows:
Si ze (approxi matel y): 4.5 x 7.1; 4.7 x 7.76; 5.8 x 12.1 i nches.
Wei ght: 2.6; 5.0; 6 l bs.
Magni fi cati on: 1x.
Fi el d of vi ew: 238, 210, and 120 mi l s.
I mmersi on: 66 feet/2 hours.
Tube type: Generati on (Gen) I I I .
Battery life: 24 hours at 73 degrees centigrade (C) with two AA alkaline cells.
I l l umi nator: 750 onl y.
Figure 2-16. NADS 750, 850, and 1000
Figure 2-17. NADS 750 With AN/PEQ 2 IR Pointer/Illuminator Mounted on SR-25
FM 3-05.222
2-23
AN/PVS-10 Integrated Sniper Day/Night
2-60. Thi s system (Fi gure 2-18) requi res the sni per to remove hi s standard
day scope and repl ace i t wi th thi s system. The system spl i ts the avai l abl e
l i ght and di rects part of the l i ght to the dayti me scope and part of the l i ght to
the ni ght porti on of the scope. Then the scopes dayti me and ni ghtti me
porti ons do not recei ve the ful l avai l abl e l i ght and thus are not as effi ci ent as
stand-al one systems. Characteri sti cs i ncl ude the fol l owi ng:
Wei ght: 4.9 pounds (l bs)/5.5 l bs.
Magni fi cati on: 8.5/12.2x.
Fi el d of vi ew: 35/26 mi l s.
Tube types: Gen I I , I I I , and I I I +.
Batteri es: 2 AA al kal i ne cel l s.
Figure 2-18. AN/PVS-10 Sniper Day/Night Scope
Model 007 Universal Clip-On Augmenting Weapon Night Sight
2-61. Thi s cl i p-on si ght (Fi gures 2-19 and 2-20, page 2-24) i s si mi l ar to the
SI MRAD and NADS. The si ght cl i ps onto the front of the day scope through a
mounti ng system attached to the front scope-ri ng mount. The major
di fference i s the si ze and wei ght of the system. Characteri sti cs i ncl ude the
fol l owi ng:
Magni fi cati on: 1x.
Wei ght: 1.5 l bs.
Length (approxi matel y): 6 i nches.
Tube type: Gen I I I .
Batteri es: 2 AA al kal i ne cel l s.
Boresi ght devi ati on upon mounti ng: < 1 MOA.
FM 3-05.222
2-24
Figure 2-19. Universal Clip-on With AN/PEQ 2
Figure 2-20. Universal Clip-on Mounted on SR-25
AN/PVS-17 Mini Night Vision Sight
2-62. Thi s system (Fi gure 2-21, page 2-25) i s desi gned for the M4 SOPMOD 2
Project and i s easi l y adapted to the M24 for cl ose-i n urban work. The sni per
must remove the day scope to mount and use thi s si ght. Characteri sti cs i ncl ude
the fol l owi ng:
Magni fi cati on: 2.25x, 4.5x.
Reti cul e: i nternal dot (presentl y).
Tube types: Gen I I I and I V.
Battery: 1 AA al kal i ne cel l .
Mount system: si ngl e-poi nt, qui ck-rel ease; two-poi nt.
FM 3-05.222
2-25
Figure 2-21. AN/PVS-17 Mini Night Vision Sight
AN/PAS-13 Thermal Weapons Sight
2-63. The sniper can use this passive thermal imager (Figure 2-22) to detect
targets in day or night conditions. I t is also effecti ve duri ng periods of fog, rain,
dust, or other conditions that will hinder the light amplification type of NVDs.
The tube type is a Gen I I forward-looking infrared (FLI R) and the reticle pattern
is the same as the M3A day scope when the sniper uses the PAS-13 Heavy.
Figure 2-22. AN/PAS-13 Thermal Sight
FM 3-05.222
2-26
Night Vision Goggles, AN/PVS-5
2-64. The AN/PVS-5 (Fi gure 2-23) i s a l i ghtwei ght, passi ve ni ght vi si on
system that gi ves the sni per team another means of observi ng an area duri ng
l i mi ted vi si bi l i ty. The sni per normal l y carri es the goggl es because the
observer has the M16 mounted wi th the NVD. The desi gn of the goggl es
makes vi ewi ng easi er. However, the same l i mi tati ons that appl y to the ni ght
si ght al so appl y to the goggl es.
Figure 2-23. Night Vision Goggles, AN/PVS-5
2-65. The sni per can use the AN/PVS-7 (Fi gure 2-24, page 2-27) i nstead of
the AN/PVS-5 goggl es. These goggl es provi de better resol uti on and vi ewi ng
abi l i ty than the AN/PVS-5. The AN/PVS-7 seri es come wi th a head-mount
assembl y that al l ows them to be mounted i n front of the face to free both
hands. The sni per can al so use the goggl es wi thout the mount assembl y for
handhel d vi ewi ng. TM 11-5855-262-10-1, Operators Manual for Night Vision
Goggles, provi des addi ti onal techni cal i nformati on.
FM 3-05.222
2-27
Figure 2-24. Night Vision Goggles, AN/PVS-7 Series
AN/PVS-14 Monocular Night Vision Device
2-66. The AN/PVS-14 (Fi gure 2-25) i s the repl acement monocul ar for the
PVS-7. The sni per can use ei ther the 1x as a movement devi ce or the 3x to 5x
wi th an adapter as an observati on devi ce. The sni per can wear thi s NVD wi th
a Kevl ar hel met or a head harness for soft headgear. The NVD can al so be
handhel d. I t has a Gen I I I tube wi th a 40-degree fi el d of vi ew, and uses 2 AA
batteri es for power.
Figure 2-25. AN/PVS-14 Mounted With Helmet Clip
FM 3-05.222
2-28
RANGE FINDERS
2-67. The sni per must use speci al equi pment to reduce the possi bi l i ty of
detecti on. When necessary, he uses the fol l owi ng equi pment to better
determi ne the range to the target and provi de greater accuracy upon
engagement.
Laser Observation Set, AN/GVS-5
2-68. Dependi ng on the mi ssi on, sni pers can use the AN/GVS-5 to determi ne
i ncreased di stances more accuratel y. The AN/GVS-5 i s an i ndi vi dual l y
operated, handhel d, di stance-measuri ng devi ce desi gned for di stances from
200 to 9,990 meters (wi th an error of +/ 10 meters). A sni per can use i t to
measure di stances by fi ri ng an I R beam at a target and measuri ng the ti me
the refl ected beam takes to return to hi m. The AN/GVS-5 then di spl ays the
target di stance, i n meters, i nsi de the vi ewer. The reti cl e pattern i n the vi ewer
i s graduated i n 10-mi l i ncrements and has di spl ay l i ghts to i ndi cate l ow
battery and mul ti pl e target hi ts. I f the beam hi ts more than one target, the
di spl ay gi ves a readi ng of the cl osest target hi t. The beam that i s fi red from
the set poses a safety hazard; therefore, sni pers that pl an to use thi s
equi pment shoul d be thoroughl y trai ned i n i ts safe operati on. The AN/GVS-5
has two fi l ters (red and yel l ow) that shorten the range of the range fi nder.
The yel l ow fi l ter i s consi dered safe when vi ewed through other fi l tered opti cs.
The red i s consi dered eye safe. The sni per shoul d use the yel l ow fi l ter when
operati ng near fri endl y forces.
Mini-Eyesafe Laser Infrared Observation Set, AN/PVS-6
2-69. The AN/PVS-6 (Fi gure 2-26) contai ns a mi ni -eyesafe l aser range
fi nder, nonrechargeabl e BA-6516/U batteri es, l i thi um thi onyl chl ori de,
carryi ng case, shi ppi ng case, tri pod, l ens cl eani ng compound and ti ssues, and
an operators manual . The l aser range fi nder i s the major component of the
AN/PVS-6. I t i s l i ghtwei ght, i ndi vi dual l y operated, and handhel d or tri pod-
mounted. I t can accuratel y determi ne ranges from 50 to 9,995 meters i n 5-
meter i ncrements and di spl ay the range i n the eyepi ece. The ranger fi nder
can al so be mounted wi th and boresi ghted to the AN/TAS-6 or other
comparabl e l ong-range ni ght observati on devi ce.
Figure 2-26. Mini-Eyesafe Laser Infrared Observation Set, AN/PVS-6
FM 3-05.222
2-29
SNIPER TEAM EQUIPMENT
2-70. The sni per team carri es onl y the equi pment and suppl i es needed to
compl ete the mi ssi on wi thi n an esti mated ti me. I n some i nstances, i t may
have to rel y on mi ssi on support si tes or caches to repl eni sh suppl i es and
equi pment for ei ther i ts operati onal rol e or survi val . The fol l owi ng
paragraphs expl ai n the standard, addi ti onal , and speci al equi pment that a
sni per team may requi re.
STANDARD
2-71. The sni per team conducts a mi ssi on, enemy, terrai n and weather,
troops and support avai l abl e, ti me avai l abl e, and ci vi l consi derati ons
(METT-TC) anal ysi s to determi ne the type and quanti ty of equi pment to
carry. Due to uni que mi ssi on requi rements, each team shoul d be equi pped
wi th the fol l owi ng:
M24 SWS (wi th 100 rounds M118 or M852 ammuni ti on).
Sni pers data book, mi ssi on l ogbook, range cards, wi nd tabl es, and
range adjustments for sl ope.
Servi ce ri fl e (w/NVD as appropri ate) (wi th 200 to 210 rounds
ammuni ti on).
M144 or M49 20x spotti ng scope wi th M15 tri pod (or equi val ent 15 to
20x fi xed power scope or 15 to 45x zoomed spotti ng scope).
Bi nocul ars (preferabl y 7 power, 50 mm objecti ve l ens wi th mi l scal e).
M9/servi ce pi stol s (wi th 45 rounds 9-mm bal l ammuni ti on).
NVDs (as needed).
Radi os.
Camoufl aged cl othi ng (constructed by the sni per).
Compass (the M2 i s preferabl e).
Watches (waterproof wi th sweep-second hand and l umi nous di al ).
Maps and sector sketch materi al .
Speci al mi ssi on equi pment.
ADDITIONAL
2-72. There i s no l i mi t to the di versi ty of equi pment that the sni per may use
for normal or speci al mi ssi ons. After careful mi ssi on anal ysi s, the sni per
shoul d sel ect onl y what i s necessary. Too much equi pment can seri ousl y
hamper the sni pers mobi l i ty, endurance, and steal th. The next few
paragraphs expl ai n the recommended addi ti onal equi pment for the team.
Sling
2-73. The sni per, to ai d i n fi ri ng the ri fl e i f a sol i d rest i s not avai l abl e, uses
the standard i ssue web sl i ng or l eather sl i ng. However, the l eather sl i ng
shoul d be the pri mary sl i ng used. A modi fi ed M14 web sl i ng i s superi or to the
l eather sl i ng i n durabi l i ty and easy use. The sni per must modi fy the sl i ng for
use but i t i s an easy modi fi cati on. The M16 web sl i ng i s not sui tabl e for sl i ng-
supported posi ti ons.
FM 3-05.222
2-30
Ghillie Suit
2-74. The ghi l l i e sui t i s a camoufl age uni form that i s covered wi th i rregul ar
stri ps of col ored burl ap or si mi l ar materi al . These stri ps are fol ded i n hal f and
sewn mai nl y to the back, l egs, arms, and shoul ders of the sui t. The stri ps are
then frayed or cut to break up the outl i ne of the sni per and ai d i n bl endi ng
hi m i n wi th the surroundi ng vegetati on or terrai n. A cl ose-net vei l can be
sewn to the back of the neck and shoul ders of the sui t and draped over the
head when needed. The vei l wi l l hel p break the outl i ne of the head, conceal
the l ens of the tel escope, and contai n the ejected brass cases.
NOTE: When depl oyi ng wi th regul ar troops, sni pers shoul d wear the
uni form of those personnel . Weari ng the ghi l l i e sui t i n these si tuati ons wi l l
spotl i ght the sni pers and make them a pri me target to the enemy, especi al l y
enemy sni pers.
Maintenance Equipment
2-75. Duri ng l ong and short mi ssi ons, sni pers never l eave mai ntenance
equi pment i n the rear area. Mai ntenance equi pment can i ncl ude weapon and
opti cal cl eani ng equi pment for short mi ssi ons, or i t can i ncl ude tool s and
repl acement parts for mi ssi ons i n protracted envi ronments such as FI D or
UW operati ons. The amount and type of mai ntenance equi pment for a
mi ssi on wi l l al so be governed by support mai ntenance avai l abl e i n any gi ven
operati ons area.
Calculator
2-76. The sni per team needs a pocket-si zed cal cul ator to compute di stances
when usi ng the mi l -rel ati on formul a. Sol ar-powered cal cul ators usual l y work
fi ne, but under l i mi ted vi si bi l i ty condi ti ons, battery power may be preferred.
I f the sni per must use a battery-powered cal cul ator i n l ow-l i ght condi ti ons, he
shoul d make sure i t has a l i ghted di spl ay. However, he shoul d never rel y
sol el y on a cal cul ator.
Other Items
2-77. Kni ves, bayonets, entrenchi ng tool s, wi re cutters, pruni ng shears,
and rucksacks wi l l be used as the mi ssi on and common sense di ctate. The
sni per team best determi nes whi ch parti cul ar i tems wi l l be carri ed for each
gi ven mi ssi on.
SPECIAL
2-78. Sni pers use speci al equi pment to meet a speci fi c purpose or to
compl ete uni que mi ssi on requi rements. Because sni per mi ssi ons can vary, the
speci al equi pment that sni pers use shoul d have three basi c characteri sti cs:
durabi l i ty, si mpl i ci ty, and accuracy. Speci al equi pment can i ncl ude weapons,
suppressors, or survei l l ance devi ces.
Weapons
2-79. The weapons must be durabl e enough to wi thstand the condi ti ons
encountered i n combat, si mpl e enough to mi ni mi ze fai l ure, yet accurate
enough for sni pi ng. The weapons shoul d be capabl e of groupi ng consi stentl y
FM 3-05.222
2-31
i nto 2 MOAs out to 600 meters (approxi matel y a 33-centi meter group).
Vari ous modi fi cati ons to the weapons themsel ves or sel ecti on of certai n types
of ammuni ti on may i mprove the accuracy of the fol l owi ng speci al weapons:
Bol t-acti on target ri fl es.
Forei gn sni per weapons (procured out of need, compati bi l i ty, or to
provi de a forei gn si gnature).
Large-bore, l ong-range sni per ri fl es.
Tel escope-mounted handguns (for exampl e, XP100 or the Thompson
Center Contender) for easy conceal ment or used as l i ght mul ti mi ssi on
SWSs.
Suppressed weapons.
Suppressors
2-80. The suppressor i s a devi ce that sni pers can use to decei ve observers
(forward of the sni per) as to the exact l ocati on of the weapon and the sni per.
Thi s decepti on di sgui ses the si gnature i n two ways. Fi rst, i t reduces the
muzzl e bl ast to such an extent that i t becomes i naudi bl e a short di stance
from the weapon. Thi s reducti on makes the exact sound l ocati on extremel y
di ffi cul t, i f not i mpossi bl e, to l ocate. Secondl y, i t suppresses the muzzl e fl ash
at ni ght, maki ng vi sual l ocati on equal l y di ffi cul t. Usi ng the suppressor i s
cri ti cal duri ng ni ght operati ons.
2-81. When the sni per fi res a ri fl e or any hi gh-muzzl e vel oci ty weapon, the
resul ti ng noi se i s produced by two separate sources. These sounds are the
muzzl e bl ast and the bal l i sti c crack (soni c boom) produced by the bul l et:
The muzzl e bl ast appears when the bl ast wave (created by the hi gh
vel oci ty gases) escapes i nto the atmosphere behi nd the bul l et. Thi s
noi se i s rel ati vel y easy to l ocate as i t emanates from a si ngl e, fi xed
poi nt.
Bal l i sti c crack resul ts from the supersoni c speed of the bul l et that
compresses the ai r ahead of i t exactl y i n the same fashi on as a
supersoni c jet creates a soni c boom. The onl y di fference i s that the
smal l er bul l et produces a sharp crack rather than a l arge overpressure
wave wi th i ts resul ti ng l ouder shock wave.
Dependi ng on di stance and di recti on from the weapon, the two noi ses may
sound as one or as two di fferent sounds. The further from the weapon the
observer i s, the more separate the sounds; for exampl e, 600 meters1 second
el apses between the two.
2-82. Unl i ke the muzzl e noi se that emanates from a fi xed poi nt, the bal l i sti c
crack radi ates backwards i n a coni cal shape, si mi l ar to a bow wave from a boat,
from a poi nt sl i ghtl y ahead of the movi ng bul l et. Thus, the soni c boom created
by the supersoni c bul l et moves at the vel oci ty of the bul l et away from the
muzzl e noi se and i n the di recti on of the target. Locati on and i denti fi cati on of
the i ni ti al source of the shock wave i s extremel y di ffi cul t because the movi ng
wave stri kes the ear at nearl y 90 degrees to the poi nt of ori gi n. Attenti on i s
thus drawn to the di recti on from whi ch the wave i s comi ng rather than toward
the fi ri ng posi ti on (Fi gure 2-27, page 2-32).
FM 3-05.222
2-32
Figure 2-27. Deception Caused by the Sonic Waves of the Bullet
Breaking the Speed of Sound
Surveillance Devices
2-83. I n some ci rcumstances, a sni per may use speci al survei l l ance devi ces
that wi l l normal l y i nvol ve addi ng wei ght and bul k, whi ch can l i mi t hi s
mobi l i ty. The sni per shoul d consi der usi ng these devi ces mostl y for fi xed
peacekeepi ng or Peri meter Force Protecti on rol es. The fol l owi ng paragraphs
expl ai n a few of these devi ces.
2-84. Single-Lens-Reflector (SLR), Digital, and Video Cameras.
Sni pers spend more ti me observi ng than shooti ng. Col l ecti ng and reporti ng
i ntel l i gence are cri ti cal tasks. SLR and di gi tal cameras are i mportant tool s
that si gni fi cantl y enhance the sni pers abi l i ty to meet i ntel l i gence col l ecti on
requi rements. Vi deo survei l l ance ki ts are bei ng fi el ded to the SF groups to
support operati ons i n urban and rural AOs. These ki ts are i ntegrated wi th
the sni pers communi cati ons package so that sni per teams can provi de
commanders wi th near-real -ti me vi deo and sti l l i mages of EEI . Thi s abi l i ty
to pass i mages si gni fi cantl y enhances a sni per teams uti l i ty and l ethal i ty.
2-85. 100-mm Team Spotting Scope. Thi s devi ce i s a standard team scope
for most marksmanshi p uni ts and shoul d be used for sni per trai ni ng
purposes. The scopes i ncreased fi el d of vi ew wi l l greatl y enhance the teams
observati on capabi l i ty i n stati c posi ti ons. Whi l e the Unertl i s consi dered
standard, the newer 100-mm Optol yth i s cl earer and more compact, as wel l as
durabl e.
2-86. Crew-Served NVDs. Sni pers commonl y use these devi ces i n
conjuncti on wi th crew-served weapons (typi fi ed by the AN/TVS-5) or ni ght
observati on (typi fi ed by the AN/TVS-4). These NVDs offer a si gni fi cant
advantage over thei r smal l er counterparts i n survei l l ance, target acqui si ti on,
and ni ght observati on (STANO). However, thei r wei ght and bul k normal l y
l i mi t thei r use to stati c operati ons.
FM 3-05.222
2-33
2-87. Thermal Imagery. Thi s rel ati vel y new tool i s now avai l abl e to the
sni per team. Equi pment such as the AN/PAS-7 offers a thermal i magery
devi ce i n a portabl e package. Thermal i magery can enhance STANO
operati ons when used wi th more conventi onal equi pment, or i t can provi de
conti nuous survei l l ance when ambi ent l i ght condi ti ons (such as starl i ght and
moonl i ght) do not exi st for l i ght-i ntensi fi cati on devi ces. Thermal devi ces offer
an opti on when there i s an abundance of l i ght that woul d cause whi te out
condi ti ons wi th NVDs.
2-88. Radars and Sensors. Just as the sni pers survei l l ance operati ons
shoul d be i ntegrated i nto the overal l survei l l ance pl an, the sni per shoul d
stri ve to make maxi mum use of any survei l l ance radars and sensors i n the
area of operati on. Sni pers wi l l normal l y not use these i tems themsel ves, but
through coordi nati on wi th usi ng or supporti ng uni ts. The sni pers may be abl e
to use the target data that the radars and sensors can acqui re. However, they
must keep i n mi nd that these devi ces are subject to human error,
i nterpretati on, and enemy countermeasures. Total rel i ance on the
i ntel l i gence data obtai ned by usi ng these devi ces coul d prove detri mental
or mi sl eadi ng.
CARE AND CLEANING OF THE SNIPER WEAPON SYSTEM
2-89. Mai ntenance i s any measure taken to keep the system i n top operati ng
condi ti on. I t i ncl udes i nspecti on, repai r, cl eani ng, and l ubri cati on. I nspecti on
reveal s the need for the other measures. The sni per coupl es hi s cl eani ng wi th
a program of detai l ed i nspecti ons for damage or defects. He uses the fol l owi ng
mai ntenance i tems:
One-pi ece pl asti c-coated cal i ber .30 cl eani ng rod wi th jags (36 i nches).
Fi el d cl eani ng ki t such as Ki t and caboodl e cl eani ng cabl e-wi th Muzzl e
Guard-Fi el d.
Bronze-bri stl ed bore brushes (cal i bers .30 and .45).
Muzzl e gui de.
Cl eani ng patches (smal l and l arge si zes).
Shooters Choi ce Bore Sol vent (SCBS) carbon cl eaner.
Sweets 7.62 Copper Remover (copper cl eaner). (Shooters Choi ce
Copper Remover i s the second choi ce.)
Shooters Choi ce Rust Prevent.
Cl eaner, l ubri cant, preservati ve (CLP). (Note: Do not use l ubri cati ng
oi l , weapons semi fl ui d, Breakfree, or WD40 i n the bore.)
Ri fl e grease.
Bore gui de (l ong acti on).
Q-ti ps or swabs.
Pi pe cl eaners.
Medi ci ne dropper.
Shavi ng brush.
Toothbrush.
FM 3-05.222
2-34
Pi stol cl eani ng rod.
Rags.
Camel -hai r brush.
Lens paper.
Lens cl eani ng fl ui d or denatured al cohol .
NOTE: Never pl ace cl eani ng fl ui d di rectl y on l ens surface. Use l ens paper or
cl eani ng penci l and pl ace cl eani ng fl ui ds on the ti ssue or pen.
WHEN TO CLEAN
2-90. Sni pers must regul arl y i nspect any weapon shel tered i n garri son and
i nfrequentl y used to detect di rt, moi sture, and si gns of corrosi on and must
cl ean i t accordi ngl y. However, a weapon i n use and subject to the el ements
requi res no i nspecti on for cl eanl i ness. The fact that i ts used and exposed i s
suffi ci ent evi dence that i t requi res repeated cl eani ng and l ubri cati on.
Before Firing
2-91. The sni per must al ways cl ean the ri fl e before fi ri ng. Fi ri ng a weapon
wi th a di rty bore or chamber wi l l mul ti pl y and speed up any corrosi ve acti on.
Oi l i n the bore and chamber of even a cl ean ri fl e wi l l cause pressures to vary
and fi rst-round accuracy wi l l suffer. Hydrostati c pressure wi l l al so cause
cases to bl ow or jam i n the chamber. The sni per shoul d cl ean and dry the bore
and chamber before departi ng on a mi ssi on and use extreme care to keep the
ri fl e cl ean and dry en route to the objecti ve area. Before the sni per fi res the
weapon, he shoul d ensure that the bore and chamber are sti l l cl ean, dry, and
no stri ngs are l eft from the cl eani ng patches. Fi ri ng a ri fl e wi th oi l or
moi stur e i n the bor e wi l l cause a puff of smok e that can di scl ose the
fi r i ng posi ti on. I t can al so cause damage to the weapon system.
After Firing
2-92. The sniper must clean the rifle after it has been fired, because firing
produces deposits of primer fouling, powder ashes, carbon, and metal fouling.
Although modern ammunition has a noncorrosive primer that makes cleaning
easier, the primer residue can still cause rust if not removed. Firing leaves two
major types of fouling that requires different solvents to remove: carbon fouling
and copper jacket fouling. The sniper must clean the rifle within a reasonable
i nterval a matter of hoursafter a cessation of firing. Common sense should
preclude the question as to the need for cleaning between rounds. Repeated firing
will not damage the weapon if it is properly cleaned before the first round.
2-93. The M24 SWS wi l l be di sassembl ed onl y when absol utel y necessary,
not for dai l y cl eani ng. An exampl e woul d be to remove an obstructi on that i s
stuck between the stock and the barrel . When di sassembl y i s requi red, the
recommended procedure i s to
Pl ace the weapon so that i t i s poi nti ng i n a safe di recti on.
Ensure the safety i s i n the S posi ti on.
Remove the bol t assembl y.
FM 3-05.222
2-35
Loosen the two mounti ng ri ng nuts (Fi gure 2-28) on the tel escope and
remove the tel escope. (Not necessary when onl y cl eani ng the weapon.)
Remove the two tri gger acti on screws (Fi gure 2-29).
Li ft the stock from the barrel assembl y.
NOTE: Al ways reassembl e the weapon i n the same sequence as the l ast ti me
i t was reassembl ed. Thi s wi l l keep the weapon zeroed to wi thi n .5 MOA. For
further di sassembl y, refer to TM 9-1005-306-10.
Figure 2-28. Location of the Mounting Ring Nuts on the M24 SWS
Figure 2-29. Location of the Trigger Action Screws
HOW TO CLEAN
2-94. The sni per cl eans the ri fl e by l ayi ng i t on a cl eani ng tabl e or other fl at
surface wi th the muzzl e away from the body and the sl i ng down. He makes
sure not to stri ke the muzzl e or tel escopi c si ght on the tabl e. The cl eani ng
cradl e i s i deal for hol di ng the ri fl e, or the sni per can use the bi pod to support
the weapon.
2-95. The sni per shoul d al ways cl ean the bore from the chamber toward the
muzzl e, attempti ng to keep the muzzl e l ower than the chamber to prevent
bore cl eaner from runni ng i nto the recei ver or fi ri ng mechani sm. When i n
FM 3-05.222
2-36
garri son, he shoul d al ways use the chamber gui de to move the one-pi ece steel
rod from chamber to muzzl e. When i n the fi el d, he shoul d use the muzzl e
gui de and i nsert the one-pi ece cabl e down the bore to the chamber and pul l
the patches through to the muzzl e. The sni per must be careful not to get
sol vents between the recei ver and the stock. Sol vents soften the beddi ng
compound. When the ri fl e i s fi red, the acti on shi fts i n the soft beddi ng, whi ch
decreases accuracy and i ncreases wear and tear on the beddi ng materi al .
Sol vents contri bute to the accumul ati on of debri s between the acti on and the
stock i nterferi ng wi th barrel harmoni cs.
NOTE: The sni per shoul d al ways use a bore gui de to keep the cl eani ng rod
centered i n the bore duri ng the cl eani ng process.
2-96. The sni per fi rst pushes several patches saturated wi th SCBS through
the barrel to l oosen the powder foul i ng and begi n the sol vent acti on on the
copper jacket foul i ng. He then saturates the bronze-bri stl ed brush (Never
use stainless steel bore brushesthey will scratch the barrel!) wi th
SCBS (shake bottl e regul arl y to keep the i ngredi ents mi xed) usi ng the
medi ci ne dropper to prevent contami nati on of the SCBS. He runs the bore
brush through the barrel approxi matel y 20 ti mes. He makes sure that the
bore brush passes compl etel y through the barrel before reversi ng i ts
di recti on; otherwi se the bri stl es can break off.
NOTE: The sni per shoul d never sti ck the bore brush i nto the bottl e of SCBS.
Thi s wi l l contami nate the fl ui d.
2-97. Usi ng a pi stol cl eani ng rod and a cal i ber .45 bore brush, the sni per
cl eans the chamber by rotati ng the patch-wrapped brush 8 to 10 ti mes. He
shoul d NOT scrub the brush i n and out of the chamber. He then pushes
several patches saturated wi th SCBS through the bore to push out the
l oosened powder foul i ng.
2-98. The sni per conti nues usi ng the bor e br ush and patches wi th SCBS
unti l the patches come out wi thout tr aces of the bl ack/gr ay powder
foul i ng and become i ncr easi ngl y gr een/bl ue. Thi s pr ocess i ndi cates that
the powder foul i ng has been r emoved and that onl y the copper foul i ng
r emai ns. He then r emoves the SCBS fr om the bar r el wi th sever al cl ean
patches. Thi s i s i mpor tant because the di ffer ent sol vents shoul d never be
mi xed i n the bar r el .
2-99. The sni per pushes several patches saturated wi th Sweets through the
bore, usi ng a scrubbi ng moti on to work the sol vent i nto the copper. He l ets
the sol vent work for 10 to 15 mi nutes. (Never leave Sweets in the barrel
for more than 30 minutes!)
2-100. Whi l e wai ti ng, the sni per scrubs the bol t wi th the toothbrush moi stened
wi th SCBS and wi pes down the remai nder of the weapon wi th a cl oth. He
pushes several patches saturated wi th Sweets through the barrel . The patches
wi l l appear dark bl ue at fi rst, i ndi cati ng the amount of copper foul i ng removed.
He conti nues thi s process unti l the saturated patches come out wi thout a trace
of bl ue/green. I f the patches conti nue to come out dark bl ue after several
treatments wi th Sweets, he shoul d run patches wi th SCBS through the bore
deacti vati ng the sweets and start the cl eani ng process over agai n.
FM 3-05.222
2-37
2-101. When the barrel i s compl etel y cl ean, the sni per then dri es i t wi th
several ti ght fi tti ng patches. He shoul d al so dry out the chamber usi ng the
cal i ber .45 bore brush wi th a patch wrapped around i t. The sni per then runs a
patch saturated wi th Shooters Choi ce Rust Prevent (not CLP) down the
barrel and chamber i f the weapon i s to be stored for any l ength of ti me. He
shoul d al so be sure to remove the preservati ve by runni ng dry patches
through the bore and chamber before fi ri ng.
NOTE: Stai nl ess steel barrel s are not i mmune from corrosi on.
2-102. The sni per pl aces a smal l amount of ri fl e grease on the rear surfaces of
the bol t l ugs. Thi s grease wi l l prevent gal l i ng of the metal surfaces. He shoul d
al so pl ace grease on al l wear poi nts (the shi ny areas) of the bol t. The sni per
then wi pes down the compl ete weapon exteri or (i f i t i s not covered wi th
camoufl age pai nt) wi th a CLP-saturated cl oth to protect i t duri ng storage.
Barrel Break-in Procedure
2-103. To maxi mi ze barrel l i fe and accuracy and to mi ni mi ze the cl eani ng
requi rement, the sni per must use the fol l owi ng barrel break-i n procedure.
Thi s procedure i s best done when the SWS i s new or newl y rebarrel ed. The
break-i n peri od l aps-i n the barrel by pol i shi ng the barrel surface under heat
and pressure. The sni per must fi rst compl etel y cl ean the barrel of al l foul i ng,
both powder and copper. He dri es the barrel and fi res one round. He then
compl etel y cl eans the barrel usi ng Shooters Choi ce Sol vent, fol l owed by
Sweets 7.62 copper remover. Agai n, the barrel must be compl etel y cl eaned
and another round fi red. Thi s procedure of fi ri ng one shot, then cl eani ng,
must be done for a total of 10 rounds. After the 10th round, the sni per tests
the SWS for groups by fi ri ng three-round shot groups, wi th a compl ete barrel
cl eani ng between shot groups for a total of fi ve shot groups (15 rounds total ).
The barrel comes from the factory wi th 60 test-fi re rounds al ready through i t.
The barrel i s now broken-i n and wi l l provi de superi or accuracy and a l onger
usabl e barrel l i fe. I t al so wi l l be easi er to cl ean because the surface i s
smoother. Al though the ful l accuracy potenti al may not be noti ced unti l after
100 rounds or more have been fi red, agai n, the sni per shoul d cl ean the barrel
at l east every 100 rounds to maxi mi ze barrel l i fe.
Storage
2-104. The M24 SWS shoul d be properl y stored to ensure i t i s protected and
mai ntai ned at a speci fi c l evel . The sni per shoul d
Cl ear the SWS, cl ose the bol t, and squeeze the tri gger.
Pl ace al l other i tems i n the system case (M24).
Transport the weapon i n the system case duri ng nontacti cal si tuati ons.
Protect the weapon at al l ti mes duri ng tacti cal movement.
OPTICAL EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE
2-105. Di rt, rough handl i ng, or abuse of opti cal equi pment wi l l resul t i n
i naccuracy and mal functi on. When not i n use duri ng fi el d condi ti ons, the
sni per shoul d case the ri fl e and scope and cap the l enses.
FM 3-05.222
2-38
Cleaning the Lenses
2-106. The sni per shoul d coat the l enses wi th a speci al magnesi um fl uori de
refl ecti on-reduci ng materi al . The coat shoul d be very thi n and the sni per
must take great care to prevent damagi ng the l enses. To remove dust, l i nt, or
other forei gn matter from the l ens, he brushes i t l i ghtl y wi th a cl ean camel -
hai r brush.
2-107. The sni per must al so remove oi l or grease from al l the opti cal
surfaces. He appl i es a drop of l ens cl eani ng fl ui d or denatured al cohol to a
l ens ti ssue and careful l y wi pes off the l ens surface i n ci rcul ar moti ons, from
the center to the outsi de edge. He dri es off the l ens wi th a cl ean l ens ti ssue.
I n the fi el d, i f the proper suppl i es are not avai l abl e, the sni per can breathe
heavi l y on the gl ass and wi pe wi th a soft, cl ean cl oth.
Handling Telescopes
2-108. Tel escopes are del i cate i nstruments and the sni per must handl e
them wi th great care. The fol l owi ng precauti ons wi l l prevent damage. The
sni per shoul d
Check the torque on al l mounti ng screws peri odi cal l y and al ways
before any operati on. He shoul d al so be careful not to change coarse
wi ndage adjustment.
Keep l enses free from oi l and grease and never touch them wi th
the fi ngers. Body grease and perspi rati on can al so i njure them. Keep
l enses capped.
Not force el evati on and wi ndage screws or knobs.
Not al l ow the tel escope to remai n i n di rect sunl i ght and avoi d l etti ng
the suns rays shi ne through the l ens. Lenses magni fy and concentrate
sunl i ght i nto a pi npoi nt of i ntense heat, whi ch i s focused on the
mi l -scal e reti cl e. Thi s exposure may damage the tel escope i nternal l y.
Keep the l enses covered and the enti re tel escope covered when not
fi ri ng or prepari ng to fi re. Never use the ri fl e scope for observati on
purposes onl y.
Avoi d droppi ng the tel escope or stri ki ng i t wi th another object. Thi s
bl ow coul d damage i t severel y and permanentl y, as wel l as change the
zero. When pl aci ng the weapon i n the carryi ng case, he shoul d pl ace
the scope away from the hi nges. Thi s wi l l hel p protect the scope from
vi brati on and droppi ng.
Not al l ow just anyone to handl e the equi pment. The sni per or armorer
shoul d real l y be the onl y personnel that handl e the tel escope or any
other sni per equi pment.
Once the scope i s zeroed, note the reti cl e posi ti on on a bore scope gri d
for future reference.
WEAPON MAINTENANCE AND CARE
2-109. Mai ntenance i s any measure that the sni per takes to keep the SWS i n
top operati ng condi ti on. A sni per may have to operate i n many di fferent
envi ronments and every type requi res hi m to care for hi s weapon i n a speci fi c
manner. The fol l owi ng paragraphs expl ai n each of these envi ronments.
FM 3-05.222
2-39
Cold Climates
2-110. I n temperatures bel ow freezi ng, the sni per must mai ntai n and treat
the ri fl e a speci fi c way. He shoul d
Al ways keep the ri fl e free of moi sture and heavy oi l (both wi l l freeze) to
prevent worki ng parts from freezi ng or operati ng sl uggi shl y.
Store the ri fl e i n a room wi th the temperature equal to the outsi de
temperature.
I f the ri fl e i s taken i nto a warm area, be sure to remove the
condensati on and thoroughl y cl ean and dry the ri fl e before taki ng i t
i nto the col d. Otherwi se, the condensati on wi l l cause i ci ng on exposed
metal parts and opti cs.
Di sassembl e the fi r i ng pi n, cl ean i t thor oughl y wi th a degr easi ng
agent, and then l ubr i cate i t wi th CLP. Ri fl e gr ease wi l l har den and
cause the fi r i ng pi n to fal l sl uggi shl y.
2-111. I n extreme col d, the sni per must take the fol l owi ng care to avoi d
condensati on and the congeal i ng of oi l on the weapon. He shoul d
I f not excessi ve, remove condensati on by pl aci ng the i nstrument i n a
warm pl ace. Not appl y concentrated heat because i t wi l l cause
expansi on and damage.
Bl ot moi sture from the opti cs wi th a l ens ti ssue or a soft, dry cl oth.
I n col d temperatures, ensure the oi l does not thi cken and cause
sl uggi sh operati on or fai l ure. Remember that focusi ng parts are
parti cul arl y sensi ti ve to freezi ng oi l s.
Remember that breathi ng wi l l form frost, so he must cl ean the opti cal
surfaces wi th l ens ti ssue, preferabl y dampened l i ghtl y wi th l ens cl eani ng
fl ui d or denatured al cohol . Never appl y the fl ui d di rectl y to the gl ass.
Saltwater Exposure
2-112. Sal t water and a sal twater atmosphere have extreme and very rapi d
corrosi ve effects on metal . Duri ng thi s type of exposure, the sni per must
ensure the ri fl e i s
Checked frequentl y and cl eaned as often as possi bl e, even i f i t means
onl y l ubri cati ng the weapon.
Al ways wel l l ubri cated, i ncl udi ng the bore, except when actual l y fi ri ng.
Thor oughl y cl eaned by r unni ng a dr y patch thr ough the bor e befor e
fi r i ng, i f possi bl e. To keep the patches dr y, stor e them i n a
water pr oof contai ner .
J ungle Operations (High Humidity)
2-113. There i s no standard jungl e. The tropi cal area may be rai n forests,
secondary jungl es, savannas, or sal twater swamps. When operati ng i n any
jungl e envi ronment, hi gh temperatures, heavy rai nfal l , and oppressi ve
humi di ty become a sni pers concern i n mai ntai ni ng hi s weapon. He shoul d
Use more l ubri cant.
Keep the ri fl e cased when not i n use.
FM 3-05.222
2-40
Protect hi s ri fl e from rai n and moi sture whenever possi bl e.
Keep ammuni ti on cl ean and dry.
Cl ean the ri fl e, bore, and chamber dai l y.
Keep the tel escope caps on when not i n use. I f moi sture or fungus
devel ops i nsi de the tel escope, he shoul d get a repl acement.
Keep cotton bal l s between l ens caps and l ens.
Cl ean and dry the stock dai l y.
Dry the carryi ng case and ri fl e i n the sun whenever possi bl e.
Take an 8- or 9-i nch str i p of cl oth and ti e a knot i n each end to
pr otect the fr ee-fl oati ng bar r el of the weapon. Befor e goi ng on a
mi ssi on, he shoul d sl i de the cl oth between the bar r el and stock al l
the way to the r ecei ver and l eave i t ther e. When i n posi ti on, he
sl i des the cl oth out, taki ng al l r estr i cti ve debr i s and sand wi th i t.
(This procedure should be done in all environments.)
Desert Operations
2-114. Hot, dry cl i mates are usual l y dusty and sandy areas. They are hot
duri ng dayti me hours and cool duri ng the ni ghtti me. Dust and sand wi l l get
i nto the ri fl e and wi l l cause mal functi ons and excessi ve wear on component
worki ng surfaces through abrasi ve acti on duri ng the fi ri ng operati ons. When
operati ng i n thi s type of envi ronment, the sni per shoul d
Keep the weapon compl etel y dry and free of CLP and grease except on
the rear of the bol t l ugs.
Keep the rifle free of sand by using a carrying sleeve or case when not in use.
Protect the weapon by usi ng a wrap. He shoul d sl i de the wrap between
the stock and barrel then cross over on top of the scope, cross under the
weapon (over magazi ne), and secure. He can sti l l pl ace the weapon i nto
i mmedi ate operati on but al l cri ti cal parts are covered. The seal ed hard
case i s preferred i n the desert i f the si tuati on permi ts.
Keep the tel escope protected from the di rect rays of the sun.
Keep ammuni ti on cl ean and protected from the di rect rays of the sun.
Use a toothbrush to remove sand from the bol t and recei ver.
Cl ean the bore and chamber dai l y.
Pr otect the muzzl e and r ecei ver fr om bl owi ng sand by cover i ng
them wi th a cl ean cl oth.
Take an 8- or 9-i nch str i p of cl oth and ti e a knot i n each end to
pr otect the fr ee-fl oati ng bar r el of the weapon. Befor e goi ng on a
mi ssi on, he shoul d sl i de the cl oth between the bar r el and stock al l
the way to the r ecei ver and l eave i t ther e. When i n posi ti on, he
can sl i de the cl oth out, taki ng al l r estr i cti ve debr i s and sand wi th
i t. (This procedure should be done in all environments.)
Hot Climates and Saltwater Exposure
2-115. A hot cl i mate and sal twater atmosphere may cause waves and wi nd.
To keep these envi ronmental hazards from affecti ng the opti cal equi pment, a
sni per must take precauti onary measures. He shoul d
Protect opti cs from hot, humi d cl i mates and sal twater atmosphere.
FM 3-05.222
2-41
NOT expose opti cal equi pment to di rect sunl i ght i n a hot cl i mate.
I n humi di ty and sal t ai r, i nspect and cl ean the opti cal i nstruments
frequentl y to avoi d rust and corrosi on. A l i ght fi l m of oi l i s benefi ci al .
Thoroughl y dry and l i ghtl y oi l opti cal i nstruments because perspi rati on
from the hands i s a contri buti ng factor to rusti ng.
TROUBLESHOOTING THE SNIPER WEAPON SYSTEM
2-116. Tabl e 2-1 l i sts some possi bl e SWS mal functi ons, causes, and
correcti ve acti ons. I f a mal functi on i s not correctabl e, the compl ete system
must be sent to the proper mai ntenance/suppl y channel for return to the
contractor. (TM 9-1005-306-10 provi des further shi pment i nformati on.)
Table 2-1. M24 SWS Malfunctions and Corrective Actions
MALFUNCTIONS CAUSES CORRECTIONS
Safety in S position. Move safety to F position.
Defective ammunition. Eject round.
Firing pin damaged. Change firing pin assembly.
Firing pin binds. Change firing pin assembly.
Firing pin protrudes. Change firing pin assembly.
Firing control out of adjustment. Turn complete system in to the maintenance/
supply channel for return to contractor.
Trigger out of adjustment. Turn in as above.
Trigger binds on trigger guard. Turn in as above.
Trigger does not retract. Turn in as above.



Fail to Fire
Firing pin does not remain in cocked
position with bolt closed.
Turn in as above.
Action screw protrudes into bolt track. Turn in as above.
Bolt Binds Scope base screw protrudes into bolt
track.
Turn in as above.
Bolt override of cartridge. Ensure bolt is pulled fully toward the rear.
Cartridge stems chamber. Pull bolt fully rearward; remove stemmed
cartridge from ejection port area; reposition
cartridge fully in the magazine.
Magazine follower in backward. Remove magazine spring and reinstall with
long-leg follower.



Fail to Feed
Weak or broken magazine spring. Replace spring.
Broken ejector. Turn complete weapon system in to the
maintenance/supply channel for return to
contractor.

Fail to Eject
Fouled ejector plunger. Inspect and clean bolt face; if malfunction
continues, turn in as above.
Fail to Extract
Broken extractor. Turn in as above.
Bolt Release
Fails
Bolt release mechanism fouled. Disassemble rifle. Remove and clean bolt
release mechanism. Lubricate with graphite
lube.

3-1
Chapter 3
Marksmanship Training
The rol e of the SF sni per i s to engage targets wi th preci si on ri fl e fi re. A
sni pers ski l l wi th a ri fl e i s the most vi tal ski l l i n the art of sni pi ng. Thi s
ski l l i s extremel y peri shabl e. Sni per marksmanshi p di ffers from basi c
ri fl e marksmanshi p onl y i n the degree of experti se. The sni per, usi ng
basi c and advanced marksmanshi p as bui l di ng bl ocks, must adapt the
conventi onal methods of fi ri ng to meet hi s uni que requi rements. The
sni per must make fi rst-round hi ts i n a fi el d envi ronment under l ess than
i deal condi ti ons and become an expert i n marksmanshi p. The
fundamental s are devel oped i nto fi xed and correct fi ri ng habi ts that
become i nsti ncti ve. Thi s reacti on i s known as the condi ti oni ng of the
nervous system.
Sni pers shoul d mai ntai n thei r profi ci ency at the fol l owi ng minimum
standards:
90 percent fi rst-round hi ts on stati onary targets at ranges of 600
meters.
50 per cent fi r st-r ound hi ts on stati onar y tar gets at r anges
fr om 600 to 900 meter s.
70 percent fi rst-round hi ts on movi ng targets at ranges to 300
meters.
70 percent fi rst-round hi ts on snap targets at ranges to 400 meters.
FIRING POSITIONS
3-1. A sni pers fi ri ng posi ti on must be sol i d, stabl e, and durabl e. Sol i dnot
i nfl uenced by outsi de factors; stabl efor mi ni mi zed movement of the
weapon; and durabl eabl e to hol d the weapon and posi ti on for an extended
peri od of ti me to accompl i sh the mi ssi on. Unl i ke the target shooter who must
fi re from di fferent posi ti ons of varyi ng stabi l i ty to sati sfy marksmanshi p
rul es, the sni per searches for the most stabl e posi ti on possi bl e. He i s not
tryi ng to see i f he can hi t the target; he must know he can hi t the target. A
mi ss coul d mean a fai l ed mi ssi on or hi s l i fe. A good posi ti on enabl es the
sni per to rel ax and concentrate when prepari ng to fi re.
3-2. Whether prone, kneel i ng, or standi ng, the sni pers posi ti on shoul d be
supported by fi ri ng rests or other means. Properl y empl oyed, the sl i ng, i n al l
but the standi ng posi ti on, provi des a stabl e, supported posi ti on. Fi ri ng from a
rest hel ps to mi ni mi ze human factors such as heartbeat, muscul ar tensi on,
and fati gue. A rest can support both the front and the rear of the ri fl e, as i n
the case of benchrest fi ri ng.
FM 3-05.222
3-2
3-3. Regardl ess of the rest sel ected (tree, di rt, sandbag), the sni per wi l l
prevent any objects from contacti ng the barrel . Duri ng the fi ri ng process, the
barrel vi brates l i ke a tuni ng fork and any di sturbance to thi s harmoni c
moti on wi l l resul t i n an errati c shot. Al so, a hard support wi l l normal l y cause
the ri fl e to change i ts POI . The sni per can hel p el i mi nate thi s probl em by
fi ri ng from objects of si mi l ar hardness. The sni pers hat, gl ove, or sock fi l l ed
wi th sand or di rt can be pl aced between the ri fl e forestock and fi ri ng support
to add consi stency from range to combat. A support or rest greatl y hel ps the
sni per and he must use one whenever possi bl e. Accuracy wi th a ri fl e i s a
product of consi stency, and a rest ai ds consi stency to fi ri ng posi ti ons.
3-4. On the battl efi el d, the sni per must assume a steady fi ri ng posi ti on wi th
maxi mum use of cover and conceal ment. Consi deri ng the vari abl es of terrai n,
vegetati on, and the tacti cal si tuati on, the sni per can use many vari ati ons of
the basi c posi ti ons. When assumi ng a fi ri ng posi ti on, he shoul d adhere to the
fol l owi ng basi c rul es:
Use the prone posi ti on or i ts vari ati ons whenever possi bl e because i t i s
the most stabl e.
Use any sol i d support avai l abl e, when the bi pod i s not avai l abl e or too
short.
Do not touch the support wi th the weapons barrel si nce i t i nterferes
wi th the barrel harmoni cs and creates shot di spl acement.
Use a cushi on between the weapon and the support when not usi ng the
bi pod.
Do not al l ow the si de of the weapon to rest agai nst the support. Thi s
posi ti on wi l l have an effect on the weapon duri ng recoi l and may affect
the POI .
Never cant the weapon whi l e fi ri ng or ai mi ng. The sni per shoul d ti l t
hi s head to the weapon, not the weapon to hi s head.
ELEMENTS OF A GOOD POSITION
3-5. Three el ements of a good posi ti on are bone support, muscul ar
rel axati on, and a natural poi nt of ai m (POA) on the ai mi ng poi nt. The
fol l owi ng paragraphs expl ai n each el ement.
Bone Support
3-6. Proper bone support i s a l earned process; onl y through practi ce (dry fi re,
l i ve fi re) wi l l the sni per gai n profi ci ency i n thi s ski l l . Posi ti ons provi de
foundati ons for the ri fl e, and good foundati ons for the ri fl e are i mportant to
the sni per. When a sni per establ i shes a weak foundati on (posi ti on) for the
ri fl e, the posi ti on wi l l not wi thstand the repeated recoi l of the ri fl e i n a stri ng
of rapi d-fi re shots or del i ver the support necessary for preci se fi ri ng.
Therefore, the sni per wi l l not be abl e to appl y the marksmanshi p
fundamental s properl y.
Muscular Relaxation
3-7. The sni per must l earn to rel ax as much as possi bl e i n the vari ous fi ri ng
posi ti ons. Undue muscl e strai n or tensi on causes trembl i ng, whi ch i s
transmi tted to the ri fl e. However, i n al l posi ti ons, a certai n amount of
FM 3-05.222
3-3
control l ed muscul ar tensi on i s needed. For exampl e, i n a rapi d-fi re posi ti on
there shoul d be pressure on the stock wel d. Onl y through practi ce and
achi evi ng a natural POA wi l l the sni per l earn muscul ar rel axati on.
Natural Point of Aim on the Aiming Point
3-8. I n ai mi ng, the ri fl e becomes an extensi on of the body. Therefore, the
sni per must adjust the body posi ti on unti l the ri fl e poi nts natural l y at the
target. To avoi d usi ng muscl es to ai m at a target, the sni per must shi ft hi s
enti re fi ri ng posi ti on to move hi s natural POA to the desi red POI . The sni per
reaches thi s poi nt by
Assumi ng a good steady posi ti on.
Cl osi ng both eyes and rel axi ng as i f prepari ng to fi re.
Openi ng both eyes to see where the weapon i s poi nti ng.
Leavi ng the nonfi ri ng el bow i n pl ace and shi fti ng the l egs, torso, and
fi ri ng el bow l eft or ri ght.
Repeati ng the process unti l the weapon poi nts natural l y at the desi red
POI .
I f the sni per must push or pul l the weapon onto target, he i s not on hi s
natural POA regardl ess of how smal l a movement i s i nvol ved. Thus, muscl e
rel axati on i s not achi eved, ei ther.
3-9. The sni per can change the el evati on of a natural POA by l eavi ng the
el bows i n pl ace and sl i di ng the body forward or rearward. Thi s movement
causes the muzzl e of the weapon to drop or ri se, respecti vel y. Mi nor
adjustments to the natural POA can be made by the ri ght l eg (ri ght-handed
sni per). The sni per moves the l ower l eg i n the opposi te di recti on that he
wants the si ght to go. Another consi derati on i s to mai ntai n a natural POA
after the weapon has been fi red; therefore, proper bol t operati on becomes
cri ti cal . The sni per must practi ce rel oadi ng whi l e i n the prone posi ti on
wi thout removi ng the butt of the weapon from the fi ri ng shoul der.
COMMON FACTORS TO ALL POSITIONS
3-10. Establ i shi ng a mental checkl i st of steady posi ti on el ements greatl y
enhances the sni pers abi l i ty to achi eve a fi rst-round hi t. Thi s checkl i st
i ncl udes the factors di scussed bel ow that are i nherent to a good fi ri ng
posi ti on.
Nonfiring Hand
3-11. The sni per shoul d use the nonfi ri ng hand as a support. The nonfi ri ng
hand shoul d ei ther support the forestock or the butt of the weapon. The
sni per shoul d never grasp the forestock wi th the nonfi ri ng hand. He shoul d
l et the weapon rest i n the nonfi ri ng hand. I f he grasps the weapon, the recoi l
and muscl e tremor wi l l cause errati c shots. I f the sni per uses the nonfi ri ng
hand to support the butt, he shoul d pl ace the hand next to the chest and rest
the ti p of the butt on i t. He then bal l s hi s hand i nto a fi st to rai se the butt or
l oosen the fi st to l ower the weapons butt. The sni per can al so use a fi ri ng
sock i n pl ace of the fi st. He must take care not to squeeze hi s fi st as the
tri gger i s squeezed. The muzzl e wi l l drop due to the ri si ng of the stock
FM 3-05.222
3-4
causi ng a l ow shot. The sni per must not rest the nonfi ri ng hand or fi ngers on
the shooti ng si de shoul der. Doi ng so wi l l i ncrease the transmi ssi on of the
heartbeat to the weapon and destabi l i ze the posi ti on.
Placement of the Rifle Butt
3-12. The sni per shoul d pl ace the ri fl e butt fi rml y i n the pocket of the
shoul der. Proper pl acement of the butt hel ps to steady the ri fl e and l essen
recoi l . The key to the correct ri fl e-butt method i s consi stent rearward pressure
by the fi ri ng hand and correct pl acement i n the shoul der. A hard hol d versus a
very l i ght hol d may change bul l et i mpact. Agai n, consi stency i s i mportant. A
fi rm hol d i s necessary and usi ng a shooti ng sock may cause a l i ght hol d and
errati c groups.
Firing Hand
3-13. The sni per shoul d grasp the smal l of the stock fi rml y but not ri gi dl y
wi th the fi ri ng hand. He then exerts pressure rearward, mai nl y wi th the
mi ddl e and ri ng fi ngers of the fi ri ng hand. He shoul d not choke the smal l of
the stock. A choki ng-type gri p can cause a twi sti ng acti on duri ng recoi l .
The sni per must not steer the ri fl e wi th the hand or shoul der. He shoul d
make l arge wi ndage adjustments by al teri ng the natural POA, not by l eani ng
or steeri ng the ri fl e, whi ch wi l l cause the ri fl e to steer i n that di recti on duri ng
recoi l . He can wrap hi s thumb over the top of the smal l of the stock and use i t
to grasp, or he can l ay i t al ongsi de or on top of the stock i n a rel axed manner.
He pl aces the i ndex fi nger on the bottom or the tri gger, ensuri ng that i t
does not touch the stock of the weapon and does not di sturb the l ay of
the ri fl e when the tri gger i s pul l ed. The sni per must mai ntai n steady
rearward pressure on the weapon when fi ri ng. Thi s tensi on wi l l hel p steady
the weapon.
Elbows
3-14. Each sni per must fi nd a comfortabl e posi ti on that provi des the
greatest support. How a sni per uses hi s el bows wi l l vary wi th each i ndi vi dual .
Stock Weld
3-15. The stock wel d i s the poi nt of fi rm contact between the sni pers cheek
and the stock. The sni per pl aces hi s cheek on the stock i n a posi ti on that gi ves
proper eye rel i ef. The stock wel d wi l l di ffer from posi ti on to posi ti on.
However, due to the posi ti on of the tel escope on the sni per ri fl e and the
necessi ty to have eye rel i ef, the sni per may not get a normal stock wel d. An
i mportant factor i s to get fi rm contact so that the head and weapon recoi l as
one uni t, thereby faci l i tati ng rapi d recovery. The poi nt on the weapon shoul d
be a natural poi nt where the sni per can mai ntai n eye rel i ef. The sni per
shoul d put hi s cheek i n the same pl ace on the stock wi th each shot. A change
i n stock wel d tends to cause mi sal i gnment wi th the si ghts, thus creati ng
mi spl aced shots. Thi s change i s more of a probl em when usi ng i ron si ghts
than wi th the tel escopi c si ght that i s properl y adjusted.
3-16. Once the sni per obtai ns a spot or stock wel d, he shoul d use thi s same
posi ti oni ng for each shot. He must stay wi th the weapon, not l i ft hi s head
from the stock duri ng recoi l , and mai ntai n the spot or cheek wel d. Duri ng the
i ni ti al peri od of fi ri ng, the cheek may become tender and sore. To prevent thi s
di scomfort and to prevent fl i nchi ng, the sni per shoul d press the face fi rml y
FM 3-05.222
3-5
agai nst the stock. Movi ng the head wi l l onl y gi ve the weapon a chance to
bui l d up speed before i t i mpacts wi th the sni pers cheek.
TYPES OF POSITIONS
3-17. Due to the i mportance of del i veri ng preci si on fi re, the sni per makes
maxi mum use of arti fi ci al support and el i mi nates any vari abl e that may
prevent adheri ng to the basi c rul es. He uses the fol l owi ng types of posi ti ons
when engagi ng the target.
Prone Supported Position
3-18. The sniper first selects his firing position. He picks a position that gives
the best observation, fields of fire, and concealment. He then assumes a
comfortable prone position and prepares a firing platform for his rifle (Figure 3-1).
The sniper should use the bipod whenever possible. The rifle platform should be
as low to the ground as possible. The rifle should rest on the platform in a
balanced position to the rear of the upper sling swivel and forward of the floor
plate. The sniper must take care to ensure that the operating parts, the magazine,
and the barrel do not touch the support, as contact will cause erratic shots. He
then forms a wide, low bipod with his elbows. He grips the small of the stock with
his firing hand, thumb over or alongside the small of the stock and the forefinger
(just in front of the first joint) on the trigger, and pulls the butt of the rifle into his
firing shoulder. He then places the nonfiring hand under the toe of the stock,
palm down, and places the lower sling swivel into the web of the thumb and
forefinger. The sniper can then adjust his fingers and thumb of the nonfiring
hand by curling the fingers and thumb into a fist or relaxing the fingers and
thumb and laying them flat. I n this manner the sniper can raise or lower the
barrel onto the target. He then relaxes into a comfortable supported position,
removing his nonfiring hand from the stock when necessary to manipulate the
scope. He can reload single rounds into the M24 with the firing hand while
supporting the rifle at the toe of the stock with the nonfiring hand. When firing
from this position, the sniper must have a clear field of fire because the shot may
become erratic i f the bullet strikes a leaf, grass, or a twig. For extended periods in
the prone position, the sniper should cock the firing side leg up to relieve pressure
off of the abdomen and reduce heartbeat pulse.
Figure 3-1. Prone Supported Position
FM 3-05.222
3-6
Hawkins Position
3-19. The sni per uses thi s posi ti on when he needs a l ow si l houette. I t i s very
useful when fi ri ng from a smal l depressi on, a sl i ght ri se i n the ground, or
from a roof (Fi gure 3-2). However, the sni per shoul d make sure there are no
obstructi ons above the borel i ne but bel ow l i ne of si ght by removi ng the bol t
and observi ng the target through the bore. Thi s posi ti on i s the steadi est of al l
fi ri ng posi ti ons. Conceal ment i s al so greatl y ai ded by usi ng the Hawki ns
posi ti on because the sni per i s l yi ng fl at on the ground. The sni per wi l l not use
thi s posi ti on on l evel ground because he cannot rai se the muzzl e hi gh enough
to ai m at the target.
3-20. The Hawki ns posi ti on i s si mi l ar to the prone supported posi ti on,
except that the support of the weapon i s provi ded by the nonfi ri ng hand. The
sni per grasps the front sl i ng swi vel wi th the nonfi ri ng hand, formi ng a fi st to
support the front of the weapon. He makes sure the wri st and el bow are
l ocked strai ght, and the recoi l i s taken up enti rel y by the nonfi ri ng arm.
Otherwi se, hi s face wi l l absorb the weapons recoi l . The sni per l i es fl at on the
ground, ei ther di rectl y behi nd the ri fl e (Canadi an versi on) or angl ed off to one
si de (Bri ti sh versi on). I t wi l l appear as though he i s l yi ng on the ri fl e. He can
make mi nor adjustments i n muzzl e el evati on by ti ghteni ng or rel axi ng the
fi st of the nonfi ri ng hand. I f more el evati on i s requi red, he can pl ace a
support under the nonfi ri ng fi st.
3-21. I f usi ng the Canadi an versi on, the sni per pl aces the butt of the ri fl e i n
the shoul der. I f usi ng the Bri ti sh versi on, he tucks the butt under the armpi t.
The sni per shoul d al ways use what i s most comfortabl e.
Figure 3-2. Hawkins Position
Sling-Supported Prone Position
3-22. The sni per faces the target squarel y wi th the sl i ng attached to the
nonfi ri ng arm above the bi cep and l i es down faci ng the target, l egs strai ght to
the rear (Fi gure 3-3, page 3-7). He extends the nonfi ri ng el bow so i t i s i n l i ne
wi th the body and the target and as far under the ri fl e as comfortabl e. Wi th

FM 3-05.222
3-7
the fi ri ng hand, he pushes forward on the butt of the stock and fi ts i t i nto the
pocket of the shoul der. The sni per then pl aces the fi ri ng si de el bow down
wherever i t feel s natural and grasps the gri p of the stock, pul l i ng i t fi rml y
i nto the shoul der. He l ets hi s cheek rest natural l y on the stock where he can
see through the si ghts and acqui re the target. He draws hi s fi ri ng si de knee
up to a comfortabl e posi ti on so as to take the wei ght off of the di aphragm. He
can obtai n a natural POA by adjusti ng the el evati on. Thi s can be done by
sl i di ng hi s body forward or rearward and adjusti ng hi s breathi ng.
Figure 3-3. Sling-Supported Prone Position
Prone Backward Firing Position (Creedmore Firing Position)
3-23. The terrai n or si tuati on di ctates when to use thi s fi ri ng posi ti on. I t
provi des a hi gher angl e of fi re as requi red when fi ri ng uphi l l and other
posi ti ons are i nadequate. Al so, the sni per can use thi s posi ti on when he must
engage a target to hi s rear but cannot turn around because of the enemy
si tuati on or hi de constri cti ons. The sni per assumes a comfortabl e posi ti on on
hi s si de wi th both l egs bent for support and stabi l i ty. He pl aces the butt of the
SWS i nto the pocket of hi s shoul der where i t meets the armpi t. He attempts
to support hi s head for better stabi l i ty and comfort. The smal l exi t pupi l of
the tel escope requi res the sni per to mai ntai n a sol i d hol d and center the exi t
pupi l i n the fi el d of the tel escope to mi ni mi ze the errors i n si ght al i gnment.
Thi s i s an extreme fi ri ng posi ti on and not recommended under most
ci rcumstances.
FM 3-05.222
3-8
Sitting Supported Position
3-24. To assume thi s posi ti on, the sni per prepares a fi ri ng pl atform for the
ri fl e or rests the ri fl e on the rai sed porti on of the posi ti on. I f a pl atform i s not
avai l abl e, then the sni per can use the observer to i mprovi se thi s posi ti on
(Fi gure 3-4). The sni per must ensure the barrel or operati ng parts do not touch
the support. The sni per assumes a comfortabl e si tti ng posi ti on to the rear of the
ri fl e, grasps the smal l of the stock wi th the fi ri ng hand, and pl aces the butt of
the ri fl e i nto the shoul der pocket. He pl aces the nonfi ri ng hand on the smal l of
the stock to assi st i n getti ng a stock wel d and the proper eye rel i ef.
Figure 3-4. Sitting Supported Position
3-25. The sni per rests the el bows on the i nsi de of the knees i n a manner
si mi l ar to the standard crossed-l eg posi ti on. He changes posi ti on by varyi ng
the posi ti on of the el bows on the i nsi de of the knees or by varyi ng the body
posi ti on. Thi s posi ti on may be ti ri ng; therefore, the fi ri ng mi ssi on shoul d be
al ternated frequentl y between the sni per team members.
Sling-Supported Sitting Position
3-26. The sni per faces hi s body 30 degrees away from the target i n the
di recti on of the fi ri ng hand. He si ts down and crosses hi s ankl es so that the
nonfi ri ng si de ankl e i s across the fi ri ng si de ankl e (Fi gure 3-5, page 3-9). He
then adjusts the sl i ng for the si tti ng posi ti on. The sni per uses hi s fi ri ng hand
pal m to pl ace the butt of the stock i nto the shoul der whi l e al l owi ng the weapon
to rest on the nonfi ri ng hand. He uses hi s fi ri ng hand to pul l the stock fi rml y
i nto hi s shoul der. He rests hi s el bows i nsi de the knees and l eans hi s body
forward. The sni per must not have di rect contact between the poi nts of the
el bows and the knees. Avoi di ng di rect contact ensures that the sni per uses bone
support. He hol ds the stock hi gh enough i n the shoul der to requi re onl y a sl i ght
ti l t of the head to acqui re the si ghts, wi thout canti ng the weapon. He l owers
FM 3-05.222
3-9
and rai ses the muzzl e by movi ng the nonfi ri ng hand forward and backward on
the forestock. The sni per hol ds hi s breath when the si ghts are on the target.
3-27. The sni per assumes the crossed-l eg posi ti on i n the same way as the
si tti ng posi ti on, but he faces 45 to 60 degrees away from the target and
crosses hi s l egs i nstead of hi s ankl es.
Figure 3-5. Sling-Supported Sitting Position
Supported Kneeling Position
3-28. The sniper uses the supported kneeling position when it is necessary to
quickly assume a position and there is insufficient time to assume the prone position
(Figure 3-6). This position can also be used on level ground or on ground that
slopes upward where fields of fire or observation preclude using the prone position.
Figure 3-6. Supported Kneeling Position
FM 3-05.222
3-10
3-29. The sni per assumes thi s posi ti on i n much the same way as the
standard kneel i ng posi ti on, except he uses a tree or some other i mmovabl e
object for support, cover, or conceal ment. He gai ns support by contact wi th
the cal f and knee of the l eadi ng l eg, the upper forearm, or the shoul der. He
mi ght al so rest the ri fl e on the hand l i ghtl y agai nst the support. As wi th
other supported posi ti ons, the sni per ensures that the operati ng parts and
the barrel do not touch the support. Si nce the sni pers area of support i s
greatl y reduced, he must maxi mi ze bone support.
3-30. Thi s posi ti on di ffers between ri ght- and l eft-handed sni pers. Ri ght-
handed sni pers use the fol l owi ng techni ques and l eft-handed sni pers do the
opposi te. The sni per faces 45 degrees to the ri ght of the di recti on of the
target. He kneel s down and pl aces the ri ght knee on the ground, keepi ng the
l eft l eg as verti cal as possi bl e. He si ts back on the ri ght heel , pl aci ng i t as
di rectl y under the spi nal col umn as possi bl e. A vari ati on i s to turn the toe
i nward and si t squarel y on the ri ght foot. The sni per grasps the smal l of the
stock wi th the fi ri ng hand, and cradl es the fore-end of the weapon i n a crook
formed wi th the l eft arm. He pl aces the butt of the weapon i n the pocket of
the shoul der, then pl aces the meaty undersi de of the l eft el bow on top of the
l eft knee. Reachi ng under the weapon wi th the l eft hand, the sni per l i ghtl y
grasps the fi ri ng arm. He rel axes forward and i nto the support, usi ng the l eft
shoul der as a contact poi nt. Thi s movement reduces transmi ssi on of the pul se
beat i nto the si ght pi cture. The sni per can use a tree, bui l di ng, or vehi cl e for
support.
Sling-Supported Kneeling Position
3-31. I f vegetati on hei ght presents a probl em, the sni per can rai se hi s
kneel i ng posi ti on by usi ng the ri fl e sl i ng (Fi gure 3-7, page 3-11). He takes thi s
posi ti on by performi ng the fi rst three steps for a kneel i ng supported posi ti on.
Wi th the l eather sl i ng mounted to the weapon, the sni per turns the sl i ng one-
quarter turn to the l eft. The l ower part of the sl i ng then forms a l oop. He
pl aces hi s l eft arm through the l oop, pul l s the sl i ng up the arm, and pl aces i t
on the upper arm above the bi cep. He can ti ghten the sl i ng on the arm by
mani pul ati ng the upper and l ower parts of the sl i ng, i f ti me permi ts. The
sni per then rotates hi s arm i n a cl ockwi se moti on around the sl i ng and under
the ri fl e wi th the sl i ng secured to the upper arm. He pl aces the fore-end of the
stock i n the V formed by the thumb and forefi nger of the l eft hand. He can
rel ax the l eft arm and l et the sl i ng support the wei ght of the weapon. Then he
pl aces the fl at part of the ri fl e behi nd the poi nt of the l eft el bow on top of the
l eft knee. To add stabi l i ty, the sni per can use hi s l eft hand to pul l back al ong
the fore-end of the ri fl e toward the tri gger guard.
FM 3-05.222
3-11
Figure 3-7. Sling-Supported Kneeling Position
Squatting Position
3-32. The sni per uses the squatti ng posi ti on duri ng hasty engagements or
when other stabl e posi ti ons woul d be unacceptabl e due to i nadequate hei ght
or conceal ment. He assumes thi s posi ti on by faci ng 45 degrees away from hi s
di recti on of fi re, putti ng hi s feet shoul der-wi dth apart, and si mpl y squatti ng.
He can ei ther rest hi s el bows on hi s knees or wrap them over hi s body. The
sni per prefers thi s posi ti on when maki ng engagements from rotary-wi nged
ai rcraft as i t reduces the amount of body contact wi th the i nherent vi brati ons
of the ai rcraft. Body confi gurati on wi l l determi ne the most comfortabl e and
stabl e techni que to use. The sni per can al so use sol i d supports to l ean up
agai nst or to l ean back i nto.
Supported Standing Position
3-33. The sni per uses thi s posi ti on under the same ci rcumstances as the
supported kneel i ng posi ti on, where ti me, fi el d of fi re, or observati on precl ude
the use of more stabl e posi ti ons. I t i s the l east steady of the supported
posi ti ons; the sni per shoul d use i t onl y as a l ast resort.
3-34. The sni per assumes thi s posi ti on i n much the same manner as the
standard standi ng posi ti on, except he uses a tree or some other i mmovabl e
object for support. He gai ns support by contact wi th the l eg, body, or arm. He
mi ght al so rest the ri fl e l i ghtl y agai nst the support. The sni per ensures the
support makes no contact wi th operati ng parts or the barrel of the ri fl e.
FM 3-05.222
3-12
3-35. Thi s posi ti on al so al l ows the sni per to use hori zontal support, such as a
wal l or l edge. The sni per l ocates a sol i d object for support. He avoi ds branches
because they tend to sway when the wi nd i s present. He pl aces the fore-end of
the weapon on top of the support and the butt of the weapon i nto the pocket
of the shoul der. The sni per forms a V wi th the thumb and forefi nger of the
nonfi ri ng hand. He pl aces the nonfi ri ng hand, pal m faci ng away, agai nst the
support wi th the fore-end of the weapon resti ng i n the V of the hand. Thi s
hol d steadi es the weapon and al l ows qui ck recovery from recoi l .
3-36. The sni per can al so use a verti cal support such as a tree, tel ephone
pol e, corner of bui l di ng, or vehi cl e (Fi gure 3-8). He l ocates the stabl e support,
faces 45 degrees to the ri ght of target, and pl aces the pal m of the nonfi ri ng
hand at arms l ength agai nst the support. He then l ocks the arm strai ght, l ets
the l ead l eg buckl e, and pl aces body wei ght agai nst the nonfi ri ng hand. He
shoul d keep the trai l l eg strai ght. The sni per pl aces the fore-end of the
weapon i n the V formed by extendi ng the thumb of the nonfi ri ng hand. He
shoul d exert more pressure to the rear wi th the fi ri ng hand.
Figure 3-8. Vertically Supported Standing Position
Standing Unsupported or Off-Hand Position
3-37. Thi s posi ti on i s the l east desi rabl e because i t i s l east stabl e and most
exposed of al l the posi ti ons (Fi gure 3-9, page 3-13). The si tuati on coul d
di ctate that the sni per use thi s posi ti on. The sni per faces perpendi cul ar to the
target, faci ng i n the di recti on of hi s fi ri ng hand, wi th hi s l egs spread about
shoul der-wi dth apart. He grasps the pi stol gri p of the stock wi th hi s fi ri ng
hand and supports the fore-end wi th the nonfi ri ng hand. He rai ses the stock
of the weapon so the toe of the stock fi ts i nto the pocket of the shoul der and
the weapon i s l yi ng on i ts si de away from the body. The sni per rotates the
weapon unti l i t i s verti cal and the fi ri ng el bow i s paral l el wi th the ground. He
pul l s the nonfi ri ng el bow i nto the si de to support the weapon wi th the arm
and ri b cage. He then ti l ts hi s head sl i ghtl y toward the weapon to obtai n a
natural spot or cheek wel d and to al i gn hi s eye wi th the si ghts. I f hi s eye i s
not al i gned wi th the si ghts, he adjusts hi s head posi ti on unti l the front si ght
FM 3-05.222
3-13
and the target can be seen through the rear si ght. Once i n posi ti on, the sni per
l ooks through hi s si ghts and moves hi s enti re body to get the si ghts on target.
He does not muscl e the weapon onto the target. The sni per rests the ri fl e on a
support to rel ax hi s arm muscl es after fi ri ng the shot and fol l owi ng through.
Figure 3-9. Standing Unsupported or Off-Hand Position
Other Supported Positions
3-38. Duri ng fundamental trai ni ng, posi ti ons are taught i n a step-by-step
process. The sni per fol l ows a seri es of preci se movements unti l he obtai ns the
correct posi ti on. Repeti ti ve trai ni ng ensures that he knows and correctl y
appl i es al l the factors that can assi st hi m i n hol di ng the ri fl e steady. As the
sni per perfects the standard and supported posi ti ons, he can then use hi s
i ngenui ty to devi se other supported posi ti ons. Through practi ce he wi l l
gradual l y become accustomed to the feel of these posi ti ons and wi l l know
i nsti ncti vel y when hi s posi ti on i s correct. Thi s response i s parti cul arl y
FM 3-05.222
3-14
i mportant i n combat because the sni per must be abl e to assume posi ti ons
rapi dl y and stabi l i ze the posi ti on by adapti ng i t to any avai l abl e arti fi ci al
support. Fi gure 3-10 l i sts some si gni fi cant nonstandard supported posi ti ons.
The sni per must remember to adapt the posi ti on to hi s body so the posi ti on i s
sol i d, stabl e, and durabl e.
Foxhole-Supported Position
Used primarily in prepared defense areas where there is time for
preparation. In this position, the sling, sandbags, or other
material may be used to provide a stable firing platform.
Tree-Supported Position
Used when observation and firing into an area cannot be
accomplished from the ground. When using this position, it is
important to select a tree that is inconspicuous, is strong enough
to support the snipers weight, and affords concealment.
Remember: Avenues of escape are limited when in a tree.
Bench Rest Position
Used when firing from a building, a cave, or a deeply shaded
area. Sniper can use a built-up platform or table with a sitting aid
and a rifle platform for stability. This position is very stable and
will not tire the sniper. In this position, the sniper should stay
deep in the shadows to prevent detection by the enemy.
Figure 3-10. Nonstandard Supported Positions
FIELD-EXPEDIENT WEAPON SUPPORT
3-39. Support of the weapon i s cri ti cal to the sni pers success i n engagi ng
targets. Unl i ke a wel l -equi pped fi ri ng range wi th sandbags for weapon
support, the sni per wi l l encounter si tuati ons where weapon support rel i es on
common sense and i magi nati on. The sni per shoul d practi ce usi ng the fol l owi ng
supports at every opportuni ty and sel ect the one that best sui ts hi s needs. He
must trai n as i f i n combat to avoi d confusi on and sel f-doubt. Whi l e he shoul d
use the Harri s Bi pod when possi bl e, the fol l owi ng i tems are commonl y used
as fi el d-expedi ent weapon supports:
Sand Sock
3-40. The sni per may use the sand sock when del i veri ng preci si on fi re at
l ong ranges. He uses a standard-i ssue, wool sock fi l l ed one-hal f to three-
quarters ful l of sand or ri ce and knotted off. He pl aces i t under the rear-sl i ng
swi vel when i n the prone supported posi ti on for added stabi l i ty. By l i mi ti ng
mi nor movements and reduci ng pul se beat, the sni per can concentrate on
tri gger control and ai mi ng. He uses the nonfi ri ng hand to gri p the sand sock,
rather than the rear sl i ng swi vel . The sni per makes mi nor changes i n muzzl e
el evati on by squeezi ng or rel axi ng hi s gri p on the sock. He al so uses the sand
sock as paddi ng between the weapon and a ri gi d support. The sni per must
remember not to use a l oose hol d whi l e fi ri ng the weapon.
NOTE: When usi ng the sand sock, the sni per must be sure to gri p the
weapon fi rml y and hol d i t agai nst hi s shoul der.
FM 3-05.222
3-15
Rucksack
3-41. I f the sni per i s i n terrai n bare of any natural support, he may use hi s
rucksack. He must consi der the hei ght and presence of ri gi d objects wi thi n
the rucksack. The rucksack must conform to weapon contours to add stabi l i ty.
Buttpack
3-42. The sni per can use a buttpack i f the rucksack woul d gi ve too hi gh of a
profi l e. He must al so remember to consi der the contents of the buttpack i f he
deci des to change.
Sandbag
3-43. A sandbag i s the si mpl est fi el d-expedi ent support. The sni per can fi l l
and empty a sandbag on si te.
Tripod
3-44. The sni per can bui l d a fi el d-expedi ent tri pod by tyi ng together three
12-i nch-l ong sti cks wi th 550 cord or the equi val ent (Fi gure 3-11, page 3-15).
When tyi ng the sti cks, he wraps the cord at the center poi nt and l eaves
enough sl ack to fol d the l egs out i nto a tri angul ar base. Then he pl aces the
fore-end of the weapon between the three upri ghts. The juncture shoul d be
padded wi th a sand sock. A smal l camera tabl e tri pod padded wi th a sock ful l
of sand or di rt can al so be used.
Cross Sticks
3-45. The sni per can bui l d a fi el d-expedi ent bi pod by tyi ng together two
12-i nch-l ong sti cks, thi ck enough to support the wei ght of the weapon (Fi gure
3-11, page 3-16). Usi ng 550 cord or the equi val ent, he ti es the sti cks at the
center poi nt, l eavi ng enough sl ack to fol d them out i n a sci ssorl i ke manner.
He then pl aces the weapon between the two upri ghts. The bi pod i s not as
stabl e as other fi el d-expedi ent i tems, and i t shoul d be used onl y i n the
absence of other techni ques. The sni per shoul d use a sl i ng and gri p the
crossed sti ck juncture for stabi l i ty.
Forked Stake
3-46. The tacti cal si tuati on determi nes the use of the forked stake (Fi gure
3-11, page 3-16). Unl ess the sni per can dri ve a forked stake i nto the ground,
thi s i s the l east desi rabl e of the techni ques; that i s, he must use hi s nonfi ri ng
hand to hol d the stake i n an upri ght posi ti on. Del i veri ng l ong-range preci si on
fi re i s a near-i mpossi bi l i ty due to the unsteadi ness of the posi ti on.
SLINGS
3-47. The M1907 Nati onal Match l eather sl i ng i s superi or to the standard
M16 web sl i ng when used as a fi ri ng ai d. Sni pers who use a sl i ng when fi ri ng
shoul d be aware of the possi bi l i ty of a zero change. I f the weapon i s zeroed
usi ng a sl i ng support, the POI may change when or i f the sl i ng i s removed.
Thi s change i s most noti ceabl e i n ri fl es wi th stocks that contact the barrel ,
such as the M21. The sl i ng must be adjusted for each posi ti on. Each posi ti on
wi l l have a di fferent poi nt i n whi ch the sl i ng i s at the correct ti ghtness. The
sni per counts the number of hol es i n the sl i ng and wri tes these down so that
FM 3-05.222
3-16
he can properl y adjust the sl i ng from posi ti on to posi ti on. An acceptabl e
al ternati ve i s the cotton web M14 sl i ng wi th a metal sl i de adjuster. The
sni per must modi fy the sl i ng for use.
Figure 3-11. Tripod, Cross Sticks, and Forked Field-Expedient Weapon Support
FM 3-05.222
3-17
TEAM FIRING TECHNIQUES
3-48. A successful sni per team consi sts of two i ntel l i gent and hi ghl y
versati l e membersthe sni per and the observer. Each must be abl e to move
and survi ve i n a combat envi ronment. The sni pers speci al mi ssi on i s to
del i ver preci si on fi re on targets that may not easi l y be engaged by
conventi onal -fi ghti ng forces. The team must al so
Cal cul ate the range to the target.
Determi ne the effects of the envi ronment on bal l i sti cs.
Make necessary si ght changes.
Observe bul l et i mpact.
Qui ckl y cri ti que performance before any subsequent shots.
3-49. These tasks cal l for a coordi nated, effi ci ent team effort. Mi ssi on
success occurs onl y i f the sni per and observer thoroughl y understand and
react i n a ti mel y manner to one another.
SNIPER AND OBSERVER RESPONSIBILITIES
3-50. Each member of the sni per team has speci fi c responsi bi l i ti es when
engaged i n el i mi nati ng a target. Onl y through repeated practi ce can the team
begi n to functi on properl y. Al though responsi bi l i ti es of team members di ffer,
they are equal l y i mportant.
3-51. The sni per
Bui l ds a steady, comfortabl e posi ti on.
Locates and i denti fi es the target desi gnated by the observer.
Reads the mi l hei ght of the target and gi ves thi s to the observer.
Makes the el evati on adjustments gi ven by the observer to engage the
target.
Noti fi es observer of readi ness to fi re.
Takes ai m at the desi gnated target as di rected by the observer.
Control s breathi ng at natural respi ratory pause.
Executes proper tri gger control .
Fol l ows through each acti on.
Makes an accurate shot cal l i mmedi atel y after the shot.
Prepares to fi re subsequent shots, i f necessary.
3-52. The observer
Properl y posi ti ons hi msel f so as not to di sturb the sni pers posi ti on.
Sel ects an appropri ate target. The target cl osest to the team presents
the greatest threat. I f mul ti pl e targets are vi si bl e at vari ous ranges, the
engagement of cl oser targets al l ows the sni per to confi rm hi s zero and
ensure hi s equi pment i s functi oni ng properl y. The observer must
consi der exi sti ng weather condi ti ons before tryi ng a shot at a di stant
target (effects of weather i ncrease wi th range).
FM 3-05.222
3-18
Uses the mi l readi ng from the sni per to compute the range to the target
and confi rms by eye or other means. The observer communi cates the
el evati on adjustment requi red to the sni per.
Cal cul ates the effect of exi sti ng weather condi ti ons on bal l i sti cs.
Weather condi ti ons i ncl ude detecti ng el ements of weather (wi nd, l i ght,
temperature, and humi di ty) that wi l l affect bul l et i mpact and
cal cul ati ng the mi l hol d-off to ensure a fi rst-round hi t.
Reports el evati on and paral l ax adjustment to the sni per and when the
sni per i s ready, gi ves the wi ndage i n a mi l hol d-off.
Uses the spotti ng tel escope for shot observati on. He ai ms and adjusts
the tel escope so that both the downrange i ndi cators and the target
are vi si bl e.
Cri ti ques performance. He recei ves the sni pers shot cal l and compares
si ght adjustment data wi th bul l et i mpact i f the target i s hi t. He gi ves
the sni per an adjustment and sel ects a new target i f changes are
needed. I f the target i s mi ssed, he fol l ows the above procedure after
recei vi ng the sni pers shot cal l so that an i mmedi ate mi l hol d and
fol l ow-up shot wi l l ensure a target hi t.
SNIPER AND OBSERVER POSITIONING
3-53. The sni per shoul d fi nd a pl ace on the ground that al l ows hi m to bui l d a
steady, comfortabl e posi ti on wi th the best cover, conceal ment, and vi si bi l i ty of
the target area. Once establ i shed, the observer shoul d posi ti on hi msel f out of
the sni pers fi el d of vi ew on hi s fi ri ng si de.
3-54. The cl oser the observer gets hi s spotti ng tel escope to the sni pers gun
target l i ne, the easi er i t i s to fol l ow the trace (path) of the bul l et and observe
i mpact. A 4 to 5 ocl ock posi ti on (7 to 8 ocl ock for l eft-handed sni pers) off the
fi ri ng shoul der and cl ose to (but not touchi ng) the sni per i s best (Fi gure 3-12).
Figure 3-12. Positioning of the Observers Spotting Telescope to the Sniper
FM 3-05.222
3-19
SIGHTING AND AIMING
3-55. The sni pers use of i ron si ghts serves mai nl y as a back-up system to hi s
opti cal si ght. However, i ron si ghts are an excel l ent means of trai ni ng for the
sni per. The sni per i s expected to be profi ci ent i n the use of i ron si ghts before
he obtai ns formal sni per trai ni ng and he must remai n profi ci ent. By usi ng
i ron si ghts duri ng trai ni ng, the sni per i s forced to mai ntai n hi s concentrati on
on the fundamental s of fi ri ng. For a revi ew of basi c ri fl e marksmanshi p, see
FM 23-9, M16A1 and M16A2 Rifle Marksmanship. Whi l e thi s manual i s good
for a basi c revi ew, some modi fi cati ons i n fi ri ng techni ques must be made.
3-56. The sni per begi ns the ai mi ng process by assumi ng a fi ri ng posi ti on and
al i gni ng the ri fl e wi th the target. He shoul d poi nt the ri fl e natural l y at the
desi red POA. I f hi s muscl es are used to adjust the weapon onto the POA, they
wi l l automati cal l y rel ax as the ri fl e fi res, and the ri fl e wi l l begi n to move
toward i ts natural POA. Because thi s movement begi ns just before the
weapon di scharges, the ri fl e i s movi ng as the bul l et l eaves the muzzl e. Thi s
movement causes di spl aced shots wi th no apparent cause (recoi l di sgui ses the
movement). By adjusti ng the weapon and body as a si ngl e uni t, rechecki ng,
and readjusti ng as needed, the sni per achi eves a true natural POA. Once the
posi ti on i s establ i shed, the sni per then ai ms the weapon at the exact poi nt on
the target. Ai mi ng i nvol ves three factors: eye rel i ef, si ght al i gnment, and
si ght pi cture.
EYE RELIEF
3-57. Eye rel i ef i s the di stance from the sni pers fi ri ng eye to the rear si ght
or the rear of the tel escope tube (Fi gure 3-13, page 3-20). When usi ng i ron
si ghts, the sni per ensures that thi s di stance remai ns constant from shot to
shot to precl ude changi ng what he vi ews through the rear si ght. However,
rel i ef wi l l vary from fi ri ng posi ti on to fi ri ng posi ti on and from sni per to sni per
accordi ng to
The sni pers neck l ength.
Hi s angl e of head approach to the stock.
The depth of hi s shoul der pocket.
The posi ti on of the butt of the stock i n the shoul der.
Hi s fi ri ng posi ti on.
3-58. Thi s di stance i s more ri gi dl y control l ed wi th tel escopi c si ghts than
wi th i ron si ghts. The sni per must take care to prevent eye i njury caused by
the rear si ght or the tel escope tube stri ki ng hi s eyebrow duri ng recoi l .
Regardl ess of the si ghti ng system he uses, he must pl ace hi s head as upri ght
as possi bl e wi th hi s fi ri ng eye l ocated di rectl y behi nd the rear porti on of the
si ghti ng system. Thi s head pl acement al so al l ows the muscl es surroundi ng
hi s eye to rel ax. I ncorrect head pl acement causes the sni per to l ook out of the
top or corner of hi s eye, whi ch can resul t i n bl urred vi si on or eyestrai n. The
sni per can avoi d eyestrai n by not stari ng through the i ron or tel escopi c si ghts
for extended peri ods. The best ai d to consi stent eye rel i ef i s mai ntai ni ng the
same stock wel d from shot to shot; because as the eye rel i ef changes, a change
i n si ght al i gnment wi l l occur. Mai ntai ni ng eye rel i ef i s a functi on of the
posi ti on and stock wel d use. Normal eye rel i ef from the rear si ght or scope on
FM 3-05.222
3-20
the M24 i s 2 to 3 i nches. Once the sni per i s ready to fi re, i t i s i mperati ve that
he concentrates on the front si ght or reti cl e and not the target.
Figure 3-13. Eye Relief
SIGHT ALIGNMENT
3-59. Si ght al i gnment i s the most cri ti cal factor i n ai mi ng. An error i n si ght
al i gnment i ncreases proporti onatel y wi th range and wi l l resul t i n i ncreased
mi sses. The M24 has a hooded front si ght that si mpl i fi es si ght al i gnment. The
front si ght hood i s centered i n the rear si ght aperture.
3-60. Wi th i ron si ghts, si ght al i gnment i s the rel ati onshi p between the front
and rear si ghts as seen by the sni per (Fi gure 3-14, page 3-21). The sni per
centers the front si ght post hori zontal l y and verti cal l y wi thi n the rear
aperture. (Centeri ng the two ci rcl es i s the easi est way for the eye to al i gn the
front and rear si ghts. Thi s method al l ows the sni per to be consi stent i n bl ade
l ocati on wi thi n the rear si ght.) Wi th tel escopi c si ghts, si ght al i gnment i s the
rel ati onshi p between the crosshai rs and a ful l fi el d of vi ew as seen by the
sni per. The sni per must pl ace hi s head so that a ful l fi el d of vi ew fi l l s the
tube, wi th no dark shadows or crescents to cause mi spl aced shots. He centers
the reti cl e i n a ful l fi el d of vi ew, ensuri ng the verti cal crosshai r i s strai ght up
and down so that the ri fl e i s not canted. Agai n, the center i s easi est for the
sni per to l ocate and al l ows for consi stent reti cl e pl acement.

FM 3-05.222
3-21
Figure 3-14. Proper Sight Alignment With the M24 Sniper Weapon Iron Sight System
SIGHT PICTURE
3-61. Wi th i ron si ghts, the si ght pi cture i s the correl ati on between the front
si ght bl ade, the rear aperture, and the target as seen by the sni per
(Fi gure 3-15). The sni per al i gns hi s si ghts and pl aces the top edge of the bl ade
i n the center (center hol d) of the l argest vi si bl e mass of the target (di sregard
the head and use the center of the torso). Wi th tel escopi c si ghts, si ght pi cture
i s the correl ati on between the reti cl e, ful l fi el d of vi ew, and the target as seen
by the sni per (Fi gure 3-16, page 3-22). The sni per centers the reti cl e i n a ful l
fi el d of vi ew. He then pl aces the reti cl e center on the l argest vi si bl e mass of
the target (as i n i ron si ghts). The center of mass of the target i s easi est for the
sni per to l ocate, and i t surrounds the i ntended POI wi th a maxi mum amount
of target area. When ai mi ng, the sni per concentrates on the front si ght, or
reti cl e, not the target. A cl ear front si ght or focusi ng on the crosshai rs i s
cri ti cal to detecti ng errors i n si ght al i gnment and i s more i mportant than the
si ght pi cture.
Figure 3-15. Correlation of Sight Picture Using Iron Sights
FM 3-05.222
3-22
Figure 3-16. Correlation of Sight Picture Using Telescopic Sights
3-62. When ai mi ng, the sni per has the fol l owi ng choi ces of where to hol d the
front si ght:
Center hold. Thi s hol d pl aces the front si ght on the desi red POI . The
probl em wi th thi s hol d i s that the front si ght bl ocks part of the target.
This hold is probably the best sight picture for combat use
because i t i s the most natural for U.S. Army-trai ned sol di ers.
Vari ati on i s the pi mpl e hol d.
6 oclock hold. Thi s hol d pl aces the target on top of the front si ght. The
mai n probl em i s that i t i s easy for the front si ght to push up i nto the
target, causi ng the round to go hi gh. Vari ati on i s the fl at ti re hol d.
Line-of-white hold. Thi s hol d al l ows a stri p of contrasti ng col or to show
between the target and the front si ght. The advantage of usi ng
thi s hol d i s that i t permi ts the sni per to see the enti re target and
prevents the front si ght from goi ng hi gh or l ow wi thout hi m noti ci ng i t.
The di sadvantage i s when the target and surroundi ng area bl end i nto
each other.
Reference point hold. Thi s hol d i s used when the sni per cannot see the
target but can see a reference poi nt gi ven by the observer. Thi s i s the
l east accurate techni que for ai mi ng and shoul d be used wi th care when
usi ng the i ron si ghts. Thi s hol d can be used wi th greater accuracy when
usi ng the tel escopi c si ghts.
SIGHT ALIGNMENT ERROR
3-63. When si ght al i gnment and si ght pi cture are perfect (regardl ess of
si ghti ng system) and al l el se i s done correctl y, the shot wi l l hi t center of mass
on the target. However, wi th an error i n si ght al i gnment, the bul l et i s di spl aced
i n the opposi te di recti on of the error. Such an error creates an angul ar
di spl acement between the l i ne of si ght (LOS) and the l i ne of bore and i s
measured i n mi nutes of angl e. Thi s di spl acement i ncreases as range i ncreases;
FM 3-05.222
3-23
the amount of bul l et di spl acement depends on the si ze of al i gnment error. Cl ose
targets show l i ttl e or no vi si bl e error. Di stant targets can show great
di spl acement or can be mi ssed al together due to severe si ght mi sal i gnment. An
i nexperi enced marksman i s prone to thi s ki nd of error, si nce he i s unsure of
how a correctl y al i gned si ght shoul d l ook (especi al l y tel escopi c si ghts). When a
sni per vari es hi s head posi ti on (and eye rel i ef) from shot to shot, he i s apt to
make si ght al i gnment errors whi l e fi ri ng (Fi gure 3-17). When paral l ax i s
properl y adjusted out of the weapon, then shadowi ng i s not a probl em.
Figure 3-17. Possible Sight Alignment Error
SIGHT PICTURE ERROR
3-64. A si ght pi cture error i s an error i n the pl acement of the ai mi ng poi nt.
Thi s mi stake causes no di spl acement between the LOS and the l i ne of bore.
The weapon i s si mpl y poi nted at the wrong spot on the target. Because no
di spl acement exi sts as range i ncreases, cl ose and far targets are hi t or mi ssed
dependi ng on where the front si ght or the reti cl e i s when the ri fl e fi res
(Fi gure 3-18, page 3-24). Al l sni pers face thi s ki nd of error every ti me they
fi re. Regardl ess of fi ri ng posi ti on stabi l i ty, the weapon wi l l al ways be movi ng.
A supported ri fl e moves much l ess than an unsupported one, but both sti l l
move i n what i s known as a wobble area. The sni per must adjust hi s fi ri ng
posi ti on so that hi s wobbl e area i s as smal l as possi bl e and centered on the
target. Wi th proper adjustments, the sni per shoul d be abl e to fi re the shot
whi l e the front si ght bl ade or reti cl e i s on the target at, or very near, the
desi red ai mi ng poi nt. How far the bl ade or reti cl e i s from thi s poi nt when the
FM 3-05.222
3-24
weapon fi res i s the amount of si ght pi cture error al l sni pers face. Al so, the
sni per shoul d not attempt to ai m for more than 5 or 6 seconds wi thout
bl i nki ng. Doi ng so pl aces an addi ti onal strai n on the eye and burns the
si ght al i gnment and si ght pi cture i nto the reti na. The resul t coul d cause
mi nor changes i n si ght al i gnment and si ght pi cture to go unnoti ced.
Figure 3-18. Possible Sight Picture Error
DOMINANT EYE
3-65. Some i ndi vi dual s may have di ffi cul ty ai mi ng because of i nterferences
from thei r domi nant eye i f i t i s not the eye used i n the ai mi ng process. Thi s
feature may requi re the sni per to fi re from the other si de of the weapon
(ri ght-handed sni per wi l l fi re l eft-handed). To determi ne whi ch eye i s
domi nant, hol d an i ndex fi nger 6 to 8 i nches i n front of your eyes. Cl ose one
eye at a ti me whi l e l ooki ng past the fi nger at an object; one eye wi l l make the
fi nger appear to move and the other wi l l not. The eye that does not make the
fi nger appear to move i s the domi nant eye. I f the sni per does not have a
cross-domi nant probl em, i t i s best to ai m wi th both eyes open. Ai mi ng wi th
both eyes al l ows hi m to see natural l y and hel ps hi m rel ax. Al so, wi th both
eyes open the sni per can fi nd targets more qui ckl y i n hi s tel escopi c si ght.
Cl osi ng one eye puts an unnatural strai n on the ai mi ng eye and l i mi ts the
sni pers protecti ve peri pheral vi si on.
ADVANTAGES OF TELESCOPIC SIGHTS
3-66. Tel escopi c si ghts offer many advantages. They provi de
Extremel y accurate ai mi ng, whi ch al l ows the sni per to fi re at di stant,
barel y percepti bl e, and camoufl aged targets not vi si bl e to the naked eye.
FM 3-05.222
3-25
Rapi d ai mi ng, because the sni pers eye sees the crosshai rs and the
target wi th equal cl ari ty i n the same focal pl ane.
Accurate fi re under condi ti ons of unfavorabl e i l l umi nati on (such as
at dawn and dusk) and duri ng peri ods of l i mi ted vi si bi l i ty (moonl i ght
and fog).
3-67. Despi te these advantages, tel escopi c si ghts have l i mi tati ons. The
tel escopi c si ght wi l l never make a poor sni per any better. The magni fi cati on
i s al so a di sadvantage, as i t al so magni fi es ai mi ng and hol di ng errors.
Al though techni cal l y there i s no si ght al i gnment wi th the tel escopi c si ght,
shadowi ng wi l l occur i f the eye i s not centered on the scope. Thi s error wi l l
have the same effect as i mproper si ght al i gnment when the scope has not
been adjusted paral l ax-free. The bul l et wi l l stri ke at a poi nt opposi te the
shadow and wi l l i ncrease i n error as the di stance i ncreases.
3-68. I mproper head pl acement on the stock i s the mai n cause of shadowi ng.
Due to the scope bei ng hi gher than the i ron si ghts, i t i s di ffi cul t to obtai n a
good sol i d stock wel d. I f thi s i s a probl em, temporary cheek rests can be
constructed usi ng T-shi rts or any materi al that can be removed and repl aced.
The rest wi l l assi st the sni per i n obtai ni ng a good stock wel d and wi l l hel p
keep hi s head hel d strai ght for si ghti ng. I t i s recommended that the sni per
l earn to establ i sh a sol i d posi ti on wi thout these ai ds.
AIMING WITH TELESCOPIC SIGHTS
3-69. A tel escopi c si ght al l ows ai mi ng wi thout usi ng the organi c ri fl e si ghts.
The LOS i s the opti cal axi s that runs through the center of the l ens and the
i ntersecti on of the crosshai rs. The crosshai rs and the i mage of the target are
i n the focal pl ane of the l ens (that pl ane whi ch passes through the l ens focus,
perpendi cul ar to the opti cal axi s). The sni pers eye sees the crosshai rs and the
i mage of the target wi th i denti cal sharpness and cl ari ty. To ai m wi th a
tel escope, the sni per must posi ti on hi s head at the exi t pupi l of the tel escope
eyepi ece so that the LOS of hi s eye coi nci des wi th the opti cal axi s of the
tel escope. He then centers the crosshai rs on the target.
SHADOW EFFECTS
3-70. Duri ng ai mi ng, the sni per must ensure that there are no shadows i n
the fi el d of vi si on of the tel escope. I f the sni pers eye does not have proper eye
rel i ef, a ci rcul ar shadow wi l l occur i n the fi el d of vi si on. Thi s strai ni ng wi l l
reduce the fi el d-of-vi si on si ze, hi nder observati on, and i n general , make
ai mi ng di ffi cul t. I f the eye i s posi ti oned i ncorrectl y i n rel ati on to the mai n
opti cal axi s of the tel escope (shi fted to the si de), crescent-shaped shadows wi l l
occur on the edges of the eyepi ece. They can occur on ei ther si de, dependi ng
upon the posi ti on of the axi s of the eye wi th respect to the opti cal axi s of the
tel escope. I f these crescent-shaped shadows are present, the bul l ets wi l l
stri ke to the si de away from them when paral l ax i s not adjusted out of the
scope. Thi s error i s the same as a si ght al i gnment error wi th i ron si ghts.
HEAD ADJ USTMENTS
3-71. I f the sni per noti ces shadow on the edges of the fi el d of vi si on duri ng
ai mi ng, he must fi nd a head posi ti on i n whi ch the eye wi l l cl earl y see the
FM 3-05.222
3-26
enti re fi el d of vi si on of the tel escope. Consequentl y, to ensure accurate ai mi ng
wi th a tel escope, the sni per must di rect hi s attenti on to keepi ng hi s eye on
the opti cal axi s of the tel escope. He must al so have the i ntersecti on of the
crosshai rs coi nci de exactl y wi th the ai mi ng poi nt. However, hi s concentrati on
must be on the crosshai rs and not the target. I t i s i mportant not to stare at
the crosshai rs whi l e ai mi ng.
CANTING
3-72. Canti ng i s the act of ti ppi ng the ri fl e to ei ther si de of the verti cal
crosshai r, causi ng mi spl aced and errati c shot groupi ng.
POINT OF AIM
3-73. The POA i s mi ssi on- and range-dependent and shoul d not be the
center of mass unl ess requi red by the si tuati on. The best POA between 300
and 600 meters i s anywhere wi thi n the tri angl e formed by the base of the
neck and the two ni ppl es (Fi gure 3-19, page 3-27). Thi s poi nt wi l l maxi mi ze
the probabi l i ty of hi tti ng major organs and vessel s and renderi ng a cl ean one-
shot ki l l . The opti onal POA, at thi s range i f the upper chest hol d i s not
avai l abl e, i s the centerl i ne bel ow the bel t. The pel vi c gi rdl e i s ri ch i n major
bl ood vessel s and nerves. A hi t here wi l l cause a mechani cal col l apse or
mechani cal dysfuncti on. A stri ke here i s al so an advantage i f the target i s
weari ng body armor, whi ch usual l y covers onl y the upper chest. An al ternate
POA for cl oser than 300 meters i s the head hol d (Fi gure 3-20, page 3-27). Thi s
poi nt i s very di ffi cul t to achi eve because of i ts si ze and constant moti on. The
advantage of the head hol d i s i ncapaci tati on wel l under 1 second i f the correct
pl acement i s achi eved. Thi s hol d i s wel l sui ted for hostage si tuati ons where
cl oser ranges are the norm and i nstant i ncapaci tati on i s requi red. One hol d i s
al ong the pl ane formed by the nose and the two ear canal s. The target i s the
brai n stem, thus severi ng the spi nal cord from the medul l a obl ongata. Note
that the POA i s nei ther the forehead nor between the eyes, whi ch woul d
resul t i n hi ts that woul d be too hi gh. The sni per i s best served by i magi ni ng a
gol f bal l -si zed shape i nsi de the mi ddl e of the head. He i s to hi t that i nner bal l
by ai mi ng through the mi ddl e of the head regardl ess of posi ti on hori zontal l y
or verti cal l y.
3-74. What the sni per i s tryi ng to sever or pul veri ze i s the targets brai n
stem, the l ocati on where the spi nal cord connects to the brai n. Nerves that
control motor functi on are channel ed through here, and the l ower thi rd of the
stem (the medul l a) control s breathi ng and heartbeat. Hi t here, the target wi l l
not experi ence even refl exi ve motor acti on. Hi s enti re body wi l l i nstantl y
experi ence what i s cal l ed fl acci d paral ysi s. The targets muscl es wi l l
suddenl y rel ax and he wi l l become i ncapabl e of any moti on of any ki nd
thereafter. The sni per can tel l how successful hi s headshot i s by watchi ng
how hi s target fal l s. I f the target goes strai ght down, l i mp, there i s a hi gh
assurance of fatal i ty. I f the target fal l s to the si de or i s knocked down, the
target has onl y been parti al l y i ncapaci tated.



FM 3-05.222
3-27
Figure 3-19. Triangular Point of Aim Formed by the Nipples and the Base of the Chin
Figure 3-20. View of the Final Point of AimHead Hold
3-75. For a chest shot that i s i deal l y pl aced (mi d-sternum), the bul l et wi l l
stri ke the l argest and hardest of the bones overl yi ng the vi tal organs. When
the bul l et stri kes and severs the targets spi ne, hi s l egs wi l l buckl e under
fl acci d paral ysi s. However, hi s arms may not be i ncapaci tated i nstantl y. Wi th
a chest shot, even though the suspect may techni cal l y be dead from the
devastati on of the round, there may be a bri ef and dangerous del ay before he
acts dead. Hi s brai n may not di e for one to two mi nutes after hi s heart has
ceased to functi on. Duri ng thi s ti me, hi s brai n may command hi s arms to
FM 3-05.222
3-28
commi t a si mpl e, fi nal act. The sni per anti ci pates these possi bi l i ti es and
del i vers an i mmedi ate second round i f the suspect i s not ful l y down and out
or anyone i s wi thi n hi s sphere of danger. An al ternati ve and fi nal ai m poi nt i s
any major joi nt mass. A hi t here wi l l cause grave i njury, shock, and possi bl e
i ncapaci tati on. However, i f the target i s on any type of sti mul ant, thi s hi t
may not have much effect.
BREATH CONTROL
3-76. Breath control i s i mportant to the ai mi ng process. I f the sni per
breathes whi l e tryi ng to ai m, the ri se and fal l of hi s chest wi l l cause the ri fl e
to move verti cal l y. The sni per breathes whi l e he does si ght al i gnment, but he
must be abl e to hol d hi s breath to compl ete the process of ai mi ng. To properl y
hol d hi s breath, the sni per i nhal es, exhal es normal l y, and stops at the
moment of natural respi ratory pause. I f the sni per does not have the correct
si ght pi cture, he must change hi s posi ti on.
3-77. A respi ratory cycl e l asts 4 to 5 seconds. I nhal ati on and exhal ati on
requi re onl y about 2 seconds. Thus, between each respi ratory cycl e, there i s a
pause of 2 to 3 seconds. Thi s pause can be expanded to 12 to 15 seconds
wi thout any speci al effort or unpl easant sensati on; however, the maxi mum
safe pause i s 8 to 10 seconds. The sni per must fi re the shot duri ng an
extended pause between breaths or start the process over agai n. Duri ng the
respi ratory pause, the breathi ng muscl es are rel axed and the sni per thus
avoi ds strai ni ng the di aphragm (Fi gure 3-21).
3-78. A sni per shoul d assume hi s posi ti on and breathe natural l y unti l hi s
hol d begi ns to settl e. Many sni pers then take a sl i ghtl y deeper breath, exhal e
and pause, expecti ng to fi re the shot duri ng the pause. I f the hol d does not
settl e suffi ci entl y to al l ow the shot to be fi red, the sni per resumes normal
breathi ng and repeats the process.
Figure 3-21. A Snipers Respiratory Pause Before Firing at the Target
3-79. The respi ratory pause shoul d never feel unnatural . I f the pause i s
extended for too l ong, the body suffers from oxygen defi ci ency and sends out
si gnal s to resume breathi ng. These si gnal s produce sl i ght i nvol untary
movements i n the di aphragm and i nterfere wi th the sni pers abi l i ty to
concentrate. The heart rate al so i ncreases and there i s a decrease of oxygen to
the eyes. Thi s l ack of oxygen causes the eyes to have di ffi cul ty focusi ng and
FM 3-05.222
3-29
resul ts i n eyestrai n. Duri ng mul ti pl e, rapi d-fi re engagements, the breathi ng
cycl e shoul d be forced through a rapi d, shal l ow cycl e between shots i nstead of
tryi ng to hol d the breath or breathi ng. Fi ri ng shoul d be accompl i shed at the
forced respi ratory pause.
3-80. The natur al tendency of the weapon to r i se and fal l dur i ng
br eathi ng al l ows the sni per to fi ne-tune hi s ai m by hol di ng hi s br eath at
the poi nt i n whi ch the si ghts r est on the ai mi ng poi nt.
TRIGGER CONTROL
3-81. Tri gger control i s an i mportant component of sni per marksmanshi p
fundamental s. I t i s defi ned as causi ng the ri fl e to fi re when the si ght pi cture
i s at i ts best, wi thout causi ng the ri fl e to move. Tri gger squeeze, on the other
hand, i s defi ned as the i ndependent acti on of the forefi nger on the tri gger,
wi th a uni forml y i ncreasi ng pressure strai ght to the rear unti l the ri fl e fi res.
Tri gger control i s the l ast task to be accompl i shed before the weapon fi res.
Thi s task i s more di ffi cul t to appl y when usi ng a tel escope or when a fi ri ng
posi ti on becomes l ess stabl e. Mi sses are usual l y caused by the ai m bei ng
di sturbed as the bul l et l eaves the barrel or just before i t l eaves the barrel .
Thi s ki nd of mi ss resul ts when a sni per jerks the tri gger or fl i nches. The
tri gger need not be jerked vi ol entl y to spoi l the ai m; even a sl i ght, sudden
pressure of the tri gger fi nger i s enough to cause the barrel to waver and spoi l
the si ght al i gnment. Fl i nchi ng i s an i nvol untary movement of the body
tensi ng of the muscl es of the arm, the neck, or the shoul der i n anti ci pati on of
the shock of recoi l or the sound of the ri fl e fi ri ng. A sni per can correct these
errors by understandi ng and appl yi ng proper tri gger control .
3-82. Proper tri gger control occurs when the sni per pl aces hi s fi ri ng fi nger
as l ow on the tri gger as possi bl e and sti l l cl ears the tri gger guard, thereby
achi evi ng maxi mum mechani cal advantage. The sni per engages the tri gger
wi th that part of hi s fi ri ng fi nger that al l ows hi m to pul l the tri gger strai ght
to the rear. A fi rm gri p on the ri fl e stock i s essenti al for tri gger control . I f the
sni per begi ns hi s tri gger pul l from a l oose gri p, he tends to squeeze the stock
as wel l as the tri gger and thus l oses tri gger control . To avoi d transferri ng
movement of the fi nger to the enti re ri fl e, the sni per shoul d see dayl i ght
between the tri gger fi nger and the stock as he squeezes the tri gger, strai ght
to the rear. To ensure a wel l -pl aced shot, he fi res the weapon when the front
bl ade or reti cl e i s on the desi red POA.
3-83. The sni per best mai ntai ns tri gger control by assumi ng a stabl e
posi ti on, adjusti ng on the target, and begi nni ng a breathi ng cycl e. As the
sni per exhal es the fi nal breath toward a natural respi ratory pause, he
secures hi s fi nger on the tri gger. As the front bl ade or reti cl e settl es on the
desi red POA and the natural respi ratory pause i s entered, the sni per appl i es
i ni ti al pressure. He i ncreases the tensi on on the tri gger duri ng the
respi ratory pause as l ong as the front bl ade or reti cl e remai ns i n the area of
the target that ensures a wel l -pl aced shot. I f the front bl ade or reti cl e moves
away from the desi red POA on the target and the pause i s free of strai n or
tensi on, the sni per stops i ncreasi ng the tensi on on the tri gger, wai ts for the
front bl ade or reti cl e to return to the desi red poi nt, and then conti nues to
squeeze the tri gger. The sni per perfects hi s ai m whi l e conti nui ng the steadi l y
FM 3-05.222
3-30
i ncreasi ng pressure unti l the hammer fal l s. Thi s i s tri gger control . I f
movement i s too l arge for recovery or i f the pause has become uncomfortabl e
(extended too l ong), the sni per shoul d careful l y rel ease the pressure on the
tri gger and begi n the respi ratory cycl e agai n.
3-84. Most successful sni pers agree that the tri gger sl ack shoul d be taken up
wi th a heavy i ni ti al pressure. Concentrati on shoul d be focused on the
perfecti on of the si ght pi cture as tri gger control i s automati cal l y appl i ed.
Concentrati on, especi al l y on the front si ght or reti cl e, i s the greatest ai d to
prevent fl i nchi ng and jerki ng.
3-85. The methods of tri gger control i nvol ve a mental process, whi l e pul l i ng
the tri gger i s a mechani cal process. The sni per uses two methods of tri gger
control to pul l the tri gger. They are as fol l ows:
Smooth motion/ constant pressure trigger pull. The sni per takes up the
sl ack wi th a heavy i ni ti al pressure and, when the si ght pi cture settl es,
pul l s the tri gger wi th a si ngl e, smooth acti on. Thi s method i s used
when there i s a stati onary target and the posi ti on i s steady. Thi s type
of tri gger control wi l l hel p prevent fl i nchi ng, jerki ng, and bucki ng
the weapon.
I nterrupted trigger pull. The sni per appl i es pressure to the tri gger
when the si ght pi cture begi ns to settl e and as l ong as the si ght pi cture
l ooks good or conti nues to i mprove. I f the si ght pi cture deteri orates
bri efl y, the sni per mai ntai ns the pressure at a constant l evel and
i ncreases i t when the pi cture agai n begi ns to i mprove. He then
conti nues the pressure or repeats thi s techni que unti l he fi res the ri fl e.
The sni per does not jerk the tri gger when the si ghts are al i gned and
the perfect si ght pi cture occurs. Thi s techni que i s used i n the
standi ng posi ti on to correct the waveri ng of the si ghts around, through,
or i n the target or ai mi ng poi nt due to the i nstabi l i ty of the posi ti on.
3-86. Tri gger control i s not onl y the most i mportant fundamental of
marksmanshi p but al so the most di ffi cul t to master. The majori ty of fi ri ng
errors stems di rectl y or i ndi rectl y from the i mproper appl i cati on of tri gger
control . Fai l ure to hi t the target frequentl y resul ts from the sni per jerki ng
the tri gger or appl yi ng pressure on both the tri gger and the si de of the ri fl e.
Ei ther of these acti ons can produce a mi ss. Therefore, i nstructors shoul d
al ways check for i ndi cati ons of i mproper tri gger control , si nce an error i n thi s
techni que can start a chai n reacti on of other errors.
3-87. Tri gger control can be devel oped i nto a refl ex acti on. The sni per can
devel op hi s tri gger control to the poi nt that pul l i ng the tri gger requi res no
consci ous effort. The sni per wi l l be aware of the pul l , but he wi l l not be
consci ousl y di recti ng i t. Everyone exhi bi ts thi s type of refl ex acti on i n dai l y
l i vi ng. The i ndi vi dual who wal ks or dri ves a car whi l e carryi ng on a
conversati on i s an exampl e. He i s aware of hi s muscul ar acti vi ty but i s not
pl anni ng i t. He i s thi nki ng about the conversati on.
FM 3-05.222
3-31
3-88. Tri gger control i s taught i n conjuncti on wi th posi ti ons. When posi ti ons
and tri gger control are bei ng taught, an effecti ve trai ni ng ai d for
demonstrati ng the techni que of tri gger control wi th reference to the
i nterrupted or control l ed pressure i s the wobbl e si ght and target si mul ator.
The wobbl e si ght may be used wi th a fi xed target si mul ator to demonstrate
wobbl e area, adjustment of natural POA, breathi ng, and tri gger control .
3-89. I n al l posi ti ons, dry fi ri ng i s one of the best methods of devel opi ng
proper tri gger control . I n dry fi ri ng, not onl y i s the coach abl e to detect errors,
but the i ndi vi dual sni per i s abl e to detect hi s own errors, si nce there i s no
recoi l to conceal the ri fl es undesi rabl e movements. Where possi bl e, tri gger
control practi ce shoul d be i ntegrated i nto al l phases of marksmanshi p
trai ni ng. The mastery of tri gger control takes pati ence, hard work,
concentrati on, and a great deal of sel f-di sci pl i ne.
THE INTEGRATED ACT OF FIRING ONE ROUND
3-90. Once the sni per has been taught the fundamental s of marksmanshi p,
hi s pri mary concern i s to appl y thi s knowl edge i n the performance of hi s
mi ssi on. An effecti ve method of appl yi ng fundamental s i s through the use of
the i ntegrated act of fi ri ng one round. The i ntegrated act i s a l ogi cal , step-by-
step devel opment of the fundamental s whereby the sni per devel ops habi ts to
fi re each shot exactl y the same. Thus he achi eves the marksmanshi p goal
that a sni per must stri ve for: one shotone ki l l . The i ntegrated act of fi ri ng
can be di vi ded i nto the fol l owi ng four phases.
PREPARATION PHASE
3-91. Before departi ng the preparati on area, the sni per ensures that
The team i s mental l y condi ti oned and knows what mi ssi on to accompl i sh.
A systemati c check i s made of equi pment for compl eteness and
servi ceabi l i ty i ncl udi ng, but not l i mi ted to
Properl y cl eaned and l ubri cated ri fl es.
Properl y mounted and torqued scopes.
Zero-si ghted systems and recorded data i n the sni per data book.
The study of weather condi ti ons to determi ne the effects on the
teams performance of the mi ssi on.
BEFORE-FIRING PHASE
3-92. On arri val at the mi ssi on si te, the team exerci ses care i n sel ecti ng
posi ti ons. The sni per ensures that the sel ected posi ti ons compl ement the
mi ssi ons goal . Duri ng thi s phase, the sni per
Mai ntai ns stri ct adherence to the fundamental s of posi ti on. He ensures
that the fi ri ng posi ti on i s as rel axed as possi bl e, maki ng the most of
avai l abl e external support. He al so makes sure the support i s stabl e,
conforms to the posi ti on, and al l ows a correct, natural POA for each
desi gnated area or target.

FM 3-05.222
3-32
Once i n posi ti on, removes the scope covers and checks the fi el d
of fi re, maki ng any needed correcti ons to ensure cl ear, unobstructed
fi ri ng l anes.
Checks the borel i ne for any obstructi ons.
Makes dry-fi ri ng and natural POA checks.
Doubl e-checks ammuni ti on for servi ceabi l i ty and compl etes fi nal
magazi ne l oadi ng.
Noti fi es the observer he i s ready to engage targets. The observer must
constantl y be aware of weather condi ti ons that may affect the accuracy
of the shots. He must al so stay ahead of the tacti cal si tuati on.
FIRING PHASE
3-93. Upon detecti on, or i f di rected to a sui tabl e target, the sni per makes
appropri ate si ght changes and ai ms, and tel l s the observer he i s ready to fi re.
The observer then gi ves the needed wi ndage and observes the target. To fi re
the ri fl e, the sni per shoul d remember the key word, BRASS. Each l etter i s
expl ai ned as fol l ows:
Breathe. The sni per i nhal es and exhal es to the natural respi ratory
pause. He checks for consi stent head pl acement and stock wel d. He
ensures eye rel i ef i s correct (ful l fi el d of vi ew through the scope, no
shadows present). At the same ti me, he begi ns al i gni ng the crosshai rs
or front bl ade wi th the target at the desi red POA.
Relax. As the sni per exhal es, he rel axes as many muscl es as possi bl e
whi l e mai ntai ni ng control of the weapon and posi ti on.
Aim. I f the sni per has a good, natural POA, the ri fl e poi nts at the
desi red target duri ng the respi ratory pause. I f the ai m i s off, the sni per
shoul d make a sl i ght adjustment to acqui re the desi red POA. He avoi ds
muscl i ng the weapon toward the ai mi ng poi nt.
Slack. (Does not appl y to the M24 as i ssued.) The fi rst stage of the two-
stage tri gger must be taken up wi th heavy i ni ti al pressure. Most
experi enced sni pers actual l y take up the sl ack and get i ni ti al pressure
as they reach the respi ratory pause. I n thi s way, the l i mi ted durati on of
the pause i s not used up by mani pul ati ng the sl ack i n the tri gger.
Squeeze. As l ong as the si ght al i gnment and si ght pi cture i s
sati sfactory, the sni per shoul d squeeze the tri gger. The pressure
appl i ed to the tri gger must be strai ght to the rear wi thout di sturbi ng
the l ay of the ri fl e or the desi red POA.
3-94. After the shot, the sni per must remember to fol l ow through wi th the
recoi l and recover back on target. He shoul d make sure to cal l hi s shot so the
observer can record any adjustment made.
AFTER-FIRING PHASE
3-95. The sni pers after-fi ri ng acti ons i ncl ude observi ng the target area to
certi fy the hi t, observi ng the enemy reacti on, acqui ri ng another target, and
avoi di ng compromi se of hi s posi ti on. The sni per must anal yze hi s
performance. I f the shot i mpacted at the desi red spot (a target hi t), i t may be
assumed that the i ntegrated act of fi ri ng one round was correctl y fol l owed.
FM 3-05.222
3-33
However, i f the shot was off cal l , the sni per and observer must check for the
fol l owi ng possi bl e errors:
Fai l ure to fol l ow the key word BRASS (parti al fi el d of vi ew, breath hel d
i ncorrectl y, tri gger jerked, ri fl e muscl ed i nto posi ti on).
Target i mproperl y ranged wi th scope (causi ng hi gh or l ow shots).
I ncorrectl y compensated-for wi nd (causi ng ri ght or l eft shots).
Possi bl e weapon or ammuni ti on mal functi on (used onl y as a l ast resort
when no other errors are detected).
3-96. Once the probabl e reasons for an off-cal l shot are determi ned, the
sni per must make note of the errors. He shoul d pay cl ose attenti on to the
probl em areas to i ncrease the accuracy of future shots.
FOLLOW-THROUGH
3-97. Appl yi ng the fundamental s i ncreases the odds of a wel l -ai med shot
bei ng fi red. When mastered, the fi rst-round ki l l becomes a certai nty.
3-98. Fol l ow-through i s a conti nued mental and physi cal appl i cati on of the
fundamental s after each round i s fi red. I t i s the act of conti nui ng to appl y al l
of the sni per marksmanshi p fundamental s as the weapon fi res and
i mmedi atel y after i t fi res. Fol l ow-through consi sts of
Keepi ng the head i n fi rm contact wi th the stock (stock wel d).
Keepi ng the fi nger on the tri gger al l the way to the rear.
Conti nui ng to l ook through the rear aperture or scope tube.
Concentrati ng on the front si ght or crosshai rs.
Keepi ng muscl es rel axed.
Avoi di ng reacti on to recoi l and noi se.
Rel easi ng the tri gger onl y after the recoi l has stopped.
3-99. Good fol l ow-through ensures that the weapon i s al l owed to fi re and
recoi l natural l y. The sni per and ri fl e combi nati on reacts as a si ngl e uni t to
such acti ons. From a trai ni ng vi ewpoi nt, fol l ow-through may al l ow the
observer to observe the stri ke of the bul l et i n rel ati on to the sni pers poi nt of
ai m and to hel p hi m rapi dl y correct and adjust hi s si ghts for a second shot.
Al so, a good fol l ow-through wi l l i ndi cate to the sni per the qual i ty of hi s
natural POA. The weapon shoul d settl e back on target. I f i t does not, then
muscl es were used to get the weapon on target.
CALLING THE SHOT
3-100. Cal l i ng the shot i s bei ng abl e to tel l where the round shoul d i mpact
on the target. Because l i ve targets i nvari abl y move when hi t, the sni per wi l l
fi nd i t al most i mpossi bl e to use hi s tel escope to l ocate the target after the
round i s fi red. Usi ng i ron si ghts, the sni per wi l l fi nd that searchi ng for a
downrange hi t i s beyond hi s capabi l i ti es. He must be abl e to accuratel y cal l
hi s shots. Proper fol l ow-through wi l l ai d i n cal l i ng the shot. However, the
domi nant factor i n shot cal l i ng i s where the reti cl e or post i s l ocated when the
weapon di scharges. The sni per refers to thi s l ocati on as hi s final focus
point.
FM 3-05.222
3-34
3-101. Wi th i ron si ghts, the fi nal focus poi nt shoul d be on the top edge of the
front si ght bl ade. The bl ade i s the onl y part of the si ght pi cture that i s movi ng
(i n the wobbl e area). Focusi ng on the bl ade ai ds i n cal l i ng the shot and
detecti ng any errors i n si ght al i gnment or si ght pi cture. Of course, l i ni ng up
the si ghts and the target i ni ti al l y requi res the sni per to shi ft hi s focus from
the target to the bl ade and back unti l he i s sati sfi ed that he i s properl y
al i gned wi th the target. Thi s shi fti ng exposes two more facts about eye focus.
The eye can i nstantl y shi ft focus from near objects (the bl ade) to far objects
(the target). The eye cannot, however, be focused so that two objects at
greatl y di fferent ranges (agai n the bl ade and target) are both i n sharp focus.
After years of experi ence, many sni pers fi nd that they no l onger hol d fi nal
focus on the front si ght bl ade. Thei r focus i s somewhere between the bl ade
and the target. Thi s act has been rel ated to many thi ngs, from personal
preference to fai l i ng eyesi ght. Regardl ess, i nexperi enced sni pers are sti l l
advi sed to use the bl ade as a fi nal focus poi nt. Wi th i ron si ghts the fi nal check
before shooti ng wi l l be si ght al i gnment, as mi sal i gnment wi l l cause a mi ss.
3-102. The sni per can easi l y pl ace the fi nal focus poi nt wi th tel escopi c si ghts
because of the si ghts opti cal qual i ti es. Properl y focused, a scope shoul d
present both the fi el d of vi ew and the reti cl e i n sharp detai l . Fi nal focus
shoul d then be on the reti cl e. Whi l e focusi ng on the reti cl e, the sni per moves
hi s head sl i ghtl y from si de to si de. The reti cl e may seem to move across the
target face, even though the ri fl e and scope are moti onl ess. Paral l ax i s
present when the target i mage i s not correctl y focused onto the reti cul es focal
pl ane. Therefore, the target i mage and the reti cl e appear to be i n two
separate posi ti ons i nsi de the scope, causi ng the effect of reti cl e movement
across the target. A certai n amount of paral l ax i s unavoi dabl e throughout the
range of the ART seri es of scopes. The M3A on the M24 has a focus/paral l ax
adjustment that el i mi nates paral l ax. The sni per shoul d adjust thi s knob unti l
the targets i mage i s on the same focal pl ane as the reti cl e. To determi ne i f
the targets i mage appears at the i deal l ocati on, the sni per shoul d move hi s
head sl i ghtl y l eft and ri ght to see i f the reti cl e appears to move. I f i t does not
move, the focus i s properl y adjusted and no paral l ax i s present. The sni per
wi l l focus and concentrate on the reti cl e for the fi nal shot, not the target.
3-103. I n cal l i ng the shot, the sni per predi cts where the shot wi l l hi t the
target. The sni per cal l s the shot whi l e dry fi ri ng and actual fi ri ng by noti ng
the posi ti on of the si ghts i n rel ati on to the ai mi ng poi nt the i nstant the round
i s fi red. I f hi s shot i s not on cal l , the sni per must revi ew the fundamental s to
i sol ate hi s probl em or make a si ght change as i ndi cated to move hi s shot to
hi s POA. Unl ess he can accuratel y cal l hi s shots, the sni per wi l l not be abl e to
effecti vel y zero hi s ri fl e.
DETECTION AND CORRECTION OF ERRORS
3-104. Duri ng the process of teachi ng or usi ng the fundamental s of
marksmanshi p, i t wi l l become evi dent that errors may pl ague any sni per.
When an error i s detected, i t must be corrected. Someti mes errors are not
obvi ous to the sni per. Therefore, a coach or i nstructor wi l l be i nval uabl e. The
procedure for correcti ng errors i s to pi npoi nt or i sol ate the error, prove to the
sni per that he i s maki ng thi s error, and convi nce hi m that through hi s own
efforts and concentrati on he can correct hi s error. Knowi ng what to l ook for
FM 3-05.222
3-35
through anal yzi ng the shot groups, observi ng the sni per, questi oni ng the
sni per, and revi ewi ng the fundamental s of trai ni ng exerci ses wi l l assi st the
coach i n thi s process. Even duri ng sustai nment a trai ned sni per wi l l use
detecti on and correcti on to ensure bad habi ts have not been devel oped.
TARGET ANALYSIS
3-105. Target or shot-group anal ysi s i s an i mportant step i n processi ng the
detecti on and correcti on of errors. When anal yzi ng a target, the coach shoul d
correl ate errors i n performance to l oose groups, the shape of groups, and the
si ze of groups. Wi th some sni pers, especi al l y the experi enced, thi s anal ysi s
cannot be done readi l y. However, the coach must be abl e to di scuss the
probabl e error. A bad shot group i s sel dom caused by onl y one error.
Remember, i n the i ni ti al anal ysi s of groups, the coach must take i nto
consi derati on the capabi l i ti es of the sni per, the weapon, and the ammuni ti on.
OBSERVATION
3-106. When the coach or i nstructor has an i ndi cati on that the sni per i s
commi tti ng one or more errors, i t wi l l usual l y be necessary for hi m to observe
the sni per whi l e he i s i n the act of fi ri ng to pi npoi nt hi s errors. I f the
i nstructor has no i ndi cati on of the sni pers probabl e errors, the i ni ti al
emphasi s shoul d be on hi s fi ri ng posi ti on and breath control . Next, the
i nstructor shoul d l ook for the most common errorsanti ci pati on of the shot
and i mproper tri gger control . I f observi ng the sni per fai l s to pi npoi nt hi s
errors, the i nstructor must then questi on hi m.
QUESTIONING
3-107. The coach or i nstructor shoul d ask the sni per i f he coul d detect hi s
errors. He shoul d have the sni per expl ai n the fi ri ng procedure, to i ncl ude
posi ti on, ai mi ng, breath control , tri gger control , and fol l ow-through. I f
questi oni ng does not reveal al l of the errors, the i nstructor shoul d tal k the
sni per through the procedures l i sted i n Fi gure 3-22.
1. Set the sights.
2. Build the position.
3. Align the sight.
4. Check the natural POA.
5. Adjust the natural POA.
6. Control the breath.
7. Obtain a sight picture.
8. Focus on the front sight.
9. Control the trigger.
10. Follow through.
11. Call the shot.
Figure 3-22. Fundamental Procedures for Firing One Round
NOTE: I f errors sti l l occur, there are several trai ni ng exerci ses that can hel p
to pi npoi nt them.
FM 3-05.222
3-36
TRAINING EXERCISES
3-108. The i nstructor can use the fol l owi ng trai ni ng exerci ses or devi ces at
any ti me to suppl ement the detecti on procedure:
Tri gger exerci se.
Metal di sk exerci se.
Bal l and dummy exerci se.
Bl ank target-fi ri ng exerci se.
M2 ai mi ng devi ce.
Ai r ri fl es.
3-109. When the sni per l eaves the fi ri ng l i ne, he compares weather
condi ti ons to the i nformati on needed to hi t the POA or POI . Si nce he fi res i n
al l types of weather condi ti ons, he must be aware of temperature, l i ght,
mi rage, and wi nd. Other major tasks that the sni per must compl ete are as
fol l ows:
Compare si ght setti ngs wi th previ ous fi ri ng sessi ons. I f the sni per
al ways has to fi ne-tune for wi ndage or el evati on, there i s a chance he
needs a si ght change (sl i p a scal e).
Compare ammuni ti on by l ot number for the best ri fl e and ammuni ti on
combi nati on.
Compare al l groups fi red under each condi ti on. Check the l ow and hi gh
shots and those to the l eft and ri ght of the mai n groupthe l ess
di spersi on, the better. I f groups are ti ght, they are easi l y moved to the
center of the target; i f l oose, there i s a probl em. Check the tel escope
focus and make sure the ri fl e i s cl eaned correctl y. Remarks i n the data
book wi l l al so hel p.
Make correcti ons. Record correcti ons i n the data book, such as posi ti on
and si ght adjustment i nformati on, to ensure retenti on.
Anal yze a group on a target. These resul ts are i mportant for
marksmanshi p trai ni ng. The sni per may not noti ce errors duri ng fi ri ng,
but errors become apparent when anal yzi ng a group. Thi s study can
onl y be done i f the data book has been used correctl y.
3-110. As the stabi l i ty of a fi ri ng posi ti on decreases, the wobbl e area
i ncreases. The l arger the wobbl e area, the harder i t i s to fi re the shot wi thout
reacti ng to i t. Thi s reacti on occurs when the sni per
Anti ci pates recoi l .
Jerks the tri gger.
Fl i nches.
Avoi ds recoi l .
FM 3-05.222
3-37
APPLICATION OF FIRE
3-111. Fol l owi ng the Austri an-Prussi an War of 1866, the Prussi an Army
began a systemati c study of the effecti veness and control of smal l -arms fi re.
The resul t of thi s study, conducted over a 6-year peri od, was the i ntroducti on
of the sci ence of musketry, a mi snomer as al l major armi es were by then
equi pped wi th ri fl es. Musketry i s the sci ence of smal l -arms fi re under fi el d
condi ti ons, as opposed to range condi ti ons, and i s concerned enti rel y wi th
fi ri ng at unknown di stances; thus the i mportance of musketry to the sni per.
The materi al presented i s merel y an overvi ew of the fundamental s of
musketry. At the peak of the study of musketry as a marti al sci ence,
musketry school s often extended thei r courses to si x weeks. Onl y the
i ntroducti on of machi ne guns and automati c smal l arms preci pi tated the
doctri ne of i ts study, al though vari ous aspects of musketry were retai ned as
separate subjects, such as judgi ng di stances and i ssui ng fi re control orders.
Thi s study ti es together the scattered remnants of the study of musketry as i t
pertai ns to sni pi ng.
MINUTE OF ANGLE
3-112. Most weapon si ghts are constructed wi th a means of adjustment.
Al though the techni cal i ti es of adjustment may vary wi th weapon type or
means of si ghti ng, general l y the weapon si ght wi l l be correctabl e for wi ndage
and el evati on. The speci fi c method by whi ch adjustment i s accompl i shed i s
angul ar di spl acement of the si ght i n rel ati on to the bore of the ri fl e. Thi s
angul ar di spl acement i s measured i n MOAs, and establ i shes the angl e of
departure i n rel ati onshi p to LOS.
3-113. An MOA i s the uni t of angul ar measure that equal s 1/60 of 1 degree of
arc. Wi th few excepti ons the uni versal method of weapon si ght adjustment i s
i n fracti ons or mul ti pl es of MOAs. An MOA equal s a di stance of 1.0472 i nches
at 100 yards and 2.9 centi meters at 100 meters. Si nce an MOA i s an angul ar
uni t of measure, the arc establ i shed by an MOA i ncreases proporti onatel y
wi th di stance (Fi gure 3-23, page 3-38).
3-114. Fracti ons are di ffi cul t to work wi th when maki ng mental cal cul ati ons.
For thi s reason, sni pers shoul d assume that 1 MOA i s the equi val ent of 1 i nch
at 100 yards or 3 centi meters at 100 meters. By roundi ng off the angul ar
di spl acement of the MOA i n thi s manner, onl y 1/2 i nch of accuracy at 1,000
yards and 1 centi meter at 1,000 meters are l ost. Thi s manual presents data i n
both the Engl i sh and the metri c system (Tabl e 3-1, pages 3-38 and 3-39),
al l owi ng the sni per to use whi chever one he i s most comfortabl e wi th.
FM 3-05.222
3-38
Figure 3-23. An MOA Measurement
Table 3-1. Metric and English Equivalents Used to Measure MOAs
Metric
1 MOA (cm)
Yards Meters Yards Meters
English
1 MOA (inches)
3 109 100 91 1
4.5 164 150 137 1.5
6 219 200 183 2
7.5 273 250 228 2.5
9 328 300 274 3
10.5 383 350 320 3.5
12 437 400 365 4
13.5 492 450 411 4.5
15 546 500 457 5
16.5 602 550 503 5.5
18 656 600 548 6
19.5 711 650 594 6.5
21 766 700 640 7
22.5 820 750 686 7.5
24 875 800 731 8

FM 3-05.222
3-39
Table 3-1. Metric and English Equivalents Used to Measure MOAs (Continued)
Metric
1 MOA (cm)
Yards Meters Yards Meters
English
1 MOA (inches)
25.5 929 850 777 8.5
27 984 900 823 9
28.5 1,039 950 869 9.5
30 1,094 1,000 914 10
31.5 1,148 1,050 960 10.5
33 1,203 1,100 1,005 11
SIGHT CORRECTIONS
3-115. Wi th the knowl edge of how much the di spl acement of 1 MOA at a
gi ven di stance i s, sni pers can cal cul ate si ght correcti ons. Al l that the sni per
needs to know i s how many MOAs, or fracti ons of an MOA, each si ght
graduati on (known as a cl i ck) equal s. Thi s amount depends on the type of
si ght used.
3-116. To determi ne the amount of correcti on requi red i n MOAs for the
Engl i sh system, the error i n i nches i s di vi ded by the range expressed i n whol e
numbers. The correcti on formul a fol l ows:
numbers) whol e i n (expressed
(i nches)
Range
Error
Minutes =
3-117. To determi ne the amount of correcti on requi red i n MOAs usi ng the
metri c system, the error i n centi meters i s di vi ded by the range expressed i n
whol e numbers, then the resul t i s di vi ded by 3. The correcti on formul a
fol l ows:
3 numbers) whol e i n (expressed
rs) (centi mete

=
Range
Error
Minutes
3-118. There wi l l be ti mes when the i mpact of a shot i s observed, but there i s
no accurate i ndi cati on of how much the error i s i n i nches or centi meters. Such
occasi ons may occur when there i s a great di stance between the ai mi ng poi nt
and the i mpact poi nt or when there i s a l ack of an accurate reference. I t i s
possi bl e to determi ne the di stance of the i mpact poi nt from the POA i n mi l s,
then to convert the mi l s to MOAs. The conversi on factor fol l ows:
1 mil = 3.439 MOA (Thi s i s rounded to 3.5 for fi el d use.)
EXAMPLE: When a round i s fi red, the observer sees the i mpact of the round
to be several feet to the ri ght of the target. He notes the i mpact poi nt and
determi nes i t to be 2 mi l s to the ri ght of the ai mi ng poi nt: 3.5 x 2 = 7 Mi nutes.
3-119. Tabl e 3-2, page 3-40, gi ves the i nch equi val ents of mi l s at the gi ven
ranges of 91 meters to 1,000 meters and 100 yards to 1,000 yards. Thi s data
wi l l ai d the sni per i n computi ng hi s si ght change i n mi l s for a gi ven di stance
FM 3-05.222
3-40
to the target wi th a gi ven mi ss i n esti mated i nches. For exampl e, a mi ss of 28
i nches l eft at 400 yards woul d be a 2-mi l hol d to the ri ght.
Table 3-2. Inch Equivalents of Mils
Range
(Meters/Yards)
Inches
Range
(Meters/Yards)
Inches

91/100 3.6 549/600 22.0
100 m 4.0 600 m 24.0
183/200 7.0 640/740 25.0
200 m 8.0 700 m 27.5
274/300 11.0 731/800 29.0
300 m 12.0 800 m 31.5
365/400 14.0 823/900 32.5
400 m 15.75 900 m 35.5
457/500 18.0 914/1,000 36.0
500 m 20.0 1,000 m 39.0
BALLISTICS
3-120. As appl i ed to sni per marksmanshi p, bal l i sti cs may be defi ned as the
study of the fi ri ng, fl i ght, and effect of ammuni ti on. To ful l y understand
bal l i sti cs, the sni per shoul d be fami l i ar wi th the terms l i sted i n Tabl e 3-3,
page 3-41. Proper executi on of marksmanshi p fundamental s and a thorough
knowl edge of bal l i sti cs ensure the successful compl eti on of the mi ssi on.
Tabl es and formul as i n thi s secti on shoul d be used onl y as gui del i nes si nce
every ri fl e performs di fferentl y. Mai ntai ni ng extensi ve bal l i sti cs data
eventual l y resul ts i n a wel l -kept data book and provi des the sni per wi th
actual knowl edge gai ned through experi ence. Appendi x H provi des addi ti onal
bal l i sti cs data.
APPLIED BALLISTICS
3-121. Bal l i sti cs can be broken down i nto three major areas. I nteri or or
i nternal bal l i sti cs deal s wi th the bul l et i n the ri fl e from pri mer detonati on
unti l i t l eaves the muzzl e of the weapon. Exteri or and external bal l i sti cs pi cks
up after the bul l et l eaves the muzzl e of the weapon and extends through the
trajectory unti l the bul l et i mpacts on the target or POA. Termi nal bal l i sti cs i s
the study of what the bul l et does upon i mpact wi th the target. The
effecti veness of the termi nal bal l i sti cs depends upon
Termi nal vel oci ty.
Locati on of the hi t.
Bul l et desi gn and constructi on.
FM 3-05.222
3-41
Table 3-3. Ballistics Terminology
Muzzle Velocity
The speed of a bullet as it leaves the rifle barrel, measured in fps. It varies according to
various factors, such as ammunition type and lot number, temperature, and humidity.
Line of Sight A straight line from the eye through the aiming devices to the POA.
Line of Departure The line defined by the bore of the rifle or the path the bullet would take without gravity.
Trajectory The path of the bullet as it flies to the target.
Midrange
Trajectory
The high point the bullet reaches half way to the target. This point must be known to
engage a target that requires firing underneath an overhead obstacle, such as a bridge
or a tree. Inattention to midrange trajectory may cause the sniper to hit the obstacle
instead of the target.
Maximum
Ordinate
The highest point of elevation that a bullet reaches during its time of flight for a given
distance.
Bullet Drop How far the bullet drops from the line of departure to the POI.
Time of Flight The amount of time it takes for the bullet to exit the rifle and reach the target.
Retained
Velocity
The speed of the bullet when it reaches the target. Due to drag, the velocity will be
reduced.
TARGET MATERIAL OR CONSTRUCTION
3-122. When i t i s fi red, a bul l et travel s a strai ght path i n the bore of the ri fl e
as l ong as the bul l et i s confi ned i n the barrel . As soon as the bul l et i s free of
thi s constrai nt (exi ts the barrel ), i t i mmedi atel y begi ns to fal l due to the
effects of gravi ty, and i ts moti on i s retarded due to ai r resi stance. The path of
the bul l et through the ai r i s cal l ed the bul l ets trajectory.
3-123. I f the barrel i s hori zontal , the forward moti on i mparted to the bul l et
by the detonati on of the cartri dge wi l l cause i t to travel i n the di recti on of
poi nt A, but ai r resi stance and the pul l of gravi ty wi l l cause i t to stri ke
poi nt B (Fi gure 3-24). As soon as the bul l et i s free from the constrai nt of the
barrel , i t begi ns to pul l from the hori zontal .
Figure 3-24. Bullets Trajectory When the Sniper Fires the Rifle Horizontally
3-124. For poi nt A to be struck, the barrel of the ri fl e must be el evated to
some predetermi ned angl e (Fi gure 3-25, page 3-42). The bul l ets i ni ti al
FM 3-05.222
3-42
i mpul se wi l l be i n the di recti on of poi nt C. However, because of the i ni ti al
angl e, the bul l et wi l l fal l to poi nt A, due agai n to ai r resi stance and gravi ty.
Thi s i ni ti al angl e i s known as the angl e of departure.
Figure 3-25. Bullets Trajectory When the Sniper Fires the Rifle at an Elevated Angle
3-125. The angl e of departure i s set by the si ghts and establ i shes the shape
of the trajectory. The trajectory vari es wi th the range to the target. For any
gi ven range, the angl e of departure vari es wi th the determi ni ng factors of the
trajectory. The form of the trajectory i s i nfl uenced by
The i ni ti al vel oci ty (muzzl e vel oci ty).
The angl e of departure.
Gravi ty.
Ai r resi stance.
The rotati on of the projecti l e (bul l et) about i ts axi s.
3-126. The rel ati onshi p between i ni ti al vel oci ty and ai r resi stance i s that the
greater the amount of ai r resi stance the bul l et must overcome, the faster the
bul l et sl ows down as i t travel s through the ai r. A bul l et wi th a l ower i ni ti al
vel oci ty wi l l be retarded l ess by ai r resi stance and wi l l retai n a greater
proporti on of i ts i ni ti al vel oci ty over a gi ven di stance. Thi s rel ati onshi p i s
i mportant i n that a l i ght projecti l e wi th a hi gher i ni ti al (or short range)
vel oci ty wi l l have a fl atter i ni ti al trajectory but wi l l have l ess i ni ti al and
retai ned energy wi th whi ch to i ncorporate the target, wi l l be defl ected more
by wi nd, and wi l l have a steeper trajectory at l onger ranges. A comparati vel y
heavy projecti l e wi l l have a l ower i ni ti al vel oci ty and a steeper i ni ti al
trajectory, wi l l retai n i ts energy over a great di stance (retai ned energy i s
proporti onal to the mass of the projecti l e), wi l l be defl ected l ess by wi nd, and
wi l l have a fl atter l ong-range trajectory.
3-127. Angl e of departure i s the angl e to whi ch the muzzl e of the ri fl e must
be el evated above the hori zontal l i ne i n order for the bul l et to stri ke a di stant
poi nt. When the bul l et departs the muzzl e of the ri fl e, i t i mmedi atel y begi ns
to fal l to earth i n rel ati on to the angl e of departure, due to the constant pul l
of gravi ty. The angl e of departure i ncreases the hei ght the bul l et must fal l
before i t reaches the ground. I f a ri fl e barrel were set hori zontal l y i n a
vacuum, a bul l et fi red from the barrel woul d reach the ground at a di stant
poi nt at the same moment that a bul l et merel y dropped from the same hei ght
as the barrel woul d reach the ground. Despi te the hori zontal moti on of the
FM 3-05.222
3-43
bul l et, i ts vel oci ty i n the verti cal pl ane i s constant (due to the constant effect
of gravi ty). However, angl e of departure i n the ai r i s di rectl y rel ated to the
ti me of fl i ght of the projecti l e i n that medi um. The greater the angl e at whi ch
the projecti l e departs the muzzl e, the l onger i t wi l l remai n i n the ai r and the
further i t wi l l travel before i t stri kes the ground. However, the effect of
gravi ty causes the bul l et to begi n to l ose di stance at the 33-degree poi nt.
3-128. The angl e of depar tur e i s not constant. Al though the angl e of
depar tur e may r emai n fi xed, a number of var i abl es wi l l i nfl uence the
angl e of depar tur e i n a ser i es of shots fi xed at the same gi ven di stance.
The di ffer ences i n the i nter nal bal l i sti cs of a gi ven l ot of ammuni ti on wi l l
have an effect. A muzzl e vel oci ty, wi thi n a pr oven l ot, wi l l often var y as
much as 60 feet per second between shots. I mper fecti ons i n the human
eye wi l l cause the angl es of depar tur e of successi ve shots to be
i nconsi stent. I mper fecti ons i n the weapon, such as faul ty beddi ng, wor n
bor e, or wor n si ghts, ar e var i abl es. Er r or s i n the way the r i fl e i s hel d or
canted wi l l affect the angl e of depar tur e. These ar e just a few factor s that
cause di ffer ences i n the angl e of depar tur e and ar e the mai n r easons why
successi ve shots under seemi ngl y i denti cal condi ti ons do not hi t at the
same poi nt on the tar get.
3-129. Gravi tys i nfl uence on the shape of a bul l ets trajectory i s a constant
force. I t nei ther i ncreases nor decreases over ti me or di stance. I t i s present,
but gi ven the vari abl e dynami cs i nfl uenci ng the fl i ght of a bul l et, i t i s
uni mportant. Gi ven that both ai r resi stance and gravi ty i nfl uence the moti on
of a projecti l e, the i ni ti al vel oci ty of the projecti l e and the ai r resi stance are
i nterdependent and di rectl y i nfl uence the shape of the trajectory.
3-130. The si ngl e most i mportant vari abl e affecti ng the fl i ght of a bul l et i s
ai r resi stance. I t i s not gravi ty that determi nes the shape of a bul l ets
trajectory. I f gravi ty al one were the determi ni ng factor, the trajectory woul d
have the shape of a parabol a, where the angl e of fal l woul d be the same (or
very nearl y so) as the angl e of departure. However, the resul t of ai r
resi stance i s that the shape of the trajectory i s an el l i pse, where the angl e of
fal l i s steeper than the angl e of departure.
3-131. The l ands and grooves i n the bore of the ri fl e i mpart a rotati onal
moti on to the bul l et about i ts own axi s. Thi s rotati onal moti on causes the
projecti l e (as i t travel s through the ai r) to shi ft i n the di recti on of rotati on (i n
al most al l cases to the ri ght). Thi s moti on causes a dri ft that i s caused by ai r
resi stance. A spi nni ng projecti l e behaves preci sel y l i ke a gyroscope. Pressure
appl i ed to the front of the projecti l e (ai r resi stance) retards i ts forward
moti on but does not si gni fi cantl y upset i ts stabi l i ty. However, upward
pressure appl i ed to the undersi de of the projecti l e (due to i ts downward travel
caused by gravi ty) causes i t to dri ft i n the di recti on of spi n. Thi s dri ft i s
rel ati vel y i nsi gni fi cant at al l but the greatest ranges (more than 1,000 yards).
3-132. Due to the combi ned i nfl uences just di scussed, the trajectory of the
bul l et fi rst crosses the LOS wi th a scarcel y percepti bl e curve. The trajectory
conti nues to ri se to a poi nt a l i ttl e more than hal fway to the target, cal l ed the
maxi mum ordi nate, beyond whi ch i t curves downward wi th a constantl y
i ncreasi ng curve (possi bl y recrossi ng the LOS) unti l i t hi ts the target (or
ground). The poi nt where the LOS meets the target i s the POA. The poi nt
FM 3-05.222
3-44
where the bul l et (trajectory) stri kes the target i s the POI . Theoreti cal l y, the
POA and the POI shoul d coi nci de. I n practi cal terms, because of one or more
of the i nfl uences di scussed, they rarel y do. The greater the ski l l of the sni per
and the more perfect the ri fl e and ammuni ti on, the more often these two
poi nts wi l l coi nci de (Fi gure 3-26).
Figure 3-26. Snipers Line of Sight With Fall Angles at Various Distances
3-133. The part of the trajectory between the muzzl e and the maxi mum
ordi nate i s cal l ed the ri si ng branch of the trajectory; the part beyond the
maxi mum ordi nate i s cal l ed the fal l i ng branch of the trajectory. Sni pers are
most concerned wi th the fal l i ng branch because thi s part of the trajectory
contai ns the target and the ground i n i ts vi ci ni ty. I n computi ng the hei ght of
the trajectory, assumi ng the LOS i s hori zontal and at regul ar i nterval s
(usual l y 100 yards), the sni per measures and records the hei ght of the
trajectory as the ordi nate. The di stance from the muzzl e to the ordi nate i s
known as the absci ssa. The di stance i n front of the muzzl e, wi thi n whi ch the
bul l et does not ri se hi gher than the target, i s cal l ed the danger space of the
ri si ng branch of the trajectory. The fal l i ng branch of the trajectory al so has a
danger space. The danger space of the fal l i ng branch i s the poi nt where the
bul l et fal l s i nto the hei ght of the target and conti nues to the ground.
3-134. Assumi ng that the POA i s taken at the center of the target, the extent
of the danger space depends on the fol l owi ng:
Hei ght of the sni perwhether he i s standi ng, kneel i ng, or prone.
Hei ght of the targetwhether he i s standi ng, kneel i ng, or prone.
Fl atness of the trajectorythe bal l i sti c properti es of the cartri dge
used.
Angl e of the LOSabove or bel ow the hori zontal .
Sl ope of the groundwhere the target resi des.
3-135. The POA al so has a si gni fi cant i nfl uence on the extent of the danger
space. I f the sni per takes the POA at the top of the target, the total danger
FM 3-05.222
3-45
space wi l l l i e enti rel y behi nd the target. I f he takes the POA at the foot of the
target, the total danger space wi l l l i e enti rel y i n front of the target. Thus, the
extent of the total danger space, i ncl udi ng the target, wi l l be determi ned by
where the POA i s taken on the target. Onl y when the POA i s at the center of
the target wi l l the total danger space (i n rel ati ve terms) extend an equal
di stance i n front of and behi nd the target.
EFFECTS ON TRAJ ECTORY
3-136. Mastery of marksmanshi p fundamental s and fi el d ski l l s are not the
onl y requi rements for bei ng a sni per. Some of the factors that have an
i nfl uence on the trajectory i ncl ude the fol l owi ng:
Gravity. The sni per woul d not have a maxi mum range wi thout gravi ty;
a fi red bul l et woul d conti nue to move much the same as i tems fl oati ng
i n space. As soon as the bul l et exi ts the muzzl e of the weapon, gravi ty
begi ns to pul l i t down, requi ri ng the sni per to use hi s el evati on
adjustment. At extended ranges, the sni per actual l y ai ms the muzzl e of
hi s ri fl e above hi s LOS and l ets gravi ty pul l the bul l et down i nto the
target. Gravi ty i s al ways present, so the sni per must compensate for i t
through el evati on adjustments or hol dover techni ques.
Drag. I t i s the sl owi ng effect the atmosphere has on the bul l et. Thi s
effect ei ther i ncreases or decreases accordi ng to the ai rthat i s, the
l ess dense the ai r, the l ess drag and vi ce versa. Factors affecti ng drag
and ai r densi ty are
Temperature. The hi gher the temperature, the l ess dense the ai r.
I f the sni per zeroes at 60 degrees F and he fi res at 80 degrees F,
the ai r i s l ess dense, thereby causi ng an i ncrease i n muzzl e
vel oci ty and a hi gher i mpact. A 20-degree change equal s a
1-mi nute el evati on change on the ri fl e. Thi s general l y appl i es for
a 7.62-mm weapon.
Altitude/ barometric pressure. Si nce the ai r pressure i s l ess at
hi gher al ti tudes, the ai r i s l ess dense and there i s l ess drag.
Therefore, the bul l et i s more effi ci ent and i mpacts hi gher. Tabl e
3-4, page 3-46, shows the appropri ate effect of change of i mpact
from sea l evel to 10,000 feet i f the ri fl e i s zeroed at sea l evel .
I mpact wi l l be the POA at sea l evel . For exampl e, a ri fl e zeroed at
sea l evel and fi red at 700 meters at 5,000 feet wi l l hi t 1.6 mi nutes
hi gh.
Humidity. Humi di ty vari es al ong wi th the al ti tude and
temperature. Probl ems can occur i f extreme humi di ty changes
exi st i n the area of operati ons. When humi di ty goes up, i mpact
goes down and vi ce versa. Keepi ng a good data book duri ng
trai ni ng and acqui ri ng experi ence are the best teachers.
Bullet efficiency. Thi s term refers to a bul l ets bal l i sti c coeffi ci ent.
The i magi nary perfect bul l et i s rated as bei ng 1.00. Match bul l ets
range from .500 to about .600. The M118 173-grai n match bul l et
i s rated at .515. Tabl e 3-5, page 3-46, l i sts other ammuni ti on,
bul l et types, bal l i sti cs, and the vel oci ty for each.
Wind. The effects of wi nd are di scussed l ater i n thi s chapter.
FM 3-05.222
3-46
Table 3-4. Point of Impact Rise at New Elevation (Minutes)
Range (Meters) 2,500 Feet * 5,000 Feet * 10,000 Feet *
100 0.05 0.08 0.13
200 0.1 0.2 0.34
300 0.2 0.4 0.6
400 0.4 0.5 0.9
500 0.5 0.9 1.4
600 0.6 1.0 1.8
700 1.0 1.6 2.4
800 1.3 1.9 3.3
900 1.6 2.8 4.8
1,000 1.8 3.7 6.0
* Above Sea Level
Table 3-5. Selected Ballistics Information
Ammunition Bullet Type Ballistic Coefficient Muzzle Velocity
M193 55 FMJBT .260 3,200 fps
M180 147 FMJBT .400 2,808 fps
M118 173 FMJBT .515 2,610 fps
M852 168 HPBT .475 2,675 fps
M72 173 FMJBT .515 2,640 fps
SHOT GROUPS
3-137. I f a ri fl e i s fi red many ti mes under uni form condi ti ons, the bul l ets
stri ki ng the target wi l l group themsel ves about a central poi nt cal l ed the
center of i mpact and wi l l form a ci rcul ar or el l i pti cal group. The di mensi ons
and shape of thi s shot group wi l l vary dependi ng on the di stance of the target
from the sni per. The ci rcl e or el l i pse formed by these shots constantl y
i ncreases i n si ze wi th the range. The l i ne connecti ng the centers of i mpact of
al l shots at al l ranges measured i s cal l ed the mean trajectory, and the core
contai ni ng the ci rcumferences of al l the ci rcl es woul d mark the l i mi ts of the
sheaf. The mean trajectory i s the average trajectory. Al l ordi nates are
compared to i t, and angl es of departure and fal l refer onl y to i t.
3-138. The pattern on the target made by al l of the bul l ets i s cal l ed the shot
group. I f the shot group i s recei ved on a verti cal target, i t i s cal l ed a verti cal
shot group and i s ci rcul ar. I f the group i s recei ved on a hori zontal target, i t i s
cal l ed a hori zontal shot group and i s el l i pti cal A l arge number of shots wi l l
form a shot group havi ng the general shape of an el l i pse, wi th i ts major axi s
verti cal . The shots wi l l be symmetri cal l y grouped about the center of i mpact,
not necessari l y about the POA. They wi l l be grouped more densel y near the
center of i mpact than at the edges, and hal f of al l the shots wi l l be found i n a
FM 3-05.222
3-47
stri p approxi matel y 1/4 the si ze of the whol e group. The wi dth of thi s stri p i s
cal l ed the mean verti cal (or the 50 percent di spersi on) i f measured verti cal l y
or the mean l ateral i f measured l ateral l y.
3-139. When consi deri ng the hori zontal shot group, the mean l ateral
di spersi on retai ns i ts same si gni fi cance, but what i s cal l ed the mean verti cal
di spersi on on a verti cal target i s known as the mean l ongi tudi nal di spersi on
on a hori zontal target. There i s a si gni fi cant rel ati onshi p between the si ze or
di mensi ons of a shot group and the si ze or di mensi ons of the target fi red at.
Wi th a shot group of fi xed di mensi ons, when the target i s made suffi ci entl y
l arge, al l shots fi red wi l l stri ke the target. Conversel y, wi th a very smal l
target, onl y a porti on of the shots fi red wi l l stri ke the target. The rest of the
shots wi l l pass over, under, or to the si des of the target.
3-140. I t i s evi dent that the practi cal appl i cati on of exteri or bal l i sti cshi tti ng
a target of vari abl e di mensi ons at unknown di stancesi s one probabi l i ty of a
shot group of fi xed di mensi ons (the sni pers groupi ng abi l i ty) conformi ng to
the di mensi ons of a gi ven target. Added to thi s probabi l i ty i s the abi l i ty of
the sni per to compensate for envi ronmental condi ti ons and mai ntai n an
accurate zero.
3-141. One of the greatest paradoxes of sni pi ng i s that an average
marksman has a sl i ghtl y hi gher chance of hi tti ng targets at unknown
di stances than a good marksman, i f thei r respecti ve abi l i ti es to judge
di stances, determi ne effects of envi ronmental condi ti ons, and mai ntai n an
accurate zero are equal . (The cl assi fi cati on of good marksman and average
marksman refers onl y to the sni pers groupi ng abi l i ty.) A good marksman
who has mi scal cul ated wi nd or who i s not accuratel y zeroed woul d expect to
mi ss the target enti rel y. An average marksman, under i denti cal condi ti ons,
woul d expect to obtai n at l east a few hi ts on the target; or i f onl y one shot was
fi red, woul d have a sl i ght chance of obtai ni ng a fi rst-round hi t. The above
statement does not mean that average marksmen make better sni pers. I t
does mean that the better the i ndi vi dual shoots, the more preci se hi s abi l i ty
to judge di stance, cal cul ate wi nd, and mai ntai n hi s zero must be.
3-142. Practi cal exteri or bal l i sti cs i s the state of appl yi ng a shot group or a
sheaf of shots over an esti mated di stance agai nst a target of unknown or
esti mated di mensi ons. I t al so i ncl udes esti mati ng the probabi l i ty of obtai ni ng
a hi t wi th a si ngl e shot contai ned wi thi n the sheaf of shots previ ousl y
determi ned through shot-group practi ces.
INFLUENCE OF GROUND ON THE SHOT GROUP (SHEAF OF SHOTS)
3-143. When fi ri ng at targets of unknown di stances under fi el d condi ti ons,
the sni per must take i nto consi derati on the l ay of the ground and how i t wi l l
affect hi s probabl e chances of hi tti ng the target. General l y, the ground a
sni per fi res over wi l l
Be l evel .
Sl ope upward.
Sl ope downward.
FM 3-05.222
3-48
3-144. The extent of the danger space depends on the
Rel ati onshi p between the trajectory and the LOS, angl e of fal l , and the
range curvature of the trajectory.
Hei ght of the target.
Poi nt of ai m.
Poi nt of i mpact.
NOTE: The l onger the range, the shorter the danger space, due to the
i ncreasi ng curvature of the trajectory.
3-145. The di spl aci ng of the center of i mpact from the center of the target i s
a factor that the sni per must al so consi der. I t wi l l often be the control l i ng
factor. The danger space at ranges under 700 yards i s affected by the posi ti on
of the sni per (hei ght of the muzzl e above the ground). The danger space
i ncreases as the hei ght of the muzzl e decreases. At l onger ranges, no materi al
effect i s fel t from di fferent posi ti ons of the sni per.
3-146. The i nfl uence of the ground on computi ng hi t probabi l i ty on a target
at unknown di stances resul ts i n the necessi ty of di sti ngui shi ng between
danger space and swept space (whi ch are functi ons of the mean trajectory),
and between these (danger space and swept space) and the dangerous zone
(whi ch i s a functi on of the whol e or a part of the cone of fi re). For a gi ven
hei ght of target and POA, the danger space i s of fi xed di mensi ons. The swept
space vari es i n rel ati on wi th the sl ope of the ground. Swept space i s shorter
on ri si ng ground and l onger on fal l i ng ground than the danger space. Al l the
functi ons of the danger zone, such as the densi ty of the group at a gi ven
di stance from the center of i mpact, are correspondi ngl y modi fi ed.
SNIPER DATA BOOK
3-147. The sni per data book contai ns a col l ecti on of data cards. The sni per
uses these cards to record fi ri ng resul ts and al l el ements that have an effect
on fi ri ng the weapon. Thi s i nformati on coul d i ncl ude weather condi ti ons or
even the sni pers atti tude on a parti cul ar day. The sni per can refer to thi s
i nformati on l ater to understand hi s weapon, the weather effects, and hi s
fi ri ng abi l i ty on a gi ven day. One of the most i mportant i tems of i nformati on
he wi l l record i s the col d barrel zero of hi s weapon. A col d barrel zero refers to
the fi rst round fi red from the weapon. I t i s cri ti cal that the sni per know thi s
by fi ri ng the fi rst round at 200 meters. When the barrel warms up, l ater shots
may begi n to group 1 or 2 mi nutes hi gher or l ower, dependi ng on ri fl e
speci fi cs. Fi gure 3-27, page 3-49, shows a sampl e sni per data card.
3-148. When used properl y, the data card wi l l provi de the necessary
i nformati on for i ni ti al si ght setti ngs at each di stance or range. I t al so
provi des a basi s for anal yzi ng the performance of the sni per and hi s ri fl e and
i s a val uabl e ai d i n maki ng bol d and accurate si ght changes. The most
competent sni per woul d not be abl e to consi stentl y hi t the center of the target
i f he were unabl e to anal yze hi s performance or i f he had no record of hi s
performance or condi ti ons affecti ng hi s fi ri ng.
FM 3-05.222
3-49
Figure 3-27. Sample of a Snipers Data Card
ENTRIES
3-149. The three phases i n wri ti ng i nformati on on the data card are before
firing, during firing, and after firing. Each phase requi res speci fi c data and
provi des an excel l ent l earni ng tool for future trai ni ng. Each sni per shoul d
compl ete the fol l owi ng i nformati on for each phase and anal yze hi s
performance to stay profi ci ent at al l ti mes.
Phase IBefore Firing
3-150. Before the sni per fi res, he shoul d record the fol l owi ng data:
Range. The di stance to the target.
Rifle and telescope number. The seri al numbers of the ri fl e and tel escope.
Date. Date of fi ri ng.
Ammunition. Type and l ot number of ammuni ti on.
Light. Amount of l i ght (overcast, cl ear).
Mirage. Whether a mi rage can be seen or not (bad, fai r, good).
Temperature. Temperature on the range.
Hour. Ti me of fi ri ng.
FM 3-05.222
3-50
Light (diagram). He draws an arrow i n the di recti on the l i ght i s shi ni ng.
Wind. He draws an arrow i n the di recti on that the wi nd i s bl owi ng and
records i ts average vel oci ty and cardi nal di recti on (N, NE, S, SW).
Phase IIDuring Firing
3-151. The sni per shoul d al so record speci fi c data duri ng fi ri ng. Thi s
i nformati on i ncl udes the fol l owi ng:
Elevation. El evati on setti ng used and any correcti on needed. (For
exampl e: The target di stance i s 600 meters; the sni per sets the
el evati on di al to 6. The sni per fi res and the round hi ts the target 6
i nches l ow of center. He then adds 1 mi nute [one cl i ck] of el evati on.)
Windage. Wi ndage setti ng used and any correcti on needed. (For
exampl e: The sni per fi res at a 600 meter target wi th a wi ndage setti ng
on 0; the round i mpacts 15 i nches ri ght of center. He wi l l then add 2 1/2
mi nutes l eft to the wi ndage di al [L/2 1/2].)
Shot. The col umn of i nformati on about a parti cul ar shot. (For exampl e:
Col umn 1 i s for the fi rst round; col umn 10 i s for the tenth round.)
Wind. Wi ndage used. (For exampl e: L/2, 1/2, O, R/1/2.) Thi s i s for i ron
si ghts or compensati on for spi n dri ft. Mi l hol ds are used for the scope.
Call. Where the ai mi ng poi nt was when the weapon fi red.
Large silhouette or target representation. Used to record the exact i mpact
of the round on the target. Thi s i s recorded by wri ti ng the shots number
on the l arge si l houette that i s i n the same pl ace i t hi t the target.
Phase IIIAfter Firing
3-152. The sni per al so records data after fi ri ng that wi l l enabl e hi m to better
understand hi s resul ts and to i mprove hi s performance. Thi s data i ncl udes:
Comments about the weapon, fi ri ng condi ti ons (ti me al l owed for fi re),
or hi s condi ti on (nervous, fel t bad, fel t good).
Corrected no-wi nd zero. Show the el evati on and wi ndage i n mi nutes
and cl i cks that was correct for thi s posi ti on and di stance under
no-wi nd condi ti ons.
Remarks. Note any equi pment, performance, weather condi ti ons, or
range condi ti ons that had a good or bad effect on the fi ri ng resul ts.
ANALYSIS
3-153. When the sni per l eaves the fi ri ng l i ne, he compares weather
condi ti ons to the i nformati on needed to hi t the POA or POI . Si nce he fi res i n
al l types of weather condi ti ons, he must be aware of temperature, l i ght,
mi rage, and wi nd. He must al so consi der the fol l owi ng possi bi l i ti es:
Compare si ght setti ngs wi th previ ous fi ri ng sessi ons. I f the sni per
al ways has to fi ne-tune for wi ndage or el evati on, there i s a chance he
needs a si ght change (sl i p a scal e).
Compare the ammuni ti on by l ot number for the best ri fl e and
ammuni ti on combi nati on.
FM 3-05.222
3-51
Compar e al l gr oups fi r ed under each condi ti on. Check the l ow and
hi gh shots as wel l as those to the l eft and the r i ght of the mai n
gr oup. Of cour se, l ess di sper si on i s desi r ed. I f gr oups ar e ti ght, they
ar e easi l y moved to the center of the tar get; i f scatter ed, ther e i s a
pr obl em. Check the tel escope focus and ensur e that the r i fl e i s
cl eaned cor r ectl y. Remar ks i n the data book wi l l al so hel p.
Make correcti ons. Record correcti ons i n the data book, such as posi ti on
and si ght adjustment i nformati on, to ensure retenti on. The sni per
shoul d compare hi ts to cal l s. I f they agree, the resul t i s an i ndi cati on
that the zero i s correct and that any compensati on for the effects of the
weather i s correct. I f the cal l s and hi ts are consi stentl y out of the
target, si ght adjustment or more posi ti on and tri gger control work
i s necessary.
3-154. The sni per shoul d compare the weather condi ti ons and l ocati on of the
groups on the l atest data sheet to previ ous data sheets to determi ne how much
and i n whi ch di recti on the si ghts shoul d be moved to compensate for the
weather condi ti ons. I f better resul ts are obtai ned wi th a di fferent si ght pi cture
under an unusual l i ght condi ti on, he shoul d use thi s si ght pi cture whenever
fi ri ng under that parti cul ar l i ght condi ti on. A di fferent si ght pi cture may
necessi tate adjusti ng the si ghts. After establ i shi ng how much to compensate for
the effects of weather or whi ch si ght pi cture works best under vari ous l i ght
condi ti ons, the sni per shoul d commi t thi s i nformati on to memory.
3-155. The sni per shoul d keep the trai ni ng and zeroi ng data sheets for
future reference. Rather than carry the fi ri ng data sheets duri ng sni per
trai ni ng exerci ses or combat, he can carry or tape on hi s weapon stock a l i st of
the el evati on and wi ndage zeros at vari ous ranges.
ZEROING THE RIFLE
3-156. A zero i s the al i gnment of the si ghts wi th the bore of the ri fl e so that
the bul l et wi l l i mpact on the target at the desi red POA. However, the ai mi ng
poi nt, the si ght, and the bore wi l l coi nci de at two poi nts. These poi nts are
cal l ed the zero.
3-157. Dependi ng upon the si tuati on, a sni per may have to del i ver an
effecti ve shot at ranges up to 1,000 meters or more. Thi s need requi res the
sni per to zero hi s ri fl e (wi th tel escopi c and i ron si ghts) at most of the ranges
that he may be expected to fi re. When usi ng tel escopi c si ghts, he needs onl y
zero for el evati on at 300 meters (100 meters for wi ndage) and confi rms at the
more di stant ranges. Hi s success depends on a one round, one hi t
phi l osophy. He may not get a second shot. Therefore, he must accuratel y zero
hi s ri fl e so that when appl yi ng the fundamental s he can be assured of an
accurate hi t.
CHARACTERISTICS OF THE SNIPER RIFLE IRON SIGHTS
3-158. The i ron si ghts of the M24 are adjustabl e for both wi ndage and
el evati on. Whi l e these si ghts are a backup to the tel escope and used onl y
under extraordi nary ci rcumstances, i t i s i n the sni pers best i nterest to be
ful l y capabl e wi th them. I ron si ghts are excel l ent for devel opi ng
FM 3-05.222
3-52
marksmanshi p ski l l s. They force the sni per to concentrate on si ght
al i gnment, si ght pi cture, and fol l ow-through.
3-159. The M24 has a hooded front si ght that has i nterchangeabl e i nserts.
These vari ous-si zed i nserts range from ci rcul ar di scs to posts. The sni per
shoul d use the post front si ght to devel op the si ght pi cture that i s consi stent
wi th the majori ty of U.S. systems. The rear si ght i s the Pal ma match si ght
and has el evati on and wi ndage adjustments i n 1/4 MOA. The el evati on knob
i s on the top of the si ght and the wi ndage knob i s on the ri ght si de of the
si ght. Turni ng the el evati on knob i n the di recti on marked UP rai ses the
POI , and turni ng the wi ndage knob i n the di recti on marked R moves the
POI to the ri ght.
ADJ USTMENT OF THE REAR SIGHT
3-160. The sni per determi nes mechani cal wi ndage zero by al i gni ng the si ght
base i ndex l i ne wi th the centerl i ne of the wi ndage gauge. The l ocati on of the
movabl e i ndex l i ne i ndi cates the wi ndage used or the wi ndage zero of the
ri fl e. For exampl e, i f the i ndex l i ne i s to the l eft of the centerl i ne of the gauge,
thi s poi nt i s a l eft readi ng. The sni per determi nes wi ndage zero by si mpl y
counti ng the number of cl i cks back to the mechani cal zero. He determi nes the
el evati on of any range by counti ng the number of cl i cks down to mechani cal
el evati on zero.
3-161. Si ght adjustment or mani pul ati on i s a very i mportant aspect of
trai ni ng that must be thoroughl y l earned by the sni per. He can accompl i sh
thi s goal best through expl anati on and practi cal work i n mani pul ati ng
the si ghts.
3-162. The sni per must move the rear si ght i n the di recti on that the shot or
shot group i s to be moved. To move the rear si ght or a shot group to the ri ght,
he turns the wi ndage knob cl ockwi se. The rul e to remember i s push leftpull
right. To rai se the el evati on or a shot group, he turns the el evati on knob
cl ockwi se. To l ower i t, he turns countercl ockwi se.
ZEROING THE SNIPER RIFLE USING THE IRON SIGHTS
3-163. The most preci se method of zeroi ng a sni per ri fl e wi th the i ron si ghts
i s to fi re the ri fl e and adjust the si ghts to hi t a gi ven poi nt at a speci fi c range.
The ri fl e i s zeroed i n 100-meter i ncrements from 100 to 900 meters. The
targets are pl aced at each range, then the sni per fi res one or more fi ve-round
shot groups at each ai mi ng poi nt. He must adjust the rear si ght unti l the
center of the shot group and the ai mi ng poi nt coi nci de at each range. The
i ni ti al zeroi ng for each range shoul d be accompl i shed from the prone
supported posi ti on. The sni per can then zero from those posi ti ons and ranges
that are most practi cal . There i s no need to zero from the l east steady
posi ti ons at l onger ranges.
3-164. The sni per shoul d use the fol l owi ng zeroi ng procedure for M24
i ron si ghts:
Elevation knob adjustments. Turni ng the el evati on knob l ocated on the
top of the rear si ght i n the UP di recti on rai ses the POI ; turni ng the knob
downward l owers the POI . Each cl i ck of adjustment equal s 0.25 MOA.
FM 3-05.222
3-53
Windage knob adjustments. Turni ng the wi ndage knob l ocated on the
ri ght si de of the rear si ght i n the R di recti on moves the i mpact of the
round to the ri ght; turni ng the knob i n the opposi te di recti on moves the
POI to the l eft. Each cl i ck of adjustment equal s 0.25 MOA. Wi ndage
shoul d be zeroed at 100 meters to negate the effects of wi nd.
Calibrating rear sight. After zeroi ng the si ghts to the ri fl e, the sni per
l oosens the el evati on and wi ndage i ndi cator pl ate screws wi th the
wrench provi ded. He shoul d al i gn the 0 on the pl ate wi th the 0 on
the si ght body, then reti ghtens the pl ate screws. Next, he l oosens the
setscrews i n each knob and al i gns the 0 of the knob wi th the
reference l i ne on the si ght. He presses the si ght and ti ghtens the
setscrews. The sni per then sharpens or softens the cl i ck to preference
by l ooseni ng or ti ghteni ng the spri ng screws equal l y on the knob. He
must now count down the number of cl i cks to the bottom of the si ght.
He then records thi s number and uses i t as a reference whenever he
bel i eves there has been a probl em wi th hi s rear si ght. He onl y needs to
bottom out the si ght and count up the number of cl i cks requi red to the
desi red zero. Wi ndage and el evati on correcti ons can now be made, and
the sni per can return qui ckl y to the zero standard. El evati on shoul d be
zeroed at 200 meters to i ncrease the accuracy of the zero.
Graduations. There are 12 di vi si ons or 3 MOA adjustments i n each
knob revol uti on. Total el evati on adjustment i s 60 MOAs and total
wi ndage adjustment i s 36 MOAs. Adjustment scal es are of the verni er
type. Each graduati on on the scal e pl ate equal s 3 MOAs. Each
graduati on on the si ght base scal e equal s 1 MOA.
3-165. To use the scal es, the sni per
Notes the poi nt at whi ch graduati ons on both scal es are al i gned (Fi gure
3-28, page 3-54).
Counts the number of ful l 3 MOA graduati ons from 0 on the scal e
pl ate to 0 on the si ght base scal e.
Adds thi s fi gure to the number of MOAs from 0 on the bottom scal e to
the poi nt where the two graduati ons are al i gned.
NOTE: The Redfi el d Pal ma si ght i s the i ssued si ght of the SWS and no l onger
avai l abl e commerci al l y.
CHARACTERISTICS OF THE SNIPER RIFLE TELESCOPIC SIGHT
3-166. Sni per tel escopi c si ghts have turret assembl i es for the adjustment of
el evati on and wi ndage. The upper assembl y i s the el evati on and the assembl y
on the ri ght i s for wi ndage. These assembl i es have knobs that are marked for
correcti ons of a gi ven val ue i n the di recti on i ndi cated by the arrow. The M3A
and the ART seri es use a si mi l ar system for zeroi ng. The sni per moves the
knobs i n the di recti on that he wants the shot group to move on the target.
3-167. The M3A i s graduated to provi de 1 MOA of adjustment for each cl i ck
of i ts el evati on knob and 1/2 MOA of adjustment for each cl i ck of i ts wi ndage
knob. Thi s si ght i s desi gned to provi de audi bl e and tacti l e cl i cks. The
el evati on turret knob i s marked i n 100-meter i ncrements from 100 to 500,
and 50-meter i ncrements from 500 to 1,000.
FM 3-05.222
3-54
Figure 3-28. Adjusting the Elevation and Windage on the Rear Sight Assembly
ZEROING THE SNIPER WEAPON SYSTEM WITH THE TELESCOPIC SIGHT
3-168. The most preci se method of zeroi ng the sni per ri fl e for el evati on usi ng
the scope si ght i s to fi re and adjust the si ght to hi t a gi ven poi nt at 200
meters. For wi ndage, the scope shoul d be zeroed at 100 meters. Thi s poi nt
rul es out as much wi nd effect as possi bl e. After zeroi ng at 100 meters, the
sni per shoul d confi rm hi s zero out to 900 meters i n 100-meter i ncrements.
The bul l s-eye-type target (200-yard targets, NSN SR1-6920-00-900-8204) can
be used for zeroi ng. Another choi ce i s a bl ank paper wi th bl ack pastees
formi ng a 1-MOA ai m poi nt.
3-169. The sni per shoul d use the fol l owi ng zeroi ng procedures for a
tel escopi c si ght. He shoul d
Properl y mount the scope to the ri fl e.
Sel ect or prepare a di sti nct target (ai mi ng cross) at 200 meters for
el evati on or 100 meters for wi ndage. I f 200 meters i s used for wi ndage,
then i mpact must be compensated for a no-wi nd effect.
Assume the prone supported posi ti on.
Focus the reti cl e to hi s eye.
Set paral l ax for target range.
FM 3-05.222
3-55
Boresi ght scope to ensure round on paper, consi deri ng that the M3A i s
a fi xed 10x scope.
Fi re a si ngl e shot and determi ne i ts l ocati on and di stance from the
ai mi ng cross.
Usi ng the el evati on and wi ndage rul e, determi ne the number of cl i cks
necessary to move the center of the group to the center of the
ai mi ng cross.
Remove the el evati on and wi ndage turret caps and make the necessary
si ght adjustments. Then repl ace the turret caps. I n maki ng si ght
adjustments, the sni per must turn the adjusti ng screws i n the di recti on
that he wants to move the stri ke of the bul l et or group.
Fi re 5-round groups as necessary to ensure that the center of the shot
group coi nci des wi th the POA at 200 meters for el evati on and
compensated for wi nd.
Zero the el evati on and wi ndage scal es and repl ace the turret caps.
3-170. The ri fl e i s now zeroed for 200 meters wi th a no-wi nd zero.
3-171. To engage targets at other ranges, set the range on the el evati on
turret. To engage targets at undetermi ned ranges, use the mi l dots i n the
scope, determi ne the range to the target, and then manual l y set the el evati on
turret.
NOTE: El evati on and wi ndage turrets shoul d not be forced past the natural
stops as damage may occur.
AN/PVS-2 Night Vision Device
3-172. The AN/PVS-2 may be zeroed duri ng dayl i ght hours or duri ng hours
of darkness. However, the operator may experi ence some di ffi cul ty i n
attempti ng to zero just before darkness (dusk). The l i ght l evel i s too l ow at
dusk to permi t the operator to resol ve hi s zero target wi th the l ens cap cover
i n pl ace, but the l i ght l evel at dusk i s sti l l i ntense enough to cause the si ght
to automati cal l y cut off unl ess the l ens cap cover i s i n posi ti on over the
objecti ve l ens. The sni per wi l l normal l y zero the si ght for the maxi mum
practi cal range that he can be expected to observe and fi re, dependi ng on the
l evel of i l l umi nati on.
3-173. The sni per shoul d zero the si ght i n the fol l owi ng manner. He shoul d
Pl ace or sel ect a di sti nct target at the desi red zeroi ng range. A steel
target provi des the easi est target to spot because bul l et spl ash i s
i ndi cated by a spark as the bul l et stri kes the steel . He shoul d assume
the prone supported posi ti on, supporti ng the weapon and ni ght vi si on
si ght combi nati on wi th sandbags or other avai l abl e equi pment that wi l l
afford maxi mum stabi l i ty.
Boresi ght the si ght to the ri fl e. The sni per pl aces the i ron si ght
wi ndage and el evati on zero on the ri fl e for the zeroi ng range and
adjusts the weapon posi ti on unti l the correct si ght pi cture i s obtai ned
on the ai mi ng poi nt at the zeroi ng range. He moves the eye to the ni ght
vi si on si ght and observes the l ocati on of the reti cl e pattern i n rel ati on
to the reference ai mi ng poi nt. I f the reference ai mi ng poi nt on the
FM 3-05.222
3-56
target and the reference POA of the reti cl e pattern do not coi nci de,
move the el evati on and azi muth adjustment knobs unti l these ai mi ng
poi nts coi nci de.
Pl ace the reference POA of the reti cl e pattern (Fi gure 3-29) on the
center of mass of the target or on a di sti nct ai mi ng poi nt on the target.
Then fi re enough rounds to obtai n a good shot group. Check the target
to determi ne the center of the shot group i n rel ati on to the reti cl e POA.
Adjust the ni ght vi si on si ght to move the reti cl e ai mi ng reference poi nt
to the center of the shot group. When maki ng adjustments for errors i n
el evati on or azi muth, move the si ght i n the di recti on of the error. For
exampl e, i f the shot group i s hi gh and to the l eft of the reti cl e POA,
compensate for the error by movi ng the si ght to the l eft and up.
NOTE: Each cl i ck of the azi muth or el evati on knob wi l l move the stri ke of the
round 2 i nches for each 100 meters of range.
Figure 3-29. The Range References and POAs for the AN/PVS-2 Black Line Reticle Pattern
3-174. To engage targets at ranges other than the zero range, appl y hol d-off
to compensate for the ri se and fal l i n the trajectory of the round.
AN/PVS-4 Night Vision Device
3-175. Zeroi ng the AN/PVS-4 i s si mi l ar to zeroi ng wi th standard opti cal
si ghts because (unl i ke the AN/PVS-2) the AN/PVS-4 mounts over the bore of
the weapons system and has i nternal wi ndage and el evati on adjustments
(Fi gure 3-30, page 3-57).
Periodic Checking
3-176. A sni per cannot expect hi s zero to remai n absol utel y constant.
Peri odi c checki ng of the zero i s requi red after di sassembl y of the sni per ri fl e
for mai ntenance and cl eani ng, for changes i n ammuni ti on l ots, as a resul t of
severe weather changes, and to ensure fi rst-shot hi ts. The ri fl e must be
zeroed by the i ndi vi dual who wi l l use i t. I ndi vi dual di fferences i n stock wel d,
eye rel i ef, posi ti on, and tri gger control usual l y resul t i n each sni per havi ng a
di fferent zero wi th the same ri fl e or a change i n zero after movi ng from one
posi ti on to another.
FM 3-05.222
3-57
Figure 3-30. Using the M14 and M60 Reticle of the AN/PVS-4 for Range Estimation and POA
Confirming Zero
3-177. After a ri fl e has been zeroed and i t becomes necessary to confi rm thi s
zero for any reason, the ri fl e can be zeroed agai n by fi ri ng at a known
di stance wi th the si ght set on the ol d zero. I f a si ght adjustment i s necessary
to hi t the ai mi ng poi nt, thi s zero change wi l l remai n constant at al l ranges.
For exampl e, i f a sni per i s fi ri ng at a di stance of 500 meters wi th the ol d zero
and i t becomes necessary to rai se the el evati on three cl i cks to hi t the ai mi ng
poi nt, he shoul d rai se the el evati on zero three cl i cks at al l ranges.
Changing Zero
3-178. Before changi ng the zero, wi ndage, or el evati on, the sni per must
consi der the effects of weather. Extreme changes of humi di ty or temperature
can warp the stock or affect the ammuni ti on. Wear, abuse, or repai rs can al so
cause a sni per ri fl es zero set to change.
Field-Expedient Zeroing
3-179. The sni per shoul d use the boresi ght to confi rm zero retenti on i n a
deni ed area. The sni per may need to confi rm hi s zero i n a fi el d envi ronment.
Droppi ng a weapon or taki ng i t through excessi ve cl i mati c changes (by
depl oyi ng worl dwi de) are good reasons for confi rmi ng the SWSs zero. The
sni per may al so use thi s method when the ti me or si tuati on does not permi t
the use of a known di stance range. Thi s techni que works best when
confi rmi ng ol d zeros.
FM 3-05.222
3-58
3-180. The sni per wi l l need an observer equi pped wi th bi nocul ars or a
spotti ng tel escope to assi st hi m. The sni per and observer pi ck out an ai mi ng
poi nt i n the center of an area; for exampl e, a hi l l si de, bri ck house, or any
surface where the stri ke of the bul l et can be observed. The team can
determi ne the range to thi s poi nt by usi ng the rangi ng devi ce on the
tel escope, by l aser range fi nder, by map survey, by the range card of another
weapon, or by ground measurement.
3-181. Once the sni per has assumed a stabl e posi ti on, the observer must
posi ti on hi msel f cl ose and to the rear of the sni per. The observers bi nocul ars
or tel escope shoul d be posi ti oned approxi matel y 18 to 24 i nches above the
weapon and as cl ose i n l i ne wi th the axi s of the bore as possi bl e. Wi th hi s
opti cs i n thi s posi ti on, the observer can see the trace of the bul l et as i t moves
downrange. The trace or shock wave of the bul l et sets up an ai r turbul ence
suffi ci ent enough to be observed i n the form of a vapor trai l . The trace of the
bul l et enabl es the observer to fol l ow the path of the bul l et i n i ts trajectory
toward i ts i mpact area. The trace wi l l di sappear pri or to i mpact and make i t
appear to the i nexperi enced observer that the bul l et struck above or beyond
i ts actual i mpact poi nt. For exampl e, at 300 meters the trace wi l l di sappear
approxi matel y 5 i nches above the i mpact poi nt. At 500 meters the trace wi l l
di sappear approxi matel y 25 i nches above the i mpact poi nt.
3-182. Wi nd causes l ateral movement of the bul l et. Thi s l ateral movement wi l l
appear as a dri fti ng of the trace i n the di recti on that the wi nd i s bl owi ng. Thi s
movement must be consi dered when determi ni ng wi ndage zero. The observer
must be careful to observe the trace at i ts head and not be mi sl ed by the
bendi ng tai l of the trace i n a stout crosswi nd. Before fi ri ng the fi rst round, the
sni per must set hi s si ghts so that he wi l l hi t on or near hi s ai mi ng poi nt. Thi s
setti ng i s based on the ol d zero or an esti mate. The sni per fi res a shot and gi ves
a cal l to the observer. I f the stri ke of the bul l et coul d not be observed, the
observer gi ves a si ght adjustment based on the trace of the bul l et.
3-183. I f the fi rst shots do not hi t the target, and the observer di d not detect
trace, the sni per may fi re at the four corners of the target. One of the rounds
wi l l hi t the target and the sni per can use thi s hi t to make an adjustment to
start the zeroi ng process. Once the stri ke of the bul l et can be observed i n the
desi red i mpact area, the observer compares the stri ke wi th the cal l and gi ves
si ght adjustments unti l the bul l et i mpact coi nci des wi th the ai mi ng poi nt.
Firing at Targets With No Definite Zero Established
3-184. The sni per shoul d use the 100-meter zero when fi ri ng on targets at a
range of 100 meters or l ess. The di fference between the i mpact of the bul l et and
the ai mi ng poi nt i ncreases as the range i ncreases i f the si ghts are not moved. I f
the sni pers zero i s 9+2 at 900 meters and 8+1 at 800 meters, and he establ i shes
the range of the target at 850 meters, he shoul d use a si ght setti ng of 850+1
rather than usi ng hi s 800- or 900-meter zero or the hol d-off method. At any
range, movi ng the si ghts i s preferred over the hol d-off method.
Firing the 25-Meter Range
3-185. The sni per shoul d di al the tel escope to 300 meters for el evati on and to
zero for wi ndage. He then ai ms and fi res at a target that i s 25 yards away. He
adjusts the tel escope unti l rounds are i mpacti ng 1 i nch above the POA. For
FM 3-05.222
3-59
the sni per to confi rm, he fi res the SWS on a known di stance range out to i ts
maxi mum effecti ve range.
3-186. For i ron si ghts, the sni per may fi re on a 25-meter range to obtai n a
battl e-si ght zero. He then subtracts 1 mi nute (four cl i cks) of el evati on from
the battl e-si ght zero to get a 200-meter zero. The sni per may then use the
fol l owi ng measures to determi ne the necessary i ncreases i n el evati on to
engage targets out to 600 meters:
200 to 300 meters2 mi nutes.
300 to 400 meters3 mi nutes.
400 to 500 meters4 mi nutes.
500 to 600 meters5 mi nutes.
NOTE: These measures are based on the average change of several sni per
ri fl es. Whi l e the changes may not resul t i n an exact POA or POI zero, the
sni per shoul d not mi ss hi s target.
ENVIRONMENTAL EFFECTS
3-187. For the hi ghl y trai ned sni per, the effects of weather are the mai n
cause of error i n the stri ke of the bul l et. Wi nd, mi rage, l i ght, temperature,
and humi di ty al l have some effect on the bul l et and the sni per. Some effects
are i nsi gni fi cant, dependi ng on average condi ti ons of sni per empl oyment.
3-188. I t must be noted that al l of the rul es of thumb gi ven here are for the
7.62-mm bul l et (168 to 175 grai ns) at 2600 feet per second (fps). I f the sni per
i s usi ng a cal i ber 5.56, 300 Wi n Mag, .338 Lapua Mag, or any other round
then these rul es do not appl y. I t i s i ncumbent on the sni per to fi nd the
speci fi c wi nd constants and other effects for the round he wi l l be usi ng.
WIND
3-189. The condi ti on that constantl y presents the greatest probl em to the
sni per i s the wi nd. The wi nd has a consi derabl e effect on the bul l et, and the
effect i ncreases wi th the range. Thi s resul t i s due mai nl y to the sl owi ng of the
bul l ets vel oci ty combi ned wi th a l onger fl i ght ti me. Thi s sl owi ng al l ows the
wi nd to have a greater effect on the bul l et as di stances i ncrease. The resul t i s
a l oss of stabi l i ty. Wi nd al so has a consi derabl e effect on the sni per. The
stronger the wi nd, the more di ffi cul t i t i s for the sni per to hol d the ri fl e
steady. The effect on the sni per can be parti al l y offset wi th good trai ni ng,
condi ti oni ng, and the use of supported posi ti ons.
Classification
3-190. Si nce the sni per must know how much effect the wi nd wi l l have
on the bul l et, he must be abl e to cl assi fy the wi nd. The best method to use i s
the cl ock system (Fi gure 3-31, page 3-60). Wi th the sni per at the center of
the cl ock and the target at 12 ocl ock, the wi nd i s assi gned the fol l owi ng
three val ues:
Full value means that the force of the wi nd wi l l have a ful l effect on the
fl i ght of the bul l et. These wi nds come from 3 and 9 ocl ock.
Half value means that a wi nd at the same speed, but fr om 1, 2, 4, 5,
7, 8, 10, and 11 ocl ock wi l l move the bul l et onl y hal f as much as a
ful l -val ue wi nd. Whi l e thi s hal f-val ue defi ni ti on i s gener al l y accepted,
FM 3-05.222
3-60
i t i s not accur ate. Appl yi ng basi c math wi l l i l l ustr ate that the actual
hal f-val ue wi nds ar e fr om 1, 5, 7, and 11 on the cl ock. Wi nds fr om 2,
4, 8, and 10 have val ues of 86 per cent.
NOTE: To determi ne the exact effect of the wi nd on the bul l et when the
wi nd i s between ful l and no-val ue posi ti ons, mul ti pl y the wi nd speed by
the fol l owi ng constants: 90-degree, ful l ; 75 degree, 0.96; 60 degree, 0.86;
45 degree, 0.70; 30 degree, 0.50; 15 degree, 0.25.
No value means that a wi nd from 6 or 12 ocl ock wi l l have l i ttl e or no
effect on the fl i ght of the bul l et at cl ose ranges. The no-val ue wi nd has
a defi ni te effect on the bul l et at l ong ranges (beyond 600 meters) i f i t i s
not bl owi ng di rectl y from 6 or 12 ocl ock. Thi s wi nd i s the most di ffi cul t
to fi re i n due to i ts swi tchi ng or fi shtai l effect, whi ch requi res frequent
si ght changes. Dependi ng on the vel oci ty of thi s type of wi nd, i t wi l l
have an effect on the verti cal di spl acement of the bul l et.
Figure 3-31. Using the Clock System Method to Classify the Wind
Velocity
3-191. Before adjusti ng the si ght to compensate for wi nd, the sni per must
determi ne wi nd di recti on and vel oci ty. He may use certai n i ndi cators to make
thi s determi nati on. These i ndi cators i ncl ude range fl ags, smoke, trees, grass,
rai n, and the sense of feel . I n most cases, wi nd di recti on can be determi ned
si mpl y by observi ng the i ndi cators. However, the preferred method of
determi ni ng wi nd di recti on and vel oci ty i s readi ng mi rage.
FM 3-05.222
3-61
3-192. A method of esti mati ng the vel oci ty of the wi nd duri ng trai ni ng i s to
watch the range fl ag (Fi gure 3-32). The sni per determi nes the angl e i n
degrees between the fl ag and pol e, then di vi des by the constant number 4.
The resul t gi ves the approxi mate vel oci ty i n mi l es per hour (mph). Thi s
amount i s based on the use of the heavi er cotton range fl ags, not nyl on fl ags,
whi ch are now used on most ranges.
NOTE: Nyl on fl ags are not a rel i abl e i ndi cator for determi ni ng wi nd speed
because of thei r suscepti bi l i ty to mi nor wi nd speed vari ati ons.
Figure 3-32. Estimating Wind Velocity Using the Range Flag
3-193. I f no fl ag i s vi si bl e, the sni per hol ds a pi ece of paper, grass, cotton, or
some other l i ght materi al at shoul der l evel , then drops i t. He then poi nts
di rectl y at the spot where i t l ands and di vi des the angl e between hi s body and
arm by the constant number 4. Thi s number gi ves hi m the approxi mate wi nd
vel oci ty i n mph (Fi gure 3-33).
Figure 3-33. Estimating Wind Velocity by Dropping a Piece of Paper
FM 3-05.222
3-62
3-194. I f the sni per i s unabl e to use these methods, he can appl y the
i nformati on i n Tabl e 3-6 to determi ne vel oci ty.
Table 3-6. Determining Velocity
Wind Velocity (mph) Effect
0 3 The wind can barely be felt but may be seen by mirage or smoke drifts.
3 5 The wind can be felt on the face. Grass begins to move.
5 8 The leaves in the trees and long grass are in constant motion.
8 12 The wind raises dust and loose paper and moves small branches in trees.
12 15 The wind causes trees to sway.
MIRAGE
3-195. A mi rage i s a refl ecti on of the heat through l ayers of ai r at di fferent
temperatures and densi ti es as seen on a warm, bri ght day. Wi th the
tel escope, the sni per can see a mi rage as l ong as there i s a di fference i n
ground and ai r temperatures. Proper readi ng of the mi rage enabl es the
sni per to esti mate wi nd di recti on wi th a hi gh degree of accuracy. The sni per
uses the spotti ng scope to read the mi rage. Si nce the wi nd nearest to
mi drange has the greatest effect on the bul l et, he shoul d try to determi ne
vel oci ty at that poi nt. He can determi ne the amount i n one of two ways:
Focus on an object at mi drange, then pl ace the tel escope back on to the
target wi thout readjusti ng the focus.
Focus on the target, then back off the focus one-quarter turn
countercl ockwi se. Thi s movement makes the target appear fuzzy, but
the mi rage wi l l be cl ear.
3-196. As observed through the tel escope, the mi rage appears to move wi th
the same vel oci ty as the wi nd, except when bl owi ng strai ght i nto or away
from the tel escope. Then the mi rage gi ves the appearance of movi ng strai ght
upward wi th no l ateral movement. I t i s then cal l ed a boi l i ng mi rage. A boi l i ng
mi rage may al so be seen when the wi nd i s constantl y changi ng di recti on; for
exampl e, a ful l -val ue wi nd bl owi ng from 9 to 3 ocl ock suddenl y changes
di recti on. The mi rage wi l l appear to stop movi ng from l eft to ri ght and wi l l
present a boi l i ng appearance. When thi s i mage occurs, the i nexperi enced
observer may di rect the sni per to fi re wi th the 0 wi nd. As the sni per fi res,
the wi nd begi ns bl owi ng from 3 to 9 ocl ock and causes the bul l et to mi ss the
target. Therefore, fi ri ng i n a boi l can hamper shot pl acement. Unl ess there
i s a no-val ue wi nd, the sni per must wai t unti l the boi l di sappears. I n general ,
changes i n the vel oci ty of the wi nd, up to about 12 mph, can readi l y be
determi ned by observi ng the mi rage. Beyond that speed, the movement of the
mi rage i s too fast for detecti on of mi nor changes. I n general , when the waves
of the mi rage are shal l ow, i ts vel oci ty and resul tant wi nd speed are fast.
Mi rage wi l l di sappear at wi nd speeds above 15 mph.
3-197. The sni per can determi ne the true di recti on of the wi nd by traversi ng
the tel escope unti l the heat waves appear to move strai ght up wi th no l ateral
moti on (a boi l i ng mi rage).
FM 3-05.222
3-63
3-198. A mi rage i s parti cul arl y val uabl e i n readi ng no-val ue wi nds. I f the
mi rage i s boi l i ng, the effecti ve wi nd vel oci ty i s zero. I f there i s any l ateral
movement of the mi rage, i t i s necessary to make wi ndage adjustments.
3-199. Another i mportant effect of mi rage i s the l i ght di ffracti on caused by
the uneven ai r densi ti es, whi ch are characteri sti c of heat waves. Dependi ng
on atmospheri c condi ti ons, thi s di ffracti on wi l l cause a di spl acement of the
target i mage i n the di recti on of the movement of the mi rage. Thus i f a mi rage
i s movi ng from l eft to ri ght, the target wi l l appear to be sl i ghtl y to the ri ght of
i ts actual l ocati on. Si nce the sni per can onl y ai m at the i mage recei ved by hi s
eye, he wi l l actual l y ai m at a poi nt that i s offset sl i ghtl y from the center of the
target. Thi s error wi l l be i n addi ti on to the di spl acement of the bul l et caused
by the wi nd. Si nce the total effect of the vi si bl e mi rage (effecti ve wi nd pl us
target di spl acement) wi l l vary consi derabl y wi th atmospheri c condi ti ons and
l i ght i ntensi ty, i t i s i mpossi bl e to predi ct the amount of error produced at any
gi ven pl ace and ti me. I t i s onl y through consi derabl e experi ence i n readi ng
mi rage that the sni per wi l l devel op profi ci ency as a wi nd doper.
3-200. Before fi ri ng, the sni per shoul d check the mi rage and make the
necessary si ght adjustments or hol d-off to compensate for any wi nd.
I mmedi atel y after fi ri ng, but before pl otti ng the cal l i n the scorebook, he
agai n checks the mi rage. I f any changes are noted, they must be consi dered
i n rel ati ng the stri ke of the bul l et to the cal l . The above procedure shoul d be
used for each shot.
CONVERSION OF WIND VELOCITY TO MINUTES OF ANGLE
3-201. Al l tel escopi c si ghts have wi ndage adjustments that are graduated i n
MOAs or fracti ons thereof. An MOA i s 1/60th of a degree. Thi s number equal s
about 1 i nch (1. 0472 i nches) for every 100 yards and 3 centi meters (2.97
centi meters) for every meter.
Example: 1 MOA = 2 i nches at 200 yards
1 MOA = 15 centi meters at 500 meters
3-202. Sni pers use MOAs to determi ne and adjust the el evati on and wi ndage
needed on the tel escope. After fi ndi ng the wi nd di recti on and vel oci ty i n mph,
the sni per must then convert i t i nto MOAs usi ng the wi nd formul a as a rul e
of thumb onl y. The wi nd formul a i s as fol l ows:
Wind Value Full Minutes
Variable Given
Velocity Range
=

(mph) (hundreds)

3-203. The gi ven vari abl e (GV) for M80 bal l depends on the targets range
(R) and i s due to bul l et vel oci ty l oss:
100 to 500 GV = 15
600 GV = 14
700 to 800 V = 13
900 GV = 12
1,000 GV = 11
3-204. The vari abl e for M118, M118LR, and M852 i s 10 at al l ranges.
FM 3-05.222
3-64
3-205. I f the target i s 700 meters away and the wi nd vel oci ty i s 10 mph, the
formul a i s as fol l ows:
MOA 7
10
10 7
=

NOTE: Thi s formul a determi nes the number of mi nutes for a ful l -val ue wi nd.
For a hal f-val ue (1/2V) wi nd, the 7 MOA woul d be di vi ded i n hal f, resul ti ng i n
3.5 MOA.
3-206. The observer makes hi s own adjustment esti mati ons and then
compares them to the wi nd conversi on tabl e, whi ch can be a val uabl e trai ni ng
tool . He must not rel y on thi s tabl e. I f i t i s l ost, hi s abi l i ty to perform the
mi ssi on coul d be severel y hampered. Unti l the observer gai ns ski l l i n
esti mati ng wi nd speed (WS) and computi ng si ght changes, he may refer to the
wi nd conversi on tabl e (Tabl e 3-7). The observer wi l l gi ve the sni per a si ght
adjustment for i ron si ghts or a mi l hol d off for the scope.
Table 3-7. Wind Conversion Table in Mils
WS
R (m)
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
100 0.00 0.00 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50
1/2V 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25
200 0.00 0.25 0.25 0.50 0.50 0.75 0.75 1.00 1.00 1.25
1/2V 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.25 0.25 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.75
300 0.25 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.50 1.75
1/2V 0.00 0.00 0.25 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.75 0.75 0.75 1.00
400 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.50 2.00 2.25 2.25
1/2V 0.00 0.25 0.50 0.50 0.75 0.75 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.25
500 0.25 0.50 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 3.00
1/2V 0.00 0.25 0.50 0.75 0.75 1.00 1.00 1.25 1.25 1.50
600 0.25 0.75 1.00 1.50 1.75 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.25 3.50
1/2V 0.00 0.50 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.00 1.25 1.25 1.50 1.75
700 0.50 0.75 1.25 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 3.25 3.75 4.25
1/2V 0.25 0.50 0.75 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25
800 0.50 1.00 1.50 2.00 2.25 2.75 3.25 3.75 4.25 4.75
1/2V 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 1.75 2.25 2.50
900 5.00 1.00 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.25 3.75 4.25 4.75 5.25
1/2V 2.50 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.25 2.50 2.50
1,000 5.00 1.25 1.75 2.50 3.00 3.50 4.25 4.75 5.25 6.00
1/2V 2.50 0.63 0.75 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.25 2.50 2.50 3.00
FM 3-05.222
3-65
LIGHT
3-207. Li ght does not affect the trajectory of the bul l et. However, i t may
affect the way the sni per sees the target through the tel escope. Li ght affects
di fferent peopl e i n di fferent ways. The sni per general l y fi res hi gh on a dul l ,
cl oudy day and l ow on a bri ght, cl ear day. Extreme l i ght condi ti ons from the
l eft or the ri ght may have an effect on the hori zontal i mpact of a shot group.
3-208. Thi s effect can be compar ed to the r efr acti on (bendi ng) of l i ght
thr ough a medi um, such as a pr i sm or a fi sh bowl . The same effect can be
obser ved on a day wi th hi gh humi di ty and wi th sunl i ght fr om hi gh
angl es. To sol ve the pr obl em of l i ght and i ts effects, the sni per must
accur atel y r ecor d the l i ght condi ti ons under whi ch he i s fi r i ng. Thr ough
exper i ence and study, he wi l l eventual l y deter mi ne the effect of l i ght on
hi s zer o. Li ght may al so affect fi r i ng of unknown di stance r anges si nce i t
affects r ange deter mi nati on capabi l i ti es, by el ongati ng the tar get.
TEMPERATURE
3-209. Temperature has a defi ni te effect on the el evati on setti ng requi red to
hi t the center of the target. Thi s effect i s caused by the fact that an i ncrease
i n temperature of 20 degrees Fahrenhei t (F) wi l l i ncrease the muzzl e vel oci ty
by approxi matel y 50 fps. When ammuni ti on si ts i n di rect sunl i ght, the burn
rate of powder i s i ncreased. The greatest effect of temperature i s on the
densi ty of the ai r. As the temperature ri ses, the ai r densi ty i s l owered. Si nce
there i s l ess resi stance, vel oci ty decreases at a sl ower rate and the i mpact
ri ses. Thi s i ncrease i s i n rel ati on to the temperature i n whi ch the ri fl e was
zeroed. I f the sni per zeroes at 50 degrees and he i s now fi ri ng at 90 degrees,
the i mpact ri ses consi derabl y. How hi gh i t ri ses i s best determi ned by past
fi ri ng recorded i n the data book. The general rul e i s that a 20-degree i ncrease
from zero temperature wi l l rai se the i mpact by 1 mi nute; conversel y, a 20-
degree decrease wi l l drop i mpact by 1 mi nute from 100 to 500 meters, 15
degrees wi l l affect the stri ke by 1 MOA from 600 to 900 meters, and 10
degrees over 900 meters wi l l affect the stri ke by 1 MOA.
ELEVATION
3-210. El evati on above sea l evel can have an i mportant effect on bul l et
trajectory. At hi gher el evati ons, ai r densi ty, temperature, and ai r drag on the
bul l et decrease. The basi c rul e of thumb i s that the bul l et stri ke wi l l vary by
1 MOA for every 5,000 feet of el evati on. Thi s amount wi l l roughl y correspond
to the same barometri c rul e for changes i n round stri ke.
BAROMETRIC PRESSURE
3-211. The effects of barometri c pressure are that the hi gher the pressure, the
denser the ai r. Thus the hi gher the pressure the l ower the bul l et wi l l stri ke. As
the pressure goes up, the si ghts go up. The basi c rul e i s that from 100 to 500
meters, 1 i nch i n barometri c pressure wi l l affect the stri ke by 0.25 MOA; from
600 to 800 meters, a 1-i nch change wi l l affect the stri ke by 0.75 MOA, and from
900 to 1000 meters, a 1-i nch change wi l l effect the stri ke by 1.5 MOA.
HUMIDITY
3-212. Humi di ty vari es al ong wi th the al ti tude and temperature. The sni per
can encounter probl ems i f drasti c humi di ty changes occur i n hi s area of
FM 3-05.222
3-66
operati on. I f humi di ty goes up, i mpact goes up; i f humi di ty goes down, i mpact
goes down. As a rul e of thumb, a 20-percent change wi l l equal about 1 mi nute
affecti ng the i mpact. The sni per shoul d keep a good data book duri ng trai ni ng
and refer to hi s own record.
3-213. To understand the effects of humi di ty on the stri ke of the bul l et, the
sni per must real i ze that the hi gher the humi di ty, the thi nner the ai r; thus
there i s l ess resi stance to the fl i ght of the bul l et. Thi s wi l l tend to sl ow the
bul l et at a sl ower rate, and, as a resul t, the sni per must l ower hi s el evati on to
compensate for these factors. The effect of humi di ty at short ranges i s not as
noti ceabl e as at l onger ranges. The sni pers experi ence and hi s anal ysi s of hi ts
and groups under vari ed condi ti ons wi l l determi ne the effect of humi di ty on hi s
zero.
3-214. Some sni pers fai l to note al l of the factors of weather. Certai n
combi nati ons of weather wi l l have di fferent effects on the bul l et. For thi s
reason, a sni per may fi re two successi ve days i n the same l ocati on and under
what appears to be the same condi ti ons and yet use two di fferent si ght setti ngs.
For exampl e, a 30-percent ri se i n humi di ty cannot al ways be determi ned
readi l y. Thi s ri se i n humi di ty makes the ai r l ess dense. I f thi s thi nner ai r i s
present wi th a 10-mi l e-per-hour wi nd, l ess el evati on wi l l be requi red to hi t the
same l ocati on than on a day when the humi di ty i s 30 percent l ower.
3-215. By not consi deri ng al l the effects of weather, some sni pers may
overemphasi ze certai n effects and therefore make bad shots from ti me to ti me.
Sni pers normal l y fi re for a certai n peri od of ti me under average condi ti ons. As a
resul t, they zero thei r ri fl es and (wi th the excepti on of mi nor di spl acements of
shots and groups) have l i ttl e di ffi cul ty except for the wi nd. However, a sni per
can travel to a di fferent l ocati on and fi re agai n and fi nd a change i n hi s zero.
Proper recordi ng and study based on experi ence are al l i mportant i n
determi ni ng the effects of weather. Probabl y one of the most di ffi cul t thi ngs to
i mpress upon a sni per i s the evi dence of a probabl e change i n hi s zero. I f a
change i s i ndi cated, i t shoul d be appl i ed to al l ranges.
SLOPE FIRING
3-216. The sni per team conducts most fi ri ng practi ces by usi ng the mi l i tary
range faci l i ti es, whi ch are rel ati vel y fl at. However, sni pers may depl oy to other
regi ons of the worl d and have to operate i n a mountai nous or urban
envi ronment. Thi s type of mi ssi on woul d requi re target engagements at hi gher
and l ower el evati ons. Unl ess the sni per takes correcti ve acti on, bul l et i mpact
wi l l be above the POA. How hi gh the bul l et hi ts i s determi ned by the range and
angl e to the target (Tabl e 3-8, page 3-67). The amount of el evati on change
appl i ed to the tel escope of the ri fl e for angl e fi ri ng i s known as sl ope dope.
FM 3-05.222
3-67
Table 3-8. Bullet Rise at Given Angle and Range in Minutes
Range
(Meters)
Slant Degrees
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
100 0.01 0.04 0.09 0.16 0.25 0.36 0.49 0.63 0.79 0.97 1.2 1.4
200 0.03 0.09 0.2 0.34 0.53 0.76 1.0 1.3 1.7 2.0 2.4 2.9
300 0.03 0.1 0.3 0.5 0.9 1.2 1.6 2.1 2.7 3.2 3.9 4.5
400 0.05 0.19 0.43 0.76 1.2 1.7 2.3 2.9 3.7 4.5 5.4 6.3
500 0.06 0.26 0.57 1.0 1.6 2.3 3.0 3.9 4.9 6.0 7.2 8.4
600 0.08 0.31 0.73 1.3 2.0 2.9 3.9 5.0 6.3 7.7 9.2 10.7
700 0.1 0.4 0.9 1.6 2.5 3.6 4.9 6.3 7.9 9.6 11.5 13.4
800 0.13 0.5 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.4 5.9 7.7 9.6 11.7 14.0 16.4
900 0.15 0.6 1.3 2.4 3.7 5.3 7.2 9.3 11.6 14.1 16.9 19.8
1,000 0.2 0.7 1.6 2.8 4.5 6.4 8.6 11.0 13.9 16.9 20.2 23.7
NOTE: Range given is slant range (meters), not map distance.
3-217. The fol l owi ng i s a l i st of compensati on factors to use i n setti ng the
si ghts of the SWS when fi ri ng from any of the fol l owi ng angl es. To use
Tabl e 3-9, pages 3-68 and 3-69, the sni per fi nds the angl e at whi ch he must
fi re and then mul ti pl i es the esti mated range by the deci mal fi gure shown to
the ri ght. For exampl e, i f the esti mated range i s 500 meters and the angl e of
fi re i s 35 degrees, the zero of the weapon shoul d be set for 410 meters.
Example: 500 x .82 = 410 meters
3-218. As can be seen, the steeper the angl e, the shorter the range wi l l be set
on the scope or si ghts for a fi rst-round hi t. Al so, the steeper the angl e, the
more preci se the sni per must be i n esti mati ng or measuri ng the angl e.
I nterpol ati on i s necessary for angl es between tens and fi ves.
Example: Fi nd the compensati on factor for 72 degrees.
70 degrees = 0.34; 75 degrees = 0.26;
72 i s 40 percent between 70 and 75 degrees.
0.34 - 0.26 = 0.08; 0.08 x 40 percent
(0.40) = 0.03; 0.34 - 0.03 = 0.31
NOTE: Table 3-9B and C, pages 3-68 and 3-69, are additional means of
determining where to set the sights on the SWS to fire from a given angle. These
tables are excellent references to reproduce and make into small cards for quick
and easy access when conducting a mission. The data is for ranging only; the
actual distance is used when determining the effects of the environment.
FM 3-05.222
3-68
Table 3-9. Compensation Factors Used When Firing From a Given Angle
FM 3-05.222
3-69
Table 3-9. Compensation Factors Used When Firing From a Given Angle (Continued)
C
Angular Degree
Range
(m)
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90
50 49.5 49 48 47 45.5 43.5 41 38.5 35 32 28.5 25 21 17 13 8.5 4.5 0
100 99 98 96 94 91 87 82 77 70 64 57 50 42 34 26 17 9 0
150 149 147 144 141 137 131 123 116 105 96 85.5 75 63 51 39 25.5 13.5 0
200 198 196 192 188 182 174 164 154 140 128 114 100 84 68 52 34 18 0
250 248 245 240 235 228 218 205 193 175 160 143 125 105 85 65 42.5 22.5 0
300 297 294 288 282 273 261 246 231 210 192 171 150 126 102 78 51 27 0
350 347 343 336 329 319 305 287 270 245 224 200 175 147 119 91 59.5 31.5 0
400 396 392 384 376 364 348 328 308 280 256 228 200 168 136 104 68 36 0
450 446 441 432 423 410 392 369 347 315 288 257 225 189 153 117 76.5 40.5 0
500 595 490 480 470 455 435 410 385 350 320 285 250 210 170 130 85 45 0
550 545 539 528 517 501 479 451 424 385 352 314 275 231 187 143 93.5 49.5 0
600 594 588 576 564 546 522 492 462 420 384 342 300 252 204 156 102 54 0
650 644 637 624 611 592 566 533 501 455 416 371 325 273 221 169 111 58.5 0
700 693 686 672 658 637 609 574 539 490 448 399 350 294 238 182 119 63 0
750 743 735 720 705 683 653 615 578 525 480 428 375 315 255 195 128 67.5 0
800 792 784 768 752 728 696 656 616 560 512 456 400 336 272 208 136 72 0
850 842 833 816 799 774 740 697 655 595 544 485 425 357 289 221 145 76.5 0
900 891 882 864 846 819 783 738 693 630 576 513 450 378 306 234 153 81 0
950 941 931 912 893 865 827 779 732 665 608 542 475 399 323 247 162 85.5 0
1,000 990 980 960 940 910 870 820 770 700 640 570 500 420 340 260 170 90 0
HOLD-OFF
3-219. Hol d-off i s shi fti ng the POA to achi eve a desi red POI . Certai n
si tuati ons such as mul ti pl e targets at varyi ng ranges do not al l ow proper
el evati on adjustments. Therefore, fami l i ari zati on and practi ce of el evati on
hol d-off techni ques prepare the sni per to meet these si tuati ons. Wi ndage i s
al most al ways hel d off by the sni per and wi l l be practi ced each range sessi on.
ELEVATION
3-220. The sni per uses thi s techni que onl y when he does not have ti me to
change hi s si ght setti ng. He rarel y achi eves pi npoi nt accuracy when hol di ng
off because a mi nor error i n range determi nati on or a l ack of a preci se ai mi ng
poi nt mi ght cause the bul l et to mi ss the desi red poi nt. The sni per uses hol d-
off wi th the tel escope onl y i f several targets appear at vari ous ranges and
ti me does not permi t adjusti ng the scope for each target.
FM 3-05.222
3-70
3-221. The sni per uses hol d-off to hi t a target at ranges other than the range
for whi ch the ri fl e i s presentl y adjusted. When he ai ms di rectl y at a target at
ranges greater than the set range, hi s bul l et wi l l hi t bel ow the POA. At cl oser
di stances, hi s bul l et wi l l hi t hi gher than the POA. I f the sni per understands
thi s poi nt and the effect of trajectory and bul l et drop, he wi l l be abl e to hi t the
target at ranges other than that for whi ch the ri fl e was adjusted. For
exampl e, the sni per adjusts the ri fl e for a target l ocated 500 meters
downrange but another target appears at a range of 600 meters. The hol d-off
woul d be 25 i nches; that i s, the sni per shoul d hol d off 25 i nches above the
center of vi si bl e mass to hi t the center of mass of that parti cul ar target
(Fi gure 3-34). I f another target were to appear at 400 meters, the sni per
woul d ai m 15 i nches bel ow the center of vi si bl e mass to hi t the center of mass.
Figure 3-34. Elevation
3-222. The verti cal mi l dots on the M3As reti cl e can be used as ai mi ng
poi nts when usi ng el evati on hol d-offs (Fi gure 3-35, page 3-71). For exampl e, i f
the sni per has to engage a target at 500 meters and the scope i s set at 400
meters, he woul d pl ace the fi rst mi l dot 5 i nches bel ow the verti cal l i ne on the
targets center mass. Thi s setti ng gi ves the sni per a 15-i nch hol d-off at 500
meters.
3-223. For a 500-meter zero, the fol l owi ng measures appl y:
100 and 400 meters, the wai st or bel tl i ne.
200 and 300 meters, the groi n.
500 meters, the chest.
600 meters, the top of the head.
FM 3-05.222
3-71
Figure 3-35. Correct Holds for Various Ranges With Sights Set for 500 Meters
WINDAGE
3-224. The sni per can use a hol d-off to compensate for the effects of wi nd.
When usi ng the M3A scope, the sni per uses the hori zontal mi l dots on the
reti cl e to hol d off for wi nd. The space between each mi l dot equal s 3.375
MOAs, and a very accurate hol d can be determi ned wi th the mi l dots. For
exampl e, i f the sni per has a target at 500 meters that requi res a 10-i nch hol d-
off, he woul d pl ace the targets center mass hal fway between the crosshai rs
and the fi rst mi l dot (1/2 mi l ) (Fi gure 3-36).
Figure 3-36. Hold-Off for 7.62-mm Special Ball (M118)
FM 3-05.222
3-72
3-225. When hol di ng off, the sni per ai ms i nto the wi nd. I f the wi nd i s movi ng
from the ri ght to l eft, hi s POA i s to the ri ght. I f i t i s movi ng from l eft to ri ght,
hi s POA i s to the l eft. Constant practi ce i n wi nd esti mati on can bri ng about
profi ci ency i n maki ng si ght adjustments or l earni ng to appl y hol d-off correctl y.
I f the sni per mi sses the target and the i mpact of the round i s observed, he notes
the l ateral di stance of hi s error and refi res, hol di ng off that di stance i n the
opposi te di recti on. The formul a used to fi nd the hol d-off di stance i s as fol l ows:
MOA (from wi nd formul a) = Hol d-off i n mi l s
3.5
NOTE: The wi nd formul a must be computed fi rst to fi nd the MOA.
Example: Range to a target i s 400 yards; wi nd i s from 3 ocl ock at 8 mph.
Fi nd the hol d-off requi red to hi t the target (M118).
R x V = MOA 4 x 8 = 32 = 3.2 MOA
10 10
MOA = Hol d-off i n mi l s 3.2 = .91 = ri ght 1 mi l
3.5 3.5
For a hal f-val ue wi nd, di vi de mi l s by 2 for the hol d-off.
ENGAGEMENT OF MOVING TARGETS
3-226. Movi ng targets are general l y cl assi fi ed as wal ki ng or runni ng and are
the most di ffi cul t to hi t. When engagi ng a target that i s movi ng l ateral l y
across the LOS, the sni per must concentrate on movi ng hi s weapon wi th the
target whi l e ai mi ng at a poi nt some di stance ahead. He must hol d the l ead,
fi re, and fol l ow through after the shot. To engage movi ng targets, the sni per
uses one of the techni ques di scussed bel ow.
LEADING
3-227. A quarterback throwi ng a pass to hi s recei ver can demonstrate the
best exampl e of a l ead. He has to throw the bal l at some poi nt downfi el d i n
front of the recei ver; the recei ver wi l l then run to that poi nt. The same
pri nci pl e appl i es to fi ri ng at movi ng targets. Engagi ng movi ng targets
requi res the sni per to pl ace the crosshai rs ahead of the targets movement.
The di stance the crosshai rs are pl aced i n front of the targets movement i s
cal l ed a l ead. The sni per uses the fol l owi ng four factors i n determi ni ng l eads.
Speed of the Target
3-228. Target speed wi l l be a si gni fi cant factor i n determi ni ng the l ead of the
target. Runni ng targets wi l l requi re a greater l ead than wal ki ng targets.
Once target speed i s determi ned, the sni per esti mates the proper l ead for the
target at that speci fi c range. Si mul taneousl y, he appl i es the angl e val ue to
hi s l ead esti mati on for the target (ful l -l ead, hal f-l ead).
3-229. For exampl e, a target wal ki ng at a 45-degree angl e toward the sni per
at an average of 300 meters woul d requi re a 6-i nch l ead. Thi s amount i s
determi ned by usi ng the ful l -val ue l ead of a wal ki ng target 300 meters away
FM 3-05.222
3-73
(a 12-i nch l ead) and di vi di ng i t i n hal f for a hal f-val ue l ead (as the target i s
movi ng at a 45-degree angl e toward the sni per). Wi nd must al so be
consi dered, as i t wi l l affect the l ead used. For a target movi ng wi th the wi nd,
the sni per subtracts the wi nd val ue from the l ead. For a target movi ng
agai nst the wi nd, he adds to the l ead.
3-230. Doubl e l eads are someti mes necessary for a sni per who uses the
swi ng-through method on a target that i s movi ng toward hi s fi ri ng si de. The
doubl e l ead i s necessary because of the di ffi cul ty that a person has i n
swi ngi ng hi s weapon smoothl y toward hi s fi ri ng si de. Practi ce on a known-
di stance range and meti cul ous record keepi ng are requi red to hone a sni pers
movi ng target engagement ski l l .
Angle of Target Movement
3-231. A target movi ng perpendi cul ar to the bul l ets fl i ght path moves a
greater l ateral di stance duri ng i ts fl i ght ti me than a target movi ng at an angl e
away from or toward the bul l ets path. A method of esti mati ng the angl e of
movement of a target movi ng across the sni pers front fol l ows (Fi gure 3-37):
Full-value lead target. When onl y one arm and one si de of the target
are vi si bl e, the target i s movi ng at or near a 90-degree angl e and
requi res a ful l -val ue l ead.
Half-value lead target. When one arm and two-thi rds of the front or
back of the target are vi si bl e, the target i s movi ng at approxi matel y a
45-degree angl e and requi res a one-hal f val ue l ead.
No-lead target. When both arms and the enti re front or back are
vi si bl e, the target i s movi ng di rectl y toward or away from the sni per
and requi res no l ead.
Figure 3-37. Leads for Moving Targets
Range to the Target
3-232. The farther away a target i s, the l onger i t takes for the bul l et to reach
i t. Therefore, the l ead must be i ncreased as the di stance to the target i ncreases.
FM 3-05.222
3-74
Wind Effects
3-233. The sni per must consi der how the wi nd wi l l affect the trajectory of
the round. A wi nd bl owi ng opposi te to the targets di recti on requi res more of
a l ead than a wi nd bl owi ng i n the same di recti on as the targets movement.
When the target i s movi ng agai nst the wi nd, the wi nd effect i s added to the
l ead. When he i s movi ng wi th the wi nd, the wi nd effect i s subtracted from the
l ead. Thus, agai nst add, wi th subtract.
3-234. Once the requi red l ead has been determi ned (Tabl e 3-9, pages 3-68
and 3-69), the sni per shoul d use the mi l scal e i n the tel escope for preci se
hol d-off. The mi l scal e can be mental l y secti oned i nto 1/4-mi l i ncrements for
l eads. The chosen poi nt on the mi l scal e becomes the sni pers poi nt of
concentrati on, just as the crosshai rs are for stati onary targets. The sni per
concentrates on the l ead poi nt and fi res the weapon when the target i s at
thi s poi nt.
Lead Values
3-235. Tabl es 3-10 through 3-12, pages 3-74 and 3-75, l i st the recommended
l eads for movers at vari ous ranges and speeds. Sni pers shoul d usual l y not
engage movers beyond 400 yards due to the excessi ve l ead requi red and l ow
probabi l i ty of a hi t. I f a mover i s engaged at di stances beyond 400 yards, an
i mmedi ate fol l ow-up shot must be ready.
3-236. The cl assi fi cati on of a wal ker, fast wal ker, and a runner i s based on a
wal ker movi ng at 2 mph, a fast wal ker at 3 1/2 mph, and a runner at 5 mph.
3-237. These are starti ng poi nt l eads and are onl y gui des. Each i ndi vi dual
wi l l have hi s own l eads based on how he percei ves movement and hi s reacti on
ti me to i t.
Table 3-10. Recommended Leads in Mils for Movers
Range (Meters) Walkers Fast Walkers Runners
100 Leading Edge 7/8 1 3/4
200 7/8 1 1/4 1 3/4
300 1 1/8 1 3/4 2 1/4
400 1 1/4 1 3/4 2 1/2
500 1 1/2 1 3/4 2 1/2
600 1 1/2 2 1/4 3
700 1 1/2 2 1/4 3
800 1 1/2 2 1/2 3
900 1 3/4 2 1/2 3 1/2
1,000 1 3/4 2 1/2 3 1/2
FM 3-05.222
3-75
Table 3-11. Recommended Leads in Minutes of Angle for Movers
Range (Meters) Walkers Fast Walkers Runners
100 Leading Edge 3 6
200 3 4.5 6
300 4 6 8
400 4.5 6 9
500 4.5 6 9
600 5 7.5 10
700 5 7.5 10
800 5.5 8 11
900 5.5 8 11
1,000 5.5 8 11
Table 3-12. Recommended Leads in Feet for Movers
Range (Meters) Walkers Fast Walkers Runners
100 Leading Edge 0.25 0.5
200 0.5 0.75 1
300 1 1.5 2
400 1.5 2.25 3
500 2 3 4
600 2.5 3.75 5
700 3 4.5 6
800 3.5 5.25 7
900 4 6 8
1,000 4.5 7.25 9
TRACKING
3-238. Tracki ng requi res the sni per to establ i sh an ai mi ng poi nt ahead of the
targets movement and to mai ntai n i t as the weapon i s fi red. Thi s techni que
requi res the weapon and body posi ti on to be moved whi l e fol l owi ng the target
and fi ri ng. Thi s method i s preferred and needs to be perfected after the basi cs
are mastered.
TRAPPING OR AMBUSHING
3-239. Trappi ng or ambushi ng i s the sni pers al ternate method of engagi ng
movi ng targets. The sni per must establ i sh an ai mi ng poi nt ahead of the
target that i s the correct l ead for speed and di stance. As the target reaches
thi s poi nt, the sni per fi res hi s weapon. Thi s method al l ows the sni pers
weapon and body posi ti on to remai n moti onl ess. Wi th practi ce, a sni per can
determi ne exact l eads and ai mi ng poi nts usi ng the hori zontal stadi a l i nes i n
the ART scopes or the mi l dots i n the M3A. The sni per must remember to
concentrate on the crosshai rs and not on the target. He must al so not jerk
FM 3-05.222
3-76
the tri gger. However, he must make the weapon go off the l ead. The sni per
can use a combi nati on of tracki ng and ambushi ng to ai d i n determi ni ng
target speed and di recti on. Thi s techni que i s best sui ted for sentri es who
wal k a set pattern.
TRACKING AND HOLDING
3-240. The sni per uses thi s techni que to engage an errati cal l y movi ng target.
Whi l e the target i s movi ng, the sni per keeps hi s crosshai rs centered as much
as possi bl e and adjusts hi s posi ti on wi th the target. When the target stops,
the sni per qui ckl y perfects hi s hol d and fi res. Thi s techni que requi res
concentrati on and di sci pl i ne to keep from fi ri ng before the target comes to a
compl ete hal t.
FIRING A SNAPSHOT
3-241. A sni per may often attempt to engage a target that onl y presents
i tsel f bri efl y, then resumes cover. Once he establ i shes a pattern, he can ai m
i n the vi ci ni ty of the targets expected appearance and fi re a snapshot at the
moment of exposure.
COMMON ERRORS WITH MOVING TARGETS
3-242. When engagi ng movi ng targets, the sni per makes common errors
because he i s under greater stress than wi th a stati onary target. There are
more consi derati ons, such as retai ni ng a steady posi ti on and the correct
ai mi ng poi nt, how fast the target i s movi ng, and how far away i t i s. The more
practi ce a sni per has fi ri ng at movi ng targets the better he wi l l become. Some
common mi stakes that a sni per makes are when he
Watches hi s target i nstead of hi s ai mi ng poi nt. He must force hi msel f
to watch hi s l ead poi nt.
Jerks or fl i nches at the moment hi s weapon fi res because he thi nks he
must fi re NOW. Thi s refl ex can be overcome through practi ce on a l i ve-
fi re range.
Hurri es and thus forgets to adjust for wi nd speed and di recti on as
needed. Wi ndage must be cal cul ated for movi ng targets just as for
stati onary targets. Fai l i ng to esti mate when acqui ri ng a l ead wi l l resul t
i n a mi ss.
3-243. Engagi ng movi ng targets requi res the sni per to determi ne target
di stance and wi nd effects on the round, the l ateral speed of the target, the
rounds ti me of fl i ght, and the pl acement of a proper l ead to compensate for
both. These added vari abl es i ncrease the chance of a mi ss. Therefore, the
sni per shoul d engage movi ng targets when i t i s the onl y opti on.
ENGAGEMENT OF SNAP TARGETS
3-244. Many ti mes the sni per wi l l see a target that shows i tsel f for onl y a
bri ef moment, especi al l y i n urban and countersni per envi ronments. Under
these ci rcumstances i t i s very i mportant to concentrate on tri gger control .
Tri gger control i s modi fi ed to a very rapi d pul l of the fi nger di rectl y to the
FM 3-05.222
3-77
rear wi thout di sturbi ng the l ay of the weapon, si mi l ar to the movi ng target
tri gger control .
3-245. Another val uabl e ski l l for the sni per to l earn i s the qui ck-ki l l fi ri ng
techni que. He i s most vul nerabl e duri ng movement. Not onl y i s he
compromi sed because of the heavi er equi pment requi rement, but al so because
of hi s l arge, opti cal l y si ghted sni per ri fl e. Usi ng the qui ck-ki l l techni que, the
sni per or observer can engage a target very rapi dl y at cl ose range. Thi s
method i s very useful for chance encounters wi th the enemy and when
securi ty i s threatened. The sni per carri es the ri fl e poi nted toward the front,
wi th the muzzl e al ways poi nti ng where he i s l ooki ng and not at port arms.
When the ri fl e i s rai sed to fi re, the eye i s l ooki ng at the target. As the sni per
l ooks at hi s target, the weapon l i nes on the target and he fi res i n the same
movement. Thi s techni que must be practi ced to obtai n profi ci ency. I t i s not
wi l d fi ri ng, but a l earned techni que. A cl ose anal ogy coul d be made to a
skeet shooter who poi nts hi s shotgun as opposed to si ghti ng i t.
FIRING THROUGH OBSTACLES AND BARRIERS
3-246. Another vari abl e the sni per may encounter i s the effect that gl ass
penetrati on has on exteri or and termi nal bal l i sti cs. Fi ri ng through gl ass i s
unpredi ctabl e, and unl ess the target i s cl ose to the gl ass, more than one shot
may be requi red. The sni per shoul d never shoot through gl ass i f i t i s cl ose to
hi s posi ti on. He i s better off openi ng the wi ndow or havi ng someone el se
break the wi ndow for hi m. The U.S. Army conducted a penetrati on test by
fi ri ng through a gl ass pl ate from a di stance of 1 yard at a si l houette target
100 yards away. Of the 14 test shots through vari ous types of gl ass, onl y 2
shots hi t the target.
GLASS PENETRATION
3-247. The Uni ted States Mari ne Corps (USMC) conducted a test by fi ri ng at
an 8- by 9-i nch pane of safety gl ass at 90- and 45-degree angl es wi th the
fol l owi ng resul ts:
Regardl ess of the angl e, the path of the test bul l et core was not greatl y
affected up to 5 feet beyond the poi nt of i ni ti al i mpact; further from the
gl ass, the apparent defl ecti on became more pronounced.
At an angl e, gl ass fragments were al ways bl own perpendi cul ar to the
gl ass pl ate.
The M118 173 grai n bul l ets copper jacket fragments upon i mpact. Al l
of the bul l et fragments fol l owed an errati c path both i n hei ght and
wi dth. Each of the mai n cores (l ead) began to tumbl e about 2 feet from
the i ni ti al i mpact poi nt.
Due to the l ami nati on of safety gl ass wi th a sheet pl asti c, l arge
fragments of pl asti c were embedded i n the target 1 foot from the POI .
These fragments were l arge enough to cause severe wounds.
Gl ass fragments di d not penetrate targets farther than 1 foot from
the POI .
I t can be concl uded that anyone near the gl ass woul d be i njured.
FM 3-05.222
3-78
3-248. Therefore, as i ndi cated by both the USMC and U.S. Army tests,
sni pers shoul d try to avoi d engagi ng targets requi ri ng gl ass penetrati on.
PENETRATION PERFORMANCE OF M118 SPECIAL BALL
3-249. To support the M24 SWS program, two tests were conducted wi th the
M118 Speci al Bal l ammuni ti on at a range of 800 meters. The fi rst test used a
test sampl e of bal l i sti c Kevl ar, and the second test used a 10-gauge, mi l d steel
pl ate. Testi ng personnel posi ti oned a wi tness pl ate behi nd each of these
targets. Wi tness pl ates consi st of a 0.5-mm sheet of 2024T3 al umi num to
measure resi dual vel oci ty or energy. To pass the test, the bul l et had to
penetrate both the target and wi tness pl ate. Resul ts of these tests fol l ow:
M118 versus ballistic Kevlar. When 10 rounds were fi red at 13 l ayers of
bal l i sti c Kevl ar (equi val ent to the U.S. personal armor system ground
troop vest), ful l penetrati on was achi eved of both the test sampl e and
the al umi num wi tness pl ate.
M118 versus mild steel plate. When 20 rounds were fi red at a 3.42-mm
thi ck (10-gauge) SAE 1010 or 1020 steel pl ate (Rockwel l hardness of
B55 to B70), 16 achi eved ful l penetrati on of both the test sampl e and
al umi num wi tness pl ate. The 4 fai l i ng rounds penetrated the steel
pl ate but onl y dented the wi tness pl ate. These 4 rounds were
consi dered to have i nsuffi ci ent termi nal energy to be effecti ve.
COLD BORE FIRST-SHOT HIT
3-250. On a mi ssi on, a sni per wi l l rarel y get a second shot at the i ntended
target. Therefore, he must be 98 percent sure that he wi l l hi t hi s target wi th the
fi rst shot. Thi s requi rement pl aces a great deal of i mportance on the
mai ntenance of a sni pers l ogbook. Whenever the sni per conducts a l i ve-fi re
exerci se, he shoul d devel op a database on hi s SWS and i ts col d bore zero. The
sni per uses the i ntegrated act of fi ri ng one round to hone hi s sni pi ng ski l l s. By
mai ntai ni ng a detai l ed l ogbook, he devel ops confi dence i n hi s systems abi l i ty to
provi de the one shotone ki l l goal of every sni per. The sni per must pay cl ose
attenti on to the mai ntenance and cl eanl i ness of hi s ri fl e. He must al so mai ntai n
profi ci ency i n the marksmanshi p fundamental s. He shoul d attempt to obtai n
hi s col d bore data at al l ranges and cl i mati c condi ti ons. The bore and chamber
must be compl etel y dry and free of al l l ubri cants. The exact POI of the bul l et
shoul d be annotated i n the l ogbook. Al so keepi ng a fi l e of the actual paper
targets used i s even better. Thi s data wi l l hel p detect trends that can be used to
i mprove the sni pers performance. Thi s exerci se al so devel ops the teamwork
requi red for the sni per pai r to accompl i sh the mi ssi on. A sni per goi ng on a
mi ssi on wi l l foul hi s bore wi th 5 shots to precl ude probl ems wi th the so- cal l ed
col d bore shot.
LIMITED VISIBILITY FIRING
3-251. The U.S. Army currentl y fi el ds the AN/PVS 10 as the ni ght vi si on
si ght for i ts SWS. I f unavai l abl e, then the sni per can compromi se by usi ng
i ssued equi pment to mount a PVS-4 onto an M4 or M16. Thi s NVD shoul d be
kept permanentl y mounted to avoi d zeroi ng probl ems. Thi s system i s
adequate because the ri fl es effecti ve range matches that of the NVDs abi l i ty
FM 3-05.222
3-79
to di sti ngui sh target detai l s. The M24 can be used duri ng l i mi ted vi si bi l i ty
operati ons i f the condi ti ons are favorabl e. Moonl i ght, arti fi ci al i l l umi nati on,
and terrai n wi l l determi ne the potenti al effecti veness. The sni per wi l l fi nd
that the reti cl e wi l l fade out duri ng l i mi ted vi si bi l i ty. Rather than tryi ng to
strai n hi s eyes to make out the reti cl e, he shoul d use the enti re fi el d of vi ew
of the tel escope as the ai mi ng devi ce. Li ve-fi re exerci ses wi l l hel p the sni per
determi ne hi s own maxi mum effecti ve range. The sni per needs to use off-
center vi si on i n the ri fl e scope to see the heavy crosshai r post and target.
3-252. The PVS-10 and the Uni versal Ni ght Si ght (UNS) are now standard
i ssue. The NAD 750 and KN 200/250 (menti oned i n Chapter 2), as wel l as the
other NVDs, are not yet a standard-i ssue i tem. These si ghts are avai l abl e for
conti ngency operati ons and are i n conti ngency stocks. Every effort shoul d be
made to acqui re these si ghts for trai ni ng. I t i s the best si ght currentl y
avai l abl e for preci si on fi ri ng duri ng l i mi ted vi si bi l i ty. I t has a l onger effecti ve
range for di scri mi nati ng targets and does not need to be mounted and
di smounted from the ri fl e.
3-253. Another consi derati on duri ng l i mi ted vi si bi l i ty fi ri ng i s that of muzzl e
fl ash. Both the M4 and the M16 are equi pped wi th an excel l ent fl ash
suppressor. The enemy woul d have to be very cl ose or usi ng NVDs to pi npoi nt
a coupl e of muzzl e fl ashes. The M24 has a fl ash suppressor that attaches to
the front si ght bl ock and i s l ocked i n pl ace by a ri ng. To mi ni mi ze the
compromi si ng effects of muzzl e fl ash, the sni per shoul d careful l y sel ect hi de
si tes and ammuni ti on l ots. However, at a range of greater than
100 meters, the muzzl e fl ash i s not noti ceabl e, and even wi th NVDs the
fl ash i s barel y noti ceabl e. Sni pers shoul d not use fl ash hi ders because they
i ncrease the muzzl e bl ast si gnature of the weapon and i ncrease the l i kel i hood
of detecti on. They al so change the barrel harmoni cs and are detri mental to
the weapons accuracy.
NUCLEAR, BIOLOGICAL, AND CHEMICAL FIRING
3-254. Performance of l ong-range preci si on fi re i s di ffi cul t at best duri ng
nucl ear, bi ol ogi cal , and chemi cal (NBC) condi ti ons. Enemy NBC warfare
creates new probl ems for the sni per. Not onl y must the sni per properl y
execute the fundamental s of marksmanshi p and contend wi th the forces of
nature, he must overcome obstacl es presented by protecti ve equi pment.
3-255. Fi ri ng i n mi ssi on-ori ented protecti ve posture (MOPP) has a
si gni fi cant effect on the abi l i ty to del i ver preci si on fi re. The fol l owi ng
probl ems and sol uti ons have been i denti fi ed:
Eye relief. Speci al emphasi s must be made i n mai ntai ni ng proper eye
rel i ef and the absence of scope shadow. I t i s a must to mai ntai n
consi stent stock wel d. However, care must be taken not to break the
masks seal .
Trigger control. Probl ems encountered wi th tri gger control consi st of
the fol l owi ng:
Sense of touch. When gl oves are worn, the sni per cannot
determi ne the amount of pressure he i s appl yi ng to the tri gger.
Thi s poi nt i s parti cul arl y i mportant i f the sni per has hi s tri gger
FM 3-05.222
3-80
adjusted for a l i ght pul l . Trai ni ng wi th a gl ove wi l l be benefi ci al ;
however, the tri gger shoul d be adjusted to al l ow the sni per to feel
the tri gger wi thout acci dental di scharge.
Stock drag. Whi l e trai ni ng, the sni per shoul d have hi s observer
watch hi s tri gger fi nger to ensure that the fi nger and gl ove are
not touchi ng any part of the ri fl e but the tri gger. The gl ove or
fi nger resti ng on the tri gger guard moves the ri fl e as the tri gger i s
pul l ed to the rear. The sni per must wear a wel l -fi tted gl ove.
Vertical sight picture. The sni per natural l y cants the ri fl e i nto the
cheek of the face whi l e fi ri ng wi th a protecti ve mask. Usi ng the
crosshai r of the reti cl e as a reference mark, he keeps the weapon i n a
verti cal posi ti on. Fai l ure to stay upri ght wi l l cause shots to hi t l ow and
i n the di recti on of the cant. Al so, wi ndage and el evati on correcti ons wi l l
not be true.
Sniper/ observer communications. The absence of a voi ce-emi tter on
the M25-ser i es pr otecti ve mask cr eates an obstacl e i n r el ayi ng
i nfor mati on. The team ei ther speaks l ouder or uses wr i tten messages.
A system of foot taps, fi nger taps, or hand si gnal s may be devi sed.
Communi cati on i s a must; tr ai ni ng shoul d i ncl ude the devel opment
and pr acti ce of communi cati ons at di ffer ent MOPP l evel s.
3-256. The easi est sol uti on to NBC fi ri ng wi th the M24 SWS i s to use the
Harri s bi pod. The bi pod hel ps stabi l i ze the ri fl e and al l ows the sni per to
mai ntai n a sol i d posi ti on behi nd the ri fl e as he cants hi s head to achi eve a
proper si ght pi cture. The sni per can al so try ti l ti ng hi s head down so he i s
l ooki ng up through the tel escope. NBC fi ri ng must be i ncorporated i nto l i ve-
fi re ranges so that the most comfortabl e and effecti ve posi ti on can be
devel oped. Al so, a detai l ed l ogbook shoul d be devel oped that addresses the
effects of NBC fi ri ng.
4-1
Chapter 4
Field Skills
The sni pers pri mary mi ssi on i s to i nterdi ct sel ected enemy targets wi th
l ong-range preci si on fi re. How wel l he accompl i shes hi s mi ssi on depends
on the knowl edge, understandi ng, and appl i cati on of vari ous fi el d
techni ques and ski l l s that al l ow hi m to move, hi de, observe, and detect
targets (Appendi x I ). Thi s chapter di scusses those techni ques and ski l l s
that the sni per must l earn before empl oyment i n support of combat
operati ons. The sni pers appl i cati on of these ski l l s wi l l affect hi s survi val
on the battl efi el d.
CAMOUFLAGE
4-1. Camoufl age i s one of the basi c weapons of war. To the sni per team, i t
can mean the di fference between l i fe and death. Camoufl age measures are
i mportant si nce the team cannot afford to be detected at any ti me whi l e
movi ng al one, as part of another el ement, or whi l e operati ng from a fi ri ng
posi ti on. Marksmanshi p trai ni ng teaches the sni per to hi t a target. Knowi ng
how and when to camoufl age can enabl e the sni per to escape becomi ng a
target. He must be camoufl age-consci ous from the ti me he departs on a
mi ssi on unti l he returns. Payi ng attenti on to camoufl age fundamental s i s a
mark of a wel l -trai ned sni per. FM 20-3, Camouflage, Concealment, and
Decoys, provi des more detai l s.
FUNDAMENTALS
4-2. The sni per must pay careful attenti on when usi ng camoufl age cl othi ng
and equi pment (arti fi ci al and natural ). He shoul d appl y the fol l owi ng
fundamental rul es when determi ni ng hi s camoufl age needs:
Take advantage of al l avai l abl e natural conceal ment such as trees,
bushes, grass, earth, man-made structures, and shadows.
Al ter the form, shadow, texture, and col or of objects.
Camoufl age agai nst ground and ai r observati on.
Camoufl age a sni per post as i t i s prepared.
Study the terrai n and vegetati on i n the area. Arrange grass,
l eaves, brush, and other natural camoufl age to conform to the
area.
Use onl y as much materi al as i s needed. Excessi ve use of materi al
(natural or arti fi ci al ) can reveal a sni pers posi ti on.
Obtai n natural materi al over a wi de area. Do not stri p an area, as
thi s may attract the enemys attenti on.
FM 3-05.222
4-2
Di spose of excess soi l by coveri ng i t wi th l eaves and grass or by
dumpi ng i t under bushes, i nto streams, or i nto ravi nes. Pi l es of
fresh di rt i ndi cate that an area i s occupi ed and reduce the
effecti veness of camoufl age.
4-3. The sni per and hi s equi pment must bl end wi th the natural background.
Remember that vegetati on changes col or many ti mes i n an area.
VARIOUS GEOGRAPHICAL AREAS
4-4. A sni per cannot use one type of camoufl age i n al l types of terrai n and
geographi c areas. Before operati ons i n an area, a sni per shoul d study the
terrai n, the vegetati on, and the l ay of the l and to determi ne the best possi bl e
type of personal camoufl age.
4-5. I n areas wi th heavy snow or i n wooded areas wi th snow-covered brush,
the sni per shoul d use a ful l , whi te camoufl age sui t wi th gray shadi ng. Wi th
snow on the ground and the brush not covered, he shoul d wear whi te trousers
and green-brown tops. A hood or vei l i n snow areas i s very effecti ve, and
equi pment shoul d be stri ped or total l y covered i n whi te. I n snow regi ons,
vi si bi l i ty duri ng a bri ght ni ght i s nearl y as good as duri ng the day. Thi s
advantage gi ves the sni per ful l -ti me capabi l i ti es, but he must move al ong
careful l y conceal ed routes.
4-6. I n sandy and desert areas that have mi ni mal vegetati on, textured
camoufl age i s normal l y not necessary. Sti l l , proper col ori ng of a sui t that
breaks up the sni pers human outl i ne i s needed. Bl endi ng tan and brown
col ors i s most effecti ve. A bul ky-type smock of l i ght materi al wi th a hood
works wel l . The sni per must be sure hi s hands, face, and al l equi pment bl end
i nto a sol i d pattern that corresponds wi th the terrai n. The sni per must make
ful l use of the terrai n by usi ng properl y sel ected and conceal ed routes
of movement.
4-7. When depl oyed wi th regul ar troops i n an urban area, the sni per shoul d
be dressed l i ke the troops i n the area. When the sni per i s i n posi ti on, he
shoul d be camoufl aged to match hi s area of operati ons. He can use a bul ky,
shapel ess, gray camoufl age sui t that has been col ored to match rubbl e and
debri s. He shoul d make sure some type of hood breaks up the outl i ne of the
head. Movement duri ng dayl i ght hours shoul d be extremel y sl ow and careful ,
i f at al l , because of the unl i mi ted amount of possi bl e enemy sni per posi ti ons.
4-8. I n jungl e areas, the sni per can use fol i age, arti fi ci al camoufl age, and
camoufl age pai nt i n a contrasti ng pattern that wi l l bl end wi th the texture of
the terrai n. I n a very hot and humi d area, he shoul d wear onl y a l i ght
camoufl age sui t. A heavy sui t wi l l cause a l oss of too much body fl ui d. The
vegetati on i s usual l y very thi ck i n jungl e areas, so the sni per can rel y more
on the natural fol i age for conceal ment.
DISCIPLINE
4-9. The sni per must al ways practi ce camoufl age di sci pl i ne. The sni per wi l l
change hi s camoufl age to match the terrai n patterns and fol i age as he moves
and as i t dri es or wi l ts. He ensures hi s camoufl age presents a natural
appearance at al l ti mes.
FM 3-05.222
4-3
CONFIGURATION
4-10. The sni per must constantl y observe the terrai n and vegetati on
changes to pi ck the most conceal ed routes of advance and be certai n he i s
camoufl aged properl y. He shoul d use shadows caused by vegetati on, terrai n
features, and man-made features to remai n undetected. He must master the
techni ques of hi di ng, bl endi ng, and decei vi ng.
Hiding
4-11. Thi s techni que enabl es the sni per to compl etel y conceal hi s body from
observati on by l yi ng i n thi ck vegetati on, l yi ng under l eaves, or even by
di ggi ng a shal l ow trench and coveri ng up i n i t. Hi di ng may be used i f the
sni per stumbl es upon an enemy patrol and i mmedi ate conceal ment i s needed
or i f he wi shes to stay out of si ght duri ng dayl i ght hours to awai t darkness.
However, the sni per shoul d not use the hi di ng techni que i n the fi nal fi ri ng
posi ti on (FFP), as he woul d be unabl e to see hi s target.
Blending
4-12. A sni per shoul d use thi s techni que si nce i t i s not possi bl e to compl etel y
camoufl age i n such a way as to be i ndi sti ngui shabl e from the surroundi ng
area. Camoufl age needs to be so nearl y perfect that the sni per cannot be
recogni zed through opti cal gear or wi th the human eye. He must be abl e to be
l ooked at di rectl y and not be seen. Thi s trai t takes much practi ce and
experi ence. The ghi l l i e sui t i s a form of bl endi ng.
NOTE: A sni per shoul d not attempt to use di sgui si ng as a camoufl age
techni que. Thi s requi res hi m to change hi s appearance to l ook l i ke
another object.
Deceiving
4-13. I n thi s method, the sni per tri cks the enemy i nto a fal se concl usi on
regardi ng hi s l ocati on, i ntenti ons, or movement. By pl anti ng objects such as
ammuni ti on cans, food cartons, or somethi ng i ntri gui ng, the sni per decoys
the enemy i nto the open where he can be brought under fi re. Cutti ng enemy
communi cati ons wi re and wai ti ng for the repai r personnel i s another
techni que. After a uni t has l eft a bi vouac area, a sni per can stay behi nd
to watch for enemy scouts that may search the area. The uni t can al so
use mannequi ns to l ure the enemy sni per i nto fi ri ng, thereby reveal i ng
hi s posi ti on.
TARGET INDICATORS
4-14. A target i ndi cator i s anythi ng a sni per does or fai l s to do that wi l l
reveal hi s posi ti on to an enemy. A sni per must know these i ndi cators i f he i s
to l ocate the enemy and prevent the enemy from l ocati ng hi m. There are four
general areas: ol factory, tacti l e, audi tory, and vi sual .
Olfactory
4-15. The enemy can smel l these target i ndi cators. Cooki ng food, fi res,
ci garettes, aftershave l oti on, soap, and i nsect repel l ents are exampl es. Most of
these i ndi cators are caused by the sni pers bodi l y functi ons. The sni per
FM 3-05.222
4-4
usual l y can el i mi nate thi s target i ndi cator by washi ng the body, buryi ng body
wastes, and el i mi nati ng the cause. The i ndi cator onl y gi ves a si gn that the
sni per i s i n the area.
Tactile
4-16. The sni per can touch these i ndi cators; for exampl e, tri p wi re, phone
wi re, and hi de posi ti ons. He uses them mai nl y at ni ght. Tacti l e i ndi cators are
defeated through the proper constructi on of sni per hi des, and awareness of
the al tered vegetati on he has l eft behi nd whi l e constructi ng hi s hi de.
Auditory
4-17. Thi s i ndi cator i s a sound that the sni per mi ght make by movi ng,
rattl i ng equi pment, or tal ki ng, and i s most noti ceabl e duri ng hours of
darkness. The enemy may di smi ss smal l noi ses as natural , but when they
hear someone speak, they know for certai n that others are near. The sni per
shoul d si l ence al l equi pment before a mi ssi on so that he wi l l make no sound
whi l e runni ng or wal ki ng. He can defeat audi tory i ndi cators through noi se
di sci pl i ne and proper equi pment preparati on.
Visual
4-18. Thi s factor i s the most i mportant target i ndi cator. The mai n reason a
sni per i s detected i s because the enemy sees hi m. Bei ng fami l i ar wi th
subcategori es of vi sual target i ndi cators can hel p the sni per l ocate the enemy
and prevent hi m from bei ng detected. The sni per can overcome the fol l owi ng
vi sual i ndi cators by properl y usi ng the pri nci pl es of conceal ment.
4-19. Why Things are Seen. The proper understandi ng and appl i cati on of
the pri nci pl es of conceal ment used wi th the proper camoufl age techni ques
can protect the sni per from enemy observati on. The fol l owi ng pri nci pl es
expl ai n why thi ngs are seen:
Siting. Thi s detecti on i nvol ves anythi ng that i s out of pl ace or i n a
l ocati on that i t does not bel ong. I t i ncl udes wrong fol i age or i tems i n an
area that the sni per i s occupyi ng. Si ti ng i s dependent upon
Mi ssi on.
Di spersi on (more than one sni per team per objecti ve).
Terrai n patterns (rural , urban, wooded, barren).
Shape. Military equipment and personnel have familiar outlines and
specific shapes that are easily recognizable. A sniper must alter or disguise
these revealing shapes and outlines. Geometric shapes are manmade.
Shadows. I f used correctl y, shadows can be very effecti ve i n hi di ng a
sni pers posi ti on. They can be found under most condi ti ons of day and
ni ght. However, the sni per can cast a shadow that can gi ve hi m away.
Silhouettes. They can easi l y be seen i n the dayti me as wel l as at ni ght.
A sni per must break up the outl i ne of hi s body and hi s equi pment so
i t bl ends wi th the background to reduce the chance of hi s si l houette
bei ng recogni zed.
FM 3-05.222
4-5
Surface. Refl ecti ons of l i ght on shi ny surfaces can i nstantl y attract
attenti on and can be seen for great di stances. The sni per must
camoufl age al l objects that have a di sti ngui shabl e surface, such as
hats, gl oves, and shi rtsl eeves. He must al so consi der the texture of the
surface he i s camoufl agi ng.
Spacing. Thi s factor i s normal l y more i mportant when two or more
sni per teams are depl oyed together. Teams shoul d coordi nate thei r
l ocati ons so that one does not compromi se another. Teams shoul d al so
coordi nate thei r movements so that onl y one team i s movi ng near the
objecti ve at one ti me. Spaci ng i s al so a factor when deal i ng wi th one
sni per team. A sni per team must consi der the di stance between team
members when movi ng to, and when at, the objecti ve or fi ri ng posi ti on.
Team members may need to move forward i nto the fi ri ng posi ti on
i ndi vi dual l y so as not to compromi se the fi ri ng posi ti on. Thi s movement
wi l l normal l y depend on the terrai n and the enemy si tuati on.
Color. Changi ng seasons cause vegetati on to change. A sni per must be
aware of the col or of vegetati on so that he does not contrast wi th i t. The
sni per must never use poi nts of col or, as the eye wi l l noti ce any
movement i n the col or.
Movement. The mai n reason a sni pers posi ti on i s reveal ed to the
enemy i s due to movement. Even i f al l other i ndi cators are absent,
movement can gi ve a sni pers posi ti on away. Rapi d or jerky movement
i s very noti ceabl e; whi l e sl ow movement may be seen, i t i s not as
noti ceabl e nor wi l l i t attract the eye as readi l y. The sni per must al so
remember that ani mal and fol i age movements can gi ve hi m away.
4-20. Effects of Terrain Patterns and Weather Conditions. The sni per
must consi der the weather condi ti ons throughout the mi ssi on because they
can constantl y change. He must al so consi der terrai n patterns because the
patterns at the objecti ve may be qui te di fferent from the ones en route to and
from the objecti ve.
TYPES OF CAMOUFLAGE
4-21. The two types of camoufl age that the sni per team can use to
camoufl age i tsel f and i ts equi pment are natural and arti fi ci al . Each type has
speci fi c effects that can hel p the sni per remai n undetected.
4-22. Natural camoufl age i s vegetati on or materi al s that are nati ve to the
gi ven area. The sni per team shoul d al ways augment i ts appearance by usi ng
some natural camoufl age. Natural fol i age, properl y appl i ed, i s preferred to
arti fi ci al materi al , but the sni per must be aware of wi l ti ng.
4-23. Arti fi ci al camoufl age i s any manmade materi al or substance that the
sni per uses for col ori ng or coveri ng somethi ng to conceal i t. He can use
camoufl age sti cks or face pai nts to cover al l exposed areas of ski n such as
face, hands, and the back of the neck. He shoul d darken the parts of the
face that form shadows. The sni per team uses the fol l owi ng types of
camoufl age patterns:
Striping. Used when i n heavi l y wooded areas, and l eafy vegetati on
i s scarce.
FM 3-05.222
4-6
Blotching. Used when an area i s thi ck wi th l eafy vegetati on.
Combination. Used when movi ng through changi ng terrai n. I t i s
normal l y the best al l -round pattern.
MATERIALS
4-24. There are many types of camoufl age materi al s. The sni per can use any
of the fol l owi ng i tems to cover exposed ski n:
Arti fi ci al materi al s (or manufactured materi al s).
Army-i ssued camoufl age pai nt sti cks:
Loam and l i ght greenused for l i ght-ski nned personnel i n al l but
snow regi ons.
Sand and l i ght greenused for dark-ski nned personnel i n al l but
snow regi ons.
Loam and whi teused for al l personnel i n snow-covered terrai n.
NOTE: The use of camoufl age i n a col d weather envi ronment wi l l make
detecti ng col d weather i njuri es more di ffi cul t.
Commerci al hunters pai nt. There are many di fferent col ors.
Stage makeup.
Bear grease.
Natural materi al s (or sel f-made materi al s):
Burnt cork.
Charcoal .
Lampbl ack (carbi de).
Mud.
CLOTHING
4-25. The sni per can wear many types of cl othi ng to conceal hi msel f from the
enemy. Battl e dress uni forms (BDUs) have a camoufl age pattern but often
requi re addi ti onal camoufl agi ng, especi al l y i n operati ons that occur very cl ose
to the enemy. The sni per can wear any of the fol l owi ng:
U.S. Army uni forms:
Camoufl age fati gues.
BDUs.
Desert BDUs.
Overwhi tes.
Desert ni ght camoufl age uni forms.
CAUTION
Dyes or paints should not be used, as they do not
come off. Mud may contain dangerous parasites.

FM 3-05.222
4-7
Nonstandard uni forms wi th other camoufl age patterns may hel p bl end
i nto the surroundi ng popul ati on.
Gl oves or mi ttens.
Head masks:
Bal acl avas.
Vei l s.
Head covers.
Kaffi yehs.
Ghi l l i e or sni per hats.
GHILLIE SUIT
4-26. The term ghi l l i e sui t ori gi nated i n Scotl and duri ng the 1800s.
(Ghi l l i e i s a Scotti sh and I ri sh term for a fi shi ng and hunti ng gui de.)
Scotti sh game wardens made speci al camoufl age sui ts to catch poachers.
Today the ghi l l i e sui t i s a speci al l y made camoufl age uni form that i s covered
wi th i rregul ar patterns of garni sh or netti ng (Fi gure 4-1, page 4-8).
4-27. The sni per can make a ghi l l i e sui t from BDUs or one-pi ece avi ator-
type uni forms. Turni ng the uni form i nsi de out pl aces the pockets i nsi de the
sui t and protects i tems i n the pockets from damage caused by crawl i ng on the
ground. The sni per shoul d cover the front of the ghi l l i e sui t wi th canvas or
some type of heavy cl oth to rei nforce i t. He shoul d cover the knees and el bows
wi th two l ayers of canvas, and rei nforce the seam of the crotch wi th heavy
nyl on thread si nce these areas are prone to wear out more often. Shoo-goo i s
excel l ent for attachi ng the canvas to the uni form.
4-28. The next step i s to make a garni sh or net cover. The sni per shoul d
make sure the garni sh or netti ng covers the shoul ders and reaches down to
the el bows on the sl eeves. The garni sh appl i ed to the back of the sui t shoul d
be l ong enough to cover the si des of the sni per when he i s i n the prone
posi ti on. A bush hat i s al so covered wi th garni sh or netti ng. The garni sh
shoul d be l ong enough to break up the outl i ne of the sni pers neck, but shoul d
not be so l ong i n front to obscure hi s vi si on or hi nder movement. A cut-up
hammock makes an excel l ent foundati on for the garni sh.
4-29. A vei l can be made from a net or pi eces of cl oth covered wi th garni sh
or netti ng. I t covers the weapon and the sni pers head when he i s i n a fi ri ng
posi ti on. The sni per can sew the vei l i nto the ghi l l i e sui t or a booni e hat, or he
can carry i t separatel y. He must remember that a ghi l l i e sui t does not make
hi m i nvi si bl e but i s onl y a camoufl age base. The sni per can add natural
vegetati on to hel p bl end wi th the surroundi ngs, at a rate of 60 to 70 percent
natural to 30 to 40 percent man-made.
NOTE: The ghi l l i e sui t i s made to meet the sni pers need. However, he must
take great care to ensure that he does not pl ace an excessi ve amount of
materi al on the netti ng. Doi ng so may form a new outl i ne that can be seen by
the enemy, or create a sui t that wi l l overheat hi m.
NOTE: I t may be to the advantage of the sni per to use onl y a vei l , as a ful l
ghi l l i e sui t wi l l be very bul ky and di ffi cul t to pack and transport.
FM 3-05.222
4-8
Figure 4-1. Construction of the Ghillie Suit
CAMOUFLAGE FOR EQUIPMENT
4-30. The sni per must camoufl age al l the equi pment that he wi l l use.
However, he must ensure that the camoufl age does not i nterfere wi th or
hi nder the operati on of the equi pment. Equi pment that the sni per shoul d
camoufl age i s as fol l ows:
Rifles. The SWS and the M4/M16/M203 shoul d al so be camoufl aged
to break up thei r outl i nes. The SWS can be carri ed i n a drag bag
(Fi gure 4-2, page 4-9), whi ch i s a ri fl e case made of canvas and covered
wi th garni sh si mi l ar to the ghi l l i e sui t. However, the ri fl e wi l l not be
CAUTION
If using camouflage netting as a base, remove
the radar scattering rings. Also remember the
plastic camouflage shines when wet and the
netting may catch on foliage when the sniper is
crawling.
FM 3-05.222
4-9
combat ready whi l e i t i s i n the drag bag. The drag bag can become a
l i abi l i ty i n many ci rcumstances.
NOTE: The sni per shoul d use drag bags careful l y because they grab and snag
on fol i age duri ng movement, but are benefi ci al when cl i mbi ng bui l di ngs.
Optics. The sni per must al so camoufl age opti cs to break up the outl i ne
and to reduce the possi bi l i ty of l i ght refl ecti ng off the l enses. He can
cover the l enses wi th mesh-type webbi ng or nyl on hose materi al . He
can al so use a cover cutout that changes the ci rcul ar appearance of the
opti cs objecti ve l ens.
ALI CE Packs. I f the sni per uses the ALI CE pack whi l e weari ng the
ghi l l i e sui t, he must camoufl age the pack the same as the sui t. He can
use pai nts, dyes, netti ng, and garni sh. However, the sni per shoul d
avoi d weari ng the ALI CE pack wi th the ghi l l i e sui t.
Figure 4-2. Construction of an Equipment Drag Bag
FACIAL CAMOUFLAGE PATTERNS
4-31. Faci al patterns can vary from i rregul ar stri pes across the face to bol d
spl otchi ng. The best pattern, perhaps, i s a combi nati on of both stri ps and
bl otches. The sni per shoul d avoi d wi l d types of desi gns and col ors that stand
out from the background. He shoul d cover al l exposed ski n, to i ncl ude the
Hands and forearms.
Neck, front and back.
FM 3-05.222
4-10
Ears, as wel l as behi nd the ears.
Face:
Foreheaddarkened.
Cheekbonesdarkened.
Nosedarkened.
Chi ndarkened.
Under eyesl i ghtened.
Under nosel i ghtened.
Under chi nl i ghtened.
USING REMOVABLE CAMOUFLAGE SPRAY PAINT ON THE SWS AND EQUIPMENT
4-32. The sni per shoul d pai nt hi s weapon wi th a removabl e pai nt (such as
Bow Fl age) so that he can change the col ors to sui t di fferent vegetati on and
changi ng seasons. Bow Fl age spray pai nt wi l l not affect the accuracy or
performance of the weapon. However, the sni per must take care when
appl yi ng thi s pai nt. Bow Fl age shoul d not make contact wi th the l ens of
opti cal equi pment, the bore of the weapon, the chamber, the face of the bol t,
the tri gger area, or the adjustment knobs of the tel escope. I t wi l l not damage
the weapon to be stored wi th the pai nt on i t, but i t i s easi l y removed wi th
Bow Fl age remover or Shooters Choi ce cl eani ng sol vent.
FIELD-EXPEDIENT CAMOUFLAGE
4-33. The sni per may have to use fi el d-expedi ent camoufl age i f other
methods are not avai l abl e. I nstead of camoufl age sti cks or face pai nt, he may
use charcoal , wal nut stai n, mud, or whatever works. He shoul d not use oi l or
grease due to the strong odor. The sni per can attach natural vegetati on to the
body usi ng boot bands or rubber bands, or by cutti ng hol es i n the uni form.
COVER AND CONCEALMENT
4-34. Properl y understandi ng and appl yi ng the pri nci pl es of cover and
conceal ment, al ong wi th proper camoufl age techni ques, protects the sni per
from enemy observati on.
COVER
4-35. Cover i s natural or arti fi ci al protecti on from the fi re of enemy
weapons. Natural (ravi nes, hol l ows, reverse sl opes) and arti fi ci al (fi ghti ng
posi ti ons, trenches, wal l s) cover protect the sni per from fl at trajectory fi res
and partl y protect hi m from hi gh-angl e fi res and the effects of nucl ear
expl osi ons. Even a 6-i nch depressi on (i f properl y used) or fol d i n the ground
may provi de enough cover to save the sni per under fi re. He must al ways l ook
for and take advantage of al l cover the terrai n offers. By combi ni ng thi s habi t
wi th proper movement techni ques, he can protect hi msel f from enemy fi re. To
get protecti on from enemy fi re when movi ng, the sni per shoul d use routes
that put cover between hi msel f and the pl aces where the enemy i s known or
thought to be. He shoul d use natural and arti fi ci al cover to keep the enemy
from seei ng hi m and fi ri ng at hi m.
FM 3-05.222
4-11
CONCEALMENT
4-36. Conceal ment i s natural or arti fi ci al protecti on from enemy
observati on. The surroundi ngs may provi de natural conceal ment that needs
no change before use (bushes, grass, and shadows). The sni per can create
arti fi ci al conceal ment from materi al s such as burl ap and camoufl age nets, or
he can move natural materi al s (bushes, l eaves, and grass) from thei r ori gi nal
l ocati on. He must consi der the effects of the change of seasons on the
conceal ment provi ded by both natural and arti fi ci al materi al s.
4-37. The pri nci pl es of conceal ment i ncl ude the fol l owi ng:
Avoid Unnecessary Movement. Remai n sti l l ; movement attracts
attenti on. The sni pers posi ti on may be conceal ed when he remai ns
sti l l , yet easi l y detected i f he moves. Thi s movement agai nst a
stati onary background wi l l make the sni per stand out. When he must
change posi ti ons, he shoul d move careful l y over a conceal ed route to
the new posi ti on, preferabl y duri ng l i mi ted vi si bi l i ty. He shoul d move
i nches at a ti me, sl owl y and cauti ousl y, al ways scanni ng ahead for the
next posi ti on.
Use All Available Concealment. Background i s i mportant; the sni per
must bl end i n to avoi d detecti on. The trees, bushes, grass, earth, and
man-made structures that form the background vary i n col or and
appearance. Thi s feature makes i t possi bl e for the sni per to bl end i n
wi th them. The sni per shoul d sel ect trees or bushes to bl end wi th the
uni form and to absorb the fi gure outl i ne. He must al ways assume that
hi s area i s under observati on. The sni per i n the open stands out cl earl y,
but the sni per i n the shadows i s di ffi cul t to see. Shadows exi st under
most condi ti ons, day and ni ght. A sni per shoul d never fi re from the
edge of a woodl i ne; he shoul d fi re from a posi ti on i nsi de the woodl i ne
(i n the shade or shadows provi ded by the treetops).
Stay Low to Observe. A l ow si l houette makes i t di ffi cul t for the enemy
to see a sni per. Therefore, he shoul d observe from a crouch, a squat, or
a prone posi ti on.
Expose Nothing That Shines. Refl ecti on of l i ght on a shi ny surface
i nstantl y attracts attenti on and can be seen from great di stances. The
sni per shoul d uncover hi s ri fl e scope onl y when i ndexi ng and reduci ng
a target. He shoul d then use opti cs cauti ousl y i n bri ght sunshi ne
because of the refl ecti ons they cause.
Avoid Skylining. Fi gures on the skyl i ne can be seen from a great
di stance, even at ni ght, because a dark outl i ne stands out agai nst the
l i ghter sky. The si l houette formed by the body makes a good target.
Alter Familiar Outlines. Mi l i tary equi pment and the human body are
fami l i ar outl i nes to the enemy. The sni per shoul d al ter or di sgui se
these reveal i ng shapes by usi ng a ghi l l i e sui t or outer smock that i s
covered wi th i rregul ar patterns of garni sh. He must al ter hi s outl i ne
from hi s head to the sol es of hi s boots.
Keep Quiet. Noi se, such as tal ki ng, can be pi cked up by enemy patrol s
or observati on posts. The sni per shoul d si l ence gear before a mi ssi on so
that i t makes no sound when he wal ks or runs.
FM 3-05.222
4-12
INDIVIDUAL AND TEAM MOVEMENT
4-38. I n many cases the success of a sni pers mi ssi on wi l l depend upon hi s
bei ng abl e to cl ose the range to hi s target, engage or observe the target, and
wi thdraw wi thout bei ng detected. To succeed, he must be abl e to move
si l entl y through di fferent types of terrai n.
PREPARATION FOR MOVEMENT
4-39. As wi th any mi ssi on, the sni per must make preparati ons before
movi ng. He must make a detai l ed study of l arge-scal e maps and aeri al
photographs of the area, i ntervi ew i nhabi tants and peopl e who have been
through the areas before, and revi ew any other i ntel l i gence avai l abl e about
the area. He may construct sand tabl es of the area of operati ons (AO) to assi st
i n formi ng and rehearsi ng the pl an. The sni per must sel ect camoufl age to sui t
the area. He must al so al l ow enough ti me for the sel ecti on of the proper
camoufl age, whi ch shoul d match the type of terrai n the team wi l l be movi ng
through. Before movi ng, personnel shoul d make sure that al l shi ny
equi pment i s toned down and al l gear i s si l enced. The sni per must ensure
that onl y mi ssi on-essenti al gear i s taken al ong.
Route Selection
4-40. A sni per shoul d try to avoi d known enemy posi ti ons and obstacl es,
open areas, and areas bel i eved to be under enemy observati on. He shoul d
sel ect routes that make maxi mum use of cover and conceal ment and shoul d
never use trai l s. A sni per shoul d try to take advantage of the more di ffi cul t
terrai n such as swamps or dense woods.
Movement
4-41. The sni per team cannot afford to be seen at any ti me by anyone.
Therefore, i ts movement wi l l be sl ow and del i berate. The movement over any
gi ven di stance wi l l be consi derabl y sl ower than i nfantry uni ts. Steal th i s a
sni pers securi ty.
Rules of Movement
4-42. When movi ng, the sni per shoul d al ways remember the fol l owi ng rul es:
Al ways assume that the area i s under enemy observati on.
Move sl owl y; progress by feet and i nches.
Do not cause the overhead movement of trees, bushes, or tal l grasses by
rubbi ng agai nst them.
Pl an every movement and traverse the route i n segments.
Stop, l ook, and l i sten often.
Move duri ng di sturbances such as gunfi re, expl osi ons, ai rcraft noi se,
wi nd, or anythi ng that wi l l di stract the enemys attenti on or conceal
the teams movement.
FM 3-05.222
4-13
TYPES OF MOVEMENT
4-43. The sni per team wi l l al ways move wi th cauti on. I t wi l l use vari ous
methods of wal ki ng and crawl i ng based upon the enemy threat and the speed
of movement requi red.
Walking
4-44. Wal ki ng i s the fastest, easi est, and most useful way to move when
extreme si l ence i s desi red. I t i s used when threat i s l ow and speed i s
i mportant. The sni per wal ks i n a crouch to mai ntai n a l ow profi l e wi th
shadows and bushes so as not to be si l houetted. To ensure sol i d footi ng, he
keeps hi s wei ght on one foot as he rai ses the other, bei ng sure to cl ear al l
brush. He then gentl y sets the movi ng foot down, toes fi rst, and then the heel .
He takes short steps to mai ntai n bal ance and carri es the weapon i n-l i ne wi th
the body by graspi ng the forward sl i ng swi vel (muzzl e poi nted down). At
ni ght, he hol ds the weapon cl ose to hi s body to free hi s other hand to feel for
obstacl es. The sni per shoul d use thi s wal ki ng techni que when near the
enemy; otherwi se, he woul d use the standard patrol wal k.
Hands and Knees Crawl
4-45. The sni per uses thi s sel f-expl anatory crawl when cover i s adequate or
si l ence i s necessary (Fi gure 4-3). The sni per hol ds the ri fl e i n one hand cl ose to
the chest and i n-l i ne wi th the body, or pl aces i t on the ground al ongsi de the
body. The wei ght of the upper body i s supported by the opposi te arm. Whi l e
supporti ng the ri fl e i n one hand, the sni per pi cks a poi nt ahead to posi ti on the
opposi te hand and sl owl y and qui etl y moves the hand i nto posi ti on. When
movi ng the hand i nto posi ti on, the sni per can support the wei ght of hi s upper
body on the opposi te el bow. The sni per then al ternatel y moves hi s hands
forward, bei ng careful not to make any noi se. Leaves, twi gs, and pebbl es can be
moved out of the way wi th the hand i f absol ute si l ence i s requi red.
Figure 4-3. Hands and Knees Crawl
High Crawl
4-46. When cover i s more preval ent or when speed i s requi red, the sni per
uses thi s movement (Fi gure 4-4, page 4-14). The body i s kept free of the
FM 3-05.222
4-14
ground and the wei ght rests on the forearms and the l ower l egs (shi ns). The
ri fl e can ei ther be carri ed, as i n the l ow crawl , or cradl ed i n the arms.
Movement i s made by al ternatel y pul l i ng wi th each arm and pushi ng wi th
one l eg. The sni per can al ternate l egs for pushi ng when cover i s adequate. An
al ternate method i s to pul l wi th both arms and push wi th one l eg. The sni per
shoul d always keep i n mi nd that the head and buttocks cannot be rai sed too
hi gh and the l egs must not be al l owed to make excessi ve noi se when bei ng
dragged over brush and debri s. Both heel s must remai n i n contact wi th the
ground. Thi s i s the standard Army hi gh crawl .
Figure 4-4. High Crawl
Medium Crawl
4-47. The medi um crawl al l ows the sni per to move i n fai rl y l ow cover
because i t i s faster and l ess ti ri ng to the body (Fi gure 4-5, page 4-15). Thi s
movement i s si mi l ar to the l ow crawl , except that one l eg i s cocked forward to
push wi th. One l eg i s used unti l ti red, then the other l eg i s used. However,
the sni per must not al ternate l egs, as thi s causes the l ower porti on of the
body to ri se i nto the ai r. Thi s i s the standard Army l ow crawl and i s
conducted i n the same manner.
Low Crawl
4-48. The sni per uses the l ow crawl when an enemy i s near, when vegetati on
i s sparse, or when movi ng i n or out of posi ti on to fi re or to observe (Fi gure 4-6,
page 4-15). To l ow crawl , he l i es face down on the ground, l egs together, feet fl at
on the ground, and arms to the front and fl at on the ground. To carry the ri fl e,
he grasps the upper porti on of the sl i ng and l ays the stock on the back of hi s
hand or wri st, wi th the ri fl e l yi ng on the i nsi de of hi s body under one arm. He
can push the ri fl e forward as he moves. However, care must be taken to ensure
that the muzzl e does not protrude i nto the ai r or sti ck i nto the ground. To move
forward, the sni per extends hi s arms and pul l s wi th hi s arms whi l e pushi ng
wi th hi s toes, bei ng careful not to rai se hi s heel s or head. Thi s movement i s
extremel y sl ow and requi res practi ce to keep from usi ng qui ck or jerky
movements. The head i s mai ntai ned down one si de of the face.
FM 3-05.222
4-15
Figure 4-5. Medium Crawl
Figure 4-6. Low Crawl
Turning While Crawling
4-49. I t may be necessary to change di recti on or turn compl etel y around
whi l e crawl i ng. To execute a ri ght turn, the sni per moves hi s upper body as
far to the ri ght as possi bl e and then moves hi s l eft l eg to the l eft as far as
possi bl e. He then cl oses the ri ght l eg to the l eft l eg. Thi s turn wi l l create a
pi vot-type movement (Fi gure 4-7, page 4-16). Left turns are done i n the
opposi te fashi on.
FM 3-05.222
4-16
Figure 4-7. Turning While Crawling
Backward Movement
4-50. The sni per moves backward by reversi ng the crawl i ng movement.
Assuming the Prone Position
4-51. The sni per assumes the prone posi ti on from a wal k by stoppi ng,
tucki ng hi s ri fl e under hi s arm, and crouchi ng sl owl y. Si mul taneousl y, he
feel s the ground wi th the free hand for a cl ear spot. He then l owers hi s knees,
one at a ti me, to the ground. He shi fts hi s wei ght to one knee and l i fts and
FM 3-05.222
4-17
extends the free l eg to the rear. The sni per uses hi s toes to feel for a cl ear
spot. Rol l i ng onto that si de, he then l owers the rest of hi s body i nto posi ti on.
Night Movement
4-52. Movement at ni ght i s basi cal l y the same as duri ng the day except i t i s
sl ower and more del i berate because of the l i mi ted vi si bi l i ty. The sni per has to
rel y on the senses of touch and heari ng to a greater extent. I f at al l possi bl e,
the sni per shoul d move under the cover of darkness, fog, haze, rai n, or hi gh
wi nds to conceal hi s movement. Thi s i s a safety factor; however, i t makes the
enemy harder to spot and speci fi c posi ti ons or l andmarks harder to l ocate.
STALKING
4-53. Stal ki ng i s the sni pers art of movi ng unseen i nto a fi ri ng posi ti on
wi thi n a range that wi l l ensure a fi rst-round ki l l and then wi thdrawi ng
undetected. Stal ki ng i ncorporates al l aspects of fi el dcraft and can onl y be
effecti vel y l earned by repeated practi ce over vari ous types of ground.
Reconnaissance
4-54. The sni per shoul d conduct a compl ete reconnai ssance before hi s
mi ssi on. Sel dom wi l l he have an opportuni ty to vi ew the ground. He must
rel y on maps and aeri al photographs for hi s i nformati on. The sni per shoul d
address the fol l owi ng before stal ki ng:
Locati on, posi ti on, or target to be stal ked.
Cover and conceal ment.
Best possi bl e fi ri ng posi ti on to engage targets.
Best l i ne of advance to stal k.
Obstacl es, whether natural or arti fi ci al .
Observati on poi nts al ong the route.
Known or suspected enemy l ocati ons.
Method of movement throughout the mi ssi on.
Wi thdrawal route (to i ncl ude method of movement).
Conduct of the Stalk
4-55. A sni per may l ose hi s sense of di recti on whi l e stal ki ng, parti cul arl y i f
he has to crawl a great di stance. Losi ng di recti on can be reduced i f the
sni per
Uses a compass, map, and aeri al photograph, and thoroughl y and
accuratel y pl ans the route, di recti on, and di stance to vari ous
checkpoi nts.
Memori zes a di sti nct l andmark or two, or even a seri es.
Notes the di recti on of the wi nd and sun. However, he must bear i n
mi nd that over a l ong peri od of ti me the wi nd di recti on can change and
the sun wi l l change posi ti on.
Has the abi l i ty to use terrai n associ ati on.
FM 3-05.222
4-18
4-56. The sni per must be al ert at al l ti mes. Any rel axati on on a stal k can
l ead to carel essness, resul ti ng i n an unsuccessful mi ssi on and even death. He
shoul d al so conduct an observati on at peri odi c i nterval s. I f the sni per i s
surpri sed or exposed duri ng the stal k, i mmedi ate reacti on i s necessary. The
sni per must deci de whether to freeze or move qui ckl y to the nearest cover
and hi de.
4-57. Di sturbed ani mal s or bi rds can draw attenti on to the area of approach.
I f ani mal s are al armed, the sni per shoul d stop, wai t, and l i sten. Thei r fl i ght
may i ndi cate someones approach or cal l attenti on to hi s posi ti on. However,
advantage shoul d be taken of any l ocal di sturbances or di stracti ons that coul d
enabl e hi m to move more qui ckl y than woul d otherwi se be possi bl e. I t shoul d
be emphasi zed that such movement i ncl udes a degree of ri sk, and when the
enemy i s cl ose, ri sks shoul d be avoi ded.
4-58. Whi l e hal ted, the sni per i denti fi es hi s next posi ti on and the posi ti on
after that posi ti on. I f he i s movi ng through tal l grass, he shoul d occasi onal l y
make a sl i ght change of di recti on to keep the grass from wavi ng i n an
unnatural moti on. I f crossi ng roads or trai l s, he shoul d l ook for a l ow spot or
cross on the l eadi ng edge of a curve and al ways avoi d cl eared areas, steep
sl opes, and l oose rocks. The sni per shoul d never skyl i ne hi msel f. He shoul d
al so be aware of any changes i n l ocal cover, si nce such changes wi l l usual l y
requi re an al terati on to hi s personal camoufl age.
4-59. Duri ng route sel ecti on, the sni per must al ways pl an one or two poi nts
ahead of hi s next poi nt. Doi ng so prevents the sni per from crawl i ng i nto a
dead-end posi ti on.
Night Stalking
4-60. A sni per i s l ess adapted to stal ki ng at ni ght than duri ng the day. He
must use sl ower, more del i berate movement to occupy an observati on post or
a fi ri ng posi ti on. The pri nci pal di fferences between day and ni ght stal ki ng are
that at ni ght
There i s a degree of protecti on offered by the darkness agai nst ai med
enemy fi re. However, a fal se sense of securi ty may compromi se the
sni per.
The sni per shoul d use NVDs to ai d i n movement.
Whi l e observati on i s sti l l i mportant, much more use i s made of heari ng,
maki ng si l ence vi tal .
Cover i s l ess i mportant than background. The sni per shoul d
parti cul arl y avoi d crests and skyl i nes agai nst whi ch he may be
si l houetted. He shoul d use l unar shadows to hi de i n to hel p defeat
NVDs.
Mai ntai ni ng di recti on i s much more di ffi cul t to achi eve, whi ch pl aces
greater emphasi s on a thorough reconnai ssance. A compass or
knowl edge of the stars may hel p.
Silent Movement Techniques
4-61. Steal thful movement i s cri ti cal to a sni per. Survi val and mi ssi on
success requi re the sni per to l earn the ski l l s of memori zi ng the ground and
FM 3-05.222
4-19
the surroundi ng terrai n, appl yi ng si l ent and steal th movement, movi ng over
di fferent terrai n, and usi ng vari ous noi se obstacl es. The sni per must
memori ze the terrai n, sel ect a route, move, communi cate usi ng touch si gnal s,
and avoi d or negoti ate obstacl es usi ng steal th techni ques. The sni per can
accompl i sh hi s mi ssi on by
Usi ng bi nocul ars to observe the terrai n to the front, si mul taneousl y
sel ecti ng a route of advance and memori zi ng the terrai n.
Speci fyi ng si gnal s wi th hi s team partner for di fferent obstacl es.
Consi derati ons i ncl ude
Fi ndi ng the obstacl es.
I denti fyi ng the obstacl es (barbed wi re, expl osi ves, mi nes).
Negoti ati ng the obstacl es (Shoul d the team go around, over, or
under the obstacl es?).
Cl eari ng the obstacl es (or getti ng caught i n the obstacl e).
Si gnal i ng partner (a si gnal must be rel ayed to the sni pers partner).
Usi ng steal th and si l ent movement techni ques. They i ncl ude
Cauti ous and del i berate movement.
Frequent hal ts to l i sten and observe.
No unnecessary movement.
Si l ent movement. Al l equi pment i s taped and padded.
Looki ng where the next move i s goi ng to be made.
Cl eari ng fol i age or debri s from the next posi ti on.
Constant awareness of the natural habi tat of bi rds and ani mal s i n
your area.
Obtai ni ng a safe passage of obstacl es. Factors i ncl ude
Avoi di ng or bypassi ng noi se obstacl es.
I f noi se obstacl es must be moved through, checki ng the debri s and
cl eari ng l oose noi se obstacl es from the path.
Memori zi ng l ocati ons of obstacl es for ni ght movement.
Usi ng the basi c el ements of wal ki ng steal thi l y. They are
Mai ntai ni ng bal ance.
Shi fti ng wei ght gradual l y from the rear foot to the front foot.
Movi ng the rear foot to the front, taki ng care to cl ear brush. The
movi ng foot may be pl aced ei ther heel fi rst, toe fi rst, edge of foot
fi rst, or fl at on the ground.
Knowi ng how to move through rubbl e and debri s. The sni per must
Test the debri s wi th hi s hand.
Remove debri s that wi l l break.
Put hi s feet down fl at-footed. Thi s way wi l l reduce noi se.
Avoi di ng movement through mud and muck. I f i t cannot be avoi ded,
the boots shoul d be wrapped wi th burl ap rags or socks.
FM 3-05.222
4-20
Crossi ng i n the sand. Movement i s noi sel ess and can be fai rl y fast.
Keepi ng a l ow si l houette when movi ng over an obstacl e. Tryi ng not to
brush or scrape agai nst the obstacl e, he shoul d l ower hi msel f si l entl y
on the other si de and move away at a medi um-sl ow pace.
Al ways mai ntai ni ng posi ti ve control of hi s weapon.
Never pul l i ng or tuggi ng at snagged equi pment to free i t; he shoul d
untangl e or cut i t free.
Detection Devices
4-62. The sni per must be constantl y vi gi l ant i n hi s movements and acts to
defeat enemy detecti on. He shoul d be abl e to use the fol l owi ng devi ces:
Passive and Active Light I ntensification Devices. The sni per must be
aware of enemy detecti on devi ces and remember that he coul d
unknowi ngl y be under observati on. Where there i s the possi bi l i ty that
NVDs are bei ng used, the sni per can combat them by movi ng very sl owl y
and stayi ng very l ow to the ground. Thi s way hi s dark si l houette wi l l be
broken up by vegetati on. Preferabl y, he wi l l move i n dark shadows or
tree l i nes that wi l l obscure the enemys vi si on. Al so, movi ng i n defi l ade
through ground haze, fog, or rai n wi l l greatl y benefi t the sni per by
hel pi ng hi m to remai n undetected. Usi ng the new I R refl ecti ng materi al
(used i n equi pment netti ng) as a base for the ghi l l i e sui t wi l l l i mi t the
enemys I R vi ewi ng capabi l i ti es. Thi s shoul d be used wi th cauti on, and
the sni per must experi ment wi th the correct bal ance.
Sensors. Sensors are remote moni tori ng devi ces wi th sei smi c sensors,
magneti c sensors, moti on sensors, I R sensors, or thermal sensors
pl anted i n the ground al ong l i kel y avenues of advance or peri meters.
These devi ces normal l y vary i n sensi ti vi ty. They are tri ggered by
vi brati on of the ground, metal , movement, breaki ng a beam of l i ght, or
heat wi thi n thei r area of i nfl uence. The sni per can move past these
devi ces undetected onl y by usi ng the sl owest, most careful , and
errorl ess movement. He can hel p combat the effects of sei smi c devi ces
by movi ng when other acti ons that wi l l acti vate the devi ces, such as
arti l l ery fi re, l ow-fl yi ng ai rcraft, rai n, snow, or even a heavy wi nd, are
i n progress or, i n some i nstances, movi ng wi thout rhythm. The sni per
can defeat most other sensors i f he knows thei r l i mi tati ons and
capabi l i ti es.
Ground Surveillance Radars. Ground survei l l ance radars can detect
troop or vehi cl e movement at an extended range, but onl y al ong i ts l i ne
of si ght and onl y i f the object i s movi ng at a gi ven speed or faster. I t
takes a wel l -trai ned i ndi vi dual to properl y moni tor the devi ce. A sni per
can combat the use of ground survei l l ance radars by movi ng i n
defi l ade, out of the di rect l i ne of si ght of the equi pment, or sl ower than
the radar can detect. He shoul d move extremel y sl ow and l ow to the
ground, usi ng natural objects and vegetati on to mask the movement.
The more l ateral l y to the radar the sni per moves, the easi er i t i s for the
radar to detect the sni pers movement.
Thermal I magers. Thermal i magers are i nfrared heat detectors that
l ocate body heat. The di fference between heat sources i s what i s
FM 3-05.222
4-21
regi stered. These devi ces coul d l ocate even a moti onl ess and
camoufl aged sni per. One possi bl e way to confuse such a detector woul d
be to attach a space bl anket (Myl ar) to the i nsi de of the camoufl age
sui t. The bl anket woul d refl ect the body heat i nward and coul d possi bl y
keep the sni per from bei ng di sti ngui shed from the heat pattern of the
surroundi ng terrai n. Thi s method woul d work best when the
temperature i s warm and the greatest amount of radi ant heat i s ri si ng
from the ground. Acti ve i nfrared spotl i ghts and metascopes may be
used agai nst the sni per. The sni per must al ways avoi d the I R l i ght or
he wi l l be detected.

Selecting Lines of Advance
4-63. Part of the sni pers mi ssi on wi l l be to anal yze the terrai n, sel ect a good
route to the target, use obstacl es (man-made and natural ) and terrai n to thei r
best advantage, and determi ne the best method of movement to arri ve at hi s
target. Once at the target si te, he must be abl e to sel ect fi ri ng posi ti ons and
pl an a stal k.
4-64. On the ground, the sni per l ooks for a route that wi l l provi de the best
cover and conceal ment. He shoul d ful l y use l ow ground, dead space, and
shadows and avoi d open areas. He l ooks for a route that wi l l provi de easy
movement, yet wi l l al l ow qui et movement at ni ght. The sni per sel ects the
route, then chooses the movement techni ques that wi l l al l ow undetected
movement over that speci fi c terrai n.
4-65. Posi ti on sel ecti on i s al so cri ti cal to mi ssi on success. The sni per shoul d
not sel ect a posi ti on that l ooks obvi ous and i deal ; i t wi l l appear that way to
the enemy. He shoul d sel ect a posi ti on away from promi nent terrai n features
of contrasti ng background. When possi bl e, he sel ects an area that has an
obstacl e (natural or man-made) between hi m and the target.
4-66. Stal k pl anni ng i nvol ves map and ground reconnai ssance, sel ecti on of a
route to the objecti ve, sel ecti on of the type of movement, notati on of known or
suspected enemy l ocati ons, and sel ecti on of a route of wi thdrawal . Sni per
teams must not be detected or even suspected by the enemy. To mai ntai n
effi ci ency, each sni per must master individual movement techni ques and
ensure team effort i s kept at the hi ghest possi bl e l evel .
Sniper Team Movement and Navigation
4-67. Normal l y, the sni per carri es the SWS, the observer carri es an
M4/M16/M203, and both have si dearms. Due to the number of personnel and
fi repower, the sni per team cannot afford to be detected by the enemy nor can
i t successful l y meet the enemy i n sustai ned engagements. Another techni que
CAUTION
By trapping the body heat and not allowing it to
dissipate, the sniper increases the chance of
becoming a heat casualty.
FM 3-05.222
4-22
i s for the sni per to carry the M24 bagged and on hi s back, whi l e carryi ng an
M4 at the ready. Thi s gi ves the team greater fi repower.
4-68. When possi bl e, the sni per team shoul d have a securi ty el ement
(squad/pl atoon) attached. The securi ty el ement al l ows the team to reach i ts
area of operati ons qui cker and safer. Pl us, i t provi des the team a reacti on
force shoul d the team be detected.
4-69. Sni pers use the fol l owi ng gui del i nes when attachi ng a securi ty
el ement:
The securi ty el ement l eader i s i n charge of the team whi l e i t i s attached.
Sni per teams al ways appear as an i ntegral part of the el ement.
Sni per teams wear the same uni form as the el ement members.
Sni per teams mai ntai n proper i nterval s and posi ti ons i n al l formati ons.
The SWS i s carri ed i n-l i ne and cl ose to the body, hi di ng i ts outl i ne and
barrel l ength, or i t i s bagged and the shooter carri es an M4.
Al l equi pment that i s uni que to sni per teams i s conceal ed from vi ew
(opti cs, ghi l l i e sui ts).
Once i n the area of operati ons, the sni per team separates from the
securi ty el ement and operates al one.
4-70. Two exampl es of sni per teams separati ng from securi ty el ements fol l ow:
The securi ty el ement provi des securi ty whi l e the team prepares for i ts
operati on. The team
Dons the ghi l l i e sui ts and camoufl ages i tsel f and i ts equi pment (i f
mi ssi on requi res).
Ensures that al l equi pment i s secure and caches any nonessenti al
equi pment (i f mi ssi on requi res).
Once i t i s prepared, assumes a conceal ed posi ti on, and the
securi ty el ement departs the area.
Once the securi ty el ement has departed, wai ts i n posi ti on l ong
enough to ensure nei ther i t nor the securi ty el ement have been
compromi sed. The team then moves to i ts tentati ve posi ti on.
The securi ty el ement conducts a short securi ty hal t at the separati on
poi nt. The sni pers hal t, ensuri ng they have good avai l abl e conceal ment
and know each others l ocati on. The securi ty el ement then proceeds,
l eavi ng the sni per team i n pl ace. The sni per team remai ns i n posi ti on
unti l the securi ty el ement i s cl ear of the area. The team then organi zes
i tsel f as requi red by the mi ssi on and moves on to i ts tentati ve posi ti on.
Thi s type of separati on al so works wel l i n mi l i tary operati ons i n urban
terrai n (MOUT) si tuati ons.
4-71. When sel ecti ng routes, the sni per team must remember i ts
strengths and weaknesses. The fol l owi ng gui del i nes shoul d be used when
sel ecti ng routes:
Avoi d known enemy posi ti ons and obstacl es.
Seek terrai n that offers the best cover and conceal ment.
FM 3-05.222
4-23
Take advantage of di ffi cul t terrai n (swamps, dense woods).
Avoi d natural l i nes of dri ft.
Do not use trai l s, roads, or footpaths.
Avoi d bui l t-up or popul ated areas.
Avoi d areas of heavy enemy guerri l l a acti vi ty.
Avoi d areas between opposi ng forces i n contact wi th each other.
4-72. When the sni per team moves, i t must al ways assume i ts area i s under
enemy observati on. Because of thi s threat and the smal l amount of fi repower
that the team has, i t can use onl y one type of formati onthe sni per
movement formati on. Characteri sti cs are as fol l ows:
The observer i s the poi nt man; the sni per fol l ows.
The observers sector of securi ty i s 9 ocl ock to 3 ocl ock; the sni pers
sector of securi ty i s 3 ocl ock to 9 ocl ock (overl appi ng each other).
Team members mai ntai n vi sual contact, even when l yi ng on the ground.
Team members mai ntai n an i nterval of no more than 2 meters.
The sni per reacts to the poi nt mans acti ons.
Team l eader desi gnates the movement techni ques and routes used.
Team l eader desi gnates ral l y poi nts.
Duri ng the stal k, team moves by usi ng i ndi vi dual boundi ng techni ques.
I t can move by successi ve bounds or al ternati ng bounds.
Team crosses l i near danger areas by movi ng together across the danger
area after a securi ty or l i sti ng hal t.
Sniper Team Immediate Action Drills
4-73. A sni per team must never become deci si vel y engaged wi th the enemy.
I t must rehearse i mmedi ate acti on dri l l s so they become a natural and
i mmedi ate reacti on shoul d i t make unexpected contact wi th the enemy.
Exampl es of such acti ons are as fol l ows:
Visual Contact. I f the sni per team sees the enemy and the enemy does
not see the team, i t freezes. I f the team has ti me, i t wi l l do the fol l owi ng:
Assume the best covered and conceal ed posi ti on.
Remai n i n posi ti on unti l the enemy has passed.
NOTE: The team wi l l not i ni ti ate contact.
Ambush. The sni per teams objecti ve i s to break contact i mmedi atel y
duri ng an ambush. One exampl e of thi s techni que i nvol ves performi ng
the fol l owi ng:
The observer del i vers rapi d fi re on the enemy and the team
i mmedi atel y moves out of the area.
The team moves to a l ocati on where the enemy cannot observe or
pl ace di rect fi re on i t.
I f contact cannot be broken, the sni per cal l s for i ndi rect fi re or
securi ty el ement (i f attached).
FM 3-05.222
4-24
I f team members get separated, they shoul d ei ther l i nk up at the
objecti ve ral l y poi nt (ORP) or move to the next desi gnated ral l y
poi nt. Thi s move wi l l depend upon the team SOP.
I ndirect Fire. I ndi rect fi re can cause the team to move out of the area
as qui ckl y as possi bl e and may resul t i n i ts exact l ocati on and di recti on
bei ng pi npoi nted. Therefore, the team must not onl y react to i ndi rect
fi re but al so take the fol l owi ng acti ons to conceal i ts movement once i t
i s out of the i mpact area:
The team l eader moves the team out of the i mpact area usi ng the
qui ckest route by gi vi ng the di recti on and di stance (cl ock method).
Both members move out of the i mpact area the desi gnated
di stance and di recti on.
The team l eader then moves the team farther away from the
i mpact area by usi ng the most di rect conceal ed route. They
conti nue the mi ssi on usi ng an al ternate route.
I f the team members get separated, they shoul d ei ther l i nk up at
the ORP or move next desi gnated ral l y poi nt.
Air Attack. I f the sni per team fi nds i tsel f caught i n an ai r attack or i ts
posi ti on i s about to be destroyed, i t shoul d react as fol l ows:
Assume the best avai l abl e covered and conceal ed posi ti ons.
Between passes of ai rcraft, move to a posi ti on that offers better
cover and conceal ment.
Do not engage the ai rcraft.
Remai n i n posi ti on unti l the attacki ng ai rcraft departs.
Li nk up at the ORP or move to the next desi gnated ral l y poi nt i f
the members get separated.
Navigational Aids
4-74. To ai d the sni per team i n navi gati on, i t shoul d memori ze the route by
studyi ng maps, aeri al photos, or sketches. The team notes di sti ncti ve features
(hi l l s, streams, and roads) and i ts l ocati on i n rel ati on to the route. I t pl ans an
al ternate route i n case the pri mary route cannot be used. I t pl ans an offset to
ci rcumvent known obstacl es to movement. The team uses terrai n countdown,
whi ch i nvol ves memori zi ng terrai n features from the start to the objecti ve, to
mai ntai n the route. Duri ng the mi ssi on, the sni per team mental l y counts
each terrai n feature, thus ensuri ng i t mai ntai ns the proper route. The team
desi gnates al l en route ral l y poi nts al ong the routes.
4-75. The sni per team mai ntai ns ori entati on at al l ti mes. As i t moves, i t
observes the terrai n careful l y and mental l y checks off the di sti ncti ve features
noted i n the pl anni ng and study of the route. The team must be aware of the
map terrai n i nterval to prevent counti ng l ow terrai n features not represented
on a map.
4-76. The fol l owi ng ai ds are avai l abl e to ensure ori entati on:
Gl obal posi ti oni ng system (GPS).
The l ocati on and di recti on of fl ow of pri nci pal streams.
FM 3-05.222
4-25
Hi l l s, val l eys, roads, and other pecul i ar terrai n features.
Rai l road tracks, power l i nes, and other man-made objects.
TRACKING AND COUNTERTRACKING
4-77. Tracki ng i s the art of bei ng abl e to fol l ow a person or an ani mal by the
si gns that they l eave duri ng thei r movement. I t i s nearl y i mpossi bl e to move
cross-country and not l eave si gns of ones passage. These si gns, no matter
how smal l , can be detected by a trai ned and experi enced tracker. However, a
person who i s trai ned i n tracki ng techni ques can use decepti on dri l l s that can
mi ni mi ze tel l tal e si gns and throw off or confuse trackers who are not wel l
trai ned or who do not have the experi ence to spot the si gns of a decepti on.
4-78. As a tracker fol l ows a trai l , he bui l ds a pi cture of the enemy i n hi s
mi nd by aski ng hi msel f these questi ons: How many persons am I fol l owi ng?
What i s thei r state of trai ni ng? How are they equi pped? Are they heal thy?
What i s thei r state of moral e? Do they know they are bei ng fol l owed? To
answer these questi ons, the tracker uses avai l abl e i ndi catorsthat i s, si gns
that tel l an acti on occurred at a speci fi c ti me and pl ace (Fi gure 4-8). By
compari ng i ndi cators, the tracker obtai ns answers to hi s questi ons.
NOTE: Throughout thi s secti on, the terms tracker and sni per are used
i nterchangeabl y.
Figure 4-8. The Area a Tracker Surveys to Find Tracking Indicators
TRACKING SIGNS
4-79. Si gns are vi si bl e marks l eft by i ndi vi dual s or ani mal s as they pass
through an area. The sni per must know the fol l owi ng categori es of si gns:
Ground Signs. These are si gns l eft bel ow the knees. Al l ground si gns
are further di vi ded as fol l ows:
Large signs are caused by the movement of ten or more
i ndi vi dual s through the area.
Small signs are caused by the movement of one to ni ne
i ndi vi dual s through the area.
FM 3-05.222
4-26
High Signs (also known as top signs). These are si gns l eft above the
knees. They are al so di vi ded i nto l arge and smal l top si gns.
Temporary Signs. These si gns wi l l eventual l y fade wi th ti me (for
exampl e, a footpri nt).
Permanent Signs. These si gns requi re weeks to fade or wi l l l eave a
mark forever (for exampl e, broken branches or chi pped bark).
TRACKING INDICATORS
4-80. Any si gn the tracker di scovers can be defi ned by one of si x tracki ng
i ndi cators. They i ncl ude di spl acement, stai ns, weatheri ng, l i tter, camoufl age,
and i mmedi ate-use i ntel l i gence.
Displacement
4-81. Di spl acement takes pl ace when anythi ng i s moved from i ts ori gi nal
posi ti on. A wel l -defi ned footpri nt i n soft, moi st ground i s a good exampl e of
di spl acement. The footgear or bare feet of the person who l eft the pri nt
di spl aced the soi l by compressi on, l eavi ng an i ndentati on i n the ground. The
tracker can study thi s si gn and determi ne several i mportant facts. For
exampl e, a pri nt l eft by worn footgear or by bare feet may i ndi cate l ack of
proper equi pment. Di spl acement can al so resul t from cl eari ng a trai l by
breaki ng or cutti ng through heavy vegetati on wi th a machete; these trai l s are
obvi ous to the most i nexperi enced tracker. I ndi vi dual s may unconsci ousl y
break more branches as they move behi nd someone who i s cutti ng the path.
Di spl acement i ndi cators can al so be made by persons carryi ng heavy l oads
who stop to rest; pri nts made by box edges can hel p to i denti fy the l oad. When
l oads are set down at a rest hal t or campsi te, they usual l y crush grass and
twi gs. A recl i ni ng man can al so fl atten the vegetati on.
4-82. Analyzing Footprints. Footpri nts can i ndi cate di recti on, rate of
movement, number, sex, and whether the i ndi vi dual knows he i s bei ng
tracked. Fi gures 4-9 through 4-12 show di fferent appearances of tracks made
duri ng vari ous acti vi ti es and countertracki ng techni ques. The footpri nt can
be the whol e pri nt but i s usual l y onl y the heel di g and toe push footpri nt.
They may al so be found on the undersi de of l arge l eaves that have not dri ed
out and are l yi ng on the ground.
4-83. I f footpri nts are deep and the pace i s l ong, rapi d movement i s
apparent. Extremel y l ong stri des and deep pri nts wi th toe pri nts deeper than
heel pri nts i ndi cate runni ng (Fi gure 4-9).
Figure 4-9. Running
FM 3-05.222
4-27
4-84. Pri nts that are deep, have a short stri de, are narrowl y spaced, and
show si gns of shuffl i ng i ndi cate the person who l eft the pri nt i s carryi ng a
heavy l oad (Fi gure 4-10).
Figure 4-10. Carrying a Heavy Load
4-85. I f the party members real i ze they are bei ng fol l owed, they may try to
hi de thei r tracks. Persons wal ki ng backward have a short, i rregul ar stri de
(Fi gure 4-11). The pri nts have an unnatural l y deep toe, and soi l i s di spl aced
i n the di recti on of movement. These types of pri nts are characteri zed by toe
di gs and heel push as opposed to the normal footpri nt.
Figure 4-11. Walking Backward
4-86. To determi ne the sex of a member of the party bei ng fol l owed, the
tracker shoul d study the si ze and posi ti on of the footpri nts (Fi gure 4-12, page
4-28). Women tend to be pi geon-toed; men wal k wi th thei r feet strai ght ahead
or poi nted sl i ghtl y to the outsi de. Pri nts l eft by women are usual l y smal l er
and the stri de i s usual l y shorter than that taken by men.
FM 3-05.222
4-28
Figure 4-12. Man Versus Woman
4-87. Determining Key Prints. Normal l y, the l ast man i n the fi l e l eaves
the cl earest footpri nts; these shoul d be the key pri nts. The tracker cuts a
sti ck to match the l ength of the pri nts and notches i t to show the l ength and
wi dest part of the sol e. He can then study the angl e of the key pri nts i n
rel ati on to the di recti on of march. He l ooks for an i denti fyi ng mark or feature,
such as worn or frayed footgear, to i denti fy the key pri nts. I f the trai l
becomes vague, erased, or merges wi th another, the tracker can empl oy hi s
sti ck-measuri ng devi ce and i denti fy the key pri nts wi th cl ose study. Thi s
method hel ps hi m to stay on the trai l . By usi ng the box method, he can count
up to 18 persons. The tracker can
Use the stri de as a uni t of measure when determi ni ng key pri nts
(Fi gure 4-13). He uses these pri nts and the edges of the road or trai l to
box i n an area to anal yze.
Al so use the 36-i nch box method i f key pri nts are not evi dent (Fi gure
4-14, page 4-29). To use thi s method, the tracker uses the edges of the
road or trai l as the si des of the box. He measures a cross secti on of the
area 36 i nches l ong, counti ng each i ndentati on i n the box and di vi di ng
by two. Thi s method gi ves a cl ose esti mate of the number of i ndi vi dual s
who made the pri nts; however, thi s system i s not as accurate as the
stri de measurement.
Figure 4-13. Using the Stride as a Unit of Measure
FM 3-05.222
4-29
Figure 4-14. Using the 36-Inch Box Method
4-88. Recognizing Other Signs of Displacement. Fol i age, moss, vi nes,
sti cks, or rocks that are scuffed or snapped from thei r ori gi nal posi ti on form
val uabl e i ndi cators. Broken di rt seal s around rocks, mud or di rt moved to
rocks or other natural debri s, and water moved onto the banks of a stream
are al so good i ndi cators (Fi gure 4-15). Vi nes may be dragged, dew dropl ets
di spl aced, or stones and sti cks overturned to show a di fferent col or
underneath. Grass or other vegetati on may be bent or broken i n the di recti on
of movement (Fi gure 4-16).
Figure 4-15. Turned Over Rocks and Sticks Figure 4-16. Crushed or Disturbed Vegetation
4-89. The tracker i nspects al l areas for bi ts of cl othi ng, threads, or di rt from
torn footgear or can fal l and be l eft on thorns, snags, or the ground.
4-90. Fl ushed from thei r natural habi tat, wi l d ani mal s and bi rds are
another exampl e of di spl acement. Cri es of bi rds exci ted by unnatural
FM 3-05.222
4-30
movement are an i ndi cator; movi ng tops of tal l grass or brush on a wi ndl ess
day i ndi cate that somethi ng i s movi ng the vegetati on.
4-91. Changes i n the normal l i fe of i nsects and spi ders may i ndi cate that
someone has recentl y passed. Val uabl e cl ues are di sturbed bees, ant hol es
covered by someone movi ng over them, or torn spi der webs. Spi ders often
spi n webs across open areas, trai l s, or roads to trap fl yi ng i nsects. I f the
tracked person does not avoi d these webs, he l eaves an i ndi cator to an
observant tracker.
4-92. I f the person bei ng fol l owed tri es to use a stream to cover hi s trai l , the
tracker can sti l l fol l ow successful l y. Al gae and other water pl ants can be
di spl aced by l ost footi ng or by carel ess wal ki ng. Rocks can be di spl aced from
thei r ori gi nal posi ti on or overturned to i ndi cate a l i ghter or darker col or on
the opposi te si de. The person enteri ng or exi ti ng a stream creates sl i de marks
or footpri nts, or scuffs the bark on roots or sti cks (Fi gure 4-17). Normal l y, a
person or ani mal seeks the path of l east resi stance; therefore, when searchi ng
the stream for an i ndi cati on of departures, trackers wi l l fi nd si gns i n open
areas al ong the banks.
Figure 4-17. Slip Marks and Waterfilled Footprints on Stream Banks
Stains
4-93. A stai n occurs when any substance from one organi sm or arti cl e i s
smeared or deposi ted on somethi ng el se. The best exampl e of stai ni ng i s bl ood
from a profusel y bl eedi ng wound. Bl oodstai ns often appear as spatters or drops
and are not al ways on the ground; they al so appear smeared on l eaves or twi gs
of trees and bushes. The tracker can determi ne the seri ousness of the wound
and how far the wounded person can move unassi sted. Thi s process may l ead
the tracker to enemy bodi es or i ndi cate where they have been carri ed.
4-94. By studyi ng bl oodstai ns, the tracker can determi ne the wounds l ocati on
as fol l ows:
I f the bl ood seems to be dri ppi ng steadi l y, i t probabl y came from a
wound on the trunk.
FM 3-05.222
4-31
I f the bl ood appears to be sl ung toward the front, rear, or si des, the
wound i s probabl y i n the extremi ty.
Arteri al wounds appear to pour bl ood at regul ar i nterval s as i f poured
from a pi tcher. I f the wound i s vei nous, the bl ood pours steadi l y.
A l ung wound deposi ts pi nk, bubbl y, and frothy bl oodstai ns.
A bl oodstai n from a head wound appears heavy, wet, and sl i my.
Abdomi nal wounds often mi x bl ood wi th di gesti ve jui ces so the deposi t
has an odor and i s l i ght i n col or.
4-95. Any body fl ui ds such as uri ne or feces deposi ted on the ground, trees,
bushes, or rocks wi l l l eave a stai n.
4-96. On a cal m, cl ear day, l eaves of bushes and smal l trees are general l y
turned so that the dark top si de shows. However, when a man passes through
an area and di sturbs the l eaves, he wi l l general l y cause the l i ghter si de of the
l eaf to show. Thi s movement i s al so true wi th some vari eti es of grass. Movi ng
causes an unnatural di scol orati on of the area, whi ch i s cal l ed shi ne. Grass
or l eaves that have been stepped on wi l l have a brui se on the l i ghter si de.
4-97. Stai ni ng can al so occur when muddy footgear i s dragged over grass,
stones, and shrubs. Thus, stai ni ng and di spl acement combi ne to i ndi cate
movement and di recti on. Crushed l eaves may stai n rocky ground that i s too
hard to show footpri nts. Roots, stones, and vi nes may be stai ned where l eaves
or berri es are crushed by movi ng feet.
4-98. The tracker may have di ffi cul ty determi ni ng the di fference between
stai ni ng and di spl acement si nce both terms can be appl i ed to some i ndi cators.
For exampl e, muddi ed water may i ndi cate recent movement; di spl aced mud
al so stai ns the water. Muddy footgear can stai n stones i n streams, and al gae
can be di spl aced from stones i n streams and can stai n other stones or the
bank. Muddy water col l ects i n new footpri nts i n swampy ground; however,
the mud settl es and the water cl ears wi th ti me. The tracker can use thi s
i nformati on to i ndi cate ti me. Normal l y, the mud cl ears i n about one hour,
al though ti me vari es wi th the terrai n. Si nce muddi ed water travel s wi th the
current, i t i s usual l y best to move downstream.
Weathering
4-99. Weatheri ng ei ther ai ds or hi nders the tracker. I t al so affects i ndi cators
i n certai n ways so that the tracker can determi ne thei r rel ati ve ages.
However, wi nd, snow, rai n, or sunl i ght can erase i ndi cators enti rel y and
hi nder the tracker. The tracker shoul d know how weatheri ng affects soi l ,
vegetati on, and other i ndi cators i n hi s area. He cannot properl y determi ne
the age of i ndi cators unti l he understands the effects that weatheri ng has on
trai l si gns.
4-100. For exampl e, when bl oodstai ns are fresh, they are bri ght red. Ai r and
sunl i ght fi rst change bl ood to a deep ruby-red col or, then to a dark brown
crust when the moi sture evaporates. Scuff marks on trees or bushes darken
wi th ti me. Sap oozes on trees and then hardens when i t makes contact wi th
the ai r.
FM 3-05.222
4-32
4-101. Weather greatl y affects footpri nts (Fi gure 4-18). By careful l y studyi ng
thi s weatheri ng process, the tracker can esti mate the age of the pri nt.
I f parti cl es of soi l are just begi nni ng to fal l i nto the pri nt, thi s i s a si gn that
the pri nt i s very recent. At thi s poi nt, the tracker shoul d then focus on
becomi ng a stal ker. I f the edges of the pri nt are dri ed and crusty, the pri nts
are probabl y about 1 hour ol d. Thi s process vari es wi th terrai n and i s onl y
a gui de.
Figure 4-18. Effects of Weather on the Clarity of Footprints
4-102. A l i ght rai n may round the edges of the pri nt. By rememberi ng when
the l ast rai n occurred, the tracker can pl ace the pri nt i nto a ti me frame. A
heavy rai n may erase al l si gns.
4-103. Trai l s exi ti ng streams may appear weathered by rai n due to water
runni ng from cl othi ng or equi pment i nto the tracks. Thi s trai t i s especi al l y
true i f the party exi ts the stream si ngl e fi l e. Then, each person deposi ts water
i nto the tracks. The exi stence of a wet, weathered trai l sl owl y fadi ng i nto a
dry trai l i ndi cates the trai l i s fresh.
4-104. Wi nd dri es out tracks and bl ows l i tter, sti cks, or l eaves i nto pri nts. By
recal l i ng wi nd acti vi ty, the tracker may esti mate the age of the tracks. For
exampl e, the tracker may reason the wi nd i s cal m at the present but bl ew hard
about an hour ago. These tracks have l i tter bl own i nto them, so they must be
over an hour ol d. However, he must be sure that the l i tter was bl own i nto the
pri nts and not crushed i nto them when the pri nts were made.
4-105. Wi nd affects sound and odors. I f the wi nd i s bl owi ng down the trai l
(toward the tracker), sounds and odors may be carri ed to hi m; conversel y, i f
the wi nd i s bl owi ng up the trai l (away from the tracker), he must be
extremel y cauti ous si nce wi nd al so carri es sounds toward the enemy. The
tracker can determi ne wi nd di recti on by droppi ng a handful of dust or dri ed
grass from shoul der hei ght. By poi nti ng i n the same di recti on the wi nd i s
bl owi ng, the tracker can l ocal i ze sounds by cuppi ng hi s hands behi nd hi s ears
and turni ng sl owl y. When sounds are l oudest, the tracker i s faci ng the ori gi n.
4-106. I n cal m weather (no wi nd), ai r currents that may be too l i ght to detect
can carry sounds to the tracker. Ai r cool s i n the eveni ng and moves downhi l l
toward the val l eys. I f the tracker i s movi ng uphi l l l ate i n the day or ni ght, ai r
currents wi l l probabl y be movi ng toward hi m i f no other wi nd i s bl owi ng. As
the morni ng sun warms the ai r i n the val l eys, i t moves uphi l l . The tracker
consi ders these factors when pl otti ng patrol routes or other operati ons. I f he
keeps the wi nd i n hi s face, sounds and odors wi l l be carri ed to hi m from hi s
objecti ve or from the party bei ng tracked.
FM 3-05.222
4-33
4-107. The tr acker shoul d al so consi der the sun. I t i s di ffi cul t to fi r e
di r ectl y i nto the sun, but i f the tr acker has the sun at hi s back and the
wi nd i n hi s face, he has a sl i ght advantage.
Litter
4-108. Li tter consi sts of anythi ng not i ndi genous to the area that i s l eft on
the ground. A poorl y trai ned or poorl y di sci pl i ned uni t movi ng over terrai n i s
apt to l eave a trai l of l i tter. Unmi stakabl e si gns of recent movement are gum
or candy wrappers, rati on cans, ci garette butts, remai ns of fi res, uri ne, and
bl oody bandages. Rai n fl attens or washes l i tter away and turns paper i nto
pul p. Exposure to weather can cause rati on cans to rust at the opened edge;
then, the rust moves toward the center. The tracker must consi der weather
condi ti ons when esti mati ng the age of l i tter. He can use the l ast rai n or
strong wi nd as the basi s for a ti me frame.
4-109. The sni per shoul d al so know the wi l dl i fe i n the area. Even sumps,
regardl ess of how wel l camoufl aged, are a potenti al source of l i tter. The best
pol i cy you can fol l ow i s to take out wi th you everythi ng you bri ng i n.
Camouflage
4-110. Camoufl age appl i es to tracki ng when the fol l owed party uses
techni ques to baffl e or sl ow the trackerthat i s, wal ki ng backward to l eave
confusi ng pri nts, brushi ng out trai l s, and movi ng over rocky ground or
through streams. Camoufl aged movement i ndi cates a trai ned adversary.
Immediate-Use Intelligence
4-111. The tracker combi nes al l i ndi cators and i nterprets what he has seen
to form a composi te pi cture for on-the-spot i ntel l i gence. For exampl e,
i ndi cators may show contact i s i mmi nent and requi re extreme steal th.
4-112. The tracker avoi ds reporti ng hi s i nterpretati ons as facts. He reports
what he has seen, rather than stati ng these thi ngs exi st. There are many ways
a tracker can i nterpret the sex and si ze of the party, the l oad, and the type of
equi pment. Ti me frames can be determi ned by weatheri ng effects on i ndi cators.
4-113. I mmedi ate-use i ntel l i gence i s i nformati on about the enemy that can be
used to gai n surpri se, to keep hi m off bal ance, or to keep hi m from escapi ng the
area enti rel y. The commander may have many sources of i ntel l i gence such as
reports, documents, or pri soners of war. These sources can be combi ned to form
i ndi cators of the enemys l ast l ocati on, future pl ans, and desti nati on.
4-114. However, tracki ng gi ves the commander defi ni te i nformati on on
whi ch to act i mmedi atel y. For exampl e, a uni t may report there are no men of
mi l i tary age i n a vi l l age. Thi s i nformati on i s of val ue onl y i f i t i s combi ned
wi th other i nformati on to make a composi te enemy pi cture i n the area.
Therefore, a tracker who i nterprets trai l si gns and reports that he i s 30
mi nutes behi nd a known enemy uni t, movi ng north, and l ocated at a speci fi c
l ocati on, gi ves the commander i nformati on on whi ch he can act.
FM 3-05.222
4-34
DOG-TRACKER TEAMS
4-115. The three types of tracker dogs are as fol l ows:
Visual dogs rel y upon thei r acute vi si on. They usual l y are the fi nal part
of tracki ng before shi fti ng over to the attack mode.
Search dogs are al l owed to run free and search usi ng ai rborne scents.
Tracker dogs run on l eashes and use ground scents.
4-116. Many myths surround the abi l i ti es and l i mi tati ons of cani ne trackers.
The fi rst and perhaps greatest myth i s that tracki ng i nvol ves onl y the dogs
sense of smel l . Cani ne tracki ng i nvol ves a teama mergi ng of man and dog.
Dogs use both thei r eyes and ears; the tracker uses hi s eyes and knowl edge of
the quarry. Together, they create an effecti ve team that maxi mi zes thei r
strengths and mi ni mi zes thei r weaknesses. The sni per team i s not onl y tryi ng
to evade and outwi t just a dog but al so the dogs handl er. The most common
breed of dog used i s the German shepherd. These dogs are trai ned to respond
i ndependentl y to a vari ety of si tuati ons and threats. Good tracki ng dogs are a
rare and di ffi cul t-to-repl ace asset.
4-117. A vi sual tracker assi sts the dog handl ers i n fi ndi ng a track i f the dog
l oses the trai l . He can radi o ahead to another tracker and gi ve hi m an oral
account of the track pi cture. A vi sual tracker i s sl ower than dogs because he
must al ways use hi s powers of observati on, whi ch creates fati gue. Hi s
effecti veness i s l i mi ted at ni ght.
4-118. Tracker dogs smel l mi crobes i n the earth that are rel eased from
di sturbed soi l . The trai l has no i nnate smel l of a speci fi c quarry, al though
trai l s do vary dependi ng on the si ze and number of the quarry. For exampl e,
a scent i s l i ke the wake a shi p l eaves i n the ocean, but no part of the shi p i s
l eft i n the wake. I t i s the whi te, foamy, di sturbed water that i s the trai l . The
resul t i s enti rel y di fferent from a poi nt smel l of the quarry such as sweat,
uri ne, or ci garette smoke. The same trai ni ng that makes tracki ng dogs adept
at tracki ng a scent trai l appl i es to fi ndi ng a poi nt smel l .
4-119. Smel l i ng i s a hi ghl y compl ex process and many vari abl es affect i t. The
most i mportant el ement i n tracki ng i s the actual ground such as earth and
grass. I t contai ns l i vi ng mi crobes that are al ways di sturbed by the quarrys
passage. Arti fi ci al surfaces (concrete and macadam) and mai nl y i norgani c
surfaces (stone) provi de l i ttl e or no l i vi ng mi crobes to form a scent track.
4-120. A search or a scent-di scri mi nati on dog bui l ds a scent pi cture of the
person that he i s tracki ng. Scent may be short-l i ved and i ts l i fe span i s
dependent upon the weather and the area that the person l ast passed
through. The sun and the wi nd, as wel l as ti me, destroy the scent. There are
both ai rborne and ground scents. Ai rborne scents can be bl own away wi thi n
mi nutes or a few hours. Ground scents can l ast l onger than 48 hours under
i deal condi ti ons. Bl oodhounds have been known to successful l y track a scent
that was l eft behi nd 7 days before.
4-121. Wi nd and moi sture are other major vari abl es that affect tracki ng.
Foggy and dri zzl y weather that keeps the ground moi st i s best. Too much
rai n can wash a trai l away; dependi ng on the strength of the trai l , i t takes
persi stent, hard rai n to erase a scent trai l . Usual l y, the scent i s not washed
FM 3-05.222
4-35
away but onl y seal ed beneath a l ayer of ground water. A short, vi ol ent
rai nfal l coul d deposi t enough water to seal the scent track, but after the rai n
stops and the water l ayer evaporates, the mi crobe trai l woul d agai n be
detectabl e by dogs. Hard, dry ground rel eases the fewest mi crobes and i s the
most di ffi cul t terrai n for dogs to track on. A dog may al so have di ffi cul ty
fol l owi ng a trai l on a beach or dusty path, but hi s human tracker coul d easi l y
fol l ow the footpri nts vi sual l y. Sni pers must al ways remember they are bei ng
tracked by a man and a dog team. Tracker dogs track on the tai l of the sni per
whi l e search dogs track downwi nd of the trai l .
4-122. Wi nd strength and di recti on are i mportant factors i n tracki ng.
Basi cal l y, strong wi nd i nhi bi ts tracki ng a scent trai l but makes i t easi er for a
dog to fi nd a poi nt scent sourcel i ke a hi de. A general rul e i s that a dog can
smel l a man-si ze source downwi nd out to 50 meters and a group-si ze source
a hi deout to 200 meters under i deal condi ti ons. Upwi nd, a source 1 meter
away coul d be mi ssed.
Wind Direction
Wind Speed: Sti l l Wi ndy
D------X----------D-----------------------D
Distance: 1 Meter 30 to 50 Maxi mum 150 to
Meters 200 Meters
D = Dog Team
X = Sni per/Sni per Team
4-123. A strong wi nd di sperses mi crobes that ari se from the ground,
hi nderi ng a dogs abi l i ty to fol l ow a trai l . However, a strong wi nd i ncreases
the si ze of a poi nt scent, hel pi ng a dog to fi nd the target i n an area search.
4-124. An i nfl exi bl e rul e for the l i fe of a scent trai l cannot be provi ded. I n
Germany, trackers rate thei r chance of fol l owi ng a trai l that i s more than 3
days ol d as negl i gi bl e. Terrai n, weather, and the sensi ti vi ty of the tracki ng
dog are some of the many vari abl es that affect the scent trai l . A poi nt smel l
wi l l l ast as l ong as the target emi ts odors.
4-125. Whi l e dogs are mai nl y scent hunters, they al so have good short-range
vi si on. Dogs are col orbl i nd and do not have good di stance vi si on (camoufl age
works extremel y wel l agai nst dogs). However, they can detect sl i ght
movements. Dogs al so have a phenomenal sense of heari ng, extendi ng far
beyond human norms i n both the frequency range and i n sensi ti vi ty. Dogs
use smel l to approxi mate a target, and then rel y on sound and movement to
pi npoi nt that target.
4-126. Al though dogs have tremendous detecti on abi l i ti es, they al so have
l i mi tati ons. Fol l owi ng a scent trai l i s the most di ffi cul t task a tracki ng dog
can perform. The l evel of effort i s so i ntense that most dogs cannot work
l onger than 20 to 30 mi nutes at a ti me, fol l owed by a 10- to 20-mi nute rest.
Dogs can perform thi s cycl e no more than fi ve or si x ti mes i n a 24-hour peri od
before reachi ng compl ete exhausti on. The effi ci ency of the search al so
decreases as the dog ti res. I n warti me, the si tuati on wi l l force the maxi mum
from men and equi pment, but ti mes shoul d remai n constant for dogs
because they al ways gi ve 100 percent. I f the sni pers keep movi ng and stay
FM 3-05.222
4-36
out of the detecti on range of the human handl ers, then they coul d outl ast the
dog-scent trackers.
4-127. When l ooki ng for sni per teams, trackers mai nl y use wood l i ne sweeps
and area searches. A wood l i ne sweep consi sts of wal ki ng the dog upwind of
a suspected wood l i ne or brush l i nethe key i s upwi nd. I f the wi nd i s bl owi ng
through the woods and out of the wood l i ne, trackers move 50 to 100 meters
i nsi de a wooded area to sweep the woods edge. Si nce wood l i ne sweeps tend
to be l ess speci fi c, trackers perform them faster. Trackers perform an area
search when a teams l ocati on i s speci fi c, such as a smal l wooded area or
bl ock of houses. The search area i s cordoned off, i f possi bl e and the dog-
tracker teams are brought on-l i ne about 25 to 150 meters apart, dependi ng on
terrai n and vi si bi l i ty. The handl ers then advance, each movi ng thei r dogs
through a speci fi c corri dor. The handl er control s the dog enti rel y wi th voi ce
commands and gestures. He remai ns undercover, di recti ng the dog i n a
search pattern or to a l i kel y target area. The search l i ne moves forward wi th
each dog dashi ng back and forth i n assi gned sectors.
TECHNIQUES TO DEFEAT DOG-TRACKER TEAMS
4-128. Al though dog and handl er tracki ng teams are a potent threat, there
are counters avai l abl e to the sni per team. As al ways, the best defenses are
basi c i nfantry techni ques: good camoufl age and l i ght, noi se, and trash
di sci pl i ne. Dogs fi nd a team ei ther by detecti ng a trai l or by a poi nt source
such as human waste odors at the hi de si te. I t i s cri ti cal to try to obscure or
l i mi t trai l s around the hi de, especi al l y al ong the wood l i ne or area cl osest to
the teams target area. Survei l l ance targets are usual l y major axes of
advance. Trol l i ng the wood l i nes al ong l i kel y-l ooki ng roads or i ntersecti ons
i s a favori te tacti c of dog-tracker teams. When movi ng i nto a target area, the
sni per team shoul d take the fol l owi ng countermeasures:
Remai n as far away from the target area as the si tuati on al l ows.
Never establ i sh a posi ti on at the edge of cover and conceal ment nearest
the target area.
Mi ni mi ze the track. Try to approach the posi ti on area on hard, dry
ground or al ong a stream or ri ver.
Uri nate i n a hol e and cover i t up. Never uri nate more than once i n
exactl y the same spot.
Deepl y bury fecal matter. I f the durati on of the mi ssi on permi ts, use
meal s, ready to eat (MRE) bags seal ed wi th tape and take i t wi th you.
Never smoke.
Carry al l trash unti l i t can be buri ed el sewhere.
4-129. When dogs are bei ng used agai nst a sni per team, they use other odors
l eft behi nd or around the team to fi nd i t. Sweat from exerti on or fear i s one of
these. Wet cl othi ng or materi al from damp envi ronments hol ds i n the scent.
Soap or deodorant used before i nfi l trati on hel ps the dogs to fi nd the team.
Forei gn odors such as oi l s, preservati ves, pol i sh, and petrol eum products al so
ai d the dogs. Ti me permi tti ng, the sni per shoul d try to change hi s di et to that
of the l ocal i nhabi tants before i nfi l trati on.
FM 3-05.222
4-37
4-130. When the sni per team fi rst arri ves i n i ts AO, i t i s best to move
i ni ti al l y i n a di recti on that i s from 90 to 170 degrees away from the objecti ve.
Objects or i tems of cl othi ng not bel ongi ng to any of the team members shoul d
be carri ed i nto the AO i n a pl asti c bag. When the team fi rst starts movi ng, i t
shoul d drop an i tem of cl othi ng or pi ece of cl oth out of the bag and l eave i t on
a back trai l . Thi s step can confuse a dog l ong enough to gi ve the team more of
a head start. Al so, i f dogs are brought i n l ate, the teams scent wi l l be very
fai nt whi l e thi s scent wi l l sti l l be strong.
4-131. Whi l e travel i ng, the team shoul d try to avoi d heavi l y fol i aged areas,
as these areas hol d the scent l onger. Peri odi cal l y, when the si tuati on permi ts,
move across an open area that the sun shi nes on duri ng the day and that has
the potenti al of bei ng wi ndswept. The wi nd moves the scent and wi l l
eventual l y bl ow i t away; the sun destroys scent very rapi dl y.
4-132. When the si tuati on permi ts, make changes i n di recti on at the open
poi nts of terrai n to force the dog to cast for a scent. I f dogs are very cl ose
behi nd, movi ng through water does not confuse them, as scent wi l l be
hangi ng i n the ai r above the water. Movi ng through water wi l l onl y sl ow the
team down. Throwi ng CS gas to the rear or usi ng bl ood, spi ce mi xtures, or
any other concocti ons wi l l prevent a dog from smel l i ng the teams scent, but i t
wi l l not be effecti ve on a trai ned tracker dog.
4-133. Whi l e a dog wi l l not be confused by water i f he i s cl ose, runni ng
water, such as a rapi dl y movi ng stream, wi l l confuse a dog i f he i s several
hours behi nd. However, areas wi th fol i age, stagnant ai r, and l i ttl e sunl i ght
wi l l hol d the scent l onger. Therefore, the team shoul d try to avoi d any
swampy areas.
4-134. The sni per team shoul d move through areas that have been frequentl y
travel ed by other peopl e, as thi s wi l l confuse the scent pi cture to the dog. Team
members shoul d spl i t up from ti me to ti me to confuse the dogs. The best pl ace
for thi s i s i n areas frequentl y travel ed by i ndi genous personnel .
4-135. I f a dog-tracker i s on the sni per teams trai l , i t shoul d not run because
the scent wi l l become stronger. The team may attempt to wear out the dog
handl er and confuse the dog but shoul d al ways be on the l ookout for a good
ambush si te that i t can fi shhook i nto. I f i t becomes necessary to ambush the
tracki ng party, fi shhook i nto the ambush si te and ki l l or wound the handl er,
not the dog. A tracker dog i s trai ned wi th hi s handl er and wi l l protect hi m
shoul d he become wounded. Thi s practi ce wi l l al l ow the team to move off and
away from the area whi l e the rest of the tracki ng party tri es to gi ve
assi stance to the handl er. Al so, that dog wi l l not work wel l wi th anyone other
than hi s handl er.
4-136. I f a dog search team moves i nto the area, the sni per team shoul d fi rst
check wi nd di recti on and strength. I f the team i s downwi nd of the esti mated
search area, the chances are mi ni mal that the teams poi nt smel l s wi l l be
detected. I f upwi nd of the search area, the team shoul d attempt to move
downwi nd. Terrai n and vi si bi l i ty di ctate whether the team can move wi thout
bei ng detected vi sual l y by the handl ers. Remember, sweeps are not al ways
conducted just outsi de of a wood l i ne. Wi nd di recti on determi nes whether the
sweep wi l l be paral l el to the outsi de or 50 to 100 meters i nsi de the wood l i ne.
FM 3-05.222
4-38
4-137. The team has opti ons i f caught i nsi de the search area of a l i ne search.
The handl ers rel y on radi o communi cati ons and often do not have vi sual
contact wi th each other. I f the team has been general l y l ocal i zed through
enemy radi o detecti on-fi ndi ng equi pment, the search net wi l l sti l l be l oose
duri ng the i ni ti al sweep. A sni per team has a smal l chance of hi di ng and
escapi ng detecti on i n deep brush or i n woodpi l es. Larger groups wi l l al most
certai nl y be found. Yet, the team may have the chance to el i mi nate the
handl er and to escape the search net.
4-138. The handl er hi des behi nd cover wi th the dog. He searches for
movement and then sends the dog out i n a strai ght l i ne toward the front.
Usual l y, when the dog has moved about 50 to 75 meters, the handl er cal l s the
dog back. The handl er then moves sl owl y forward and al ways from covered
posi ti on to covered posi ti on. Commands are by voi ce and gesture wi th a backup
whi stl e to si gnal the dog to return. I f a handl er i s ki l l ed or badl y i njured after
he has rel eased the dog, but before he has recal l ed i t, the dog conti nues to
randoml y search out and away from the handl er. The dog usual l y returns to
another handl er or to hi s former handl ers l ast posi ti on wi thi n several mi nutes.
Thi s ti me l apse creates a gap from 25 to 150 meters wi de i n the search pattern.
Response ti mes by the other searchers tend to be fast. Gi ven the hi gh degree of
radi o chatter, the i njured handl er wi l l probabl y be qui ckl y mi ssed from the
radi o net. Ki l l i ng the dog before the handl er wi l l probabl y del ay di scovery onl y
by moments. Dogs are so rel i abl e that i f the dog does not return i mmedi atel y,
the handl er knows somethi ng i s wrong.
4-139. I f the sni per does not have a fi rearm, human versus dog combat i s a
hazard. One dog can be deal t wi th rel ati vel y easi l y i f a kni fe or l arge cl ub i s
avai l abl e. The sni per must keep l ow and stri ke upward usi ng the wri st, never
overhand. Dogs are qui ck and wi l l try to stri ke the groi n or l egs. Most attack
dogs are trai ned to go for the groi n or throat. I f al one and faced wi th two or
more dogs, the sni per shoul d fl ee the si tuati on.
4-140. Dog-tracker teams are a potent threat to the sni per team. Al though
smal l and l i ghtl y armed, they can greatl y i ncrease the area that a rear area
securi ty uni t can search. Due to the dog-tracker teams effecti veness and i ts
l ack of fi repower, a sni per team may be tempted to destroy such an easy
target. Whether a team shoul d fi ght or run depends on the si tuati on and the
team l eader. El i mi nati ng or i njuri ng the dog-tracker team onl y confi rms to
threat securi ty forces that there i s a hosti l e team operati ng i n the area. The
techni ques for attacki ng a dog-tracker team shoul d be used onl y i n extreme
si tuati ons or as a l ast measure.
COUNTERTRACKING
4-141. There are two types of human trackerscombat trackers and
professi onal trackers. Combat trackers l ook ahead for si gns and do not
necessari l y l ook for each i ndi vi dual si gn. Professi onal trackers go from si gn to
si gn. I f they cannot fi nd any si gn, they wi l l stop and search ti l l they fi nd one.
The onl y way to l ose a trai ned professi onal tracker i s to fi shhook i nto an area
and then ambush hi m.
FM 3-05.222
4-39
4-142. I f an enemy tracker fi nds tracks of two men, i t tel l s hi m that a hi ghl y
trai ned speci al ty team may be operati ng i n hi s area. However, a knowl edge of
countertracki ng enabl es the sni per team to survi ve by remai ni ng undetected.
4-143. As wi th the dogs, to confuse the combat tracker and throw hi m off the
track, the sni per al ways starts hi s movement away from hi s objecti ve. He
travel s i n a strai ght l i ne for about an hour and then changes di recti on.
Changi ng wi l l cause the tracker to cast i n di fferent di recti ons to fi nd the track.
Evasion
4-144. Evasi on of the tracker or pursui t team i s a di ffi cul t task that requi res
the use of i mmedi ate-acti on dri l l s mostl y desi gned to counter the threat. A
team ski l l ed i n tracki ng techni ques can successful l y use decepti on dri l l s to
mi ni mi ze si gns that the enemy can use agai nst them. However, i t i s very
di ffi cul t for a person, especi al l y a group, to move across any area wi thout
l eavi ng si gns noti ceabl e to the trai ned eye.
Camouflage
4-145. The fol l owed party may use two types of routes to cover i ts movement.
I t must al so remember that travel ti me reduces when tryi ng to camoufl age the
trai l . Two types of routes i ncl ude:
Most-Used Routes. Movement on l i ghtl y-travel ed sandy or soft trai l s i s
easi l y tracked. However, a person may try to confuse the tracker by
movi ng on hard-surfaced, often-travel ed roads or by mergi ng wi th
ci vi l i ans. These routes shoul d be careful l y exami ned. I f a wel l -defi ned
approach l eads to the enemy, i t wi l l probabl y be mi ned, ambushed, or
covered by sni pers.
Least-Used Routes. These routes avoi d al l man-made trai l s or roads
and confuse the tracker. They are normal l y magneti c azi muths
between two poi nts. However, the tracker can use the proper concepts
to fol l ow the party i f he i s experi enced and persi stent.
Reduction of Trail Signs
4-146. A sni per who tri es to hi de hi s trai l moves at reduced speed; therefore,
the experi enced tracker gai ns ti me. A sni per shoul d use the fol l owi ng
methods to reduce trai l si gns:
Wrap footgear wi th rags or wear soft-sol ed sneakers that make
footpri nts rounded and l ess di sti ncti ve.
Change i nto footgear wi th a di fferent tread i mmedi atel y fol l owi ng a
decepti ve maneuver.
Wal k on hard or rocky ground.
Deception Techniques
4-147. Evadi ng a ski l l ed and persi stent enemy tracker requi res ski l l ful l y
executed maneuvers to decei ve the tracker and cause hi m to l ose the trai l . An
enemy tracker cannot be outrun by a sni per team that i s carryi ng equi pment,
because he travel s l i ght and i s escorted by enemy forces desi gned for pursui t.
The si ze of the pursui ng force di ctates the sni per teams chances of success i n
FM 3-05.222
4-40
usi ng ambush-type maneuvers. Sni per teams use some of the fol l owi ng
techni ques i n i mmedi ate-acti on dri l l s and decepti on dri l l s.
4-148. Backward Walking. One of the most basi c techni ques i s wal ki ng
backward (Fi gure 4-19) i n tracks al ready made, and then steppi ng off the
trai l onto terrai n or objects that l eave l i ttl e to no si gns. Ski l l ful use of thi s
maneuver causes the tracker to l ook i n the wrong di recti on once he has l ost
the trai l . Thi s must be used i n conjuncti on wi th another decepti on techni que.
Thi s techni que wi l l probabl y fai l i f a professi onal tracker i s on your trai l .
Figure 4-19. Backward-Walking Deception Technique
4-149. Big Tree. A good decepti on tacti c i s to change di recti ons at l arge
trees (Fi gure 4-20, page 4-41). To change, the sni per moves i n any gi ven
di recti on and wal ks past a l arge tree (12 i nches wi de or l arger) from 5 to 10
paces. He careful l y wal ks backward to the forward si de of the tree and makes
a 90-degree change i n the di recti on of travel , passi ng the tree on i ts forward
si de. Thi s techni que uses the tree as a screen to hi de the new trai l from the
pursui ng tracker. A vari ati on used near a cl ear area woul d be for the sni per
to pass by the si de of the tree that he wi shes to change di recti on to on hi s
next l eg. He wal ks past the tree i nto a cl ear area for 75 to 100 meters and
then wal ks backwards to the tree. At thi s ti me he moves 90 degrees and
passes on the si de away from the tracker. Thi s method coul d cause the
tracker to fol l ow hi s si gn i nto the open area where, when he l oses the track,
he mi ght cast i n the wrong di recti on for the track. Thi s techni que works onl y
on combat trackers and not professi onal trackers.
FM 3-05.222
4-41
Figure 4-20. Big Tree Deception Technique
NOTE: By studyi ng si gns, an observant tracker can determi ne i f an attempt
i s bei ng made to confuse hi m. I f the sni per team tri es to l ose the tracker by
wal ki ng backward, footpri nts wi l l be deepened at the toe and soi l wi l l be
scuffed or dragged i n the di recti on of movement. By fol l owi ng careful l y, the
tracker can normal l y fi nd a turnaround poi nt.
4-150. Cut the Corner. The sni per team uses thi s decepti on method when
approachi ng a known road or trai l . About 100 meters from the road,
the team changes i ts di recti on of movement, ei ther 45 degrees l eft or ri ght.
Once the road i s reached, the team l eaves a vi si bl e trai l i n the same di recti on of
the decepti on for a short di stance down the road. The tracker shoul d bel i eve
that the team cut the corner to save ti me. The team backtracks on the trai l to
the poi nt where i t entered the road and then careful l y moves down the road
wi thout l eavi ng a good trai l . Once the desi red di stance i s achi eved, the team
changes di recti on and conti nues movement (Fi gure 4-21). A combi nati on usi ng
the bi g tree method here woul d i mprove the effecti veness of thi s decepti on.
Figure 4-21. Cut-the-Corner Deception Technique
FM 3-05.222
4-42
4-151. Slip the Stream. The sni per team uses thi s decepti on when
approachi ng a known stream. I t executes thi s method the same as the cut-
the-corner maneuver. The team establ i shes the 45-degree decepti on
maneuver upstream, then enters the stream. The team moves upstream and
establ i shes fal se trai l s i f ti me permi ts. By movi ng upstream, fl oati ng debri s
and si l t wi l l fl ow downstream and cover the true di recti on and exi t poi nt. The
team then moves downstream to escape si nce creeks and streams gai n
tri butari es that offer more escape al ternati ves (Fi gure 4-22). Fal se exi t poi nts
can al so be used to further confuse. However, the sni per must be careful not
to cause a fal se exi t to gi ve away hi s i ntended travel di recti on.
Figure 4-22. Slip-the-Stream Deception Technique
4-152. Arctic Circle. The team uses thi s decepti on i n snow-covered terrai n to
escape pursuers or to hi de a patrol base. I t establ i shes a trai l i n a ci rcl e as l arge
as possi bl e (Fi gure 4-23). The trai l that starts on a road and returns to the same
start poi nt i s effecti ve. At some poi nt al ong the ci rcul ar trai l , the team removes
snowshoes (i f used) and careful l y steps off the trai l , l eavi ng one set of tracks.
The l arge tree maneuver can be used to screen the trai l . From the hi de posi ti on,
the team returns over the same steps and careful l y fi l l s them wi th snow one at
a ti me. Thi s techni que i s especi al l y effecti ve i f i t i s snowi ng.
Figure 4-23. Arctic Circle Deception Technique
FM 3-05.222
4-43
4-153. Fishhook. The team uses thi s techni que to doubl e back on i ts own trai l
i n an overwatch posi ti on (Fi gure 4-24). I t can observe the back trai l for trackers
or ambush pursuers. I f the pursui ng force i s too l arge to be destroyed, the team
stri ves to el i mi nate the tracker. I t uses hi t-and-run tacti cs, then moves to
another ambush posi ti on. The terrai n must be used to advantage.
Figure 4-24. The Fishhook Deception Technique
4-154. Dog and vi sual trackers are not i nfal l i bl e; they can be confused wi th
si mpl e techni ques and cl ear thi nki ng. The sni per shoul d not pani c and try to
outrun a dog or vi sual tracker. I t onl y makes i t easi er for the tracki ng party.
The successful sni per keeps hi s head and al ways pl ans two steps ahead. Even
i f trackers are not i n the area, i t i s best to al ways use countertracki ng
techni ques.
NOTE: Sni pers must al ways remember that there i s no way to hi de a trai l
from a professi onal tracker!
OBSERVATION AND TARGET DETECTION
4-155. The sni pers mi ssi on requi res that he del i ver preci si on fi re to sel ected
targets. He cannot meet thi s requi rement wi thout fi rst observi ng and
detecti ng the target. Duri ng thi s process, the sni per team i s concerned wi th
the si gni fi cance of the target rather than the number of targets. The sni per
team wi l l record the l ocati on i denti fi cati on of al l targets observed and then
fi re at them i n a descendi ng order of i mportance.
USE OF TARGET INDICATORS
4-156. As di scussed i n the camoufl age and conceal ment secti on, the sni per
team must protect i tsel f from target i ndi cators that coul d reveal i ts presence
to the enemy. I t can al so use these target i ndi cators to l ocate the enemy by
usi ng the pl anned and systemati c process of observati on. The fi rst
consi derati on i s toward the di scovery of any i mmedi ate danger to the sni per
team. The team begi ns wi th a hasty search of the enti re area and fol l ows up
wi th a sl ow, del i berate observati on cal l ed a detailed search. As l ong as the
sni per team remai ns i n posi ti on, i t wi l l mai ntai n constant observati on of the
area usi ng the hasty and detai l ed search methods as the si tuati on requi res.
FM 3-05.222
4-44
Hasty Search
4-157. Thi s process i s the fi rst phase of observi ng a target area. The observer
conducts a hasty search (about 10 seconds) for any enemy acti vi ty i mmedi atel y
after the team occupi es the fi ri ng posi ti on. The search i s carri ed out by maki ng
qui ck gl ances at speci fi c poi nts, terrai n features, or other areas that coul d
conceal the enemy. The sni per shoul d not sweep hi s eyes across the terrai n i n
one conti nuous movement; i t wi l l prevent hi m from detecti ng moti on. The
observer vi ews the area cl osest to the teams posi ti on fi rst si nce i t coul d pose the
most i mmedi ate threat. The observer then searches farther out unti l the enti re
target area has been searched. The hasty search i s effecti ve because the eyes
are sensi ti ve to the sl i ghtest movement occurri ng wi thi n a wi de arc of the
object. Thi s spot i s cal l ed si de vi si on or seei ng out of the corner of the eye.
The eye must be focused on a speci fi c poi nt to have thi s sensi ti vi ty. When the
observer sees or suspects a target, he uses the bi nocul ars or the observati on
tel escope for a detai l ed vi ew of the suspected target area.
Detailed Search
4-158. After the hasty search, the desi gnated observer starts a detai l ed
search usi ng the overl appi ng stri p method (Fi gure 4-25). Normal l y, the area
nearest the team offers the greatest danger, therefore, the search shoul d
begi n there. The detai l ed search begi ns at ei ther fl ank. The observer
systemati cal l y searches the terrai n to hi s front i n a 180-degree arc, 50 meters
i n depth. After reachi ng the opposi te fl ank, the observer searches the next
area nearest hi s post. The search shoul d be i n overl appi ng stri ps of at l east 10
meters to ensure total coverage of the area. I t shoul d cover as far out as the
observer can see, al ways i ncl udi ng areas of i nterest that attracted the
observer duri ng the hasty search.
Figure 4-25. Overlapping Strip Method
4-159. The observer must memori ze as much of the area as possi bl e. He
shoul d make mental notes of promi nent terrai n features and other areas that
FM 3-05.222
4-45
may offer cover and conceal ment for the enemy. Thi s way, he becomes
fami l i ar wi th the terrai n as he searches. These become hi s key poi nts of
i nterest for hi s hasty searches.
4-160. Thi s cycl e of a hasty search fol l owed by a detai l ed search shoul d be
repeated every 15 to 20 mi nutes dependi ng upon the terrai n and area of
responsi bi l i ty. Repeti ti on al l ows the sni per team to become accustomed to the
area and to l ook cl oser at vari ous poi nts wi th each consecuti ve pass over the
area. After the i ni ti al searches, the observer shoul d vi ew the area usi ng a
combi nati on of both hasty and detai l ed searches. Whi l e the observer conducts
the i ni ti al searches of the area, the sni per shoul d record promi nent features,
reference poi nts, and di stances on a range card.
MAINTAINING OBSERVATION
4-161. The team members shoul d al ternate the task of observi ng the area
about every 30 mi nutes. When mai ntai ni ng observati on, the observer keeps
movement of hi s head and body to a mi ni mum. He shoul d not expose hi s head
any hi gher than i s necessary to see the area bei ng observed. After compl eti ng
hi s detai l ed search, the observer mai ntai ns observati on of the area by usi ng a
method si mi l ar to the hasty search. He gl ances qui ckl y at vari ous poi nts
throughout the enti re area and focuses hi s eyes on speci fi c features that he
had desi gnated duri ng hi s detai l ed search.
4-162. Whi l e mai ntai ni ng observati on, the observer shoul d devi se a set
sequence for searchi ng to ensure coverage of al l terrai n. Si nce i t i s enti rel y
possi bl e that hi s hasty search may fai l to detect the enemy, he shoul d
peri odi cal l y repeat a detai l ed search.
WHY OBJ ECTS ARE SEEN
4-163. The rel ati ve ease or di ffi cul ty i n seei ng objects depends upon several
factors. The observer may determi ne objects by
Shape. Some objects can be recogni zed i nstantl y by thei r shape,
parti cul arl y i f i t contrasts wi th the background. Experi ence teaches
peopl e to associ ate an object wi th i ts shape or outl i ne. At a di stance,
the outl i ne of objects can be seen wel l before the detai l s can be
determi ned. The human body and the equi pment that a sol di er carri es
are easi l y i denti fi ed unl ess the outl i ne has been al tered. Areas of
i mportance when consi deri ng shape duri ng observati on are
The cl ear-cut outl i ne of a sol di er or hi s equi pment, ei ther parti al l y
or ful l y exposed.
Man-made objects, whi ch have geometri c shapes.
Geometri c shapes, whi ch do not occur i n nature on a l arge scal e.
Shadow. I n sunl i ght, an object or a man wi l l cast a shadow that can
gi ve away hi s presence. Shadows may be more reveal i ng than the
object i tsel f. Care must be taken to detect al terati ons of the natural
shape of a shadow. Where l i ght i s excessi vel y bri ght, shadows wi l l l ook
especi al l y bl ack. Contrast wi l l be extreme, and i n thi s exaggerated
contrast the observers eye cannot adjust to both areas si mul taneousl y.
FM 3-05.222
4-46
Thi s requi res the observer to i sol ate the shadowed area from the
bri ght sunl i ght so that hi s eye can adapt to the shadow.
Silhouette. Any object si l houetted agai nst a contrasti ng background i s
conspi cuous. Any smooth, fl at background, such as water, a fi el d, or best
of al l , the sky, wi l l cause an object to become wel l del i neated. However,
speci al care must be taken when searchi ng areas wi th an uneven
background, as i t i s more di ffi cul t to detect the si l houette of an object.
Surface. I f an object has a surface that contrasts wi th i ts surroundi ngs,
i t becomes conspi cuous. An object wi th a smooth surface refl ects l i ght
and becomes more obvi ous than an object wi th a rough surface that
casts shadows on i tsel f. An extremel y smooth object becomes shi ny.
The refl ecti ons from a bel t buckl e, watch, or opti cal devi ce can be
seen over a mi l e away from the source. Any shi ne wi l l attract the
observers attenti on.
Spacing. Nature never pl aces objects i n a regul ar, equal l y spaced
pattern. Onl y man uses rows and equal spaci ng.
Siting. Anythi ng that does not bel ong i n the i mmedi ate surroundi ngs
are obvi ous and become readi l y detectabl e. Thi s evi dence shoul d
arouse the observers curi osi ty and cause hi m to i nvesti gate the area
more thoroughl y.
Color. The greater the contrasti ng col or, the more vi si bl e the object
becomes. Thi s poi nt i s especi al l y true when the col or i s not natural for
that area. Col or al one wi l l usual l y not i denti fy the object but i s often an
ai d i n l ocati ng i t.
Movement. Thi s fi nal reason why thi ngs are seen wi l l sel dom reveal the
i denti ty of an object, but i t i s the most common reason an enemys
posi ti on i s reveal ed. Even when al l other i ndi cators are absent,
movement wi l l gi ve a posi ti on away. A stati onary object may be
i mpossi bl e to see and a sl ow-movi ng object di ffi cul t to detect, but a
qui ck or jerky movement wi l l be seen.
ELEMENTS OF OBSERVATION
4-164. Four el ements i n the process of observati on i ncl ude awareness,
understandi ng, recordi ng, and response. Each of these el ements may be
construed as a separate process or as occurri ng at the same ti me.
Awareness
4-165. Awareness i s bei ng consci ousl y attuned to a speci fi c fact. A sni per
team must al ways be aware of the surroundi ngs and take nothi ng for
granted. The team shoul d consi der the fol l owi ng poi nts because they may
i nfl uence and di stort awareness:
An objects si ze and shape can be mi si nterpreted i f vi ewed i ncompl etel y
or i naccuratel y.
Di stracti ons can occur duri ng observati on.
Acti ve parti ci pati on or degree of i nterest can di mi ni sh toward the event.
Physi cal abi l i ti es (fi ve senses) can be l i mi ted.
FM 3-05.222
4-47
Envi ronmental changes can affect or occur at the ti me of observati on.
I magi nati on or percepti on can cause possi bl e exaggerati ons or
i naccuraci es when reporti ng or recal l i ng facts.
Understanding
4-166. Understandi ng i s deri ved from educati on, trai ni ng, practi ce, and
experi ence. I t enhances the sni per teams knowl edge about what shoul d be
observed, broadens i ts abi l i ty to vi ew and consi der al l factors, and ai ds i n i ts
eval uati on of the i nformati on.
Recording
4-167. Recordi ng i s the abi l i ty to save and recal l what was observed. Usual l y,
the sni per team has mechani cal ai ds such as wri ti ng utensi l s, l ogbooks, sketch
ki ts, tape recordi ngs, and cameras to support the recordi ng of events. However,
the most accessi bl e method i s memory. The abi l i ty to record, retai n, and recal l
depends on the teams mental capaci ty (and al ertness) and abi l i ty to recogni ze
what i s essenti al to record. Added factors that affect recordi ng i ncl ude:
The amount of trai ni ng and practi ce i n observati on.
Ski l l through experi ence.
Si mi l ari ty of previ ous i nci dents.
Ti me i nterval between observi ng and recordi ng.
The abi l i ty to understand or convey messages through oral or other
communi cati on.
Preconcei ved percepti on of the event as to what or i t occurred and who
was i nvol ved.
Response
4-168. Response i s the sni per teams acti on toward i nformati on. I t may be as
si mpl e as recordi ng events i n a l ogbook, maki ng a communi cati ons cal l , or
fi ri ng a wel l -ai med shot.
TARGET INDICATION AT UNKNOWN DISTANCES
4-169. Sni pers usual l y depl oy i n pai rs and can recogni ze and di rect each
other to targets qui ckl y and effi ci entl y. To recogni ze targets qui ckl y, the
sni per uses standard methods of i ndi cati on, wi th sl i ght vari ati ons to meet hi s
i ndi vi dual needs.
4-170. The three methods of i ndi cati ng targets are the di rect method, the
reference-poi nt method, and the cl ock-ray method. I t i s easi er to recogni ze a
target i f the area of ground i n whi ch i t i s l i kel y to appear i s known. Such an
area of ground i s cal l ed an arc of fi re. An arc of fi re i s i ndi cated i n the
fol l owi ng sequence:
The axi s (the mi ddl e of the arc).
The l eft and ri ght l i mi ts of the arc.
Reference poi nts (promi nent objects). These shoul d be as permanent as
possi bl e (woods, mounds), a reasonabl e di stance apart, and easy to
i denti fy. A speci fi c poi nt of the object i s nomi nated and gi ven a name
FM 3-05.222
4-48
and range (moundbottom l eft corner; to be known as moundrange
400) the same as on your range card.
Direct Method
4-171. The sni per uses thi s method to i ndi cate obvi ous targets. The range,
where to l ook, and a descri pti on of the target are gi ven. Terms used for where
to l ook i ncl ude the fol l owi ng:
Axi s of arcfor targets on or very near the axi s.
Left or ri ghtfor targets 90 degrees from the axi s.
Sl i ghtl y, quarter, hal f, or three-quarters and l eft or ri ghtfor targets
between the axi s and the l eft or ri ght l i mi ts.
Reference-Point Method
4-172. To i ndi cate l ess obvi ous targets, the sni per may use a reference poi nt
together wi th the di rect method, and perhaps the words above and bel ow as
wel l . For exampl e:
300-mound (reference poi ntsl i ghtl y ri ghtsmal l bush [target]).
200-mound (reference poi ntsl i ghtl y ri ght and bel owgate [target]).
Clock-Ray Method
4-173. To i ndi cate l ess-obvi ous targets, a reference-poi nt target wi th a cl ock
ray may be used. To use thi s method, i t i s i magi ned that there i s a cl ock face
standi ng up on the l andscape wi th i ts center on the reference poi nt. To
i ndi cate a target, the range, the reference poi nt and whether the target i s to
the l eft or to the ri ght of i t, and the approxi mate hour on the cl ock face are
gi ven. For exampl e: 300-moundri ght4 ocl ocksmal l bush.
4-174. When i ndi cati ng targets, the fol l owi ng poi nts must be consi dered:
Range. I ts mai n purpose i s to gi ve an i ndi cati on of how far to l ook but i t
shoul d al so be as accurate as possi bl e. The sni per sets the range gi ven
to hi m by hi s observer as i ndi cated by hi s shooters data book.
Detailed I ndication. Thi s val ue may requi re more detai l than a normal
i ndi cati on; neverthel ess, i t shoul d sti l l be as bri ef and as cl ear as possi bl e.
4-175. The sni per can use mi l measurements al ong wi th the methods of
i ndi cati on to speci fy the di stance between an object and the reference poi nt
used (for exampl e, moundreference poi nt; go l eft 50 mi l s, l one tree, base of
treetarget). The mi l scal e i n bi nocul ars can assi st i n accurate i ndi cati on,
al though occasi onal l y the use of hand angl es wi l l have to suffi ce. I t i s
i mportant that each sni per i s conversant wi th the angl es subtended by the
vari ous parts of hi s hand when the arm i s outstretched.
4-176. Sni per teams must al ways be aware of the di ffi cul ti es that can be
caused when the observer and the sni per are observi ng through i nstruments
wi th di fferent magni fi cati ons and fi el ds of vi ew (tel escope, bi nocul ars). I f ti me
and conceal ment al l ow i t, the observer and the sni per shoul d use the same
vi ewi ng i nstrument, parti cul arl y i f the mi l scal e i n the bi nocul ars i s bei ng
used to gi ve accurate measurements from a reference poi nt.
FM 3-05.222
4-49
4-177. I t i s necessary that both the observer and the sni per know exactl y
what the other i s doi ng and what he i s sayi ng when l ocati ng the target. Any
method that i s understandabl e to both and i s fast to use i s acceptabl e. They
must use short and conci se words to l ocate the target. Each must al ways be
aware of what the other i s doi ng so that the sni per does not shoot before the
observer i s ready. An exampl e of thi s di al ogue woul d be:
Observer: 60HALF RI GHT, BARN, RI GHT 50 MI LS, 2 OCLOCK, LARGE
ROCK, BOTTOM LEFT CORNER, TARGET.
Sniper: TARGET I DENTI FI ED, READY (or descri be back to observer the
target).
Sni per: TARGET I S 2 MI LS TALL; 1 MI L WI DE.
Observer: SET ELEVATI ON AT 5+1, WI NDAGE 0, PARALLAX 2D BALL.
Sni per: (repeats di recti ons upon setti ng scope) READY.
Observer: HOLD OF RI GHT (wi nd correcti on). The sni per shoul d have a
round downrange wi thi n 1 to 2 seconds after the wi nd cal l .
4-178. I t i s extremel y i mportant that the sni per fi res as soon as possi bl e
after the wi nd cal l to precl ude any wi nd change that coul d affect the i mpact
of hi s bul l et. I f the wi nd does change, then the observer stops the fi ri ng
sequence and gi ves new wi nd readi ngs to the sni per. The sni per and the
observer must not be afrai d to tal k to each other, but they shoul d keep
everythi ng sai d as short and conci se as possi bl e.
INDEXING TARGETS
4-179. The sni per must have some system for rememberi ng or i ndexi ng
target l ocati ons. He may want to fi re at the hi ghest pri ori ty target fi rst. He
must be sel ecti ve, pati ent, and not fi re at a target just to have a ki l l .
I ndi scri mi nate fi ri ng may al ert more val uabl e and cl oser targets.
Engagement of a di stant target may resul t i n di scl osure of the sni per post to
a cl oser enemy.
4-180. Si nce several targets may be si ghted at the same ti me, the observer
needs some system to remember al l of the l ocati ons. To remember, he uses
ai mi ng poi nts and reference poi nts and records thi s i nformati on on the sector
sketch or range card and observers l og.
4-181. To i ndex targets, the sni per team uses the prepared range card for a
reference si nce i t can greatl y reduce the engagement ti me. When i ndexi ng a
target to the sni per, the observer l ocates a promi nent terrai n feature near the
target. He i ndi cates thi s feature and any other i nformati on to the sni per to
assi st i n fi ndi ng the target. I nformati on between team members vari es wi th
the si tuati on. The observer may sound l i ke a forward observer (FO) gi vi ng a
cal l for fi re to a fi re di recti on center (FDC), dependi ng on the condi ti on of the
battl efi el d and the total number of possi bl e targets from whi ch to choose.
4-182. The sni per team must al so consi der the fol l owi ng factors:
Exposure Time. Movi ng targets may expose themsel ves for onl y a short
ti me. The sni per team must be al ert to note the poi nts of di sappearance
of as many targets as possi bl e before engagi ng any one of them. By
FM 3-05.222
4-50
doi ng so, the sni per team may be abl e to take several targets under fi re
i n rapi d successi on.
Number of Targets. When the sni per team i s unabl e to remember and
pl ot al l target l ocati ons, i t shoul d concentrate onl y on the most
i mportant target. By concentrati ng onl y on the most i mportant targets,
the team wi l l effecti vel y l ocate and engage hi gh-pri ori ty targets or
those targets that represent the greatest threat.
Spacing. The greater the space i nterval between targets, the more
di ffi cul t i t i s to note thei r movements. I n such cases, the sni per team
shoul d accuratel y l ocate and engage the nearest target.
Aiming Points. Targets that di sappear behi nd good ai mi ng poi nts are
easi l y recorded and remembered. Targets wi th poor ai mi ng poi nts are
easi l y l ost. I f two such targets are of equal val ue and a threat to the
team, the poor ai mi ng poi nt target shoul d be engaged fi rst, unti l the
target wi th a good ai mi ng poi nt becomes a greater threat.
TARGET SELECTION
4-183. Sni pers sel ect targets accordi ng to thei r val ue. Certai n enemy
personnel and equi pment can be l i sted as key targets, but thei r real worth
must be deci ded by the sni per team i n rel ati on to the ci rcumstances i n whi ch
they are l ocated.
4-184. As stated i n the di scussi on of recordi ng targets, the sni per team may
have no choi ce of targets. I t may l ose a rapi dl y movi ng target i f i t wai ts to
i denti fy target detai l s. I t must al so consi der any enemy threateni ng i ts
posi ti on as an extremel y hi gh-val ue target. When forced to choose a target,
the sni per team wi l l consi der the fol l owi ng factors:
Certainty of Targets I dentity. The sni per team must be reasonabl y
certai n that the target i t i s consi deri ng i s the key target.
Target Effect on the Enemy. The sni per team must consi der what effect
the el i mi nati on of the target wi l l have on the enemys fi ghti ng abi l i ty.
I t must determi ne that the target i s the one avai l abl e target that wi l l
cause the greatest harm to the enemy.
Enemy Reaction to Sniper Fire. The sni per team must consi der what
the enemy wi l l do once the shot has been fi red. The team must be
prepared for such acti ons as i mmedi ate suppressi on by i ndi rect fi res
and enemy sweeps of the area.
Effect on the Overall Mission. The sni per team must consi der how the
engagement wi l l affect the overal l mi ssi on. The mi ssi on may be one of
i ntel l i gence-gatheri ng for a certai n peri od. Fi ri ng wi l l not onl y al ert the
enemy to a teams presence, but i t may al so termi nate the mi ssi on i f
the team has to move from i ts posi ti on as a resul t of the engagement.
Probability of First-Round Hit. The sni per team must determi ne
the chances of hi tti ng the target wi th the fi rst shot by consi deri ng
the fol l owi ng:
Di stance to the target.
Di recti on and vel oci ty of the wi nd.
FM 3-05.222
4-51
Vi si bi l i ty of the target area.
Amount of the target that i s exposed.
Length of ti me the target i s exposed.
Speed and di recti on of target movement.
Nature of the terrai n and vegetati on surroundi ng the target.
Distance. Al though the sni per may be capabl e of hi tti ng a human
target at a range of 800 meters, he shoul d not ri sk such a di stant shot
wi thout a speci al reason. The sni per has been trai ned to stal k to wi thi n
200 meters of a trai ned observer and pl an hi s retrograde. He must
make use of thi s abi l i ty and ensure hi s fi rst shot hi ts the target. A
cl ean, one-shot ki l l i s far more demoral i zi ng to the enemy than a near-
mi ss from 600 meters.
Multiple Targets. The sni per shoul d careful l y wei gh the possi bl e
consequences of fi ri ng at one of a number of targets, especi al l y when
the target cannot be i denti fi ed i n detai l . The sni per may trade hi s l i fe
for an uni mportant target by putti ng hi msel f i n a posi ti on where he
must fi re repeatedl y i n sel f-defense.
Equipment as Targets. A wel l -pl aced shot can di sabl e crew-served
weapons, radi os, vehi cl es, or other equi pment. Such equi pment may
serve as bai t and al l ow the sni per to make repeated engagements of
crew members or radi o operators whi l e keepi ng the equi pment i dl e, to
be di sabl ed at the sni pers conveni ence. Retal i ati on by i ndi rect fi re
must be consi dered i n these ci rcumstances.
I ntelligence Collection. I ntel l i gence i s an i mportant col l ateral functi on
of the sni per team. When i n a l ocati on near to the enemy, the sni per
team must be very judi ci ous i n i ts deci si on to fi re. The sni per may
i nterrupt a pattern of acti vi ty that, i f observed l onger, woul d al l ow the
pai r to report facts that woul d far outwei gh the val ue of a ki l l . The
wel l -trai ned sni per team wi l l careful l y eval uate such si tuati ons.
Key Target Selection. A sni per sel ects targets accordi ng to thei r val ue.
A targets real worth i s determi ned by the sni per and the nature of hi s
mi ssi on. Key personnel targets can be i denti fi ed by acti ons,
manneri sms, posi ti ons wi thi n formati ons, rank or i nsi gni as, and
equi pment bei ng worn or carri ed. Key personnel targets are as fol l ows:
Snipers. Sni pers are the number one target of a sni per team. The
fl eeti ng nature of a sni per i s reason enough to engage hi m
because he may never be seen agai n.
Dog-Tracking Teams. Dog-tracki ng teams pose a great threat to
sni per teams and other speci al teams that may be worki ng i n the
area. I t i s hard to fool a trai ned dog; therefore, the dog-tracki ng
team must be stopped. When engagi ng a dog-tracki ng team, the
sni per shoul d engage the dogs handl er fi rst, unl ess i t i s known
that the dogs are trai ned to attack on gunshot.
Scouts. Scouts are keen observers, provi de val uabl e i nformati on
about fri endl y uni ts, and control i ndi rect fi res, whi ch make them
dangerous on the battl efi el d.
FM 3-05.222
4-52
Officers (Military and Political). These i ndi vi dual s are al so
targets because i n some forces l osi ng key offi cers i s a major
di srupti on and causes coordi nati on l oss for hours.
Noncommissioned Officers (NCOs). Losi ng NCOs not onl y affects
the operati on of a uni t but al so affects the moral e of l ower-
ranki ng personnel .
Vehicle Commanders and Drivers. Many vehi cl es are rendered
usel ess or the capabi l i ti es are greatl y degraded wi thout a
commander or dri ver.
Communications Personnel. Eliminating these personnel can
seriously cripple the enemys communication network, because in
some forces only highly trained personnel can operate various radios.
Weapons Crews. El i mi nati ng these personnel reduces the amount
and accuracy of enemy fi re on fri endl y troops.
Optics on Vehicles. Personnel who are i n cl osed vehi cl es are
l i mi ted to vi ewi ng through opti cs. The sni per can bl i nd a vehi cl e
by damagi ng these opti c systems.
Communications and Radar Equipment. The ri ght shot i n the
ri ght pl ace can compl etel y rui n a tacti cal l y val uabl e radar or
communi cati ons system. Al so, onl y hi ghl y tr ai ned per sonnel
may attempt to r epai r these systems i n pl ace. El i mi nati ng
these per sonnel may i mpai r the enemys abi l i ty to per for m
fi el d r epai r .
Weapons Systems. Many hi gh-technol ogy weapons, especi al l y
computer-gui ded systems, can be rendered usel ess by one wel l -
pl aced round i n the gui dance control l er of the system.
PRINCIPLES OF VISION
4-185. To ful l y understand and accompl i sh the pri nci pl es of trai ni ng the eye,
the sni per must know i ts capabi l i ti es and l i mi tati ons. The parts of the eye
correspond to the parts of the camera and react i n much the same way
(Fi gure 4-26, page 4-53). The eye has a l ens l i ke a camera; however, the l ens
of the eye focuses automati cal l y and more rapi dl y than the camera l ens. The
eye al so has a di aphragm, cal l ed the i ri s, that regul ates the amount of l i ght
i nto the eye. I t permi ts the i ndi vi dual to see i n bri ght l i ght or i n dark
shadows. Just as wi th the camera, the eye cannot accompl i sh both at the
same ti me. The eyes fi l m i s the photoreceptor cel l s l ocated on the back wal l ,
or reti na, of the eye. There are two types of cel l s:
Cone Cells. They are l ocated i n the central porti on of the reti na, used
for day vi si on, and enabl e one to di sti ngui sh col or, shape, and sharp
contrast. The eye needs a l ot of l i ght to acti vate the cone cel l s, so these
cel l s are bl i nd duri ng peri ods of l ow l i ght.
Rod Cells. They are l ocated peri pheral to the cone cel l s and are used for
ni ght vi si on. They see mostl y i n bl ack and whi te and are excel l ent at
seei ng movement. These are the cel l s that gi ve the observer peri pheral
and ni ght vi si on.
FM 3-05.222
4-53
Figure 4-26. Functional Similarities Between the Eye and a Camera
OBSERVATION TECHNIQUES
4-186. Trai ni ng the eye requi res trai ni ng the mi nd as wel l . The sni pers
profi ci ency as an observer wi l l come from a good mental atti tude and a
trai ned eye. As an observer, just as wi th a hunter, the eye must be trai ned to
noti ce l i ttl e thi ngs, such as the bendi ng of grass when there i s no wi nd, the
unnatural shape of a shadow, or the wi sp of vapor i n col d ai r. Even when the
enemy cannot be seen, hi s l ocati on can be gi ven away by l i ttl e thi ngs, such as
a wi ndow that i s now open when i t was cl osed before, a puff of smoke, si gns of
fresh soi l , or di sturbed undergrowth.
4-187. Observers shoul d l earn the habi ts of the ani mal s i n the area or watch
the domesti c ani mal s. A chi cken suddenl y darti ng from behi nd a bui l di ng;
sheep, goats, or cows suddenl y movi ng or just becomi ng more al ert i n a fi el d;
wi l d bi rds fl yi ng or becomi ng qui et; i nsects becomi ng qui et at ni ght; or
ani mal s startl ed from thei r posi ti ons shoul d al ert the observer of possi bl e
enemy acti vi ty i n hi s area.
4-188. The observer shoul d study and memori ze the AO. Any change wi l l
al ert the prepared mi nd to the possi bi l i ty of the enemy. The observer shoul d
i nspect al l changes to determi ne the cause. He shoul d al so remember some
key rul es whi l e observi ng. He must l earn to
Look for the reasons why thi ngs are seen.
Look for objects that seem out of pl ace. Al most every object i n the wi l d
i s verti cal ; onl y man-made objects such as a gun barrel are hori zontal .
See thi ngs i n the proper perspecti ve at di stances. Learn to see
movement, col or, shape, and contrast i n mi ni ature.
Look through vegetati on, not at i t. The observer shoul d not be sati sfi ed
unti l he has seen as far as possi bl e i nto the vegetati on.
4-189. Due to constantl y changi ng cl ouds and the suns posi ti ons, l i ght i s a
changi ng factor i n observati on. The sni per shoul d al ways be ready to watch
the changi ng contrast and shadows. An area that the sni per fi rst thought
hel d no enemy may prove di fferent when the l i ght changes. When the sun i s
to the sni pers back, l i ght wi l l refl ect from the enemys opti cal devi ces. But
FM 3-05.222
4-54
when the l i ght changes and i s to the front, the enemy wi l l be abl e to see the
l i ght refl ected from the sni pers opti cal devi ces.
4-190. I t i s al so mor e ti r i ng for the sni per to obser ve when the l i ght
shi nes i n hi s eyes. He shoul d ar r ange for a r el i ef obser ver mor e
fr equentl y at thi s ti me i f possi bl e. I f not, the use of some type of shadi ng
wi l l hel p to cut down on the amount of l i ght comi ng i nto the eyes.
LIMITED VISIBILITY TECHNIQUES
4-191. Twi l i ght i s another ti me of l i ght changes. The eye begi ns to produce
vi sual purpl e and the cone cel l s begi n shutti ng down. Al so, the i ri s opens
more to l et more l i ght i n. Thi s reacti on causes the eye to constantl y change
focus, and consequentl y, ti res the eye qui cker. However, duri ng twi l i ght the
enemy wi l l usual l y become more carel ess, al l owi ng an al ert observer to spot
that l ast change i n posi ti on or that l ast ci garette before dark. The sni per
shoul d al so remember thi s i s not a ti me for hi m to become rel axed.
4-192. Li mi ted vi si bi l i ty runs the gamut from bri ght moonl i ght to utter
darkness. But no matter how bri ght the ni ght i s, the eye cannot functi on wi th
dayl i ght preci si on. For maxi mum effecti veness, an observer must appl y the
fol l owi ng pri nci pl es of ni ght vi si on when trai ni ng the eye:
Night Adaptation. Al l ow approxi matel y 30 mi nutes for the eye to adjust.
Off-Center Vision. Never l ook di r ectl y at an object at ni ght. Thi s
l ook wi l l cause the object to di sappear . When i t r eappear s, i t coul d
appear to change shape or move.
Scanning. I t i s i mportant that the eye stops movement for a few
seconds duri ng the scan to be abl e to see an object. When scanni ng
around an object, the temptati on to l ook di rectl y at the object just to
make sure shoul d be resi sted.
4-193. The sni per shoul d remember that the fol l owi ng factors can affect
ni ght vi si on:
Lack of Vi tami n A.
Col ds, headaches, fati gue, narcoti cs, al cohol , and heavy smoki ng.
Exposure to bri ght l i ght. I t wi l l destroy ni ght vi si on for about 10 to 30
mi nutes, dependi ng on the bri ghtness and durati on of the l i ght.
4-194. Darkness bl ots out detai l , so the eye must be trai ned to recogni ze
objects by outl i ne al one. Whi l e some peopl e can see better than others at
ni ght, everyone can use the fol l owi ng techni ques to i mprove thei r vi si on at
ni ght:
Trai n the eye to actual l y see al l the detai l possi bl e at ni ghtti me. When
the sni per sees a tree, he actual l y sees the tree, not a fai nt outl i ne that
he thi nks may be a tree.
Open the i ri s. Whi l e the i ri s of the eye i s basi cal l y automati c, the eye
can be trai ned to open up the i ri s even more to gather more l i ght,
whi ch al l ows more detai l to be seen.
Practi ce roofi ng, whi ch i s si l houetti ng objects agai nst a l i ght background.
FM 3-05.222
4-55
Maneuver to catch the l i ght. At ni ght, noti ceabl e l i ght wi l l onl y be i n
patches where i t fi l ters through the trees. The sni per must maneuver
to pl ace an object between hi s eyes and that patch of l i ght.
Lower the body. By l oweri ng the body or even l yi ng down, the sni per
wi l l be abl e to pi ck up more l i ght and therefore see thi ngs that mi ght
otherwi se go unnoti ced.
OBSERVATION BY SOUND
4-195. Many ti mes sound wi l l warn the sni per l ong before the enemy i s
actual l y seen. Al so, the sounds or l ack of sounds from bi rds or ani mal s may
al ert one to the possi bl e presence of the enemy. I t i s therefore i mportant to
trai n the ears al ong wi th the eyes.
4-196. The ear nearest the ori gi n of the sound wi l l pi ck up the sound fi rst
and wi l l hear i t sl i ghtl y l ouder than the other ear. The di fference i s what
enabl es the sni per to detect the di recti on of the sound. When the sound hi ts
both ears equal l y then the sound i s to hi s front or rear. The brai n wi l l
determi ne front or rear. However, i f the sound reaches both ears at the same
ti me and wi th the same i ntensi ty, as i n fog or extremel y humi d weather,
then the di recti on that the sound came from wi l l not be di scerni bl e or wi l l
be confusi ng.
4-197. Sound al so l oses i ts i ntensi ty wi th di stance tr avel ed. The ear s
must be tr ai ned to become fami l i ar wi th the di ffer ent sounds at di ffer ent
di stances so that the di stance to the sound can be esti mated. Thi s
esti mate woul d then gi ve the sni per a gener al l ocati on of the sound.
4-198. The sni per must l earn to actual l y hear al l sounds. Most peopl e rel y on
si ght for most of thei r i nformati on. A trai ned sni per must l earn to use hi s
ears as wel l as hi s eyes. The observer must make a consci ous effort to hear al l
of the sounds, so that when a sound changes or a new one occurs, he wi l l be
al erted to i t. He shoul d cl ose hi s eyes and l i sten to the sounds around hi m. He
must categori ze the sounds and remember them. Detai l ed observati on
i ncl udes a recheck of the surroundi ng sounds.
4-199. By cuppi ng hi s hand behi nd one ear, the sni per can i ncrease hi s
abi l i ty to hear and pi npoi nt the di recti on of a sound.
TARGET LOCATION BY THE CRACK-THUMP METHOD
4-200. A trai ned ear enabl es the sni per to determi ne the approxi mate
l ocati on of a shot bei ng fi red by usi ng the crack-thump method. When the
sni per i s bei ng fi red at, he wi l l hear two di sti nct sounds. One sound i s the
crack of the bul l et as i t breaks the sound barri er as i t passes by hi s posi ti on.
The other sound i s the thump created by the muzzl e bl ast of the weapon
bei ng fi red. The crack-thump rel ati onshi p i s the ti me that passes between the
two sounds. Thi s ti me i nterval can be used to esti mate the di stance to the
weapon bei ng fi red.
4-201. When the sni per hears the crack, he does not l ook i nto the di recti on of
the crack. The sound wi l l gi ve hi m a fal se l ocati on because the soni c waves of
the bul l et stri ke objects perpendi cul ar to the bul l ets path (Fi gure 2-27,
page 2-32). The sni per woul d mi stakenl y l ook 90 degrees from the enemys
FM 3-05.222
4-56
true posi ti on. The crack shoul d i nstead al ert the sni per to start counti ng
seconds.
4-202. The second sound heard i s the thump of the weapon bei ng fi red. Thi s
poi nt i s the enemys l ocati on. The ti me passed i n seconds i s the di stance to
the enemy. Sound travel s at 340 meters per second at 30 degrees F. The
speed of the bul l et i s twi ce that, whi ch means i t arri ves before the sound of
the muzzl e bl ast. Therefore, hal f a second i s approxi matel y 300 meters, and a
ful l second 600 meters. I t becomes easi er to di sti ngui sh between the two
sounds as the di stance i ncreases. By l i steni ng for the thump and then l ooki ng
i n the di recti on of the thump, i t i s possi bl e to determi ne the approxi mate
l ocati on of the weapon bei ng fi red.
4-203. Fl ash-bang may be used to determi ne the di stance to a weapon fi red
or and expl osi on seen. Si nce the l i ght i s i nstantaneous, the count wi l l equal
approxi matel y 350 meters every second or 1,000 meters every 3 seconds or 1
mi l e every 5 seconds.
4-204. The speed of l i ght i s far greater than the speed of sound or of bul l ets.
Remember that the crack-thump and fl ash-bang rel ati onshi ps are a doubl e-
edged sword that may be used agai nst the sni per.
4-205. The speed, si ze, and shape of the bul l et wi l l produce di fferent sounds.
I ni ti al l y, they wi l l sound al i ke, but wi th practi ce the sni per wi l l be abl e to
di sti ngui sh between di fferent types of weapons. A 7.62 x 39-mm bul l et i s just
goi ng subsoni c at 600 meters. Si nce the crack-thump sounds di ffer from
weapon to weapon, wi th practi ce the experi enced sni per wi l l be abl e to
di sti ngui sh enemy fi re from fri endl y fi re.
4-206. The crack-thump method has the fol l owi ng l i mi tati ons:
I sol ati ng the crack and thump i s di ffi cul t when many shots are
bei ng fi red.
Mountai nous areas and tal l bui l di ngs cause echoes and make thi s
method i neffecti ve.
4-207. To overcome these l i mi tati ons, the i nnovati ve sni per team can use
Dummy Targets. The sni per team can use pol ystyrene pl asti c heads or
mannequi ns dressed to resembl e a sol di er to l ure enemy sni pers i nto
fi ri ng. The head i s pl aced on a sti ck and sl owl y rai sed i nto the enemys
vi ew whi l e another team observes the area for muzzl e bl ast or fl ash.
The Shot-Hole Analysis. Locati ng two or mor e shot hol es i n tr ees,
wal l s, or dummy heads may make i t possi bl e to deter mi ne the
di r ecti on of the shots. The team can use the dummy-head method
and tr i angul ate on the enemy sni per s posi ti on. However , thi s
method onl y wor ks i f al l shots come fr om the same posi ti on.
OBSERVATION DEVICE USE AND SELECTION
4-208. The sni per teams success depends upon i ts powers of observati on. I n
addi ti on to the ri fl e tel escope, whi ch i s not used for observati on, the team has
an observati on tel escope, bi nocul ars, ni ght vi si on si ght, and ni ght vi si on
goggl es to enhance i ts abi l i ty to observe and engage targets. Team members
must rel i eve each other often when usi ng thi s equi pment si nce prol onged use
FM 3-05.222
4-57
can cause eye fati gue, whi ch greatl y reduces the effecti veness of observati on.
Peri ods of observati on duri ng dayl i ght shoul d be l i mi ted to 30 mi nutes
fol l owed by at l east 15 mi nutes of rest. When usi ng NVDs, the observer
shoul d l i mi t hi s i ni ti al peri od of vi ewi ng to 10 mi nutes fol l owed by a 15-
mi nute rest peri od. After several peri ods of vi ewi ng, he can extend the
vi ewi ng peri od to 15 and then 20 mi nutes.
4-209. The M19 or M22 bi nocul ars are the fastest and easi est ai d to use
when greater magni fi cati on i s not needed. The bi nocul ars al so have a mi l
scal e that can ai d the sni per i n judgi ng si zes and di stances. The M19 and
M22 bi nocul ars can al so be used to observe at twi l i ght by gatheri ng more
l i ght than the naked eye. Usi ng thi s reti cl e pattern ai ds the sni per i n
determi ni ng range and adjusti ng i ndi rect fi res. The sni per uses the
bi nocul ars to
Observe target areas.
Observe enemy movement and posi ti ons.
I denti fy ai rcraft.
I mprove l ow-l i ght-l evel vi ewi ng.
Esti mate range.
Cal l for and adjust i ndi rect fi res.
4-210. The M22 bi nocul ars are the l atest i n the i nventory but have several
fl aws. The M22s fl aws are di rectl y attri butabl e to i ts anti l aser protecti ve
coati ng. Thi s coati ng refl ects l i ght l i ke a mi rror and i s an excel l ent target
i ndi cator. Al so, thi s coati ng reduces the amount of l i ght that i s transmi tted
through the l ens system and greatl y reduces the observati on capabi l i ty of the
sni per duri ng dawn and dusk.
4-211. The M49 i s a fi xed 20x observati on-spotti ng tel escope and can be used
to di scern much more detai l at a greater di stance than the bi nocul ars or the
sni per tel escope. Wi th good moonl i ght, the observer can see a target up to 800
meters away. However, the hi gh magni fi cati on of the observati on scope
decreases i ts fi el d of vi ew. Moreover, the terrai n wi l l not be i n focus unl ess i t
i s near the object bei ng i nspected. The sni per shoul d use the observati on
scope for the i nspecti on and i denti fi cati on of a speci fi c poi nt onl y, not for
observati on of an area. The M144 i s a vari abl e power (15x to 45x) observati on
scope and a repl acement for the M49. More modern and hi gher-qual i ty
spotti ng scopes are avai l abl e i n l i mi ted quanti ti es. The sni per team shoul d
research the avai l abi l i ty of these i mproved observati on devi ces.
RANGE ESTIMATION
4-212. Range esti mati on i s the process of determi ni ng the di stance between
two poi nts (Appendi x J). The abi l i ty to accuratel y determi ne range i s the key
ski l l needed by the sni per to accompl i sh hi s mi ssi on.
FACTORS AFFECTING ESTIMATION
4-213. Range can be determi ned by measuri ng or by esti mati ng. Bel ow are
three mai n factors that affect the appearance of objects when determi ni ng
range by eye.
FM 3-05.222
4-58
Nature of the Target
4-214. Objects of regul ar outl i ne, such as a house, wi l l appear cl oser than
one of i rregul ar outl i ne, such as a cl ump of trees. A target that contrasts wi th
i ts background wi l l appear to be cl oser than i t actual l y i s. A parti al l y exposed
target wi l l appear more di stant than i t actual l y i s.
Nature of the Terrain
4-215. Observi ng over smooth terrai n, such as sand, water, or snow, causes
the observer to underesti mate di stance targets. Objects wi l l appear nearer
than they real l y are when the vi ewer i s l ooki ng across a depressi on, most of
whi ch i s hi dden from vi ew. They wi l l al so appear nearer when the vi ewer i s
l ooki ng downward from hi gh ground or when the vi ewer i s l ooki ng down on a
strai ght, open road or al ong rai l road tracks.
4-216. As the observers eye fol l ows the contour of the terrai n, he tends to
overesti mate the di stance to targets. Objects wi l l appear more di stant than they
real l y are when the vi ewer i s l ooki ng across a depressi on, al l of whi ch i s vi si bl e.
They al so appear more di stant than they real l y are when the vi ewer i s l ooki ng
from l ow ground toward hi gh ground and when the fi el d of vi si on i s narrowl y
confi ned, such as i n twi sted streets or on forest trai l s.
Light Conditions
4-217. The more cl earl y a target can be seen, the cl oser i t wi l l appear. A
target vi ewed i n ful l sunl i ght appears to be cl oser than the same target
vi ewed at dusk or dawn or through smoke, fog, or rai n. The posi ti on of the
sun i n rel ati on to the target al so affects the apparent range. When the sun i s
behi nd the vi ewer, the target appears cl oser. When the sun appears behi nd
the target, the target i s more di ffi cul t to see and appears farther away.
MILING THE TARGET FOR RANGE
4-218. When rangi ng on a human target, the sni per may use two di fferent
methods. The fi rst method i s to range on the target usi ng the verti cal
crosshai rs and mi l dots. The second method i s to use the hori zontal crosshai rs
and mi l dots.
Vertical Method
4-219. The sni per most often uses thi s method of range fi ndi ng when usi ng
the M3A. He must become very good at esti mati ng the hei ght of the target i n
ei ther meters or feet and i nches. The sni per has the opti on of usi ng a 1-meter
(head to crotch) target frame or usi ng the enti re target (head to toe) as the
target frame. To use the verti cal method, the sni per pl aces the crosshai rs at
ei ther the feet or crotch, and measures to the top of the head of the target.
The mi l val ue i s then read for that target. The sni per must determi ne the
hei ght of the target i f he i s not usi ng the 1-meter target frame. Si nce the
tel escope i s graduated i n meters, the hei ght of the target must be converted
i nto meters. The sni per then cal cul ates the range usi ng the mi l -rel ati on
formul a. The esti mati on of the hei ght of the target may be the most
i mportant factor i n thi s formul a. An error of 3 i nches on a 5-foot 9-i nch target
FM 3-05.222
4-59
that i s actual l y 5 feet 6 i nches resul ts i n a 19-meter error at a readi ng of
4 mi l s.
Normal hei ght of the human = 69 i nches
meters) 440 or (438.5 meters i n target to Range
(4) mi l s i n target of Si ze
25.4 i nches 69
=

NOTE: Thi s exampl e may prove to be of speci fi c use when faci ng an enemy
entrenched i n bunkers or i n dense vegetati on.
Horizontal Method
4-220. The hori zontal method i s based upon a target wi dth of 19 i nches at
the shoul ders. Thi s techni que can be very accurate out to ranges of 350
meters, and i s very effecti ve i n an urban envi ronment. Beyond thi s range i t i s
no l onger effecti ve. The sni per shoul d use thi s method to doubl e-check ranges
deri ved from groi n to head. For exampl e, a range esti mate deri ved from a
groi n to head (1 meter) measurement of 2 mi l s woul d be equal to a
1 mi l shoul der to shoul der measurement (hori zontal = 1/2 verti cal ). A good
rul e of thumb i s that i f the target i s smal l er than 1 1/2 mi l s (322 meters),
i t i s more accurate to use the verti cal method i n combi nati on wi th the
hori zontal method.
4-221. The mi l dots i n the M3A are 3/4 MOA i n di ameter. Therefore, i t i s
i mportant to note where on the dots the bottom or the top of the target fal l s
wi thi n the mi l dot. The mil dots are spaced 1 mil from center to center,
or cross to center of first dot.
4-222. Objects vi ewed from an obl i que angl e may cause the sni per to
overesti mate the range to that object. Sni pers shoul d be aware of thi s effect
and compensate accordi ngl y.
DETERMINING RANGE TECHNIQUES
4-223. A sni per team must accuratel y determi ne di stance, properl y adjust
el evati on on the SWS, and prepare topographi c sketches or range cards. To
meet these needs, team members have to be ski l l ed i n vari ous range
esti mati on techni ques. The team can use any of the fol l owi ng methods to
determi ne di stance between i ts posi ti on and the target.
Sniper Telescope
4-224. The M3A has a mi l dot reti cl e and the mi l -rel ati on formul a i s used for
range determi nati on. Usi ng the tel escope for range esti mati on i s especi al l y
hel pful when establ i shi ng known ranges for a range card or a reference mark.
The sni per ri fl es i nherent stabi l i ty hel ps to i mprove the accuracy of the
measurements. The sni per can determi ne range by usi ng the range feature of
the sni pi ng tel escope and the fol l owi ng:
Personnel. The di stance from the i ndi vi dual s head to hi s wai st i s
normal l y 30 i nches; from the top of hi s head to hi s groi n i s 1 meter
(39.4 i nches). The head to groi n i s the most common measuri ng poi nt
FM 3-05.222
4-60
for the human body. The 1-meter measurement wi l l not vary but an
i nch or two from the 6-foot-6-i nch man to the 5-foot-6-i nch man.
Tanks. The di stance from the ground l i ne to the deck or from the deck
to the turret top of a Sovi et-styl e tank i s approxi matel y 30 i nches.
Vehicles. The di stance from the ground l i ne to the fender above the
wheel i s approxi matel y 30 i nches. The di stance to the roofl i ne i s
3 1/2 to 4 feet.
Trees. The wi dth of the trees i n the vi ci ni ty of the sni per wi l l be a good
i ndi cati on of the wi dth of the trees i n the target area.
Window Frames. The verti cal l ength of a standard frame i s
approxi matel y 60 i nches. Thi s di stance i s 1.5 meters by 2.0 meters
i n Europe.
NOTE: Through the process of i nterpol ati on, the sni per can range on any
object of known si ze. For exampl e, the head of any i ndi vi dual wi l l measure
approxi matel y 12 i nches. The M3A has a mi l -dot reti cl e. On thi s tel escope a
mi l dot equal s 3/4 of an MOA, and the space between mi l dots equal s 1 mi l or
3.44 MOA (round to 3.5 i n the fi el d). The fi gure 3.44 i s the true number of
MOA i n a mi l as one radi an i s equal to 57.295 degrees. Thi s makes 6.283
radi ans i n a ci rcl e or 6283 mi l s i n a ci rcl e. Wi th 21,600 MOA i n a ci rcl e, the
resul t i s 3.44 MOA i n a mi l .
Mil-Relation Formula
4-225. The sni per can al so use the mi l -rel ati on formul a to determi ne ranges.
The M3A ri fl e tel escope has 10 mi l s verti cal and hori zontal measurement
between the heavy dupl ex reti cl e l i nes; the space between each dot represents
1 mi l . Mi l i tary bi nocul ars al so have a mi l scal e i n the l eft ocul ar eyepi ece. By
usi ng the known measured si zes of objects, the sni per can use the mi l -rel ati on
formul a to determi ne the range.
NOTE: The si ze of objects i n meters yi el ds ranges i n meters; the si ze of
objects i n yards yi el ds ranges i n yards. Other rel ati onshi ps must al so be
understood: 1 mi l equal s 3.44 MOA or 3.6 i nches at 100 yards; 1 meter at
1,000 meters or approxi matel y 1 yard at 1,000 yards.
4-226. The sni per uses the fol l owi ng formul a to determi ne the range to
the target:
mi l s i n object of Si ze
1,000 x yards and meters i n object of Si ze
target to Range =
Example 1) Object = 2 meters, Mi l s = 4 mi l s (as measured i n the M3A scope)
target to Range meters 500
4
2,000
4
1,000 2
= = =

Example 2) Object = 2 yards, Mi l s = 5 mi l s (as measured i n the M3A scope)
target to Range yards 400
5
2,000
5
1,000 2
= = =

FM 3-05.222
4-61
Example 3) Object = 69 i nches, Mi l s = 4 mi l s (To convert i nches to meters,
mul ti pl y by 25.4.)
meters 438
4
6 . 1752
4
4 . 25 . 69
= =

NOTE: The di stance to the target i n yards must be converted to meters to
correctl y set the M3As bal l i sti c cam.
4-227. Once the sni per understands the formul a, he must become profi ci ent
at esti mati ng the actual hei ght of the target i n hi s scope. At l onger ranges the
measurements must be accurate to wi thi n 1/10 mi l . Otherwi se, the data wi l l
be more than the al l owabl e bal l i sti c error. The abi l i ty of the sni per team to
accuratel y esti mate the hei ght of the target i s the si ngl e most i mportant
factor i n usi ng thi s formul a.
Mil Relation (Worm Formula)
Sampl e Probl ems:
No. 1: As a member of a sni per team, you and your partner are i n your hi de
si te and are prepari ng a range card. To your front you see a Sovi et-type truck
that you determi ne to be 4 meters l ong. Your team i s equi pped wi th an M24
system. Through your bi nocul ars the truck i s 5 mi l s i n l ength. Determi ne the
range to thi s reference for your system.
Solution: STEP 1. No conversi on needed.
STEP 2. Determi ne the range.
meters 800
mi l s 5
1,000 meters 4
Wi dth =

=
No. 2: You are a member of a sni per team assi gned to cover a certai n area of
ground. You are maki ng a range card and determi ni ng ranges to reference
poi nts i n that area. You see a tank l ocated to your front. Through your
bi nocul ars you fi nd the wi dth of the tank to be 8 mi l s. You determi ne the l ength
of the tank to be 5 meters. Determi ne the correct range for your system.
Solution: STEP 1. No conversi on needed.
STEP 2. Determi ne the range.
meters 625
mi l s 8
1,000 meters 5
Wi dth =

=
Military Binoculars
4-228. The sni per can cal cul ate the range to a target by usi ng the M3, M19,
and M22 bi nocul ars, or any other opti cal devi ce that has verti cal and
hori zontal mi l reti cl es.
4-229. M3 Binoculars. The graduati ons between the numbers on the
hori zontal reference l i ne are i n 10-mi l graduati ons. The hei ght of the verti cal
l i nes al ong the hori zontal reference l i ne i s 2 1/2 mi l s. The graduati on of the
hori zontal reference l i nes on the l eft of the reti cl e i s 5 mi l s (verti cal ) between
the reference l i nes. These l i nes are al so 5 mi l s l ong (hori zontal ). The smal l
hori zontal l i nes l ocated above the hori zontal reference l i ne i n the center of
FM 3-05.222
4-62
the reti cl e are 5 mi l s apart (verti cal ) and are al so 5 mi l s l ong (hori zontal ). The
verti cal scal e on the reti cl e i s not to be used for range fi ndi ng purposes.
4-230. M19 Binoculars. The graduati on between the number l i nes on
the hori zontal and the verti cal l i nes on the reti cl e i s 10 mi l s (Fi gure 4-27).
The total hei ght of the verti cal l i nes on the hori zontal reference l i nes i s 5
mi l s. These l i nes are further graduated 2 1/2 mi l s above the hori zontal l i ne
and 2 1/2 mi l s bel ow the l i ne. The total wi dth of the hori zontal l i nes on the
verti cal reference l i ne i s 5 mi l s. These l i nes are further graduated i nto 2 1/2
mi l s on the l eft si de of the l i ne and 2 1/2 mi l s on the ri ght si de of the verti cal
reference l i ne.
4-231. M22 Binoculars. The graduati on between the numbered l i nes on the
hori zontal and verti cal reference l i nes i s 10 mi l s. There are 5 mi l s between a
numbered graduati on and the 2 1/2-mi l tal l l i ne that fal l s between the
numbered graduati ons. The val ue of the l onger l i nes that i ntersect the
hori zontal and verti cal l i nes on the reti cl e i s 5 mi l s. The val ue of the shorter
l i nes that i ntersect the hori zontal and verti cal reference l i nes on the reti cl e i s
2 1/2 mi l s. These are the l i nes that fal l between the 5-mi l l i nes.
Figure 4-27. The M19 Binocular Reticle Showing the Mil Measurements
of the Stadia Lines
Estimation
4-232. There wi l l be ti mes when the sni per must esti mate the range to the
target. Thi s method requi res no equi pment and can be accompl i shed wi thout
exposi ng the observers posi ti on. There are two methods of esti mati on that
meet these requi rements: the 100-meter uni t-of-measure method and the
appearance-of-objects method.
FM 3-05.222
4-63
4-233. The 100-Meter Unit-of-Measure Method. The sni per must be abl e
to vi sual i ze a di stance of 100 meters on the ground. For ranges up to 500
meters, he determi nes the number of 100-meter i ncrements between the two
poi nts that he wi shes to measure. Beyond 500 meters, the sni per must sel ect
a poi nt hal fway to the target, determi ne the number of 100-meter i ncrements
of the hal fway poi nt, and then doubl e thi s number to fi nd the range to the
target (Fi gure 4-28).
Figure 4-28. The Halfway Point Distance Estimation Process
4-234. Duri ng trai ni ng exerci ses, the sni per must become fami l i ar wi th the
effect that sl opi ng ground has on the appearance of a 100-meter i ncrement.
Ground that sl opes upward gi ves the i l l usi on of a shorter di stance, and the
observers tendency i s to overesti mate a 100-meter i ncrement. Conversel y,
ground that sl opes downward gi ves the i l l usi on of a l onger di stance. I n thi s
case, the sni pers tendency i s to underesti mate.
4-235. Profi ci ency i n the 100-meter uni t-of-measure method requi res
constant practi ce. Throughout the trai ni ng i n thi s techni que, compari sons
shoul d conti nuousl y be made between the range as determi ned by the sni per
and the actual range as determi ned by paci ng or other more accurate means
of measurement. The best trai ni ng techni que i s to requi re the sni per to pace
the range after he has vi sual l y determi ned i t. I n thi s way he di scovers the
actual range for hi msel f, whi ch makes a greater i mpressi on than i f he were
si mpl y tol d the correct range.
4-236. The greatest l i mi tati on of the 100-meter uni t of measure i s that i ts
accuracy i s di rectl y rel ated to how much of the terrai n i s vi si bl e at the greater
ranges. Thi s poi nt i s parti cul arl y true at a range of 500 meters or more when
the sni per can onl y see a porti on of the ground between hi msel f and the
target. I t becomes very di ffi cul t to use the 100-meter uni t-of-measure method
of range determi nati on wi th any degree of accuracy.
4-237. The Appearance-of-Objects Method. The appearance-of-objects
method i s the means of determi ni ng range by the si ze and other
characteri sti c detai l s of the object i n questi on. I t i s a common method of
determi ni ng di stances and used by most peopl e i n thei r everyday l i vi ng. For
FM 3-05.222
4-64
exampl e, a motori st attempti ng to pass another car must judge the di stance
of oncomi ng vehi cl es based on hi s knowl edge of how vehi cl es appear at
vari ous di stances. Of course, i n thi s exampl e, the motori st i s not i nterested i n
preci se di stances, but onl y that he has suffi ci ent road space to safel y pass the
car i n front of hi m. Thi s same techni que can be used by the sni per to
determi ne ranges on the battl efi el d. I f he knows the characteri sti c si ze and
detai l of personnel and equi pment at known ranges, then he can compare
these characteri sti cs to si mi l ar objects at unknown ranges. When the
characteri sti cs match, so does the range.
4-238. To use thi s method wi th any degr ee of accur acy, the sni per must
be fami l i ar wi th the char acter i sti c detai l s of objects as they appear at
var i ous r anges. For exampl e, the sni per shoul d study the appear ance of a
man when he i s standi ng at a r ange of 100 meter s. He fi xes the mans
appear ance fi r ml y i n hi s mi nd, car eful l y noti ng detai l s of si ze and
char acter i sti cs of uni for m and equi pment. Next, he studi es the same man
i n a kneel i ng posi ti on and then i n a pr one posi ti on. By compar i ng the
appear ance of these posi ti ons at known r anges fr om 100 to 500 meter s,
the sni per can establ i sh a ser i es of mental i mages that wi l l hel p hi m
deter mi ne r ange on unfami l i ar ter r ai n. Tr ai ni ng shoul d al so be conducted
i n the appear ance of other fami l i ar objects such as weapons or vehi cl es.
Because the successful use of thi s method depends upon vi si bi l i ty,
anythi ng that l i mi ts the vi si bi l i ty (such as weather , smoke, or dar kness)
wi l l al so l i mi t the effecti veness of thi s method.
Combination of Methods
4-239. Under proper condi ti ons, ei ther the 100-meter uni t-of-measure
method or the appearance-of-objects method i s an effecti ve way of
determi ni ng range. However, proper condi ti ons do not al ways exi st on the
battl efi el d and the sni per wi l l need to use a combi nati on of methods. The
terrai n mi ght l i mi t usi ng the 100-meter uni t-of-measure method and the
vi si bi l i ty coul d l i mi t usi ng the appearance-of-objects method. For exampl e, an
observer may not be abl e to see al l of the terrai n out to the target; however,
he may see enough to get a general i dea of the di stance wi thi n 100 meters. A
sl i ght haze may obscure many of the target detai l s, but the observer shoul d
sti l l be abl e to judge i ts si ze. Thus, by careful l y consi deri ng the approxi mate
ranges as determi ned by both methods, an experi enced observer shoul d
arri ve at a fi gure cl ose to the true range.
Measuring
4-240. The sni per can measure di stance on a map or pace the di stance
between two poi nts. The fol l owi ng paragraphs di scuss each method.
4-241. Map (Paper-Strip Method). The paper-stri p method i s useful when
determi ni ng l onger di stances (1,000 meters pl us). When usi ng thi s method,
the sni per pl aces the edge of a stri p of paper on the map and ensures i t i s
l ong enough to reach between the two poi nts. Then he penci l s i n a ti ck mark
on the paper at the team posi ti on and another at the di stant l ocati on. He
pl aces the paper on the maps bar scal e, l ocated at the bottom center of the
map, and al i gns the l eft ti ck mark wi th the 0 on the scal e. Then he reads to
FM 3-05.222
4-65
the ri ght to the second mark and notes the correspondi ng di stance
represented between the two marks.
4-242. Actual Measurement. The sni per uses thi s method by paci ng the
di stance between two poi nts, pr ovi ded the enemy i s not i n the vi ci ni ty.
Thi s method obvi ousl y has l i mi ted appl i cati ons and can be ver y
hazar dous to the sni per team. I t i s one of the l east desi r abl e methods.
Bracketing Method
4-243. The bracketi ng method i s used when the sni per assumes that the
target i s no l ess than X meters away, but no more than Y meters away.
The sni per then uses the average of the two di stances as the esti mated range.
Sni pers can i ncrease thei r accuracy of eye-range esti mati on by usi ng an
average of both team members esti mate.
Halving Method
4-244. The sni per uses thi s method for di stances beyond 500 meters. He
sel ects a poi nt mi dway to the target, determi nes the number of 100-meter
i ncrements to the hal fway poi nt, and then doubl es the esti mate. Agai n, i t i s
best to average the resul ts of both team members.
Range Card
4-245. Thi s method i s a very accurate means of esti mati ng range. The fact
that the sni per has establ i shed a range card means he has been i n the area
l ong enough to know the target area. He has al ready determi ned ranges to
i ndi cated reference poi nts. The observer wi l l gi ve hi s targets to the sni per by
gi vi ng defl ecti ons and di stances from known reference poi nts i n the target
fi el d of vi ew. The sni per can adjust hi s tel escope for a good medi an di stance
i n the target area and si mpl y adjust fi re from that poi nt. There are
multiple key distances that should be calculated and noted with
references on the range card. The fi rst i s the poi nt bl ank zero of the
weapon. Wi th a 300-meter zero, the poi nt-bl ank zero of the M118 ammuni ti on
i s 375 meters. Targets under thi s range do not need to be corrected for. The
other key di stances are merel y a poi nt of reference agai nst whi ch further
di stance determi nati ons can be judged. These are marked as target reference
poi nts (TRP) and are al so used as reference poi nts for di recti ng the sni per
onto a target.
Speed of Sound
4-246. The sni per can esti mate the approxi mate di stance from the observer
to a sound source (bursti ng shel l , weapon fi ri ng) by ti mi ng the sound. The
speed of sound i n sti l l ai r at 50 degrees F i s about 340 meters per second.
However, wi nd and vari ati ons i n temperature al ter thi s speed somewhat. For
practi cal use, the sni per may assume the speed of sound i s 350 meters per
second under al l condi ti ons. He can ti me the sound ei ther wi th a watch or by
counti ng from the ti me the fl ash appears unti l the sound i s heard by the
observer. The sni per counts one-1,000, two-1,000, and so on, to determi ne
the approxi mate ti me i n seconds. He then mul ti pl i es the ti me i n seconds by
350 to get the approxi mate di stance i n meters to the source of the fi re.
FM 3-05.222
4-66
Measurement by Bullet Impact
4-247. Another undesi rabl e but potenti al l y useful method i s to actual l y fi re a
round at the poi nt i n questi on. Thi s practi ce i s possi bl e i f you know your
target i s comi ng i nto the area at a l ater ti me and you pl an to ambush the
target. However, thi s method i s not tacti cal l y sound and i s al so very
hazardous to the sni per team.
Laser Range Finders
4-248. These can al so be used to determi ne range to a very hi gh degree of
accuracy. When ai mi ng the l aser at a speci fi c target, the sni per shoul d
support i t much the same way as hi s weapon to ensure accuracy. I f the target
i s too smal l , ai mi ng the l aser at a l arger object near the target wi l l suffi ce
that i s, a bui l di ng, vehi cl e, tree, or terrai n feature. The range fi nder must be
used wi th yel l ow fi l ters to keep the l aser eye-safe for the sni per and observer
when observi ng through opti cs, as the AN/GVS 5 i s not eye safe. Thi s cover
l i mi ts the range; however, the l i mi tati ons are wel l wi thi n the range of the
sni per. Rai n, fog, or smoke wi l l severel y l i mi t the use of l aser range fi nders.
Laser detectors and NVDs that are set to the correct wavel ength may al so
i ntercept l aser range fi nders.
Sniper Cheat Book
4-249. The sni per team shoul d keep a cheat book compl ete wi th
measurements. The team fi l l s i n the cheat book duri ng i ts area anal ysi s,
mi ssi on pl anni ng, i sol ati on, and once i n the AO. A tape measure wi l l prove
i nval uabl e. Each cheat book shoul d i ncl ude the fol l owi ng:
Average hei ght of human targets i n AO.
Vehi cl es:
Hei ght of road wheel s.
Vehi cl e di mensi ons.
Length of mai n gun tubes on tanks.
Lengths and si zes of di fferent weapon systems.
Urban envi ronment:
Average si ze of doorways.
Average si ze of wi ndows.
Average wi dth of streets and l anes (average wi dth of a paved road
i n the Uni ted States i s 10 feet).
4-250. As the sni per team devel ops i ts cheat book, al l measurements are
converted i nto constants and computed wi th di fferent mi l readi ngs. These
measurements shoul d al so be i ncorporated i nto the sni pers l ogbook. The
CAUTION
Viewing an eye-safe laser through magnifying
optics increases the lasers intensity to unsafe
levels.
FM 3-05.222
4-67
team shoul d use the worm formul a (paragraph 4-227) when prepari ng the
cheat book.
SELECTION AND PREPARATION OF HIDES
4-251. To effecti vel y accompl i sh i ts mi ssi on or to support combat operati ons,
the sni per team must sel ect a posi ti on cal l ed a sni per hi de or post. Once
constructed, i t wi l l provi de the sni per team wi th a wel l -conceal ed post from
whi ch to observe and fi re wi thout fear of enemy detecti on. Sel ecti ng the
l ocati on of a posi ti on i s one of the most i mportant tasks a sni per team must
accompl i sh duri ng the mi ssi on pl anni ng phase of an operati on. After sel ecti ng
the l ocati on, the team must al so determi ne how i t wi l l move i nto the area and
l ocate and occupy the fi nal posi ti on.
HIDE SELECTION
4-252. Upon recei vi ng a mi ssi on, the sni per team l ocates the target area and
then determi nes the best l ocati on for a tentati ve posi ti on by usi ng one or
more of the fol l owi ng sources of i nformati on:
Topographi c maps.
Aeri al photographs.
Vi sual reconnai ssance before the mi ssi on.
I nformati on gai ned from uni ts operati ng i n the area.
4-253. I n sel ecti ng a sni per hi de, maxi mum consi derati on i s gi ven to the
fundamental s and pri nci pl es of camoufl age, cover, and conceal ment. Once on
the ground, the sni per team ensures the posi ti on provi des an opti mum
bal ance between the fol l owi ng consi derati ons:
Maxi mum fi el ds of fi re and observati on of the target area.
Maxi mum conceal ment from enemy observati on.
Covered routes i nto and out of the posi ti on.
Located no closer than 300 meters from the target area whenever possible.
A natural or man-made obstacle between the position and the target area.
4-254. A sni per team must remember that i f a posi ti on appears i deal , i t may
al so appear that way to the enemy. Therefore, the team shoul d avoi d
choosi ng l ocati ons that are
On a poi nt or crest of promi nent terrai n features.
Cl ose to i sol ated objects.
At bends or ends of roads, trai l s, or streams.
I n popul ated areas, unl ess mi ssi on-essenti al .
4-255. The sniper team must use its imagination and ingenuity in choosing a good
location for the given mission. The team must choose a location that not only allows
the team to be effecti ve but al so must appear to the enemy to be the l east
l i kel y pl ace for a team posi ti on. Exampl es of such posi ti ons are
Under l ogs i n a deadfal l area.
Tunnel s bored from one si de of a knol l to the other.
Swamps.
FM 3-05.222
4-68
Deep shadows.
I nsi de rubbl e pi l es.
HIDE SITE LOCATION
4-256. The sni per team shoul d determi ne the si te l ocati on by the fol l owi ng
factors of area effecti veness:
Mi ssi on.
Di spersi on.
Terrai n patterns.
4-257. Vari ous factors can affect the teams si te l ocati on. The sni per team
shoul d sel ect tentati ve si tes and routes to the objecti ve area by usi ng
Aeri al photographs.
Maps.
Reconnai ssance and after-acti on reports.
I nterrogations of indigenous personnel, prisoners of war, and other sources.
Weather reports.
Area studi es.
4-258. When the team i s sel ecti ng a si te, i t shoul d l ook for
Terrai n patterns (urban, rural , wooded, barren).
Soi l type (to determi ne tool s).
Popul ati on densi ty.
Weather condi ti ons (snow, rai n).
Drai nage.
Types of vegetati on.
Dri nki ng water.
4-259. The sni per team must al so consi der some addi ti onal requi rements
when sel ecti ng the hi de si te. I t shoul d conduct a reconnai ssance of the area
to determi ne
Fi el ds of fi re.
Cover and conceal ment.
Avenues of approach.
I sol ated and conspi cuous patterns.
Terrai n features l yi ng between your posi ti on and the objecti ves.
SNIPER HIDE CHECKLIST
4-260. There are many factors to consi der i n the sel ecti on, constructi on, and
use of a sni per hi de. The sni per team must remai n al ert to the danger of
compromi se and consi der i ts mi ssi on as an overri di ng factor. Fi gure 4-29,
page 4-69, l i sts the gui del i nes that the sni per team shoul d use when sel ecti ng
a si te and constructi ng the sni per hi de.
FM 3-05.222
4-69
Select and construct a sniper hide from which to observe and fire. Because the slightest movement
is the only requirement for detection, construction is usually accomplished at night. Caution must still
be exercised, as the enemy may employ NVDs, and sound travels greater distances at night.
Do not place the sniper hide against a contrasting background or near a prominent terrain feature.
These features are usually under observation or used as registration points.
Consider those areas that are least likely to be occupied by the enemy.
Ensure that the position is located within effective range of the expected targets and that it affords a
clear field of fire.
Construct or empty alternate hides where necessary to effectively cover an area.
Assume that the sniper hide is under enemy observation.
Avoid making sounds.
Avoid unnecessary movement.
Avoid observing over a skyline or the top of cover or concealment that has an even outline or
contrasting background.
Avoid using the binoculars or telescope where light may reflect from lenses.
Observe around a tree from a position near the ground. The snipers should stay in the shadows
when observing from a sniper hide.
Give careful consideration to the route into or out of the hide. A worn path can easily be detected.
The route should be concealed and covered, if possible.
Use resourcefulness and ingenuity to determine the type of hide to be constructed.
When possible, choose a position that has a terrain obstacle (for example, a river, thick brush)
between it and the target and/or known or suspected enemy location.
Figure 4-29. Checklist for Selecting and Constructing a Hide
HIDE SITE OCCUPATION
4-261. Duri ng the mi ssi on pl anni ng phase, the sni per al so sel ects an ORP.
From thi s poi nt, the sni per team reconnoi ters the tentati ve posi ti on to
determi ne the exact l ocati on of i ts fi nal posi ti on. The l ocati on of the ORP
shoul d provi de cover and conceal ment from enemy fi re and observati on, be
l ocated as cl ose to the sel ected area as possi bl e, and have good routes i nto and
out of the sel ected area.
4-262. From the ORP, the team moves forward to a l ocati on that al l ows the
team to vi ew the tentati ve posi ti on area. Once a sui tabl e l ocati on has been
found, the team member moves to the posi ti on. Whi l e conducti ng the
reconnai ssance or movi ng to the posi ti on, the team
Moves sl owl y and del i beratel y, usi ng the sni per l ow crawl .
Avoi ds unnecessary movement of trees, bushes, and grass.
Avoi ds maki ng any noi ses.
Stays i n the shadows, i f there are any.
Stops, l ooks, and l i stens every few feet.
Looks for l ocati ons to hi de spoi l i f a hi de i s to be dug i nto the terrai n.
4-263. When the sni per team arri ves at the fi ri ng posi ti on, i t
Conducts a hasty and detai l ed search of the target area.
Starts constructi on of the fi ri ng posi ti on, i f requi red.
FM 3-05.222
4-70
Organi zes equi pment so that i t i s easi l y accessi bl e.
Establ i shes a system of observi ng, eati ng, resti ng, and usi ng the l atri ne.
HASTY SNIPER HIDE OR FINAL FIRING POSITION
4-264. The sniper team uses a hasty position when it will be in position for a
short time, cannot construct a position due to the proximity of the enemy, or must
immediately assume a position. Due to the limited nature of sniper missions and
the requirement to stalk, the sniper team will most often use a hasty position.
4-265. This position (fast find) provides protection from enemy fire or
observation. Natural cover (ravines, hollows, reverse slopes) and artifi ci al cover
(foxholes, trenches, walls) protect the sniper from flat trajectory fires and enemy
observation. Snipers must form the habit of looking for and taking advantage of
every bit of cover and concealment the terrain offers. They must combine this
habit with proper use of movement techniques to provide adequate protection
from enemy fire and observation.
4-266. Cover and conceal ment i n a hasty posi ti on provi de protecti on from
enemy fi re and observati on. The cover and conceal ment may be arti fi ci al or
natural . Conceal ment may not provi de protecti on from enemy fi re. A sni per
team shoul d not make the mi stake of bel i evi ng they are protected from
enemy fi re merel y because they are conceal ed from enemy eyes.
4-267. There shoul d be no l i mi tati on on i ngenui ty of the sni per team i n
sel ecti ng a hasty sni per hi de. Under certai n ci rcumstances i t may be
necessary to fi re from trees, rooftops, steepl es, l ogs, tunnel s, deep shadows,
bui l di ngs, swamps, woods, and an unl i mi ted vari ety of open areas. The sni per
teams success depends to a l arge degree on i ts knowl edge, understandi ng,
and appl i cati on of the vari ous fi el d techni ques or ski l l s that al l ow them to
move, hi de, observe, and detect the enemy (Tabl e 4-1).
Table 4-1. Hasty Sniper Hide Advantages and Disadvantages
Advantages Disadvantages
Requires no construction. The sniper team uses
what is available for cover and concealment.
Can be occupied in a short time. As soon as a
suitable position is found, the team need only
prepare loopholes by moving small amounts of
vegetation or by simply backing several meters
away from the vegetation that is already there to
conceal the weapons muzzle blast.
Note: Loopholes may be various objects or
constructed by the team, but must provide an
adequate view for firing.

Affords no freedom of movement. Any
movement that is not slow and deliberate may
result in the team being compromised.
Restricts observation of large areas. This type of
position is normally used to observe a specific
target area (intersection, passage, or crossing).
Offers no protection from direct or indirect fires.
The team has only available cover for protection
from direct fires.
Relies heavily on personal camouflage. The
teams only protection against detection is
personal camouflage and the ability to use the
available terrain.
Occupation Time: The team should not remain in this type of position longer than 8 hours; it will only
result in loss of effectiveness. This is due to muscle strain or cramps, which is a result of lack of freedom
of movement combined with eye fatigue.
FM 3-05.222
4-71
EXPEDIENT SNIPER HIDE
4-268. When a sni per team has to remai n i n posi ti on for a l onger ti me than
the hasty posi ti on can provi de, i t shoul d construct an expedi ent posi ti on
(Fi gure 4-30). The expedi ent posi ti on l owers the sni pers si l houette as l ow to
the ground as possi bl e, but i t sti l l al l ows hi m to fi re and observe effecti vel y.
Tabl e 4-2 l i sts characteri sti cs of an expedi ent sni per hi de.
Figure 4-30. Overhead and Side View of the Expedient Sniper Hide Site
Table 4-2. Expedient Sniper Hide Advantages and Disadvantages
Advantages Disadvantages
Requires little construction. This position is
constructed by digging a hole in the ground just
large enough for the team and its equipment.
Soil dug from this position can be placed in
sandbags and used for building firing platforms.
Conceals most of the body and equipment. The
optics, rifles, and heads of the sniper team are
the only items that are above ground level in this
position.
Provides some protection from direct fires due to
its lower silhouette.

Affords little freedom of movement. The team
has more freedom of movement in this position
than in the hasty position. However, teams must
remember that stretching or reaching for a
canteen causes the exposed head to move
unless controlled. Team members can lower the
head below ground level, but this movement
should be done slowly to ensure a target
indicator is not produced.
Allows little protection from indirect fires. This
position does not protect the team from shrapnel
and debris falling into the position.
Exposes the head, weapons, and optics. The
team must rely heavily on the camouflaging of
these exposed items.
Construction Time: 1 to 3 hours (depending on the situation).
Occupation Time: 6 to 12 hours.
FM 3-05.222
4-72
BELLY HIDE
4-269. The belly hide (Figure 4-31) is similar to the expedient position, but it has
overhead cover that not only protects the team from the effects of indirect fires
but also allows more freedom of movement. A belly hide is most useful in mobile
situations or when the sniper does not intend to be in the position for extended
periods of time. This position can be dug out under a tree, a rock, or any available
object that will provide overhead protection and a concealed entrance and exit.
Table 4-3, pages 4-72 and 4-73, lists the belly hide characteristics.
Figure 4-31. Overhead and Side View of the Expedient Belly Hide Site
Table 4-3. Belly Hide Advantages, Disadvantages, and Construction
Advantages Disadvantages
Allows some freedom of movement. The
darkened area inside this position allows the
team to move freely. The team should cover the
entrance/exit hole with a poncho or piece of
canvas so outside light does not silhouette the
team inside the position.
Conceals all but the rifle barrel. All equipment is
inside the position except the rifle barrels, but the
barrels could be inside, depending on the room
available to construct the position.
Provides protection from direct and indirect fires.
The team should try to choose a position that
has an object that will provide good overhead
protection (rock, tracked vehicle, rubble pile, and
so forth), or prepare it in the same manner as
overhead cover for other infantry positions.
Is simple and can be quickly built. This hide can
be used when the sniper is mobile, because
many can be built.
Is uncomfortable.
Cannot be occupied for long periods of time.
The sniper is exposed while firing.
Provides limited protection from the weather or
fire.
Requires extra construction time.
Requires extra materials and tools. Construction
of overhead cover will require saws or axes,
waterproof material, and so forth.
Has limited space. The sniper team will have to
lie in the belly hide without a lot of variation in
body position due to limited space and design of
the position.
FM 3-05.222
4-73
Table 4-3. Belly Hide Advantages, Disadvantages, and Construction (Continued)
Construction
Dig a pit (shallow) for the prone position.
Build an overhead cover using:
Dirt and sod.
A drop cloth.
Woven saplings.
Corrugated metal, shell boxes, scrap metal, doors, chicken wire, or scrap lumber.
Construction Time: 4 to 6 hours.
Occupation Time: 12 to 48 hours.

SEMIPERMANENT SNIPER HIDE
4-270. The sni per uses the semi permanent hi de mostl y i n a defensi ve or
outpost si tuati on (Fi gure 4-32). Constructi on of thi s posi ti on requi res
addi ti onal equi pment and personnel . However, i t wi l l al l ow sni per teams to
remai n there for extended peri ods or be rel i eved i n pl ace by other sni per
teams. Li ke the bel l y hi de, the sni per can construct thi s posi ti on by tunnel i ng
through a knol l or under natural objects al ready i n pl ace. Thi s prepared
sni per hi de shoul d provi de suffi ci ent room for movement wi thout fear of
detecti on, some protecti on from weather and overhead or di rect fi re, and a
covered route to and from the hi de.
Figure 4-32. The Semipermanent Sniper Hide
4-271. A semi permanent hi de can be an enl argement of the standard one- or
two-man fi ghti ng posi ti on wi th overhead cover. The sni per constructs thi s
type of hi de when i n a defensi ve posture, si nce constructi on requi res
consi derabl e ti me. I t woul d be sui tabl e when i ntegrated i nto the peri meter
FM 3-05.222
4-74
defense of a base camp, duri ng stati c warfare, or duri ng a stay-behi nd
i nfi l trati on. I t can be constructed as a standi ng or l yi ng type of hi de.
4-272. The constructi on of l oophol es requi res care and practi ce to ensure
that they afford an adequate vi ew of the requi red fi el ds of fi re. The sni per
shoul d construct the l oophol es so that they are wi de at the back where he i s
and narrow i n the front, but not so narrow that observati on i s restri cted.
Loophol es may be made of ol d coffee cans, ol d boots, or any other rubbi sh,
provi ded that i t i s natural to the surroundi ngs or that i t can be properl y and
cl everl y conceal ed.
4-273. Loophol es may be hol es i n wi ndows, shutters, roofs, wal l s, or fences,
or they may be constructed by the sni per team. Loophol es must bl end
i n wi th the surroundi ng area. Tabl e 4-4 l i sts the semi permanent sni per
hi de characteri sti cs.
Table 4-4. Semipermanent Sniper Hide Advantages and Disadvantages
Advantages Disadvantages
Offers total freedom of movement inside the
position. The team members can move about
freely. They can stand, sit, or even lie down.
Protects against direct and indirect fires. The
sniper team should look for the same items as
mentioned in the belly hide.
Is completely concealed. Loopholes are the only
part of the position that can be detected. They
allow for the smallest exposure possible; yet,
they still allow the sniper and observer to view
the target area. The entrance and exit to the
position must be covered to prevent light from
entering and highlighting the loopholes.
Loopholes that are not in use should be covered
from the inside with a piece of canvas or suitable
material.
Is easily maintained for extended periods. This
position allows the team to operate effectively for
a longer period.
Requires extra personnel and tools to construct.
This position requires extensive work and more
tools. Very seldom can a position like this be
constructed near the enemy, but it should be
constructed during darkness and be completed
before dawn.
Increases risk of detection. Using a position for
several days or having teams relieve each other
in a position always increases the risk of the
position being detected. Snipers should never
continue to fire from the same position.
Construction Time: 4 to 6 hours (4 personnel).
Occupation Time: 48 hours plus (relieved by other teams).
FM 3-05.222
4-75
TREE OR STUMP HIDES
4-274. Nature can provi de these types of hi des but they al so requi re the
sni per to do some heavy constructi on (Fi gure 4-33). Tabl e 4-5 l i sts the tree or
stump hi de characteri sti cs.
Figure 4-33. Tree or Stump Sniper Hide
Table 4-5. Tree or Stump Hide Advantages, Disadvantages, and Construction
Advantages Disadvantages
Can be rapidly occupied.
The sniper team is protected from fire and
shrapnel.
The sniper team has freedom of movement.
Provides comfort.
Takes time to construct.
The sniper team requires pioneer equipment for
construction of the hide (picks, shovels, axes).
Construction
Use trees that have a good, deep root such as oak, chestnut, or hickory. During heavy winds these trees
tend to remain steady better than a pine tree, which has surface roots and sways a bit in a breeze.
Use a large tree that is set back from the woodline. This location may limit the view but will provide better
cover and concealment.

FM 3-05.222
4-76
TYPES OF HASTY SNIPER HIDES
4-275. The sni per can al so use di fferent types of del i berate hi des to i ncrease
hi s chances for mi ssi on success and mai ntai n the sni per trai ni ng objecti ves.
The vari ous posi ti ons are expl ai ned bel ow.
Enlarged Fire Trench Hides
4-276. Thi s hi de i s actual l y an enl arged fi ghti ng posi ti on. Tabl e 4-6 l i sts the
enl arged fi re trench hi de characteri sti cs.
Table 4-6. Enlarged Fire Trench Hide Advantages, Disadvantages, and Construction
Advantages Disadvantages
The sniper team is able to maintain a low
silhouette.
Simple to construct.
Can be occupied for a moderate period of
time with some degree of comfort.
Is not easily entered into or exited from.
The sniper team has no overhead cover when in
firing position.
The sniper team is exposed while firing or
observing.
Construction
Enlarge and repair the sides and the parapet.
Camouflage the hide with a drop cloth.
Shell-Hole Hides
4-277. Thi s sni per hi de i s a crater i mproved for kneel i ng, si tti ng, or
prone fi ri ng posi ti ons (Fi gure 4-34). Tabl e 4-7, page 4-77, l i sts the shel l -hol e
hi de characteri sti cs.
Figure 4-34. The Shell-Hole Sniper Hide
FM 3-05.222
4-77
Table 4-7.Shell-Hole Hide Advantages, Disadvantages, and Construction
Advantages Disadvantages
Requires little digging.

Requires material to secure the sides.
Affords no drainage.
Construction
Dig platforms for either the prone, the kneeling, or the sitting positions.
Reinforce the sides of the craters.
HIDE SITE CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS
4-278. A sni per mi ssi on al ways requi res the team to occupy some type of
posi ti on. These posi ti ons can range from a hasty posi ti on to a more
permanent posi ti on. When choosi ng and constructi ng posi ti ons, the sni per
team must use i ts i magi nati on and i ngenui ty to reduce the ti me and di ffi cul ty
of posi ti on constructi on. The team shoul d al ways pl an to bui l d i ts posi ti on
duri ng l i mi ted vi si bi l i ty.
4-279. Whether a sni per team wi l l be i n a posi ti on for a few mi nutes or a few
days, the basi c consi derati ons i n choosi ng a type of posi ti on remai n the same
(Tabl e 4-8).
Table 4-8. Hide Site Construction Considerations
Location Time
Type of terrain and soil. Digging and boring of
tunnels can be very difficult in hard soil or in fine,
loose sand. The team needs to take advantage
of what the terrain offers (gullies, holes, hollow
tree stumps, and so forth).
Enemy location and capabilities. Enemy patrols
in the area may be close enough to the position
to hear any noises that may accidentally be
made during any construction. The team also
needs to consider the enemys night vision and
detection capabilities.
Amount of time to be occupied. If the sniper
teams mission requires it to be in position for a
long time, the team must consider construction
of a position that provides more survivability.
This allows the team to operate more effectively
for a longer time.
Time needed for construction. The time needed
to build a position must be a consideration,
especially during the mission planning phase.
Personnel and Equipment
Equipment needed for construction. The team must plan the use of any extra equipment needed for
construction (bow saws, picks, axes).
Personnel needed for construction. Coordination must take place if the position requires more
personnel to build it or a security element to secure the area during construction.

FM 3-05.222
4-78
STEPS USED IN THE CONSTRUCTION OF A SNIPER HIDE
4-280. When the sni per team i s en route to the objecti ve area, i t shoul d mark
al l materi al that can be used for constructi ng a hi de. The team shoul d
establ i sh an ORP, reconnoi ter the objecti ve area, sel ect a si te, and mark the
fi el ds of fi re and observati on. After col l ecti ng addi ti onal materi al , the team
returns to the sni per hi de si te under the cover of darkness and begi ns
constructi ng the hi de. Team personnel
Post securi ty.
Remove the topsoi l (observe constructi on di sci pl i ne).
Di g a pi t. Di spose of soi l properl y and rei nforce the si des. Ensure the
pi t has
Loophol es.
A bench rest.
A bed.
A drai nage sump (i f appropri ate).
Construct an overhead cover.
Construct an entrance and exi t by escape routes sel ected.
Camoufl age the hi de.
I nspect the hi de for i mproper conceal ment (conti nuous).
HIDE SITE CONSTRUCTION TECHNIQUES
4-281. The sni per can construct bel l y and semi permanent hi de si tes of stone,
bri ck, wood, or turf. Regardl ess of materi al , he shoul d ensure the fol l owi ng
measures are taken to prevent enemy observati on, provi de adequate
protecti on, and al l ow for suffi ci ent fi el ds of fi re:
Frontal Protection. Regardl ess of materi al , every effort i s made to
bul l etproof the front of the hi de posi ti on. The most readi l y avai l abl e
materi al for frontal protecti on i s the soi l taken from the hi de si te
excavati on. I t can be packed or bagged. Whi l e many exoti c materi al s
can be used, i ncl udi ng Kevl ar vests and armor pl ate, wei ght i s al ways a
consi derati on. Several dozen empty sandbags can be carri ed for the
same wei ght as a Kevl ar vest or a smal l pi ece of armor pl ate.
Pit. Hi de constructi on begi ns wi th the pi t si nce i t protects the sni per
team. Al l excavated di rt i s removed (pl aced i n sandbags, taken away on
a poncho, and so forth) and hi dden (pl owed fi el ds, under a l og, or away
from the hi de si te).
Overhead Cover. I n a semi permanent hi de posi ti on, l ogs shoul d be used
as the base of the roof. The sni per team pl aces a dust cover over the
base (such as a poncho, l ayers of empty sandbags, or canvas), a l ayer
of di rt. The team spreads another l ayer of di rt, and then adds
camoufl age. Due to the vari ous materi al s, the roof i s di ffi cul t to conceal
i f not countersunk.
FM 3-05.222
4-79
Entrance. To prevent detecti on, the sni per team shoul d construct an
entrance door sturdy enough to bear a mans wei ght. The entrance
must be cl osed whi l e the l oophol es are open.
Loopholes. The constructi on of l oophol es requi res care and practi ce to
ensure that they afford adequate fi el ds of fi re. These l oophol es shoul d
have a l arge di ameter (10 to 14 i nches) i n the i nteri or of the posi ti on
and taper down to a smal l er di ameter (4 to 8 i nches) on the outsi de of
the posi ti on. A posi ti on may have more than two sets of l oophol es i f
needed to cover l arge areas. Fol i age or other materi al that bl ends wi th
or i s natural to the surroundi ngs must camoufl age l oophol es. The
l oophol es must be capabl e of bei ng cl osed when the door i s open.
Approaches. I t i s vi tal that the natural appearance of the ground
remai ns unal tered and camoufl age bl ends wi th the surroundi ngs.
Remember, constructi on ti me i s wasted i f the enemy observes a team
enteri ng the hi de; therefore, approaches must be conceal ed whenever
possi bl e. Teams shoul d try to enter the hi de duri ng darkness, keepi ng
movement around i t to a mi ni mum and adheri ng to trai l di sci pl i ne. I n
bui l t-up areas, a secure and qui et approach i s needed. Teams shoul d
avoi d drawi ng attenti on to the mi ssi on and careful l y pl an movement. A
possi bl e pl oy i s to use a house search wi th sni per gear hi dden among
other gear. Sewers may be used for movement, al so.
TOOLS AND MATERIALS NEEDED TO CONSTRUCT A SNIPER HIDE
4-282. The tool s and materi al s needed to bui l d a sni per hi de depend on the
soi l , the terrai n, and the type of hi de to be bui l t. Fi gure 4-35 l i sts vari ous
i tems that the sni per team shoul d consi der duri ng constructi on.
Entrenching tools.
Bayonets.
GP nets.
Ponchos.
Waterproof bags.
Rucksacks.
Shovels.
Axes and hatchets.
Hammers.
Machetes.
Chisels.
Saws (Hacksaws).
Screwdrivers, pliers, garden tools.
Garbage bags.
Wood glue.
Nails.
Chicken wire, newspapers, flour, water.
Figure 4-35. Items Used to Construct the Sniper Hide
WARNING
When moving through sewers, teams must be
alert for booby traps and poisonous gases.

FM 3-05.222
4-80
HIDE SITE ROUTINES
4-283. Al though the constructi on of posi ti ons may di ffer, the routi nes whi l e
i n posi ti on are the same. The sni per shoul d have a stabl e fi ri ng pl atform for
hi s weapon and the observer needs a steady pl atform for the opti cs. When
rotati ng observati on duti es, the sni per weapon shoul d remai n i n pl ace, and
the opti cs are handed from one member to the other. Data books, observati on
l ogs, range cards, and the radi o shoul d be pl aced wi thi n the si te where both
members have easy access to them. The team must arrange a system of
resti ng, eati ng, and maki ng l atri ne cal l s. Al l l atri ne cal l s shoul d be done
duri ng darkness, i f possi bl e. A hol e shoul d be dug to conceal any traces of
l atri ne cal l s.
SNIPER RANGE CARD, OBSERVATION LOG, AND MILITARY SKETCH
4-284. The sni per team uses range cards, observati on l ogs, and mi l i tary
sketches to enabl e i t to rapi dl y engage targets. These i tems al so enabl e the
sni per to mai ntai n a record of hi s empl oyment duri ng an operati on.
RANGE CARD
4-285. The r ange car d (Fi gur e 4-36, page 4-81) r epr esents the tar get ar ea
as seen fr om above wi th annotati ons i ndi cati ng di stances thr oughout the
tar get ar ea. I t pr ovi des the sni per team wi th a qui ck-r ange r efer ence and a
means to r ecor d tar get l ocati ons si nce i t has pr epr i nted r ange r i ngs on i t.
These car ds can be di vi ded i nto sector s by usi ng dashed l i nes (Fi gur e 4-37,
page 4-82). Thi s br eak pr ovi des the team member s wi th a qui ck r efer ence
when l ocati ng tar gets. A fi el d-expedi ent r ange car d can be pr epar ed on any
paper the team has avai l abl e. The sni per team posi ti on and di stances to
pr omi nent objects and ter r ai n featur es ar e dr awn on the car d. Ther e i s not
a set maxi mum r ange on ei ther r ange car d, because the team may al so l abel
any i ndi r ect fi r e tar gets on i ts r ange car d. I nfor mati on contai ned on both
r ange car ds i ncl udes the
Sni pers name and method of obtai ni ng range.
Left and ri ght l i mi ts of engageabl e area.
Major terrai n features, roads, and structures.
Ranges, el evati on, and wi ndage needed at vari ous di stances.
Di stances throughout the area.
Temperature and wi nd. (Cross out previ ous entry whenever
temperature, wi nd di recti on, or wi nd vel oci ty changes.)
Target reference poi nts (azi muth, di stance, and descri pti on).
4-286. Rel ati ve l ocati ons of domi nant objects and terrai n features shoul d be
i ncl uded. Exampl es i ncl ude
Houses.
Bri dges.
FM 3-05.222
4-81
Groves.
Hi l l s.
Crossroads.
Figure 4-36. Sample Range Card
4-287. The sni per team wi l l i ndi cate the range to each object by esti mati ng
or measuri ng. Al l drawi ngs on the range card are from the perspecti ve of the
sni per l ooki ng strai ght down on the observati on area.
4-288. The range card i s a record of the sni pers area of responsi bi l i ty. I ts
proper preparati on and use provi des a qui ck reference to key terrai n features
and targets. I t al so al l ows the sni per team to qui ckl y acqui re new targets that
come i nto thei r area of observati on. The sni per al ways uses the range card
and the observati on l og i n conjuncti on wi th each other.
FM 3-05.222
4-82
Figure 4-37. Range Card Divided Into Sectors
OBSERVATION LOG
4-289. The observati on l og (Fi gure 4-38, page 4-83) i s a wri tten,
chronol ogi cal record of al l acti vi ti es and events that take pl ace i n a sni per
teams area (Appendi x K). The l og starts i mmedi atel y upon i nfi l trati on. I t i s
used wi th mi l i tary sketches and range cards; thi s combi nati on not onl y gi ves
commanders and i ntel l i gence personnel i nformati on about the appearance of
the area, but i t al so provi des an accurate record of the acti vi ty i n the area.
I nformati on i n the observati on l og i ncl udes the
Gri d coordi nates of the sni per teams posi ti on.
Observers name.
Date and ti me of observati on and vi si bi l i ty.
Sheet number and number of total sheets.
Seri es number, ti me, and gri d coordi nates of each event.
Events that have taken pl ace.
Acti on taken.
FM 3-05.222
4-83
Figure 4-38. Sample Observation Log
4-290. The sni per l og wi l l al ways be used i n conjuncti on wi th a mi l i tary
sketch. The sketch hel ps to serve as a pi ctori al reference to the wri tten l og. I f
the sni per team i s rel i eved i n pl ace, a new sni per team can easi l y l ocate
earl i er si ghti ngs usi ng these two documents as references. The observers l og
i s a ready means of recordi ng enemy acti vi ty, and i f properl y mai ntai ned, i t
enabl es the sni per team to report al l i nformati on requi red.
4-291. Sni per observati on l ogs wi l l be fi l l ed out usi ng the key word SALUTE
for enemy acti vi ty and OAKOC for terrai n. When usi ng these key words to fi l l
out the l ogs, the sni per shoul d not use general i ti es; he shoul d be very speci fi c
(for exampl e, gi ve the exact number of troops, the exact l ocati on, the
di spersi on l ocati on).
The key word SALUTE:
S - Si ze.
A - Acti vi ty.
L - Locati on.
U - Uni t/Uni form.
T - Ti me.
E - Equi pment.
FM 3-05.222
4-84
The key word OAKOC:
O - Observati on and fi el ds of fi re.
A - Avenues of approach.
K - Key terrai n.
O - Obstacl es.
C - Cover and conceal ment.
MILITARY SKETCH
4-292. The sni per uses a mi l i tary sketch (Fi gure 4-39) to record i nformati on
about a general area, terrai n features, or man-made structures that are not
shown on a map. These sketches provi de the i ntel l i gence secti ons a detai l ed, on-
the-ground vi ew of an area or object that i s otherwi se unobtai nabl e. These
sketches not onl y l et the vi ewer see the area i n di fferent perspecti ves but al so
provi de detai l such as type of fences, number of tel ephone wi res, present depth
of streams, and other perti nent data. There are two types of mi l i tary sketches:
road or area sketches and fi el d sketches. The sni per shoul d not i ncl ude peopl e
i n ei ther of these sketches.
Figure 4-39. Sample Military Sketch
FM 3-05.222
4-85
Road or Area Sketch
4-293. Thi s sketch i s a panorami c representati on of an area or object drawn
to scal e as seen from the sni per teams perspecti ve. I t shows detai l s about a
speci fi c area or a man-made structure (Fi gure 4-40). I nformati on consi dered
i n a road or area sketch i ncl udes
Gri d coordi nates of sni per teams posi ti on.
Magneti c azi muth through the center of sketch.
Sketch name and number.
Scal e of sketch.
Remarks secti on.
Name and rank.
Date and ti me.
Weather.
Figure 4-40. Sample Road or Area Sketch
Field Sketches
4-294. A fi el d sketch i s a topographi c representati on of an area drawn to
scal e as seen from above. I t provi des the sni per team wi th a method for
descri bi ng l arge areas whi l e showi ng rel i abl e di stance and azi muths between
major features. Thi s type of sketch i s useful i n descri bi ng road systems, fl ow
FM 3-05.222
4-86
of streams and ri vers, or l ocati ons of natural and man-made obstacl es. The
fi el d sketch can al so be used as an overl ay on the range card. I nformati on
contai ned i n a fi el d sketch i ncl udes
Gri d coordi nates of the sni per teams posi ti on.
Left and ri ght l i mi ts wi th azi muths.
Rear reference wi th azi muth and di stance.
Target reference poi nts.
Sketch name and number.
Name and rank.
Date and ti me.
Weather and vi si bi l i ty.
4-295. The fi el d sketch serves to rei nforce the observati on l og. A mi l i tary
sketch i s ei ther panorami c or topographi c.
PANORAMIC SKETCH
4-296. The panorami c sketch i s a pi cture of the terrai n i n el evati on and
perspecti ve as seen from one poi nt of observati on (Fi gure 4-41).
Figure 4-41. Subsketch of Buildings in Figure 4-40
FM 3-05.222
4-87
TOPOGRAPHIC SKETCH
4-297. The topographi c sketch i s si mi l ar to a map or pi ctori al representati on
from an overhead perspecti ve. I t i s general l y l ess desi rabl e than the
panorami c sketch because i t i s di ffi cul t to rel ate thi s type of sketch to the
observers l og. I t i s drawn i n a fashi on si mi l ar to the range card. Fi gure 4-42
represents a topographi c sketch or an i mprovi sed range card.
Figure 4-42. Sample Improvised Range Card
GUIDELINES FOR DRAWING SKETCHES
4-298. As wi th al l drawi ngs, arti sti c ski l l i s an asset, but sati sfactory
sketches can be drawn by anyone wi th practi ce. The sni per shoul d use the
fol l owi ng gui del i nes when drawi ng sketches:
Work from the whole to the part. Fi rst determi ne the boundari es of the
sketch. Then sketch the l arger objects such as hi l l s, mountai ns, or
outl i nes of l arge bui l di ngs. After drawi ng the l arge objects i n the
sketch, start drawi ng the smal l er detai l s.
Use common shapes to show common objects. Do not sketch each
i ndi vi dual tr ee, hedger ow, or wood l i ne exactl y. Use common shapes
to show these types of objects. Do not concentr ate on the fi ne detai l s
unl ess they ar e of tacti cal i mpor tance.
FM 3-05.222
4-88
Draw in perspective; use vanishing points. Try to draw sketches i n
perspecti ve. To do thi s, recogni ze the vani shi ng poi nts of the area to be
sketched. Paral l el l i nes on the ground that are hori zontal vani sh at a
poi nt on the hori zon. Paral l el l i nes on the ground that sl ope downward
away from the observer vani sh at a poi nt bel ow the hori zon. Paral l el
l i nes on the ground that sl ope upward, away from the observer, vani sh
at a poi nt above the hori zon. Paral l el l i nes that recede to the ri ght
vani sh on the ri ght and those that recede to the l eft vani sh on the l eft
(Fi gure 4-43).
Figure 4-43. Sample Sketch Using Vanishing Points
4-299. For the sni per team to thoroughl y and effecti vel y observe i ts area of
responsi bi l i ty, i t must be aware of the sl i ghtest change i n the area. These
otherwi se i nsi gni fi cant changes coul d be an i ndi cator of targets or enemy
acti vi ty that needs to be reported. By constructi ng a panorami c sketch,
the team has a basi s for compari ng smal l changes i n the surroundi ng terrai n.
Updati ng data permi ts the team to better report i ntel l i gence and compl ete
i ts mi ssi on.
GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF SKETCHING
4-300. The sni per i ni ti ates the panorami c sketch onl y after the observers l og
and range card have been i ni ti ated and after the sni per team has settl ed i nto
the AO.
4-301. The sni per studi es the terrai n wi th the naked eye fi rst to get an
overal l i mpressi on of the area. After he obtai ns hi s overal l i mpressi on, he
uses bi nocul ars to further study those areas that attracted hi s attenti on
before the fi rst mark i s made on a sketch pad.
FM 3-05.222
4-89
4-302. Too much detai l i s not desi rabl e unl ess i t i s of tacti cal i mportance. I f
addi ti onal detai l i s requi red on a speci fi c area, the sni per can make
subdrawi ngs to suppl ement the mai n drawi ng.
Principles of Perspective and Proportionality
4-303. Sketches are drawn to perspecti ve whenever possi bl e. To be i n
perspecti ve, the sketcher must remember that the farther away an object i s,
the smal l er i t wi l l appear i n the drawi ng. Verti cal l i nes wi l l remai n verti cal
throughout the drawi ng; however, a seri es of verti cal l i nes (such as tel ephone
pol es or a pi cket fence) wi l l di mi ni sh i n hei ght as they approach the hori zon.
Proporti onal i ty i s representi ng a l arger object as l arger than a smal l er object.
Thi s gi ves depth al ong wi th perspecti ve.
Using Delineation to Portray Objects or Features of the Landscape
4-304. The sketcher forms a hori zontal l i ne wi th the hori zontal pl ane at the
hei ght of hi s eye. Thi s i s known as the eye-l evel l i ne and the i ni ti al control
l i ne. The skyl i ne or the hori zon and crests, roads, and ri vers form other
control l i nes of the sketch. These areas are drawn fi rst to form the
framework wi thi n whi ch the detai l s can be pl aced. The sketcher shoul d
represent features wi th a few, rather than many, l i nes. He shoul d create the
effect of di stance by maki ng l i nes i n the foreground heavy and maki ng
di stance l i nes l i ghter as the di stance i ncreases. He can use a l i ght hatchi ng
to di sti ngui sh wooded areas, but the hatchi ng shoul d fol l ow the natural l i nes
of the object (Fi gure 4-44).
Figure 4-44. Use of Delineation to Portray the Landscape
FM 3-05.222
4-90
Using Conventional Methods to Portray Objects
4-305. I f possi bl e, the sketcher shoul d show the actual shape of al l
promi nent features that may be readi l y sel ected as reference poi nts. These
features may be marked wi th an arrow and wi th a l i ne to a descri pti on;
for exampl e, a promi nent tree wi th a wi thered branch. The sketcher shoul d
al so show
Ri vers and roads as two l i nes that di mi ni sh i n wi dth to the vani shi ng
poi nt as they recede.
Rai l roads i n the foreground as a doubl e l i ne wi th smal l crossl i nes
(whi ch represent ti es). The crossl i nes wi l l di sti ngui sh them from roads.
To portray rai l roads i n the di stance, a si ngl e l i ne wi th verti cal ti cks to
represent the tel egraph pol es i s drawn. When ri vers, roads, and
rai l roads are al l present i n the same sketch, they may have to be
l abel ed to show what they are.
Trees i n outl i ne onl y, unl ess a parti cul ar tree i s to be used as a
reference poi nt. I f a parti cul ar tree i s to be used as a reference poi nt,
the tree must be drawn i n more detai l to show why i t was pi cked.
Woods i n the di stance by outl i ne onl y. I f the woods are i n the
foreground, the tops of i ndi vi dual trees can be drawn.
Churches i n outl i ne onl y, but i t shoul d be noted whether they have a
tower or a spi re.
Towns and vi l l ages as defi ni te r ectangul ar shapes to denote houses.
he al so shows the l ocati ons of tower s, factor y chi mneys, and
pr omi nent bui l di ngs i n the sketch. Agai n, detai l can be added i n
subdr awi ngs or hatchi ngs (Fi gur e 4-45).
Cuts, fi l l s, depressi ons, swamps, and marshes are shown by usi ng the
usual topographi c symbol s.
Figure 4-45. Hatchings That Can Add Depth to Objects
FM 3-05.222
4-91
Using a Legend to Label the Sketch
4-306. The l egend i ncl udes the ti tl e of the sketch, the date-ti me group, and
the sketchers si gnature. I t al so i ncl udes an expl anati on of the topographi c
symbol s used i n the sketch.
KIM GAMES
4-307. The name of the game comes from the book Kim by Rudyard Ki pl i ng.
The story i s about a young I ndi an boy who was trai ned to remember
i ntel l i gence i nformati on duri ng the Bri ti sh occupati on of I ndi a. To assi st
some i n rememberi ng the name of the game, i t has been mi snamedKeep i n
Mi nd (KI M). Sni per operati ons encompass a much l arger scope than hi di ng i n
the woods, spotti ng targets of opportuni ty, and engagi ng them. The sni per
must observe vast areas and accuratel y record any and al l i nformati on.
Because many si tuati ons occur suddenl y and do not offer prol onged
observati on, sni pers must l earn to observe for short peri ods of ti me and
extract the maxi mum amount of i nformati on from any si tuati on.
4-308. KI M games are a seri es of exerci ses that can hel p i ncrease the
sni pers abi l i ti es to both percei ve real i ty and retai n i nformati on. They can be
conducted anywhere, i n very l i ttl e ti me, wi th a l arge return for the trai ners
i nvestment of effort and i magi nati on. Al though the vari ous ti me l i mi ts of
vi ewi ng, wai ti ng, and recordi ng the objects are often not refl ected i n tacti cal
real i ty, KI M games are desi gned to exerci se the mi nd through overl oad
(much the same as wei ght trai ni ng overl oads the muscl es).
4-309. Advancement i n KI M games i s measured by shorteni ng the vi ewi ng
and recordi ng ti mes and l engtheni ng the wai ti ng ti me. Greater resul ts can be
real i zed by gradually addi ng addi ti onal el ements to i ncrease confusi on and
uncertai nty. I n the sni pers trade, the percepti on of real i ty often means
penetrati ng the enemys decepti on measures. These measures may i ncl ude,
but are not l i mi ted to
Mi sdi recti on.
Di sgui se.
Exchange.
4-310. There i s a marked si mi l ari ty between the above l i st and the pri nci pl es
of stage magi c. Just as knowi ng how a magi ci an performs a tri ck takes the
magi c from i t, knowi ng how one i s bei ng decei ved negates the decepti on.
THE BASIC GAME
4-311. The i nstructor wi l l requi re a tabl e, a cover, and an assortment of
objects. He sel ects ten objects and randoml y pl aces them on the tabl e. He
shoul d not pl ace the objects i n orderl y rows, si nce studi es have shown that
objects pl aced i n rows make memori zati on easi er. He then covers the objects.
The i nstructor bri efs the students on the fol l owi ng rul es before each i terati on:
No tal ki ng i s al l owed.
Objects may not be touched.
Students wi l l not wri te unti l tol d to do so.
FM 3-05.222
4-92
4-312. The students gather around the tabl e. The i nstructor removes the
cover, and the ti me for vi ewi ng begi ns. When the ti me i s up, he repl aces the
cover, and students return to thei r seats. After a desi gnated i nterval , the
students begi n to wri te thei r observati ons wi thi n a desi gnated ti me l i mi t. To
ai d i n retai ni ng and recordi ng thei r observati ons, the fol l owi ng standardi zed
categori es are used throughout:
Si ze.
Shape
Col or.
Condi ti on.
What the object appears to be.
4-313. I t must be stressed that the above categori es are not i ntended for use
i n a tacti cal setti ng.
THE SAVELLI SHUFFLE
4-314. A vari ati on of the KI M game that trai ns the eyes to l ook faster and
coordi nates hand-to-eye movement i s the Savel l i Shuffl e. Two i ndi vi dual s
face each other approxi matel y 5 meters apart. The fi rst man has a bag
contai ni ng a number of yel l ow rubber bal l s and a smal l er number of red
rubber bal l s. The second man has an empty bag. The fi rst man reaches i nto
hi s bag and pi cks out a bal l , conceal i ng i t from the second man. The fi rst man
tosses the bal l to the second man. Speed wi l l depend on l evel of experi ence.
4-315. The second man has a qui ck deci si on to makecatch yel l ow bal l s
wi th the l eft hand and red bal l s wi th the ri ght hand. The second man then
pl aces the caught bal l s i nto hi s bag.
4-316. Thi s process i s repeated unti l the fi rst mans bag i s empti ed. Posi ti ons
of the fi rst man and the second man are exchanged. Advancement i n thi s
exerci se i s measured by the speed at whi ch the bal l s are thrown and the
di stance between men.
INTEREST AND ATTENTION
4-317. When l earni ng to observe, team members must make a di sti ncti on
between i nterest and attenti on. I nterest i s a sense of bei ng i nvol ved i n some
process, actual or potenti al . Attenti on i s a si mpl e response to a sti mul us, such
as a l oud noi se. Attenti on wi thout i nterest cannot be mai ntai ned for very
l ong. Duri ng l ong peri ods of uneventful observati on, attenti on must be
mai ntai ned through i nterest. Decepti on at the i ndi vi dual l evel can be thought
of as mani pul ati on of i nterest.

5-1
Chapter 5
Employment
SF sni per empl oyment i s compl ex. When empl oyed i ntel l i gentl y,
ski l l ful l y, and wi th ori gi nal i ty, the SF sni per wi l l provi de a payoff far
greater than woul d be expected from the assets used. For thi s to happen,
the pl anner must have more than a basi c knowl edge of the SWS. He must
understand the capabi l i ti es and l i mi tati ons of the sni per. However,
sni pi ng i s an i ndi vi dual tal ent and ski l l that vari es wi th each sni per. Thi s
trai t compounds the pl anners chal l enge, but he can mi ni mi ze these
vari abl es wi th careful pl anni ng. The SF sni per, when properl y trai ned
and empl oyed, can be one of the SO forces most versati l e weapons
systems. See Appendi x L for some speci fi c tri cks of the trade that a
sni per must master to mai ntai n empl oyment profi ci ency.
METHODS
5-1. The sni per pl anner must appl y methods of i nterdi cti on i n rel ati on to the
necessary target and the desi red effects agai nst i t. The empl oyment of SF
sni pers general l y fal l s i nto the fol l owi ng four categori es.
SURVEILLANCE AND RECONNAISSANCE
5-2. Sni pi ng, by nature of i ts executi on (steal thful movement, i nfi l trati on,
use of l ong-range opti cs, and l i mi ted-vi si bi l i ty operati ons), i s cl osel y rel ated to
reconnai ssance and survei l l ance. The techni ques a sni per uses to hunt a
target are si mi l ar to those the scout uses to conduct survei l l anceonl y the
end resul ts are di fferent. Al so, human i ntel l i gence (HUMI NT) col l ecti on i s a
secondary functi on to sni pi ng. Operati onal pl anners shoul d refrai n from
empl oyi ng sni pers i n sol el y HUMI NT rol es but shoul d take advantage of the
HUMI NT functi on when possi bl e. Combi ni ng both functi ons woul d be
anal ogous to usi ng a l ong-range guardthe sni per provi des needed
i nformati on and can i ntercede i f necessary.
POINT INTERDICTION
5-3. The sni pers goal i s to i nterdi ct targets for the purpose of i mpedi ng,
destroyi ng, or preventi ng enemy i nfl uence i n a parti cul ar area. A poi nt
i nterdi cti on i s essenti al l y hunti ng a speci fi c target. The SF sni per can
i nterdi ct both personnel and materi al poi nt targets i n support of SO mi ssi ons.
Such mi ssi ons tend to be compl ex and may requi re di ffi cul t i nfi l trati on,
preci se navi gati on to the target, evasi on of enemy forces, the broachi ng of
sophi sti cated securi ty systems, and external mi ssi on support systems (safe
houses, speci al i ntel l i gence). Normal l y, the more compl ex the target or the
more protected i t i s, the greater the degree of sophi sti cati on requi red to
defeat i t. For i nstance, a protected personnel target may requi re detai l ed
FM 3-05.222
5-2
i ntel l i gence and a hi ghl y ski l l ed sni per for successful i nterdi cti on. Poi nt
i nterdi cti on al so i ncl udes fi ri ng si tuati ons l i ke those encountered i n
counterterrori st si tuati ons.
LONG-RANGE HARASSMENT
5-4. Long-range harassment i s not i ntended to be deci si ve; creati ng
psychol ogi cal fear i n the enemy and restri cti ng hi s freedom of acti on are the
sni pers pri mary goal s. The sni per has the greatest l ati tude of empl oyment i n
harassment mi ssi ons. He can often engage opportuni ty targets at hi s
di screti on but al ways wi thi n the constrai nts of the mi ssi on. Thi s method may
i ncl ude harassi ng speci fi c ki nds of targets to di srupt key functi ons such as
command and control (C2) procedures. I n some si tuati ons, the sni per can
afford to engage targets at extreme ranges and ri sk nonfatal or mi ssed shots,
whi ch maxi mi zes harassment by i nterdi cti ng more targets. Sni pers normal l y
conduct harassment at extended ranges to take advantage of thei r abi l i ty to
engage targets at di stances beyond the enemys smal l -arms fi re. Thi s practi ce
normal l y means they wi l l not engage targets cl oser than 400 meters100
meters beyond the common effecti ve-fi re range of conventi onal smal l arms.
The average range for harassi ng fi re i s 600 meters.
SECURITY OPERATIONS
5-5. Sni pers can provi de l ong-range securi ty to deny an enemy freedom of
acti on i n a parti cul ar area. The sni per securi ty mi ssi on can take the form of a
seri es of mutual l y supporti ng sni per outposts or cordons. An exampl e of
securi ty operati ons where sni pers proved i nval uabl e was duri ng the USMC
operati ons i n Bei rut, Lebanon. The Mari ne sni pers were i nterwoven wi th
tradi ti onal defenses and proved to be effecti ve i n l ong-range protecti on of
l ocal U.S. faci l i ti es and i nterests. Securi ty and cordon mi ssi ons normal l y
entai l stati c, defensel i ke operati ons. However, wi th the austere fi repower of
sni per teams and thei r i nabi l i ty to maneuver i n defensi ve warfare, they are
vul nerabl e to becomi ng deci si vel y engaged. Therefore, securi ty operati ons are
best i ntegrated i nto conventi onal securi ty and reacti on forces to hel p sni pers
i ncrease thei r defensi ve capabi l i ty. Wi thout such support, sni pers can easi l y
be suppressed and maneuvered upon wi th fi re and maneuver tacti cs.
PLANNING
5-6. When empl oyi ng sni pers, the operati onal pl anner must consi der many
factors. Tacti cal pl anni ng consi derati ons of the sni per i ncl ude hi de sel ecti on,
decepti on pl ans, and movement techni ques. However, the pl anner must
consi der sni per empl oyment from an even hi gher l evel of operati onal
perspecti ve. He must real i ze that sni pers are a uni que weapon system and
possess enti rel y di fferent attri butes from conventi onal forces, among whi ch
(the one most frequentl y mi sunderstood) i s the sni pers fi repower. Unl i ke
conventi onal smal l -arms fi re that emphasi zes vol ume, the sni pers fi repower
emphasi zes preci si on. Sni per fi re i s most effecti ve when combi ned wi th a
mi nd that can expl oi t l ong-range preci si on. A two-man sni per team can
del i ver onl y l i mi ted vol umes of fi re, and no matter how accurate, the vol ume
sel dom equal s that of even the most austere mi l i tary uni ts. I f empl oyed

FM 3-05.222
5-3
i ncorrectl y, the sni per easi l y becomes another sol di er on the battl efi el d
except that he i s handi capped wi th a sl ow-fi ri ng weapon. The sni pers uni que
empl oyment consi derati ons shoul d be gui ded by the fol l owi ng factors.
STANDOFF
5-7. The pl anner shoul d base empl oyment around the sni pers abi l i ty to
engage targets at extended ranges. The maxi mum effecti ve range wi l l vary
wi th each sni per. However, pl anners can establ i sh nomi nal engagement
ranges based on the sni pers abi l i ty to group hi s shots i nto a speci fi ed area or
shot group. Thi s measurement can, i n turn, be appl i ed to speci fi c targets. The
sni per shoul d be abl e to keep hi s fi re wi thi n 2 MOA shot groups under
si mul ated combat condi ti ons.
5-8. The appl i cati on of group si ze i s i mportant for determi ni ng maxi mum
standoff i n rel ati on to target si ze. For pl anni ng, SF sni pers shoul d be
expected to provi de i nstant i ncapaci tati on (nonrefl exi ve i mpact) fi rst-round
shots on personnel to 200 meters; personnel i nterdi cti on wi th 90-percent
probabi l i ty to 600 meters on stati onary targets; and 50-percent probabi l i ty to
800 meters. Engagement of more compl i cated targets, such as those movi ng
or i n adverse envi ronmental condi ti ons, depends on the i ndi vi dual sni pers
ski l l and hi s weapons capabi l i ty. The sni per shoul d be abl e to hi t 100 percent
of assi gned movi ng targets at 200 meters and 90 percent at 300 meters. The
sni per shoul d al so be abl e to hi t 100 percent of short, 3-second, exposure
targets at 200 meters and 90 percent at 300 meters. Sni per empl oyment
pl anni ng shoul d al so consi der the probabi l i ty of error agai nst the ri sks
i ncurred i f the shot mi sses. Such anal ysi s wi l l hel p determi ne the mi ni mum
standoff range for a rel i abl e chance of a hi t on the target.
DECEPTION
5-9. The sni pers most cri ti cal tool s are hi s decepti ve tal ents. To pl anners,
decepti on i s al so i mportant for operati onal needs. The SF sni per may use a
weapon from another country to dupl i cate usi ng that weapons characteri sti c
si gnature (bal l i sti c characteri sti cs, cartri dge case, bul l ets) for cover. He must
consi der both operati onal and tacti cal decepti on methods when conducti ng
each mi ssi on.
Operational
5-10. Pl anners may center operati onal decepti on on i nfi l trati ng the target
area usi ng a cl andesti ne (conceal ed) sni per weapon. Operati onal decepti on
may al so requi re pl ausi bl e deni abi l i ty of the operati on and l ead the enemy to
bel i eve the target damage was the resul t of normal fai l ure, acci dent, or some
other form of sabotage. Wi th such i nterdi cti on requi rements, the sni per can
use speci al weapons and muni ti ons and ai m for vul nerabl e poi nts to
purposel y obtai n such resul ts. (Such targets i ncl ude those that tend to burn,
detonate, or sel f-destruct when shot.) However, thi s ki nd of decepti on i s not
possi bl e wi th many targets and i s especi al l y di ffi cul t to conceal i n personnel
i nterdi cti on. Decepti on al so means a sni per can sel dom fi re more than twi ce
from any l ocati on as the sound of shots (even suppressed) i s i ncreasi ngl y
easi er to l ocate wi th repeti ti on. (Thi s concept di ffers greatl y from many medi a
and war stori es, where the sni per engages hi s enemy on a protracted basi s
FM 3-05.222
5-4
from the same l ocati onfi ri ng shot after shot wi th apparent i mpuni ty.)
I n real i ty, sni pers l ocked i n a deci si ve dual wi th enemy forces and fi ri ng
defensi vel y wi l l normal l y l ose as sni pi ng sel dom succeeds i n such si tuati ons.
Pl anners shoul d refrai n from empl oyi ng sni pers i n mi ssi ons that wi l l not
al l ow decepti on or conceal ment after fi ri ng.
Tactical
5-11. The sni pers use of tacti cal decepti on i s often hi s onl y real securi ty.
Empl oyment pl anners must consi der securi ty from operati onal aspects of the
mi ssi on when usi ng sni pers. These i ncl ude i nfi l trati on means,
communi cati ons procedures, and methods of C2. These procedures are
i mportant because the sni per must remai n covert before i nterdi cti on to
ensure success. Normal l y, once the sni per fi res, he i s no l onger covert and
must rel y on other pl ans to faci l i tate escape. Many envi ronments may permi t
sni per empl oyment, but few al l ow pl ausi bl e deni al for the sponsor or
operati on after i nterdi cti on. I n other words, such covert operati ons may be
easy to perform, but the ri sk of compromi se, no matter how smal l , may
overshadow the mi ssi on. Mi ssi ons to col l ect i nformati on concerni ng another
countrys hosti l e i ntenti ons may themsel ves provoke seri ous repercussi ons i f
di scovered. Moreover, usi ng sni pers wi l l assuredl y i ndi cate an al ternati ve
moti ve to actual l y i nterdi cti ng a targetwhi ch coul d compromi se the mi ssi on
even more.
TIME
5-12. The sni pers mi ssi on normal l y requi res more ti me than conventi onal
operati ons. Because the sni per normal l y moves on foot wi th steal th, hi s onl y
defense i s that of remai ni ng unseen. I f the sni per does not have enough ti me
to execute the mi ssi on, he may hurry and unnecessari l y compromi se the
mi ssi on or fai l to reach the target.
TEAM EMPLOYMENT
5-13. Teams provi de l i mi ted securi ty for sel f-protecti on and al l ow near-
conti nuous operati ons, yet are smal l enough to al l ow conceal ment for executi on.
I n practi ce, one sni per fi res whi l e the other observes. The sni per-observer
i denti fi es and sel ects targets, adjusts the sni per-fi rer to envi ronmental factors,
provi des securi ty, and hel ps correct mi ssed shots. However, the greatest
advantage i s the sni per-observers detachment from the fi ri ng process, l eavi ng
the sni per-fi rer to concentrate on the act of fi ri ng. I n other words, fi ri ng does
not compl i cate the sni per-observers deci si on processa task requi ri ng total
concentrati on. Mi ssi on needs may al so requi re sni pers to be part of a l arger
force or i n mul ti pl e sni per teams to engage the same target. Both techni ques of
empl oyment can enhance the sni pers effect; however, the basi c sni per team
shoul d al ways be retai ned. Sni pers wi l l never be empl oyed i n el ements smal l er
than a two-man team, l arger el ements of three or four men may be requi red
dependi ng upon mi ssi on, durati on, vi si bi l i ty expected i n the target area, and
si ze of target area.
TERRAIN
5-14. Terrai n features are extremel y i mportant to the sni pers mi ssi on.
Some areas, such as those that are densel y wooded, ti ghtl y compartmented,
FM 3-05.222
5-5
or heavi l y vegetated, are not sui tabl e for sni per empl oyment because they
reduce the sni pers abi l i ty to empl oy the ful l standoff capabi l i ty of hi s
weapons system. The threat can qui ckl y suppress sni pers that engage targets
i nsi de thei r mi ni mum standoff envel ope (usual l y 400 meters). Moreover,
restri cti ve terrai n offers the threat cover and conceal ment that can mask hi s
attack agai nst the sni per. The sni per must al ways consi der both maxi mum
and mi ni mum engagement ranges; he must never get so cl ose to the target as
to compromi se the mi ssi on.
INNOVATION
5-15. A sni pers most i mportant attri bute i s hi s abi l i ty to i mprovi se.
The operati onal pl anner must al so be i nnovati ve i n the pl anni ng process.
The sni per i s a weapon of opportuni ty, not one to be used as a matter of
course. Pl anners must acti vel y seek mi ssi ons and opportuni ti es to appl y the
sni pers uni que attri butes of l ong-range preci si on ri fl e fi re and conceal ment.
Often the sni pers greatest handi cap i s the pl anners i nabi l i ty to ful l y use
hi s potenti al because of the pl anners l ack of fami l i ari ty wi th the sni pers true
rol e and capabi l i ty. Pl anners shoul d i ncl ude the sni per team i n the pl anni ng
process. Mul ti pl e sni per teams can often suggest a better sol uti on when
pl anni ng from the bottom up. Staff offi cers wi th l i ttl e practi cal sni per
experi ence or l acki ng i nnovati ve thought wi l l never be abl e to ful l y take
advantage of the sni pers capabi l i ti es.
ORGANIZATION
5-16. Organi zati onal groupi ng of sni pers above the sni per-team l evel
normal l y occurs through expedi ent pool i ng of sni per pai rs i nto l arger
organi zati ons. Such central i zed groupi ng of sni per assets can prove benefi ci al
to thei r empl oyment for speci fi c mi ssi ons. I n al l cases, the sni per speci al i st
wi thi n the uni t shoul d manage control of the sni pers. Regardl ess of any
provi si onal or temporary sni per groupi ng, sni per teams shoul d not be spl i t.
They functi on best i n the pai rs i n whi ch they have trai ned, wi th al l members
bei ng ful l y qual i fi ed sni pers.
5-17. The l evel at whi ch sni pi ng i s organi zed and managed di rectl y
i nfl uences the abi l i ty of sni pi ng to provi de di rect or i ndi rect support to
fri endl y operati ons. Central i zed organi zati on and management of sni pi ng
provi des a great degree of fl exi bi l i ty regardi ng depl oyment. Thi s fl exi bi l i ty
permi ts sni pers to be depl oyed to areas or l ocati ons where they wi l l have the
greatest i nfl uence on the enemy and provi de the maxi mum support to
fri endl y operati ons.
5-18. The or gani zati on of sni per teams wi l l magni fy thei r effecti veness
agai nst the enemy. Sni pi ng, l i ke any other suppor ti ng ar m, i s an
i ndi vi dual speci al ty that r equi r es i ndependent acti on to achi eve i ts
gr eatest potenti al effect on the enemy. Requi r i ng speci al or gani zati on,
sni per s may be or gani zed i nto teams, squads, secti ons, and pl atoons.
SNIPER TEAM
5-19. The base el ement of any sni per uni t i s that the team consi sts of two
equal l y trai ned sni pers and i s assi gned to the company. The company i s the
FM 3-05.222
5-6
l owest l evel at whi ch sni pi ng can be central i zed and sti l l mai ntai n
operati onal effecti veness. Sni per teams shoul d not be attached to the tacti cal
subuni ts of the company. However, a subuni t, squad or pl atoon, may be
attached to the sni per team as securi ty or cover for a stay-behi nd type
mi ssi on. When organi zed i nto a team, sni pers are abl e to
Provi de mutual securi ty.
Di mi ni sh stress.
Lengthen thei r durati on of empl oyment.
Ai d i n the engagement of targets more rapi dl y.
SNIPER SQUAD
5-20. A sni per squad i s composed of three to four sni per teams and i s l ocated
at battal i on l evel . The organi zati on of the sni per squad i s as fol l ows:
Squad l eader.
Assi stant squad l eader.
Three seni or sni pers.
Three juni or sni pers.
The sni per pai rs i ncl ude a seni or sni per and a juni or sni per.
5-21. The mi ssi on of the sni per squad i s to support the operati ons of the
battal i on. The squad may be broken and the separate teams attached to any
company i n the battal i on.
SNIPER SECTION
5-22. The sni per secti ons mi ssi on i s to di rectl y or i ndi rectl y support the
combat operati ons of bri gade or regi ment subordi nate uni ts. I n di rect
support, sni per teams are attached to company or battal i on headquarters
el ements as needed, and empl oyment consi derati ons are i denti cal to those of
company sni per teams. I ndi rect support gi ves the sni per teams assi gned
sectors of responsi bi l i ty as part of the battal i on fi re pl an. The sni per secti on i s
attached to the bri gade regi ment headquarters S-2 or S-3, and the secti on
commander acts as the bri gade sni per coordi nator. The sni per secti on consi sts
of a command element (secti on commander, assi stant secti on l eader), a
support element (armorer, radi o operator), and 8 to 10 operational two-
man sniper teams (per teamseni or sni per, juni or sni per).
SNIPER PLATOON
5-23. The mi ssi on of a sni per pl atoon i s to support di vi si on combat and
i ntel l i gence operati ons i ndependentl y or by attachment to di vi si on subuni ts.
When attached, sni per squads shoul d remai n i ntact and shoul d be attached
no l ower than battal i on l evel . The sni per pl atoon i s composed of a pl atoon
l eader, a pl atoon sergeant, a radi otel ephone operator or dri ver, an armorer,
and three sni per squads consi sti ng of a squad l eader and fi ve two-man sni per
teams. The sni per pl atoon fal l s under di rect operati onal control of the
di vi si on i ntel l i gence offi cer or i ndi rect control through l i ai son wi th the sni per
pl atoon l eader. Sni per pl atoon operati ons may i ncl ude deep penetrati on of the
enemy rear areas, stay-behi nd operati ons, and rear-area protecti on.
FM 3-05.222
5-7
COMMAND AND CONTROL
5-24. C2 of sni pers i s accompl i shed usi ng i ndi rect and di rect control
procedures. These procedures compl ement the sni pers sel f-di sci pl i ne i n
executi ng hi s assi gned mi ssi on. The sni per team wi l l often operate i n
si tuati ons where di rect control methods wi l l not be possi bl e. Therefore, the
sni per must execute hi s mi ssi on (wi thi n the parameters of the commanders
i ntent) on personal i ni ti ati ve and determi nati on. Thi s reacti on i s a major
reason (i n the sni per-sel ecti on process) why personnel wi th moti vati on and
sel f-determi nati on are requi red as sni pers. Wi thout these personal trai ts, the
sni pers decentral i zed executi on al l ows total di sregard for the mi ssi on and i ts
compl eti on. I n other words, he can go out to perform a mi ssi on and merel y
stay out of si ght unti l ti me to return.
INDIRECT CONTROL OF SNIPERS
5-25. Commanders can accompl i sh i ndi rect control of sni pers through a
vari ety of methods, the si mpl est bei ng rul es of engagement (ROE) and fi re
control measures. Even wi th stri ct di rect control (voi ce radi o, wi re) of sni per
teams, commanders shoul d establ i sh ROE and fi re control to maxi mi ze
fl exi bi l i ty and prevent unnecessary engagements. The ROE wi l l normal l y
desi gnate combatant forces and si tuati ons that wi l l al l ow the sni per to
engage the enemy.
5-26. One si gni fi cant probl em wi th contemporary ROE i s the restri cti ve
measures used i n peaceti me operati ons. Often, such ROE wi l l speci fy enemy
personnel as onl y those presenti ng a di rect threat to fri endl y forces or
requi ri ng verbal warni ng before engagement. The paradox i s that a sni pers
modus operandi i s to engage targets that are not a di rect threat to hi m
(outsi de smal l -arms effecti ve fi re range) at the moment, but whi ch l ater may
be. I t i s extremel y di ffi cul t for the sni per to stay wi thi n ROE because once the
enemy gets wi thi n hi s mi ni mum standoff, the confl i ct can become one of
cl ose-quarters battl e and a 12-pound, scope-si ghted sni per ri fl e i s no match
for an AK47 or M16 at cl ose quartersdespi te the fact that i t may be a
semi automati c ri fl e. Therefore, ROE for the sni per must provi de for hi s safety
by addi ng securi ty forces or by removi ng hi m from the operati on.
5-27. Fi re control measures are just as i mportant for the sni per as they are
for i ndi rect-fi re weapons and ai rcraft. As wi th any l ong-range weapons
system, posi ti ve target i denti fi cati on i s di ffi cul t at extended rangeseven
wi th the advanced opti cs the sni per wi l l carry. Establ i shment of no-fi re zones
or ti mes, fi re coordi nati on l i nes, and free-fi re zones or ti mes wi l l hel p i n
sni per C2

by establ i shi ng gui del i nes for when and where he can fi re. I f
posi ti ve target i denti fi cati on i s requi red, then appropri ate securi ty measures
are requi red to prevent deci si ve engagement to the sni per.
DIRECT CONTROL OF SNIPERS
5-28. Commanders can mai ntai n di rect control of SF sni pers by usi ng
techni cal and nontechni cal systems, i ncl udi ng radi o and wi re
communi cati ons. I n some ci rcumstances, di rect control means may i ncl ude
commerci al tel ephones or other nontradi ti onal tacti cal forms of
communi cati ons. The mi ssi on and the operati onal envi ronment wi l l
determi ne the exact methods of control .
FM 3-05.222
5-8
5-29. Nontechni cal control of sni pers i nvol ves usi ng prearranged methods
i ncl udi ng rendezvous, message pi ckups and drops, and other cl andesti ne
methods of secure communi cati ons. I n deni ed areas, or those wi th el ectroni c
i ntercepti on capabi l i ti es, these methods may be the onl y secure techni ques
for communi cati ng wi th the sni per teams. These systems, al though often
qui te secure, tend to be sl ow, and executi on i s compl ex.
5-30. Sni pers can al so use many forms of techni cal communi cati ons systems
such as radi o and wi re. Both radi o and wi re offer near-i nstant message traffi c
and faci l i tate C2 wi th two-way communi cati ons. Sni pers most often use
radi os as thei r method of communi cati ons because they are responsi ve and
provi de real -ti me control and reporti ng capabi l i ti es. Al so, radi o (voi ce, data
burst, or satel l i tes) provi des the mobi l i ty that sni pers requi re for thei r
mobi l e-empl oyment methodol ogy. The major advantage to radi o i s i ts abi l i ty
to transmi t mi ssi on changes, updates, and i ntel l i gence i n a ti mel y manner.
However, when properl y arrayed, enemy di recti on-fi ndi ng assets can
determi ne the l ocati on of even the most focused and di recti onal
transmi ssi ons. To avoi d detecti on, SO must use speci al i zed communi cati ons
techni ques and procedures. Even then, the depl oyed teams wi l l sti l l have the
probl em of transmi tti ng from thei r l ocati on to confi rm messages or send data.
5-31. The major drawback to radi o communi cati ons i s the transmi tters
el ectroni c si gnature. I n the sni pers operati onal area, enemy detecti on of any
el ectroni c si gnature can be just as damagi ng as recepti on of a message. Once
the enemy i s aware of the sni pers presence (through spuri ous transmi ssi ons),
i t becomes an academi c probl em to hunt hi m down. Even wi th successful
evasi on from threats (for exampl e, scent- and vi sual -tracki ng dogs), the
sni per team wi l l be preoccupi ed wi th evasi on and escape (E&E) i nstead of the
target. Of course, thi s act can al so be an objecti veto di vert enemy i nternal
securi ty forces to a rear-area sni per threat.
5-32. Under al l condi ti ons, the sni per team must have a method for
i mmedi ate recal l . Thi s method al l ows for i mmedi ate reacti on forces to be
avai l abl e for the sni per. Thi s factor i s i mperati ve i n an unstabl e battl efi el d.
5-33. Wi re communi cati ons can provi de protecti on from enemy decepti on,
jammi ng, and i ntercepti on. Stati c securi ty operati ons, defensi ve posi ti ons,
and extended survei l l ance posts are sui tabl e for the use of wi re
communi cati ons. However, the sni per team must al so cal cul ate the
di sadvantages of wi re, such as ti me to empl ace, l ack of mobi l i ty, and rel ati ve
ease of compromi se i f found by the enemy. When possi bl e, the team shoul d
back up wi re communi cati ons by more fl exi bl e forms of control , such as radi o.
5-34. Certai n envi ronments (FI D or CBT mi ssi ons) may al l ow for more
fl exi bl e communi cati ons techni ques. For exampl e, the use of commerci al
tel ephones may be more appropri ate than tradi ti onal mi l i tary
communi cati ons. Al so, many envi ronments possess a l ow threat from actual
message i ntercepti on or di recti on-fi ndi ng assets, whi ch al l ows the sni per
team more l i beral use of the radi o. However, pl anners woul d be wi se to
remember the ti me-tested proverb: Never underesti mate your enemy.
FM 3-05.222
5-9
COORDINATION
5-35. There must be meti cul ous coordi nati on wi th both supported and
unsupported uni ts that fal l wi thi n the sni per teams AO. Thi s coordi nati on i s
the sni per coordi nators mai n focus; however, the sni per team must ensure
that the coordi nati on has been accompl i shed. Coordi nati on wi th supported
and unsupported uni ts i ncl udes the fol l owi ng:
Nature, durati on, and extent of l ocal and extended patrol s.
Fri endl y, di rect, and i ndi rect fi re pl ans.
Local securi ty measures.
Locati on and extent of obstacl es and barri er pl an.
Rendezvous and l i nkup poi nts.
Passage and reentry of fri endl y l i nes.
Uni t mi ssi on and area of responsi bi l i ty.
Routes and l i mi ts of advance.
Locati on and descri pti on of fri endl y uni ts.
Communi cati on pl an.
5-36. Al though i t i s i mportant that the sni per team recei ves as much
i nformati on as possi bl e for mi ssi on success, the sni per coordi nator must not
tel l the team so much that, i f captured, the enti re sector woul d be
compromi sed. Thi s objecti ve demands that everyone i nvol vedthe sni per
teams, the sni per coordi nator, supported and unsupported uni ts i n the area of
operati onscommuni cate and remai n coordi nated. The sni per coordi nator
wi l l establ i sh control measures to assi st i n the depl oyment of the teams. Thi s
wi l l keep the teams and uni ts from commi tti ng fratri ci de, whi l e not
compromi si ng the uni ts i f the teams are captured.
5-37. Once coordi nati on begi ns, the team must establ i sh control measures to
protect the sni per and the supported and unsupported fri endl y uni ts. Al so, i f
the si tuati on changes, there wi l l be a recal l capabi l i ty to prevent the sni per
team from unnecessary danger. The sni per team must al so recei ve warni ng
that fri endl y operati ons are i n the area and i t coul d be subjected to fri endl y
fi re. The team must have enough l ati tude to avoi d engagement wi th the
enemy by remai ni ng mobi l e, el usi ve, and unpredi ctabl e. However, the team
must understand that operati onal areas wi th l i nes of advance, excl usi on
areas, and no-fi re zones are desi gned to protect hi m and fri endl i es and are
not to be vi ol ated.
SUPPORT RELATIONSHIPS
5-38. Sni pi ng i s a combat support acti vi ty. Sni pers shoul d augment onl y
those uni ts that have a speci fi c need for i t. Sni pi ng provi des ei ther i ndi rect or
di rect support. Depl oyed as human i ntel l i gence (HUMI NT) assets, sni pers
i ndi rectl y support fri endl y uni ts and operati ons. There are two types of di rect
support.
FM 3-05.222
5-10
Operational Control
5-39. Sni pers are under the operati onal control (OPCON) of the supported
uni t onl y for the durati on of a speci fi c operati on. At the end of the mi ssi on,
they return to the control of the parent uni t. Thi s practi ce i s the opti mal
method of supporti ng operati ons, as i t i s fl exi bl e and effi ci ent toward the uni t
to whi ch the sni pers are attached.
Attachment
5-40. For extended operati ons or di stances, sni pers may support a speci fi c
uni t. Thi s uni t responds to al l the sni per teams requi rements for the
durati on of attachment. The sni pi ng speci al i st or coordi nator shoul d al so be
attached to advi se the uni t on assi gnment of proper empl oyment methods. I f
i t i s not possi bl e to attach the sni per coordi nator, then the seni or and most
experi enced sni per on the attachment orders must assume the job as sni per
coordi nator for the peri od of attachment. The recei vi ng uni t must al so
understand the status of the sni per coordi nator and the i mportance of hi s
posi ti on. Normal l y, attachment for extended peri ods wi l l i ncl ude suppl y and
l ogi sti cs support to the sni per el ement from the uni t of attachment.
5-41. The support gi ven to the uni t and support recei ved from the uni t can
al so determi ne the pl anni ng, coordi nati on, and control requi rements. The
four types of support gi ven to a uni t are as fol l ows:
Offensi ve operati onal .
Defensi ve operati onal .
Retrograde operati onal .
Speci al operati ons.
TARGET ANALYSIS
5-42. There are two general cl asses of sni per targetspersonnel and
materi al . The sni per coordi nator can further categori ze these targets as
havi ng ei ther tacti cal or strategi c val ue. Tacti cal targets have l ocal , short-
term val ue to the current battl e or si tuati on. Tacti cal personnel targets are
normal l y of enough si gni fi cance to warrant the ri sk of detecti on when fi ri ng.
Such targets i ncl ude enemy sni pers, key l eaders, scouts, and crew-served
weapons personnel . Tacti cal materi al targets are of parti cul ar i mportance to
the current operati on.
5-43. Strategi c personnel targets are not as wel l -defi ned as tacti cal
personnel targets because of probl ems wi th the concept and defi ni ti on of
assassi nati on. The defi ni ti on of assassi nati on versus the el i mi nati on of a
mi l i tary target i s based on the end resul t. I f the end resul t i s mi l i tary, then
the target i s cl assi fi ed as mi l i tary ambush. However, i f the end resul t i s
pol i ti cal i n nature, then the target i s cl assi fi ed as assassi nati on and possi bl y
i l l egal . Thi s i s a si mpl i fi ed defi ni ti on of a compl ex i ssue and further
di scussi on i s beyond the scope of thi s manual .
5-44. Strategi c materi al targets consi st of al l types of objects of a mi l i tary
nature, i ncl udi ng components or systems wi thi n a target (such as a turbi ne i n
an ai rcraft). The sni per must al ways consi der cri ti cal i ty, accessi bi l i ty,
FM 3-05.222
5-11
recuperabi l i ty, vul nerabi l i ty, effect, recogni zabi l i ty (CARVER) i n eval uati ng
the target.
TARGET SYSTEMS AND CRITICAL NODES
5-45. SF sni pers shoul d be di rected at the enemys C2 faci l i ti es and the
cri ti cal nodes supporti ng them. Sni pers can frequentl y regard targets as
bei ng i n an i nterrel ated system; that i s, any one component may be essenti al
to the targets enti re operati on. These i nterrel ated and essenti al components
are known as cri ti cal nodes. Cri ti cal C2 nodes are components, functi ons, or
systems that support a mi l i tary forces C2. These wi l l di ffer for each target,
but they wi l l general l y consi st of the fol l owi ng:
Procedures. Sni pers can easi l y i nterdi ct the procedures, routi nes, and
habi ts the enemy uses to conduct operati ons. Of most si gni fi cance,
sni pers can create fear i n the enemy that wi l l cause hi m to take extreme
measures i n securi ty or to modi fy procedures to keep from bei ng shot.
The enemy may curtai l certai n functi ons, di vert assets for securi ty, or
restri ct movement i n hi s own rear areas to prevent i nterdi cti on.
Personnel. Personnel targets are cri ti cal , dependi ng on thei r
i mportance or functi on. The target does not necessari l y need to be a
hi gh-ranki ng offi cer but may be a l ower-ranki ng person or a sel ect
group of peopl e, such as a ski l l or occupati onal group, who are vi tal to
the enemys warfi ghti ng apparatus.
Equipment. Equi pment i s cri ti cal when the l oss of i t wi l l i mpact the
enemys conduct of operati ons. Sel dom wi l l si ngul ar equi pment targets be
so cri ti cal as to i mpact the enemy i n any si gni fi cant fashi on. However,
targets or components that are not si ngul arl y cri ti cal may, col l ecti vel y, be
vi tal to the enemy. Common targets i ncl ude objects common to al l other
si mi l ar targets or systems vul nerabl e to i nterdi cti on, such as a parti cul ar
component (a radar antenna) whi ch i s common to many other radars.
I nterdi cti ng onl y one antenna woul d have l i mi ted effect; i t woul d merel y
be repl aced. However, i nterdi cti ng other radar components woul d
si gni fi cantl y i mpai r the enemys l ogi sti cs.
Facilities. These acti vi ti es and compl exes support the enemys
operati ons or C2 functi ons. I n the l arger context, sni pers are not sui ted
for such i nterdi cti on. However, where possi bl e, the sni per can focus on
cri ti cal el ements, such as C2 nodes or l ogi sti cs capabi l i ti es of the l arger
faci l i ty (power generati on systems or transportati on equi pment).
Communications. Communi cati ons nodes often are the most fragi l e
components of C2 systems. Sni pers can usual l y i nterdi ct these nodes
because they are easy to recogni ze and frequentl y qui te vul nerabl e.
Attacki ng other targets, not cri ti cal i n some fashi on, serves no purpose
i n usi ng SF sni pers and onl y wastes resources wi thout a defi nabl e
objecti ve. Target anal ysi s hel ps determi ne whi ch cri ti cal nodes to
i nterdi ct and predi ct how effecti ve the sni per wi l l be.
FM 3-05.222
5-12
CARVER PROCESS
5-46. Target anal ysi s i ncl udes sel ecti ng the appropri ate method to use
agai nst a target, such as an ai rcraft, a stri ke force, or sni pers. I n doi ng so, the
pl anner can match the sni pers capabi l i ti es to the potenti al target. Sni per
capabi l i ti es i ncl ude usi ng speci al weapons and performi ng covert operati ons.
5-47. Attacki ng targets by sni per fi re requi res detai l ed pl anni ng and
coordi nati on; the sni per shoul d not attack these targets i ndi scri mi natel y.
I nterdi cti on must occur wi thi n the parameters of the assi gned mi ssi on
from hi gher headquarters to the stated resul ts, maxi mi zi ng the targets
vul nerabi l i ti es and the pri ori ty of i nterdi cti on (on mul ti pl e targets
or components).
5-48. The target anal ysi s system that sni pers use i s based on the acronym
CARVER. The CARVER anal ysi s process i s a generi c model for SO
i nterdi cti on mi ssi ons. I t i s al so sui tabl e for sni per i nterdi cti on, parti cul arl y
duri ng materi al i nterdi cti on pl anni ng, whi ch i s si mi l ar to i nterdi cti on wi th
speci al muni ti ons or demol i ti ons. The sni per can appl y sni per fi re wi thi n the
framework of the CARVER model to better determi ne i f sni pi ng woul d be the
appropri ate i nterdi cti on method and preci sel y how and where to appl y i t.
Mi ssi on pl anners appl y the CARVER anal ysi s to sni per i nterdi cti on based on
the fol l owi ng cri teri a:
Criticality. A target i s cri ti cal i n rel ati on to the i mpact i ts destructi on
woul d have on the enemy. The mi ssi on order wi l l l argel y determi ne
cri ti cal targets. However, wi thi n a target system there may be
components that may be cri ti cal for the operati on of the enti re target.
For exampl e, a turbi ne i s a cri ti cal component of a jet ai rcraft.
The concept of attacki ng a cri ti cal component (usi ng accurate fi re)
al l ows the sni per to engage a much greater vari ety of targets than
commonl y accepted.
Accessibility. Thi s factor i s based on how readi l y the target can be
attacked. For the sni per, target accessi bi l i ty i ncl udes getti ng through
the targets securi ty systems (securi ty pol i ce or i ntrusi on detectors) and
knowi ng what the reacti on wi l l be to the sni pers stand-off i nterdi cti on.
Accessi bi l i ty for sni per i nterdi cti on i s uni que, because the sni per can
frequentl y engage targets wi thout vi ol ati ng securi ty systems, and i n
turn, reduce the enemys abi l i ty to detect the sni per before the
i nterdi cti on. Agai n, the sni per must base accessi bi l i ty on both
maxi mum and mi ni mum ranges. He must al so be abl e to get off the
target after he shoots.
Recuperability. The sni per measures recuperabi l i ty of a target based on
the ti me i t takes the target to be repai red, repl aced, bypassed, or
substi tuted. Frequentl y, pl anners thi nk onl y i n terms of total
destructi on as opposed to a l esser degree of destructi on. However, the
same effect can be achi eved by si mpl y shutti ng down the target or
destroyi ng one vul nerabl e component. The advantage of i nterdi cti on
short of total destructi on i s i n the appl i cati on of force; compl ete
destructi on normal l y requi res a more el aborate force and more uni ts.
Al so, the abi l i ty to control target destructi on wi th preci si on fi re can
prevent unnecessary damage. I t can l i mi t adverse effects to systems
FM 3-05.222
5-13
that the l ocal popul ace may depend on for el ectri cal power, food, or
water. However, the pl anners must take i nto consi derati on repai r ti me.
I f the target can be repai red i n l ess ti me than the target wi ndow
al l ows, the another destructi on techni que must be consi dered.
Vulnerability. A target (or component) i s vul nerabl e to the sni per i f he
has the weapons and ski l l requi red to i nterdi ct the cri ti cal poi nts that
the target anal ysi s has i denti fi ed. The key to target vul nerabi l i ty i s
i denti fyi ng the weakest cri ti cal l i nk i n the target system and
destroyi ng i t. The sni per must match the weapon to the target.
Effect. A wi de range of i nterdi cti on effects are possi bl e. Target effect i s
the desi red resul t of attacki ng the target, i ncl udi ng al l possi bl e
i mpl i cati onspol i ti cal , economi c, and soci al effects of the i nterdi cti on.
Occasi onal l y, the pl anner must deci de what i s the desi red effect. I t may
be the removal of key personnel , the psychol ogi cal i mpact of the
i nterdi cti on, or the threat of i nterdi cti on. Pl anners must al ways
consi der the bal ance of effect on the overal l mi ssi on and the effect on
the popul ace. When an adverse effect on the popul ace outwei ghs the
effect on the mi ssi on, the sni per must reconsi der the mi ssi on.
Recognizability. A target i s recogni zabl e i f i t can be effecti vel y acqui red
by the sni per. A target may be wel l wi thi n the sni pers standoff range
but cannot be effecti vel y engaged because the target i s masked or
conceal ed. For exampl e, the sni pers recogni ti on of targets usi ng ni ght-
vi si on equi pment mi ght be restri cted because of the technol ogi cal
l i mi tati ons of the devi ce. Posi ti ve i denti fi cati on of targets, as wel l as
smal l target components, i s di ffi cul t gi ven the characteri sti cs of the
phosphor screen i n NVDs. Other factors compl i cati ng recogni zabi l i ty
i ncl ude the ti me of day, l i ght condi ti ons, terrai n maski ng,
envi ronmental factors, and si mi l ar nontargets i n the area.
5-49. The fear of i nterdi cti on i s evi dent i n the German attempts to ki l l
Wi nston Churchi l l i n Worl d War I I , whi ch forced hi m to remai n hi dden for
some ti me. Conversel y, John M. Col l i ns book, Green Berets, SEALs, and
SPETSNAZ, detai l s the pol i ti cal i mpl i cati ons of a DA mi ssi on to ki l l a fi gure
such as Emperor Hi rohi to of Japan, the emperor-god, duri ng Worl d War I I .
Such acti on, Col l i ns states, woul d have had an adverse i mpact by ral l yi ng
the Japanese peopl e. A si mi l ar reacti on was seen when the U.S. bombed
Li bya i n 1986. Duri ng the rai d, U.S. bombs seri ousl y i njured one of
Col onel Mu`ammar Gadhafi s chi l dren and resul ted i n negati ve medi a and
i nternati onal backl ash. (Despi te Gadhafi s unscrupul ous acts, endangeri ng
hi s fami l y was unacceptabl e to the i nternati onal publ i c.)
5-50. Materi al target i nterdi cti on by sni per fi re i s much more l i mi ted than i t
i s wi th personnel targets. The SF sni pers abi l i ti es coul d i ncrease by hi s
choi ce of speci al weapons to i nterdi ct materi al targets, but he mi ght sti l l be
l i mi ted by the rel ati ve vul nerabi l i ty of the target. The greatest obstacl e for
successful i nterdi cti on of materi al targets rests pri mari l y wi th the
i denti fi cati on of the vul nerabl e nodes. The goal of the sni pers fi re on these
nodes i s to be as effecti ve as more powerful weaponsusi ng preci si on fi re at
key poi nts i nstead of brute force i n the general area.
FM 3-05.222
5-14
MISSION PLANNING
5-51. Successful accompl i shment of a sni per mi ssi on rel ates di rectl y to the
pl anni ng and preparati on that takes pl ace. Each mi ssi on requi res the
experti se of di fferent peopl e at each pl anni ng l evel .
LEVELS OF PLANNING
5-52. The two l evel s of mi ssi on pl anni ng are above-team l evel and team
l evel . At above-team l evel the sni per empl oyment offi cer (SEO) or sni per
l eader pl ans and coordi nates the acti ons of more than one sni per team. The
i ntent of thi s di recti ve i s to have several teams carry out coordi nated or
i ndependent mi ssi ons toward the same objecti ve. At team l evel , the members
of the sni per team wi l l carry out the pl anni ng, preparati on, and coordi nati on
for the mi ssi on. Therefore, warni ng orders are not necessary at thi s l evel , and
the fol l owi ng sni per operati on order (Fi gure 5-1, pages 5-14 through 5-16)
i tsel f i s a mi ssi on pl anni ng tool .
1. SITUATION
a. Enemy forces.
(1) Weather. Li ght data, preci pi tati on, temperature, effect on the enemy and the
sni per team.
(2) Terrai n. Terrai n pattern, profi l e, soi l type, vegetati on, and fauna, effect on the
enemy and the sni per team.
(3) Enemy. Type uni t(s), i denti fi cati on, trai ni ng, and presence of countersni pers,
si gni fi cant acti vi ti es, and effect on the sni per team.
b. Fri endl y forces. Adjacent uni ts, l eft, ri ght, front, and rear. Si nce sni per teams are
vul nerabl e to capture, they shoul d not recei ve thi s i nformati on. Rather, they
shoul d recei ve i nformati on such as the l ocati on of free-fi re and no-fi re zones.
2. MISSION
Who, what, where, when.
3. EXECUTION
a. Commanders i ntent. Thi s paragraph rel ates speci fi cal l y what i s to be
accompl i shed, i n a short, preci se statement. I t shoul d i ncl ude the commanders
measure of success.
b. Concept of the operati on. Thi s paragraph rel ates step-by-step how the mi ssi on wi l l
proceed. Breaki ng the mi ssi on down i nto phases works best. Speci fi c tasks wi l l be
carri ed out i n each phase, usual l y starti ng from prei nfi l trati on to exfi l trati on and
debri efi ng.
c. Fi re support. Normal l y, i n a deep operati on, fi re support wi l l not be avai l abl e.
However, i n other si tuati ons, the assets may exi st.
d. Fol l ow-on mi ssi ons. Thi s paragraph wi l l outl i ne any fol l ow-on mi ssi ons that may
be needed. Once the pri mary mi ssi on i s accompl i shed, the sni per team may be
tasked to carry out another mi ssi on i n the AO before exfi l trati on. Thi s duty may
consi st of another sni per mi ssi on or a l i nkup wi th another team, uni t, or
i ndi genous persons as a means of exfi l trati on.
Figure 5-1. Sniper Operation Order
FM 3-05.222
5-15
e. Coordi nati ng i nstructi ons. Consi st of the fol l owi ng:
(1) Acti ons at the objecti ve. Thi s paragraph contai ns speci fi cal l y the duti es of each
member of the team and thei r rotati on to i ncl ude
(a) Securi ty.
(b) Sel ecti on and constructi on of the hi de.
(c) Removal of spoi l s.
(d) Camoufl age and fi el ds of fi re.
(e) Observers l og, range card, and mi l i tary sketch.
(f) Pl acement of equi pment i n the hi de.
(g) Mai ntenance of weapons and equi pment.
(h) Observati on rotati on.
(2) Movement techni ques. Thi s paragraph wi l l cover the movement techni ques,
securi ty at hal ts, and responsi bi l i ti es duri ng movement to and from the ORP
and the hi de and duri ng the return tri p.
(3) Route. Thi s paragraph covers the pri mary and al ternate routes to and from
the objecti ve area. I t may al so i ncl ude the fi re support pl an i f i t i s not i ncl uded
i n the fi re support annex.
(4) Departure and reentry of fri endl y posi ti ons. Thi s i nformati on i s normal l y used
i n the support of conventi onal forces, but i t coul d be used when deal i ng wi th
i ndi genous persons, for exampl e, duri ng a l i nkup.
(5) Ral l y poi nts and acti ons at ral l y poi nts. I n some i nstances, these poi nts can be
used, but for a two-man el ement a rendezvous i s much more advi sabl e. For
exampl e, several rendezvous poi nts en route shoul d be prepl anned wi th a
speci fi c ti me or peri od for l i nkup. These desi gnati ons are set so that movement
i s constantl y toward the objecti ve, preventi ng the l ead man from backtracki ng
and wasti ng ti me. I t i s not advi sabl e for a two-man team to attempt to use
en route ral l y poi nts.
(6) Acti ons on enemy contact. Thi s par agr aph str esses mi ni mal contact wi th
the enemy. The team shoul d avoi d contact and not engage i n a fi r efi ght. I t
i s best to avoi d contact, even i n an ambush; evade as best as possi bl e. The
team shoul d not attempt to thr ow smoke or l ay down a base of fi r e. Thi s
acti on cal l s attenti on to the teams posi ti on and wi l l cause the enemy to
pur sue wi th a much l ar ger el ement. I f an ai r attack occur s, hi de. I t i s not
possi bl e for a two-man team to successful l y engage an enemy ai r cr aft.
(7) Acti ons at danger areas. Avoi d danger areas by movi ng around them, unl ess thi s
i s not possi bl e or ti me i s cri ti cal . When movi ng across l arge open areas, stal k
across; do not move i n an upri ght posture. Li near danger areas are best crossed by
havi ng both team members move across the area at the same ti me after an
extended l i steni ng hal t. Thi s wi l l avoi d spl i tti ng the team i n case of enemy contact
and l ower the ri sk of compromi se whi l e traversi ng the danger area.
(8) Acti ons at hal ts. Securi ty i s cri ti cal even when taki ng a break and nobody i s
expected i n the area. Stay al ert.
Figure 5-1. Sniper Operation Order (Continued)

FM 3-05.222
5-16
(9) Rehearsal s. I f ti me i s not avai l abl e, at the mi ni mum, al ways practi ce acti ons at
the objecti ve. Duri ng rehearsal s, practi ce i mmedi ate acti on dri l l s (I ADs) and
di scuss acti ons at ral l y and rendezvous poi nts. The team must know these
poi nts and the routes on the map. I t i s al so i mportant that the team rehearses
any previ ousl y untrai ned acti ons.
(10) I nspecti ons. Team member s shoul d i nspect thei r equi pment. Use a checkl i st
for equi pment and ensur e that ever ythi ng wor ks. The team shoul d have the
pr oper equi pment and camoufl age for the ter r ai n and the envi r onment that
i t wi l l encounter . I nspecti ons shoul d be conducted pr i or to i nfi l tr ati on, after
i nfi l tr ati on, and fi nal l y i n the ORP befor e occupyi ng the FFP.
(11) Debri efi ng. Thi s paragraph covers who wi l l attend the debri efi ng, where i t wi l l
occur, and when i t wi l l take pl ace. The observers l og and mi l i tary sketches
become useful i nformati on-gatheri ng tool s duri ng the debri efi ng (Appendi x M).
(12) Pri ori ty i ntel l i gence requi rements (PI R)/i nformati on requi rements (I Rs). These
requi rements are gi ven to the sni per team as i nformati on that shoul d be
gathered when the team i s empl oyed.
(13) Annexes. Thi s secti on contai ns speci fi c maps and sketches showi ng i tems such
as routes, the fi re support pl an, the tentati ve ORPs, and the hi de si tes. I t wi l l
al so i ncl ude the evasi on and recovery (E&R) pl an, sunri se sunset overl ay, and
terrai n profi l es.
4. SERVICE SUPPORT
Thi s paragraph covers, but i s not l i mi ted to, admi ni strati ve i tems such as
a. Rati ons.
b. Arms and ammuni ti on that each team member wi l l carry.
c. Uni form and equi pment that each team member wi l l carry.
d. Method of handl i ng the dead and wounded.
e. Pri soners and captured equi pment. Thi s paragraph i s not l i kel y to be used, unl ess
the equi pment can be carri ed, photographed, or sketched.
f. Caches and mi ssi on support si tes (MSSs).
5. COMMAND AND SIGNAL
a. Frequenci es and cal l si gns. I t i s not necessary to l i st al l the frequenci es and cal l
si gns. You need onl y to refer to the current si gnal operati ng i nstructi ons (SOI ).
b. Pyrotechni cs and si gnal s, to i ncl ude hand and arm si gnal s. I t i s best to have a
team SOP to whi ch you can refer. Otherwi se, you must l i st al l the pyrotechni cs
and hand and arm si gnal s.
c. Chal l enge and password. The chal l enge and password wi l l be necessary when
l i nki ng up at rendezvous poi nts and passi ng through fri endl y l i nes.
d. Code words and reports. Thi s refers to any contact made wi th hi gher headquarters
or possi bl y a l i nkup wi th i ndi genous persons.
e. Chai n of command.
Figure 5-1. Sniper Operation Order (Continued)
FM 3-05.222
5-17
TERRAIN PROFILE
5-53. A terrai n profi l e i s an exaggerated si de vi ew of a porti on of the earths
surface between two poi nts. The profi l e wi l l determi ne i f LOS i s avai l abl e.
The sni per l eader can use l i ne of si ght to determi ne
Defi l ade posi ti ons.
Dead space.
Potenti al di rect-fi re weapon posi ti ons.
5-54. The sni per l eader can construct a profi l e from any contoured map. I ts
constructi on requi res the fol l owi ng steps:
Draw a l i ne from where the profi l e begi ns to where i t ends.
Fi nd the hi ghest and l owest val ue of the contour l i nes that cross or
touch the profi l e l i ne. Add one contour val ue above the hi ghest and one
bel ow the l owest to take care of hi l l s and val l eys.
Sel ect a pi ece of notebook paper wi th as many l i nes as contours on the
profi l e l i ne. The standard Army green pocket notebook or any paper
wi th quarter-i nch l i nes i s i deal . I f l i ned paper i s not avai l abl e, draw
equal l y spaced l i nes on a bl ank sheet.
Number the top l i ne wi th the hi ghest val ue and the rest of the l i nes i n
sequence wi th the contour i nterval down to the l owest val ue.
Pl ace the paper on the map wi th the l i nes paral l el to the profi l e l i ne.
From every poi nt on the profi l e l i ne where a contour l i ne, a stream, an
i ntermi ttent stream, or a body of water crosses or touches, drop a
perpendi cul ar l i ne to the l i ne havi ng the same val ue. Where trees are
present, add the hei ght of the trees to the contour.
After al l perpendi cul ar l i nes are drawn and ti ck marks pl aced on the
correspondi ng el evati on l i ne, draw a smooth l i ne connecti ng the marks
to form a hori zontal vi ew or profi l e of the terrai n. (The profi l e drawn
may be exaggerated. The space of l i nes on the notebook paper wi l l
determi ne the amount of exaggerati on.)
Draw a strai ght l i ne from the start poi nt to the fi ni sh poi nt on the
profi l e. I f the strai ght l i ne i ntersects the curved profi l e, l i ne of si ght i s
not avai l abl e.
SUNRISE/SUNSET OVERLAY
5-55. A sunri se/sunset overl ay (SSO) i s a graphi c representati on of the angl e
to the ri si ng and setti ng sun and the objecti ve. An SSO enabl es a team to
pl an a l i ne of advance or tentati ve hi de si tes to take best advantage of the
l i ght. An SSO requi res a tabl e showi ng the true azi muth of the ri si ng sun and
the rel ati ve beari ng of the setti ng sun for al l months of the year. An SSO i s
constructed i n the fol l owi ng manner:
Usi ng the projected date of the mi ssi on and the l ati tude of the target,
determi ne the true azi muth of the sunri se from Tabl e 5-1, pages 5-19
and 5-20.
Usi ng a protractor and a strai ghtedge, draw a l i ne from the objecti ve
al ong the true azi muth.
FM 3-05.222
5-18
Subtract the true azi muth from 360 to fi nd the sunset azi muth.
Usi ng a protractor and a strai ghtedge, draw another l i ne from the
objecti ve al ong the sunset azi muth.
Convert each azi muth to a back azi muth and wri te i t on the
appropri ate l i ne.
Label the appropri ate l i nes sunri se and sunset.
Wri te down the l ati tude and the date that was used to construct the
overl ay.
SNIPER SUPPORT IN SPECIAL OPERATIONS MISSIONS
AND COLLATERAL ACTIVITIES
5-56. Speci al operati ons (SO) forces pl an, conduct, and support acti vi ti es i n
al l operati onal envi ronments. The fol l owi ng paragraphs expl ai n how the SF
sni per supports each mi ssi on and acti vi ty.
CIVIL AFFAIRS AND PSYCHOLOGICAL OPERATIONS
5-57. The mi suse of sni per i nterdi cti on can adversel y affect Ci vi l Affai rs
(CA) and ci vi c acti on programs sponsored by fri endl y organi zati ons.
The sni per i s a very effi ci ent ki l l er and gi ven a target wi l l go to extreme
efforts to i nterdi ct i t. Therefore, pl anners must temper the use of force wi th
common sense and the future goal s of the operati on. I t may be easi er to
el i mi nate threats than to negoti ate, but i n the l ong run, negoti ati ons may
open the door for settl ement where sni pi ng may cl ose i t or may set the stage
for undesi rabl e reacti ons.
5-58. Pl anners must al so consi der the psychol ogi cal operati ons (PSYOP)
aspects of the mi ssi on, i ncl udi ng both posi ti ve and negati ve i mpacts. The
sni per can project not onl y accurate weapons fi re but al so tremendous
psychol ogi cal destructi on. Such i mpact was gi ven as rati onal e for the
Vi etnam My Lai massacre. There, i n defense of thei r acti ons, some sol di ers
cl ai med that enemy sni per fi re (and fri endl y casual ti es) over prol onged ti me
drove them to commi t the war cri mes. On the other end of the spectrum, U.S.
use of sni pers can al so cause adverse reacti on on enemy forces. As at My Lai ,
the enemy may focus on i nnocent noncombatants and commi t i nappropri ate
repri sal s i n response to i ntense sni per pressure. Thi s practi ce i s especi al l y
true i n UW and FI D envi ronments where U.S. SO forces may use l ocal
popul ati ons as guerri l l as and securi ty forces.
5-59. The psychol ogi cal i mpact of sni pi ng has recei ved l i ttl e attenti on i n the
overal l scheme of war. Hi stori ans often focus on the l arge weapons systems
and overl ook the stress and fear that sni pi ng adds to the battl efi el d. Yet, thi s
psychol ogi cal i mpact can rui n the fi ber and moral e of an enti re army; for
exampl e, i n Worl d War I , the sni pers bul l et was often feared far more than
many other ways of dyi ng.
5-60. The U.S. mi l i tary has onl y recentl y recogni zed the psychol ogi cal
i mpact of sustai ned combat, al though the sni per has al ways contri buted as
much to fear as he has to fi ghti ng. Operati onal pl anners may consi der thi s
PSYOP capabi l i ty when pl anni ng sni per mi ssi ons, especi al l y when usi ng
PSYOP i n UW where i t pl ays a vi tal rol e.
FM 3-05.222
5-19
Table 5-1. Finding Direction From the Rising or Setting Sun

Date
Angle to North From the Rising or Setting Sun (level terrain)
Latitude
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
1
6
113
112
113
113
113
113
114
113
115
114
116
115
117
116
118
118
121
120
124
123
127
127
155
132
141
140
11
16
112
111
112
111
112
111
113
112
113
112
114
113
115
114
117
116
119
118
122
120
125
124
130
129
138
136



January
21
26
110
109
110
109
110
109
111
109
111
110
112
111
113
112
115
113
117
115
119
117
122
120
127
124
133
130
1
6
107
106
107
106
108
106
108
106
108
107
109
107
110
108
111
109
113
111
115
113
117
115
121
118
126
123
11
16
104
103
104
103
105
103
105
103
105
103
106
104
107
105
108
106
100
107
110
108
112
110
116
112
120
116



February
21
26
101
99
101
99
101
99
101
99
101
100
102
100
102
100
103
101
104
102
105
103
107
104
109
106
112
108
1
6
98
96
98
96
98
96
98
96
99
96
99
97
99
97
100
97
100
98
101
98
102
99
104
100
106
102
11
16
94
92
94
92
94
92
94
92
94
92
94
92
95
92
95
92
95
93
96
93
96
93
97
93
98
94



March
21
26
90
88
90
88
90
88
90
88
90
88
90
88
90
88
90
88
90
87
90
87
90
87
90
87
90
96
1
6
86
84
86
84
86
84
86
83
85
83
85
83
85
83
85
82
84
82
84
81
83
80
82
79
81
77
11
16
82
80
82
80
82
80
82
80
81
79
81
70
81
78
80
78
80
77
79
76
77
74
76
72
74
70


April
21
26
78
77
78
77
78
76
78
76
78
76
77
75
76
75
76
74
75
72
73
71
72
69
69
66
66
63
1
6
75
74
75
74
75
73
74
73
74
73
73
72
73
71
72
70
70
68
69
67
66
64
63
61
59
56
11
16
72
71
72
71
72
71
72
70
71
70
70
69
69
68
68
67
67
65
64
63
62
60
58
55
52
49



May
21
26
70
69
70
69
70
69
69
68
69
68
68
67
67
66
65
64
63
62
61
60
58
56
53
51
47
44
1
6
68
67
68
67
68
67
67
67
66
66
66
65
64
64
63
62
61
60
58
59
54
53
49
48
40
40
11
16
67
67
67
67
67
67
66
66
66
65
64
64
63
63
62
62
59
59
56
56
53
53
47
47
39
39



June
21
26
67
67
67
67
67
67
66
66
66
65
64
64
63
63
62
62
59
59
56
56
53
53
47
47
39
39
NOTES 1: When the sun is rising, the angle is reckoned from east to north. When the sun is setting, the
angle is reckoned from the west to north.
2: This chart is for the Northern Hemisphere.
FM 3-05.222
5-20
Table 5-1. Finding Direction From the Rising or Setting Sun (Continued)

Date
Angle to North From the Rising or Setting Sun (level terrain)
Latitude
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
1
6
67
67
67
67
67
67
66
66
65
66
64
65
63
64
62
62
59
60
56
57
53
53
47
48
39
40
11
16
68
69
68
68
68
68
67
68
66
67
65
66
64
65
63
64
61
62
58
59
54
55
49
50
41
43



July
21
26
69
70
69
70
69
70
69
70
68
69
67
68
66
67
65
66
63
64
60
62
57
59
52
54
45
48
1
6
72
73
72
73
72
73
71
73
71
72
70
71
69
71
68
69
66
68
64
68
61
63
57
60
51
55
11
16
75
76
75
76
74
76
74
76
74
75
73
75
72
74
71
73
70
72
68
70
66
68
63
65
58
61



August
21
26
78
79
78
79
77
79
77
79
77
79
76
78
76
78
75
77
74
76
72
75
71
73
68
71
65
68
1
6
82
83
82
83
82
83
81
83
81
83
81
83
80
82
80
82
79
81
78
81
77
80
75
78
73
77
11
16
85
87
85
87
85
87
85
87
85
87
85
87
85
87
84
86
84
86
83
86
83
85
82
85
81
84



September
21
26
89
91
89
91
89
91
89
91
89
91
89
91
89
91
89
91
89
91
89
91
88
92
88
92
88
92
1
6
93
95
93
95
93
95
93
95
93
95
93
96
93
96
94
96
94
97
94
97
95
98
95
98
96
100
11
16
97
99
97
99
97
99
97
99
97
99
98
100
98
100
99
101
99
101
100
102
101
104
102
105
104
108


October
21
26
101
102
101
102
101
193
101
103
101
103
102
104
102
104
103
105
104
106
105
108
107
109
109
112
112
115
1
6
104
106
104
106
105
106
105
107
105
107
106
108
107
109
108
110
109
111
110
113
113
115
116
119
120
123
11
16
107
109
107
109
108
109
108
109
108
110
109
111
110
112
111
113
113
115
115
117
117
120
121
124
126
130



November
21
26
110
111
110
111
110
111
111
112
111
112
112
113
113
114
114
116
116
118
119
120
122
124
126
128
133
135
1
6
112
112
112
112
112
113
113
113
113
114
114
115
115
116
117
118
119
120
122
123
125
126
130
132
138
140
11
16
113
113
113
113
113
113
114
114
115
115
116
116
117
117
118
118
121
121
124
124
127
127
133
133
141
141



December
21
26
113
113
113
113
113
113
114
114
115
115
116
116
117
117
118
118
121
121
124
124
127
127
133
133
141
141
NOTES 1: When the sun is rising, the angle is reckoned from east to north. When the sun is setting, the
angle is reckoned from the west to north.
2: This chart is for the Northern Hemisphere.
FM 3-05.222
5-21
UNCONVENTIONAL WARFARE OPERATIONS
5-61. I n a UW envi ronment, the SF sni per provi des an addi ti onal capabi l i ty
to the resi stance force. The pri mary mi ssi on of the resi stance force i s to
support conventi onal forces duri ng ti mes of war. Therefore, the SF sni per
must know conventi onal sni per tacti cs as wel l as unconventi onal techni ques
to effecti vel y trai n a U.S.-sponsored resi stance force. Duri ng peaceti me,
mobi l e trai ni ng teams (MTTs) can trai n forei gn mi l i tary or parami l i tary
forces. I n ti mes of war, the trai ni ng takes pl ace duri ng the organi zati on and
trai ni ng phase of the resi stance force after l i nkup.
5-62. The i mportance of a sni per i n UW cannot be measured onl y by the
number of casual ti es he i nfl i cts upon the enemy. Real i zati on of the sni pers
presence i nsti l l s fear i n enemy troops and i nfl uences thei r deci si ons and
acti ons. Sel ecti ve and di scri mi nate target i nterdi cti on not onl y i nsti l l s fear i n
the enemy, but can l ead to general confusi on and rel ocati on of si gni fi cant
enemy strengths to counter such acti vi ty.
5-63. I n UW, the SF sni per can perform as a fi ghter and a trai ner. Not onl y
can he teach sni per ski l l s to the force he i s trai ni ng; he can act as a di rect
acti on asset when needed. The sni pers anci l l ary ski l l s i n camoufl age,
stal ki ng, survei l l ance, and decepti on are al so useful i n the UW envi ronments.
The i mpact of these tal ents i s magni fi ed when the sni per acts as a trai ner. By
trai ni ng others he i s, i n effect, perfor mi ng i nterdi cti on much more effi ci entl y
than he coul d al one.
5-64. UW or guerri l l a warfare (GW) consi sts of three major phases:
bui l dup, consol i dati on, and l i nkup. Sni pers wi l l pl ay an i mportant rol e i n al l
three phases.
Buildup
5-65. Duri ng i ni ti al contact and bui l dup, SF sni pers wi l l mai nl y trai n the
i ndi genous force sni pers and then act as sni per coordi nators.
5-66. Duri ng the bui l dup, sni pers are extremel y effecti ve when used i n the
harassi ng and sni per ambush rol e. By usi ng the sni pers abi l i ty to del i ver
l ong-range preci si on ri fl e fi re, the UW force can accompl i sh the fol l owi ng
objecti ves al l at once:
Be abl e to stri ke at the enemy forces whi l e mi ni mi zi ng thei r
own exposure.
Deny the comfort of a secure area to the enemy.
Bui l d UW force moral e wi th successes whi l e mi ni mi zi ng the amount of
UW force exposure.
Si nce the fi res are di scri mi natory, mai ntai n a posi ti ve effect on the
ci vi l i an popul ati on, as ci vi l i an casual ti es are mi ni mi zed. Thi s al so
rei nforces i n the ci vi l i ans mi nds the i nabi l i ty of government forces to
control that part of the countrysi de.
5-67. However, i t i s very i mportant that the sni pers go after targets wi th a
mi l i tary objecti ve onl y. The l i ne between sni per ambush and assassi nati on at
thi s poi nt can be uncl ear. The sni per must remember that an ambush i s for
mi l i tary gai n, whi l e an assassi nati on i s for pol i ti cal gai n. Assassi nati on,
FM 3-05.222
5-22
under any gui se, i s i l l egal due to Executi ve Order 12333, Part I I , paragraph
2-11, dated 4 December 1981.
5-68. Duri ng the end of the bui l dup and before the consol i dati on phase, the
UW sni pers wi l l be used the same as stri ke operati ons sni pers; that i s, i n
support of smal l rai ds and ambushes. As the si ze of the UW force grows, so
wi l l the si ze of the mi ssi ons that are si mi l ar to stri ke mi ssi ons.
Consolidation
5-69. Duri ng consol i dati on, as the UW force becomes l arger, the rol e of the
sni per reverts to that of the conventi onal sni per. The same mi ssi ons, tacti cs,
and empl oyment pri nci pl es appl y.
Linkup
5-70. Duri ng and after l i nkup, the sni pers wi l l mai nl y act as part of the
securi ty force and rear area protecti on (RAP) force. The UW force sni pers wi l l
be parti cul arl y sui ted for thi s rol e. They have spent thei r ti me i n that area
and shoul d know most, i f not al l , of the mai n areas that coul d support the
enemy duri ng i nfi l trati on and rear area attacks.
5-71. Duri ng the i ni ti al contact phase of a resi stance movement, sni per
empl oyment wi l l normal l y be l i mi ted to supporti ng smal l -uni t operati ons and
wi l l i ncl ude such acti ons as
Harassment of Enemy Personnel. When performed at ranges greater
than 500 meters, harassment serves to l ower the enemys moral e and
i nhi bi t hi s freedom of movement.
I nfiltration. Before an attack, sni pers may i nfi l trate enemy uni ts
posi ti ons and establ i sh themsel ves i n the enemys rear area. Duri ng the
attack, the i nfi l trated sni pers engage speci fi c targets of opportuni ty to
di vert the enemys attenti on from the attacki ng uni ts and to di srupt hi s
freedom of movement i n hi s rear areas.
I nterdiction. The sni pers wi l l del ay or i nterdi ct rei nforci ng el ements to
a target and deny the enemy use of an area or routes by any means.
Multiple Team, Area Sniper Ambush. Thi s type of ambush i nvol ves
mul ti pl e sni per teams operati ng together to engage targets by ti med or
si mul taneous fi re. Each sni per wi l l fi re a fi xed number of rounds, and
the ambush wi l l end when ei ther the targets have been successful l y
engaged or the predetermi ned number of shots have been fi red.
Pl anni ng consi derati ons must i ncl ude how the ambush i s to be
i ni ti ated, how the sni pers wi l l communi cate wi th each other, and what
methods the sni pers wi l l use to engage the targets.
Security and Surveillance. Sni pers are empl oyed to gather i nformati on
or to confi rm exi sti ng i ntel l i gence by l ong-term survei l l ance of a target
si te. They may al so be used to provi de earl y warni ng of i mpendi ng
counterattacks. Sni pers wi l l normal l y establ i sh a hi de posi ti on to
conduct thei r survei l l ance.
Offensive Operations. Duri ng the advanced stages of the combat phase
of a resi stance movement, sni pers may be used to detect and engage
l ong-range targets that coul d i mpede the progress of the offensi ve
FM 3-05.222
5-23
el ement. The teams must be ready to assume the defensi ve rol e
i mmedi atel y after the offensi ve operati on.
Defensive Operations. Sni pers are best used i n defensi ve operati ons
outsi de the forward l i ne of troops (FLOT) to provi de earl y warni ng of
enemy approach, di sorgani ze hi s attack, and cause hi m to depl oy earl y.
Sni pers may al so be used to del ay the enemys advance by i nterdi cti ng
enemy movements usi ng a seri es of i nterl ocki ng del ay posi ti ons, thus
al l owi ng the fri endl y forces to wi thdraw.
FOREIGN INTERNAL DEFENSE OPERATIONS
5-72. The pri mary rol e of SF sni pers i n FI D i s that of a teacher. Duri ng the
passi ve FI D rol e, SF sni pers wi l l be i n-country for trai ni ng and advi si ng onl y
and wi l l not have an acti ve rol e. Duri ng acti ve FI D, the SF sni pers coul d fi nd
themsel ves i n both a trai ners rol e and an acti ve rol e. I n ei ther case, passi ve
or acti ve, the pri mary tacti cs wi l l be that of conventi onal warfareoffense,
defense, and wi thdrawal .
5-73. Duri ng acti ve FI D, the SF sni per wi l l conduct counterguerri l l a
operati ons, sni per cordons and peri phery observati on posts (OPs), sni per
ambushes, urban survei l l ance, and ci vi l di sorders.
5-74. Sni per parti ci pati on i n RAP i s the mai n l i ne of attack i n accompl i shi ng
counterguerri l l a operati ons. Sni pers can enhance the protecti ve measures
surroundi ng sensi ti ve faci l i ti es or i nstal l ati ons by setti ng up observati on
posts al ong routes of access, acti ng as part of a reacti on force when the rear
area has been penetrated or patrol l i ng the area (as members of establ i shed
securi ty patrol s). They can then operate i n a stay-behi nd rol e once the
securi ty patrol has moved on. I n RAP operati ons, the sni per
Protects cri ti cal i nstal l ati ons and si tes.
Covers gaps between uni ts to avoi d i nfi l trati on.
Prevents removal of obstacl es.
Tracks enemy patrol s known to have penetrated i nto the rear area.
5-75. The sni pers anci l l ary ski l l s i n camoufl age, stal ki ng, survei l l ance, and
decepti on are al so useful i n the FI D envi ronment. The i mpact of these tal ents i s
magni fi ed when the sni per acts as a trai ner. By trai ni ng others he i s, i n effect,
performi ng i nterdi cti on much more effi ci entl y than he coul d al one. Appendi x N
provi des a sampl e sni per range compl ex (SRC) for the trai ners use.
SNIPER ELEMENT ORGANIZATION IN UW AND FID
5-76. I n a UW or FI D rol e, the sni per el ements organi ze above-team-l evel
si ze wi th el ements under the control of the commander and the S-2.
Dependi ng upon the avai l abi l i ty of trai ned personnel , the sni per el ements
shoul d organi ze as a squad at battal i on l evel (10 men or 5 teams) and as a
secti on at regi mental or bri gade l evel . A sni per coordi nator i s requi red at
regi mental l evel and desi rabl e at battal i on l evel . He shoul d be assi gned to the
S-2/G-2 staff for i ntel l i gence purposes. However, he must work cl osel y wi th
the S-3/G-3 staff for pl anni ng purposes. The sni per coordi nator shoul d be a
sni per-qual i fi ed seni or NCO, warrant offi cer, or offi cer who i s wel l versed i n
mi ssi on pl anni ng. He must al so be strong enough to ensure that the sni per
FM 3-05.222
5-24
teams are not i mproperl y depl oyed. Al l other members of the squads, the
pl atoon, and the pl atoon headquarters el ement must be sni per-qual i fi ed.
DIRECT ACTION OPERATIONS
5-77. DA operati ons are short-durati on stri kes and other smal l -scal e
offensi ve acti ons conducted by SOF to sei ze, destroy, or i nfl i ct damage on a
speci fi ed target. When empl oyed i n DA mi ssi ons, sni pers wi l l perform one or
more of the fol l owi ng four functi ons.
Harassment
5-78. Sni pers use del i berate harassment to i mpede, destroy, or prevent
movement of enemy uni ts. The degree of harassment depends on the amount
of ti me and pl anni ng put i nto the operati on. Harassment i s best sui ted for
protracted or unconventi onal operati ons. Duri ng such operati ons sni per
casual ti es wi l l be hi gh, and provi si ons for thei r repl acement must be i ncl uded
i n the harassment pl an.
Multiple Team, Area Sniper Ambush
5-79. The sni per ambush i s when mul ti pl e sni per teams operate together
to engage targets by ti med or si mul taneous fi re. Each sni per fi res a fi xed
number of rounds; the ambush ends ei ther after target engagement or after
al l shots are fi red. The pl anners for each ambush shoul d al ways consi der how
the ambush wi l l start, how the sni pers wi l l communi cate wi th each other, and
how they wi l l engage the targets i n the ki l l zone.
Sniper Cordon
5-80. A sni per cordon i s a seri es of outposts surroundi ng a speci fi c area. A
sni per cordon can prevent the enemy from enteri ng or l eavi ng a target
l ocati on. Sni pers may operate i n cordon operati ons by bei ng i ntegrated i nto
the overal l fi re pl an as a supporti ng force or i n cordon areas as i ndependent
el ements. Sni pers shoul d be used duri ng cordon operati ons to maxi mi ze thei r
preci si on l ong-range fi re capabi l i ti es. Due to the sni pers l i mi ted vol ume of
fi re and rel i ance on steal th, they possess l i ttl e capabi l i ty to become deci si vel y
engaged duri ng such operati ons. Once the sni pers have been l ocated, they
may be suppressed by fi re and maneuver or i ndi rect fi re. Therefore, the
sni pers abi l i ty to hol d or cordon an area wi l l be di rectl y commensurate to the
enemy force encountered and the support from fri endl y uni ts.
Interdiction
5-81. I nterdi cti on i s preventi ng or hi nderi ng enemy use of an area or route
by any means. When depl oyed for i nterdi cti on, the sni pers can restrai n
di smounted avenues of approach. Thei r abi l i ty to i nterdi ct vehi cul ar traffi c i s
l i mi ted to harassment unl ess armed wi th l arge-cal i ber SWSs. Sni pers can
depl oy wi th vehi cul ar i nterdi cti on el ements to harass the enemy when i t i s
forced to di smount. They can al so cause armor vehi cl es to button up,
maki ng them more vul nerabl e to anti tank weapons.
FM 3-05.222
5-25
THE STRIKE FORCE OF DA OPERATIONS
5-82. The si ze of the stri ke force depends on the mi ssi on, l ocati on of the
target, and enemy si tuati on. Pl anners tai l or the stri ke force i n si ze and
capabi l i ty to perform a speci fi c mi ssi on. I t can be a smal l team to i nterdi ct a
personnel target or a l arger force to destroy a l arge faci l i ty or pl ant.
Regardl ess of si ze, most stri ke operati ons consi st of command, securi ty,
support, and assaul t el ements. Sni pers can provi de support to any of these
el ements dependi ng on the objecti ves and needs of the commander. The
requi rements for the SF sni per i n stri ke operati ons may i ncl ude the el ements
di scussed bel ow.
Command Element
5-83. Thi s el ement forms the pri mary command post and normal l y consi sts
of the stri ke force commander and, as a mi ni mum, hi s S-2/S-3 and fi re
support el ement control l ers. The sni per coordi nator al so works wi th the
command el ement. The sni pers assi gned to the command el ement are formed
by the expedi ent pool i ng of stri ke force sni pers. They are under the control of
the sni pi ng speci al i st. Regardl ess of thei r ori gi n, pool ed sni pers stay i n thei r
ori gi nal teams. Under the command el ement, sni pers wi l l be abl e to conduct
reconnai ssance and DA mi ssi ons supporti ng the enti re stri ke force or
mul ti pl e mi ssi ons supporti ng one or more stri ke force el ements throughout
the operati on. Exampl es of these mi ssi ons may i ncl ude
Reconnoi teri ng the ORPs, routes, or exfi l trati on si tes.
Reconnoi teri ng and observi ng the objecti ve (once acti on i s i ni ti ated,
covert OP sni pers may perform a DA functi on i n support of the
stri ke force).
Establ i shi ng a reserve to i ntervene or rei nforce el ements wi th preci si on
ri fl e fi re.
Screeni ng danger areas and vul nerabl e fl anks or seal i ng off the
enemy rear.
Security Element
5-84. Sni pers may operate i n conjuncti on wi th a l arger securi ty force or
i ndependentl y i n support of the securi ty mi ssi on. When sni per teams work
wi th a l arger securi ty force, they shoul d not col l ocate wi th crew-served
weapons. Thi s step wi l l ensure that sni per fi re i s not suppressed by enemy
fi re di rected at the crew-served weapons. The el ement wi l l determi ne sni per
empl oyment by the scope of the operati on and personnel constrai nts. The
securi ty el ements mi ssi ons i ncl ude
Securi ng ral l yi ng poi nts.
Provi di ng earl y warni ng of enemy approach.
Bl ocki ng avenues of approach i nto the objecti ve area.
Preventi ng enemy escape.
Acti ng as l eft, ri ght, and rear securi ty el ements for the stri ke force.
5-85. I n smal l er operati ons, the securi ty el ement coul d consi sts enti rel y of
sni pers. Thi s woul d reduce personnel requi rements. I n l arger operati ons, a
FM 3-05.222
5-26
l arger, more fl exi bl e (anti armor, demol i ti ons) securi ty force woul d be
necessary, and sni pers woul d serve to compl ement thi s securi ty el ements
capabi l i ti es. For exampl e, armored threats requi re augmentati on by
appropri ate anti armor weapons. Sni pers can provi de accurate l ong-range
suppressi ve fi re to separate i nfantry from thei r armored uni ts and to force
tanks to button up, whi ch wi l l hi nder thei r abi l i ty to detect the l aunch of
wi re-gui ded mi ssi l es. The sni per team can empl oy l arge-bore sni per weapons
to hel p del ay and i nterdi ct l i ght materi al targets.
5-86. Sni pers performi ng securi ty mi ssi ons i n DA operati ons are wel l sui ted
to perform successi ve or si mul taneous mi ssi ons. They al so provi de earl y
warni ng of del ayi ng and harassi ng reacti on forces. Reacti on forces l ocated
some di stance from the objecti ve wi l l approach usi ng vehi cl es or ai rcraft. The
mobi l i ty assets of the reacti on force can be dedi cated to that mi ssi on and can
subsequentl y present an actual threat to the stri ke force. Sni pers may
operate as part of the securi ty force to i nterdi ct or harass reacti on force
avenues of approach or l andi ng zones (i f known or obvi ous). I n addi ti on to the
mai n rol e of securi ty, the sni pers may al so
Report i nformati on before an assaul t.
Support the assaul t force by fi re (cauti on must be used here).
Assi st i n seal i ng the objecti ve duri ng the assaul t.
Mai ntai n contact after the assaul t.
Act as a rear guard duri ng the wi thdrawal of the assaul t force.
Support Element
5-87. Thi s el ement of the stri ke force must be capabl e of pl aci ng accurate
supporti ng fi re on the objecti ve. I t must del i ver a suffi ci ent vol ume of fi re to
suppress the objecti ve and provi de cover to the assaul t el ement. I t al so
provi des fi re support to cover the wi thdrawal of the assaul t el ement from
the objecti ve.
5-88. Sni pers i n the support el ement provi de di scri mi nate fi re i n support of
the assaul t force. The sni pers opti cs faci l i tate posi ti ve target i denti fi cati on
and acqui si ti on, whi ch al l ows hi m to fi re i n cl ose proxi mi ty to fri endl y forces
wi th reduced ri sk of fratri ci de. Thi s pr acti ce i s opposed to more tradi ti onal
automati c or i ndi rect supporti ng fi re that must termi nate or shi ft as fri endl y
forces approach the target area (referred to as l i ft and shi ft). At ni ght,
fri endl y troops can wear di sti ncti ve marki ngs such as refl ecti ve tapes
or i nfrared devi ces (vi si bl e to the sni pers ni ght-vi si on equi pment) to
ai d i denti fi cati on.
5-89. When assi gned to the support el ement, sni pers shoul d organi ze i nto
four-man sni per teams (two pai rs worki ng together). There are several
reasons for thi s type of organi zati on. Fi rst, the sni per team l eader can better
control the sni pers rate and control of supporti ng fi re. Second, sni per
el ements central l y l ocated can better redepl oy to cri ti cal l ocati ons to del ay
pursui ng forces. Thi rd, l i mi ted vantage poi nts from whi ch to del i ver preci si on
ri fl e fi re may exi st. Concentrati ng sni pers at these vantage poi nts may be the
onl y effecti ve way to maxi mi ze thei r capabi l i ti es of l ong-range preci si on ri fl e
FM 3-05.222
5-27
fi re. Agai n, as i n the support rol e, sni pers shoul d not be col l ocated wi th crew-
served weapon systems.
5-90. When sni pers are assi gned to the support el ement, thei r mi ssi on
shoul d be speci fi c. The effecti veness of sni per fi re i s not i n the vol ume, but
the preci si on wi th whi ch i t i s del i vered. Sni per mi ssi ons i ncl ude
Di srupti ng C2 by engagi ng offi cers or NCOs di recti ng the defense.
Suppressi ng guards and enemy securi ty forces.
Provi di ng preci si on coveri ng force to the assaul t el ement.
Preci si on reducti on of hard poi nts.
Del ayi ng pursui ng forces after wi thdrawal .
Mai ntai ni ng contact wi th di spl aced enemy forces after the attack.
Observi ng for enemy counterattacks or conti nued harassment of the
enemy to di sorgani ze any counterattack efforts.
5-91. One advantage of sni pers i n the support el ement i s that they do not
have to l i ft and shi ft as crew-served weapons do once the assaul t el ement i s
on the objecti ve. The sni pers can conti nue to support through preci si on
ri fl e fi re.
Assault Element
5-92. Sni pers sel dom operate wi th the assaul t el ement, mai nl y because of
the need for rapi d movement combi ned wi th suppressi ve fi re. Thi s type of
maneuver sel dom al l ows for the sni pers del i berate (sedentary) fi ri ng process.
I n addi ti on, the assaul t el ement often parti ci pates i n cl ose-quarter battl e
nul l i fyi ng the sni pers standoff capabi l i ty. However, sni pers can support the
el ement when C2 woul d be better effected or i n ci rcumstances where they can
enhance the el ements mi ssi on. They may provi de cover fi re when the assaul t
el ement must pass through an area that i s dead space from other supporti ng
el ements. However, the sni pers woul d then support the assaul t el ements
movement to the objecti ve and not be an actual part of i t. They may al so
provi de support by usi ng aeri al pl atforms (Appendi x O).
ENEMY CONSIDERATIONS DURING
DIRECT ACTION OPERATIONS
5-93. The type and number of enemy securi ty forces l i kel y to be manni ng
the target or avai l abl e for reacti on must be consi dered i n the pl an. These
forces may be stati c, foot-mobi l e, vehi cl e-mounted, or ai rmobi l e.
Enemy Security Forces
5-94. Mi ssi on pl anners wi l l general l y posi ti on armored vehi cl es on the
peri meter; l i ght vehi cl es wi l l normal l y remai n i n a vehi cl e park. Armored
vehi cl es are l i kel y to become centers of resi stance, around whi ch defenders
wi l l concentrate duri ng the acti on. Thi s posi ti on wi l l present the sni pers wi th
a hi gh densi ty of targets, parti cul arl y offi cers and NCOs who wi l l tend to use
stati c-armored vehi cl es as ral l y poi nts. The l ack of vehi cul ar mobi l i ty on the
part of the stri ke force renders them vul nerabl e to a mobi l e threat. I n such
ci rcumstances, sni pers shoul d be del egated the task of i nterdi cti ng routes of
FM 3-05.222
5-28
access to vehi cl e parks. Dri vers of l i ght vehi cl es are the pri mary targets;
track or tank commanders are the pri me armored-vehi cl e targets.
On-Site Defensive Positions
5-95. DA targets deep wi thi n enemy l i nes wi l l general l y have l ess protecti on
and a l ower defensi ve posture than those l ocated cl ose to the mai n battl e
area. Target si te defenses can be ei ther hasty or permanent.
5-96. Hasty defensi ve posi ti ons provi de l ess protecti on to defendi ng
personnel than prepared ones. Stri ke force sni pers are abl e to engage such
posi ti ons at a greater di stance wi th more effecti veness due to the l i mi ted
protecti on to the targets. Sni pers shoul d consi der any object or l ocati on at the
target si te that affords protecti on to the enemy (for exampl e, behi nd l i ght
vehi cl es or i n bui l di ngs) as a hasty defensi ve posi ti on.
5-97. Permanent defensi ve posi ti ons consi st of bunkers, sandbagged fi ghti ng
posi ti ons, or prepared bui l di ngs. Such targets present uni que ci rcumstances
to the sni pers. These wel l -protected targets, whi ch often have narrow fi ri ng
ports and are mutual l y supporti ve, make engagement di ffi cul t and requi re
the sni pers to move cl oser to the targets than normal . As the range to the
targets decreases, the probabi l i ty of detecti on and engagement from the
enemy forces i ncreases.
Enemy Reaction Force
5-98. Stri ke force sni pers functi oni ng i n a support capaci ty, or as part of the
stri ke force securi ty el ement, wi l l pri mari l y target the enemy reacti on force.
SPECIAL RECONNAISSANCE OPERATIONS
5-99. The SF sni per offers some advantages to SR mi ssi ons. He i s wel l
trai ned i n survei l l ance and hi s abi l i ty to i nterdi ct materi al targets at extended
range i s often compl ementary to fol l ow-on SR mi ssi ons. I f i nterdi cti on of C2
systems i s the goal of the fol l ow-on mi ssi on, then sni pers can carry si gni fi cant
potenti al destructi on i n the form of l arge-bore sni per ri fl es.
5-100. Sni pers make extensi ve use of fi xed and rovi ng survei l l ance to
acqui re targets or assess thei r vul nerabi l i ti es. They wi l l normal l y establ i sh a
hi de posi ti on to conduct thei r survei l l ance. Once hi dden, they wi l l conti nue
noti ng detai l ed i nformati on i n thei r observati on l og. The l og wi l l serve as a
record of events and assi st i n mi ssi on debri efi ng. The sni pers wi l l report al l
PI R and I Rs as requi red.
5-101. Because of thei r mi ssi on-essenti al equi pment, sni pers are i deal l y
sui ted to perform reconnai ssance i n conjuncti on wi th thei r pri mary DA
mi ssi on. They can obtai n i nformati on about the acti vi ty and resources of an
enemy or potenti al enemy and secure data concerni ng the meteorol ogi cal ,
hydrographi c, or geographi c characteri sti cs of a parti cul ar area.
5-102. Sni pers may need to reconnoi ter enemy posi ti ons that are of speci fi c
i nterest to supported uni ts. I nformati on gathered by sni pers i ncl udes, but i s
not l i mi ted to the l ocati ons of
FDCs.
Crew-served weapons.
FM 3-05.222
5-29
Tacti cal operati ons centers (TOCs).
Gaps i n enemy wi re.
Li steni ng posts (LPs) and OPs.
Gaps between enemy uni ts and posi ti ons.
I nfi l trati on routes.
5-103. Sni pers may al so i nfi l trate through enemy posi ti ons i n support of
offensi ve operati ons or to harass enemy rear areas. Once sni per teams have
i nfi l trated enemy posi ti ons, thei r tasks may be to report i nformati on on
Troop strength and movements.
Concentrati ons and reserve l ocati ons.
OPs and weapons l ocati ons.
Command, control , and communi cati ons faci l i ti es.
COUNTERTERRORISM OPERATIONS
5-104. The pri mary mi ssi on of SOF i n counterterrori sm (CT) i s to appl y
speci al i zed capabi l i ti es to precl ude, preempt, and resol ve terrori st i nci dents
abroad. Sni pers provi de three pri mary functi ons i n CT operati ons. They
Del i ver di scri mi nate fi re to i nterdi ct hosti l e targets.
Cover the entry teams i nto the objecti ve area wi th ri fl e fi re.
Provi de the CT force commander wi th hi s most accurate target
i ntel l i gence.
5-105. I n the l ast case, the commander wi l l normal l y posi ti on the sni per i n
an i deal posi ti on to observe the enemy. Most frequentl y, thi s posi ti on wi l l be
the commanders onl y vi ew of the target.
5-106. Counterterrori sm operati ons requi re extensi ve trai ni ng and
coordi nati on. Most i mportant, the sni per teams must know the pl ans and
acti ons of the entry teams to avoi d possi bl e i njury to fri endl y personnel , and
they must fi re when tol d to do so. Fai l ure to engage and neutral i ze a target
can have devastati ng consequences, si mi l ar to what occurred i n the 1972
Ol ympi c games i n Muni ch, Federal Republ i c of Germany. Sni pers di d not
neutral i ze thei r terrori st targets on command. The resul t was that the
terrori sts were free to execute the hostages. To compound the probl em, the
sni pers were so confused that they shot and ki l l ed several of thei r own men.
Of course, overzeal ous sni pers can create resul ts si mi l ar to what occurred i n
Los Angel es, Cal i forni a. Pol i ce sni pers shot and ki l l ed a bank presi dent who
was i ndi cati ng a gunman by poi nti ng hi s fi nger. The overanxi ous pol i ce
sni per thought the man was poi nti ng a gun and shot hi m. Obvi ousl y, the l i ne
between shoot and do not shoot i s thi n and can be stretched thi nner by haste
or i ndeci si veness.
5-107. Part of the sol uti on to these probl ems l i es i n the sel ecti on and
trai ni ng process. Duri ng the sel ecti on process, an i ndi vi dual s mi nd i s the one
vari abl e that a psychol ogi st cannot effecti vel y measure. I n fact, oftenti mes
psychol ogi sts cannot agree on what trai ts to l ook for i n a sni per. How does
one pi ck a man to del i beratel y ki l l another man who presents no i mmedi ate
threat to hi m personal l y? Unfortunatel y, the real test of a sni per comes onl y
FM 3-05.222
5-30
when i t i s ti me to pul l the tri gger. Onl y then wi l l the sni pers rel i abi l i ty
defi ni tel y be known.
5-108. Another probl em that seems to mani fest i tsel f i n CT scenari os i s the
Stockhol m Syndrome. Thi s type of reacti on occurs when the sni per i s unabl e
to shoot a person who has become fami l i ar to hi m. The syndrome mani fests
i tsel f when the sni per has conducted constant survei l l ance of hi s target and
becomes so fami l i ar wi th the targets acti ons, habi ts, and manneri sms that
the target becomes more human, al most wel l acquai ntedtoo fami l i ar to
shoot. On the other hand, some reports have i ndi cated the opposi te to be true;
some sni pers hope to have the opportuni ty to shoot someone from some
twi sted, personal moti vati on. Perhaps thi s happened i n Los Angel es.
Neverthel ess, these psychol ogi cal extremeseager or rel uctant fi rersare
i nappropri ate to the sni pers functi on; the sni per must be somewhere i n
between.
COMBAT SEARCH AND RESCUE
5-109. I n CSAR operati ons, the sni pers rol e i s extremel y l i mi ted because the
mi ssi on i s to rescue and not to i nterdi ct. However, the sni per can provi de
tradi ti onal l ong-range securi ty and earl y warni ng to rescue forces. Hi s abi l i ty
to operate i n deni ed areas can greatl y assi st the rescue forces by provi di ng
accurate i nformati on regardi ng the rescue. The sni per can i nfi l trate before
the rescue and conduct survei l l ance of the rescue area unnoti ced. The U.S.
Ai r Force i s consi deri ng usi ng sni pers wi th thei r pararescue uni ts (i n pl ace of
machi ne guns) to provi de l ong-range securi ty duri ng rescue operati ons. Thi s
method woul d gi ve them the benefi t of sel ecti vel y i nterdi cti ng threat targets
whi l e not endangeri ng i nnocent bystanders.
COUNTERSNIPER
5-110. A sni per team i s the best asset avai l abl e to a commander for a
countersni per operati on. The team pl ans and coordi nates the operati on to
el i mi nate the enemy sni per threat. A countersni per operati on occurs between
two hi ghl y trai ned el ementsthe sni per team and the enemy sni pereach
knowi ng the capabi l i ti es and l i mi ts of the other.
5-111. A sni per teams fi rst task i s to determi ne i f there i s a sni per threat. I f
so, i t then i denti fi es i nformati on that may be gai ned from the uni t i n the
operati ons area, such as
Enemy sol di ers i n speci al camoufl age uni forms.
Enemy sol di ers wi th weapons i n cases or drag bags, whi ch i ncl udes:
Ri fl es of unusual confi gurati on
Long-barrel ri fl es.
Mounted tel escopes.
Bol t-acti on ri fl es.
Si ngl e-shot fi re at key personnel (commanders, pl atoon l eaders, seni or
NCOs, or weapons crews).
Lack or reducti on of enemy patrol s duri ng si ngl e-shot fi res.
FM 3-05.222
5-31
Li ght refl ecti ng from opti cal l enses.
Reconnai ssance patrol s reporti ng of smal l groups of enemy (one to
three men) by vi sual si ghti ng or tracki ng.
Di scovery of si ngl e, expended casi ngs (usual l y of ri fl e cal i bers
7.62x54R, 7.62NM, 300WM, 338 Lapua)
5-112. The sni per team next determi nes the best method to el i mi nate the
enemy sni per. I t
Gathers i nformati on, whi ch i ncl udes:
Ti mes of day preci si on fi re occurs.
Locati ons where enemy sni per fi re was encountered.
Locati ons of enemy sni per si ghti ngs.
Materi al evi dence of enemy sni pers such as empty brass casi ngs
or equi pment.
Determi nes patterns.
5-113. The sni per team eval uates the i nformati on to detect the enemys
establ i shed patterns or routi nes. I t conducts a map reconnai ssance, studi es
aeri al photos, or carri es out a ground reconnai ssance to determi ne travel
patterns. The sni per must pi cture hi msel f i n the enemys posi ti on and ask,
How woul d I accompl i sh thi s mi ssi on?
5-114. Once a pattern or routi ne i s detected, the sni per team determi nes the
best l ocati on and ti me to engage the enemy sni per. I t al so requests
Coordi nati ng routes and prepl anned fi res (di rect and i ndi rect).
Addi ti onal prepl otted targets (fi re support).
I nfantry support to canal i ze or ambush the sni per.
Addi ti onal sni per teams for mutual supporti ng fi re.
Bai ti ng of l i kel y engagement areas to decei ve the enemy sni per i nto
commi tment by fi ri ng.
Al l el ements be i n pl ace 12 hours before the expected engagement ti me.
5-115. Duri ng a countersni per operati on, the team must i gnore battl e acti vi ty
and concentrate on one objecti vethe enemy sni per. When an enemy sni per i s
operati ng i n a uni ts area, the sni per team ensures that the uni t uses the
fol l owi ng passi ve countermeasures to defend agai nst enemy sni per fi re:
Do not establ i sh routi nesfor exampl e, consi stent meal ti mes,
ammuni ti on resuppl y, assembl y area procedures, or day-to-day
acti vi ti es that have devel oped i nto a routi ne.
Conduct al l meeti ngs, bri efi ngs, or gatheri ngs of personnel under cover
or duri ng l i mi ted vi si bi l i ty.
Cover or conceal equi pment.
Remove rank from hel mets and col l ars. Do not sal ute offi cers. Leaders
shoul d not use authori tati ve manneri sms.
FM 3-05.222
5-32
I ncrease OPs and use other methods to i ncrease the uni ts observati on
capabi l i ti es. Al l i nformati on shoul d be consol i dated at the S-2 for
anal ysi s and l ogged-i n regardl ess of i nsi gni fi cance.
Bri ef patrol s on what to l ook for, such as si ngl e, expended rounds or
di fferent camoufl age materi al s.
Do not di spl ay awareness of the enemys presence at any ti me.
Be aware that some of the enemy sni pers may be women. Patrol s and
OPs must not be mi sl ed when si ghti ng a woman wi th a mounted
tel escope on her ri fl e. She i s a deadl y opponent.
Be aware of resuppl y operati ons by women and chi l dren i nto suspected
or possi bl e sni per l ocati ons. Watch for movement and schedul ed
patterns.
CONVENTIONAL OFFENSIVE OPERATIONS
5-116. Sni pers can add decepti on to the battl efi el d and provi de economy-of-
force to al l ow the conventi onal force commander to focus combat power
el sewhere. Commanders must al so thi nk of sni per operati ons i n uni l ateral
terms. The effect of sni pers on a scal e of ones and twos i s smal l . However,
when empl oyed i n coordi nated acti ons on a broad front, thei r effect can be
substanti al , not onl y throughout the battl efi el d but al so before, duri ng, and
after the battl e. They can provi de support to conventi onal uni ts i n the
fol l owi ng cri ti cal phases of offensi ve operati ons:
PREOFFENSIVE MISSIONS
5-117. Any mi ssi ons before offensi ve operati ons wi l l pri mari l y be i n the deep
battl e area to gather i nformati on on the enemys di sposi ti on. Sni pers can hel p
col l ect thi s i nformati on and i nterdi ct sel ected targets, i f necessary. I f the
objecti ve i s to di vert enemy assets from the mai n effort, then sni pers can
i mi tate the acti ons that the Russi an parti sans conducted agai nst the
Germans i n Worl d War I I . The resul t of such acti ons can i mpai r l ogi sti cs
operati ons and demoral i ze enemy sol di ers i n thei r own rear areas. The
preoffensi ve mi ssi ons are general l y HUMI NT-ori ented. However, the sni per
can perform the fol l owi ng DA functi ons as a natural consequence of hi s
proxi mi ty to the enemy as a HUMI NT asset.
Reconnoitering
5-118. The sni pers tasks can vary wi th each reconnoi teri ng mi ssi on. Some of
hi s functi ons are to
Gather (real -ti me) i nformati on on enemy di sposi ti ons, terrai n,
and weather.
Penetrate enemy securi ty zones i n an effort to determi ne the extent
and nature of enemy decepti on efforts.
Confi rm or deny exi sti ng i ntel l i gence as requested by the commander
or S-2.
Locate securabl e routes or axes of advance.
FM 3-05.222
5-33
Locate enemy reserve forces and the possi bl e routes they coul d use to
rei nforce the objecti ve.
Establ i sh or modi fy prepl anned fi res of i ndi rect weapons to more
effecti vel y reduce TOCs, FDCs, crew-served weapons, hard poi nts,
avenues of approach, and retreat.
Locate enemy securi ty measures, such as mi nes, obstacl es, or barri ers.
Harassment
5-119. Thi s functi on serves to l ower the enemys moral e and i nhi bi t hi s
freedom of movement wi thi n hi s own l i nes. I t takes the feel i ng of a secure
area away from the enemy and i nhi bi ts hi s abi l i ty to rest hi s troops. The
sni per general l y performs thi s type of harassment at ranges greater than
500 meters.
Infiltration
5-120. Before an attack, sni pers i nfi l trate the gaps between enemy uni ts and
posi ti ons and establ i sh themsel ves i n the enemys rear area. Duri ng the
attack the i nfi l trated sni pers wi l l engage speci fi c targets and targets of
opportuni ty both on the mai n l i ne of resi stance and i n the rear area. Thi s
method di verts the enemys attenti on from the attacki ng uni ts and di srupts
the freedom of movement i n i ts own rear areas. Speci fi c targets engaged by
i nfi l trati ng sni pers i ncl ude
Enemy sni pers.
Command, control , and communi cati ons faci l i ti es and personnel .
Crew-served weapons personnel .
Arti l l ery and forward ai r control l ers.
Di smounted reserve forces.
Mi l i tary pol i cemen.
Wi re repai r and resuppl y parti es.
MISSIONS DURING THE OFFENSE
5-121. Sni pi ng duri ng the offensi ve i s DA-ori ented. Sni pers are attached to
fri endl y uni ts to provi de i mmedi ate di rect support by means of preci si on ri fl e
fi re. The mai n functi on of attached sni pers wi l l be the suppressi on of enemy
crew-served weapons, enemy sni pers, and C2 personnel . Sni pers can al so
support the offensi ve by i nterdi cti ng fol l ow-on or reserve forces (such as
second-echel on combat forces or l ogi sti cs). Conventi onal sni pers, assi gned to
thei r parent uni ts, can al so i nterdi ct key targets i n the mai n battl e area. Al so,
attached sni pers can be used to screen the fl anks of advanci ng uni ts, cover
dead space from supporti ng crew-served weapons, and engage speci fi c
sel ected targets of the defendi ng enemy uni ts. Sni pers mai ntai n pressure on
the retreati ng forces to prevent assembl y and reconsol i dati on. The sni per wi l l
pursue retreati ng forces unti l he reaches hi s l i mi t of advance. Then he wi l l
prepare for postoffensi ve operati ons.
FM 3-05.222
5-34
POSTOFFENSIVE MISSIONS
5-122. Sni pers postoffensi ve rol e begi ns duri ng the consol i dati on of the
objecti ve. Sni pers are depl oyed forward of the consol i dati ng uni ts OP or LP
l i ne. The sni pers wi l l observe for enemy assembl y for counterattack and
ei ther harass wi th di rect fi re or cal l for i ndi rect fi re. Once the enemy begi ns
movement to the l i ne of departure, the sni per wi l l i nterdi ct the advance of
di smounted counterattacki ng forces or button up advanci ng armor. Thi s
i nterdi cti on wi l l gi ve the anti tank weapons a better chance of success and
survi val . When suffi ci ent numbers of sni pers are avai l abl e, hasty sni per
ambushes are establ i shed to i nterdi ct patrol s, probi ng el ements, and enemy
sni per teams that normal l y precede a counterattack. Sni pers can al so use
these ambushes to harass the di spl aced enemy to prevent hi m from
establ i shi ng a base to counterattack. One of the pri mary jobs of the sni per i s
to get the enemy to depl oy earl y i n the attack formati on. Thi s wi l l cost the
enemy posi ti ve control of hi s attack formati on.
Interdiction
5-123. I n the i nterdi cti on mi ssi on, sni pers push out beyond the range of
fri endl y support i n an effort to prei nfi l trate reestabl i shed fi rst-echel on
defenses, i nfi l trate second-echel on defenses, or engage counterattacki ng
forces from the rear. They wi l l i nterdi ct l i nes of communi cati on i n the
enemys rear areas and force hi m to commi t more troops to the rear areas and
weaken hi s forward l i nes. Thi s can al so cause the enemy to rei nforce the
wrong areas before the next attack.
Security
5-124. Because of thei r abi l i ty to remai n undetected i n cl ose proxi mi ty to the
enemy, sni pers can mai ntai n contact wi th di spl aced enemy forces. Duri ng
consol i dati on, sni pers range ahead of the mai n LP or OP l i ne, determi ne the
enemys whereabouts, and conti nue to harass unti l the attack i s resumed.
Forward depl oyment al so permi ts sni pers to provi de earl y warni ng of
i mpendi ng counterattacks.
Countersniping
5-125. Di spl aced enemy forces wi l l often resul t i n i ndi vi dual s or smal l
groups getti ng cut off from thei r parent uni ts. Oftenti mes sni pers wi l l stay
behi nd to di srupt the attackers consol i dati on efforts. As these threats are
smal l , sni pers can track down and el i mi nate stay-behi nds and i sol ated
pockets of resi stance. At the very l east, sni pers can suppress them unti l
sui tabl e forces can be spared to deal wi th them.
RESERVE MISSIONS
5-126. I n a reserve rol e, sni pers can gi ve support where needed. They can
rei nforce success or react to enemy i ncursi ons. They can al so provi de stopgap
measures unti l the commander can ral l y forces that are more appropri ate.
Sni pers can mai ntai n securi ty i n thei r own rear areas by usi ng steal th and
unconventi onal ski l l s to seek out enemy forces. Thei r mai n support rol es are
as fol l ows:
Rei nforcement i nvol ves attachi ng themsel ves di rectl y to the uni t
engaged and addi ng thei r fi res to those of the uni t.
FM 3-05.222
5-35
I nterventi on enabl es the sni per to outfl ank the l ocal resi stance and
suppress i t wi th preci si on ri fl e fi re.
5-127. Sni pers may al so conduct a di smounted movement to contact by
depl oyi ng before the movement. Once depl oyed, they wi l l move al ong the
route to reconnoi ter the route and sel ect sni per hi de posi ti ons to secure the
route for the movi ng el ement. Dependi ng on the number of sni pers avai l abl e,
i t i s possi bl e to secure a corri dor over 1,500 meters at the wi dest (dependi ng
on the terrai n) and as deep as permi tted by the number of sni per teams and
terrai n. Duri ng reconnai ssance and combat patrol s, sni pers may functi on as
part of the securi ty or support el ements.
CONVENTIONAL DEFENSIVE OPERATIONS
5-128. The SF sni pers support to conventi onal defensi ve operati ons i s
si mi l ar to offensi ve operati ons. He can l end support anywhere on the
battl efi el d i ncl udi ng deep, rear, and mai n battl e areas. However,
conventi onal sni pers normal l y operate i n the mai n battl e area i n concert wi th
thei r parent uni tsmaki ng SF sni per support sel dom necessary i n thi s area.
The SF sni pers most i mportant rol e i s i n the deep battl e area. The rear battl e
area i s al so an area of empl oyment, provi di ng a rear-area threat exi sts.
5-129. Sni per operati ons i n the deep battl e area can be used to keep enemy
efforts off-bal ance and di rected toward rear area protecti on. The more enemy
assets the sni per el i mi nates from the deep battl e area, the fewer forces
the enemy wi l l have to execute attacks agai nst the mai n effort. The sni per
can al so provi de i nformati on on enemy strengths, l ocati on of reserves,
and i ntenti ons.
SNIPER INTERDICTION
5-130. Just as i n offensi ve operati ons, SOF uni ts usi ng sni pers shoul d depl oy
on a broad front to di srupt the enemys order of battl e. The mai n goal i s to
di srupt fol l ow-on forces i n the deep battl e area. Sni pers can assi st i n
i nterdi cti ng the enemys soft underbel l yhi s unarmored l ogi sti cs col umns,
fragi l e C2 nodes, and cri ti cal mi l i tary weapons such as mi ssi l es and fi re
control equi pment.
5-131. Defensi ve operati ons that coul d i nvol ve the sni per are
Area defense.
Peri meter defense.
Securi ty forces.
Reverse sl ope defense.
Defense of bui l t-up or forti fi ed posi ti ons.
Ri ver l i ne defense.
Mobi l e defense.
Economy-of-force.
Wi thdrawal operati ons.
5-132. Threat doctri ne cal l s for si mul taneous attacks at cri ti cal nodes
l ocated i n U.S. rear areas. The sni per i s i deal l y sui ted to l ocate and i nterdi ct
FM 3-05.222
5-36
the threat of enemy SO uni ts that conduct such operati ons. The sni per uses
the fol l owi ng methods to achi eve these objecti ves:
Harassment
5-133. Sni pers operate best i n defensi ve operati ons beyond the FLOT to
provi de earl y warni ng of the approachi ng enemy, di sorgani ze hi s attack, and
cause hi m to depl oy earl y. I f armored vehi cl es are bei ng used, i t wi l l cause
the vehi cl e commanders to button up earl y. Sni pers shoul d cl osel y i ntegrate
i n the securi ty force whi l e performi ng thi s mi ssi on.
5-134. Sni pers can al so work di rectl y i nto the FLOT defensi ve posi ti ons or
assume thei r posi ti ons after wi thdrawal of the securi ty fi re. Sni pers i n
defense of the FLOT shoul d operate si mi l arl y to the crew-served weapons.
Sni pers can obtai n opti mum resul ts by maxi mi zi ng thei r standoff range to the
targets, posi ti oni ng on l ucrati ve avenues of approach, and engagi ng targets of
opportuni ty. Sni per posi ti ons shoul d not be empl aced near obvi ous i ndi rect
fi re targets. No matter how wel l conceal ed a hi de i s, i f i t i s i n the bursti ng
radi us of an i ndi rect fi re weapon, i t can be compromi sed and destroyed.
5-135. The use of ski l l ed mar ksmen wi l l enhance the over al l combat
effecti veness of the defensi ve posi ti ons. Ski l l ed mar ksmen ar e not
necessar i l y sni per s. They ar e si mpl y ski l l ed r i fl e shots who, for whatever
r eason, have nei ther the i ncl i nati on nor the backgr ound ski l l to be
successful sni per s. However , they do possess the abi l i ty to engage tar gets
at l ong r anges. When equi pped wi th speci al weapons, such as cal i ber .50
or hi gh-power ed tar get r i fl es, they ar e par ti cul ar l y useful for conducti ng
l ong-r ange har assment.
Delay
5-136. When fri endl y forces need to wi thdraw from contact wi th the enemy,
sni pers can del ay and i mpede the enemys advance. They depl oy throughout
the wi thdrawi ng uni ts sector. By usi ng a seri es of i nterl ocki ng del ay
posi ti ons, a handful of sni pers can i nterdi ct di smounted avenues of approach
and severel y i mpede advanci ng enemy forces. They can use successi ve del ay
posi ti ons to permi t the wi thdrawi ng forces to reassembl e and establ i sh new
defensi ve posi ti ons. Sni per el ements must remai n mobi l e to avoi d deci si ve
engagement wi th the attacki ng enemy. They can operate duri ng the
wi thdrawal to cover obstacl es wi th preci si on ri fl e fi re and thus i ncrease the
effecti veness of the obstacl es. They can al so be the stay-behi nd el ement and
attack the enemy forces rear area and suppl y col umns.
Rear Area Protection
5-137. I n thi s mi ssi on, sni pers can enhance the protecti ve measures
surroundi ng sensi ti ve faci l i ti es or i nstal l ati ons. They can strengthen these
measures by ei ther establ i shi ng OPs al ong routes of access, acti ng as a
reacti on force to rear area penetrati ons, or by patrol l i ng. Sni pers wi l l not
normal l y patrol by themsel ves but as members of establ i shed securi ty patrol s.
5-138. The rol e of sni pi ng i n securi ty operati ons i s that of extendi ng the
depth and scope of the securi ty effort. Speci fi c rol es i ncl ude
Protecti ng cri ti cal i nstal l ati ons, si tes, or projects from i nfi l trati on.
FM 3-05.222
5-37
Domi nati ng the gaps between uni ts to prevent i nfi l trati on by enemy
combat el ements or patrol s.
Preventi ng the removal or breachi ng of obstacl es.
Tracki ng enemy patrol s known to have penetrated i nto the rear area.
SNIPER SUPPORT TO DEFENSIVE HUMINT COLLECTION
5-139. Usi ng sni pers i n defensi ve operati ons provi des a vari ety of means to
mai ntai n constant offensi ve pressure on the enemy. Sni pi ng i n the defense i s
dependent on the col l ecti on and use of i nformati on. When the sni pers col l ect
i nformati on for thei r personal use, i t i s known as targeti ng. I nformati on
col l ected for organi zati onal use i s but an el ement of the total HUMI NT
col l ecti on effort of the sni pers uni t. OPs are the sni pers pri mary means of
col l ecti ng i nformati on i n the defense. I n the rol e of the observers, the sni pers
establ i sh a seri es of OPs that domi nate thei r sector. These OPs are of two
typesovert and covert.
Overt Observation Post
5-140. Thi s OP i s not overt i n that i ts l ocati on or functi on i s known to the
enemy, but that the sni pers may engage hi gh-pri ori ty targets from i t. Whi l e
fi ri ng from the OP may not necessari l y reveal i ts exact l ocati on, i t wi l l
certai nl y reveal the sni pers presence and the fact that such a l ocati on exi sts.
Covert Observation Post
5-141. The sni per uses thi s OP because i t offers a commandi ng vi ew of
enemy posi ti ons. These posts shoul d remai n unknown to the enemy and
shoul d never be fi red from, regardl ess of the temptati on to do so. The
i nformati on that the sni per col l ects from a wel l -si ted covert OP i s far more
val uabl e than any targets that may appear.
CIVIL DISTURBANCE ASSISTANCE
5-142. The U.S. Army provi des mi l i tary assi stance to ci vi l authori ti es i n ci vi l
di sturbances when i t i s requested or di rected I AW prevai l i ng l aws. When
such assi stance i s requested, the mi l i tary forces assi st l ocal authori ti es i n the
restorati on and mai ntenance of l aw and order.
5-143. Mi l i tary assi stance i s consi dered as a l ast resort. When commi tted,
i nvol vement i s to the degree justi fi ed by the ci rcumstances to restore l aw and
order wi th a mi ni mum l oss of l i fe and property. When usi ng force, the gui di ng
pri nci pl e shoul d be mi ni mum force consi stent wi th mi ssi on accompl i shment.
5-144. The sni per teams preci si on fi re and observati on abi l i ti es gi ve
authori ti es a way to detect and el i mi nate cri mi nal threats wi th l ow ri sk to
i nnocent personnel . The use of sni per teams i n ci vi l di sorders must be
pl anned and control l ed. They may be an i mportant factor i n the control and
el i mi nati on of weapons fi re di rected agai nst ri ot control authori ti es. Sni pers
functi oni ng i n thi s rol e must operate under stri ct ROE. However the team
must never al l ow i tsel f to be overrun. The team shoul d al ways pl an i ts
mul ti pl e covert posi ti ons.
FM 3-05.222
5-38
CHARACTERISTICS OF URBAN VIOLENCE
5-145. Crowd behavi or duri ng a ci vi l di sturbance i s essenti al l y emoti onal
and wi thout reason. The feel i ngs and the momentum generated have a
tendency to make the whol e group act l i ke i ts worst members. Ski l l ful
agi tators or subversi ve el ements expl oi t these psychol ogi cal factors duri ng
these di sorders. Regardl ess of the reason for vi ol ence, the resul ts may consi st
of i ndi scri mi nate l ooti ng and burni ng or open and vi ol ent attacks on offi ci al s,
bui l di ngs, and i nnocent passersby. Ri oters may set fi re to bui l di ngs and
vehi cl es to
Bl ock the advance of troops.
Create confusi on and di versi on.
Achi eve goal s of property destructi on, l ooti ng, and sni pi ng.
5-146. I n addi ti on, organi zed ri oters or agi tators may use sni per fi re to cause
government forces to overreact.
SNIPER SUPPORT DURING CIVIL DISTURBANCES
5-147. The sni per team uses pl anni ng factors to esti mate the amount of
ti me, coordi nati on, and effort that i t wi l l take to support l ocal authori ti es,
when faced wi th an enemy sni per threat or any type of ci vi l di sturbance such
as a ri ot. For the teams mi ssi on to run smoothl y and be a success, al l
parti ci pants shoul d consi der the fol l owi ng factors.
Briefings
5-148. Sni per teams must recei ve a detai l ed bri efi ng on the areas and
routes wi thi n the ri ot area. Representati ves of l ocal authori ti es shoul d be
assi gned to the sni per teams for protecti on and communi cati ons wi th l ocal
i ndi genous personnel .
Adequate Personnel
5-149. The ci vi l authori ti es shoul d have suffi ci ent sni per teams to provi de
maxi mum versati l i ty to the ri ot control personnel . Sni per teams shoul d al so
have at l east one reacti on team assi gned to them. Thi s capabi l i ty wi l l permi t
the team to di rect a reacti on team to a troubl emaker for apprehensi on
wi thout the requi rement to fi re a weapon. These teams shoul d consi st of both
mi l i tary and l ocal authori ty personnel .
Observation Areas and Fields of Fire
5-150. Observati on areas and fi el ds of fi re are cl earl y defi ned by streets and
hi ghways. However, survei l l ance and detecti on are compl i cated by the
numerous rooftops, wi ndows, and doorways from whi ch hosti l e fi re may be
di rected. Sni per teams take maxi mum advantage of domi nant bui l di ngs or
rooftops to mai ntai n conti nuous observati on of a ri ot scene. Mutual l y
supporti ng teams cover bl i nd spots or dead space wi thi n the area. Sni per
teams must pl ace themsel ves at vari ous hei ghts to gi ve them vi ew i nto the
di fferent mul ti stori ed bui l di ngs.
FM 3-05.222
5-39
Cover and Concealment
5-151. Bui l t-up areas offer excel l ent cover and conceal ment for both the
ri oters and the sni per teams.
Avenues of Approach
5-152. The best avenues of approach to a ri ot scene, or to poi nts of
observati on and fi ri ng posi ti ons, are through bui l di ng i nteri ors. Movement
through streets may be di ffi cul t and easi l y detected by ri oters. Sni per teams
shoul d al so consi der underground passages such as cabl eways.
Operations
5-153. Sni per teams shoul d operate i n each establ i shed area. The teams
remai n at a suffi ci ent di stance from control troops to keep from getti ng
i nvol ved i n di rect ri ot acti ons.
Firing Positions
5-154. The fi ri ng posi ti on shoul d provi de the maxi mum stabi l i ty, because
preci si on fi re i s used to wound and not to ki l l . A stray shot that wounds or
ki l l s a woman, chi l d, or unarmed ri oter may onl y i nfl ame an al ready ri otous
si tuati on. When fi ri ng from a wi ndow, the sni per team shoul d fi re, i f possi bl e,
from a supported posi ti on i n the back of the room. The di stance wi l l muffl e
the muzzl e bl ast and keep the muzzl e fl ash from bei ng noti ced. I f the sni per
shows hi s ri fl e or part of hi s body, i t may i nvi te fi re from weapons-equi pped
ri oti ng personnel . When possi bl e, he shoul d use a si l encer on hi s sni per ri fl e.
Camouflage
5-155. Sni per teams shoul d dress i n drab or bl endi ng cl othi ng to prevent
i denti fi cati on or observati on. However, sni pers must wear an i denti fyi ng
mark so as not to be engaged by fri endl y forces.
Civil Authorities
5-156. Si nce ci vi l authori ti es are i n charge, sni pers mai ntai n a di rect l i ne of
communi cati ons (LOC) wi th the ci vi l i an who permi ts or di rects sni pers to
engage. Ci vi l authori ti es al so determi ne the cal i ber of weapon as wel l as the
type of ammuni ti on. However, usual l y anythi ng wi thi n 300 meters i s engaged
wi th 5.56-mm ammuni ti on unl ess speci al penetrati on capabi l i ty i s requi red.
Sniper Team Control
5-157. A key to effecti ve sni per team use i s control . When di rected to engage i n
countersni pi ng acti vi ti es, the sni per teams acti ons must be swi ft and preci se.
The sni per l eader must mai ntai n posi ti ve control over the teams at al l ti mes.
Rules of Engagement
5-158. When countersni pi ng i s requi red, the sni per team shoul d di rect i ts
preci si on fi re to wound rather than to ki l l , i f possi bl e, unl ess i n di rect defense
of human l i fe.
FM 3-05.222
5-40
5-159. Sni pers empl oyed to counteract sni per fi re from a street di sorder
requi re qui ck and deci si ve acti on. When di rected to support the control forces
duri ng a street di sorder, the sni per team
Depl oys to rooftops or vantage poi nts provi di ng observati on and fi el ds
of fi re i nto the ri ot area.
I nsti tutes communi cati ons wi th the commander.
Begi ns observati on i mmedi atel y and conti nues i t.
Rel ays i nformati on conti nuousl y to the commander.
Conducts countersni pi ng acti ons as di rected.
5-160. Duri ng ci vi l di sorders, ri oters may sei ze control of bui l di ngs for the
purpose of usi ng the vantage poi nts of rooftops or wi ndows from whi ch to
di rect hosti l e sni per fi re on ri ot control forces. The sni per team may have to
provi de coveri ng fi re to al l ow the searchi ng or cl eari ng team to approach and
cl ear the bui l di ng. On the other hand, the sni per may have to use preci si on
fi re to engage the hosti l e sni per i f the hosti l e sni pi ng i s di rected at control
authori ti es i n mob control acti ons.
5-161. Upon i denti fyi ng or l ocati ng a ri otous sni per who i s di recti ng fi re at
fi re-fi ghti ng personnel , the sni per i mmedi atel y reacts to reduce the hosti l e
sni per fi re. He di rects thi s countersni per fi re wi th accuracy to ki l l .
5-162. Ci vi l authori ti es must try to qui ckl y control l ooti ng because i t may
al so l ead to more seri ous acts of murder and arson, often agai nst i nnocent
nonparti ci pants. The sni per teams empl oyment to assi st i n l ooti ng control i s
mai nl y for observati on, communi cati on, and to act as a coveri ng force shoul d
the l ooters fi re upon the control forces. When control forces are fi red upon,
the sni per team i mmedi atel y engages the ri otous sni per to faci l i tate
apprehensi on by the control forces.
5-163. The sni per teams rol e i n support of ri ot control forces i s equal l y
i mportant duri ng the hours of darkness. Opti cal equi pment, to i ncl ude NVDs,
al l ows the sni per team to provi de prol onged ni ght observati on. Therefore, the
team can suffi ci entl y accompany patrol forces, man observati on posts and
roadbl ocks, or cover control troops duri ng mob control acti vi ti es.
5-164. Use of sni pers duri ng ci vi l di sturbances can become a source of
greater agi tati on among the ri oters. Ci vi l authori ti es shoul d publ i cl y remove
compromi sed sni pers whi l e l eavi ng the other sni pers i n pl ace. I n many
i nstances thi s removal wi l l embol den the agi tators and permi t rapi d
i denti fi cati on for qui ck apprehensi on by control personnel . I n the same vei n,
fi rers may become more rel axed and show themsel ves for easi er i denti fi cati on
by the posted countersni pers.
6-1
Chapter 6
Sniper Operations in Urban Terrain
Sni pers are extremel y effecti ve i n urban terrai n. Thei r l ong-range
preci si on fi re can engage targets at a di stance; thei r advanced opti cs can
di scri mi nate i ndi vi dual poi nt targets to save i nnocent bystanders or
protect property; and thei r observati on ski l l s can offer superi or
i ntel l i gence-col l ecti on capabi l i ti es. I n an urban envi ronment, the sni per i s
both a casual ty producer and an i nti mi dati ng psychol ogi cal weapon.
URBAN TERRAIN
6-1. Urban terrai n consi sts mai nl y of man-made structures. Bui l di ngs are
the mai n components of urban terrai n. They provi de cover and conceal ment,
l i mi t fi el ds of fi re and observati on, and i mpai r movement. Thi ck-wal l ed
bui l di ngs provi de excel l ent protecti on from hosti l e fi re.
6-2. Urban streets are general l y avenues of approach. However, forces
movi ng al ong streets are often channal i zed by bui l di ngs and terrai n that offer
mi ni mal off-road maneuver space. Obstacl es on streets prove di ffi cul t to
bypass, due to these restri cti ve avenues of approach.
6-3. Underground systems found i n some urban areas are easi l y overl ooked
but can be i mportant to the outcome of operati ons. They i ncl ude subways,
sewers, cel l ars, and uti l i ty systems.
6-4. Ci vi l i ans wi l l be present i n urban operati ons, often i n great numbers.
Concern for the safety of noncombatants may restri ct fi re and l i mi t maneuver
opti ons avai l abl e to the commander.
CATEGORIES OF URBAN TERRAIN
6-5. The worl d i s l argel y urban i n terms of popul ati on concentrati on.
Commanders categori ze urban terrai n as l arge ci ti es, towns and smal l ci ti es,
vi l l ages, and stri p areas.
Large Cities (population greater than 100,000)
6-6. I n Europe, other than the former Sovi et Uni on, there are approxi matel y
410 ci ti es wi th a popul ati on of more than 100,000. Large ci ti es frequentl y
form the core of a l arger, densel y popul ated urban compl ex consi sti ng of the
ci ty, i ts suburban areas, and smal l towns. Such compl exes have the
appearance of a si ngl e l arge and conti nuous ci ty contai ni ng mi l l i ons of peopl e
and occupyi ng vast areas of l and.
FM 3-05.222
6-2
Towns and Small Cities (population of 3,000 to 100,000)
6-7. These areas are mostl y l ocated al ong major l i nes of communi cati ons and
si tuated i n ri ver val l eys. Si mi l ar to l arger ci ti es, these areas are conti nui ng
to expand and wi l l eventual l y form new concentrati ons or merge wi th
exi sti ng ones.
Villages (population of less than 3,000)
6-8. I n most cases, vi l l ages are agri cul tural l y ori ented and usual l y exi st
among the more open cul ti vated areas.
Strip Areas
6-9. These bui l t-up areas general l y form connecti ng l i nks between vi l l ages
and towns. These areas al so exi st among LOCs l eadi ng to l arger compl exes.
DESCRIPTIONS OF URBAN TERRAIN
6-10. Wi thi n the ci ty, urban terrai n di ffers based on si ze, l ocati on, and
hi story. The areas wi thi n the ci ty are general l y categori zed as fol l ows:
I ndustrial Areas and Residential Sprawl. Resi denti al areas consi st of
some houses or smal l dwel l i ngs wi th yards, gardens, trees, and fences.
Street patterns are normal l y rectangul ar or curvi ng. I ndustri al areas
consi st of one- to three-story bui l di ngs of l ow, fl at-roofed factori es or
warehouses, general l y l ocated on or al ong major rai l and hi ghway
routes. I n both regi ons, there are many open areas.
Core Periphery. The cor e per i pher y consi sts of nar r ow str eets
(12 to 20 meter s wi de) wi th conti nuous fr onts of br i ck and heavy-
wal l ed concr ete bui l di ngs. The hei ght of the bui l di ngs i s gener al l y
uni for m, two to thr ee stor i es i n smal l towns and fi ve to ten stor i es
i n l ar ge ci ti es.
City Cores and Outlying High-Rise Areas. Typi cal ci ty cores of today
are made of hi gh-ri se bui l di ngs that vary greatl y i n hei ght and al l ow
for more open space between bui l di ngs. Outl yi ng hi gh-ri se areas are
domi nated by thi s open-constructi on styl e to a greater degree than ci ty
cores. General l y, streets form a rectangul ar pattern.
Commercial Ribbons. These are rows of stores, shops, or bouti ques
bui l t al ong ei ther si de of major streets through the bui l t-up areas.
General l y, these streets are 25 meters wi de or wi der. The bui l di ngs are
uni forml y two to three stori es tal l .
NATURE OF URBAN COMBAT
6-11. Urban combat usual l y occurs when a ci ty i s between two natural
obstacl es and i t cannot be bypassed, the sei zure of the ci ty contri butes to the
attai nment of an overal l objecti ve, or pol i ti cal or humani tari an concerns
requi re the sei zure or retenti on of the ci ty.
6-12. I n the ci ty, the ranges of observati on and fi el ds of fi re are reduced by
the structures as wel l as the smoke and dust of combat. Targets wi l l general l y
be seen bri efl y at ranges of 200 meters or l ess.
FM 3-05.222

6-3
6-13. Uni ts fi ghti ng i n urban areas often become i sol ated by an enemy.
Therefore, sni pers must have the ski l l , i ni ti ati ve, and courage to operate
effecti vel y whi l e i sol ated from thei r uni t. Combat i n more up-to-date nati ons
can no l onger avoi d urban areas; therefore, sni pers must trai n and be
psychol ogi cal l y prepared for the demands of urban combat.
6-14. The defender wi l l gener al l y have the advantage over the attacker
i n ur ban combat. The defender occupi es str ong posi ti ons, wher eas the
attacker must expose hi msel f to advance. Al so, the gr eatl y r educed LOS
r anges, bui l t-i n obstacl es, and compar tmented ter r ai n r equi r e the
commi tment of mor e tr oops for a gi ven fr ontage. Tr oop densi ty may be
thr ee to fi ve ti mes gr eater for both attacker and defender i n ur ban
combat than i n natur al envi r onments.
6-15. Densi ty of structures degrades radi o communi cati ons. Thi s factor,
combi ned wi th l i mi ted observati on, makes control of forces di ffi cul t. The wel l -
establ i shed defender wi l l probabl y use wi re communi cati ons to enhance
control , thus addi ng to hi s advantage.
6-16. Sol di ers may encounter a greater degree of stress duri ng urban
combat. Conti nual cl ose combat, i ntense pressure, hi gh casual ti es, the
fl eeti ng nature of targets, and fi re from an unseen enemy may produce
i ncreased psychol ogi cal strai n and physi cal fati gue.
6-17. Commanders may have to restri ct thei r use of weapons and tacti cs to
mi ni mi ze col l ateral damage. Thi s restri cti on may be necessary to preserve a
nati ons cul tural heri tage and gai n the support of the popul ati on. I n such
cases, sni pers are i deal l y sui ted to del i ver di scri mi natory fi re agai nst
sel ected targets.
6-18. Attacks wi l l general l y l i mi t arti l l ery fi res to the di rect fi re mode. Uni ts
use thi s method to avoi d reduci ng the ci ty to rubbl e. Di rect fi re causes few
casual ti es and tends to enhance the defenders forti fi cati ons and conceal ment.
I t al so restri cts the attackers avenues of approach.
6-19. Forces engaged i n urban fi ghti ng use l arge quanti ti es of muni ti ons.
Uni ts commi tted to urban combat must al so have speci al equi pment, such as
grappl i ng hooks, ropes, snapl i nks, constructi on materi al s, axes, sandbags,
and l adders.
6-20. Urban combat hi stori cal l y has presented chances for l ooti ng. Looti ng
can break down di sci pl i ne, reduce al ertness, i ncrease vul nerabi l i ty, and del ay
the progress of the uni t. I t al so al i enates the ci vi l i an popul ati on.
EVALUATING URBAN TERRAIN
6-21. When the sni per eval uates urban terrai n, he shoul d consi der the
fol l owi ng factors:
Observation and Fields of Fire. Bui l di ngs on the edge of a ci ty provi de
better fi el ds of fi re than bui l di ngs i n the i nteri or. I n the ci ty, tal l
bui l di ngs wi th numerous wi ndows often provi de the best fi el ds of fi re,
especi al l y i f the bui l di ngs have spaces between them. However, the
sni per shoul d never choose the outermost bui l di ngs as they are usual l y
subjected to the greater amount of fi re and preparatory bombardment.
FM 3-05.222
6-4
Avenues of Approach. The best way to gai n entry i nto a bui l di ng i s from
the top. Therefore, the most i mportant avenue of approach to l ook for i s
one that qui ckl y l eads to the top (fi re escapes, drai npi pes, or adjacent
bui l di ngs). Personnel must protect these when the sni per i s i n the
defense and al l ow hi m use when requi red.
Key Control Points. The key poi nts i n a bui l di ng are entrances, hal l ways,
and stai rs; troops that control these areas control the bui l di ng.
Obstacles. Door s and fi r e bar r i er s ar e common i n commer ci al
bui l di ngs. They become obstacl es i f they ar e shut and secur ed.
Fur ni tur e and appl i ances can al so be obstacl es i n a bui l di ng. Sni per s
can al so use bar bed wi r e effecti vel y i nsi de a bui l di ng because i t
fur ther r estr i cts movement.
Cover and Concealment. Bui l di ngs wi th bri ck wal l s and few, narrow
wi ndows provi de the best bal ance between cover and conceal ment and
fi el ds of fi re. Roofs provi de l i ttl e protecti on; sni pers usual l y have better
protecti on i n the l ower stori es than di rectl y under the roof. (An excepti on
to thi s rul e i s the parki ng garage.) Fl oor l ayouts wi th many smal l rooms
provi de more protecti on than fl oor l ayouts wi th l arger rooms.
I ntra-City Distribution of Building Types. The sni per can general l y
determi ne the l ayout of a ci ty by the di stri buti on of the bui l di ngs
wi thi n the ci ty. Types and l ayout are as fol l ows:
Mass construction buildings (older apartments and hotels) are the most
common structures i n ol d ci ty cores and older built-up areas (two-
thirds of the total area). They are usually constructed of bricks or
cement bl ock.
Frame and heavy clad, steel and concrete-framed, as well light clad,
glass, multistory buildings are found in the core areaa citys most
valuable landwhere, as centers of economic and political power they
have potentially high military significance.
Open spaces (for example, parks, athletic fields, and golf courses)
account for about 15 percent of an average citys area. Most of this area
is suitable for airmobile operations.
Frame and light clad, wood, and cosmetic brick structures dominate
residential sprawl areas.
Environmental Considerations. Envi ronmental factors wi l l i nfl uence
the effecti veness of the sni per. He shoul d cl osel y eval uate these factors
duri ng the sel ecti on and preparati on of the urban sni per hi de si te.
6-22. Popul ati on densi ty wi l l affect the ease of movement to and from the
hi de as wel l as the abi l i ty of the team to remai n undetected. The sni per must
al so consi der the safety of the l ocal ci vi l i an popul ati on. Dependent upon the
type of operati on, el i mi nati ng ci vi l i an col l ateral damage may be an overri di ng
factor for measuri ng success. I n urban areas, the sni per team must be
prepared to deal wi th pet ani mal s. I f these pets pose a threat to the sni per
team (detecti on or actual attack), i t may be necessary to el i mi nate or si l ence
the pets. Sni pers shoul d be aware of the possi bl e consequences i f these
ani mal s shoul d suddenl y di sappear.
FM 3-05.222

6-5
6-23. The medi a, i n the form of i nternati onal news tel evi si on and radi o
commentators, wi l l probabl y be present i n some strength i n al l future
confl i cts. Thei r presence may compromi se or negate the effecti veness of the
sni pers mi ssi on and must be a consi derati on.
6-24. Gl ass or wi ndows can cause probl ems for the sni per. Dependi ng on the
mi ssi on, the sni per may be abl e to remove the gl ass duri ng hi de constructi on.
I f not, he must devi se a method of emergency gl ass removal .
6-25. Natural and arti fi ci al l i ghti ng wi l l i mpact on the effecti veness of
standoff opti cs and NVDs. Al l l i ghts i n the hi de shoul d be off and secured or
deacti vated to avoi d i nadvertent acti vati on.
6-26. Ambi ent noi se l evel s may ai d i n the occupati on and constructi on of the
hi de. I t coul d al so provi de a desi rabl e ti me wi ndow for the sni pers to engage
targets. I n urban areas, most noi se l evel s wi l l go i n cycl es from hi gh l evel s
duri ng the day to l ow l evel s at ni ght.
LINE-OF-SIGHT FACTORS
6-27. Streets servi ng areas composed mostl y of one type of bui l di ng normal l y
have a common pattern. Street wi dths are grouped i nto three major cl asses:
Narrow (7 to 15 meters)such pl aces as medi eval secti ons of
European ci ti es.
Medi um (15 to 25 meters)newer, pl anned secti ons of most ci ti es.
Wi de (25 to 50 meters)areas where bui l di ngs are l ocated al ong broad
boul evards or set far apart on l arge parcel s of l and.
6-28. When a street i s narrow, observi ng or fi ri ng i nto wi ndows of a bui l di ng
across the street can be di ffi cul t because an observer must l ook al ong the
bui l di ng rather than i nto the wi ndows. When the street i s wi de, the observer
has a better chance to l ook and fi re i nto and out of the wi ndow openi ngs.
6-29. The same l i mi tati on on LOS occurs when l ooki ng up or down
tal l bui l di ngs.
SOURCES OF INFORMATION IN URBAN TERRAIN
6-30. Operati ons i n urban terrai n requi re detai l ed i ntel l i gence. Sni pers
shoul d have the fol l owi ng materi al s for pl anni ng operati ons:
Maps and Aerial Photos. Al though tacti cal maps do not show man-
made objects i n enough detai l for tacti cal operati ons i n urban terrai n,
they do show the detai l s of terrai n adjacent to urban areas. The sni per
shoul d suppl ement tacti cal maps wi th both verti cal and obl i que aeri al
photos. From the aeri al photos, the sni per shoul d construct pl an vi ew
sketches to l ocate the best LOS posi ti ons.
Civil Government and Local Military I nformation. The sni per can
obtai n consi derabl e current i nformati on on practi cal l y al l detai l s of a
ci ty from ci vi l governments and l ocal mi l i tary forces. I tems i ncl ude:
Large-scale city maps.
Diagrams of underground sewer, utility, transport, and miscellaneous
systems.
FM 3-05.222
6-6
Key public buildings and rosters of key personnel.
Size and density of the population.
Police and security capabilities.
Civil defense, air raid shelters, and firefighting capabilities.
Utility systems, medical facilities, and mass communications facilities.
CAMOUFLAGE TECHNIQUES FOR URBAN TERRAIN
6-31. To survi ve i n urban combat, the sni per must suppl ement cover and
conceal ment wi th camoufl age. He must study the surroundi ngs i n the area to
properl y camoufl age hi msel f. He must make the fi ri ng posi ti ons l ook l i ke the
surroundi ng terrai n. For i nstance, i f there i s no damage to bui l di ngs, he wi l l
not make l oophol es for fi ri ng and wi l l use onl y the materi al s needed. Any
excess materi al can reveal hi s posi ti on. For exampl e, i f defendi ng the ci ty
park, the sni per wi l l use the enti re park for resources; he wi l l not denude a
smal l area near the posi ti on for camoufl age materi al .
6-32. Bui l di ngs provi de numerous conceal ed posi ti ons. Thi ck masonry,
stone, or bri ck wal l s offer excel l ent protecti on from di rect fi re and provi de
conceal ed routes. I f the tacti cal si tuati on permi ts, the sni per wi l l i nspect
posi ti ons from the enemys vi ewpoi nt. He wi l l conduct routi ne checks to see i f
the camoufl age remai ns materi al -l ooki ng and actual l y conceal s the posi ti on.
He shoul d not remove hi s shi rt because exposed ski n refl ects l i ght and coul d
attract the enemys attenti on.
6-33. When usi ng urban camoufl age techni ques, the sni per must consi der
the fol l owi ng:
Use of Shadows. Bui l di ngs i n urban areas throw sharp shadows. The
sni per can use the shadow to ai d i n conceal ment duri ng movement. He
wi l l avoi d l i ghted areas around wi ndows and l oophol es. A l ace curtai n
or a pi ece of cheesecl oth provi des addi ti onal conceal ment to sni pers i n
i nteri ors of rooms, i f curtai ns are common i n the area.
Color and Texture. The need to break up the si l houette of hel mets and
i ndi vi dual equi pment exi sts i n urban areas as el sewhere. However,
burl ap or canvas stri ps are a more effecti ve camoufl age garni sh than
fol i age. Predomi nant col ors are normal l y browns, tans, and someti mes
grays, rather than greens; but the sni per shoul d eval uate each
camoufl age l ocati on separatel y.
Dust. I n weapons empl acements, the sni per shoul d use a wet bl anket,
canvas, or type of cl oth to keep dust from ri si ng when the weapons
are fi red.
Background. Sni pers must pay attenti on to the background to ensure
that they are not si l houetted or skyl i ned, but rather bl end i nto thei r
surroundi ngs. Use of a neutral drop cl oth to hi s rear wi l l hel p the
sni per bl end wi th hi s background.
Common Camouflage Errors. To defeat enemy urban camoufl age, the
sni per shoul d l ook for errors such as tracks or other evi dence of
acti vi ty, shi ne or shadows, unnatural or pecul i ar col ors or textures,
FM 3-05.222

6-7
muzzl e fl ash smoke or dust, unnatural sounds and smel l s, and fi nal l y,
movements. Thi ngs to remember when camoufl agi ng i ncl ude
Use dummy positions to distract the enemy and make him reveal his
position by firing.
Use the terrain and alter camouflage habits to suit the surroundings.
Do not forget deceptive camouflage of buildings.
Continue to improve positions. Reinforce fighting positions with
sandbags or other shrapnel and blast absorbing material.
Do not upset the natural look of the area.
Do not make positions obvious by clearing away too much debris for
fields of fire.
Choose firing ports in inconspicuous spots when available.
INFILTRATION AND EXFILTRATION IN URBAN TERRAIN
6-34. A sni per can more easi l y i nfi l trate i nto the outski rts of a town because
the outski rts are usual l y not strongl y defended. I ts defenders may onl y have
a seri es of anti tank posi ti ons, securi ty el ements on the pri nci pal approach, or
posi ti ons bl ocki ng the approaches to key features i n the town. The strong
poi nts and reserves are deeper i n the ci ty.
6-35. As part of a l arger force, the sni per moves by steal th on secondary
streets usi ng cover and conceal ment of back al l eys and bui l di ngs. These
moves enabl e hi m to assi st i n sei zi ng key terrai n features and i sol ati ng
enemy posi ti ons, thus ai di ng fol l owi ng uni ts entry i nto the urban area.
Sni per teams may al so i nfi l trate i nto the ci ty after the i ni ti al force has sei zed
a foothol d and move i nto thei r respecti ve sni per posi ti ons.
6-36. Sni pers may use mortar and arti l l ery fi re to attract the enemys
attenti on and cover the sound of i nfi l trati ng troops. They shoul d i nfi l trate
when vi si bi l i ty i s poor; chances of success are greater i f there are no ci vi l i ans
i n the area. Sni pers may al so i nfi l trate i nto a ci ty (as part of a l arger force)
duri ng an ai rborne or ai rmobi l e operati on.
6-37. Duri ng exfi l trati on, sni pers must be extremel y careful to avoi d
detecti on. As i n i nfi l trati on, sni pers must use steal th and al l avai l abl e cover
and conceal ment when l eavi ng thei r posi ti ons. Sni pers shoul d al ways try to
exfi l trate duri ng darkness.
MOVEMENT TECHNIQUES IN URBAN TERRAIN
6-38. Movement i n urban areas i s one of the fi rst fundamental ski l l s that a
sni per must master. He must practi ce movement techni ques unti l they
become second nature. To mi ni mi ze exposure to enemy fi re, the urban sni per
must move so that he
Does not si l houette hi msel f, but keeps l ow at al l ti mes.
Avoi ds open areas (streets, al l eys, parks).
Sel ects the next covered posi ti on before movi ng.
Conceal s movement by usi ng bui l di ngs, r ubbl e, fol i age, smoke, or
l i mi ted vi si bi l i ty.
FM 3-05.222
6-8
Advances rapi dl y from one posi ti on to another, but not so rapi dl y that
he creates dust cl ouds or noi se that wi l l hel p the enemy l ocate hi m.
Does not mask hi s coveri ng fi re.
Remai ns al ert, ready for the unexpected.
6-39. Speci fi c movement techni ques used frequentl y i n urban operati ons
must be l earned by al l sni pers. They are
Crossing a Wall. After the sni per has reconnoi tered the other si de, he
qui ckl y rol l s over the wal l , keepi ng a l ow si l houette. The speed and the
l ow si l houette wi l l deny the enemy a good target.
Moving Around a Corner. Corners are dangerous. The sni per must
observe the area around the corner before he moves beyond the corner.
The most common mi stake that a sni per makes at a corner i s al l owi ng
hi s weapon to extend beyond the corner, exposi ng hi s posi ti on
(fl aggi ng). Al so, a sni per shoul d not show hi s head at the hei ght that an
enemy sol di er woul d expect to see i t. When usi ng the correct techni que
for l ooki ng around a corner, the sni per l i es fl at on the ground and does
not extend hi s weapon beyond the corner of the bui l di ng. He exposes
hi s head or a hand-hel d mi rror (at ground l evel ) onl y enough to permi t
observati on around the corner.
Moving Past Windows. When usi ng the correct techni que for passi ng a
wi ndow, the sni per stays bel ow the wi ndow l evel , taki ng care not to
si l houette hi msel f i n the wi ndow. He hugs the si de of the bui l di ng. An
enemy gunner i nsi de the bui l di ng woul d have to expose hi msel f to fi re
from another posi ti on i f he wi shed to engage the sni per.
Moving Past Basement Windows. When usi ng the correct procedure of
negoti ati ng a basement wi ndow, the sni per stays cl ose to the wal l of the
bui l di ng and steps or jumps over the wi ndow wi thout exposi ng hi s l egs.
Using Doorways. The sni per shoul d not use doorways as entrances or
exi ts. I f he must use a doorway as an exi t, he shoul d move qui ckl y
through i t to hi s next covered posi ti on, stayi ng as l ow as possi bl e to
avoi d si l houetti ng hi msel f.
Moving Parallel to a Building. At ti mes, i t may not be possi bl e to use
i nteri ors of bui l di ngs for a route of advance. To correctl y move al ong
the outsi de of a bui l di ng, the sni per moves al ong the si de of the
bui l di ng, stayi ng i n the shadows, presenti ng a l ow si l houette, and
moves del i beratel y to hi s next posi ti on. He must pl an one posi ti on
ahead of hi s next posi ti on. Thi s wi l l prevent getti ng i nto a dead-end
posi ti on wi th nowhere to go.
Crossing Open Areas. Sni pers shoul d avoi d open areas such as streets,
al l eys, and parks whenever possi bl e. However, they can be crossed
safel y i f the sni per appl i es certai n fundamental s. Even usi ng the
correct method for crossi ng, the sni per may empl oy a di stracti on or
l i mi ted vi si bi l i ty to conceal hi s movement. He crosses the open area at
the shortest di stance between two poi nts.
6-40. Before movi ng from one posi ti on to another, a sni per shoul d make a
vi sual reconnai ssance and sel ect the posi ti on that wi l l gi ve hi m the best cover
FM 3-05.222

6-9
and conceal ment. At the same ti me, he shoul d sel ect the route that he wi l l
take to that posi ti on.
NOTE: The sni per team shoul d not move together when crossi ng from one
bui l di ng to another or across an open area.
BUILDING ENTRY TECHNIQUES
6-41. When enteri ng a bui l di ng, a sni per may be requi red to enter by means
other than through doorways or reach top l evel s of bui l di ngs by means other
than stai rs.
6-42. The sni per team can use vari ous means, such as l adders, drai npi pes,
vi nes, hel i copters, or the roofs and wi ndows of adjoi ni ng bui l di ngs, to reach
the top fl oor or roof of a bui l di ng. Addi ti onal ai ds and methods to reach
hi gher l evel s i ncl ude
The two-man l i ft, supported and unsupported; the two-man l i ft wi th
heel s rai sed; the one-man l i ft; the two-man pul l ; and i ndi vi dual
cl i mbi ng techni ques. These techni ques are more commonl y used to gai n
entry i nto areas at l ower l evel s.
Ladders or grappl i ng hooks wi th knotted ropes. By attachi ng
a grappl i ng hook to the end of a scal i ng rope, a sni per can scal e
a wal l , swi ng from one bui l di ng to another, or gai n entry to an
upstai rs wi ndow.
Rappel l i ng. The sni per can use thi s combat techni que to descend from
the roof of a tal l bui l di ng to other l evel s or to a wi ndow.
SNIPER SUPPORT IN URBAN OPERATIONS
6-43. A sni per shoul d be gi ven general areas (bui l di ngs or a group of
bui l di ngs) i n whi ch to posi ti on hi msel f, but he sel ects the best posi ti ons for
engagements. Sni per posi ti ons shoul d cover obstacl es, roofs, gaps i n the fi nal
protecti ve fi res, and dead space. The sni per al so sel ects numerous secondary
and suppl ementary posi ti ons to cover hi s areas of responsi bi l i ty. He shoul d
thi nk three-di mensi onal l y.
6-44. The sni per determi nes hi s engagement pri ori ti es by the rel ati ve
i mportance of the targets to the effecti ve operati ons of the enemy. The
fol l owi ng are normal l y sni per targets:
Enemy sni pers.
Key l eaders.
Tank commanders.
Di rect fi re-support weapons crewmen.
Crew-served weapons personnel .
FM 3-05.222
6-10
Forward observers.
Radi otel ephone operators.
Protected equi pment.
6-45. The characteri sti cs of bui l t-up areas and the nature of urban warfare
i mpact on both the effecti veness of the SWS and how the sni per can use i t.
The sni per must consi der the fol l owi ng basi c factors duri ng urban operati ons:
Relative Location of the Shooter and the Target. Both the target and the
shooter may be i nsi de or outsi de of bui l di ngs, or ei ther one may be
i nsi de a bui l di ng whi l e the other i s outsi de.
Structural Configuration of Buildings. The basi c cl asses of structures
encountered i n a bui l t-up area can general l y be cl assi fi ed as concrete,
masonry, or wooden. However, any one bui l di ng may i ncl ude a
combi nati on of these materi al s. Al l bui l di ngs offer conceal ment,
al though the degree of protecti on vari es wi th the materi al used.
Firing Ranges and Angles. Engagement ranges may vary from
di stances of l ess than 100 meters up to the maxi mum effecti ve range of
a sni per system. Depressi on and el evati on l i mi ts may create dead
space. Target engagement from obl i que angl es, ei ther verti cal or
hori zontal , demands i ncreased marksmanshi p ski l l s. Urban areas often
l i mi t sni pers to fi ri ng down or across streets, but open spaces of urban
areas permi t engagements at l ong ranges.
Visibility Limitations. Added to the weather condi ti ons that l i mi t
vi si bi l i ty are the urban factors of target maski ng and i ncreased dead
space caused by bui l di ngs and rubbl e. Observati on through smoke,
dust, and conceal ment offered by shaded areas, rubbl e, and man-made
structures i nfl uence vi si bi l i ty.
DURING AN ATTACK IN URBAN TERRAIN
6-46. Sni pers empl oyed duri ng the attack of a bui l t-up area are usual l y
di vi ded i nto three phases:
Phase I shoul d al l ow sni pers to i sol ate the battl e area by sei zi ng terrai n
features that domi nate the avenues of approach. Sni pers del i ver l ong-
range preci si on fi re at targets of opportuni ty.
Phase I I consi sts of the advance to the bui l t-up area and sei zure of a
foothol d on i ts edge. I t i s duri ng thi s peri od that sni pers di spl ace
forward and assume thei r i ni ti al posi ti on from whi ch to support
conti nuati on of the attack.
Phase I I I consi sts of the advance through the bui l t-up area I AW the
pl an of attack. Sni per teams shoul d operate i n each zone of acti on,
movi ng wi th and supporti ng the i nfantry uni ts. They shoul d operate at
a suffi ci ent di stance from the ri fl emen to keep from getti ng i nvol ved i n
fi refi ghts but cl ose enough to ki l l more di stant targets that threaten
the advance. Some sni per teams can operate i ndependentl y of the
i nfantry on mi ssi ons of search for targets of opportuni ty, parti cul arl y
the search for enemy sni pers.
FM 3-05.222

6-11
6-47. Sni pers that are i n a defensi ve posture shoul d pl ace themsel ves i n
bui l di ngs that offer the best l ong-range fi el ds of fi re and al l -around
observati on. They are assi gned vari ous mi ssi ons, such as
Provi di ng countersni per fi re.
Fi ri ng at targets of opportuni ty.
Denyi ng the enemy access to certai n areas or avenues of approach.
Provi di ng fi re support over barri cades and obstacl es.
Observi ng the fl ank and rear areas.
Supporti ng counterattacks.
Preventi ng enemy observati on.
INTERNAL SECURITY OPERATIONS
6-48. Commanders can use sni pers i n i nternal securi ty operati ons duri ng
urban guerri l l a warfare and hostage si tuati ons. The fol l owi ng paragraphs
expl ai n each si tuati on.
Urban Guerrilla Warfare
6-49. I n thi s type of envi ronment, the sni per domi nates the AO by del i very
of sel ecti ve, ai med fi re agai nst specific targets as authori zed by l ocal
commanders. Usual l y thi s authori zati on comes when targets are about to
empl oy fi rearms or other l ethal weapons agai nst the peacekeepi ng force or
i nnocent ci vi l i ans. The sni pers other rol e, al most equal l y as i mportant as hi s
pri mary rol e, i s the gatheri ng and reporti ng of i ntel l i gence. Wi thi n the above
rol es, some speci fi c tasks that may be assi gned i ncl ude
When authori zed by l ocal commanders, engagi ng di ssi dents or urban
guerri l l as who are i nvol ved i n hi jacki ng, ki dnappi ng, or hol di ng
hostages.
Engagi ng urban guerri l l a sni pers as opportuni ty targets or as part of a
del i berate cl earance operati on.
Covertl y occupyi ng conceal ed posi ti ons to observe sel ected areas.
Recordi ng and reporti ng al l suspi ci ous acti vi ti es i n the area
of observati ons.
Assi sti ng i n coordi nati ng the acti vi ti es of other el ements by taki ng
advantage of hi dden observati on posts.
Provi di ng protecti on for other el ements of the peacekeepi ng force,
i ncl udi ng fi remen and repai r crews.
6-50. I n urban guerri l l a operati ons, there are several l i mi ti ng factors that
sni pers woul d not encounter i n unconventi onal warfare. Some of these
l i mi tati ons fol l ow:
There i s no forward edge of the battl e area (FEBA) and therefore no no
mans l and i n whi ch to operate. Sni pers can therefore expect to
operate i n enti rel y hosti l e surroundi ngs i n most ci rcumstances.
The enemy i s hi dden from or perfectl y camoufl aged among the
everyday popul ace that surrounds the sni per. The guerri l l a force
usual l y uses an i denti fyi ng cl othi ng code each day to di sti ngui sh
FM 3-05.222
6-12
themsel ves from ci vi l i ans. Thi s code i s a PI R each day. The sooner the
sni per can begi n to di sti ngui sh thi s code, the easi er hi s job wi l l be.
I n areas where confrontati on between peacekeepi ng forces and the
urban guerri l l as takes pl ace, the guerri l l a domi nates the ground
enti rel y from the poi nt of vi ew of conti nued presence and observati on.
He knows every yard of ground; i t i s ground of hi s own choosi ng.
Anythi ng approxi mati ng a conventi onal stal k to and occupati on of a
hi de i s doomed to fai l ure.
Al though the sni per i s not subject to the same di ffi cul t condi ti ons as he
i s i n conventi onal war, he i s subject to other pressures. These i ncl ude
not onl y l egal and pol i ti cal restrai nts but al so requi rements to ki l l or
wound wi thout the moti vati onal sti mul us normal l y associ ated wi th
the battl efi el d.
I n conventi onal war , the sni per nor mal l y needs no cl ear ance to fi r e
hi s shot. I n ur ban guer r i l l a war far e, the sni per must make ever y
effor t possi bl e to deter mi ne the need to open fi r e, and that doi ng so
consti tutes r easonabl e or mi ni mum for ce under the ci r cumstances.
Hostage Situations
6-51. Sni pers and commandi ng offi cers must appreci ate that even a wel l -
pl aced shot may not always resul t i n the i nstantaneous i ncapaci tati on of a
terrori st. Even the best sni per, armed wi th the best weapon and bul l et
combi nati on, cannot guarantee the desi red resul ts. Even an i nstantl y fatal
shot may not prevent the death of a hostage when muscl e spasms i n the
terrori sts body tri gger hi s weapon. As a rul e then, the commander shoul d use a
sni per onl y when al l other means of sol vi ng a hostage si tuati on have been
exhausted.
6-52. Accuracy Requirements. The sni per must consi der the si ze of the
target i n a hostage si tuati on. The head i s the onl y pl ace on the human body
where a bul l et stri ke can cause i nstantaneous death. (General l y, the normal
human bei ng wi l l l i ve 8 to 10 seconds after bei ng shot di rectl y i n the heart.)
The enti re head of a man i s a rel ati vel y l arge target, measuri ng
approxi matel y 7 i nches wi de and 10 i nches hi gh. But the area where a bul l et
stri ke can cause i nstantaneous death i s a much smal l er target. The porti on of
the brai n that control s al l motor refl ex acti ons i s the medul l a. When vi ewed
at eye l evel , i t i s l ocated di rectl y behi nd the eyes, runs general l y from ear l obe
to ear l obe, and i s roughl y 2 i nches wi de. I n real i ty then, the si ze of the
sni pers target i s 2 i nches, not 7 i nches. The easi est way for the sni per to vi ew
thi s area under al l ci rcumstances i s to vi sual i ze a 2-i nch bal l (the medul l a)
di rectl y i n the mi ddl e of the 7-i nch bal l (the head).
6-53. Appl i cati on of the wi ndage and el evati on rul e makes i t cl ear that the
average sni per cannot and shoul d not attempt to del i ver an i nstantl y ki l l i ng
head shot beyond 200 meters. To ask hi m to do so requi res hi m to do
somethi ng that the ri fl e and ammuni ti on combi nati on avai l abl e to hi m wi l l
not do.
FM 3-05.222

6-13
6-54. Position Selection. General l y, the sel ecti on of a fi ri ng posi ti on for a
hostage si tuati on i s not much di fferent from sel ecti ng a fi ri ng posi ti on for any
other form of combat. The same gui del i nes and rul es appl y. The terrai n and
si tuati on wi l l di ctate the choi ce of fi ri ng posi ti ons.
6-55. Al though the commander shoul d use the sni per onl y as a l ast resort,
he shoul d pl ace the sni per i nto posi ti on as earl y as possi bl e. Earl y posi ti oni ng
wi l l enabl e hi m to preci sel y esti mate hi s ranges, posi ti vel y i denti fy both
the hostages and the terrori sts, and sel ect al ternate fi ri ng posi ti ons for use i f
the si tuati on shoul d change. He i s al so the mai n HUMI NT asset to the
command el ement.
Command and Control
6-56. Once the commander deci des to use the sni per, al l C2 of hi s acti ons
shoul d pass to the sni per team l eader. At no ti me shoul d the sni per recei ve
the command to fi re from someone not i n command. When he recei ves
cl earance to fi re, then he and the sni per team l eader al one wi l l deci de
exactl y when.
6-57. I f the commander uses more than one sni per team to engage one or
more targets, i t i s i mperati ve that the same ROE appl y to al l teams.
However, i t wi l l be necessary for sni pers to communi cate wi th each other.
The most rel i abl e method i s to establ i sh a l and l i ne or TA-312 tel ephone
l oop much l i ke a gun l oop used i n arti l l ery battery fi ri ng posi ti ons. Thi s l oop
enabl es al l teams to communi cate wi th al l the others wi thout confusi on about
frequenci es or radi o procedures.
SNIPER AMBUSH IN URBAN TERRAIN
6-58. I n cases where i ntel l i gence i s forthcomi ng that a target wi l l be i n a
speci fi c pl ace at a speci fi c ti me, a sni per ambush i s frequentl y a better
al ternati ve than a more cumbersome cordon operati on.
6-59. Cl ose r econnai ssance i s easi er than i n nor mal oper ati ons. The
sni per can car r y i t out as par t of a nor mal patr ol wi thout r ai si ng any
undue suspi ci on. The pr i nci pal di ffi cul ty i s getti ng the ambush par ty to
i ts hi de undetected. To pl ace sni per s i n posi ti ons that ar e undetected wi l l
r equi r e some for m of decepti on pl an. The team l eader often for ms a
r outi ne sear ch oper ati on i n at l east pl atoon str ength. Dur i ng the cour se of
the sear ch, the sni per s posi ti on themsel ves i n thei r hi de. They r emai n i n
posi ti on when the r emai nder of the for ce wi thdr aws. Thi s tacti c i s
especi al l y effecti ve when car r i ed out at ni ght.
6-60. Once i n posi ti on, the sni pers must be abl e to remai n for l engthy
peri ods i n the cl osest proxi mi ty to the enemy and thei r sympathi zers. Thei r
securi ty i s tenuous at best. Most urban OPs have dead spots. Thi s trai t,
combi ned wi th the fact that speci al ambush posi ti ons are frequentl y out of
di rect observati on by other fri endl y forces, makes them hi ghl y suscepti bl e to
attack, especi al l y from guerri l l as armed wi th expl osi ves. The uncertai nty
about bei ng observed on entry i s a constant worry to the sni pers. Thi s feel i ng
can and does have a most di squi eti ng effect on the sni per and underl i nes the
need for hi ghl y trai ned men of stabl e character.
FM 3-05.222
6-14
6-61. I f the ambush posi ti on cannot be di rectl y supported from a permanent
posi ti on, the commander must pl ace a backup force on i mmedi ate noti ce to
extract the sni pers after the ambush or i n case of compromi se. Commanders
normal l y assume that duri ng the ambush the sni pers cannot make thei r exi t
wi thout assi stance. They wi l l be surrounded by l arge, extremel y hosti l e
crowds. Consequentl y, backup forces must not onl y be nearby but al so be
suffi ci ent i n si ze to handl e the extracti on of the sni pers.
URBAN HIDES
6-62. A sni per teams success or fai l ure greatl y depends on each sni pers
abi l i ty to pl ace accurate fi re on the enemy wi th the l east possi bl e exposure to
enemy fi re. Consequentl y, the sni per must constantl y seek fi ri ng posi ti ons
and use them properl y when he fi nds them. Posi ti ons i n urban terrai n are
qui te di fferent from posi ti ons i n the fi el d. The sni per team can normal l y
choose from i nsi de atti cs to street-l evel posi ti ons i n basements. Thi s type of
terrai n i s i deal for a sni per and can provi de the team a means of stoppi ng an
enemys advance through i ts area of responsi bi l i ty. However, one i mportant
fact for the team to remember i s that i n thi s type of terrai n the enemy wi l l
use every asset i t has to detect and el i mi nate them. The fol l owi ng paragraphs
expl ai n the two categori es of urban hi de posi ti ons.
HASTY HIDE
6-63. The sni per normal l y occupi es a hasty hi de i n the attack or the earl y
stages of the defense. Thi s posi ti on al l ows the sni per to pl ace fi re upon the
enemy whi l e usi ng avai l abl e cover to gai n protecti on from enemy fi re. There
are some common hasty fi ri ng posi ti ons i n a bui l t-up area and techni ques for
occupyi ng them are as fol l ows:
Firing From Corners of Buildings. The corner of a bui l di ng, used
properl y, provi des cover for a hasty fi ri ng posi ti on. A sni per must be
capabl e of fi ri ng hi s weapon from ei ther shoul der to mi ni mi ze body
exposure to the enemy. A common mi stake when fi ri ng around corners
i s fi ri ng from the standi ng posi ti on. The sni per exposes hi msel f at the
hei ght the enemy woul d expect a target to appear and ri sks exposi ng
the enti re l ength of hi s body as a target.
Firing From Behind Walls. When fi ri ng from behi nd a wal l , the sni per
shoul d attempt to fi re around cover rather than over i t.
Firing From Windows. I n a bui l t-up ar ea wi ndows pr ovi de r eadi l y
accessi bl e fi r i ng por ts. However , the sni per must not al l ow hi s
weapon to pr otr ude beyond the wi ndow. I t i s an obvi ous si gn of the
fi r er s posi ti on, especi al l y at ni ght when the muzzl e fl ash can easi l y
be seen. A sni per shoul d posi ti on hi msel f as far i nto the r oom as
possi bl e to pr event the muzzl e fl ash fr om bei ng seen. He shoul d fi r e
fr om a suppor ted posi ti on (tabl e and sandbag) l ow enough to avoi d
si l houetti ng hi msel f. He shoul d use r oom shadow dur i ng dar kness
and l eave bl i nds or shades dr awn to a maxi mum to avoi d bei ng
seen. The sni per must be car eful when fi r i ng to pr event the dr apes
or cur tai ns fr om movi ng due to the muzzl e bl ast. He can do thi s by
FM 3-05.222

6-15
tacki ng them down or usi ng suffi ci ent standoff. He shoul d al so use
dr op cl othes behi nd hi msel f to cut down on si l houetti ng.
Firing From an Unprepared Loophole. The sni per may fi re through a
hol e torn i n the wal l , thus avoi di ng the wi ndows. He shoul d stay as far
from the l oophol e as possi bl e so the muzzl e does not protrude beyond
the wal l , thus conceal i ng the muzzl e fl ash. I f the hol e i s natural
damage, he shoul d ensure that i t i s not the onl y hol e i n the bui l di ng. I f
the sni per constructs i t, then the hol e must bl end wi th the bui l di ng or
he shoul d construct mul ti pl e hol es. There are several openi ngs i n a
bui l di ng that natural l y occur and the sni per can enl arge or use them.
Firing From the Peak of a Roof. Thi s posi ti on provi des a vantage poi nt
for sni pers that i ncreases thei r fi el d of vi si on and the ranges at
whi ch they can engage targets. A chi mney, a smokestack, or any other
object protrudi ng from the roof of a bui l di ng can reduce the si ze of
the target exposed, and the sni per shoul d use i t. However, hi s head
and weapon breaks the cl ean l i ne of a rooftop and thi s posi ti on i s a
l ast choi ce posi ti on.
Firing When No Cover I s Available. When no cover i s avai l abl e,
tar get exposur e can be r educed by fi r i ng fr om the pr one posi ti on,
fi r i ng fr om shadows, pr esenti ng no si l houette agai nst bui l di ngs or
skyl i ne, and usi ng tal l gr ass, weeds, or shr ubber y for conceal ment
i f avai l abl e.
PREPARED HIDE
6-64. A prepared hi de i s one bui l t or i mproved to al l ow the sni per to engage
a parti cul ar area, avenue of approach, or enemy posi ti on whi l e reduci ng hi s
exposure to return fi re. Common sense and i magi nati on are the sni per teams
onl y l i mi tati on i n the constructi on of urban hi des. The sni per must fol l ow
several pri nci pl es i n urban and fi el d envi ronments. I n urban envi ronments,
the sni per must sti l l avoi d si l houetti ng, consi der refl ecti ons and l i ght
refracti on, and be sure to mi ni mi ze muzzl e bl ast effects on dust, curtai ns, and
other surroundi ngs. The team constructs and occupi es one of the fol l owi ng
posi ti ons or a vari ati on thereof:
Chimney Hide. The sni per can use a chi mney or any other structure
that protrudes through the roof as a base to bui l d hi s sni per posi ti on.
Part of the roofi ng materi al i s removed to al l ow the sni per to fi re
around the chi mney whi l e standi ng i nsi de the bui l di ng on beams or a
pl atform wi th onl y hi s head and shoul ders above the roof (behi nd the
chi mney). He shoul d use sandbags on the si des of the posi ti on to
protect hi s fl anks.
Roof Hide. When prepari ng a sni per posi ti on on a roof that has no
protrudi ng structure to provi de protecti on, the sni per shoul d prepare
hi s posi ti on underneath on the enemy si de of the roof (Fi gure 6-1,
page 6-16). He shoul d remove a smal l pi ece of roofi ng materi al to al l ow
hi m to engage targets i n hi s sector. He then rei nforces the posi ti on wi th
sandbags and prepares i t so that the onl y si gn that a posi ti on exi sts i s
the mi ssi ng pi ece of roofi ng materi al . The sni per shoul d al so remove
other pi eces of roofi ng to decei ve the enemy as to the true sni per
FM 3-05.222
6-16
posi ti on. The sni per shoul d not be vi si bl e from outsi de the bui l di ng.
Care must be taken to hi de the muzzl e fl ash from outsi de the bui l di ng.
Figure 6-1. Roof Hide
Room Hide. I n a room hi de, the sni per team uses an exi sti ng room and
fi res through a wi ndow or l oophol e (Fi gure 6-2). I t can use exi sti ng
furni ture, such as desks or tabl es to establ i sh weapon support. When
sel ecti ng a posi ti on, teams must noti ce both front and back wi ndow
posi ti ons. To avoi d si l houetti ng, they may need to use a backdrop, such
as a dark-col ored bl anket, canvas, carpet, and a screen. Screens
(common screeni ng materi al ) are i mportant si nce they al l ow the sni per
teams maxi mum observati on and deny observati on by the enemy. They
must not remove curtai ns; however, they can open wi ndows or remove
si ngl e panes of gl ass. Remember, teams can randoml y remove panes i n
other wi ndows so the posi ti on i s not obvi ous.
Figure 6-2. Internal View of a Room Hide
FM 3-05.222

6-17
Crawl Space Hide. The sni per team bui l ds thi s posi ti on i nto the space
between fl oors i n mul ti story bui l di ngs (Fi gure 6-3). Loophol es are
di ffi cul t to construct, but a damaged bui l di ng hel ps consi derabl y.
Escape routes can be hol es knocked i nto the fl oor or cei l i ng. Carpet or
furni ture pl aced over escape hol es or repl aced cei l i ng ti l es wi l l conceal
them unti l needed.
Figure 6-3. Crawl Space Hide
PRINCIPLES FOR SELECTING AND OCCUPYING SNIPER FIRING POSITIONS
6-65. Upon recei vi ng a mi ssi on, the sni per team l ocates the target area and
then determi nes the best l ocati on for a tentati ve posi ti on by usi ng vari ous
sources of i nformati on. The team ensures the posi ti on provi des opti mum
bal ance between the fol l owi ng pri nci pl es:
Avoi d obvi ous sni per posi ti ons.
Make maxi mum use of avai l abl e cover and conceal ment.
Careful l y sel ect a new fi ri ng posi ti on before l eavi ng an ol d one.
Avoi d setti ng a pattern. The sni per shoul d fi re from both barri caded
and unbarri caded wi ndows.
Never subject the sni per posi ti on to traffi c of other personnel ,
regardl ess of how wel l the sni per i s hi dden. Traffi c i nvi tes observati on
and the sni per may be detected by opti cal devi ces. He shoul d al so be
aware of backl i ghti ng that mi ght si l houette hi m to the enemy.
Abandon a posi ti on from whi ch two or three mi sses have been fi red;
detecti on i s al most certai n.
FM 3-05.222
6-18
Operate from separate posi ti ons. I n bui l t-up areas, i t i s desi rabl e that
sni per teams operate from separate posi ti ons. Detecti on of two teams i n
cl ose proxi mi ty i s very probabl e, consi deri ng the number of posi ti ons
from whi ch the enemy may be observi ng. The sni pers shoul d posi ti on
themsel ves where they can provi de mutual support.
Sel ect al ternate posi ti ons as wel l as suppl ementary posi ti ons to engage
targets i n any di recti on.
Al ways pl an the escape route ahead of ti me.
Mi ni mi ze the combusti bi l i ty of sel ected posi ti ons (fi reproofi ng).
Sel ect a secure and qui et approach route. Thi s route shoul d, i f possi bl e,
be free of garbage cans, crumbl i ng wal l s, barki ng dogs, and other
i mpedi ments.
Sel ect a secure entry and exi t poi nt. The more obvi ous and easi l y
accessi bl e entry and exi t poi nts are not necessari l y the best, as thei r
constant use duri ng subsequent rel i ef of sni per teams may more readi l y
l ead to compromi se.
Pi ck good arcs of observati on. Restri cted arcs are i nevi tabl e, but the
greater the arc, the better.
Ensure the l east i mpedance of communi cati ons equi pment.
Consi der al l aspects of securi ty.
Try to pi ck posi ti ons of comfort. Thi s rul e i s i mportant but shoul d be
the l owest pri ori ty. Uncomfortabl e observati on and fi ri ng posi ti ons can
be mai ntai ned onl y for short peri ods. I f there i s no adequate rel i ef
from observati on, hi des can rarel y remai n effecti ve for more than a
few hours.
Never return to a sni per posi ti on that the sni per has fi red from, no
matter how good i t i s.
CHARACTERISTICS OF URBAN HIDES
6-66. The overri di ng requi rement of a hi de i s that i t must domi nate i ts area
of responsi bi l i ty and provi de maxi mum observati on of the target area.
6-67. When sel ecti ng a sui tabl e l ocati on, there i s al ways a tendency to go for
hei ght. I n an urban operati on, thi s can be a mi stake. The greater the hei ght
attai ned, the more the sni per has to l ook out over an area and away from hi s
i mmedi ate surroundi ngs. For exampl e, i f a hi de were establ i shed on the tenth
fl oor of an apartment bui l di ng to see a road beneath, the sni per woul d have to
l ean out of the wi ndow, whi ch does l i ttl e for securi ty. The sni per shoul d get
onl y cl ose enough to provi de observati on and fi re wi thout compromi se. The
sni per shoul d stay at the second and thi rd fl oor l evel s unl ess hi s area of
i nterest i s on a hi gher fl oor i n another bui l di ng. He woul d then want to be
sl i ghtl y above that fl oor i f possi bl e
6-68. The l ocati ons of i nci dents that the sni per mi ght have to deal wi th are
l argel y unpredi ctabl e, but the ranges are usual l y rel ati vel y short.
Consequentl y, a hi de must cover i ts i mmedi ate surroundi ngs, as wel l as
mi ddl e and far di stances. I n resi denti al areas, thi s goal i s rarel y possi bl e, as
hi des are forced off ground fl oor l evel s by passi ng pedestri ans. However, i t i s
FM 3-05.222

6-19
not advi sabl e to go above the second fl oor because to go hi gher greatl y
i ncreases the dead space i n front of the hi de. Thi s practi ce i s not a cardi nal
rul e, however. Local condi ti ons, such as bei ng on a bus route, may force the
sni per to go hi gher to avoi d di rect observati on by passengers.
6-69. I n vi ew of thi s weakness i n l ocal defense of urban hi des, the pri nci pl e
of mutual support between hi des assumes even greater i mportance and i s one
reason why coordi nati on and pl anni ng must take pl ace at battal i on l evel .
CONSTRUCTING AN URBAN POSITION
6-70. Posi ti ons i n urban terrai n are qui te di fferent from i n the fi el d. When
the sni per team must construct an urban posi ti on, i t shoul d consi der the
fol l owi ng factors:
Use a backdrop to mi ni mi ze detecti on from the outsi de of the structure.
Posi ti on the weapon to ensure adequate observati on and engagement
of the target area and mark the verti cal and hori zontal l i mi ts
of observati on.
I f adequate ti me and materi al s are avai l abl e, hang drop cl oths to l i mi t
the possi bi l i ty of observati on from the outsi de of the structure. Cut
l oophol es i n the drop cl oth fabri c to al l ow observati on of the target area.
Al ways be aware of the outsi de appearance of the structure. Fi ri ng
through l oophol es i n barri caded wi ndows i s preferred, but the team
must al so barri cade al l other wi ndows.
Bui l d l oophol es i n other wi ndows to provi de more than one fi ri ng
posi ti on. When bui l di ng l oophol es, the team shoul d make them
di fferent shapes (not perfect squares or ci rcl es). Dummy l oophol es al so
confuse the enemy.
Establ i sh posi ti ons i n atti cs. The team removes the shi ngl es and cuts
out l oophol es i n the roof; however, they must make sure there are
other shi ngl es mi ssi ng from the roof so that the fi ri ng posi ti on l oophol e
i s not obvi ous.
Do not l ocate the posi ti on agai nst contrasti ng background or i n
promi nent bui l di ngs that automati cal l y draw attenti on. The team must
stay i n the shadows whi l e movi ng, observi ng, and engagi ng targets.
AVOID obvi ous l ocati ons.
Never fi re cl ose to a l oophol e. The team must al ways back away from
the hol e as far as possi bl e to hi de the muzzl e fl ash and to muffl e the
sound of the weapon when i t fi res.
Locate posi ti ons i n a di fferent room than the one the l oophol e i s i n by
maki ng a hol e through a wal l to connect the two and fi re from i nsi de
the far room. Thus, the sni per i s formi ng a doubl e baffl e wi th hi s
l oophol es by constructi ng two l oophol es i n successi on. Thi s method wi l l
further reduce hi s muzzl e fl ash and bl ast and i mprove hi s conceal ment
from enemy observati on.
Do not fi re conti nual l y from one posi ti on.
FM 3-05.222
6-20
NOTE: These factors are why the sni per shoul d construct more than one
posi ti on i f ti me and the si tuati on permi t. When constructi ng other posi ti ons,
the team shoul d make sure i t can observe the target area. Sni per team
posi ti ons shoul d never be used by any personnel other than a sni per team.
POSSIBLE HIDE AND OBSERVATION POST LOCATIONS
6-71. Common sense and i magi nati on are the sni per teams onl y l i mi tati on
i n determi ni ng urban hi de or OP l ocati ons. Bel ow are just a few opti ons that
the team can use to maxi mi ze cover and meet mi ssi on requi rements:
Old Derelict Buildings. The team shoul d pay speci al attenti on to the
possi bi l i ty of encounteri ng booby traps. One proven method of detecti ng
guerri l l a booby traps i s to noti ce i f the l ocal s (especi al l y chi l dren) move
i n and about the bui l di ng freel y.
Occupied Houses. After careful l y observi ng the i nhabi tants dai l y
routi ne, sni pers can move i nto occupi ed homes and establ i sh hi des or
OPs i n basements and atti cs. Thi s method was used very successful l y
by the Bri ti sh i n Northern I rel and. However, these l ocati ons cannot be
occupi ed for extended peri ods due to the stri ct noi se di sci pl i ne requi red.
Shops.
Schools and Churches. When usi ng these bui l di ngs, the sni pers ri sk
possi bl e damage to what mi ght al ready be strai ned publ i c rel ati ons.
They shoul d not use these posi ti ons i f they are sti l l acti ve bui l di ngs i n
the communi ty.
Factories, Sheds, and Garages.
Basements and Between Floors in Buildings. I t i s possi bl e for the
sni per team to l ocate i tsel f i n these posi ti ons, al though there may be no
wi ndow or readi l y usabl e fi ri ng port avai l abl e. These l ocati ons requi re
the sni per to remove bri cks or stones wi thout l eavi ng any noti ceabl e
evi dence outsi de the bui l di ng. The sni per shoul d try to l ocate those
crawl spaces that al ready vent to the outsi de.
Rural Areas From Which Urban Areas Can Be Observed.
MANNING THE SNIPER HIDES AND OBSERVATION POSTS
6-72. Before movi ng i nto the hi de or OP, the sni pers must have the
fol l owi ng i nformati on:
The exact nature of the mi ssi on (observe, fi re).
The l ength of stay.
The l ocal si tuati on.
Procedure and ti mi ng for entry.
Emergency recal l code and procedures
Emergency evacuati on procedures.
Radi o procedures.
FM 3-05.222

6-21
Movement of any fri endl y troops.
Procedure and ti mi ng for exi t.
Any speci al equi pment needed.
6-73. The wel l -tri ed and understood pri nci pl e of remai ni ng back from
wi ndows and other apertures when i n bui l di ngs has a marked effect on the
manni ng of hi des or OPs. The fi el d of vi ew from the back of a room through a
wi ndow i s l i mi ted. To enabl e a worthwhi l e area to be covered, two or even
three men may have to observe at one ti me from di fferent parts of the room.
SNIPER TECHNIQUES IN URBAN HIDES
6-74. Al though the constructi on of hi de posi ti ons may di ffer, the techni ques
or routi nes whi l e i n posi ti on are the same. Sni per teams use the techni que
best sui ted for the urban posi ti on. These may i ncl ude any of the fol l owi ng:
The second fl oor of a bui l di ng i s usual l y the best l ocati on for the
posi ti on. I t presents mi ni mal dead space but provi des the team more
protecti on si nce passersby cannot easi l y spot i t.
Normal l y, a wi ndow i s the best vi ewi ng aperture or l oophol e.
I f the window is dirty, do not cl ean i t for better vi ewi ng.
I f curtains are prevalent in the area, do not remove those in the
position. Lace or net-type curtains can be seen through from the inside,
but they are difficult to see through from the outside.
I f strong winds blow the curtains open, staple, tack, or weigh them
down. However, do the same with all other curtains in open windows
or the nonmovement of the curtains will attract attention.
Firing a round through a curtain has l i ttle effect on accuracy; however,
ensure the muzzle is far enough away to avoid muzzle blast.
When area routine indicates open curtains, follow suit. Set up well
away from the viewing aperture; however, ensure effective coverage of
the assigned target area, or place a secondary drop cloth behind the
open curtain where it would not be noticeable. With the sniper
sandwiched between the two drop cloths, his movement and activities
will be more difficult to observe with open curtains.
Fi ri ng through gl ass shoul d be avoi ded si nce more than one shot may
be requi red. The copper jacket of the M118 round i s usual l y stri pped as
the round passes through the gl ass. However, the mass of the core wi l l
conti nue and shoul d stay on target for approxi matel y 5 feet after
penetrati ng standard house pane gl ass. The sni per shoul d consi der the
fol l owi ng vari abl es when shooti ng through gl ass:
Type and thickness of glass (tempered or safety glass reacts much
differently from pane glass).
Distance of weapon to glass.
Type of weapon and ammunition.
FM 3-05.222
6-22
Distance of glass to target.
Angle of bullet path to glass; if possible, he should fire at a 90-degree
angle to the glass.
I f fi ri ng through gl ass, the team shoul d al so consi der the
fol l owi ng opti ons:
Break or open several windows throughout the position before
occupation. This can be done during the reconnaissance phase of the
operation; however, avoid drawing attention to the area.
Remove or replace panes of glass with plastic sheeting of the heat-
shrink type. The sheeting will not disrupt the bullet but will deceive
the enemy into believing that the glass is still in place.
Other l oophol es or vi ewi ng apertures are nearl y unl i mi ted, such as
Battle damage.
Drilled holes (hand drill).
Brick removal.
Loose boards or derelict houses.
Posi ti ons can al so be set up i n atti cs or between the cei l i ng and roof:
Gable ends close to the eaves (shadow adding to concealment).
Battle damage to gables or roof.
Loose or removed tiles, shingles, or slates.
Skylights.
The sni per makes sure the bul l et cl ears the l oophol e. The muzzl e must
be far enough from the l oophol e and the ri fl e boresi ghted to ensure the
bul l ets path i s not i n l i ne wi th the bottom of the l oophol e. The observer
and sni per must cl ear the muzzl e before fi ri ng.
Front drops, usual l y netti ng, may have to be changed (i f the si tuati on
permi ts) from dark to l i ght col ors at begi nni ng morni ng nauti cal
twi l i ght or endi ng eveni ng nauti cal twi l i ght due to sunl i ght or l ack of
sunl i ght i nto the posi ti on.
I f the si te i s not mul ti roomed, parti ti ons can be made by hangi ng
bl ankets or nets to separate the operati ng area from the rest and
admi ni strati ve areas.
I f sandbags are requi red, the team can fi l l and carry them i nsi de of
rucksacks, or fi l l them i n the basement, dependi ng on the si tuati on or
l ocati on of the posi ti on si te.
There shoul d al ways be a pl anned escape route that l eads to the ORP.
When forced to vacate the posi ti on, the team meets the reacti on force at
the ORP. Normal l y, the team wi l l not be abl e to l eave from the same
poi nt at whi ch i t gai ned access; therefore, a separate escape poi nt may
be requi red i n emergenci es. The team must consi der wi ndows (other
than the vi ewi ng apertures), anchored ropes to cl i mb down the
bui l di ng, or a smal l , preset expl osi ve charge si tuati on on a wal l or fl oor
for access i nto adjoi ni ng rooms, bui l di ngs, or the outsi de.
FM 3-05.222

6-23
The type of uni form or camoufl age that the team wi l l wear i s di ctated
by the tacti cal si tuati on, the rul es of engagement, the teams mi ssi on,
and the AO. The fol l owi ng appl i es:
Most often, the normal BDU and required equipment are worn.
Urban-camouflaged uniforms can be made or purchased. Urban areas
vary greatly in color (mostly gray [ci nder bl ock]; red [bri ck]; whi te
[marble]; dark gray [granite]; or stucco, cl ay, or wood). Regardless of
area col or, uni forms shoul d i ncl ude angul ar-l i ned patterns.
When necessary, most woodland-patterned BDUs can be worn i nside
out, as they are a green-gray color underneath.
Soft-soled shoes or boots are the preferred footwear in the urban
environment.
The team can reduce i ts vi sual profile during movement by using
nonstandard uniforms or a mixture of civilian clothes as part of a
deliberate deception plan. With theater approval, civilian clothing can
be worn (native or host country popul ace).
Tradesmens or construction workers uni forms and accessori es can ai d
in the deception plan.
WEAPONS CHARACTERISTICS IN URBAN TERRAIN
6-75. The characteri sti cs of bui l t-up areas and the nature of urban
warfare i nfl uence the effecti veness of sni per systems and how they may be
empl oyed. The sni per must consi der the fol l owi ng basi c factors duri ng al l
urban operati ons:
STRUCTURAL CONFIGURATION OF BUILDINGS
6-76. The basi c cl asses of structures encountered i n a bui l t-up area can
general l y be cl assi fi ed as concrete, masonry, or wooden. However, any one
bui l di ng may i ncl ude a combi nati on of these materi al s. Al l bui l di ngs offer
conceal ment, al though the degree of protecti on vari es wi th the materi al used.
The 7.62- x 51-mm NATO bal l cartri dge wi l l penetrate at 200 meters
Fi fty i nches of pi newood boards.
Ten i nches of l oose sand.
Three i nches of concrete.
GLASS PENETRATION
6-77. I f the si tuati on shoul d requi re fi ri ng through gl ass, the sni per
shoul d know
When the M118 ammuni ti on penetrates gl ass, i n most cases, the
copper jacket i s stri pped of i ts l ead core and the core fragments. These
fragments wi l l i njure or ki l l shoul d they hi t ei ther the hostage or the
terrori st. The fragments show no standard pattern, but randoml y fl y i n
a cone-shaped pattern, much l i ke shot from a shotgun. Even when the
gl ass i s angl ed to as much as 45 degrees, the l ead core wi l l not show
mi ni mum si gns of defl ecti on up to approxi matel y 5 feet past the poi nt
of i mpact wi th standard house pane gl ass.
FM 3-05.222
6-24
When the bul l et i mpacts wi th the gl ass, the gl ass wi l l shatter and
expl ode back i nto the room. The angl e of the bul l et i mpact wi th the
gl ass has no beari ng on the di recti on of the shattered gl ass. The
shattered gl ass wi l l al ways fl y perpendi cul ar to the pane of the gl ass.
6-78. The U.S. Secret Servi ce tested the effi ci ency of Federal 168 grai n
Si erra hol l ow-poi nt boattai l ammuni ti on on several types of gl ass and found
that
Targets pl aced up to 20 feet behi nd the gl ass were neutral i zed when
the weapon was fi red from 100 meters away, from a 0- to 45-degree
angl e of defl ecti on.
NOTE: These resul ts do not fi t wi th the tests run by the Mari ne Corps,
U.S. Army, or the FBI . Thei r tests showed a devi ati on that was
acceptabl e to 5 or 7 feet.
Gl ass fragmentati on formed a cone-shaped hazard area 10 feet deep
and 6 feet i n di ameter; the axi s of whi ch i s perpendi cul ar to the l i ne
and angl e of fi re.
The jacket separated from the round but both jacket and round
mai ntai ned an i ntegrated trajectory.
ENGAGEMENT TECHNIQUES
6-79. Engagi ng targets not onl y requi res the sni per to determi ne speci fi c
vari abl es, but al so to be trai ned and profi ci ent i n the methods bel ow.
SIMULTANEOUS SHOOTING
6-80. Shooti ng si mul taneousl y by command fi re wi th another sni per i s a
very i mportant ski l l to devel op and requi res much practi ce. The seni or man
i n the command post (CP) wi l l usual l y gi ve thi s command. He may del egate
the actual fi ri ng deci si on to the assaul t el ement team l eader, so that the
sni per fi re may be better coordi nated wi th the rescue effort. The actual
command standby, (pause) ready, ready, fi re must be gi ven cl earl y, wi thout
emoti on, or tonal change. Procedure i s as fol l ows:
Team l eader requests, SNI PER STATUS.
Sni pers respond by numbers on avai l abi l i ty of targets, ONE ON, TWO
ON, THREE OFF, FOUR ON.
Team l eader wi l l r espond wi th STANDBY, or HOLD, dependi ng on
avai l abi l i ty of tar gets.
I f assaul t i s a GO, the command READY, READY FI RE i s gi ven. Al l
sni pers wi th targets wi l l shoot si mul taneousl y. (Thi s acti on shoul d
sound as one shot.)
Or the team l eader may i ndi cate speci fi c sni pers to fi re.
Al ert commands shoul d be repeated twi ce, READY, READY, FI RE.
After shooti ng the sni per wi l l acknowl edge, SHOT OUT. He wi l l then
confi rm resul ts.
6-81. Reacti ve targets gi ve a posi ti ve vi sual i ndi cati on of si mul taneous
i mpact and shoul d be used whenever possi bl e for thi s exerci se.
FM 3-05.222

6-25
COUNTDOWN SYSTEM
6-82. Duri ng a mul ti pl e acti on engagement or a sni per-i ni ti ated assaul t, a
countdown techni que wi l l be used. The CP or team l eader gi ves a verbal
countdown as fol l ows:
STANDBY
(PAUSE)
5-
4-
3-
2- SNI PERS FI RE.
1- BLAST FROM GRENADES OR BREACHI NG CHARGE.
6-83. I f gl ass must be shattered to provi de the pri mary sni per a cl ear shot at
hi s target, i t i s best i f the support sni per al so ai ms hi s wi ndow breaki ng
bul l et at the target. Thi s way, the sni per team has two projecti l es ai med at
the target, i ncreasi ng the l i kel i hood of a hi t.
A-1
Appendix A
Weights, Measures, and
Conversion Tables
Tabl es A-1 through A-5, pages A-1 and A-2, show metri c uni ts and thei r
U.S. equi val ents. Tabl es A-6 through A-15, pages A-2 through A-5, are
conversi on tabl es.
Table A-1. Linear Measure
Unit Other Metric Equivalent U.S. Equivalent
1 centimeter 10 millimeters 0.39 inch
1 decimeter 10 centimeters 3.94 inches
1 meter 10 decimeters 39.37 inches
1 decameter 10 meters 32.8 feet
1 hectometer 10 decameters 328.08 feet
1 kilometer 10 hectometers 3,280.8 feet
Table A-2. Liquid Measure
Unit Other Metric Equivalent U.S. Equivalent
1 centiliter 10 milliliters 0.34 fluid ounce
1 deciliter 10 centiliters 3.38 fluid ounces
1 liter 10 deciliters 33.81 fluid ounces
1 decaliter 10 liters 2.64 gallons
1 hectoliter 10 deciliters 26.42 gallons
1 kiloliter 10 hectoliters 264.18 gallons
Table A-3. Weight
Unit Other Metric Equivalent U.S. Equivalent
1 centigram 10 milligrams 0.15 grain
1 decigram 10 centigrams 1.54 grains
1 gram 10 decigrams 0.035 ounce
1 decagram 10 grams 0.35 ounce
1 hectogram 10 decigrams 3.52 ounces
1 kilogram 10 hectograms 2.2 pounds
1 quintal 100 kilograms 220.46 pounds
1 metric ton 10 quintals 1.1 short tons

FM 3-05.222
A-2
Table A-4. Square Measure
Unit Other Metric Equivalent U.S. Equivalent
1 square centimeter 100 square millimeters 0.155 square inch
1 square decimeter 100 square centimeters 15.5 square inches
1 square meter (centaur) 100 square decimeters 10.76 square feet
1 square decameter (are) 100 square meters 1,076.4 square feet
1 square hectometer (hectare) 100 square decameters 2.47 acres
1 square kilometer 100 square hectometers 0.386 square mile
Table A-5. Cubic Measure
Unit Other Metric Equivalent U.S. Equivalent
1 cubic centimeter 1,000 cubic millimeters 0.06 cubic inch
1 cubic decimeter 1,000 cubic centimeters 61.02 cubic inches
1 cubic meter 1,000 cubic decimeters 35.31 cubic feet
Table A-6. Temperature
Convert From Convert To
Fahrenheit Celsius
Subtract 32, multiply by 5, and divide by 9
Celsius Fahrenheit
Multiply by 9, divide by 5, and add 32
Table A-7. Approximate Conversion Factors
To Change To Multiply By To Change To Multiply By
Inches Centimeters 2.540 Ounce-inches Newton-
meters
0.007062
Feet Meters 0.305 Centimeters Inches 3.94
Yards Meters 0.914 Meters Feet 3.280
Miles Kilometers 1.609 Meters Yards 1.094
Square inches Square
centimeters
6.451 Kilometers Miles 0.621
Square feet Square meters 0.093 Square
centimeters
Square inches 0.155
Square yards Square meters 0.836 Square meters Square feet 10.76
Square miles Square
kilometers
2.590 Square meters Square yards 1.196
Acres Square
hectometers
0.405 Square
kilometers
Square miles 0.386

FM 3-05.222
A-3
Table A-7. Approximate Conversion Factors (Continued)
To Change To Multiply By To Change To Multiply By
Cubic feet Cubic meters 0.028 Square
hectometers
Acres 2.471
Cubic yards Cubic meters 0.765 Cubic meters Cubic feet 35.315
Fluid ounces Millimeters 29.573 Cubic meters Cubic yards 1.308
Pints Liters 0.473 Millimeters Fluid ounces 0.034
Quarts Liters 0.946 Liters Pints 2.113
Gallons Liters 3.785 Liters Quarts 1.057
Ounces Grams 28.349 Liters Gallons 0.264
Pounds Kilograms 0.454 Grams Ounces 0.035
Short tons Metric tons 0.907 Kilograms Pounds 2.205
Pounds-feet Newton-
meters
1.356 Metric tons Short tons 1.102
Pounds-inches Newton-
meters
0.11296 Nautical Miles Kilometers 1.852
Table A-8. Area
To Change To Multiply By To Change To Multiply By
Square
millimeters
Square inches 0.00155 Square inches Square
millimeters
645.16
Square
centimeters
Square inches 9.155 Square inches Square
centimeters
6.452
Square meters Square inches 1,550 Square inches Square meters 0.00065
Square meters Square feet 10.764 Square feet Square meters 0.093
Square meters Square yards 1.196 Square yards Square meters 0.836
Square
kilometers
Square miles 0.386 Square miles Square
kilometers
2.59
Table A-9. Volume
To Change To Multiply By To Change To Multiply By
Cubic
centimeters
Cubic inches 0.061 Cubic inches Cubic
centimeters
16.39
Cubic meters Cubic feet 35.31 Cubic feet Cubic meters 0.028
Cubic meters Cubic yards 1.308 Cubic yards Cubic meters 0.765
Liters Cubic inches 61.02 Cubic inches Liters 0.016
Liters Cubic feet 0.035 Cubic feet Liters 28.32

FM 3-05.222
A-4
Table A-10. Capacity
To Change To Multiply By To Change To Multiply By
Milliliters Fluid drams 0.271 Fluid drams Milliliters 3.697
Milliliters Fluid ounces 0.034 Fluid ounces Milliliters 29.57
Liters Fluid ounces 33.81 Fluid ounces Liters 0.030
Liters Pints 2.113 Pints Liters 0.473
Liters Quarts 1.057 Quarts Liters 0.946
Liters Gallons 0.264 Liters Gallons 3.785
Table A-11. Statute Miles to Kilometers and Nautical Miles
Statute Miles Kilometers Nautical Miles Statute Miles Kilometers Nautical Miles
1 1.61 0.869 60 96.60 52.14
2 3.22 1.74 70 112.70 60.83
3 4.83 2.61 80 128.80 69.52
4 6.44 3.48 90 144.90 78.21
5 8.05 4.35 100 161.00 86.92
6 9.66 5.21 200 322.00 173.80
7 11.27 6.08 300 483.00 260.70
8 12.88 6.95 400 644.00 347.60
9 14.49 7.82 500 805.00 434.50
10 16.10 8.69 600 966.00 521.40
20 32.20 17.38 700 1127.00 608.30
30 48.30 26.07 800 1288.00 695.20
40 64.40 34.76 900 1449.00 782.10
50 80.50 43.45 1000 1610.00 869.00
Table A-12. Nautical Miles to Kilometers and Statute Miles
Nautical Miles Kilometers Statute Miles Nautical Miles Kilometers Statute Miles
1 1.85 1.15 60 111.00 69.00
2 3.70 2.30 70 129.50 80.50
3 5.55 3.45 80 148.00 92.00
4 7.40 4.60 90 166.50 103.50
5 9.25 5.75 100 185.00 115.00
6 11.10 6.90 200 370.00 230.00
7 12.95 8.05 300 555.00 345.00
8 14.80 9.20 400 740.00 460.00
9 16.65 10.35 500 925.00 575.00
10 18.50 11.50 600 1110.00 690.00
20 37.00 23.00 700 1295.00 805.00
30 55.50 34.50 800 1480.00 920.00
40 74.00 46.00 900 1665.00 1033.00
50 92.50 57.50 1000 1850.00 1150.00
FM 3-05.222
A-5
Table A-13. Kilometers to Statute and Nautical Miles
Kilometers Statute Miles Nautical Miles Kilometers Statute Miles Nautical Miles
1 0.62 0.54 60 37.28 32.38
2 1.24 1.08 70 43.50 37.77
3 1.86 1.62 80 49.71 43.17
4 2.49 2.16 90 55.93 48.56
5 3.111 2.70 100 62.14 53.96
6 3.73 3.24 200 124.28 107.92
7 4.35 3.78 300 186.42 161.88
8 4.97 4.32 400 248.56 215.84
9 5.59 4.86 500 310.70 269.80
10 6.21 5.40 600 372.84 323.76
20 12.43 10.79 700 434.98 377.72
30 18.64 16.19 800 497.12 431.68
40 24.86 21.58 900 559.26 485.64
50 31.07 26.98 1000 621.40 539.60
Table A-14. Yards to Meters
Yards Meters Yards Meters Yards Meters
100 91 1000 914 1900 1737
200 183 1100 1006 2000 1828
300 274 1200 1097 3000 2742
400 366 1300 1189 4000 3656
500 457 1400 1280 5000 4570
600 549 1500 1372 6000 5484
700 640 1600 1463 7000 6398
800 732 1700 1554 8000 7212
900 823 1800 1646 9000 8226
Table A-15. Meters to Yards
Meters Yards Meters Yards Meters Yards
100 109 1000 1094 1900 2078
200 219 1100 1203 2000 2188
300 328 1200 1312 3000 3282
400 437 1300 1422 4000 4376
500 547 1400 1531 5000 5470
600 656 1500 1640 6000 6564
700 766 1600 1750 7000 7658
800 875 1700 1860 8000 8752
900 984 1800 1969 9000 9846

B-1
Appendix B
Mission-Essential Tasks List
SPECIAL OPERATIONS TARGET INTERDICTION COURSE
MOS 18SKILL LEVEL 3
CRITICAL INDIVIDUAL TASKS
Subject Area 1: Special Operations Target Interdiction
Task No. Title
331-202-4200 Detect Targets Based on Target I ndi cators
331-202-4201 Produce a Panorami c Sketch
331-202-4202 Prepare a Sni pers Observati on Log
331-202-4204 Prepare a Sni per Mi ssi on Operati on Order
331-202-4205 Conduct Trai ni ng of Speci al Operati ons Sni pers
331-202-4206 Empl oy the Methods Used for I ndi cati ng Targets
331-202-4208 Determi ne Sni per Assessment and Sel ecti on
Procedures
331-202-4209 Determi ne the Capabi l i ti es and Rol es of Speci al
Operati ons Sni pers
331-202-4214 Observe an Arc of Observati on
331-202-4215 Perform Sel ected Speci al Operati ons Sni per/
Observer Team Functi ons/Tasks i n Support of
Speci al Operati ons Forces Mi ssi on/Combat
Operati ons
Subject Area 2: Sniper Weapon System
331-202-4210 Mai ntai n Personal and Team Opti cal Equi pment
331-202-4211 Mount a Ni ght Vi si on Devi ce on the Sni per
Weapon System
331-202-4212 Mai ntai n the Sni per Weapon System
331-202-4213 Prepare the Sni per Weapon System for
I nfi l trati on
Subject Area 3: Ballistics
331-202-4220 Determi ne Di stance Wi th the Unai ded Eye
331-202-4221 Determi ne Di stance Wi th Mechani cal and/or
Opti cal Ai ds
331-202-4222 Engage Targets Appl yi ng Sni per System Bal l i sti c
Theory
331-202-4223 Appl y Si ght Correcti ons to Compensate for Wi nd
and Meteorol ogi cal Condi ti ons
FM 3-05.222
B-2
331-202-4224 Determi ne the Poi nt of I mpact on the Target by
Readi ng the Bul l et Trace
Subject Area 4: Tracking
331-202-4231 Empl oy the Observati on Techni ques/Categori es
Needed to Enhance the Recal l of Detai l s
331-919-0161 Evade Dog/Vi sual Tracker Teams
331-919-0162 Demonstrate Vi sual Tracki ng Techni ques
Subject Area 5: Concealment
331-202-4203 Sel ect a Li ne of Advance
331-202-4230 Empl oy Steal th Movement Methods
331-202-4232 Conceal Yoursel f and Your Equi pment
331-202-4233 Construct a Ghi l l i e Sui t
331-202-4234 Construct Sni pi ng Hi des
331-202-4235 Camoufl age Yoursel f and Your Equi pment
Subject Area 6: Marksmanship
331-202-4240 Empl oy the Four Fundamental s of Shooti ng
331-202-4241 Empl oy Supported Shooti ng Posi ti ons
331-202-4242 Adjust the I ron and Tel escopi c Si ghts for the M24
Sni per Weapon System
331-202-4243 Engage Stati onary Targets Wi th the Sni per
Weapon System
331-202-4244 Engage Movi ng Targets Wi th the Sni per Weapon
System
331-202-4245 Engage Snap Targets Wi th the Sni per Weapon
System
331-202-4246 Zero the Sni per Weapon System
331-202-4247 Prepare a Sni pers Range Card
331-202-4248 Engage Targets Usi ng the Ni ght Vi si on Devi ce on
the Sni per Weapon System
331-202-4249 Engage Targets Duri ng Ti me of Li mi ted Vi si bi l i ty
Wi th the Tel escopi c Si ght
331-202-4250 Engage Targets Wi th Sel ected U.S., Forei gn,
Speci al Purpose, and Obsol ete Sni per Weapon
Systems
331-202-4251 Zero a Ni ght Vi si on Devi ce on a Sni per Weapon
System Duri ng Dayl i ght
331-202-4252 Engage Targets at the Maxi mum Effecti ve Range
of the Sni per Weapon System
331-202-4253 Demonstrate Pl anni ng Consi derati ons for
Operati ons on Urban Terrai n
FM 3-05.222
B-3
331-202-4254 Engage Targets Over Uneven Ground Wi th the
Sni per Weapon System

COLLECTIVE TASKS
Task No. Title
7-5-1825 Move Tacti cal l y (Sni per)
7-5-1869 Sel ect/Engage Targets (Sni per)
7-5-1871 Sel ect/Occupy Fi ri ng Posi ti on (Sni per)
7-5-1872 Esti mate Range (Sni per)
7-5-1809 Debri ef (Sni per)

ELEMENT: Sni per Team
TASK: Move Tacti cal l y (7-5-1825) (FM 7-8, TC 23-10)
ITERATION: 1 2 3 4 5 M (Ci rcl e)
COMMANDER/LEADER ASSESSMENT: T P U (Ci rcl e)
CONDITIONS: The sni per team i s gi ven a mi ssi on to move wi th a securi ty el ement. Both
fri endl y and opposi ng forces uni ts have i ndi rect fi re and combat ai r support (CAS) avai l abl e.
TASK STANDARDS:
1. The sni per team moves undetected.
2. The sni per team moves tacti cal l y based on METT-TC.
3. The sni per team compl i es wi th al l graphi c control measures.
4. The sni per team moves al ong the route speci fi ed i n the order.
5. The sni per team arri ves at the desti nati on speci fi ed i n the order.
6. The sni per team arri ves at the speci fi ed ti me.
7. The sni per team sustai ns no casual ti es.
TASK STEPS AND PERFORMANCE MEASURES GO NO-GO
*+1. The sniper team leader selects the movement routes that
a. Avoid known opposing force (OPFOR) positions and obstacles.
b. Offer cover and concealment.
c. Take advantage of difficult terrain, swamp, and dense woods.
d. Avoid natural lines of drift.
e. Avoid trails, roads, footpaths, or built-up or populated areas unless
required by the mission.
2. The sniper team uses the proper movement techniques: sniper low
crawl, medium crawl, high crawl, hand-and-knee crawl, and walk.
a. The observer is the point man; the sniper follows.
b. The observers sector is from 9 oclock to 3 oclock; the snipers
sector is from 3 oclock to 9 oclock.


FM 3-05.222
B-4
c. The observer and the sniper must maintain visual contact even when
lying on the ground.
d. The interval between the observer and the sniper is not more than 20
meters.
e. The sniper reacts to the point mans actions.
f. The sniper and the point man cross danger areas. (See T&EO 7-3/4-
1028, Cross Danger Area, ARTEP 7-8-MTP, Mission Training Plan
for Infantry Rifle Platoon and Squad).
3. The sniper team maintains operations security.
a. Moves slowly and cautiously.
b. Uses camouflage.
c. Avoids making sounds.
4. The sniper team maintains proper communication procedures.
a. Maintains radio listening silence.
b. Uses visual signals.

TASK PERFORMANCE SUMMARY BLOCK
ITERATION 1 2 3 4 5 M TOTAL
TOTAL TASK STEPS EVALUATED

TOTAL TASK STEPS GO

* indicates a leader task step.
+ indicates a critical task step.
OPFOR TASK: Engage Sni per Team
STANDARDS:
1. The OPFOR detects the movi ng sni per team.
2. The OPFOR del ays the team beyond i ts al l otted ti me (l eader eval uati on).
3. The OPFOR prevents the team from movi ng to i ts assi gned desti nati on or al ong i ts
prescri bed route (l eader eval uati on).
4. The OPFOR i nfl i cts one casual ty on the sni per team.

FM 3-05.222
B-5
ELEMENT: Sni per Team
TASK: Engage Targets (7-5-1869) (TC 23-10)
ITERATION: 1 2 3 4 5 M (Ci rcl e)
COMMANDER/LEADER ASSESSMENT: T P U (Ci rcl e)
CONDITIONS: The sni per team has a speci fi c sni per mi ssi on (target cri teri a and pri ori ty),
ei ther by supporti ng a uni t or acti ng i ndependentl y. The sni per team observes the targets. Both
fri endl y and OPFOR uni ts have i ndi rect fi re and CAS avai l abl e.
TASK STANDARDS:
1. The sni per team sel ects the pri ori ty target and destroys i t wi th no more than two rounds.
2. The sni per team sustai ns no casual ti es.
TASK STEPS AND PERFORMANCE MEASURES GO NO-GO
1. The sniper team identifies the following priority targets that will limit the
OPFORs fighting ability:
a. OPFOR sniper.
b. Officers, both military and political.
c. NCOs.
d. Scout or dog team.
e. Crew-served weapons personnel.
f. Vehicle commanders and drivers.
g. Communications personnel.
h. Forward observers.
i. Critical equipment such as optical sights or radios.
*2. The sniper team leader selects the priority targets to be engaged.
a. The sniper team selects the target that is critical to the mission.
b. The sniper team does not become a target while searching for or
firing on an OPFOR target.
c. The sniper team estimates its range from the target. (See T&EO 7-5-
1872, Estimate Range). The range must be within 300 to 800 meters.
d. The sniper team leader chooses to engage targets or continues the
observation of the targets.
3. The sniper team engages the target.
a. The observer gives the wind adjustment.
b. The sniper adjusts the scope on the target and informs the observer
when completed.
c. The observer reconfirms the wind adjustment and notifies the sniper
of any changes.
d. The sniper fires.
e. The observer watches the vapor trail and the strike of the round. He
then prepares to give an adjustment if the sniper misses.
f. If the sniper misses, he checks the scope and fires again, or he may
engage a second target.


FM 3-05.222
B-6
TASK PERFORMANCE SUMMARY BLOCK
ITERATION 1 2 3 4 5 M TOTAL
TOTAL TASK STEPS EVALUATED

TOTAL TASK STEPS GO

* indicates a leader task step.
OPFOR TASK: React to Sni per Fi re
STANDARDS:
1. The OPFOR assumes covered and conceal ed posi ti ons wi thi n 3 seconds of recei vi ng sni per
fi re.
2. The OPFOR detects the sni per teams l ocati on wi thi n 5 seconds.
3. The OPFOR returns fi re wi thi n 5 seconds of recei vi ng sni per fi re.
4. The OPFOR i nfl i cts one casual ty on the sni per team.
5. The OPFOR sustai ns no more than one casual ty.
FM 3-05.222
B-7
ELEMENT: Sni per Team
TASK: Occupy Fi ri ng Posi ti on (7-5-1871) (TC 23-10)
ITERATION: 1 2 3 4 5 M (Ci rcl e)
COMMANDER/LEADER ASSESSMENT: T P U (Ci rcl e)
CONDITIONS: The sni per team i s gi ven a mi ssi on to engage a target and an area of operati ons.
Both fri endl y and OPFOR uni ts have i ndi rect fi re and CAS avai l abl e.
TASK STANDARDS:
1. The sni per team sel ects a fi nal fi ri ng posi ti on wi thi n 300 to 600 meters of the target area.
2. The sni per team i s not detected whi l e occupyi ng the posi ti on.
3. The sni per team sustai ns no casual ti es.
TASK STEPS AND PERFORMANCE MEASURES GO NO-GO
*1. The sniper team leader selects a final firing position that has
a. Maximum fields of fire and observation of the target area.
b. Maximum concealment from the OPFORs observation.
c. Covered routes into and out of the position.
d. A position no closer than 300 meters to the target area.
e. A natural or man-made obstacle (if available) between the sniper
teams position and the target.
2. The sniper team maintains operations security by avoiding
a. Prominent, readily identifiable objects and terrain features.
b. Roads and trails.
c. Objects that may make noise.
d. Optical devices that may reflect light.
e. Leaving a path that leads to its position.
f. Firing position(s).
3. The sniper team operates from a position by
a. Using shadows (if available).
b. Using camouflage that does not contrast with the surrounding area.
4. The sniper team occupies the position.
a. Moves into the position undetected.
b. Scans ahead and watches for overhead movement.
c. Keeps the body outline low to the ground.
5. The sniper team sustains the firing position.
a. Organizes the equipment.
b. Establishes a system of observation and relief. (See T&EO 7-3/4-
1058, Sustain, ARTEP 7-8-MTP).



FM 3-05.222
B-8
TASK PERFORMANCE SUMMARY BLOCK
ITERATION 1 2 3 4 5 M TOTAL
TOTAL TASK STEPS EVALUATED

TOTAL TASK STEPS GO

* indicates a leader task step.
OPFOR TASK: Detect Sni pers
STANDARDS:
1. The OPFOR detects movement of the sni pers movi ng i nto the fi ri ng posi ti on.
2. The OPFOR i nfl i cts more than one casual ty.
3. The OPFOR engages the sni per team wi thi n 5 seconds.
4. The OPFOR sustai ns no more than one casual ty.
FM 3-05.222
B-9
ELEMENT: Sni per Team
TASK: Esti mate Range (7-5-1872) (TC 23-10)
ITERATION: 1 2 3 4 5 M (Ci rcl e)
COMMANDER/LEADER ASSESSMENT: T P U (Ci rcl e)
CONDITIONS: The sni per team has to empl oy range esti mati on throughout the target area to
engage targets. Both fri endl y and OPFOR uni ts have i ndi rect fi re and CAS avai l abl e.
TASK STANDARDS:
1. The sni per team agrees on range esti mati on.
2. The averaged range esti mati on must be wi thi n 10 percent of the actual di stance.
3. The sni per team sustai ns no casual ti es.
TASK STEPS AND PERFORMANCE MEASURES GO NO-GO
1. Each member of the sniper team estimates the range to the target by
selecting one or more of the following methods:
a. The use of maps.
b. A 100-meter increment.
c. The appearance of objects.
d. The mil-scale formula.
e. The use of the SWS.
f. The use of the range card.
g. The bracketing method.
h. A combination of methods.
2. The snipers estimate the range throughout the target area.
a. Each sniper estimates the range to the target(s).
b. The estimated range by individuals is averaged within 10 percent,
plus or minus, of the true range.
*+3. The team leader determines the estimated range to be used.
a. Each sniper estimates the range to the target(s).
b. The team leader compares the estimates.
c. The team leader makes the final determination of the range to the
target(s).
c. The range to the target(s) is within 10 percent, plus or minus, of the
true range.


TASK PERFORMANCE SUMMARY BLOCK
ITERATION 1 2 3 4 5 M TOTAL
TOTAL TASK STEPS EVALUATED

TOTAL TASK STEPS GO

* indicates a leader task step.
+ indicates a critical task step.
FM 3-05.222
B-10
ELEMENT: Sni per Team
TASK: Debri ef (7-5-1809) (TC 23-10)
ITERATION: 1 2 3 4 5 M (Ci rcl e)
COMMANDER/LEADER ASSESSMENT: T P U (Ci rcl e)
CONDITIONS: The sni per team compl etes the mi ssi on and conducts a debri efi ng.
TASK STANDARDS:
1. Al l team members and the sni per empl oyment offi cer are present.
2. Al l i nformati on i s col l ected and recorded i n the correct format.
TASK STEPS AND PERFORMANCE MEASURES GO NO-GO
*1. The sniper employment officer designates an area for debriefing.
a. The size of the area is large enough for the personnel.
(1) S-2.
(2) Sniper employment officer.
(3) Sniper team.
(4) Battalion commander or his representative.
b. The area is equipped with the necessary maps.
c. The debriefing is free from all distractions.
2. The sniper team links up with the sniper employment officer.
a. The sniper team links up with the sniper employment officer at the
time specified in the patrol order.
b. The location is in a secure area behind the FLOT.
3. The team members and the sniper employment officer conduct the
debriefing.
a. All members are present.
b. The sniper team has all recorded information.
(1) Range card.
(2) Field sketch.
(3) Log book.
c. The team leader conducts the debriefing in chronological order.


TASK PERFORMANCE SUMMARY BLOCK
ITERATION 1 2 3 4 5 M TOTAL
TOTAL TASK STEPS EVALUATED

TOTAL TASK STEPS GO

* indicates a leader task step.
NO OPFOR TASK
C-1
Appendix C
Sustainment Program
The sustai nment program enabl es the sni per to mai ntai n the hi gh degree
of ski l l and profi ci ency requi red to compl ete SOF mi ssi ons. The sni pers
trai ni ng program shoul d emphasi ze marksmanshi p and stal ki ng because
they are the most peri shabl e of sni per ski l l s.
TRAINING
C-1. The frequency of trai ni ng i s i mportant to mai ntai n sni per profi ci ency.
The sni per shoul d be tested or eval uated on al l sni per ski l l s at l east annual l y;
semi annual l y i s better. Marksmanshi p qual i fi cati on shoul d occur at l east
quarterl y to the standards outl i ned i n the SOTI C program of i nstructi on
(POI ). Fi gure C-1, pages C-2 through C-11, provi des a sampl e POI for a Level
I I Program.
TIME DEVOTED TO TRAINING
C-2. The ti me the uni t al l ows the sni per to devote to sustai nment trai ni ng
determi nes the sni pers overal l profi ci ency. Experi ence has shown that to
mai ntai n the degree of weapon fami l i ari ty needed to engage targets at
unknown di stances, the sni per shoul d devote at l east 8 hours a week i n
sni per marksmanshi p trai ni ng. Thi s amount of ti me spent i n quality
marksmanshi p trai ni ng wi l l sustai n the sni pers profi ci ency i n the art of
preci si on l ong-range ri fl e fi re.
BASIC AMMUNITION REQUIREMENTS
C-3. Basi c ammuni ti on requi rements for sustai nment-type fi ri ng can be
found i n DA Pam 350-39, M21/ 24 Sniper Rifle (Category I )
Ammunition/ Training Strategy (Tabl e C-1, page C-11). Thi s amount i s the
minimum ammuni ti on requi rement, not the maxi mum.
FM 3-05.222
C-2
PROGRAM OF INSTRUCTION (RECOMMENDED)
COURSE: SPECIAL OPERATIONS TARGET INTERDICTION COURSE, LEVEL II (SOTIC II)

TRAINING LOCATION: UNIT TRAINING AREA

PURPOSE: To train selected personnel in the technical skills and operational procedures
necessary to deliver precision rifle fire from concealed positions to select targets in support
Special Operations Forces (SOF) missions at ranges to 600 meters. This course also prepares
personnel to train foreign personnel in target interdiction techniques within established U.S.
policy. In addition, this course prepares personnel for the Level I SOTIC conducted at the United
States Army John F. Kennedy Special Warfare Center and School, Fort Bragg, North Carolina.

SCOPE: Maximum hands-on training in advanced rifle marksmanship, techniques of
observation, judging distance, advanced methods of concealment, camouflage, stalking, target
selection, and interdiction mission planning.

Prerequisites: As established by the local unit commander responsible for the course.

SPECIAL INFORMATION: Instructors for this course must all be graduates of the Level I SOTIC
conducted at USAJFKSWCS, Fort Bragg, NC. The student/instructor ratio must be maintained
so that each team on the firing line will have an assigned instructor behind them on a mentor
basis. This ratio may be 2:1 or 4:1 depending on the pit support for the course. The mentoring
relationship should begin at the onset of the course and maintained throughout the course.

NOTE: This recommended course POI can be established as a two-week or a five-week
POI. The unit commander may decide to add to this POI dependent upon his mission
requirements. The course materials should be left as intact as possible and taught as a
baseline for the unit Level II course.

COURSE LENGTH: 2 Weeks to 5 Weeks

COURSE HOURS: 140.5 - 200 Hours

CLASS SIZE: 4 minimum with size maximum dependent upon maintaining instructor to student
ratio and available ranges, training areas, and classroom size.

Hours shown do not reflect maintenance that must be performed daily, transportation to
and from ranges and training areas, nor breaks for meals.

Figure C-1. Sample Sniper Sustainment Program of Instruction



FM 3-05.222
C-3
COURSE SUMMARY
GENERAL SUBJECTS
HOURS
5 WK 2 WK
G1 Inprocessing of Students 2.0 2.0

G2 Introduction to SOTIC II 1.0 1.0

G3 Mission Planning 2.0 1.0

TOTAL HOURS 5.0 4.0

MARKSMANSHIP

M1 The M24 SWS and Equipment 3.0 3.0

M2 Advanced Rifle Marksmanship 4.0 4.0

M3 Sniper Marksmanship 2.5 2.5

M4 Sight Adjustment and Zero 4.0 4.0

M5 Correcting for Meteorological Conditions 2.0 2.0

M6 Reading Wind and Spotting 2.0 1.0
M7 Range Exercise #1 (Position Shooting) 16.0 8.0

M8 Range Exercise #2 (Grouping and Zeroing
Telescopic Sight) 8.0 4.0

M9 Range Exercise #3 (Snap Shooting; 200,
300, and 400 Meters) 12.0 12.0

M10 Range Exercise #4 (Moving Targets; 200
and 300 Meters) 12.0 12.0

M11 Range Exercise #5 (Dusk Shoot) 4.0 2.0

M12 Range Exercise #6 (Deliberate Targets;
400, 500, and 600 Meters) 12.0 12.0

M13 Range Exercise #7 (NVD ShootUse
Unit Organic NVDs) 6.0 3.0

Figure C-1. Sample Sniper Sustainment Program of Instruction (Continued)

FM 3-05.222
C-4
MARKSMANSHIP (Continued) HOURS
5 WK 2 WK

M14 Application of Fire (Ballistics) 3.0 3.0

M15 Field Shooting 32.0 16.0

M16 Judging Distance 3.0 3.0

M17 Judging Distance Exercises 5.0 2.0

TOTAL HOURS 130.5 93.5

OBSERVATION

O1 Observation of Ground 2.0 2.0

O2 Observation Exercises 5.0 2.0

O3 Observers Log and Range Card 1.0 1.0

O4 Panoramic Sketching and Electronic
Reporting 2.0 2.0

O5 Kims Game 5.0 2.0

TOTAL HOURS 15.0 7.0

CONCEALMENT

C1 Individual Camouflage and Concealment 2.0 2.0

C2 Ghillie Suit Construction 1.0 1.0

C3 Individual Movement (Stalking) 2.0 2.0

C4 Selecting Lines of Advance 2.0 2.0

C5 Stalking Exercise 17.5 7.0

C6 Sniper Hides and Loopholes 2.0 2.0

C7 Sniper Hide Construction 6.0 0.0

TOTAL HOURS 32.5 19.0

Figure C-1. Sample Sniper Sustainment Program of Instruction (Continued)

FM 3-05.222
C-5
EXAMINATIONS HOURS
5 WK 2 WK
E1 Written Examination 1.0 1.0

E2 Sniper Marksmanship 8.0 8.0

E3 Field Shoot Examination 8.0 8.0

TOTAL HOURS 17.0 17.0
NOTE: It is not mandatory that the above listed examinations are must pass but it is
highly recommended that they are considered critical tasks and thus are must pass
events.
The sponsoring unit commander may add to this list or adjust between the two as he sees fit,
according to his mission perimeters and requirements. Some of the course that may be added
according to the command requirements would be:
Urban OperationsUrban Hides, Urban Mission Considerations, Building Surveys, Advance
Surveys, Sniper in Support of Close Combat, Urban Shooting Positions, Shooting Through
Medium, Aerial Platform Shooting High Angle Shooting, Video Surveillance and Reporting.
Mountain ShootingWind Tunnel Effect of Terrain, High Angle Shooting, High Altitude Shooting
and Environmental Effects of High Altitude.
Desert ShootingHigh Temperature Effects on Shooting and Weapons, Mirage Problems of
Desert, Temperature Inversion Effect on Observation.
This list is limited only by the commanders imagination and requirements based on his mission,
equipment available, training terrain available, time allowed, and troops available for the giving
instruction.
TRAINING ANNEXES

COURSE: SOTIC II

ANNEX A: GENERAL SUBJECTS

PURPSE: To provide the student with the background information and perspective necessary to
understand the role of snipers in the SOF.

TOTAL HOURS: 5.0 (4.0)

SUBJECT TITLE HOURS
5 WK 2 WK

G1 Inprocessing of students 2.0 2.0

SCOPE: The student will inprocess into the course and all paperwork will be completed to
establish the students record in the course. Weapons and equipment will be issued and
inspected for serviceability.
Figure C-1. Sample Sniper Sustainment Program of Instruction (Continued)
FM 3-05.222
C-6
G2 Introduction to SOTIC II 1.0 1.0
SCOPE: The student will know and describe the course content, conduct on the range, range
procedures, safety procedures, pass requirements, retrain and retest procedures, and
examination perimeters.
G3 Mission Planning 2.0 1.0
SCOPE: The student will analyze mission requirements and operational perimeters and prepare
an operations order for a mission. Due consideration will be taken of the unique characteristics of
the sniper mission.

ANNEX B: MARKSMANSHIP

PURPOSE: To provide the student with the necessary skills to qualify him in sniper
marksmanship to 600 meters with the M24 Sniper Marksmanship System.

TOTAL HOURS: 130.5 (93.5)
SUBJECT TITLE HOURS
5 WK 2 WK
M1 The M24 SWS and Equipment 3.0 3.0

SCOPE: The student will describe the functioning, inspection, disassembly, and reassembly of
the M24; and the maintenance procedures for the M24 SWS and related sniper equipment used
by their unit.

M2 Advanced Rifle Marksmanship 4.0 4.0

SCOPE: The student will demonstrate the four fundamentals of shooting to include the use of the
sling and iron sights. The student will demonstrate the positions of standing off-hand, sitting
rapid, prone rapid, and prone slow. NOTE: It is understood that most known distance (KD)
ranges are established in yards, and yards may be substituted for meters in these exercises; see
Range Exercise #1.

M3 Sniper Marksmanship 2.5 2.5

SCOPE: The student will demonstrate sniper marksmanship skills, to include field shooting
positions and engagement techniques of snap targets, moving targets, and deliberate targets at
known ranges.

M4 Sight Adjustment and Zero 4.0 4.0

SCOPE: The student will descrbe the principles of minute of angle and mils and how these
measurements relate to zeroing the M24. He will demonstrate the zeroing of both the iron sights
and the M3A scope, sight adjustment, and use of the sniper data logbook.

M5 Correcting for Meteorological Conditions 2.0 2.0

SCOPE: The student will calculate and correct for zero change and bullet deflection caused by
meteorological conditions.
Figure C-1. Sample Sniper Sustainment Program of Instruction (Continued)
FM 3-05.222
C-7
ANNEX B: MARKSMANSHIP (Continued) HOURS
5 WK 2 WK
M6 Reading and Spotting 2.0 1.0

SCOPE: The student will demonstrate the use of the spotting scope to determine wind velocity and
direction. He will read bullet trace to determine round impact. This class is conducted on a known
distance range.

M7 Range Exercise #1 (Position Shooting) 16.0 8.0

SCOPE: The student will demonstrate Advanced Rifle Marksmanship skills while firing the NRA
course of fire on a known distance range. The student will first zero his iron sights at 200 meters
(yards) in the prone supported position. This exercise will also be the first exercise to utilize the
sniperobserver pair for reading wind and spotting. Exercise will be conducted on a known
distance range and consists of 200 meter (yard) standing off-hand, 200 meter (yard) sitting rapid,
300 meter (yard) prone rapid, and 600 meter (yard) slow fire.
NOTE: Two-week course may wish to substitute 200 meter (yard) prone slow and rapid for
200-meter exercises, drop 300 and fire the 600 prone slow.
M8 Range Exercise #2 (Grouping and Zeroing
Telescopic Sights) 8.0 4.0

SCOPE: The student will demonstrate zeroing of his telescopic sight at 200 meters and then
practice five round groups at 200, 300, 400, 500, and 600 meters (yards). This exercise will be
conducted on a known distance range.

M9 Range Exercise #3 (Snap Shooting; 200,
300, and 400 Meters [Yards]) 12.0 12.0
SCOPE: The student will demonstrate the techniques and ability to engage snap targets at
various ranges under restricted time limits. Exercises conducted will 3 second snap target at 200
meters (yards) over a 7 meter front; 6 second snap target at 300 meters (yards) over a 7 meter
front; 3 second snap target at 400 meters (yards) over a 10 meter front. The 200 and 300-meter
targets are the head of an FBI target while the 400-meter target is the chest and head of an FBI
target.
M10 Range Exercise #4 (Moving Targets;
200 and 300 Meters) 12.0 12.0
SCOPE: The student will demonstrate the techniques and the ability to engage targets moving at
a parade ground marching cadence over a distance of 10 meters at ranges of 200 and 300
meters. This exercise will be conducted on a known distance range.

M11 Range Exercise #5 (Dusk Shoot) 4.0 2.0

SCOPE: The student will engage targets under conditions of failing light with the M3A telescopic
sight. Exercise will run from sunset to EENT or until light conditions no longer permit shooting.
The students will then engage targets with artificial illumination supplied by parachute flares fired
from various locations. This exercise can be run on a known distance range or a machine gun
range with pop-up targets.
Figure C-1. Sample Sniper Sustainment Program of Instruction (Continued)
FM 3-05.222
C-8
ANNEX B: MARKSMANSHIP (Continued) HOURS
5 WK 2 WK

M12 Range Exercise #6 (Deliberate Targets;
400, 500, and 600 Meters [Yards]) 12.0 12.0

SCOPE: The student will demonstrate the ability to engage targets with precision shots at ranges
to 600 meters under time restraints of 10 seconds, 400 meters; 12 seconds, 500 meters; 15
seconds, 600 meters (yards) on a known distance range.

M13 Range Exercise #7 (NVD Shoot
Use Unit Organic NVDs) 6.0 3.0

SCOPE: The student will zero the NVDs and engage targets at various ranges using the unit
organic NVDs. This exercise is run on a known distance range or a machine gun range with pop-
up targets.

M14 Application of Fire 3.0 3.0

SCOPE: The student will describe how to calculate the effects of internal and external ballistics
on the trajectory of the round over uneven ground at targets on unknown distance, hit probability
and the effects of internal and external ballistics on hit probability, target designation and
selection, terminal ballistics and follow on shot calculation.

M15 Field Shooting (Unknown Distance) 32.0 16.0

SCOPE: The student will successfully engage targets at unknown distances from 200 to 600
meters under field conditions.

M16 Judging Distance 3.0 3.0

SCOPE: The student will describe and demonstrate the various techniques of judging distance
by eye and with the M3A telescopic sight.

M17 Judging Distance Exercises (5 or 2
Exercises) 5.0 2.0

SCOPE: The student will conduct practical exercises in judging distance by eye and by M3A
scope using the mil-relationship formula. The 5-week course will conduct 5 exercises while the
2-week course will conduct 2 exercises.
Figure C-1. Sample Sniper Sustainment Program of Instruction (Continued)



FM 3-05.222
C-9
ANNEX C: OBSERVATION
PURPOSE: To provide the student with the background knowledge and skills to perform his role
as an observer in the sniper observer pair.

SUBJECT TITLE HOURS
5 WK 2 WK
O1 Observation of Ground 2.0 2.0

SCOPE: The student will describe the four target indicators and how they are used to locate the
enemy, demonstrate the principles and techniques of observation, and the differences in the
techniques during day and night.

O2 Observation Exercises (5 or 2 Exercises) 5.0 2.0

SCOPE: The student will conduct one practical exercise and four graded, (one and one for the 2
week) where he will demonstrate his ability to draw a panoramic sketch or a sector and
accurately place the 10 items in the sector through the use of observation skills and an
understanding of target indicators.

O3 Observers Log and Range Card 1.0 1.0

SCOPE: The student will record information in an observers log and demonstrate the
construction of and use of the range card.

O4 Panoramic Sketching and Electronic
Reporting 2.0 2.0

SCOPE: The student will demonstrate the techniques of panoramic sketching and construction
of a filed sketch including marginal information, subsketches, the use of sketching of materials,
and the use of electronic reporting techniques and equipment.

O5 Kims Game (5 or 2 Exercises) 5.0 2.0

SCOPE: The student will demonstrate observation techniques with memorization, retention, and
recall of detail

ANNEX D: CONCEALMENT

PURPOSE: To provide the student with the skills to conceal himself and his equipment during
sniper operations.

SUBJECT TITLE HOURS
5 WK 2 WK

C1 Individual Camouflage and Concealment 2.0 2.0

SCOPE: The student will describe target indicators and techniques to defeat the target indicators,
principles and techniques of camouflage and concealment, and use of various materials in
camouflage and concealment.
Figure C-1. Sample Sniper Sustainment Program of Instruction (Continued)
FM 3-05.222
C-10

ANNEX D: CONCEALMENT (Continued) HOURS
5 WK 2 WK
PURPOSE: To provide the student with the background knowledge and skills to perform his role
as an observer in the sniper observer pair.
C2 Ghillie Suit Construction 1.0 1.0
SCOPE: The student will construct a Ghillie suit using the principles of camouflage and
concealment.
C3 Individual Movement (Stalking) 2.0 2.0
SCOPE: The student will demonstrate the 5 techniques of stealth movement over ground with
the M24 SWS and equipment.

C4 Selecting Lines of Advance 2.0 2.0

SCOPE: The student will demonstrate terrain analysis, route selection using vantage points,
dead space and masking techniques to facilitate stealth movement to an objective and return.

C5 Stalking Exercises (5 or 2 Exercises) 17.5 7.0

SCOPE: The student will demonstrate selecting lines of advance, stealth movement techniques
and concealment by stalking to within 200 meters of an observer using binoculars to locate the
student. There are 5 (2) three-hour exercises with each having a 30-minute preparation period
prior to the stalk start. Each exercise is graded at 20 points, five stalk; or 50 points, 2 stalk.

C6 Sniper Hides and Loopholes 2.0 2.0
SCOPE: The student will describe site selection criteria, hasty and deliberate sniper hide
construction, methods of loophole construction and concealment, spoils removal, and the effects
of long term operations confined in the hide, sleep deprivation, and the effects on mission
completion. The student will also describe the special considerations required for urban hide
construction and building construction factors effecting the hide construction.

C7 Sniper Hide Construction 6.0 0.0
SCOPE: The students will demonstrate hide construction through the construction of a class hide
for sniper team. Site selection, construction materials and techniques, spoil disposal, and
camouflage and concealment techniques will be demonstrated in the hide exercise. The students
may be required to work on an urban hide in lieu of a rural type hide.
ANNEX E: EXAMINATIONS

PURPOSE: The student will demonstrate his grasp of the subject matter through the use of
various examinations designed to test his knowledge and capabilities.
SUBJECT TITLE HOURS
5 WK 2 WK
E1 Written Examination 1.0 1.0
SCOPE: The student will demonstrate his knowledge of the subjects presented throughout the
course with a multiple-choice examination consisting of 50 questions.
Figure C-1. Sample Sniper Sustainment Program of Instruction (Continued)
FM 3-05.222
C-11
ANNEX E: EXAMINATIONS (Continued) HOURS
5 WK 2 WK
E2 Sniper Marksmanship 8.0 8.0

SCOPE: The student will demonstrate his ability to zero the M3A telescopic sight on the M24
SWS and fire the SWS in a course of fire consisting of snaps and movers at 200 and 300
meters, snaps and deliberates at 400 meters, and deliberates at 500 and 600 meters.

E3 Field Shoot Examination 8.0 8.0

SCOPE: The student will demonstrate his ability to engage five targets over uneven terrain at
unknown distances from 400 meters to 700 meters.
Figure C-1. Sample Sniper Sustainment Program of Instruction (Continued)
Table C-1. Excerpt From DA Pam 350-39, Dated 3 July 1997
Annual Ammunition Requirement and Training Strategy for the M24 Sniper Rifle (CAT I)

EVENT

AC/RC

MATCH

.50 CAL

.300

DODIC



A171

A531 A191*

ZERO/CONFIRM ZERO

4/1

20





FIRE KNOWN DIST 200-1000 M

4/1

100





FIELD FIRE

4/1

100





LFX

4/1

10





FAM FIRE NIGHT/ZERO NVG

2/1

40





SUSTAINMENT (7.62 MM)

2/1

40





(.50 CAL)

2/1



40



(.300 WIN)

2/1





40

RECORD QUALIFICATION

2/1

100





TOTAL ROUNDS INDIVIDUAL

AC/RC

1280/420

80 80

TOTAL RDS BN

AC/RC

46,080/15,360

2880/960


SOTIC LEVEL II TNG PROGRAM (BN)

1/.33

12,160/4,053




Note: * USASOC procurement item.
TRAINING EXERCISES
C-4. The following exercises may be incorporated into team training to improve
every team members skills and enhance the teams overall capabilities.
FM 3-05.222
C-12
Marksmanship Exercises
C-5. Marksmanshi p trai ni ng wi l l take up a l arge amount of the sni pers
overal l profi ci ency trai ni ng. The sni per must be profi ci ent i n al l sni per-
rel ated ski l l s, but wi thout marksmanshi p, these other ski l l s are usel ess.
Some exampl es of marksmanshi p exerci ses are
Grouping Exercises. These are si mpl e exerci ses where the sni per fi res
fi ve-round shot groups at vari ous ranges, from 100 to 800 meters.
Anal ysi s of the shot groups hel ps hi m determi ne fi ri ng errors and
envi ronmental effects i n a more or l ess control l ed envi ronment.
Anal ysi s al so al l ows the sni per to col l ect hi s col d bore shot and
envi ronmental data.
Moving Target Firing. Fi ri ng at movi ng targets hel ps the sni per to
mai ntai n profi ci ency i n thi s di ffi cul t ski l l . Targets shoul d be engaged
from 100 to 600 meters. These exerci ses are si mpl e to run. Movi ng
targets are provi ded by havi ng personnel wal k si l houette targets on a
sti ck or board hel d over thei r head whi l e protected i n the pi ts of a
tradi ti onal known di stance range. The targets must be cut 12 i nches
wi de to mai ntai n real i sm. Sni pers shoul d not know target di recti on or
speed duri ng fi nal exerci ses. The target wi l l come up i n the mi ddl e of a
20-meter area and then move ei ther l eft or ri ght and at a speed of
ei ther a sl ow wal k, wal k, or a run. The sni per must engage the target
before i t gets to the other si de of the l ane. Al so, a second target can be
moved i n the same l ane assi gned to another sni per team. The teams
must hi t thei r assi gned target. Stop-and-go targets may be engaged
from 600 to 800 meters. These targets wi l l move across the sni pers
front and peri odi cal l y stop for 3 to 5 seconds, then begi n to move agai n.
Each sni per wi l l be assi gned a target to engage.
Unknown Distance Firing. Thi s exerci se hel ps the sni per to stay
profi ci ent i n a vari ety of sni per ski l l s. The sni per pai r must fi l l out a
range card or sector sketch and esti mate the range to targets. The pai r
must then use the i nformati on to engage targets of unknown di stance.
Di stances shoul d range from 200 to 800 meters. The targets must be
ful l y mi xed and parti al l y exposed. Thi s wi l l force the sni pers to range
on other objects and use target i nformati on for range esti mati on
and engagement.
Firing Under Artificial I llumination and/ or NVDs. I n thi s exerci se, the
sni per fi res at both stati onary and movi ng targets from 100 to 600
meters under arti fi ci al i l l umi nati on or 100 to 600 meters (weather
dependant) usi ng NVDs. Beyond a range of 400 meters, wi nd pl ays a
si gni fi cant rol e i n target engagement. Wi nds above 5 mph wi l l cause a
mi ss, regardl ess of the sni pers ski l l , i f the sni per can not detect the
wi nd and dope the wi nd.
Stress Shooting. Al l previ ous exerci ses can be further enhanced wi th
the addi ti onal appl i cati on of a stress factor. Appl yi ng a ti me l i mi t,
stal ki ng to the target, or physi cal effort before fi ri ng are but a few
stresses that may be appl i ed to the sni per.
Firing Air Rifles. The sni per can effecti vel y use match-grade ai r ri fl es
(for exampl e, RWS 75 or Dai sy Gamo) for marksmanshi p trai ni ng.
FM 3-05.222
C-13
They do not requi re any speci al ranges. Any area wi th a mi ni mum of 10
meters of di stance can be used, i ndoors or outdoors. The sni per can use
thi s range, i n conjuncti on wi th cal i ber .22 bul l et traps and standi ng off-
hand (unsupported), to rei nforce marksmanshi p fundamental s. Usi ng
scal ed targets and a good ai r-ri fl e scope i n an outdoor area can
si mul ate ranges of up to 1,000 meters. Ranges of 10 to 20 meters and
targets, reduced i n si ze to represent di fferent ranges, can be used.
Stalking Exercises
C-6. These exerci ses enabl e the sni per to trai n and devel op ski l l s i n
movement, camoufl age, map readi ng, mi ssi on pl anni ng, and posi ti on
sel ecti on. Li ve fi re may be i ncorporated to confi rm the sni pers target
engagement. Stal ks shoul d be performed by sni per teams as they must l earn
to work together.
Range-Estimation Exercises
C-7. There are many ways to conduct thi s type of exerci se. The sni per
esti mates ranges out to 800 meters and must be wi thi n 5 percent of the
correct range when mi l i ng wi th hi s scope. He shoul d use onl y hi s bi nocul ars
and ri fl e tel escope as ai ds. When usi ng onl y the eye for range esti mati on, the
sni per must be wi thi n 12 percent out to 500 meters. Range esti mati on beyond
600 meters by the unai ded eye i s very di ffi cul t and requi res constant practi ce.
Other Exercises
C-8. The sni pers trai ni ng program may i ncl ude other exerci ses to enhance
hi s observati on, memory, and camoufl age ski l l s.
M24 SNIPER MILES TRAINING
C-9. The MI LES trai ni ng i s an i nval uabl e tool i n real i sti c combat trai ni ng.
Other than actual combat, the sni pers best means of di spl ayi ng effecti veness
as a force mul ti pl i er i s through the use of the M24 SWS wi th MI LES.
CHARACTERISTICS OF THE MILES TRANSMITTER
C-10. The M24 SWS MI LES transmi tter i s a modi fi ed M16 transmi tter.
A speci al mounti ng bracket attaches the l aser transmi tter to the ri ght si de of
the barrel (l ooki ng from the butt end) of the M24 and pl aces i t paral l el wi th
the l i ne of bore. The l aser beam output has been ampl i fi ed and ti ghtened
to provi de preci si on fi re capabi l i ty out to 1,000 meters. (For component
i nformati on and i nstructi ons on mounti ng, zeroi ng, and operati on, see
TM 9-1265-211-10, Operators Manual for Multiple I ntegrated Laser
Engagement System (MI LES) Simulator System, Firing, Laser: M89).
TRAINING VALUE
C-11. Usi ng the M24 wi th MI LES, the trai ner can enhance sustai nment
trai ni ng i n target engagement such as the fol l owi ng:
Selection of Firing Positions. Due to transmi tter modi fi cati ons, the sni per
must attai n a fi ri ng posi ti on that affords cl ear fi el ds of fi re. Any
obstructi on (vegetati on, terrai n) can prevent a one-shot ki l l by defl ecti ng
FM 3-05.222
C-14
or bl ocki ng the path of the l aser beam. By sel ecti ng thi s type of posi ti on,
the sni per wi l l greatl y i mprove hi s observati on and fi ri ng capabi l i ti es.
Target Detection/ Selection. Usi ng MI LES agai nst mul ti pl e or cl uster
targets requi res the sni per to sel ect the target that has the greatest
effect on the enemy. The trai ner provi des i nstant feedback on the
sni pers performance. Si tuati ons may be created such as bunkers,
hostage si tuati ons, and MOUT fi ri ng. The hi t-or-mi ss i ndi cati ng
aspects of MI LES are i nval uabl e i n thi s type of trai ni ng.
Marksmanship. A target hi t (ki l l ) wi th MI LES i s the same as one wi th
l i ve ammuni ti on. Proper appl i cati on of marksmanshi p fundamental s
resul ts i n a fi rst-round ki l l ; the trai ni ng val ue i s sel f-evi dent.
MILES TRAINING LIMITATIONS
C-12. The concept of MI LES i s to provi de real i sti c trai ni ng. However, MI LES
i s l i mi ted i n i ts capabi l i ti es as appl i ed to the sni pers mi ssi on of l ong-range
preci si on fi re. These l i mi tati ons are
Lack of Range Estimation Training. Due to the strai ght beam, once the
weapon and MI LES are zeroed together, the sni per cannot change the
el evati on knob based on range-to-target. Thi s negates any range
esti mati on practi ce duri ng thi s trai ni ng.
Lack of External Ballistics Training. The MI LES transmi tter emi ts a
concentrated beam of l i ght. I t travel s from the sni pers weapon
undi sturbed by outsi de forces such as temperature, humi di ty, and
wi nd. Lack of these effects may l ul l the sni per i nto a fal se sense of
confi dence. The trai ners shoul d constantl y rei nforce the i mportance of
these factors. The sni per shoul d make a mental note of changes that
shoul d be appl i ed to compensate for these effects.
Engagement of Moving Targets. The engagement of movi ng targets
requi res the sni per to establ i sh a target l ead to compensate for fl i ght
ti me of hi s bul l et. Travel i ng i n excess of 186,000 mi l es per second (speed
of l i ght), the MI LES l aser nul l i fi es the requi rement for target l ead.
Agai n, the sni per may be l ul l ed i nto a fal se sense of confi dence. The
trai ner shoul d enforce the pri nci pl es of movi ng target engagement by
havi ng the sni per note appropri ate target l ead for the gi ven si tuati on.
REDUCED-SCALE RANGE
C-13. When usi ng ai r ri fl es for marksmanshi p trai ni ng, the sni per can use one
of several formul as to si mul ate di stances for a reduced or subcal i ber range.
Li sted bel ow are several formul as and expl anati ons on how to use them.
REDUCED-SCALE TARGET HEIGHT FORMULA
C-14. The formul a to fi nd the reduced hei ght of a target at a gi ven range and
a si mul ated range i s as fol l ows:
2 H
2 R
1 H 1 R
=

R1 = Reduced range+
R2 = Si mul ated range+
FM 3-05.222
C-15
H1 = Hei ght of actual target*
H2 = Reduced hei ght of target*
NOTES:
+ Both the reduced range and the si mul ated range must agree i n measurement;
for exampl e, 1,000 meters and 35 meters or 1,000 yards and 35 yards.
* I f the hei ght of the real target i s expressed i n i nches (for exampl e, 72 i nches
for a 6-foot man), the answer i s i n i nches. I f the hei ght i s expressed i n feet,
the answer wi l l be i n feet.
EXAMPLES:
R1 = 35 meters R2 = 500 meters H1 = 72 i nches
i nches 5.04
500
72 35
=

R1 = 25 yards R2 = 800 yards H1 = 6 feet
feet .1875 0
800
6 25
=

To change the 0.1875 feet to i nches, mul ti pl y by 12. 0.1875 x 12 = 2.25 i nches
REDUCED-SCALE SIMULATED RANGE FORMULA
C-15. The formul a to fi nd the si mul ated range of a gi ven reduced target
hei ght at a gi ven reduced range i s as fol l ows:

R1 H1
H2
= R2

EXAMPLE: A 3-i nch target at 35 meters wi l l si mul ate what range?
R1 = 35 meters H1 = 72 i nches H2 = 3 i nches
meters 840
3
72 35
=

C-16. Tabl e C-2, page C-16, si mul ates i n i nches a 6-foot man at vari ous
ranges on the gi ven reduced ranges.
C-17. The center of the pel l et stri ke shoul d be the determi ni ng factor due to
the si ze di fference of the pel l et di ameter versus the range and si mul ated
target si ze. I t i s al so recommended that the ranges of 100 through 400
yards/meters be agai nst a head or head and shoul ders target and not the ful l
body. For exampl e, at 35 meters the normal human head i s si mul ated to be
2.8 i nches hi gh by 1.75 i nches wi de for a si mul ated range of 100 meters.
C-18. An addi ti onal advantage to the reduced range targets i s that when the
sni per uses the above tabl e or formul as, a reduced-scal e unknown di stance
range for judgi ng di stance wi l l be constructed at the same ti me. When he
uses the mi l scal e i n the Leupol d M3A Ul tra 10x scope, the targets wi l l gi ve
the same mi l readi ngs as a real target at that di stance. As an exampl e, a 6-
foot man at 500 yards i s 4 mi l s hi gh. A 3.60-i nch target at 25 yards i s 4 mi l s
hi gh and si mul ates a 6-foot man at 500 yards.
FM 3-05.222
C-16
Table C-2. Reduced Range Chart
Range 15 yds/m 20 yds/m 25 yds/m 30 yds/m 35 yds/m
1,000 yds/m 1.08 1.44 1.80 2.16 2.52
900 yds/m 1.20 1.60 2.00 2.40 2.80
800 yds/m 1.35 1.80 2.25 2.70 3.15
700 yds/m 1.54 2.05 2.57 3.08 3.60
600 yds/m 1.80 2.40 3.00 3.60 4.20
500 yds/m 2.16 2.88 3.60 4.32 5.04
400 yds/m 2.70 3.60 4.50 5.40 6.30
300 yds/m 3.60 4.80 6.00 7.20 8.40
200 yds/m 5.40 7.20 9.00 10.80 12.60
100 yds/m 10.80 14.40 18.00 21.60 25.20
C-19. Another techni que i s to determi ne the number of MOA that the target
represents at that range; 36 i nches at 600 equal s 6 MOA. Then use that
number to si mul ate the reduced di stance target: 6 MOA equal s 1.5 i nches at
25 yards. Thus, a 1.5-i nch target at 25 yards wi l l equal a 36-i nch target at
600 yards.
D-1
Appendix D
Mission Packing List
The sni per team determi nes the type and quanti ty of equi pment i t
carri es by a METT-TC anal ysi s. Some of the equi pment menti oned may
not be avai l abl e. A sni per team, due to i ts uni que mi ssi on
requi rements, carri es onl y mi ssi on-essenti al equi pment. Thi s i s not an
i ncl usi ve l i st, and not al l i tems l i sted wi l l be carri ed on al l mi ssi ons.
ARMS AND AMMUNITION
D-1. Tabl e D-1 l i sts mi ssi on-essenti al arms and ammuni ti on carri ed by a
sni per and observer.
Table D-1. List of Arms and Ammunition
Sniper Observer
M24 SWS with M3A telescope.
Rounds of M118/M852 ammunition.
Snipers data book, mission logbook,
range cards, wind tables, and slope
dope.
M9 9-mm pistol.
Rounds 9-mm ball ammunition.
Each 9-mm magazines.
M9 bayonet.
M67 fragmentation grenades.
CS grenades; 2 percussion grenades
(MOUT).
M18A1 mine, complete.
M4/M16/M203 (with NVD, as appropriate).
Rounds ammunition.
Magazines for rifle.
M9 9-mm pistol.
Rounds, 9-mm ball ammunition.
Each 9-mm magazines.
M9 bayonet.
Rounds 40-mm, high-explosive ammunition
if M203 is carried.
Rounds 40-mm antipersonnel ammunition.
M67 fragmentation grenades; 2 CS
grenades; 2 percussion (MOUT).

FM 3-05.222

D-2
SPECIAL EQUIPMENT
D-2. Tabl e D-2 l i sts mi ssi on-essenti al speci al equi pment carri ed by a
sni per and observer.
Table D-2. List of Special Equipment
Sniper Observer
M24 SWS cleaning kit.
M24 SWS deployment kit (tools and
replacement parts).
M9 pistol cleaning kit.
Extra handset for radio.
Extra batteries for radio (BA-4386 or
lithium, dependent on mission length).
Signal operating instructions.
AN/PVS-5/7 series, night vision
goggles.
Extra BA-1567/U or AA batteries for
night vision goggles.
Pace cord.
E-tool with carrier.
50-foot 550 cord.
1 green and 1 red star cluster.
2 HC smoke grenades.
Measuring tape (25-foot carpenter-
type).
M4/M16/M203 cleaning kit.
AN/PRC-77/AN-PRC-119/AN/PRC-104
radio.
Radio accessory bag, complete with long
whip and base, tape antenna and base,
handset, and battery (BA-4386 or lithium).
M49 20x spotting scope with M15 tripod (or
equivalent 15 to 20x fixed power scope, or
15-45x spotting scope).
M19/M22 binoculars (preferably 7 x 50
power with mil scale).
Range estimation cheat book.
300 feet WD-1 field wire (for field-expedient
antenna fabrication).
Olive-drab duct tape, olive-drab (100
mph) tape.
Extra batteries for radio (if needed).
Extra batteries (BA-1576/U) for AN/PVS-4.
Calculator with extra battery.
Butt pack.
10 each sandwich-sized waterproof bags.
2 HC smoke grenades.
Linemans tool.
FM 3-05.222

D-3
UNIFORMS AND EQUIPMENT
D-3. Tabl e D-3 l i sts uni forms and equi pment.
Table D-3. List of Uniforms and Equipment
Footgear (jungle/desert/cold weather/combat boots).
2 sets of BDUs (desert/woodland/camouflage).
Black leather gloves.
2 brown T-shirts.
2 pairs brown underwear.
8 pairs olive-drab wool socks.
Black belt.
Headgear (BDU/jungle/desert/cold weather).
Identification (ID) tags and ID card.
Wristwatch (sweep-second hand with luminous dial, waterproof).
Pocket survival knife.
Large all-purpose, lightweight individual carrying equipment (ALICE) pack, complete with
frame and shoulder straps.
2 waterproof bags (for ALICE pack).
2 2-quart canteens with covers.
1 bottle water purification tablets.
Complete load-bearing equipment (LBE).
Red-lens flashlight (angle-head type with extra batteries).
MRE (number dependent on mission length).
9-mm pistol holster and magazine pouch (attached to LBE).
2 camouflage sticks (METT-TC-dependent).
2 black ink pens.
2 mechanical pencils with lead.
2 black grease pencils.
Lensatic compass.
Map(s) of operational area.
Protractor.
Poncho.
Poncho liner.
2 ghillie suits, complete.
2 protective masks/MOPP suits.
Foot powder.
Toiletries.
FM 3-05.222

D-4
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
D-4. Tabl e D-4 l i sts opti onal equi pment.
Table D-4. List of Optional Equipment
M203 vest.
Desert camouflage netting.
Natural-colored burlap.
Glitter tape.
VS-17 panel.
Strobe light with filters.
Special patrol insertion/extraction system
harness.
12-foot sling rope.
2 each snap links.
120-foot nylon rope.
Lip balm or sunscreen.
Signal mirror.
Pen gun with flares.
Chemical lights (to include infrared).
Body armor/flak jacket.
Sniper veil.
Sewing kit.
Insect repellent.
Sleeping bag.
Knee and elbow pads.
Survival kit.
Rifle drag bag.
Pistol silencer/suppressor.
2.5 pounds C4 with caps, cord, fuse, and
igniter.
Rifle bipod/tripod.
Empty sandbags.
Hearing protection (ear muffs).
Thermometer.
Laser range finder.
Thermal imager.
KN-200-KN-250 image intensifier.
Pocket binoculars.
35-mm automatic loading camera with
appropriate lenses and film.
1/2-inch camcorder with accessories.
Satellite communication equipment.
Short-range radio with earphone and
whisper microphone.
Field-expedient antennas.
Information reporting formats.
Encryption device for radio.
SO sniper training/employment manual.

FM 3-05.222

D-5
SPECIAL TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
D-5. Tabl e D-5 l i sts speci al tool s and equi pment (MOUT).
Table D-5. List of Special Tools and Equipment
Pry bar.
Pliers.
Screwdriver.
Rubber-headed hammer.
Glass cutter.
Masonry drill and bits.
Metal shears.
Chisel.
Auger.
Lock pick, skeleton keys, cobra pick.
Bolt cutters.
Hacksaw or handsaw.
Sledgehammer.
Ax.
Ram.
Power saw.
Cutting torch.
Shotgun.
Spray paint.
Stethoscope.
Maps or street plans.
Photographs, aerial and panoramic.
Whistle.
Luminous tape.
Flex cuffs.
Padlocks.
Intrusion detection system (booby traps).
Portable spotlight(s).
Money (U.S. and indigenous).
Civilian attire.
ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT TRANSPORT
D-6. The pl anned use of ai r and vehi cl e drops and cachi ng techni ques
el i mi nates the need for the sni per team to carry extra equi pment.
Another method i s to use the stay-behi nd techni que when operati ng wi th
a securi ty patrol (Chapter 5). Through coordi nati on wi th the securi ty
patrol l eader, the teams equi pment may be broken down among the
patrol members. On arri val at the ORP, the securi ty patrol may l eave
behi nd al l mi ssi on-essenti al equi pment. After compl eti ng the mi ssi on, the
team may cache the equi pment for l ater pi ckup, or i t may be returned the
same way i t was brought i n.


E-1
Appendix E
M82A1 Caliber .50 Sniper Weapon System
Changes i n modern warfare requi red an expansi on of the sni pers rol e.
On the fl ui d, modern battl efi el d, the sni per must be prepared to engage a
wi de range of targets at even greater di stances. After years of research
and devel opment, the mi l i tary adopted the M82A1 cal i ber .50 SWS.
However, even after havi ng been depl oyed to operati onal uni ts, no
comprehensi ve trai ni ng pl an has been devel oped to trai n sni pers on thi s
new rol e. The basi c approach to the l arge-bore sni per ri fl e has been that
i t i s nothi ng more than a bi g M24 (7.62-mm sni per ri fl e). Thi s l ogi c has
i ts obvi ous fl aws. Many of the techni ques l earned by the sni per need to be
modi fi ed to compensate for thi s new weapon system. Some of these
changes i ncl ude movement techni ques, mai ntenance requi rements,
sni per team si ze and confi gurati on, support requi rements, and the
marksmanshi p ski l l s necessary to engage targets at ranges i n excess of
1,800 meters. To keep up wi th the battl es fought i n-depth, as wel l as
smal l er-scal e confl i cts, the need for a sni per trai ned and equi pped wi th a
l arge-bore ri fl e i s apparent.
ROLE OF THE M82A1 CALIBER .50 SWS
E-1. The mi l i tary can use the M82A1 i n several di fferent rol esas the l ong-
range ri fl e, the i nfantry support ri fl e, and the expl osi ve ordnance di sposal
tool . Personnel use the M82A1 as
A l ong-range ri fl e to di sabl e val uabl e targets that are l ocated outsi de the
range or the capabi l i ti es of conventi onal weapons, many ti mes doi ng so i n
si tuati ons that may precl ude the use of more sophi sti cated weapons.
An i nfantry support ri fl e to engage l i ghtl y armored vehi cl es and to
penetrate l i ght forti fi cati ons that the 5.56 mm and the 7.62 mm
cannot defeat.
An expl osi ve ordnance di sposal tool to engage and di srupt several types
of muni ti ons at ranges from 100 to 500 meters. I n most cases, the
muni ti ons are destroyed or di srupted wi th a si ngl e hi t and wi thout a
hi gh-order detonati on.
E-2. When used i n any of i ts rol es, the cal i ber .50 SWS and personnel trai ned
to use i t are vi tal assets to the commander. I n l i ght of thi s, a trai ni ng
program i s necessary to maxi mi ze thei r potenti al .
FM 3-05.222
E-2
M82A1 CALIBER .50 SWS CHARACTERISTICS
E-3. The Barrett Cal i ber .50 Model 82A1 i s a short recoi l -operated,
magazi ne-fed, ai r-cool ed, semi automati c ri fl e (Fi gure E-1). I ts speci fi cati ons
are as fol l ows:
Cal i ber: .50 Browni ng machi ne gun cartri dge (12.7 x 99 mm).
Wei ght: 30 l bs (13.6 kg).
Overal l Length: 57 i nches (144.78 cm).
Barrel Length: 29 i nches (73.67 cm).
Muzzl e Vel oci ty: 2,850 fps (M33 bal l ).
Maxi mum Range M2 Bal l : 6,800 meters (7,450 yds).
Maxi mum Effecti ve Range: 1,830 meters on an area target and 1200 to
1400 on a poi nt target, dependi ng on target si ze.
Magazi ne Capaci ty: 10 rounds.
Figure E-1. The Barrett Caliber .50 Model 82A1
THE SWAROVSKI RANGING RETICLE RIFLE SCOPE
E-4. A qual i fi ed sni per has al ready been taught the fundamental s of scoped
ri fl e fi re. However, the scope that the M82A1 i s equi pped wi th di ffers from
most of the scopes. Fi gure E-2, page E-3, l i sts the speci fi cati ons for the
Swarovski ri fl e scope.

FM 3-05.222

E-3
Design Characteristics
30-mm main tube is compatible with existing SWS mounting rings.
Made of aluminum alloy.
NOVA ocular system filled with dry nitrogen after pressure-testing to prevent
fogging.
Available add-on battery-operated reticle illuminator for low-light conditions.
Recoiling eyepiece offers added protection from scope bite.
Sloped scope rail enables use of only the Swarovski reticle-equipped scope, rail is
between 0.030 and 0.035 inches higher at rear. The sloped rail also aids in the M3A to
zero at the longer ranges due to the additional slope in the rail.
NOTE: Under no circumstances will the scope rail be removed.
Technical Data
Magnification: 10x.
Objective Lens Diameter: 42 mm.
Field of View: 12 feet at 100 yards/4 meters at 100 meters.
Parallax-Free Distance of the Reticle: 500 meters (tolerance 250 meters to
infinity).
Windage and Elevation Adjustments: 1 click: 1/5 inch at 100 yards, (1/5 MOA)
maximum: 80 inches at 100 yards (80 MOA).
Operating Temperature: 131 degrees Fahrenheit/ 4 degrees Fahrenheit.
Weight: approximately 13.5 ounces.
Reticle
Offers ranging capabilities from 500 to 1,800 meters.
No range estimation abilities (500 meters to 600 meters stadia lines approximately
1 mil apart, 3.5 MOA).
5 and 10 mph wind hold-offs, also usable for moving targets.
Lack of mil dots require different hold-offs for wind and drift.
Figure E-2. Scope Specifications
USING THE M82A1 CALIBER .50 SWS
E-5. A qual i fi ed sni per has al so al ready been taught the consi derati ons
necessary for proper empl oyment of a sni per team. Wi th the cal i ber .50 SWS,
many of these have changed. The effecti ve range, si gnature, wei ght, support
requi rements, and termi nal performance of the round are al l i ncreased over
the 7.62 SWS. As a resul t, the sni per must do the fol l owi ng to ensure proper
use of thi s system:
Maxi mi ze the range of the M82A1. Al ways engage targets at the
maxi mum range that the weapon, target, and terrai n wi l l permi t. Make
sure to
Sel ect the appropri ate ammuni ti on (by effecti ve range and termi nal
performance).
FM 3-05.222
E-4
Use range fi nder whenever possi bl e.
When i n doubt of range esti mati on, ai m l ow and adjust usi ng the
si ght-to-burst method. Second shots are frowned upon wi th a 7.62
SWS because of two thi ngsthe target getti ng i nto a prone posi ti on
(whi ch most peopl e do when shot at) and the sni per reveal i ng hi s
posi ti on. Nei ther of these pri nci pl es appl y to the cal i ber .50 SWS
when i t i s used agai nst armored or forti fi ed targets. Armored
personnel carri ers (APCs) cannot duck, nor i s an enemy buttoned
i nto a bunker or an APC as observant as he coul d be. The sni per
needs to have careful l y observed hi s area before assumi ng the above
to be al ways true.
Conduct movement i nto or occupy an FFP wi th the M82Al SWS. Sni per
shoul d
Modi fy hi s movement techni ques to accommodate for the fol l owi ng:
I ncreased wei ght of the system, ammuni ti on, and team
equi pment.
Better route sel ecti on (amount of crawl i ng i s reduced).
Better sel ecti on of wi thdrawal routes (after the shot, the sni per
becomes a hi gher-pri ori ty target and must sel ect route for
qui ck egress).
Occupy an FFP and adjust for the fol l owi ng:
Much l arger si gnature to front, cl ear area and dampen soi l .
Si gnature al so at 65 degrees, fan to ri ght and l eft of sni per.
Si ze requi rement for a 3-man sni per team i n a permanent hi de
may make i t unfeasi bl e for many appl i cati ons.
FFP shoul d prevent l ong-range skyl i ned targets.
Understand addi ti onal support requi rements for the M82A1. Sni per
shoul d
Mai ntai n an M82A1 SWS as fol l ows:
Cl ean after 10 rounds for better accuracy.
Be aware that a chamber pressure of 55,000 copper uni ts of
pressure (CUP) coul d cause fatal mai ntenance fai l ures.
Modi fy exi sti ng trai ni ng and sustai nment programs as fol l ows:
Cannot fi re the M82A1 on exi sti ng smal l -arms sni per ranges.
Requi res speci al consi derati ons for the use of ammuni ti on
other than the standard bal l and tracer (for exampl e,
mul ti purpose ammuni ti on, armor-pi erci ng i ncendi ary [API ]).
Understand the fol l owi ng addi ti onal transportati on requi rements:
Addi ti onal wei ght of system makes vehi cul ar movement
desi rabl e.
As there i s no exi sti ng approved method for parachute or
underwater i nfi l trati on wi th the M82A1, the sni per must pl an
for al ternate methods of getti ng the SWS to the battl efi el d.
FM 3-05.222

E-5
E-6. A sni pers abi l i ty to depl oy to the battl efi el d wi th an M82A1 depends on
whether he can adapt what he has l earned i n the past. The rul es of sni per
empl oyment havent changed, but many of the fi ner poi nts have.
MAINTENANCE
E-7. Mai ntenance of the M82A1 SWS i nvol ves assembl y and di sassembl y,
i nspecti on, cl eani ng and l ubri cati on, and repl acement of parts.
E-8. The sni per normal l y stores and transports the M82A1 SWS i n the
carryi ng case. The fol l owi ng procedure covers the i ni ti al assembl y of the ri fl e
as i t woul d come from the case.
E-9. The sni per fi rst removes the l ower recei ver from the carryi ng case. He
extends the bi pod l egs by pul l i ng them back and swi ngi ng them down to the
front where they wi l l l ock i nto pl ace. He then pl aces the l ower recei ver on
the ground.
E-10. The sni per removes the rear l ock pi n from i ts stored posi ti on i n the
l ower recei ver, found just forward of the recoi l pad.
E-11. He frees the bol t carri er. The bol t carri er i s hel d i n pl ace under tensi on
i n the l ower recei ver by the mi dl ock pi n. He grasps the chargi ng handl e of the
bol t carri er wi th the ri ght hand and pul l s back agai nst the tensi on of the
mai n spri ng. The sni per then removes the mi dl ock pi n and al l ows the bol t
carri er to come forward sl owl y unti l there i s no more spri ng tensi on.
E-12. The sni per removes the upper recei ver from the case. He mai ntai ns
control of the barrel that i s retracted i n the upper recei ver to prevent i t from
sl i di ng and i njuri ng hi s fi ngers. The barrel may have rotated i n shi ppi ng and
he wi l l need to i ndex i t so that the feed ramp i s to the bottom. The sni per
then ful l y extends the barrel from the upper recei ver.
E-13. The i mpact bumper that surrounds the barrel must be pl aced i nto
proper posi ti on by the barrel l ug. The sni per grasps the barrel key (not the
spri ngs) wi th the thumb and mi ddl e of the i ndex fi nger. He pul l s the key i nto
pl ace on the key sl ot of the barrel . Thi s i s a di ffi cul t operati on, at fi rst,
because the tensi on of the barrel spri ng i s approxi matel y 70 pounds.
E-14. The sni per posi ti ons the upper recei ver, rear-end up, muzzl e down,
over the l ower recei ver. He engages the front hook of the l ower recei ver.
NOTE: The sni per shoul d make sure of the proper mati ng of the hook and
bar to avoi d recei ver damage duri ng the fi nal assembl y moti on.
CAUTION
Do not pull the midlock pin without hands-on control
of the bolt carrier; it can be launched from the lower
receiver.

FM 3-05.222
E-6
E-15. He grasps the chargi ng handl e on the bol t carri er and pul l s back
agai nst the tensi on of the mai n spri ng unti l the bol t cl ears the barrel when
the upper recei ver i s l owered.
E-16. The sni per l owers and cl oses the upper recei ver onto the l ower
recei ver. He rel eases the chargi ng handl e. Then he pl aces the mi d and rear
l ock pi ns i nto the l ock pi n hol es i n the recei ver.
E-17. He pl aces thumb safety i n the on safe posi ti on (hori zontal ).
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
E-18. The two types of di sassembl y and assembl y are general and detai l ed.
General di sassembl y and assembl y i nvol ves removi ng and repl aci ng the three
major weapon groups. Detai l ed di sassembl y and assembl y i nvol ves removi ng
and repl aci ng the component parts of the major groups.
General Disassembly
NOTE: Onl y SOTI C personnel are authori zed to perform compl ete
di sassembl y.
E-19. The three major weapon groups are the upper recei ver, bol t carri er,
and l ower recei ver. As the sni per di sassembl es the weapon, he shoul d note
each part posi ti on, confi gurati on, and part name. He
Begi ns by cl eari ng the weapon and supporti ng the ri fl e on the bi pod,
wi th the magazi ne removed.
Removes the mi d and rear l ock pi ns.
Grasps the chargi ng handl e and pul l s back unti l the bol t wi thdraws
from and cl ears the barrel .
Li fts the upper recei ver at i ts rear. When the recei ver has rai sed
enough to cl ear the bol t, he sl owl y rel eases the pul l on the chargi ng
handl e so that the bol t carri er comes to rest.
Conti nues to rai se the upper recei ver unti l the front hi nge i s
di sengaged and then l i fts i t from the l ower recei ver.
Wi thdraws the barrel by resti ng the upper recei ver group on the
muzzl e brake by pl aci ng i t on any surface that wi l l not damage the end
of the brake.
Wi thdraws the barrel key from the sl ot i n the barrel by sl owl y worki ng
i t out and graspi ng i t between hi s thumb and the mi ddl e of the i ndex
fi nger (he shoul d be prepared to assume the tensi on of the barrel
spri ngs upon the rel ease of the barrel key from the sl ottensi on i s
approxi matel y 70 pounds). Sl owl y l owers the key unti l the tensi on of
the spri ngs are at rest.
NOTE: The sni per shoul d never pul l on the barrel spri ngs to remove the
barrel key.
Lowers the recei ver down around the barrel .
Grasps the chargi ng handl e and l i fts the bol t carri er group from the
l ower recei ver.
FM 3-05.222

E-7
Decocks the fi ri ng mechani sm by depressi ng the sear wi th the rear
l ock pi n.
Wi th the bol t i n the l eft hand, uses the mi d l ock to depress the bol t
l atch agai nst the pal m. He uses the rear l ock pi n to l i ft the cam pi n and
frees the bol t wi th the ri ght hand. The bol t wi l l ri se under the power of
the bol t spri ng. He shoul d never l i ft the cam pi n more than needed to
rel ease the bol t.
Removes the bol t and bol t spri ng.
I f i t i s necessar y to r emove the extr actor , i nser ts a pi n punch or paper
cl i p thr ough the extr actor hol e and sl i des the extr actor out ei ther si de
of the sl ot. He shoul d be pr epar ed to captur e or contai n the pl unger
and the pl unger spr i ng. He r ever ses the pr ocedur e for r epl acement.
Assembly
E-20. The sni per reverses the procedure for reassembl y of the bol t. He
Repl aces the bol t carri er. Wi th the l ower recei ver group standi ng on i ts
bi pod, pl aces the bol t carri er i nto the l ower recei ver.
Repl aces the upper recei ver by
Posi ti oni ng the upper recei ver (rear up and muzzl e down) over the
l ower recei ver so the hook of the front hi nge can ful l y engage the
hi nge bar on the l ower recei ver.
NOTE: I f not properl y seated, the hi nge bar can be pri ed off due to
l everage the operator can appl y when cl osi ng the recei ver.
Whi l e posi ti oned di rectl y behi nd the ri fl e, prepari ng to cl ose the
upper recei ver wi th the l eft hand.
Graspi ng the chargi ng handl e of the bol t carri er and pul l i ng the bol t
carri er back i nto the mai n spri ng, so the bol t cl ears the barrel whi l e
l oweri ng the upper recei ver.
Loweri ng and cl osi ng the upper recei ver and rel easi ng the
chargi ng handl e.
Repl aci ng mi d and rear l ock pi ns.
INSPECTION
E-21. I nspecti on begi ns wi th the weapon di sassembl ed i nto i ts three major
groups. Fi gure E-3, page E-8, descri bes each group and the steps that the
sni per must perform to i nspect for proper functi oni ng.







FM 3-05.222
E-8
Upper Receiver Group
Makes sure barrel springs are not overstretched and each coil is tight with no space
between the coils.
Checks to see if impact bumper is in good condition.
Ensures the muzzle brake is tight.
Inspects the upper receiver for signs of being cracked, bent, or burred.
Makes sure scope mounting rings are tight.
Bolt Carrier Group
Checks the ejector and extractor to see that they are under spring pressure and not
chipped or worn.
Decocks firing mechanism, depresses the bolt latch, and manually works the bolt in
and out, feeling for any roughness.
Holding the bolt down, inspects firing pin protrusion and for any erosion of the firing
pin hole.
Inspects bolt latch for deformation and free movement.
Swings cocking lever forward. The sear should capture the firing pin extension before
the cocking lever is fully depressed.
Lower Receiver Group
With the bolt carrier in place, pulls it rearwards and checks to see that the mainspring
moves freely.
Holds bolt carrier under mainspring housing approximately 10 mm and checks for
excessive lift that would prevent the trigger from firing.
Ensures the lower receiver is not cracked, bent, or burred.
Checks the bipod assembly to ensure it functions properly.
Figure E-3. Steps in Snipers Inspection of Major Weapon Groups
CLEANING AND LUBRICATION
E-22. The ri fl es si ze makes i t rel ati vel y easy to cl ean. The sni per shoul d
cl ean i t at the compl eti on of each days fi ri ng or duri ng the day i f foul i ng i s
causi ng the weapon to mal functi on. He
Cl eans the bore wi th ri fl e bore cl eaner (RBC) or a sui tabl e substi tute.
Each cl eani ng shoul d i ncl ude at l east si x passes back and forth wi th
the bronze-bri stl e brush, fol l owed by cl oth patches unti l the patches
come out cl ean. I mmedi atel y after usi ng bore cl eaner, he dri es the bore
and any parts of the ri fl e exposed to the bore cl eaner and appl i es a thi n
coat of oi l . He shoul d al ways cl ean the bore from the chamber end.
Cl eans the rest of the weapon wi th a weapons cl eani ng toothbrush,
rags, and cl eani ng sol vent. When usi ng cl eani ng sol vent, he shoul d not
expose pl asti c or rubber parts to i t. He dri es and l ubri cates al l metal
surfaces when cl ean.
FM 3-05.222

E-9
E-23. The sni per shoul d l i ghtl y l ubri cate al l exposed metal . These parts are
as fol l ows:
Bol t (l ocki ng l ugs and cam sl ot).
Bol t carri er (recei ver beari ng surfaces).
Barrel bol t l ocki ng surfaces (recei ver beari ng surfaces).
Recei ver (beari ng surfaces for recoi l i ng parts).
NOTE: The sni per l ubri cates accordi ng to the condi ti ons i n the AO.
E-24. The sni per shoul d dust off the scope and keep i t free of di rt. He shoul d
dust the l enses wi th a l ens cl eani ng brush and onl y cl ean them wi th l ens
cl eani ng sol vent and l ens ti ssue.
NOTE: The Barrett i s easy to mai ntai n, but because of the si ze of i ts
components the sni per must pay attenti on to what he i s doi ng, or he may
damage the weapon, i njure hi msel f, or hurt others around hi m i f not careful .
F-1
Appendix F
Foreign/Nonstandard Sniper Weapon
Systems Data
Several countri es have devel oped SWSs comparabl e to the U.S. systems.
The desi gns and capabi l i ti es of these weapon systems are si mi l ar. Thi s
appendi x descri bes the characteri sti cs of sni per weapon systems that
coul d be encountered on depl oyments. Thi s i s not an al l -i ncl usi ve l i st, and
not al l weapons are current i ssue. The country l i sted i s ei ther the l ast
country of i ssue or the manufacturer.
AUSTRIA
F-1. The fol l owi ng systems are currentl y i n use: Steyr Model SSG 69 and
SSG-PI I ri fl es wi th Kahl es ZF69, ZF84, or RZFM86 tel escopes.
F-2. The Austri an Scharf Schutzen Gewehr (Sharp Shooters Ri fl e) 69
(SSG-69) i s the current sni per weapon of the Austri an Army and several
forei gn mi l i tary forces. I t i s avai l abl e i n ei ther 7.62- x 51-mm NATO or the
.243 Wi nchester cal i bers. Recogni zabl e features i ncl ude a syntheti c stock
(green or bl ack) that i s adjustabl e for l ength of pul l by a si mpl e spacer
system; hammer-forged, medi um-heavy barrel ; two-stage tri gger, adjustabl e
for wei ght of pul l (a set tri gger system i s frequentl y seen); and a machi ned,
l ongi tudi nal ri b on top of the recei ver that accepts several types of opti cal
mounts. The mounti ng ri ngs have a qui ck-rel ease l ever system that al l ows
removal and reattachment of the opti cs wi th no l oss of zero. The typi cal
si ghti ng system consi sts of the Kahl es ZF69 6- x 42-mm tel escope; i ron si ghts
are permanentl y affi xed to the ri fl e for emergency use. The SSG-PI I (Pol i tzei
I I ) has a heavy barrel and does not have i ron si ghts. The tel escope comes
equi pped wi th a bul l et drop compensator graduated to 800 meters, and a
reti cl e that consi sts of a post wi th broken crosshai rs. The Steyr SSG-69 has a
wel l -deserved reputati on for accuracy. The Kahl es ZF-seri es of tel escopes are
zeroed wi th the same procedure used for Sovi et tel escopes.
Steyr SSG-69 Characteristics
System of operation: bolt-action.
Caliber: 7.62- x 51-mm NATO.
Overall length: 44.5 inches.
Barrel length: 25.6 inches.
Rifling: 4-groove, 1/12-inch right-hand twist.
Weight: 10.3 pounds.
Magazine capacity: 5- or 10-round
detachable magazine.
Telescope: Kahles ZF69 6 x 42 mm; BDC:
100 to 800 m.
Front: hooded post.
Rear: notch.

FM 3-05.222

F-2
F-3. Ammuni ti on requi rement: The ZF69 i s desi gned for the NATO bal l
ammuni ti on: 147/150 gn FMJBT @ 2,800 fps. Some model s of thi s tel escope
were desi gned for export to the Uni ted States and the BDC i s cal i brated for
Federal s 308M l oad (168 HPBT @ 2,600 fps). The Kahl es ZF84 tel escope i s
avai l abl e wi th the fol l owi ng bal l i sti c cams: .223/62 gn; .308/143 gn; .308/146
gn; .308/168 gn; .308/173 gn; .308/185 gn; and .308/190 gn.
BELGIUM
F-4. Thi s system i s currentl y i n use: Fabri que Nati onal e (FN) Model 30-11.
F-5. The FN Model 30-11 i s the current sni per ri fl e of the Bel gi an Army. I t i s
bui l t on a Mauser bol t-acti on wi th a heavy barrel and a stock wi th an
adjustabl e l ength of pul l . The si ghti ng system consi sts of the FN 4x,
28-mm tel escope and aperture si ghts wi th 1/6 MOA adjustment capabi l i ty.
Accessori es i ncl ude the bi pod of the MAG machi ne gun, butt-spacer pl ates,
sl i ng, and carryi ng case.
FN Model 30-11 Characteristics
System of operation: bolt-action.
Caliber: 7.62- x 51-mm NATO.
Overall length: 45.2 inches.
Barrel length: 20.0 inches.
Rifling: 4-groove, 1/12-inch right-hand twist.
Weight: 15.5 pounds.
Magazine capacity: 10-round detachable
magazine.
Telescope: 4x with post reticle, range-finding
stadia, and BDC: 100 to 600 m.
Front: hooded aperture.
Rear: Anschutz match-aperture micrometer
adjustable for windage/elevation, and fitted
to mount on the rifles scope base with a
quick-detachable mount.
Ammunition requirement: 7.62- x 51-mm
NATO ball (147/150 gn FMJBT @ 2,800 fps).
CANADA
F-6. Thi s system i s currentl y i n use: Parker Hal e Model C3.
F-7. The Parker Hal e Model C3 i s a modi fi ed target ri fl e (commerci al Model
82 ri fl e, Model 1200 TX target ri fl e) bui l t on the Mauser acti on. I t was
adopted i n 1975. The recei ver i s fi tted wi th two mal e dovetai l bl ocks to accept
ei ther the Parker Hal e 5E verni er rearsi ght or the Kahl es 6- x 42-mm
tel escope. The stock has a spacer system to adjust the l ength of pul l .
Parker Hale Model C3 Characteristics
System of operation: bolt-action.
Caliber: 7.62- x 51-mm NATO.
Overall length: 48.0 inches.
Barrel length: 26.0 inches.
Weight: 12.8 pounds.
Magazine capacity: 4-round internal magazine.
Telescope: Kahles ZF69 6 x 42 mm; BDC:
100 to 800 m.
Front: detachable hooded post.
Rear: detachable aperture.
Ammunition requirement: 7.62- x 51-mm
NATO ball (147/150 gn FMJBT @ 2,800 fps).
FM 3-05.222
F-3
CZECH REPUBLIC AND SLOVAKIA
F-8. Thi s system i s currentl y i n use: Model 54.
F-9. The current SWS i s the VZ 54 sni per ri fl e (vzor i s the Czech word for
model ; therefore, VZ 54 i s the same as Model 54). I t i s a manual l y
operated, bol t-acti on, 10-round box, magazi ne-fed, 7.62- x 54-mm ri mmed
weapon. I t i s bui l t wi th a free-fl oati ng barrel . Thi s weapon i s si mi l ar to the
Sovi et M1891/30 sni pi ng ri fl e, but shorter and l i ghter. The ri fl e i s 45.2 i nches
l ong and wei ghs 9.0 pounds wi th the tel escope. I t has a muzzl e vel oci ty of
2,659 fps wi th a maxi mum effecti ve range of 1,000 meters.
FINLAND
F-10. Thi s system i s currentl y i n use: Vai me Si l enced Sni per Ri fl e Mark 2
(SSR Mk2).
F-11. The Fi nni sh armed forces are usi ng a 7.62- x 51-mm NATO sni per ri fl e
that i s equi pped wi th an i ntegral barrel and si l encer assembl y. The SSR Mk2
has a fi xed, sel f-cl eani ng, and noncorrosi ve si l encer. I t has a nonrefl ecti ve
pl asti c stock and an adjustabl e bi pod. Through the use of adapters, any
tel escopi c or el ectro-opti cal si ght may be mounted. The weapon i s not
equi pped wi th metal l i c si ghts. Wi th subsoni c ammuni ti on, the SSR Mk2 has a
maxi mum effecti ve range of 200 meters.
SSR Mk2 Characteristics
System of operation: bolt-action.
Caliber: 7.62- x-51-mm NATO.
Overall length: 46.5 inches.
Barrel length: 18.3 inches.
Rifling: not known.
Weight: 11 pounds.
Magazine capacity: 10-round internal
magazine.
Telescope: various.
Front: none.
Rear: none.
Ammunition requirements: subsonic (185 gn
FMJBT @ 1,050 fps).
FRANCE
F-12. These systems are currentl y i n use: MAS-GI AT FR-F1 and FR-F2.
F-13. The FR-F1 sni pi ng ri fl e, known as the Ti reur dEl i te (sni per), was
adopted i n 1966. I t i s based on the MAS 1936 bol t-acti on ri fl e. The l ength of
pul l may be adjusted wi th the removabl e butt-spacer pl ates. Thi s weapons
si ghti ng system consi sts of the Model 53 bi s 3.8x tel escopi c si ght and i ntegral
metal l i c si ghts wi th l umi nous spots for ni ght fi ri ng. Standard equi pment
features a permanentl y affi xed bi pod whose l egs may be fol ded forward i nto
recesses i n the fore-end of the weapon. The barrel has an i ntegral muzzl e
brake or fl ash suppressor. Thi s weapon has a muzzl e vel oci ty of 2,794 fps and
a maxi mum effecti ve range of 800 meters.

FM 3-05.222

F-4
MAS-GIAT FR-F1 Characteristics
System of operation: bolt-action.
Caliber: 7.62- x 51-mm NATO or 7.5- x 54-mm
French.
Overall length: 44.8 inches.
Barrel length: 22.8 inches.
Rifling: not known.
Weight: 11.9 pounds.
Magazine capacity: 10-round detachable box
magazine.
Telescope: Model 53, 3.8x.
Front: hooded post.
Rear: notch.
Ammunition requirement: not known.
F-14. The FR-F2 sniping rifle is an updated version of the F1. Dimensions and
operating characteristics remain unchanged; however, functional improvements
have been made. A heavy-duty bipod has been mounted more toward the butt-
end of the rifle, adding ease of adjustment for the firer. Also, the major change is
the addition of a thick, plastic thermal sleeve around and along the length of the
barrel. This addition eliminates or reduces barrel mirage and heat signature.
MAS-GIAT FR-F2 Characteristics
System of operation: bolt-action.
Caliber: 7.62- x 51-mm NATO.
Overall length: 47.2 inches.
Barrel length: 22.9 inches.
Rifling: 3-groove, 1/11.6-inch right-hand twist.
Weight: 13.6 pounds.
Magazine capacity: 10-round detachable
magazine.
Telescope: 6- x 42-mm or 1.56- x 42-mm
Schmidt and Bender; BDC: 100 to 600 m.
Front: post.
Rear: notch.
Ammunition requirement: 150 gn FMJBT @
2,690 fps.
GERMANY
F-15. These systems are currentl y i n use: Mauser Model SP66, Wal ther WA
2000, and the Heckl er and Koch PSG-1.
F-16. The Mauser Model SP66 i s used by the Germans and al so by about 12
other countri es. Thi s weapon i s a heavy-barrel l ed, bol t-acti on ri fl e bui l t upon a
Mauser short-acti on. I t has a compl etel y adjustabl e thumbhol e-type stock. The
muzzl e of the weapon i s equi pped wi th a fl ash suppressor and muzzl e brake.
Mauser SP66 Characteristics
System of operation: bolt-action.
Caliber: 7.62- x 51-mm NATO.
Overall length: not known.
Barrel length: 26.8 inches.
Rifling: not known.
Weight: not known.
Magazine capacity: 3-round internal magazine.
Telescope: Zeiss-Diavari ZA 1.56x.
Front: detachable hooded post.
Rear: detachable aperture.
Ammunition requirement: not known.

FM 3-05.222
F-5
F-17. The Wal ther WA 2000 i s bui l t speci fi cal l y for sni pi ng. The enti re
weapon i s bui l t around the 25.6-i nch barrel ; i t i s a semi automati c gas-
operated bul l -pup desi gn that i s 35.6 i nches l ong. Thi s uni que weapon i s
chambered for .300 Wi nchester Magnum, but i t can be equi pped to
accommodate cal i bers 7.62- x 51-mm NATO or 7.5- x 55-mm Swi ss. The
weapons tri gger i s a si ngl e- or two-staged type. I t can be fi tted wi th vari ous
opti cs, but i s typi cal l y found wi th a Schmi dt & Bender 2.510- x 56-mm
tel escope. I t has range setti ngs from 100 to 600 meters and can be
di smounted and mounted wi thout l oss of zero.
Walther WA 2000 Characteristics
System of operation: semiautomatic.
Calibers: .300 Winchester Magnum,
7.62- x 51-mm NATO, 7.5- x 55-mm Swiss.
Overall length: 35.6 inches.
Barrel length: 25.6 inches.
Rifling: not known.
Weight: 18.3 pounds.
Magazine capacity: 3-round detachable
magazine.
Telescope: Schmidt and Bender 2.510 x 56
mm, BDC: 100 to 600 m.
Front: none.
Rear: none.
Ammunition requirement: not known.
F-18. The Heckl er and Koch Prazi si ons Schutzen Gewehr (Preci si on
Marksmans Shooti ng Ri fl e) PSG-1 i s an extremel y accurate versi on of the
G-3. I t i s a gas-operated, magazi ne-fed, semi automati c weapon wi th a ful l y
adjustabl e, pi stol -gri p-styl e stock. Heckl er & Koch cl ai ms that thi s weapon wi l l
shoot as accuratel y as the i nherent accuracy of the ammuni ti on. The 6- x 42-
mm Hensol dt has l i ght emi tti ng di ode (LED)-enhanced, i l l umi nated crosshai rs,
el evati on adjustments from 100 to 600 meters, and poi nt-bl ank setti ngs from 10
to 75 meters. Si ghti ng requi res l ooseni ng two smal l screws l ocated i n the center
of the wi ndage and el evati on knobs. Once the screws are l oosened, the
adjustment can be made to center the shot group to correspond wi th one of the
range setti ngs on the knobs. The adjustments for both el evati on and wi ndage
move the i mpact of the bul l et one centi meter (0.4 i nches) at 100 meters.
Heckler and Koch PSG-1 Characteristics
System of operation: semiautomatic.
Caliber: 7.62- x 51-mm NATO.
Overall length: 47.5 inches.
Barrel length: 25.6 inches.
Rifling: polygonal, 1/12-inch right hand twist.
Weight: 17.8 pounds.
Magazine capacity: 5- and 20-round
detachable magazine.
Telescope: 6- x 42-mm Hensoldt with
illuminated reticle, BDC: 100 to 600 m.
Front: none.
Rear: none.
Ammunition requirement: Lapua 7.62- x
51-mm NATO Match: 185 FMJBT D46/D47
@ 2,493 fps.
FM 3-05.222

F-6
ISRAEL
F-19. These systems are currentl y i n use: Gal i l and M21 Sni pi ng Ri fl es.
F-20. The I srael i s copi ed the basi c desi gn, operati onal characteri sti cs, and
confi gurati on of the Sovi et AK-47 assaul t ri fl e to devel op an i mproved
weapon to meet the demands of the I srael i Army. The Gal i l sni pi ng ri fl e i s a
further evol uti on of thi s basi c desi gn. Li ke most servi ce ri fl es modi fi ed for
sni per use, the weapon i s equi pped wi th a heavi er barrel fi tted wi th a fl ash
suppressor; i t can be equi pped wi th a si l encer and fi red wi th subsoni c
ammuni ti on. The weapon features a pi stol -gri p-styl e stock, a ful l y adjustabl e
cheekpi ece, a rubber recoi l pad, a two-stage tri gger, and an adjustabl e bi pod
mounted to the rear of the fore-end of the ri fl e. I ts si ghti ng system consi sts of
a si de-mounted 6- x 40-mm tel escope and fi xed metal l i c si ghts. When fi ri ng
FN Match ammuni ti on, the weapon has a muzzl e vel oci ty of 2,672 fps; when
fi ri ng M118 speci al bal l ammuni ti on, i t has a muzzl e vel oci ty of 2,557 fps. The
speci fi cati ons on the M21 can be found i n the U.S. secti on.
Galil Sniper Rifle Characteristics
System of operation: semiautomatic.
Caliber: 7.62- x 51-mm NATO.
Overall length: 43.9 inches.
Barrel length: 20 inches.
Rifling: 4-groove, 1/12-inch right-hand twist.
Weight: 18.3 pounds.
Magazine capacity: 5- or 25-round
detachable magazine.
Telescope: 6- x 40-mm Nimrod, BDC: 100 to
1,000 m.
Front: hooded post with tritium night sight.
Rear: aperture with flip-up tritium night sight.
Ammunition requirement: M118 (173 gn
FMJBT @ 2,610 fps).
ITALY
F-21. Thi s system i s currentl y i n use: Beretta Sni per Ri fl e.
F-22. The Beretta rifle is the I talian sniper rifle. This rifle is a manually
operated, bolt-action, 5-round box, magazine-fed weapon that fires the 7.62- x 51-
mm NATO. I ts 45.9-inch length consists of a 23-inch heavy, free-floating barrel, a
wooden thumbhole-type stock with a rubber recoil pad, and an adjustable
cheekpiece. Target-quality, metallic sights consist of a hooded front sight and a
fully adjustable, V-notch rear sight. The optical sight consists of a Zeiss-Diavari
ZA 1.56x variable telescope. The weapon weighs 15.8 pounds with a bipod, and
13.75 pounds without a bipod. The NATO-standard telescope mount allows
almost any electro-optical or optical sight to be mounted to the weapon.
PEOPLES REPUBLIC OF CHINA
F-23. Thi s system i s currentl y i n use: Nori nco Type 79.
F-24. The standard sni per ri fl e of the Peopl es Republ i c of Chi na i s the
Nori nco Type 79, whi ch was adopted i n 1980. I t i s a vi rtual copy of the Sovi et
SVD. I n many i nstances, these ri fl es are nothi ng more than refi ni shed and
restamped Sovi et SVDs that were once sol d to the PRC. They have been
FM 3-05.222
F-7
i mported i nto the U.S. under the desi gnati on of NDM-86. The speci fi cati ons
can be found under the Sovi et SVD.
ROMANIA
F-25. Thi s system i s currentl y i n use: Model FPK.
F-26. The FPK was adopted i n 1970. Thi s sni per ri fl e fi res the Mosi n/Nagant
M1891 cartri dge, whi ch has a case l ength that i s 15 mm l onger than the 7.62-
x 39-mm Warsaw Pact cartri dge. Si nce the bol t of the AKM travel s 30 mm
(1.18 i nches) farther to the rear than i s necessary to accommodate the 7.62- x
39-mm cartri dge, the Romani an desi gners were abl e to modi fy the standard
AKM-type recei ver mechani sm to fi re the more powerful and l onger-ranged
7.62- x 54-mm ri mmed cartri dge. Fi rst, they al tered the bol t face to take the
l arger-ri mmed base of the M1891 cartri dge, added a new barrel , and
l engthened the RPK-type gas pi ston system. The gas system of the Sovi et
SVD (Dragunov) sni pi ng ri fl e i s more l i ke that of the obsol ete Tokarev ri fl e.
Second, the Romani ans devel oped thei r own 10-shot magazi ne, and they
fabri cated a skel eton stock from l ami nated wood (pl ywood). Thi s buttstock,
wi th i ts mol ded cheek rest, i s probabl y sl i ghtl y better than the one used on
the Dragunov. Thi rd, the Romani ans have ri veted two steel rei nforci ng pl ates
to the rear of the recei ver to hel p absorb the i ncreased recoi l forces of the
more powerful M1891 cartri dge. Fi nal l y, they have attached a muzzl e brake
of thei r own desi gn. The standard AKM wi re cutter bayonet wi l l attach to thi s
sni per ri fl e. The tel escopi c si ght has Engl i sh l anguage marki ngs.
FPK Characteristics
System of operation: semiautomatic.
Caliber: 7.62- x 54-mm rimmed.
Overall length: 45.4 inches.
Barrel length: 26.7 inches.
Rifling: not known.
Weight: 10.6 lbs.
Magazine capacity: 10-round detachable box
magazine.
Telescope: LSP (Romanian copy of the
Soviet PSO-1); BDC: 100 to 1,000 m with
1,100, 1,200, and 1,300 m reference points.
Front: hooded post.
Rear: sliding U-shaped notch.
Ammunition requirements: see Soviet SVD
comments.
SPAIN
F-27. Thi s system i s currentl y i n use: Model C-75.
F-28. The 7.62- x 51-mm NATO C-75 Speci al Forces ri fl e i s the current
sni per ri fl e of Spai n. Thi s bol t-acti on weapon i s bui l t upon the Mauser 98
acti on. I t i s equi pped wi th i ron si ghts and has tel escope mounts machi ned
i nto the recei ver to al l ow for the mounti ng of most el ectro-opti c or opti c
si ghts. The weapon wei ghs 8.14 pounds.
FM 3-05.222

F-8
SWITZERLAND
F-29. Thi s system i s currentl y i n use: SI G Model 510-4.
F-30. The Swi ss use the 7.62- x 51-mm NATO SI G Model 510-4 ri fl e wi th a
tel escopi c si ght. The 510-4 i s a del ayed, bl ow-back-operated, 20-round,
magazi ne-fed, semi automati c or ful l y automati c weapon. Wi th bi pod, tel escope,
and empty 20-round magazi ne, the weapon wei ghs 12.3 pounds. I t i s 39.9
i nches l ong wi th a 19.8-i nch barrel and has a muzzl e vel oci ty of 2,591 fps.
UNITED KINGDOM
F-31. These systems are currentl y i n use: Lee Enfi el d Model L42A1, Parker-
Hal e model s 82 and 85, and the Accuracy I nternati onal L96A1. The Lee
Enfi el d No. 4 Mark 1 (T) i s obsol ete but sti l l found i n use around the worl d.
F-32. The L42A1 i s the current standard sni per ri fl e. I t i s a conversi on of the
Lee Enfi el d No. 4 Mark 1 (T) .303, and was adopted i n 1970. I t has a heavy
7.62- x 51-mm NATO barrel , and the fore-end i s cut back. The ori gi nal No. 32
tel escope was renovated, regraduated, and redesi gnated the Tel escope
Strai ght Si ghti ng L1A1, whi ch i s marked on the tube al ong wi th the part
number, O.S. 2429 G.A. The ori gi nal No. 32 marki ngs are usual l y sti l l vi si bl e,
cancel l ed out, and pai nted over. New range graduati ons are read i n meters
i nstead of yards. Recei vers from No. 4 Mark 1 (T) or Mark 1* (T) are used for
thi s ri fl e. The magazi ne of the L42A1 i s desi gned for 7.62-mm NATO
cartri dges and has a capaci ty of 10 rounds. The buttstock has the same type
screw on wooden cheek pi ece as used wi th the No. 4 Mark 1 (T). The l eft
si de of the recei ver has a tel escope bracket for the tel escope No. 32 Mark 3. A
l eaf-type rear si ght and a protected bl ade-type front si ght are al so used.
Lee Enfield L42A1 Characteristics
System of operation: bolt-action.
Caliber: 7.62- x 51-mm NATO.
Overall length: 46.5 inches.
Barrel length: 27.5 inches.
Rifling: 4-groove, 1/12-inch right-hand twist.
Weight: 12.5 pounds.
Magazine capacity: 10-round detachable
magazine.
Telescope: L1A1, 3x, BDC: 0 to 1,000 m.
Front: blade, with protecting ears.
Rear: aperture.
Ammunition requirement: NATO ball,
147/150 gn FMJBT @ 2,800 fps.
F-33. The Parker-Hal e Model 82 sni per ri fl e i s a bol t-acti on 7.62- x 51-mm
NATO ri fl e bui l t upon a Mauser 98 acti on. I t i s a mi l i tari zed versi on of the
Model 1200 TX target ri fl e. I t i s equi pped wi th metal l i c target si ghts and the
Pecar V2S 4 to 10x vari abl e tel escope. An opti onal , adjustabl e bi pod i s
al so avai l abl e.


FM 3-05.222
F-9
Parker-Hale Model 82 Characteristics
System of operation: bolt-action.
Caliber: 7.62- x 51-mm NATO.
Overall length: 48.0 inches.
Barrel length: 26.0 inches.
Rifling: not known.
Weight: 12.8 pounds.
Magazine capacity: 4-round internal magazine.
Telescope: Pecar V2S 410x.
Front: detachable hooded post.
Rear: detachable aperture.
Ammunition requirement: 7.62- x 51-mm
NATO ball (147/150 gn FMJBT @ 2,800
fps).
F-34. The Model 85 sni per ri fl e i s a bol t-acti on 7.62- x 51-mm ri fl e desi gned
for extended use under adverse condi ti ons. I t uses a McMi l l an fi bergl ass
stock that i s adjustabl e for l ength of pul l . The tel escope i s mounted on a
qui ck-detachabl e mount that can be removed i n emergenci es to reveal a fl i p-
up rear aperture si ght that i s graduated from 100 to 900 meters.
Parker-Hale Model 85 Characteristics
System of operation: bolt-action.
Caliber: 7.62- x 51-mm NATO.
Overall length: 47.5 inches.
Barrel length: 24.8 inches.
Rifling: 4-groove, 1/12-inch right-hand twist.
Weight: 12.5 pounds.
Magazine capacity: 10-round detachable
magazine.
Telescope: Swarovski ZFM 6 x 42 mm
(BDC: 100 to 800 m) or ZFM 10 x 42 mm
(BDC: 100 to 1,000 m).
Front: protected blade.
Rear: folding aperture.
Ammunition requirement: NATO ball,
147/150 gn FMJBT @ 2,800 fps.
F-35. The L96A1 sni per ri fl e i s bui l t by Accuracy I nternati onal usi ng a
uni que beddi ng system desi gned by Mal col m Cooper. I t features an
al umi num frame wi th a hi gh-i mpact pl asti c, thumbhol e-type stock; a free-
fl oated barrel ; and a l i ghtwei ght-al l oy, ful l y adjustabl e bi pod. The ri fl e i s
equi pped wi th metal l i c si ghts that can del i ver accurate fi re out to 700 meters
and can use the L1A1 tel escope. The reported accuracy of thi s weapon i s 0.75
MOA at 1,000 meters. One i nteresti ng feature of the stock desi gn i s a spri ng-
l oaded monopod conceal ed i n the butt. Ful l y adjustabl e for el evati on, the
monopod serves the same purpose as the sand sock that the U.S. Army uses.



FM 3-05.222

F-10
Accuracy International Model PM/L96A1 Characteristics
System of operation: bolt-action.
Caliber: 7.62- x 51-mm NATO, .243
Winchester, 7 mm Remington Magnum,
300 WM.
Overall length: 47.0 inches.
Barrel length: 26 inches.
Rifling: 1/12-inch right-hand twist.
Weight: 15 pounds.
Magazine capacity: 10-round detachable
magazine.
Telescope: 6- x 42-mm or 12- x 42-mm
Schmidt and Bender.
Front: none.
Rear: none.
Ammunition requirement: not known.
F-36. The Lee Enfi el d Ri fl e No. 4 Mark 1 (T) and No. 4 Mark 1* (T) are
sni per versi ons of the No. 4. They are fi tted wi th scope mounts on the l eft si de
of the recei ver and have a wooden cheek rest screwed to the butt. The No. 32
tel escope i s used on these weapons.
Lee Enfield No. 4 Mark 1 (T) Characteristics
System of operation: bolt-action.
Caliber: .303 British.
Overall length: 44.5 inches.
Barrel length: 25.2 inches.
Rifling: not known.
Weight: 11.5 pounds.
Magazine capacity: 10-round detachable
magazine.
Telescope: No. 32, 3x, BDC: 100 to 1,000
yards.
Front: blade with protecting ears.
Rear: vertical leaf with aperture battle sight
or L-type.
Ammunition requirement: .303 ball with a
muzzle velocity (at date of adoption) of
2,440 fps.
FORMER UNION OF SOVIET SOCIALIST REPUBLICS
F-37. Thi s system i s currentl y i n use: SVD (Dragunov).
F-38. The sel f-l oadi ng ri fl e, SVD (Dragunov) i s a purpose-desi gned system
that repl aced the M1891/30 sni per ri fl e i n 1963. The bol t operati on of the
SVD i s si mi l ar to that of the AK/AKM. The pri nci pal di fference i s that the
SVD has a short stroke pi ston system. I t i s not attached to the bol t carri er
l i ke that of the AK/AKM, and del i vers i ts i mpul se to the carri er, whi ch then
moves to the rear. The remai nder of the operati ng sequence i s qui te si mi l ar to
the Kal ashni kov-seri es assaul t ri fl e. The ri fl e has a somewhat unusual stock
i n that a l arge secti on has been cut out of i t i mmedi atel y to the rear of the
pi stol gri p. Thi s l i ghtens the wei ght of the ri fl e consi derabl y. I t has a prong-
type fl ash suppressor si mi l ar to those used on current U.S. smal l arms. I t i s
equi pped wi th metal l i c si ghts that are graduated to 2,000 meters and the
PSO-1 4x tel escopi c si ght wi th a battery-powered, i l l umi nated reti cl e. The
PSO-1 al so i ncorporates a metascope that, when acti vated, i s capabl e of
detecti ng an acti ve, i nfrared source. The PSO-1 i s desi gned for the bal l i sti c
trajectory of the LPS bal l round. The wi ndage knob provi des 2 MOA per cl i ck
and 4 MOA per numeral . The reti cl e pattern has 10 verti cal l i nes to the l eft
FM 3-05.222
F-11
and ri ght of the ai mi ng chevron. These l i nes are spaced 4 MOA from each
other, whi ch provi de 40 MOA to the l eft and ri ght of the ai mi ng chevron.
SVD Characteristics
System of operation: semiautomatic.
Caliber: 7.62- x 54-mm rimmed.
Overall length: 47.9 inches.
Barrel length: 24.5 inches.
Rifling: 4 grooves, 1/10-inch right-hand twist.
Weight: 9.7 pounds.
Magazine capacity: 10-round detachable
magazine.
Telescope: 4x PSO-1, BDC: 0 to 1,300 m.
Front: hooded post.
Rear: tangent with notch.
Ammunition requirement: LPS ball (149 gn
FMJBT @ 2,800 fps).
FORMER WARSAW PACT AMMUNITION
F-39. The standard M1908 Russi an L bal l cartri dge features a 149 grai n
l ead-core spi tzer bul l et wi th a gi l di ng metal jacket and a coni cal hol l ow base.
The L bal l gi ves about 2,800 fps from the M1891/30 ri fl es. I t can be i denti fi ed
wi th a pl ai n, unpai nted, copper-col ored bul l et.
F-40. The LPS bal l cartri dge i s a 149 grai n boat tai l wi th a gi l di ng metal -
cl ad steel jacket and mi l d steel core. The LPS cartri dge can be i denti fi ed by a
whi te or si l ver bul l et ti p, di sti ngui shi ng i t from the l ead-core L bal l . Vel oci ty
i s around 2,820 fps.
F-41. The M1930 heavy bal l sni per l oad i s known as the Type D and i s
someti mes i denti fi ed by a yel l ow bul l et ti p. I t features a 182 grai n ful l metal
jacket bul l et wi th a hol l ow-base boat tai l and devel ops 2,680 fps from the
M1891/30 or the SVD.
F-42. The general rul e for i denti fyi ng Sovi et/Warsaw Pact ammuni ti on i s as
fol l ows: when the head of the cartri dge case i s ori ented so that both numbers
can be read, the factory number appears at 12 ocl ock and the date of
manufacture appears at 6 ocl ock.
MOSIN-NAGANT BOLT-ACTION SNIPER RIFLE MODEL M1891/30
F-43. The M1891 was adopted as the Russi an Army servi ce ri fl e i n 1891. I t
has a bl ade front si ght wi th a l eaf rear si ght graduated i n arshi ns (paces)
from 100 to 3,200 (2,496 yards). I n the 1930s, the i mproved M1891/30 was
fi el ded. The M1891/30 has a hooded front si ght and a tangent rear si ght
graduated from 100 to 2,000 meters. The M1891/30 sni per ri fl e was adopted
shortl y thereafter, wi th i ts onl y modi fi cati on bei ng the addi ti on of a tel escopi c
si ght. Detai l s on the tel escope are found i n Appendi x E.



FM 3-05.222

F-12
M1891/30 Characteristics
System of operation: bolt-action.
Caliber: 7.62- x 54-mm rimmed.
Overall length: 48.5 inches.
Barrel length: 28.7 inches.
Rifling: 4-groove, 1/10-inch right-hand twist.
Weight: 11.3 pounds.
Magazine capacity: 5-round semifixed
magazine.
Telescope: PU 3.5x or PE 4x.
Front: hooded post.
Rear: tangent rear, graduated from 100 to
2,000 m.
Ammunition requirement: L or LPS ball
(149 gn FMJ @ 2,800 fps).
UNITED STATES OF AMERICA
F-44. These systems are currentl y i n use: M24 and M21 (used by the Army).
The USMC has adopted a product-i mproved versi on of the Remi ngton 700
that i s currentl y known as the M40A1. Speci al appl i cati on sni per ri fl es, such
as the Barrett Model 82 and the RAI Model 500, are used on an organi zed but
l i mi ted basi s. Numerous nonstandard sni per ri fl es are used by di fferent U.S.
Government and DOD agenci es. Al so, obsol ete sni per ri fl es are sti l l bei ng
used abroad. These i ncl ude the M1903A4, M1C, M1D, and the M21.
M21 SNIPER SYSTEM
F-45. I n September 1968, the Army Materi el Command was di rected to
produce 1,800 Nati onal Match M-14s for i mmedi ate shi pment to Vi etnam.
From 1968 unti l 1975, when the XM-21 was adopted, several NM M-14
vari ants wi th di fferent tel escopes were shi pped to Vi etnam for use. The fi rst
XM-21s used the WW I I -era M84 tel escope. James Leatherwood, the desi gner
of the ART-seri es, provi ded most of the tel escopes, al though others were used.
The M21 i s careful l y assembl ed to Nati onal Match standards wi th sel ected
components. The stock was ori gi nal l y an epoxy-i mpregnated wal nut or bi rch
stock. The ri fl e has NM i ron si ghts. The el evati on and wi ndage adjustments
provi de 1/2 MOA correcti ons. The scope mount i s mounted to the si de of the
recei ver wi th a l arge knurl ed knob. Later mounts provi ded two poi nts of
attachment wi th an addi ti onal knob threaded i nto a modi fi ed cl i p gui de. The
M21 was type-cl assi fi ed wi th the ART I . The ART I I was l ater used on a
l i mi ted basi s, and the M3A Ul tra has been used to upgrade the M21 system.
M21 Characteristics
System of operation: semiautomatic.
Caliber: 7.62- x 51-mm NATO.
Overall length: 44.3 inches.
Barrel length: 22 inches.
Rifling: 4-groove, 1/12-inch right-hand twist.
Weight: 14.4 pounds.
Magazine capacity: 20-round detachable
magazine.
Telescope: ART I or ART II, BDC: 300 to 900 m.
Front: protected post.
Rear: hooded aperture.
Ammunition requirement: M118 Match or
Special Ball (173 gn FMJBT @ 2,610 fps).

FM 3-05.222
F-13
USMC M40A1
F-46. The M40A1 i s the current USMC sni pi ng ri fl e that i s the cul mi nati on
of 20 years of use of the Remi ngton Model 700 si nce the Vi etnam War. I t i s
bui l t by match armorers to exacti ng standards usi ng sel ected components. I t
uses Remi ngton M700 and 40x recei vers mated to a heavy
McMi l l an/Wi seman stai nl ess steel match barrel . The stock i s made by
McMi l l an. The Unertl 10x USMC sni per scope has the mi l -dot reti cl e and a
BDC desi gned to range from 100 to 1,000 yards.
M40A1 Characteristics
System of operation: bolt-action.
Caliber: 7.62- x 51-mm NATO.
Overall length: 44 inches.
Barrel length: 24 inches.
Rifling: 6-groove, 1/12-inch right-hand twist.
Weight: 14.4 pounds.
Magazine capacity: 5-round internal magazine.
Telescope: Unertl 10x, BDC: 100 to 1,000
yards.
Front: none.
Rear: none.
Ammunition requirement: M118 Match or
Special Ball (173 gn FMJBT @ 2,610 fps),
or Federal Match with the 180 gn Sierra
MatchKing bullet.
BARRETT MODEL 82A1
F-47. The Barrett Model 82A1 sni pi ng ri fl e i s a recoi l -operated, 11-round
detachabl e box, magazi ne-fed, semi automati c chambered for the cal i ber .50
Browni ng cartri dge. I ts 36.9-i nch fl uted barrel i s equi pped wi th a si x-port
muzzl e brake that reduces recoi l by 30 percent. I t has an adjustabl e bi pod
and can al so be mounted on the M82 tri pod or any mount compati bl e wi th the
M60 machi ne gun. Thi s weapon has a pi stol -gri p-styl e stock, i s 65.9 i nches
l ong, and wei ghs 32.9 pounds. The si ghti ng system consi sts of a tel escope, but
no metal l i c si ghts are provi ded. The tel escope mount may accommodate any
tel escope wi th 1-i nch ri ngs. Muzzl e vel oci ty of the Model 82A1 i s 2,849 fps.
IVER J OHNSON MODEL 500
F-48. The I ver Johnson Model 500 i s the ol d versi on of the Research
Armaments I ndustry (RAI ) Model 500/Dai sy Model 500. The Model 500 l ong-
range ri fl e i s a bol t-acti on, si ngl e-shot weapon, whi ch i s chambered for the
cal i ber .50 Browni ng cartri dge. I t has a 33-i nch heavy, fl uted, free-fl oati ng
barrel . Wi th i ts bi pod, ful l y adjustabl e stock, cheek pi ece, and tel escope, i t
wei ghs a total of 29.92 pounds. The weapon i s equi pped wi th a harmoni c
bal ancer that dampens barrel vi brati ons, a tel escope wi th a rangi ng scope
base, a muzzl e vel oci ty of 2,912 fps, and a muzzl e brake wi th fl ash
suppressor. The USMC and Uni ted States Navy (USN) have used thi s
weapon i n the past.
FM 3-05.222

F-14
U.S. SNIPER RIFLES
F-49. These systems are currentl y i n use: Remi ngton Model s 40XB, 40XC,
and 700 ri fl es.
F-50. These vari ati ons of the Remi ngton M700 bol t-acti on ri fl e are wi del y
used. The M700 i s the standard ri fl e. The M700 and i ts vari ants have
tubul ar/round acti ons whi ch are preferred by many competi tors due to i ts
ease of truei ng and beddi ng. I t i s most frequentl y seen i n the heavy-barrel ed
Varmi nt Speci al versi on. The 40XB i s a si ngl e-shot competi ti on ri fl e and
extremel y accurate. The 40XB has a sol i d magazi ne wel l that adds to the
acti ons ri gi di ty. The 40X or 40XC i s si mi l ar to the XB except they have a
magazi ne wel l , stri pper cl i p gui de, and are desi gned for use i n hi gh-powered
ri fl e competi ti on. The M24 SWS i s bui l t on a Remi ngton M700 acti on marked
M24 M700. I t i s bui l t to the same exacti ng standards as the 40XBs. The
ori gi nal M24 came wi th a Rock 5R barrel . The new M24s from Remi ngton
come wi th a Remi ngton hammer-forged barrel . Most Remi ngton .308 ri fl es
(M700, 40XB, and 40XC) come wi th a short acti on for reduced acti on si ze,
i ncreased acti on ri gi di ty, and reduced bol t-cycl i ng di stance. The M24 was
adopted wi th a l ong acti on so that i t coul d be converted to the .300
Wi nchester Magnum cartri dge at a l ater date. Thi s change may be
accompl i shed by repl aci ng the barrel and bol t. I n thi s magnum chamberi ng,
the M24 wi l l be desi gnated the Medi um Sni per Ri fl e (MSR) and be effecti ve
out to 1,200 meters. The BDC on the Leupol d and Stevens M3A wi l l be
repl aced to match the di fferent bal l i sti c trajectory.
Remington Models 40X/700 Characteristics
System of operation: bolt-action.
Caliber: 7.62- x 51-mm NATO (.308
Winchester), .300 Winchester Magnum, and
others.
Overall length: approximately 42 inches
(dependent on barrel length).
Barrel length: 22 to 26 inches.
Rifling: 4- to 6-groove, 1/10- to 1/12-inch right-
hand twist.
Weight: 10 to 15 pounds.
Magazine capacity: 5-round standard calibers,
3-round magnum calibers, internal magazine;
40XB is single shot.
Telescopes: Leupold and Stevens Ultra/Mark
IV M1A, M3A; Unertl 10x USMC; Bausch and
Lomb 10- x 40-mm.
Front: none.
Rear: none.
Ammunition requirement: varied.
WINCHESTER MODEL 70
F-51. The Model 70 i n .308 or .300 Wi nchester Magnum, when properl y bui l t,
i s al so a very effecti ve and accurate ri fl e, as proven by the mul ti pl e nati onal
and i nternati onal competi tors that use them. Wi nchester now makes a true
short acti on, i n cal i ber .308 as a varmi nt ri fl e that can be an al ternati ve to the
M700 Remi ngton. The Wi nchester Model 70 has a square-bottomed acti on.
FM 3-05.222
F-15
MCMILLAN SYSTEMS
F-52. The M-86SR (.308 Wi n), M-86LR (.300 Wi n Mag), and M-89 (.308
suppressed) are bol t-acti on ri fl es bui l t on McMi l l an acti ons. The M-88ELR,
M-87ELR, and M-87R are cal i ber .50 bol t ri fl es. The McMi l l an M-40 i s a
Remi ngton short-acti on barrel wi th a McMi l l an .308 match barrel . A vari ety
of opti cs are avai l abl e: Leupol d and Stevens Ul tra/Mark I V M1A, M3A, 3.5
10x Law Enforcement; the Bausch and Lomb 10- x 40-mm tacti cal ; and the
Phrobi s tacti cal ri fl e tel escopes.
BARRETT FIREARMS
F-53. These fi rearms consi st of the M82, M82A1 l i ght semi automati c cal i ber
.50 ri fl es, and the M90 bol t-acti on cal i ber .50 ri fl e. Appendi x E provi des
addi ti onal i nformati on.
OTHER SYSTEMS
F-54. Robar Systems. Accuri zed Remi ngton Model 700 ri fl e.
F-55. I ver J ohnson Convertible Long-Range Rifle System. The characteri sti cs
of thi s bol t-acti on ri fl e are l i sted bel ow.
Iver Johnson Convertible Long-Range Rifle Characteristics
System of operation: bolt-action.
Caliber: 7.62- x 51-mm NATO, 8.58 x 71 mm
(.338/.416).
Overall length: 46.5 inches.
Barrel length: 24 inches.
Rifling: 4-groove; 1/12 (7.62)-, 1/10 (8.58)-inch
right-hand twist.
Weight: 15 pounds.
Magazine capacity: 4-round (7.62) or 5-round
(8.58) detachable magazine.
Telescope: varied.
Front: none.
Rear: none.
Ammunition requirement: 8.58 x 71 mm;
250 gn HPBT @ 3,000 fps.
OBSOLETE U.S. SNIPER RIFLES
F-56. The M1903A4 Spri ngfi el d was adopted i n December 1942 as a sni per
ri fl e duri ng WW I I . The onl y modi fi cati on to the standard servi ce ri fl e was
the addi ti on of a pi stol gri p and opti cal si ght. There were numerous tel escopi c
si ghts used, but the most common were the M84 and the Weaver Model 330C
(marked M73B1 for the contract). There are a few 1903s that were
meti cul ousl y assembl ed wi th sel ected parts for sni per use, but as a general
rul e, the majori ty were standard servi ce ri fl es. The l ow magni fi cati on of the
tel escopes (2.2x for the M84) made l ong-range target i nterdi cti on di ffi cul t.
The M84 scope i s di scussed i n Appendi x G. The Model 1942 i s a USMC
modi fi cati on of the 1903A1, fi tted wi th an 8x Unertl scope. These ri fl es were
manufactured by Remi ngton, Spri ngfi el d Armory, and the L.C. Smi th Corona
Typewri ter Company.

FM 3-05.222

F-16

M1903A4 Characteristics
System of operation: bolt-action.
Caliber: .30 M1/M2 ball (7.62 x 63 mm/30-06).
Overall length: 43.5 inches.
Barrel length: 24 inches.
Rifling: 4-groove (and 2-groove), 1/10-inch
right-hand twist.
Weight: 9.4 pounds.
Magazine capacity: 5-round internal magazine.
Telescope: M84, M73B1 Weaver (Model
330C), or the M73 Lyman Alaska; BDC: 0 to
900 yards.
Front: none.
Rear: none.
Ammunition requirement: Caliber .30 M1/M2
ball (150 FMJ flat base @ 2,800 fps.
GARAND M1C AND M1D
F-57. I n 1939, the Spri ngfi el d Armory and Wi nchester began producti on of
the M1. The M1 was the fi rst sel f-l oadi ng ri fl e that wi thstood battl efi el d use.
The M1C and M1D were devel oped for desi gnated marksman use. The M1D
was fi tted wi th a steel col l ar around the barrel i n front of the recei ver, whi ch
was tapped for a si de-mounted scope mount, because the weapon l oads
through the top of the recei ver. An M84 2.2x scope was used. A speci al l y
fabri cated l eather extensi on was affi xed to the l eft si de of the stock to provi de
a sol i d stock wel d to accommodate the si de-mounted tel escope. Thi s pi ece
al l owed the sni per to rest hi s cheek and fi re l eft-eyed. Al though the ri fl e can
be fi red ri ght-eyed, i t was desi gned to be fi red l eft-eyed. I t i s a fal l acy to thi s
day that the l eather stock extensi on i s a cheek pi ece; i t i s not. I t was and i s a
rest for use wi th the si de-mounted scope. The majori ty of the M1Ds were al so
fi tted wi th a prong-fl ash hi der. The M1C i s i denti cal to the M1D except i n one
respect: the M1C has a si de mount that was tapped i nto the l eft si de of the
recei ver di rectl y i nstead of usi ng a col l ar around the barrel . Li ke the
M1903A4, nothi ng was done to the majori ty of the ri fl es to accuri ze them.
Eventual l y, hand-assembl ed M1Ds and M1Cs were made and used.
M1C/D Characteristics
System of operation: semiautomatic.
Caliber: .30 Caliber M1/M2 ball (7.62 x 63 mm/
30-06).
Overall length: 43.6 inches.
Barrel length: 24 inches.
Rifling: 4-groove, 1/10-inch right-hand twist.
Weight: 11.8 pounds.
Magazine capacity: 8-round en-bloc metallic
clip.
Telescope: M84, 2.2x, BDC: 0 to 900 yards.
Front: protected post.
Rear: aperture.
Ammunition requirement: M1/M2 ball (150
gn FMJ flat base bullet @ 2,800 fps).

FM 3-05.222
F-17
FORMER YUGOSLAVIA
F-58. Thi s system i s currentl y i n use: Model M76.
F-59. The Yugosl av armed forces use the M76 semi automati c sni pi ng ri fl e. I t
i s bel i eved to be based upon the FAZ fami l y of automati c weapons. I t features
permanentl y affi xed metal l i c si ghts, a pi stol -gri p-styl e wood stock, and a 4x
tel escopi c si ght. The tel escopi c si ght i s graduated i n 100-meter i ncrements
from 100 to 1,000 meters, and the opti cal si ght mount al l ows the mounti ng of
passi ve ni ghtsi ghts. I t has a muzzl e vel oci ty of 2,361 fps.
M76 Characteristics
System of operation: semiautomatic.
Caliber: 7.92 x 57 mm (8-mm Mauser), 7.62- x
54-mm R, 7.62- x 51-mm NATO.
Overall length: 44.7 inches.
Barrel length: 21.6 inches.
Rifling: not known.
Weight: 11.2 pounds.
Magazine capacity: 10-round detachable.
Telescope: 4x, BDC: 100 to 1,000 m.
Front: hooded post.
Rear: tangent.
Ammunition requirement: 7.92 x 57 mm
(2,361 fps); 7.62- x 51-mm NATO (2,657 fps).


G-1
Appendix G
Sniper Rifle Telescopes
A scope mounted on the ri fl e al l ows the sni per to detect and engage
targets more effecti vel y. Another advantage of the scope i s i ts abi l i ty
to magni fy the target. As previ ousl y stated, a scope does not make a
sol di er a better sni per, i t onl y hel ps hi m see better. Thi s appendi x
expl ai ns the characteri sti cs and types of scopes.
CHARACTERISTICS OF RIFLE TELESCOPES
G-1. The tel escope i s an opti cal i nstrument that the sni per uses to
i mprove hi s abi l i ty to see hi s target cl earl y i n most si tuati ons. I t al so
hel ps hi m to qui ckl y i denti fy or recogni ze the target and enabl es hi m to
engage wi th a hi gher rate of success. The fol l owi ng characteri sti cs appl y
to most types of scopes.
TELESCOPE MAGNIFICATION
G-2. The average unai ded human eye can di sti ngui sh 1-i nch detai l at 100
meters. Magni fi cati on, combi ned wi th qual i ty l ens manufacture and
desi gn, permi ts resol uti on of thi s 1 i nch di vi ded by the opti cal
magni fi cati on. The general rul e i s 1x magni fi cati on per 100 meters. The
magni fi cati on (power) of a tel escope shoul d correspond to the maxi mum
effecti ve range of the weapon system bei ng used. Thi s amount of power
wi l l enabl e the operator to i denti fy preci se correcti ons. For exampl e, a 5x
tel escope i s adequate out to 500 meters; a 10x i s good out to 1,000 meters.
The best al l -around magni fi cati on determi ned for fi el d-type sni pi ng i s the
10x because i t permi ts the operator to i denti fy preci se correcti ons out to
1,000 meters. The fi el d of vi ew of a 10x at cl ose range, whi l e smal l , i s sti l l
enough to see l arge and smal l targets. Hi gher-powered tel escopes have
very l i mi ted fi el ds of vi ew, maki ng cl ose range and snap target
engagements di ffi cul t. Substandard hi gh-powered tel escopes may be hard
to focus and have paral l ax probl ems. Some marksmen sti l l prefer l ower-
powered tel escopes. Recent advances i n the constructi on of vari abl e-
powered ri fl e tel escopes have negated the probl ems that once pl agued
them. Advantages of the vari abl e power scopes i n both urban and cl i p-on
styl e ni ght vi si on devi ces make them very desi rabl e i n the l ong run. A
number of scope manufacturers now make rel i abl e vari abl e powers i n the
2.5 to 10 or 14 range. Thi s al l ows the sni per to power down so as not to
overpower the phosphorus matri x of the NVD or to gai n a wi der fi el d of
vi ew i n cl ose i n sni pi ng.
PARALLAX
G-3. Paral l ax resul ts when the target i s not focused on the same focal
pl ane as the reti cl e. When paral l ax i s present, the target wi l l move i n
FM 3-05.222

G-2
rel ati on to the reti cl e when the sni per moves hi s head (changes hi s spot
wel d) whi l e l ooki ng through the tel escope. I t i s more apparent i n hi gh-
powered tel escopes. Wi th paral l ax, the error wi l l affect the stri ke of the
bul l et by the amount seen i n the scope. I f the crosshai rs move from one si de
of the target to the other, then the potenti al error i s from one si de of the
target to the other. Therefore, the sni per shoul d zero hi s system, for
el evati on, at the greatest di stance possi bl e. For a 1,000-meter system, the
sni per shoul d confi rm hi s zero at 500 meters for el evati on. The i ni ti al zero
of the weapon system for el evati on and wi ndage shoul d be at 100 or 200
meters. Thi s wi l l keep the shooter on paper. The 100-meter range wi l l
negate most wi nd effect; however, the shooter i s capabl e of computi ng the
wi nd effect and zero wi th the bul l et stri ke at that poi nt on the target. The
M1A and M3A Ul tra/Mark I V by Leupol d and Stevens have a
focus/paral l ax knob on the l eft si de of the tel escope. Wi th the M1A and
M3A, i t i s i mperati ve that the sni per adjusts hi s focus/paral l ax when he
zeros hi s system for each range and that he records thi s data i n hi s
shooters l og. I f there i s a zero-shi ft whi l e adjusti ng paral l ax from range to
range, then the scope i s defecti ve and requi res repl acement. The reti cl e
must be focused for the eye pri or to focusi ng on the target. I f the reti cl e i s
perfectl y focused, then the target wi l l be i n focus and the scope wi l l be
paral l ax-free. I f the target i s focused and the scope i s not paral l ax-free, then
the shooter may wi sh to refocus the reti cl e and recheck paral l ax. Once both
reti cl e and target are focused on the same pl ane, the scope wi l l be paral l ax-
free at that range onl y. The sni pers wi l l be requi red to then focus the target
for each range to obtai n a paral l ax-free scope. Thi s i nformati on i s then
recorded i n the shooters l og for use when fi ri ng over unknown di stances
and wi l l become part of the sni per and observer di al ogue. As an exampl e,
Range 650+1, wi ndage l eft 1 cl i ck spi n dri ft, paral l ax second bal l .
ADJ USTABLE OBJ ECTIVE LENS
G-4. Adjustabl e objecti ve l enses for focusi ng at di fferent magni fi cati ons
and ranges are becomi ng qui te common. Some target tel escopes (such as
the M1A and M3A) have a thi rd turret knob on the si de of the tel escope
that wi l l focus the objecti ve l ens. Doi ng so wi l l focus the target and reti cl e
on the same pl ane, el i mi nati ng paral l ax. Unfortunatel y, many tel escopes
have nei ther and must be deal t wi th on an i ndi vi dual basi s. The best way
to deal wi th the probl em i s to el i mi nate shadow. Once shadow i s
el i mi nated, the sni per must ensure that the reti cl e moves the same
di stance l eft and ri ght on the target as wel l as up and down. Doi ng so wi l l
assi st i n attai ni ng the same ai m poi nt even wi th paral l ax. I f shadow i s
present, wi th paral l ax error, then the stri ke of the bul l et wi l l be opposi te
of the shadow. The shadow i ndi cates that the sni per i s l ooki ng down that
si de of the scopes exi t pupi l and the crosshai rs wi l l appear to have moved
to that si de as wel l . The sni per wi l l then compensate by movi ng the
weapon ri ght to get the crosshai r back on target, causi ng the stri ke of the
bul l et to be opposi te of the shadow.
VARIABLE-POWERED TELESCOPES
G-5. Ol der vari abl e-powered tel escopes often shi fted the POI i f the
magni fi cati on was changed from i ts ori gi nal setti ng when si ghti ng the
FM 3-05.222

G-3
system. Modern, hi gh-qual i ty, vari abl e-powered tel escopes do not have
thi s probl em. Thi s type of movement has been tested on a number of
qual i ty vari abl e-powered tel escopes. After zeroi ng, the scopes showed no
vari ati on i n the POA versus the POI at any range or any power. Of
course, i t i s prudent to test the system duri ng l i ve-fi re exerci ses to
establ i sh the opti cs rel i abi l i ty.
TELESCOPE ADJ USTMENTS
G-6. One tel escope wi l l not automati cal l y work i n the same manner for
every sni per. Each sni pers vi si on i s di fferent and requi res di fferent
adjustments. The fol l owi ng factors vary wi th each use.
FOCUSING
G-7. Focusi ng the tel escope to the sni per assi gned the weapon i s
i mportant. He can adjust the ocul ar l ens of most tel escopes to obtai n a
cri sp, cl ear pi cture of the reti cl e. To do thi s, the sni per shoul d l ook at a
di stant object for several seconds wi thout usi ng the tel escope. Then he
shoul d shi ft hi s vi si on qui ckl y, l ooki ng through the tel escope at a pl ai n
background. The reti cl e pattern shoul d be sharp and cl ear before hi s eye
refocuses. I f he needs to make an adjustment to match hi s eyes, he shoul d
hol d the eyepi ece l ock ri ng and l oosen the eyepi ece by turni ng i t two
turns cl ockwi se to compensate for nearsi ghtedness and countercl ockwi se
to compensate for farsi ghtedness. Then, wi th a qui ck gl ance he shoul d
recheck the i mage. I f the focus i s worse, he then turns i t four revol uti ons
i n the opposi te di recti on. I t wi l l normal l y take two ful l revol uti ons to see
a noti ceabl e di fference i n the focus. Once the reti cl e appears focused, the
sni per l eaves the si ghts al one and al l ows the eye to rest for 5 to 10
mi nutes and then rechecks the reti cl e. I f he force-focuses the reti cl e, hi s
eye wi l l ti re and he wi l l see two reti cl es after shooti ng for a peri od of
ti me. After determi ni ng the preci se focus for hi s eye, the sni per shoul d
make sure to reti ghten the l ock ri ng securel y agai nst the eyepi ece to hol d
i t i n posi ti on.
EYE RELIEF
G-8. Proper eye rel i ef i s establ i shed very si mpl y. Fi rst, the sni per l oosens
the scope ri ngs Al l en screws so that the tel escope i s free to move. He gets
i nto the shooti ng posi ti on that wi l l be used most frequentl y and sl i des the
scope forward or back unti l a ful l , cri sp pi cture i s obtai ned. There shoul d
be no shadi ng i n the vi ew. Thi s vi ew wi l l be anywhere from 2 to 4 i nches
from hi s eye dependi ng on the tel escope. He rotates the tel escope unti l
CAUTION
Never look at the sun through the telescope.
Concentration of strong solar rays can cause serious
eye damage.
FM 3-05.222

G-4
the reti cl e crosshai rs are perfectl y verti cal and hori zontal , then he
ti ghtens the ri ngs screws.
G-9. The M24 has a one-pi ece tel escope base that has two sets of
machi ned grooves that al l ow the tel escope to be mounted ei ther forward
or back to adjust for personal comfort. I f that range of adjustment i s not
suffi ci ent, the tel escope can be adjusted after the mounti ng ri ng l ock
screws are l oosened.
UNITED STATES TELESCOPES
G-10. The sni per team carri es the tel escope on al l mi ssi ons. The observer
uses the tel escope to determi ne wi nd speed and di recti on. The sni per uses
thi s i nformati on to make qui ck and accurate adjustments for wi nd
condi ti ons. The team al so uses the tel escope for qui cker and easi er target
i denti fi cati on duri ng troop movement. The fol l owi ng di scussi on appl i es to
the U.S. ri fl e tel escopes currentl y i n use.
M84 TELESCOPIC SIGHT
G-11. The M84 tel escopi c si ght has a magni fi cati on of 2.2x. I t has a fi el d
of vi ew of 27 feet at 100 yards. The maxi mum fi el d of vi ew i s obtai ned
wi th an eye rel i ef of 3 1/2 to 5 i nches. The reti cl e consi sts of a verti cal post
and a hori zontal crosshai r. The post i s 3 MOA i n wi dth. The si ght i s
seal ed wi th rubber seal s and may be submerged wi thout damage (not
recommended due to age). The wi ndage knob has 60 MOA of adjustment,
30 MOA from center l eft or ri ght. However, there are a total of 100 MOA
adjustments avai l abl e to zero the tel escope for mi sal i gnment. To adjust
the stri ke of the bul l et verti cal l y, the sni per turns the knob to the hi gher
numbers to rai se the POI , and to l ower numbers to l ower the POI . A
compl ete turn of the el evati on knob provi des 40 MOA of adjustment. One
cl i ck of the el evati on or wi ndage knob equal s 1 MOA. The el evati on scal e
starts at 0 yards and goes up to 900 yards wi th graduati ons every 50
yards. There i s a numbered graduati on every 100 yards.
G-12. To zero the scope, the sni per shoots at a target at 100 or 200 yards.
He adjusts the el evati on and wi ndage unti l the POA and POI are the
same. He turns out the setscrews on both the el evati on and wi ndage
knobs to zero them. The sni per then l i fts and rotates the wi ndage di al
unti l the wi ndage (defl ecti on) i s on the zero marki ng for the no-wi nd zero.
He l i fts and rotates the range (el evati on) knob to the di stance used for the
zeroi ng procedure. He can mount thi s tel escope on both the M1C and
M1D, the M1 Mari ne sni per, and the 1903A4 Spri ngfi el d usi ng a Redfi el d
scope mount.
ADJ USTABLE RANGING TELESCOPE I (ART I)
G-13. The ART I automati cal l y compensates for trajectory when a target
of the proper si ze i s adjusted between the stadi a l i nes. I t i s a 39x
vari abl e that compensates for targets from 300 to 900 meters. I t has a
one-pi ece bal l i sti c cam/power ri ng. The bal l i sti c cam i s set for the bal l i sti c
trajectory of the M118 Match or Speci al Bal l ammuni ti on (173 grai n
FMJBT @ 2610 fps). Each cl i ck or ti ck mark on the adjustment screws i s
FM 3-05.222

G-5
worth 1/2 MOA i n val ue. The ART I i s zeroed at 300 meters. The sni per
sets the power ri ng to 3 (3x/300m) and removes the adjustment turret
caps. He fi res the ri fl e and adjusts the el evati on and wi ndage adjustment
screws unti l the POI i s the same as the POA. Then he screws the turret
caps back on to maxi mi ze the waterproofi ng of the tel escope.
G-14. The reti cl e has four stadi a l i nes on i t (Fi gure G-1). The two
hori zontal stadi a l i nes are on the verti cal crosshai r, are 30 i nches apart at
the desi gnated di stance, and are used for rangi ng. The verti cal crosshai r
and hori zontal stadi a l i nes are used to range targets from the bel tl i ne to
the top of the head. The sni per adjusts the power/cam unti l the stadi a
l i nes are bracketi ng the targets bel tl i ne and top of head. The numeral on
the power ri ng i s the target di stance. For exampl e, i f the power ri ng reads
5, the target i s at 500 m, and the scope i s at 5x magni fi cati on. The
bal l i sti c cam has automati cal l y adjusted the tel escope for the trajectory of
the round by changi ng the tel escopes POA. The sni per ai ms center mass
on the target to obtai n a hi t i n a no-wi nd si tuati on. The two verti cal
stadi a l i nes are on the hori zontal crosshai r, are 60 i nches apart at the
desi gnated di stance, and are used for wi nd hol d-offs and l eads. I f
necessary, he hol ds off for envi ronmental effects or target movement.
NOTE: I t i s i mperati ve to keep the scope base cl ean. The cam sl i des al ong
the mount and pushes the tel escope off from the beari ng surface. Debri s
can i nterfere wi th the preci se cammi ng and rangi ng functi ons.
Figure G-1. ART I Telescope Reticle
ADJ USTABLE RANGING TELESCOPE II (ART II)
G-15. The ART I I i s si mi l ar i n operati on and desi gn to the ART I , wi th
two major modi fi cati ons. The bal l i sti c cam and the power ri ng are now
separate and can be moved i ndependentl y of each other. Thi s
modi fi cati on was made so that after rangi ng a target, the bal l i sti c cam
FM 3-05.222

G-6
can be l ocked to permi t the sni per to i ncrease the magni fi cati on for
greater defi ni ti on. The probl em wi th thi s system i s that i t sel dom works
correctl y. The two ri ngs are l ocked together i n poker-chi p-tooth fashi on,
and even when l ocked together, they can move i ndependentl y. When
unl ocked, i t i s very di ffi cul t to move one wi thout the other movi ng,
creati ng a change i n the cammi ng acti on, and ul ti matel y, causi ng mi sses.
I t i s best to l ock them together and keep them together. The mount i s
si mi l ar to the ART I mount, and the beari ng surface must be kept cl ean.
The ART I I mount has two mounti ng screws, one of whi ch i s threaded
i nto a modi fi ed cl i p gui de. The reti cl e i s the second major modi fi cati on.
The reti cl e pattern i s a standard crosshai r, wi th thi ck outer bars on the
l eft, ri ght, and bottom crosshai rs (Fi gure G-2). The hori zontal crosshai r
has two dots, one on each si de of the crosshai r i ntersecti on. Each dot i s 30
i nches from the center and a total of 60 i nches apart. The heavy bars are
1 meter i n hei ght or thi ckness at the range i ndi cated. To determi ne the
range to a target, the sni per adjusts the power ri ng and cam together
unti l the target i s of equal hei ght to the bar. The correct pl acement of the
bar i s from the crotch to the top of head (1 meter). He ai ms center mass
for a no-wi nd hi t. He can read the cam to determi ne the range.
Figure G-2. ART II Telescope Reticle
LEUPOLD AND STEVENS M1A AND M3A ULTRA/MARK 4 10X OR 16X
G-16. The M1A comes i n ei ther 10x or 16x. I t has three l arge, oversi zed
target knobs. The l eft knob (as seen from the sni per) i s for focus/paral l ax
adjustment. The top knob i s for el evati on adjustment. The ri ght knob i s
for wi ndage adjustment. Tabl e G-1, page G-7, expl ai ns the scope
adjustments. The M3A i s onl y avai l abl e i n 10x. I t has the same knob
arrangement as the M1A, but the knobs are smal l er, and they have
di fferent cl i ck val ues. Al l Leupol d and Stevens sni per tel escopes use the
mi l -dot reti cl e (Fi gure G-3, page G-7).
FM 3-05.222

G-7
Figure G-3. Leupold and Stevens Telescope With a Mil-Dot Reticle
G-17. The M3A has a bal l i sti c col l ar to compensate for the trajectory of
the speci fi ed cartri dge. The col l ar i s cal i brated for bul l et drop
compensati on from 100 meters to 1,000 meters. The fol l owi ng are
avai l abl e:
7.62 mm NATO M118 (173 FMJBT @ 2,610 fps).
.300 Wi nchester Magnum (190 HPBT @ 2900 fps).
NOTE: Thi s col l ar i s erroneousl y marked as 220 grai n.
.30-06 Spri ngfi el d (180 HPBT @ 2,700 fps).
5.56 mm M193/.223 Remi ngton (55 FMJBT @ 3,200 fps).
Table G-1. Adjustments of Leupold and Stevens Telescopes

Model Elevation Windage Complete Revolution
M1A 1/4 MOA 1/4 MOA 15 MOAs
M3 1 MOA 1 MOA 1001,000 M
M3A 1 MOA 1/2 MOA 1001,000 M
NOTE: I f the scope exhi bi ts a zero shi ft after focusi ng the scope for the
range, then the sni per shoul d send the scope i n for mai ntenance.
BAUSCH AND LOMB TACTICAL RIFLE TELESCOPE
G-18. The Bausch and Lomb i s a 10- x 40-mm fi xed-magni fi cati on
tel escope wi th 1/4 MOA adjustments. I t has two l arge, target-type knobs.
The upper knob i s for el evati on, and the knob on the ri ght i s for wi ndage.
The eyepi ece houses the range-focus adjustment ri ng that i s cal i brated
from 50 yards to i nfi ni ty. I t has the same mi l -dot reti cl e pattern as the
Leupol d and Stevens seri es and USMC Unertl tel escope. Each revol uti on
FM 3-05.222

G-8
of the adjustment knobs provi des 12 MOA. Thi s scope i s no l onger
manufactured and onl y a few are i n the system.
UNERTL USMC SNIPER TELESCOPE
G-19. John Unertl was a USMC sni per duri ng Worl d War I and l ater
became the manufacturer of some of the fi nest U.S.-made opti cs. Thi s
tel escope was desi gned and bui l t by the John Unertl Company. I t i s a
fi xed 10x, steel -tubed, mi l -dot tel escope wi th a BDC for the M118
ammuni ti on. The l ens i s coated wi th a hi gh-effi ci ency, l ow-refl ecti on
(HELR) fi l m that transmi ts up to 91 percent of the ambi ent l i ght. Thi s
tel escope has 1/2 MOA adjustments, fi ne adjustments for zeroi ng, and 1
MOA adjustments for el evati on under normal use. For wi ndage, the
adjustments are i n .5 MOA. I t has a fi ne-tune el evati on capabi l i ty that
permi ts +/ 3 MOA, i n .5 MOA adjustments, to adjust for di fferences i n
sni pers zero, temperatures, ammuni ti on l ots, and ammuni ti on. The
wi ndage adjustment has 60 MOA of mai n adjustment wi th +/ 4 MOA
fi ne adjustment. Thi s tel escope al so has a paral l ax-adjusti ng capabi l i ty.
The reti cl e i s i denti cal to that of the Leupol d and Stevens seri es and the
Bausch and Lomb Tacti cal scope. Care must be taken as most of these
scopes are not waterproof and can fog badl y under hi gh-humi di ty use.
SOVIET TELESCOPES
G-20. The Sovi et tel escopes are made on machi nery purchased from Carl
Zei ss of Germany duri ng the 1930s. Thei r opti cal qual i ty i s therefore good
to excel l ent. Thei r operati on i s rather si mpl e. Onl y the PE seri es has the
capabi l i ty of i ndi vi dual l y focusi ng to the user. The top turret i s for
el evati on adjustment and has a bal l i sti c cam that i s cal i brated for the
7.62- x 54-mm Ri mmed L bal l ammuni ti on (150 gn FMJ fl at base @ 2,800
fps). The turret on the l eft i s for wi ndage adjustments. Tabl e G-2,
page G-9, l i sts vari ous model s and thei r characteri sti cs.
G-21. The zeroi ng procedures are i denti cal for al l Sovi et tel escopes. The
sni per shoul d zero at 100 meters. To do so, he l oosens the smal l screws on
the turrets that hol d the top pl ate to the cam that i s engraved wi th the
ti ck marks and numeral s. Several turns are al l that i s necessary. He
shoul d not remove these screws compl etel y; they are not capti ve and are
easi l y l ost. Usi ng a smal l screwdri ver, he gentl y pri es the top pl ate and
cam apart so that the top pl ate can move i ndependentl y of the cam.
Fi ri ng three-shot groups, he adjusts the el evati on and wi ndage knobs
unti l the POA and the POI are the same. When maki ng adjustments, the
sni per shoul d move the reticle to the shot group. Thi s adjustment i s
the major di fference from zeroi ng these tel escopes when compared to
zeroi ng modern, U.S.-styl e tel escopes where the shot group i s moved to
the reti cl e (POA). When the ri fl e and tel escope system i s zeroed, the
sni per shoul d zero out the cams. He shoul d turn the el evati on cam unti l
the 1, whi ch represents 100 meters, i s al i gned wi th the reference ti ck
mark. He makes sure the top pl ate does not rotate when the cam i s
moved. The wi ndage cam i s al so centered on i ts 0 marki ng. The sni per
then pushes down on the top pl ates unti l they mate wi th the cams. He
careful l y ti ghtens the smal l metal screws. The tel escope i s now zeroed.
FM 3-05.222

G-9
Table G-2. M1891/30 Sniper Telescopes

Model Magnification BDC (out to) Tube Diameter
PE 4x 1,400 m 1 inch
PU 3.5x 1,300 m 30 mm
PV 3.5x 1,300 m 30 mm
SOVIET MANUAL DESCRIPTION
G-22. Tel escopes can be any of vari ous tubul ar opti cal i nstruments.
Sovi et techni cal manual s descri be the tel escope i n two parts: a tel escope
tube and a mount.
Telescope Tube
G-23. On the top of the tube i s an el evati on range knob, consi sti ng of a
screw and a drum, marked wi th numbers from 1 to 14 on the PE scope
and from 1 to 13 on the PU scope. Each graduati on i s equi val ent to 100
meters i n di stance.
G-24. At the l eft rear si de of the scope i s a wi ndage knob. The
components of the wi ndage knob are the same as that of the el evati on-
range knob. The sni per uses the wi ndage knob to compensate for the
effects of wi nd on the trajectory of the bul l et. The wi ndage knob has 10
graduati ons; the mi ddl e one i s marked wi th the number 0.
G-25. To move the stri ke of the bul l et to the ri ght, the sni per turns the
wi ndage knob to the di recti on of the mark +, and conversel y, turns the
knob to the di recti on of the mark to move the stri ke of the bul l et to the
l eft. Each cl i ck of wi ndage corresponds to 1 mi l .
G-26. The tel escope tube contai ns a system of opti cal gl asses i ncl udi ng
convex l enses, pri sms, and an eyepi ece. The reti cl e i s a cross-wi re type.
When ai mi ng the ri fl e at the objecti ve, the sni per pl aces the verti cal l i ne
of the reti cl e ri ght on the objecti ve. He uses the hori zontal l i ne to
adjust the ai m. The two knobs provi de hori zontal and verti cal movement
of the reti cl e.
G-27. The tel escope tube PE has adjusti ng devi ces. When taki ng ai m, the
sni per adjusts the knobs on the tube to fi t wi th the observers eye.
G-28. The tel escope tube PU has no adjusti ng (focusi ng) devi ces.
Ther efor e, when ai mi ng, the obser ver l ooks thr ough the tel escope and
moves hi s head unti l the si ghted object i s i n focus.
G-29. When usi ng a tel escope to ai m at the objecti ve, the sni per pl aces
the eye at the center of the eyepi ece, thus formi ng a si ght al i gnment
toward the objecti ve. I f ai mi ng i naccuratel y, the sni per wi l l see a smal l ,
bl ack, crescent-shaped spot i n the tel escope.
FM 3-05.222

G-10
Mount
G-30. The mount for PE consi sts of a base and a body. The sni per fi xes
the base to the recei ver of the ri fl e wi th si x screws. He uses the body of
the mount, after i t i s fastened to the base, to fi x the tel escope to the ri fl e.
G-31. The mount for PU al so i ncl udes a base and a body. The sni per
connects the base, after i t i s screwed to the recei ver of the ri fl e, wi th the
body of the mount by gui de l ugs and screws. The body of the mount may
be moved up and down on the base usi ng the two screws on the upper
si de and the rear l ower si de of the base. The sni per uses the body to fi x
the tel escope to the ri fl e.
G-32. The sni per then l oosens three screws to rotate the si ghti ng
tel escope, but onl y l oosens the screws when fi ri ng for adjustment at the
repai r stati on of the regi ment.
PSO-1
G-33. The PSO-1 scope wi l l be found mounted on the Sovi et SVD and the
Romani an FPK. The PSO-1 i s 4x, and has an i l l umi nated reti cl e powered
by a smal l battery. The battery housi ng i s l ocated at the bottom rear of
the tel escopi c si ght mount. To change batteri es, the sni per presses i n and
rotates the battery housi ng countercl ockwi se. He removes the ol d battery
and repl aces i t wi th the same type. He can repl ace the reti cl e l amp by
unscrewi ng i ts housi ng and removi ng the bul b (the RPG-7 si ght uses the
same bul b). The reti cl e l i ght i s turned on or off by i ts swi tch. The l ens cap
shoul d al ways be i n pl ace except when the tel escope i s i n use. Two covers
are i ssued wi th each ri fl e: one i s for the tel escopi c si ght al one and the
other covers the si ght and breech when the PSO-1 i s mounted. A bel t
pouch i s provi ded for carryi ng the tel escope when di smounted from the
ri fl e, four magazi nes, a cl eani ng ki t, and an extra battery and l amp.
G-34. I f the sni per needs to use open si ghts, he sets the rear si ght by
pressi ng i n the l ocks on the rear si ght sl i de, then moves the sl i de al ong
the rear si ght l eaf. He then al i gns the front edge of the sl i de wi th the
numeral that corresponds i n hundreds of meters. He can use the same
si ght pi cture as for fi ri ng a pi stol .
G-35. I f the sni per uses the PSO-1, he rotates the el evati on knob unti l
the i ndex al i gns wi th the fi gure that corresponds to the range i n
hundreds of meters. He can cl osel y determi ne the range by usi ng the
range fi nder l ocated i n the l ower l eft of the tel escopi c reti cl e. Thi s range
fi nder i s graduated to the hei ght of a man (5 feet 7 i nches) from 200 to
1,000 meters. The sni per l ooks through the tel escope and pl aces the
hori zontal l i ne at the bottom of the target. He moves the tel escope unti l
the upper (curved) l i ne just touches the top of the targets head. The
number i ndi cates the range i n hundreds of meters. I f the target fal l s
between numbers, he must esti mate the remai ni ng di stance. When the
range i s determi ned and set i nto the el evati on knob, he uses the poi nt of
the top chevron on the reti cl e as an ai mi ng poi nt. He uses the three l ower
chevrons for fi ri ng at 1,100, 1,200, and 1,300 meters wi th the el evati on
knob set at 10.
FM 3-05.222

G-11
G-36. The sni per uses the hori zontal scal e extendi ng out from the si des
of the top chevron for hasty wi nd and l ead correcti ons; each ti ck mark i s
worth 1 Sovi et mi l (6,000 Sovi et mi l s per 360 degrees). The hori zontal
scal e i s numbered every 5 and 10 mi l s. Rotati ng the wi ndage knob makes
del i berate changes. The wi ndage knob i s graduated every 1/2 Sovi et mi l .
The wi ndage knob scal e has two cl i cks per graduati on, each cl i ck
representi ng 1/2 mi l (.5 mi l ), each graduati on one mi l . At 1,000 meters,
each cl i ck moves the i mpact of the round .5 meters (20 i nches), each
graduati on moves the i mpact 1 meter (40 i nches). The numbers on the
wi ndage knob are col ored. Ri ght wi ndage correcti ons are bl ack and are
obtai ned when the knob i s rotated cl ockwi se. Left wi ndage correcti ons are
red and are obtai ned when the knob i s rotated countercl ockwi se.
G-37. When the sni per must fi re i n di m l i ght, he i l l umi nates the reti cl e
by turni ng on the swi tch i n the tel escopi c si ght mount. I f acti ve i nfrared
l i ght sources are bel i eved to be used by the enemy, he sets the range
drum at four and swi tches the i nfrared detector i nto pl ace. He then scans
the area to the front; i f any acti ve i nfrared l i ght sources are i n use, they
wi l l appear as orange-red bl obs i n the tel escope. He al i gns the poi nt of the
reti cl e on the l i ght and fi res. The sni per shoul d turn off the reti cl e when
not i n use to conserve the battery and swi ng the i nfrared detector out of
the way so that i t wi l l be acti vated by l i ght duri ng the day. Several hours
of di rect sunl i ght are requi red to acti vate the i nfrared detector.
G-38. I f the sni per i s unabl e to obtai n the correct dry cel l batteri es, he
can easi l y assembl e a sui tabl e expedi ent. The Sovi et dry cel l i s 5.0 vol ts.
The fol l owi ng are requi red:
Two 1.25 vol t/625 camera batteri es (l i thi um).
One 3.0 vol t/DL2025 camera battery (l i thi um).
One pl asti c bushi ng Outsi de Di ameter0.85, I nsi de Di ameter
0.60, Length0.73.
G-39. The sni per shoul d pl ace the batteri es posi ti ve + si de i nto the
battery compartment fi rst. He pl aces the l arge, fl at DL2025 i n fi rst, then
the bushi ng, then the two 625 batteri es, and repl aces the battery
compartment cap.
H-1
Appendix H
Ballistics Chart
SIERRA BALLISTICS III
Data for: 7.62mm M118 Bullet: 173 grains BCs: .515(H), .503(M), .491(L)
Company: Sierra Temperature: 59 Pressure: 29.53 Humidity: 78%
Zero: 100 meters Crosswind: 10.00 mph Tail Wind: + 0.00 mph
Elevation Angle: 0 degrees Altitude: 0 feet Sight Height: 1.7 inches
Range
(meters)
Velocity
(fps)
Energy
(ft-lb)
Bullet Path
(inches)
Drop
(inches)
Drift
(inches)
Time of
Flight (sec)
0 2,610.0 2,616 1.7 + 0.0 + 0.0 0.000000
25 2,561.9 2,521 0.7 0.2 0.1 0.031719
50 2,514.3 2,428 0.0 0.7 0.2 0.064037
75 2,467.2 2,338 + 0.2 1.7 0.5 0.096969
100 2,420.6 2,250 + 0.0 3.1 0.9 0.130533
125 2,374.4 2,165 0.6 4.9 1.3 0.164745
150 2,328.8 2,083 1.7 7.2 1.9 0.199625
175 2,283.7 2,003 3.3 9.9 2.7 0.235191
200 2,239.1 1,925 5.4 13.2 3.5 0.271464
225 2,194.9 1,850 8.0 17.0 4.5 0.308463
250 2,151.2 1,777 11.1 21.3 5.6 0.346210
275 2,108.0 1,707 14.8 26.2 6.9 0.384726
300 2,065.3 1,638 19.1 31.6 8.3 0.424036
325 2,023.2 1,572 24.0 37.7 9.8 0.464162
350 1,981.5 1,508 29.5 44.4 11.5 0.505128
375 1,940.4 1,446 35.6 51.8 13.3 0.546959
400 1,899.8 1,386 42.5 59.8 15.3 0.589681
425 1,859.7 1,328 50.1 68.6 17.4 0.633319
450 1,820.3 1,273 58.4 78.1 19.8 0.677901
475 1,781.2 1,219 67.5 88.4 22.2 0.723454
500 1,742.0 1,165 77.5 99.5 24.9 0.770022
525 1,703.4 1,114 88.2 111.5 27.8 0.817641
550 1,665.5 1,065 99.9 124.3 30.8 0.866341
575 1,628.4 1,018 112.5 138.1 34.0 0.916152
600 1,591.9 973 126.1 152.9 37.5 0.967102
625 1,556.3 930 140.7 168.7 41.1 1.019220
650 1,521.4 889 156.4 185.6 45.0 1.072533
675 1,487.3 850 173.2 203.6 49.0 1.127070
FM 3-05.222

H-2
Data for: 7.62mm M118 (Continued)
Range
(meters)
Velocity
(fps)
Energy
(ft-lb)
Bullet Path
(inches)
Drop
(inches)
Drift
(inches)
Time of
Flight (sec)
700 1,454.1 812 191.2 222.8 53.3 1.182854
725 1,421.8 776 210.4 243.2 57.8 1.239911
750 1,390.4 743 231.0 264.9 62.6 1.298263
775 1,360.0 710 252.8 287.9 67.5 1.357928
800 1,330.6 680 276.1 312.4 72.7 1.418923
825 1,302.2 651 300.8 338.3 78.2 1.481260
850 1,274.9 624 327.0 365.7 83.9 1.544946
875 1,248.8 599 354.9 394.8 89.8 1.609982
900 1,223.9 575 384.4 425.5 95.9 1.676366
925 1,200.1 553 415.7 458.0 102.3 1.744087
950 1,177.6 533 448.8 492.2 108.9 1.813130
975 1,156.3 514 483.8 528.4 115.8 1.883472
1,000 1,136.3 496 520.7 566.5 122.9 1.955087

Range Path Drift
0 1.7 + 0.0
100 + 0.0 0.9
200 5.4 3.5
300 19.1 8.3
400 42.5 15.3
500 77.5 24.9
Environmental Conditions
Actual barometric pressure at firing site................................. 29.53 inches
Actual speed of sound at firing site ........................................ 1,121 fps
Effective ballistic coefficient at firing site................................ 0.514

Animal Lead Calculations
Average lead for a running deer at 100 meters is.................. 3 feet
Average lead for a running elk at 100 meters is .................... 5 feet
Average lead for a running antelope at 100 meters is ........... 8 feet







FM 3-05.222
H-3
SIERRA BALLISTICS III
Data for: 7.62mm M852 Bullet: 168 grains Match King BCs: .462(H), .447(M), .424(L)
Company: Sierra Temperature: 59 Pressure: 29.53 Humidity: 78%
Zero: 600 meters Crosswind: 10.00 mph Tail Wind: + 0.00 mph
Elevation Angle: 0 degrees Altitude: 0 feet Sight Height: 1.5 inches
Range
(meters)
Velocity
(fps)
Energy
(ft-lb)
Bullet Path
(inches)
Drop
(inches)
Drift
(inches)
Time of
Flight (sec)
0 2,600.0 2,521 1.50 0.00 0.00 0.000000
25 2,546.3 2,418 5.20 0.19 0.06 0.031865
50 2,493.3 2,319 11.49 0.77 0.23 0.064404
75 2,440.6 2,222 17.37 1.78 0.53 0.097641
100 2,388.5 2,128 22.81 3.22 0.95 0.131599
125 2,337.2 2,037 27.80 5.12 1.51 0.166299
150 2,286.5 1,950 32.31 7.49 2.20 0.201764
175 2,236.5 1,866 36.32 10.35 3.03 0.238020
200 2,187.1 1,784 39.82 13.74 4.00 0.275089
225 2,138.5 1,706 42.77 17.67 5.12 0.312998
250 2,090.0 1,629 45.16 22.16 6.39 0.351774
275 2,040.1 1,552 46.95 27.25 7.82 0.391476
300 1,991.0 1,478 48.12 32.97 9.43 0.432153
325 1,942.5 1,407 48.63 39.34 11.22 0.473840
350 1,894.8 1,339 48.45 46.39 13.18 0.516572
375 1,847.8 1,273 47.56 54.17 15.34 0.560386
400 1,801.5 1,210 45.90 62.71 17.70 0.605319
425 1,755.9 1,150 43.44 72.05 20.26 0.651414
450 1,711.0 1,092 40.14 82.23 23.03 0.698711
475 1,667.0 1,036 35.96 93.30 26.02 0.747254
500 1,624.2 984 30.84 105.30 29.24 0.797077
525 1,581.7 933 24.73 118.29 32.69 0.848218
550 1,539.3 884 17.59 132.31 36.38 0.900757
575 1,498.1 837 9.35 147.43 40.33 0.954745
600 1,458.0 793 0.04 163.70 44.54 1.010219
625 1,419.0 751 10.65 181.20 49.02 1.067219
650 1,381.1 711 22.56 199.98 53.78 1.125786
675 1,345.0 675 35.82 220.13 58.81 1.185945

FM 3-05.222

H-4
Data for: 7.62mm M852 (Continued)
Range
(meters)
Velocity
(fps)
Energy
(ft-lb)
Bullet Path
(inches)
Drop
(inches)
Drift
(inches)
Time of
Flight (sec)
700 1,310.7 641 50.52 241.71 64.13 1.247702
725 1,278.0 609 66.73 264.80 69.73 1.311059
750 1,246.9 580 84.53 289.48 75.61 1.376018
775 1,217.2 553 104.00 315.83 81.77 1.442582
800 1,189.0 527 125.22 343.93 88.22 1.510752
825 1,163.0 504 148.28 373.87 94.94 1.580501
850 1,139.0 484 173.25 405.73 101.93 1.651770
875 1,116.8 465 200.23 439.60 109.18 1.724503
900 1,096.1 448 229.30 475.54 116.68 1.798649
925 1,076.9 433 260.52 513.65 124.42 1.874162
950 1,058.9 418 293.98 554.00 132.39 1.950999
975 1,042.0 405 329.77 596.66 140.58 2.029121
1,000 1,026.0 393 367.95 641.72 149.00 2.108491

Range Path Drift 3-mph Target Lead 3-mph Mil Dot Lead
0 1.50 0.00 0 0.00
100 + 22.81 0.95 6 Light 1.50
200 + 39.82 4.00 12 1.50
300 + 48.12 9.43 19 Heavy 1.50
400 + 45.90 17.70 26 Light 1.75
500 + 30.84 29.24 35 1.75
600 0.04 44.54 44 Heavy 1.75



FM 3-05.222
H-5

SIERRA BALLISTICS III
Data for: 7.62mm M118LR Bullet: 175 grains Match King BCs: .505(H), .496(M), .485(L)
Company: Sierra Temperature: 59 Pressure: 29.53 Humidity: 78%
Zero: 600 meters Crosswind: 10.00 mph Tail Wind: + 0.00 mph
Elevation Angle: 0 degrees Altitude: 0 feet Sight Height: 1.5 inches
Range
(meters)
Velocity
(fps)
Energy
(ft-lb)
Bullet Path
(inches)
Drop
(inches)
Drift
(inches)
Time of
Flight (sec)
0 2,600.0 2,626 1.50 0.00 0.00 0.000000
25 2,551.6 2,529 0.20 0.19 0.05 0.031833
50 2,503.8 2,435 1.50 0.77 0.21 0.064271
75 2,456.1 2,344 2.38 1.77 0.47 0.097334
100 2,409.0 2,255 2.84 3.20 0.85 0.131040
125 2,362.5 2,168 2.84 5.08 1.35 0.165408
150 2,316.5 2,085 2.39 7.42 1.97 0.200455
175 2,271.0 2,004 1.44 10.25 2.71 0.236201
200 2,226.1 1,925 0.00 13.58 3.57 0.272665
225 2,181.8 1,849 1.97 17.43 4.57 0.309867
250 2,138.0 1,776 4.48 21.83 5.70 0.347829
275 2,094.7 1,705 7.57 26.79 6.96 0.386572
300 2,051.9 1,636 11.24 32.35 8.37 0.426119
325 2,009.7 1,569 15.53 38.52 9.92 0.466494
350 1,968.0 1,505 20.46 45.34 11.63 0.507720
375 1,926.8 1,442 26.06 52.83 13.49 0.549823
400 1,886.2 1,382 32.37 61.02 15.50 0.592830
425 1,846.1 1,324 39.40 69.93 17.68 0.636767
450 1,806.5 1,268 47.19 79.61 20.03 0.681663
475 1,766.7 1,213 55.78 90.08 22.56 0.727555
500 1,727.3 1,159 65.20 101.39 25.27 0.774488
525 1,688.5 1,108 75.49 113.56 28.16 0.822498
550 1,650.5 1,058 86.69 126.65 31.26 0.871613
575 1,613.4 1,011 98.84 140.68 34.55 0.921859
600 1,577.2 966 112.00 155.72 38.04 0.973260
625 1,541.8 924 126.19 171.80 41.74 1.025842
650 1,507.2 883 141.48 188.97 45.66 1.079631
675 1,473.4 843 157.91 207.28 49.79 1.134655
FM 3-05.222

H-6
Data for: 7.62mm M118LR (Continued)
Range
(meters)
Velocity
(fps)
Energy
(ft-lb)
Bullet Path
(inches)
Drop
(inches)
Drift
(inches)
Time of
Flight (sec)
700 1,440.5 806 175.53 226.79 54.14 1.190941
725 1,408.2 770 194.41 247.56 58.73 1.248516
750 1,376.9 737 214.60 269.63 63.54 1.307409
775 1,346.8 705 236.15 293.07 68.59 1.367634
800 1,318.0 675 259.14 317.94 73.87 1.429192
825 1,290.3 647 283.62 344.31 79.38 1.492086
850 1,263.8 620 309.67 372.23 85.14 1.556318
875 1,238.3 596 337.33 401.79 91.13 1.621889
900 1,213.8 572 366.70 433.03 97.35 1.688801
925 1,190.3 550 397.82 466.05 103.81 1.757055
950 1,168.3 530 430.79 500.89 110.50 1.826631
975 1,147.8 512 465.65 537.64 117.42 1.897487
1,000 1,128.7 495 502.49 576.36 124.56 1.969582

Range Path Drift 3-mph Target Lead 3-mph Mil Dot Lead
0 1.50 0.00 0 0.00
100 + 2.84 0.85 6 Light 1.50
200 0.00 3.57 12 1.50
300 11.24 8.37 19 Heavy 1.50
400 32.37 15.50 26 Light 1.75
500 65.20 25.27 34 1.75
600 112.00 38.04 43 Heavy 1.75


FM 3-05.222
H-7
SIERRA BALLISTICS III
Data for: 5.56mm Bullet: 77 grains SPR BCs: .372(H), .372(M), .372(L)
Company: Sierra Temperature: 59 Pressure: 29.53 Humidity: 78%
Zero: 200 meters Crosswind: 10.00 mph Tail Wind: + 0.00 mph
Elevation Angle: 0 degrees Altitude: 0 feet Sight Height: 2 inches
Range
(meters)
Velocity
(fps)
Energy
(ft-lb)
Bullet Path
(inches)
Drop
(inches)
Drift
(inches)
Time of
Flight (sec)
0 2,600.0 1,156 2.00 0.00 + 0.00 0.000000
25 2,535.6 1,099 0.18 0.19 0.07 0.031929
50 2,471.9 1,045 1.24 0.78 0.28 0.064674
75 2,409.0 992 2.24 1.79 0.64 0.098268
100 2,347.1 942 2.78 3.26 1.15 0.132744
125 2,286.1 893 2.86 5.19 1.83 0.168100
150 2,226.1 847 2.44 7.62 2.67 0.204500
175 2,167.1 803 1.50 10.58 3.69 0.241800
200 2,109.0 760 0.00 14.08 4.89 0.280100
225 2,051.9 720 2.08 18.18 6.27 0.319600
250 1,995.7 681 4.78 22.88 7.85 0.360100
275 1,940.4 644 8.13 28.24 9.63 0.401700
300 1,886.1 608 12.16 34.29 11.62 0.444600
325 1,832.7 574 16.93 41.07 13.83 0.488700
350 1,780.3 542 22.47 48.62 16.26 0.534000
375 1,728.8 511 28.83 56.99 18.93 0.580800
400 1,678.2 481 36.06 66.22 21.85 0.628900
425 1,629.2 454 44.21 76.38 25.02 0.678500
450 1,581.6 428 53.33 87.52 28.46 0.729500
475 1,535.5 403 63.50 99.69 32.17 0.782200
500 1,490.8 380 74.76 112.97 36.15 0.836300
525 1,447.4 358 87.19 127.41 40.42 0.892200
550 1,405.3 338 100.87 143.09 44.99 0.949600
575 1,364.8 318 115.85 160.09 49.86 1.008800
600 1,326.4 301 132.23 178.48 55.03 1.069800
625 1,290.1 285 150.09 198.35 60.51 1.132470
650 1,255.7 270 169.50 219.77 66.30 1.196890
675 1,223.0 256 190.56 242.84 72.39 1.263070
FM 3-05.222

H-8
Data for: 5.56mm (Continued)
Range
(meters)
Velocity
(fps)
Energy
(ft-lb)
Bullet Path
(inches)
Drop
(inches)
Drift
(inches)
Time of
Flight (sec)
700 1,192.0 243 213.36 267.65 78.79 1.33099
725 1,163.5 231 237.98 294.29 85.50 1.40064
750 1,137.4 221 264.52 322.84 92.50 1.47194
775 1,113.4 212 293.07 353.40 99.77 1.54484
800 1,091.3 204 323.72 386.05 107.32 1.61926
825 1,070.7 196 356.55 420.89 115.13 1.69517
850 1,051.6 189 391.64 458.00 123.18 1.77250
875 1,033.7 183 429.08 497.45 131.49 1.85121
900 1,016.9 177 468.96 539.34 140.02 1.93126
925 1,001.1 171 511.35 583.74 148.79 2.01261
950 986.2 166 556.34 630.74 157.78 2.09523
975 972.1 162 604.00 680.42 166.98 2.17908
1,000 958.8 157 654.42 732.85 176.40 2.26413

Range Path Drift
0 2.00 + 0.00
100 2.78 1.15
200 0.00 4.89
300 12.16 11.62
400 36.06 21.85
500 74.76 36.15
Environmental Conditions
Actual barometric pressure at firing site................................. 29.53 inches
Actual speed of sound at firing site ........................................ 1,121 fps
Effective ballistic coefficient at firing site................................ 0.372

Animal Lead Calculations
Average lead for a 3-mph walking target at 100 meters is ........... 7 inches
Average lead for a running deer at 100 meters is............................... 3 feet
Average lead for a running elk at 100 meters is ................................. 5 feet
Average lead for a running antelope at 100 meters is ........................ 8 feet




FM 3-05.222
H-9
SIERRA BALLISTICS III
Data for: 300 Win Mag Bullet: 190 grains Match King BCs: .533(H), .525(M), .515(L)
Company: Sierra Temperature: 59 Pressure: 29.53 Humidity: 78%
Zero: 200 meters Crosswind: 10.00 mph Tail Wind: + 0.00 mph
Elevation Angle: 0 degrees Altitude: 0 feet Sight Height: 1.5 inches
Range
(meters)
Velocity
(fps)
Energy
(ft-lb)
Bullet Path
(inches)
Drop
(inches)
Drift
(inches)
Time of
Flight (sec)
0 2,900.0 3,547 1.50 0.00 0.00 0.0000
25 2,855.7 3,440 0.32 0.13 0.03 0.0261
50 2,811.9 3,335 0.59 0.52 0.14 0.0525
75 2,768.5 3,233 1.23 1.18 0.32 0.0794
100 2,725.5 3,133 1.59 2.13 0.57 0.1067
125 2,683.0 3,036 1.66 3.37 0.90 0.1344
150 2,640.9 2,942 1.42 4.92 1.30 0.1626
175 2,599.2 2,850 0.87 6.77 1.79 0.1912
200 2,558.0 2,760 0.00 8.95 2.35 0.2203
225 2,517.2 2,673 1.20 11.45 3.00 0.2498
250 2,476.6 2,587 2.75 14.30 3.74 0.2798
275 2,436.3 2,504 4.64 17.51 4.56 0.3104
300 2,396.4 2,422 6.91 21.07 5.46 0.3414
325 2,356.9 2,343 9.55 25.02 6.47 0.3729
350 2,317.8 2,266 12.58 29.36 7.56 0.4050
375 2,279.1 2,191 16.02 34.10 8.75 0.4376
400 2,240.8 2,118 19.87 39.26 10.04 0.4708
425 2,202.8 2,047 24.16 44.85 11.42 0.5046
450 2,165.3 1,978 28.89 50.89 12.91 0.5389
475 2,128.1 1,910 34.09 57.40 14.51 0.5738
500 2,091.3 1,845 39.77 64.38 16.21 0.6094
525 2,054.3 1,780 45.94 71.85 18.03 0.6455
550 2,017.8 1,717 52.62 79.85 19.96 0.6824
575 1,981.7 1,656 59.84 88.37 22.00 0.7199
600 1,945.9 1,597 67.62 97.45 24.17 0.7580
625 1,910.6 1,540 75.96 107.10 26.46 0.7969
650 1,875.7 1,484 84.90 117.35 28.88 0.8365
675 1,841.1 1,430 94.46 128.21 31.43 0.8769
FM 3-05.222

H-10
Data for: 300 Win Mag (Continued)
Range
(meters)
Velocity
(fps)
Energy
(ft-lb)
Bullet Path
(inches)
Drop
(inches)
Drift
(inches)
Time of
Flight (sec)
700 1,806.9 1,377 104.66 139.71 34.12 0.9180
725 1,773.1 1,326 115.52 151.88 36.94 0.9599
750 1,739.7 1,277 127.07 164.74 39.90 1.0026
775 1,706.7 1,229 139.34 178.32 43.01 1.0461
800 1,674.2 1,182 152.36 192.64 46.26 1.0904
825 1,642.4 1,138 166.15 207.73 49.67 1.1356
850 1,611.2 1,095 180.75 223.64 53.23 1.1817
875 1,580.2 1,053 196.18 240.37 56.95 1.2287
900 1,549.6 1,013 212.48 257.98 60.83 1.2767
925 1,519.6 974 229.68 276.49 64.88 1.3255
950 1,490.3 937 247.83 295.94 69.10 1.3753
975 1,461.5 901 266.95 316.37 73.49 1.4262
1,000 1,433.3 867 287.09 337.81 78.05 1.477976

Range Path Drift
0 1.50 0.03
100 1.59 0.57
200 0.00 2.35
300 6.91 5.46
400 19.87 10.04
500 39.77 16.21
Environmental Conditions
Actual barometric pressure at firing site................................. 29.53 inches
Actual speed of sound at firing site ........................................ 1,121 fps
Effective ballistic coefficient at firing site................................ 0.530

Animal Lead Calculations
Average lead for a 3-mph walking target at 100 meters....5 1/2 inches
Average lead for a running deer at 100 meters is.................... 3 feet
Average lead for a running elk at 100 meters is ...................... 5 feet
Average lead for a running antelope at 100 meters is ............. 8 feet




FM 3-05.222
H-11
SIERRA BALLISTICS III
Data for: .338 Lapua Weight: 250 grains BCs: .675(H), .675(M), .675(L)
Company: Sierra Temperature: 59 Pressure: 29.53 Humidity: 78%
Zero: 200 meters Crosswind: 10.00 mph Tail Wind: + 0.00 mph
Elevation Angle: 0 degrees Altitude: 0 feet Sight Height: 2 inches
Range
(meters)
Velocity
(fps)
Energy
(ft-lb)
Bullet Path
(inches)
Drop
(inches)
Drift
(inches)
Time of
Flight (sec)
0 2,750.0 4,197 2.00 0.00 0.00 0.000000
50 2,676.4 3,976 0.76 0.67 0.14 0.060434
100 2,604.1 3,764 2.06 2.79 0.57 0.122538
150 2,533.0 3,561 1.84 6.44 1.31 0.186376
200 2,463.0 3,367 0.00 11.71 2.36 0.252013
250 2,393.8 3,180 3.55 18.69 3.74 0.319534
300 2,325.9 3,002 8.92 27.49 5.47 0.389016
350 2,259.1 2,833 16.20 38.20 7.56 0.460539
400 2,193.5 2,670 25.52 50.94 10.03 0.534189
450 2,129.1 2,516 36.99 65.85 12.88 0.610054
500 2,065.8 2,369 50.76 83.04 16.14 0.688230
550 2,003.7 2,228 66.96 102.66 19.83 0.768814
600 1,942.7 2,095 85.74 124.88 23.95 0.851912
650 1,882.9 1,968 107.27 149.84 28.54 0.937636
700 1,824.2 1,847 131.74 177.73 33.61 1.026101
750 1,766.6 1,732 159.32 208.74 39.19 1.117432
800 1,710.2 1,623 190.23 243.08 45.29 1.211761
850 1,655.2 1,520 224.69 280.97 51.95 1.309221
900 1,602.0 1,424 262.94 322.64 59.17 1.409921
950 1,550.6 1,334 305.24 368.37 66.98 1.513966
1,000 1,500.9 1,250 351.85 418.41 75.40 1.621464
1,050 1,452.9 1,172 403.08 473.07 84.45 1.732525
1,100 1,406.4 1,098 459.23 532.64 94.15 1.847264
1,150 1,361.9 1,029 520.63 597.47 104.51 1.965791
FM 3-05.222

H-12
Data for: .338 Lapua (Continued)
Range
(meters)
Velocity
(fps)
Energy
(ft-lb)
Bullet Path
(inches)
Drop
(inches)
Drift
(inches)
Time of
Flight (sec)
1,200 1,320.0 967 587.63 667.90 115.55 2.088153
1,250 1,280.5 910 660.60 744.30 127.26 2.214358
1,300 1,243.3 858 739.90 827.03 139.65 2.344413
1,350 1,208.2 810 825.93 916.49 152.72 2.478326
1,400 1,175.4 767 919.09 1,013.08 166.47 2.616090
1,450 1,145.9 729 1,019.78 1,117.20 180.87 2.757582
1,500 1,118.9 695 1,128.39 1,229.24 195.90 2.902635
1,550 1,094.3 665 1,245.33 1,349.61 211.53 3.051101
1,600 1,071.7 637 1,370.96 1,478.67 227.74 3.202849
1,650 1,050.8 613 1,505.67 1,616.82 244.51 3.357759
1,700 1,031.4 590 1,649.84 1,764.42 261.81 3.515722
1,750 1,013.3 570 1,803.81 1,921.83 279.63 3.676642
1,800 996.5 551 1,967.97 2,089.42 297.96 3.840426
1,850 980.7 534 2,142.66 2,267.55 316.78 4.006993
1,900 965.8 518 2,328.24 2,456.57 336.07 4.176266
1,950 951.9 503 2,525.06 2,656.83 355.83 4.348176
2,000 938.7 489 2,733.46 2,868.67 376.04 4.522656

Range Path Drift
0 2.00 0.00
500 50.76 16.14
750 159.32 39.19
1,000 351.85 75.40
1,500 1128.39 195.90
2,000 2733.46 376.04


Average lead for a 3-mph moving target

350 meters 2 feet 1.75 mils
500 meters 3 feet Heavy 1.75 mils
750 meters 5 feet 2.00 mils
1,000 meters 7 feet Light 2.25 mils
1,200 meters 9 feet Heavy 2.25 mils
1,450 meters 12 feet Heavy 2.50 mils
1,600 meters 14 feet Light 2.75 mils
1,850 meters 17 feet Heavy 2.75 mils
2,000 meters 20 feet 3.00 mils




FM 3-05.222
H-13
SIERRA BALLISTICS III
Data for: .338 Lapua Weight: 300 grains BCs: .768(H), .76(M), .75(L)
Company: Sierra Temperature: 59 Pressure: 29.53 Humidity: 78%
Zero: 200 meters Crosswind: 10.00 mph Tail Wind: + 0.00 mph
Elevation Angle: 0 degrees Altitude: 0 feet Sight Height: 2 inches
Range
(meters)
Velocity
(fps)
Energy
(ft-lb)
Bullet Path
(inches)
Drop
(inches)
Drift
(inches)
Time of
Flight (sec)
0 2,750.0 5,037 2.00 0.00 0.00 0.000000
50 2,685.2 4,802 0.73 0.67 0.12 0.060338
100 2,621.5 4,577 2.02 2.78 0.50 0.122138
150 2,558.7 4,360 1.80 6.40 1.14 0.185447
200 2,496.9 4,152 0.00 11.61 2.06 0.250316
250 2,435.6 3,951 3.47 18.48 3.26 0.316804
300 2,375.1 3,757 8.69 27.10 4.76 0.384974
350 2,315.6 3,571 15.75 37.56 6.57 0.454888
400 2,256.6 3,392 24.75 49.96 8.69 0.526611
450 2,198.3 3,219 35.78 64.40 11.15 0.600225
500 2,141.0 3,053 48.97 80.98 13.95 0.675801
550 2,084.6 2,894 64.42 99.83 17.11 0.753413
600 2,029.0 2,742 82.25 121.07 20.65 0.833137
650 1,974.4 2,596 102.61 144.83 24.57 0.915056
700 1,920.7 2,457 125.64 171.26 28.89 0.999254
750 1,867.9 2,324 151.47 200.49 33.62 1.085820
800 1,816.0 2,196 180.29 232.71 38.79 1.174850
850 1,764.5 2,074 212.25 268.07 44.42 1.266449
900 1,713.7 1,956 247.55 306.77 50.52 1.360749
950 1,664.0 1,844 286.38 349.01 57.11 1.457860
1,000 1,615.8 1,739 328.97 394.99 64.21 1.557873
1,050 1,569.1 1,640 375.53 444.96 71.84 1.660872
1,100 1,523.7 1,546 426.31 499.14 80.01 1.766942
1,150 1,479.8 1,458 481.57 557.80 88.74 1.876174
FM 3-05.222

H-14
Data for: .338 Lapua (Continued)
Range
(meters)
Velocity
(fps)
Energy
(ft-lb)
Bullet Path
(inches)
Drop
(inches)
Drift
(inches)
Time of
Flight (sec)
1,200 1,437.1 1,376 541.57 621.20 98.03 1.988657
1,250 1,395.7 1,297 606.60 689.64 107.92 2.104487
1,300 1,356.1 1,225 676.97 763.40 118.41 2.223746
1,350 1,318.6 1,158 752.99 842.83 129.51 2.346457
1,400 1,283.1 1,096 834.99 928.23 141.22 2.472628
1,450 1,249.4 1,040 923.30 1,019.94 153.54 2.602265
1,500 1,217.4 987 1,018.28 1,118.33 166.46 2.735374
1,550 1,187.2 939 1,120.28 1,223.73 180.01 2.871960
1,600 1,159.5 895 1,229.67 1,336.52 194.15 3.011956
1,650 1,134.1 857 1,346.80 1,457.06 208.86 3.155227
1,700 1,110.7 822 1,472.04 1,585.70 224.13 3.301647
1,750 1,089.1 790 1,605.72 1,722.79 239.94 3.451100
1,800 1,069.1 761 1,748.21 1,868.68 256.26 3.603483
1,850 1,050.5 735 1,899.82 2,023.70 273.08 3.758703
1,900 1,033.0 711 2,060.91 2,188.20 290.38 3.916673
1,950 1,016.7 688 2,231.79 2,362.49 308.16 4.077313
2,000 1,001.4 668 2,412.80 2,546.91 326.39 4.240551

Range Path Drift
0 2.00 0.00
500 48.97 13.95
750 151.47 33.62
1,000 328.97 64.21
1,500 1,018.28 166.46
2,000 2,412.80 326.39

Average lead for a 3-mph moving target
350 meters 2 feet 1.75 mils
500 meters 3 feet Heavy 1.75 mils
800 meters 5 feet Light 2.00 mils
1,000 meters 7 feet Light 2.25 mils
1,250 meters 9 feet 2.25 mils
1,500 meters 12 feet Light 2.50 mils
1,750 meters 15 feet Heavy 2.50 mils
1,900 meters 17 feet 2.75 mils
2,000 meters 18.5 feet Heavy 2.74 mils



FM 3-05.222
H-15
SIERRA BALLISTICS III
Data for: .50 cal MK 211 Bullet Weight: 671 grains BCs: .701(H), .701(M), .701(L)
Company: Sierra Temperature: 59 Pressure: 29.53 Humidity: 78%
Zero: 500 meters Crosswind: 10.00 mph Tail Wind: + 0.00 mph
Elevation Angle: 0 degrees Altitude: 0 feet Sight Height: 3.25 inches
Range
(meters)
Velocity
(fps)
Energy
(ft-lb)
Bullet Path
(inches)
Drop
(inches)
Drift
(inches)
Time of
Flight (sec)
0 2,740.0 11,184 3.25 0.00 0.00 0.00000
50 2,669.4 10,615 4.70 0.68 0.13 0.06063
100 2,600.0 10,070 11.19 2.81 0.55 0.12286
150 2,531.7 9,548 16.14 6.48 1.26 0.18677
200 2,464.4 9,047 19.48 11.76 2.27 0.25241
250 2,397.8 8,565 21.11 18.76 3.61 0.31985
300 2,332.4 8,104 20.93 27.57 5.27 0.38918
350 2,268.1 7,663 18.84 38.28 7.28 0.46046
400 2,204.9 7,242 14.73 51.01 9.65 0.53377
450 2,142.7 6,839 8.49 65.87 12.39 0.60920
500 2,081.6 6,455 0.01 83.00 15.51 0.68683
550 2,021.6 6,088 10.91 102.52 19.04 0.76675
600 1,962.7 5,738 24.34 124.58 22.99 0.84906
650 1,904.8 5,405 40.48 149.33 27.38 0.93386
700 1,847.9 5,087 59.47 176.95 32.22 1.02124
750 1,792.1 4,784 81.51 207.61 37.54 1.11134
800 1,737.4 4,496 106.77 241.50 43.36 1.20426
850 1,683.7 4,223 135.48 278.83 49.69 1.30012
900 1,631.6 3,966 167.85 319.82 56.57 1.39905
950 1,581.3 3,725 204.12 364.71 63.99 1.50114
1,000 1,532.5 3,499 244.54 413.76 72.00 1.60648
1,050 1,485.3 3,286 289.39 467.23 80.59 1.71517
1,100 1,439.6 3,087 338.94 525.40 89.79 1.82732
1,150 1,395.4 2,901 393.50 588.59 99.62 1.94304
1,200 1,353.2 2,728 453.40 657.11 110.10 2.06242
1,250 1,313.4 2,570 518.97 731.31 121.22 2.18548
FM 3-05.222

H-16
Data for: .50 cal MK 211 (Continued)
Range
(meters)
Velocity
(fps)
Energy
(ft-lb)
Bullet Path
(inches)
Drop
(inches)
Drift
(inches)
Time of
Flight (sec)
1,300 1,275.9 2,425 590.57 811.53 132.99 2.31222
1,350 1,240.4 2,292 668.55 898.14 145.41 2.44267
1,400 1,206.8 2,169 753.29 991.51 158.48 2.57682
1,450 1,175.4 2,058 845.18 1,092.02 172.20 2.71466
1,500 1,147.0 1,960 944.59 1,200.06 186.56 2.85608
1,550 1,121.0 1,872 1,051.90 1,316.01 201.51 3.00093
1,600 1,097.2 1,793 1,167.50 1,440.25 217.05 3.14906
1,650 1,075.2 1,722 1,291.80 1,573.15 233.14 3.30036
1,700 1,054.9 1,658 1,425.10 1,715.07 249.77 3.45471
1,750 1,035.9 1,599 1,567.70 1,866.38 266.92 3.61201
1,800 1,018.3 1,545 1,720.10 2,027.41 284.57 3.77217
1,850 1,001.8 1,495 1,882.60 2,198.52 302.71 3.93511
1,900 986.3 1,449 2,055.50 2,380.06 321.32 4.10074
1,950 971.8 1,407 2,239.20 2,572.37 340.40 4.26900
2,000 958.1 1,367 2,433.90 2,775.78 359.92 4.43981

Range Path Drift
0 3.25 0.00
500 0.01 15.51
750 81.51 37.54
1,000 244.54 72.00
1,500 944.59 186.56
2,000 2,433.90 359.92
Environmental Conditions
Actual barometric pressure at firing site................................. 29.53 inches
Actual speed of sound at firing site ........................................ 1,121 fps
Effective ballistic coefficient at firing site................................ 0.701

Average lead for a 3-mph moving target

350 meters 2 feet 1.75 mils
500 meters 3 feet Heavy 1.75 mils
700 meters 4.5 feet 2.00 mils
1,000 meters 7 feet Heavy 2.00 mils
1,200 meters 9 feet Heavy 2.25 mils
1,450 meters 12 feet 2.50 mils
1,600 meters 14 feet Heavy 2.50 mils
1,850 meters 17 feet Heavy 2.75 mils
2,000 meters 19.5 feet 3.00 mils




FM 3-05.222
H-17
SIERRA BALLISTICS III
Data for: .50 cal M8 API Bullet Weight: 622.5 grains BCs: .701(H), .701(M), .701(L)
Company: Sierra Temperature: 60 Pressure: 29.53 Humidity: 78%
Zero: 500 meters Crosswind: 10.00 mph Tail Wind: + 0.00 mph
Elevation Angle: 0 degrees Altitude: 0 feet Sight Height: 3.25 inches
Range
(meters)
Velocity
(fps)
Energy
(ft-lb)
Bullet Path
(inches)
Drop
(inches)
Drift
(inches)
Time of
Flight (sec)
0 2,910.0 11,703 3.25 0.00 0.00 0.0000
50 2,836.5 11,119 3.80 0.60 0.12 0.0571
100 2,764.3 10,560 9.56 2.49 0.51 0.1156
150 2,693.3 10,025 13.96 5.74 1.16 0.1757
200 2,623.4 9,512 16.93 10.41 2.10 0.2374
250 2,554.8 9,020 18.39 16.60 3.32 0.3007
300 2,487.3 8,550 18.26 24.38 4.85 0.3658
350 2,420.4 8,096 16.46 33.84 6.68 0.4326
400 2,354.6 7,662 12.88 45.06 8.85 0.5013
450 2,289.9 7,247 7.42 58.16 11.36 0.5719
500 2,226.3 6,850 0.010 73.24 14.21 0.6445
550 2,163.8 6,470 9.530 90.42 17.44 0.7192
600 2,102.4 6,108 21.28 109.81 21.05 0.7961
650 2,042.0 5,762 35.37 131.55 25.05 0.8752
700 1,982.7 5,433 51.95 155.78 29.47 0.9567
750 1,924.4 5,118 71.17 182.65 34.32 1.0406
800 1,867.2 4,818 93.20 212.33 39.62 1.1271
850 1,811.1 4,533 118.20 244.98 45.39 1.2163
900 1,755.9 4,261 146.37 280.80 51.66 1.3082
950 1,701.9 4,003 177.91 319.98 58.43 1.4030
1,000 1,649.2 3,759 213.03 362.75 65.73 1.5009
1,050 1,598.3 3,530 251.97 409.34 73.59 1.6019
1,100 1,549.0 3,316 294.98 460.00 82.01 1.7061
1,150 1,501.3 3,115 342.31 514.98 91.01 1.8137
1,200 1,455.1 2,926 394.25 574.57 100.62 1.9246
FM 3-05.222

H-18
Data for: .50 cal M8 API (Continued)
Range
(meters)
Velocity
(fps)
Energy
(ft-lb)
Bullet Path
(inches)
Drop
(inches)
Drift
(inches)
Time of
Flight (sec)
1,250 1,410.4 2,749 451.10 639.06 110.85 2.03914
1,300 1,367.4 2,584 513.17 708.78 121.72 2.15726
1,350 1,326.8 2,433 580.80 784.06 133.23 2.27907
1,400 1,288.5 2,294 654.33 865.24 145.40 2.40456
1,450 1,252.3 2,167 734.13 952.69 158.22 2.53375
1,500 1,218.1 2,050 820.55 1,046.76 171.68 2.66664
1,550 1,185.8 1,943 913.98 1,147.85 185.80 2.80323
1,600 1,156.4 1,848 1,014.80 1,256.33 200.56 2.94346
1,650 1,129.7 1,764 1,123.40 1,372.60 215.93 3.08716
1,700 1,105.1 1,688 1,240.20 1,497.03 231.89 3.23420
1,750 1,082.6 1,620 1,365.50 1,630.00 248.41 3.38444
1,800 1,061.7 1,558 1,499.70 1,771.86 265.47 3.53777
1,850 1,042.3 1,501 1,643.20 1,922.99 283.06 3.69409
1,900 1,024.3 1,450 1,796.30 2,083.72 301.16 3.85330
1,950 1,007.4 1,403 1,959.30 2,254.43 319.76 4.01531
2,000 991.6 1,359 2,132.60 2,435.44 338.83 4.18005

Range Path Drift
0 3.25 0.00
500 0.01 15.51
750 81.51 37.54
1,000 244.54 72.00
1,500 944.59 186.56
2,000 2,433.90 359.92
Environmental Conditions
Actual barometric pressure at firing site................................. 29.53 inches
Actual speed of sound at firing site ........................................ 1,121 fps
Effective ballistic coefficient at firing site................................ 0.701

Average lead for a 3-mph moving target

350 meters 2 feet Heavy 1.50 mils
500 meters 3 feet 1.75 mils
700 meters 4 feet Heavy 1.75 mils
1,000 meters 6.5 feet 2.00 mils
1,300 meters 9.5 feet 2.25 mils
1,500 meters 11.5 feet Heavy 2.25 mils
1,600 meters 13 feet 2.25 mils
1,800 meters 15.5 feet Heavy 2.25 mils
950 meters 7.5 feet .75 mils


I-1
Appendix I
Sniper Training Exercises
I n al l trai ni ng, trai ners stress practi cal exerci ses whenever possi bl e.
Sni pers must achi eve certai n standards and perform remedi al
trai ni ng as requi red. They must constantl y stri ve to i mprove thei r
performance to the poi nt that basi c ski l l s become i nsti ncti ve. To
mai ntai n thi s l evel of profi ci ency, the sni pers peri odi cal l y conduct the
exerci ses l i sted i n thi s appendi x.
STALKING
I -1. The purpose of stal ki ng exerci ses i s to gi ve the sni per confi dence i n
hi s abi l i ty to approach and occupy a fi ri ng posi ti on wi thout bei ng observed.
DESCRIPTION
I -2. Havi ng studi ed a map (and aeri al photograph i f avai l abl e), an
i ndi vi dual sni per must stal k for a predesi gnated di stance. I t coul d be
1,000 meters or more dependi ng on the area sel ected. Al l stal ki ng
exerci ses and tests shoul d be approxi matel y 1,000 meters wi th a 3-hour
ti me l i mi t. The sni per must stal k to wi thi n 200 meters of two trai ned
observers who are scanni ng the area wi th bi nocul ars and fi re two bl anks
wi thout bei ng detected.
RECONNAISSANCE BY THE CONDUCTING OFFICER OR NCO
I -3. The area used for a stal ki ng exerci se must be chosen wi th great
care. An area i n whi ch a sni per must do the l ow crawl for the compl ete
di stance woul d be unsui tabl e. The trai ner shoul d consi der the fol l owi ng:
As much of the area as possi bl e shoul d be vi si bl e to the observer.
Thi s l evel of vi si bi l i ty forces the sni per to use the ground properl y,
even when far from the observers l ocati on. The stal k l anes shoul d
al so vary i n terrai n to gi ve the maxi mum vari ati ons to the sni per,
wi thout bei ng a 1,000-meter l ow crawl .
Where possi bl e, avai l abl e cover shoul d decrease as the sni per nears
the observers posi ti on. Thi s effect wi l l enabl e hi m to take chances
earl y i n the stal k and force hi m to move more careful l y as he cl oses
i n on hi s fi ri ng posi ti on.
The sni per must start the stal k i n an area out-of-si ght of
the observer.
The tr ai ner must establ i sh boundar i es by means of natur al
featur es or the use of mar k er s.
FM 3-05.222

I-2
CONDUCT OF THE EXERCISE
I -4. I n a l ocati on near the jump-off poi nt for the stal k, the sni per
recei ves a bri ef on the fol l owi ng:
Ai m of the exerci se.
Boundari es.
Ti me l i mi t (usual l y 3 hours).
Standards to be achi eved.
I -5. When the sni per reaches hi s fi nal fi ri ng posi ti on, whi ch i s cl oser
than 220 meters for the i ndi vi dual stal k and 330 meters for a team stal k,
of the observer, he wi l l fi re a bl ank round at an observer. Thi s shot wi l l
tel l the wal ker that he i s ready to conti nue the rest of the exerci se. The
wal ker wi l l then move to wi thi n 3 meters of the sni per. The observer wi l l
search a 3-meter radi us around the wal ker for the sni per. I f the sni per i s
undetected, the observer wi l l expose a 6-i nch by 6-i nch pl aque, hel d
di rectl y above or bel ow the observers bi nocul ars. The sni per wi l l have 30
seconds to correctl y i denti fy the l etter or number on the pl aque. The
sni per must remai n undetected and the observer wi l l di rect the wal ker to
have the sni per fi re hi s second bl ank round. The observer wi l l l ook for
i ndi cators such as muzzl e bl ast caused by the bl ank. Use cauti on so that
the muzzl e fl ash caused by the bl ank round i s not confused wi th the bl ast
of vegetati on from a poorl y prepared posi ti on. I f the sni per remai ns
undetected, the wal ker wi l l then move i n and pl ace hi s hand on the
sni pers head. The sni per must then tel l the wal ker hi s exact range, wi nd
vel oci ty, and wi ndage appl i ed to the scope.
STANDARDS
I -6. I f the sni per compl etes al l of these steps correctl y, he has passed the
stal k exerci se. The trai ner conducts a cri ti que at the concl usi on of the
exerci se, touchi ng on mai n probl em areas.
CREATING INTEREST
I -7. To create i nterest and to gi ve the sni pers practi ce i n observati on
and stal ki ng ski l l s, one-hal f of the cl ass may be posi ti oned to observe the
conduct of the stal k. Seei ng an error made i s an effecti ve way of teachi ng
better stal ki ng ski l l s. When a sni per i s caught, he shoul d be sent to the
OP to observe the exerci se.
RANGE ESTIMATION
I -8. Range esti mati on exerci ses are to make the sni per profi ci ent i n
accuratel y judgi ng di stance.
DESCRIPTION
I -9. The sni per arri ves at the OP. The trai ner shows hi m di fferent
objects over di stances of up to 800 meters. After ti me for consi derati on,
the sni per wri tes down the esti mated di stance to each object. He may use
onl y hi s bi nocul ars and ri fl e tel escope as ai ds. He must esti mate to wi thi n
10 percent of the correct range.
FM 3-05.222

I-3
RECONNAISSANCE BY THE CONDUCTING OFFICER OR NCO
I -10. Each exerci se must take pl ace i n a di fferent area and offer a vari ety
of terrai n. The exerci se areas shoul d i ncl ude dead space as wel l as pl aces
where the sni per wi l l be observi ng uphi l l or downhi l l . The trai ner shoul d
sel ect extra objects i n case those ori gi nal l y chosen cannot be seen due to
weather condi ti ons or other reasons.
CONDUCT OF THE EXERCISE
I -11. The sni per arri ves at the OP, obtai ns a record card, and recei ves a
revi ew on methods of judgi ng di stances and causes of mi scal cul ati on. The
trai ner then bri efs hi m on the fol l owi ng:
Ai m of the exerci se.
Reference poi nts.
Ti me l i mi t per object.
Standard to be achi eved.
I -12. The trai ner i ndi cates the fi rst object to the sni per. The sni per i s
al l owed 3 mi nutes to esti mate the di stance and wri te i t down. He repeats
the sequence for a total of ei ght objects. The trai ner col l ects the card and
gi ves the correct range to each object. He poi nts out i n each case why the
di stance mi ght be underesti mated or overesti mated. After correcti on, the
card i s gi ven back to the sni per. Thi s way, the sni per retai ns a record of
hi s performance.
STANDARDS
I -13. The sni per fai l s i f he esti mates four or more di stances i ncorrectl y
out of 10 di stances.
OBSERVATION
I -14. Observati on exerci ses al l ow the sni per to practi ce i mprovi ng hi s
abi l i ty to observe an enemy. They al so teach hi m to accuratel y record the
resul ts of hi s observati ons.
DESCRIPTION
I -15. The trai ner assi gns the sni per an arc of about 1,800 mi l s to observe
i denti fyi ng the l eft and ri ght l i mi ts.. The fi rst 20 mi nutes i s spent
drawi ng a panorami c sketch. He pl ots any objects that appear to be out
of pl ace. Objects are so posi ti oned as to be i nvi si bl e to the naked eye,
i ndi sti ngui shabl e when usi ng bi nocul ars, but recogni zabl e when usi ng the
spotti ng tel escope.
RECONNAISSANCE BY THE CONDUCTING OFFICER OR NCO
I -16. When choosi ng the l ocati on for the exerci se, the trai ner shoul d
consi der the fol l owi ng poi nts:
Number of objects i n the arc.
Ti me l i mi ts.
FM 3-05.222

I-4
Equi pment that i s al l owed to be used (bi nocul ars and spotti ng
tel escopes).
Standard to be attai ned.
I -17. The sni per takes up the prone posi ti on on the observati on l i ne and
spends 20 mi nutes drawi ng a panorami c sketch of the area. The staff i s
avai l abl e to answer questi ons about the area i f the sni per i s uncl ear. He
shoul d focus on one-hal f of the area for the fi rst 20 mi nutes and then shi ft
attenti on to the other hal f. (Thi s method ensures that he sees al l the
ground i n the arc.) At the end of 40 mi nutes, the trai ner col l ects the
sni pers sheet and shows hi m the l ocati on of each object. Thi s cri ti que i s
best done by the sni per stayi ng i n hi s posi ti on and watchi ng whi l e a
member of the staff poi nts out each object. Thi s way, the sni per wi l l see
why he fai l ed to fi nd an object, even though i t was vi si bl e. (A sni per
shoul d vi ew fi rst wi th bi nocul ars and then wi th spotti ng tel escopes before
the trai ner pi cks up the i tem.)
I -18. The trai ner hol ds a cri ti que sessi on and bri ngs out the mai n poi nts,
noti ng why the object shoul d have been seen.
SCORING
I -19. The sni per recei ves hal f a poi nt for each object correctl y pl otted and
another hal f a poi nt for nami ng the object correctl y.
STANDARDS
I -20. The sni per fai l s i f he scores fewer than 8 poi nts out of 12 poi nts (12
di sgui sed mi l i tary objects).
HIDE CONSTRUCTION
I -21. The i ntent of thi s exerci se i s to show the sni per how to bui l d a
hi de and remai n undetected whi l e the area i s under observati on.
The purpose of a hi de i s to camoufl age a sni per or sni per team that i s not
i n movement.
DESCRIPTION
I -22. The trai ner gi ves the sni per 8 hours to bui l d a temporary hi de l arge
enough to hol d a sni per team wi th al l i ts necessary equi pment.
RECONNAISSANCE BY THE CONDUCTING OFFICER OR NCO
I -23. The hi de exerci se area shoul d be sel ected wi th great care. I t can be
i n any type of terrai n, but there shoul d be more than enough prospecti ve
spots i n whi ch to bui l d a hi de. The area shoul d be easi l y bounded by l eft
and ri ght, far and near l i mi ts. I f desi gnated properl y, the sni per shoul d
be abl e to easi l y and qui ckl y i denti fy these poi nts. There shoul d be
enough tool s (for exampl e, axes, pi cks, shovel s, and sandbags) avai l abl e to
accommodate the sni pers enti re ti me. There must al so be suffi ci ent
rati ons and water avai l abl e to the sni per to l ast the enti re exerci se,
whi ch i s about 9 1/2 hours total 8 hours of i nstructi on and 1 1/2 hours
of testi ng.
FM 3-05.222

I-5
CONDUCT OF THE EXERCISE
I -24. The sni per recei ves a shovel , ax, pi ckax, and approxi matel y 20
sandbags. He i s taken to the area and bri efed on the purpose of the
exerci se, ti me l i mi t for constructi on, and area l i mi ts. The sni per then
begi ns constructi on of the hi de.
NOTE: Duri ng the constructi on, a trai ner shoul d be present at al l ti mes
to act as an advi sor.
I -25. At the end of 8 hours, the trai ner checks the sni pers hi de to ensure
i t i s compl ete. An i nfantry offi cer i s brought out to act as an observer. He
i s pl aced i n an area 300 yards from the hi de area, where he starts hi s
observati on wi th bi nocul ars and a 20x M49 spotti ng scope. The observer,
after fai l i ng to fi nd a hi de, i s brought forward 150 yards and agai n
commences observati on.
I -26. A trai ner i n the fi el d (wal ker wi th radi o) then moves to wi thi n 10
yards of a hi de and i nforms the observer. The observer then tel l s the
wal ker to have the sni per i n the hi de l oad and fi re hi s onl y round (bl ank).
I f the sni pers muzzl e bl ast i s seen, or i f the hi de i s seen due to i mproper
constructi on, the sni per fai l s but remai ns i n the hi de. These procedures
are repeated for al l the sni per teams. The observer i s then brought down
to wi thi n 25 yards of each hi de to determi ne whether the sni per can be
seen wi th the naked eye at that di stance. The observer i s not shown the
hi de. He must fi nd i t. I f the sni per i s l ocated at 25 yards, he fai l s and i s
al l owed to come out and see hi s di screpanci es. I f he i s not seen, he passes.
OTHER REQUIREMENTS
I -27. The sni per shoul d al so fi l l out a range card and a sni pers l ogbook
and make a fi el d sketch. One way of hel pi ng hi m i s to have a trai ner show
fl ash cards from 150 yards away, begi nni ng when the observer arri ves
and endi ng when the observer moves to wi thi n 25 yards. The sni per
shoul d record everythi ng he sees on the fl ash cards and anythi ng goi ng
on at the OP duri ng the exerci se.
STANDARDS
I -28. The sni per must pass al l phases to pass the exerci se. Al l range
cards, l ogbooks, and fi el d sketches must be turned i n for gradi ng; the
trai ner makes a fi nal determi nati on of pass or fai l .
CAMOUFLAGE AND CONCEALMENT
I -29. Camoufl age and conceal ment exerci ses hel p the sni per sel ect fi nal
fi ri ng posi ti ons.
DESCRIPTION
I -30. The sni per conceal s hi msel f wi thi n 200 yards of an observer. The
observer uses bi nocul ars to try to fi nd the sni per. The sni per must be abl e
to fi re bl ank ammuni ti on at the observer wi thout bei ng seen and have the
correct el evati on and wi ndage on hi s si ght. The sni per must remai n
unseen throughout the conduct of the exerci se.
FM 3-05.222

I-6
RECONNAISSANCE BY THE CONDUCTING OFFICER OR NCO
I -31. I n choosi ng the l ocati on for the exerci se, the trai ner ensures that
certai n condi ti ons are met. They i ncl ude the fol l owi ng:
There must be adequate space to ensure sni pers are not crowded
together i n the area. There shoul d be at l east twi ce the number of
potenti al posi ti ons as there are sni pers. Once the area has been
establ i shed, the l i mi ts shoul d be marked i n some manner (for
exampl e, fl ags, trees, and promi nent features). Sni pers shoul d then
be al l owed to choose any posi ti on wi thi n the l i mi ts for thei r fi nal
fi ri ng posi ti on.
The observer must be abl e to see the enti re probl em area.
As there wi l l be several conceal ment exerci ses throughout the
sni per course, di fferent types of terrai n shoul d be chosen for the
sni per to practi ce conceal ment i n vari ed condi ti ons. For i nstance,
one exerci se coul d take pl ace i n a fai rl y open area, one al ong a
wood l i ne, one i n shrubs, and another i n hi l l y or rough terrai n.
CONDUCT OF THE EXERCISE
I -32. The trai ner assi gns the sni per a speci fi ed area wi th boundari es i n
whi ch to conceal hi msel f properl y. The observer turns hi s back to the area
and al l ows the sni per 5 mi nutes to conceal hi msel f. At the end of 5
mi nutes, the observer turns and commences observati on i n hi s search for
the conceal ed sni per. Thi s observati on shoul d l ast approxi matel y one-hal f
hour (more ti me may be al l otted at the di screti on of the trai ner). At the
concl usi on of observati on, the observer i nstructs, by radi o, one of the two
observers (wal kers) i n the fi el d to move to wi thi n 10 meters of the sni per.
The sni per i s gi ven one bl ank. I f he cannot be seen after the wal ker
moves wi thi n the 10 meters, the wal ker wi l l tel l hi m to l oad and fi re hi s
bl ank. The observer i s l ooki ng for muzzl e bl ast, vegetati on fl yi ng after the
shot, and movement by the sni per before and after he fi res. I f the sni per
cannot be seen, the wal ker then extends hi s arm i n the di recti on of the
sni per, i ndi cati ng hi s posi ti on. I f the sni per remai ns unseen after
i ndi cati on, the wal ker goes to the sni pers posi ti on and pl aces hi s hand,
pal m faci ng the observer, di rectl y on top of the sni pers head. I f the sni per
passes al l of the above, he must then state hi s el evati on, wi ndage, and
what type of movement the observer i s maki ng. The sni per must al so
i denti fy a l etter or number pl aque hel d by the observer.
CREATING INTEREST
I -33. To create i nterest and gi ve the sni per practi ce i n observati on,
one-hal f of the cl ass may be posi ti oned wi th the observer so the other hal f
of the cl ass can profi t from the mi stakes. When a sni per fai l s the exerci se,
he shoul d go to the OP to observe.
J-1
Appendix J
Range Estimation Table
Table J-1. Mils for Objects
Target Height
(Mils)
6 Feet
(1.8 M)
5 Feet,
9 Inches
(1.75 M)
5 Feet,
6 Inches
(1.7 M)
39 Inches
(1 M)
19 Inches
(0.5 M)
6.0 300 292 283 167 83
5.9 305 297 288 169 85
5.8 310 302 293 172 86
5.7 316 307 298 175 88
5.6 321 313 304 179 89
5.5 327 318 309 182 91
5.4 333 324 315 185 93
5.3 340 330 321 189 94
5.2 346 337 327 192 96
5.1 353 343 333 196 98
5.0 360 350 340 200 100
4.9 367 357 347 204 102
4.8 375 365 354 208 104
4.7 383 372 362 213 106
4.6 391 380 370 217 109
4.5 400 389 378 222 111
4.4 409 398 386 227 114
4.3 419 407 395 233 116
4.2 429 417 405 238 119
4.1 439 427 415 244 122
4.0 450 438 425 250 125
3.9 462 449 436 256 128
3.8 474 461 447 263 132
3.7 486 473 459 270 135
3.6 500 486 472 278 139
3.5 514 500 486 286 143
3.4 529 515 500 294 147
3.3 545 530 515 303 152
3,2 563 547 531 313 156
3.1 581 565 548 323 161
3.0 600 583 567 333 167
FM 3-05.222

J-2
Table J-1. Mils for Objects (Continued)
Target Height
(Mils)
6 Feet
(1.8 M)
5 Feet,
9 Inches
(1.75 M)
5 Feet,
6 Inches
(1.7 M)
39 Inches
(1 M)
19 Inches
(0.5 M)
2.9 621 603 586 345 172
2.8 643 625 607 357 179
2.7 667 648 630 370 185
2.6 692 673 654 385 192
2.5 720 700 680 400 200
2.4 750 729 708 417 208
2.3 783 761 739 435 217
2.2 818 795 773 455 227
2.1 857 833 810 476 238
2.0 900 875 850 500 250
1.9 947 921 895 526 263
1.8 1,000 972 944 556 278
1.7 1,059 1,029 1,000 588 294
1.6 1,125 1,094 1,063 625 313
1.5 1,200 1,167 1,133 667 333
1.4 1,286 1,250 1,214 714 357
1.3 1,385 1,346 1,308 769 385
1.2 1,500 1,458 1,417 833 417
1.1 1,636 1,591 1,545 909 455
1.0 1,800 1,750 1,700 1,000 500
0.9 2,000 1,944 1,889 1,111 556
0.8 2,250 2,188 2,125 1,250 625
0.7 2,571 2,500 2,429 1,429 714
0.6 3,000 2,917 2,833 1,667 833
0.5 3,600 3,500 3,400 2,000 1,000
0.4 4,500 4,375 4,250 2,500 1,250
0.3 6,000 5,833 5,667 3,333 1,667
0.2 9,000 8,750 8,500 5,000 2,500
0.1 18,000 17,500 17,000 10,000 5,000
NOTE: Use of the formula (HT x 1000)/mils will give the range to any known sized object.
Example: a 2-meter door would be: HT = 2(2 x 1,000) = 2,000/mils with a mil reading of
3.5 = 571 meters to the door.

K-1
Appendix K
Snipers Logbook
Nine Steps for a First-Shot Hit
1. Determi ne the range i n metersset. Take sl ope i nto account.
2. Determi ne the base wi nd:
a. I n MOAset. (For i ron si ghts onl y) or,
b. Mi l s for hol d-off. 1 mi l = 3.5 MOAs, 1/4 mi l = .87 MOA, 1/2 mi l = 1.75 MOAs,
3/4 mi l s = 2.62 MOAs.
NOTE: When determi ni ng base wi nds, ensure you know how the mi rage l ooks under the base
condi ti on so you can see changes.
3. Determi ne the spi n dri ft correcti on:
a. 600700 mi l sl eft 1/2 MOA.
b. 800900 mi l sl eft 3/4 MOA.
c. 1,000 mi l sl eft 1 MOA (M118).
4. Determi ne the temperature change from 0 and set: 100500 mi l s +/ 20 degrees = +/ 1
MOA.
a. 600900 mi l s +/ 15 degrees = +/ 1 MOA.
b. 1,000 mi l s +/ 10 degrees = +/ 1 MOA.
5. Determi ne the pressure change versus 0 pressure and set.
6. Determi ne the al ti tude change from 0 and set.
7. Determi ne l ead (i f a movi ng target).
8. Assume a good posi ti on:
a. Bone support.
b. Muscul ar rel axati on.
c. Natural POA on the ai mi ng poi nt.
9. Fi re the shot:
a. Natural respi ratory pause.
b. Focus on the front si ght/reti cl e.
c. Fol l ow-through.
NOTE: Ammuni ti on shoul d remai n covered so i t wi l l stay at a constant temperature. As a
weapon heats up i t wi l l stri ng rounds hi gh. Thi s i s caused by the i nternal resi dual heat
i ncreasi ng the chamber temperature that causes i ncreased chamber pressure. Thi s i ncrease
resul ts i n i ncreased bul l et vel oci ty. Log al l shots and subsequent changes.
FM 3-05.222
K-2
Wind Data
1. Determi ne di recti on of
a. Average wi nd.
b. Gusts
c. Lul l s.
2. Determi ne vel oci ty of
a. Average wi nd.
b. Gusts.
c. Lul l s.
3. Determi ne mi l hol d for wi nd cal l .
4. Observer must be prepared to change hi s wi nd cal l based on gust or l ul l s. NOTE: Lul l s are
more dangerous than gusts.
5. Refer to your target di mensi ons i n MOAs:
a. Center = center of target.
b. Favor = 1/2 between mi dl i ne and edge of target.
c. Hol d = the edge of the target.
NOTE: You cannot use mi rage as a vel oci ty i ndi cator unti l you know what i t l ooks l i ke for the
average wi nd. Thi s number wi l l change throughout the day.
8. Shoot the condi ti on. Do not chase spotters.
9. I gnore mi nor fl uctuati ons. Wai t for the condi ti on to ful l y change. Mi rage wi l l change before
condi ti ons arri ve. Boi l i ng mi rage i ndi cates change.
10. Grass wi l l gi ve magni tude of the wi nd but requi res practi ce for di recti on or vel oci ty.
11. Observer computes correcti on i n minutes and gi ves i t to the shooter i n mil hol d-off.
NOTE: Thi s matri x (Fi gure K-1) i s desi gned to compi l e data on the i ndi vi dual sni per weapon
systems zero at these ranges and temperatures. Fi gure K-2, pages K-2 through
K-36, provi des sampl e components of the SOTI C Shooters Log as used i n the course.
CONSOLIDATED ZERO DATA
Meters 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1,000
Temperature
50

55

60

65

70

75

80

85

90

95

Figure K-1. Individual SWSs Data for Zeroing
FM 3-05.222
K-3
Figure K-2. SOTIC Shooters Log
FM 3-05.222
K-4
Figure K-2. SOTIC Shooters Log (Continued)
FM 3-05.222
K-5
Figure K-2. SOTIC Shooters Log (Continued)
FM 3-05.222
K-6
Figure K-2. SOTIC Shooters Log (Continued)
FM 3-05.222
K-7
Figure K-2. SOTIC Shooters Log (Continued)
FM 3-05.222
K-8
Figure K-2. SOTIC Shooters Log (Continued)
FM 3-05.222
K-9
Figure K-2. SOTIC Shooters Log (Continued)
FM 3-05.222
K-10
Figure K-2. SOTIC Shooters Log (Continued)
FM 3-05.222
K-11
Figure K-2. SOTIC Shooters Log (Continued)
FM 3-05.222
K-12
Figure K-2. SOTIC Shooters Log (Continued)
FM 3-05.222
K-13
Figure K-2. SOTIC Shooters Log (Continued)
FM 3-05.222
K-14
Figure K-2. SOTIC Shooters Log (Continued)
FM 3-05.222
K-15
Figure K-2. SOTIC Shooters Log (Continued)
FM 3-05.222
K-16
Figure K-2. SOTIC Shooters Log (Continued)
FM 3-05.222
K-17
Figure K-2. SOTIC Shooters Log (Continued)
FM 3-05.222
K-18
Figure K-2. SOTIC Shooters Log (Continued)
FM 3-05.222
K-19
Figure K-2. SOTIC Shooters Log (Continued)
FM 3-05.222
K-20
Figure K-2. SOTIC Shooters Log (Continued)
FM 3-05.222
K-21
Figure K-2. SOTIC Shooters Log (Continued)
FM 3-05.222
K-22
Figure K-2. SOTIC Shooters Log (Continued)
FM 3-05.222
K-23
Figure K-2. SOTIC Shooters Log (Continued)
FM 3-05.222
K-24
Figure K-2. SOTIC Shooters Log (Continued)
FM 3-05.222
K-25
Figure K-2. SOTIC Shooters Log (Continued)
FM 3-05.222
K-26
Figure K-2. SOTIC Shooters Log (Continued)
FM 3-05.222
K-27
Figure K-2. SOTIC Shooters Log (Continued)
FM 3-05.222
K-28
Figure K-2. SOTIC Shooters Log (Continued)
FM 3-05.222
K-29
Figure K-2. SOTIC Shooters Log (Continued)
FM 3-05.222
K-30
Figure K-2. SOTIC Shooters Log (Continued)
FM 3-05.222
K-31
Figure K-2. SOTIC Shooters Log (Continued)
FM 3-05.222
K-32
Figure K-2. SOTIC Shooters Log (Continued)
FM 3-05.222
K-33
Figure K-2. SOTIC Shooters Log (Continued)
FM 3-05.222
K-34
Figure K-2. SOTIC Shooters Log (Continued)
FM 3-05.222
K-35
Figure K-2. SOTIC Shooters Log (Continued)
FM 3-05.222
K-36
Figure K-2. SOTIC Shooters Log (Continued)
FM 3-05.222
K-37
Figure K-2. SOTIC Shooters Log (Continued)
L-1
Appendix L
Tricks of the Trade
The art of sni pi ng requi res l earni ng, repeti ti ous practi ci ng, and the
masteri ng of speci fi c ski l l s. The sni per requi res speci al abi l i ti es,
trai ni ng, and equi pment. Hi s pri mary goal i s to del i ver hi ghl y
accurate ri fl e fi re agai nst enemy targets.
GOAL
L-1. To achi eve thi s goal and ensure mi ssi on success, the sni per shoul d
al ways remember the fol l owi ng:
For best resul ts, try to use a bul ky, l i ghtwei ght hooded smock i n
urban areas. Sel ect col ors for the smock that wi l l bl end wi th the
col ors and types of bui l di ng materi al s i n the area.
Avoi d movement dur i ng dayl i ght; i f movement i s necessar y,
keep movements sl ow and del i ber ate.
Duri ng movements through or occupati on of bui l di ng rooms, be
al ert to the pri nci pl es of camoufl age and conceal ment. Do not al l ow
bei ng i nsi de to l ul l you i nto a reduced awareness of the
surroundi ngs.
Stay i n shadows, match cl othi ng to bl end wi th the room or area,
hang bl ack sheets to el i mi nate backl i ghti ng agai nst openi ngs or
l i ght sources.
Dont be the onl y open wi ndow i n an ai r-condi ti oned bui l di ng. Use
exi sti ng curtai ns and l eave wi ndows i ntact. To make a shooti ng
hol e, remove one pane or smal l corner of the gl ass.
Move i nto the area wi th hel p from the host nati on.
Bl end i nto the acti vi ti es of the area; for exampl e, mai ntenance
crew, ci vi l i an cl othi ng, and ci vi l i an l uggage (gui tar cases wi l l
al ways l ook out of pl ace).
Tr y to car r y i n mor e equi pment and wor k wi th mul ti pl e teams
to cover the enti r e ar ea.
Choose a posi ti on (i f possi bl e) that i s natural l y i n a shadow; i f doi ng
so i s not possi bl e, make your own shadows by bui l di ng a cave wi th
dark cl oth.
Wear dark cl othi ng to match the background.
Stay back from the wi ndow.
Dont fl ag your weapon i n your l oophol e.
I f ti me al l ows, make crawl hol es from room to room.
Avoi d background l i ght, such as doors openi ng behi nd you.
FM 3-05.222

L-2
Be careful of neutral personnel ; handl e wi th care.
Check fi ri ng posi ti ons (rooftops) and ensure you
Stay bel ow peak l i ne as much as possi bl e.
Dont overhang barrel .
Put up some type of shade i f you are goi ng to be i n posi ti on a
l ong ti me.
Try to fi nd a posi ti on that has a background of some type.
Have the fol l owi ng equi pment and resources for urban operati ons:
Camera.
Communi cati ons equi pment (sni pers and command).
Food and water.
Spotti ng scope wi th stand.
Bi nocul ars.
Dark cl oth.
Roofi ng hammer wi th nai l s.
Tape.
Gl ass cutter.
Compl ete cl eani ng ki t.
Mul ti purpose kni fe.
Si l enced pi stol .
Notebook, penci l s, and tape recorder.
Sl eepi ng or shooti ng pad.
L-2. I n some cases, the team l eader appoi nts a hi gh-val ue target to
several sni pers and they cannot agree on the range (wi th associ ated scope
adjustments). I f thi s occurs, then each sni per pl aces the range data on hi s
tel escope accordi ng to hi s own best esti mate. The sni pers woul d then fi re
si mul taneousl y, thereby i ncreasi ng the chance of obtai ni ng a hi t.
L-3. When operati ng i n a deni ed area, i t i s someti mes appropri ate to use
an i ndi genous weapon and ammuni ti on. The evi dence l eft (casi ngs or
recovered bul l ets) woul d di sgui se the true i denti ty of the sni per and the
sponsor. Thi s pl anni ng consi derati on shoul d not be i nterpreted as
battl efi el d recovery.
L-4. The sni per must be aware of the ground beneath the muzzl e of hi s
ri fl e. Thi s poi nt i s cri ti cal when the ground i s sandy, dusty, or l oose soi l .
The sni per shoul d ei ther wet the area (uri nati ng wi l l save val uabl e
dri nki ng water) or cover wi th a sui tabl y si zed cl oth. I n damp condi ti ons
(earl y morni ng), the sni per shoul d be aware of the possi bi l i ty of the
exhaust smoke i ndi cati ng the posi ti on. An area wi th broken ground or
fol i age wi l l hel p conceal the smoke si gnature. Al so, the sni per shoul d be
aware of the muzzl e bl ast movi ng tal l grass and smal l pl ants, and
therefore, choose hi s posi ti on careful l y.
L-5. When i n a stati c posi ti on, i t i s wi se to bui l d the sni per hi de to
provi de a di recti on of fi re at an angl e to the front of the enemy. Thi s
method provi des cover and conceal ment, and the enemy hi t by the
sni pers fi re wi l l l ook to hi s front for the sni pers l ocati on.
L-6. I f the sni per suspects that hi s system has l ost i ts zero, and the
si tuati on al l ows si ghti ng shots, then he shoul d use sel f-marki ng targets
FM 3-05.222

L-3
that do not betray hi s di recti on of fi re. The sni per may use pool s of water,
cement wal l s, or l ayers of bri ck. He shoul d not use cans, boxes, or other
targets that can be used to si ght back on azi muth to hi s l ocati on.
L-7. The sni pers hi de shoul d be i n a l ocati on away from any obvi ous
target reference poi nts. I f i t l ooks l i ke an obvi ous posi ti on, i t i s.
L-8. When fi ri ng l ong ranges where the arc of the bul l et wi l l be hi gh, the
sni per shoul d al ways try to vi sual i ze the bul l ets arc before fi ri ng. Thi s
practi ce ensures that there wi l l be no obstacl es i n the path of the bul l et.
The sni per shoul d consi der thi s the mask and overhead cl earance of the
sni per ri fl e.
L-9. Sel ecti on of the fi nal fi ri ng poi nt i s cri ti cal to mi ssi on success. I f the
target i s expected to be movi ng, the sni per shoul d sel ect a posi ti on that
al l ows a shot at the target as i t moves toward or away from hi m. Rel ati ve
to the sni pers posi ti on, the target wi l l be a stati onary one and, therefore,
requi re a no-l ead hol d.
L-10. I f i t i s necessary to engage a uni t of enemy personnel , the sni per
shoul d engage the targets that are the greatest threat to hi m and hi s
teams survi val . I f thi s i s not a factor, he shoul d engage the targets
farthest away from hi m and not i n the front of the enemy formati on. I f he
hi ts the front-most targets fi rst, the remai nder of the uni t wi l l depl oy and
conduct fi re and movement to pi n the sni per down and engage hi m. By
el i mi nati ng the rear-most targets fi rst, the sni per buys hi msel f more ti me
as thei r numbers wi l l be decreased, possi bl y wi thout thei r knowl edge.
Thi s practi ce al so ensures the sni per the best possi bl e (l east suspecti ng)
targets.
L-11. The sni per and hi s weapon can be of gr eat hel p i n the
counter ambush i mmedi ate-acti on dr i l l . He shoul d l ook for tar get
i ndi cator s (muzzl e fl ash, di stur bed vegetati on, ejecti ng br ass) and use
a sear chi ng fi r e techni que. Thi s appr oach enabl es hi m to fi r e r ounds
appr oxi matel y ni ne i nches fr om the gr ound, ever y 6 i nches i nto the
suspected enemy l ocati on.
L-12. When a sni per and another teams sni per are deal i ng wi th
mul ti pl e targets, such as two hostage-takers, they must coordi nate to fi re
si mul taneousl y. Taki ng them out one at a ti me may al l ow the second
suspect ti me to harm the hostages. One techni que (i f sni pers are wi thi n
earshot or i n radi o contact wi th each other on a cl ear frequency) i s for
each of them to keep sayi ng al oud i n a steady, l ow voi ce,
wai t...wai t...wai t... as l ong as they do not have a cl ear shot. When they
do, they shoul d stay si l ent and l i sten for the moment they are both si l ent.
They shoul d al l ow a 1-second pause, then open fi re together. Another
techni que i s to establ i sh an audi bl e countdown and fi re on that number.
I n some cases, two sni pers are assi gned to engage a si ngl e suspect,
parti cul arl y i f he i s behi nd heavy gl ass and there i s fear that shots may
be defl ected. One opti on here i s for one sni per to ai m for hi s head and the
other for hi s chest and fi re si mul taneousl y.
L-13. I n a CBT si tuati on, hostage-takers have been known to swi tch
cl othes wi th the hostages. Thi s tri ck requi res the sni per to di sti ngui sh
FM 3-05.222

L-4
faci al features and pl ace top val ue on hi gher-powered spotti ng and ri fl e
scopes. I t can al so cause hi m to ri sk compromi se i f he deci des to move
cl oser to the target.
L-14. The posi ti on behi nd a l oophol e shoul d be darkened wi th a drape so
that the sni per i s not si l houetted and no l i ght comes through the l oophol e.
The sni per shoul d shut hi s l oophol es when anyone enters or exi ts the
hi de.
L-15. The observer can tel l i f the target i s hi t. The targets response i s
si mi l ar to that of bi g game. An ani mal that i s fi red at and mi ssed al ways
stands tense for a fracti on of a second before i t bounds away. When an
ani mal i s struck by the bul l et there i s no pause. I t bounds away at once
on the i mpact or fal l s. Thus, a stag shot through the heart commences hi s
death rush at once, to fal l dead wi thi n 50 yards, whereas a stag mi ssed
gi ves that tel l tal e sudden start. I f a human i s hi t, he fal l s forward or
appears to crumpl e l i ke a rag dol l . Conti nued acti vi ty or fal l i ng to the si de
i ndi cates a superfi ci al hi t.
L-16. Speed i s i mportant. The sni per shoul d practi ce for an ai med shot
i n 2 seconds or l ess.
L-17. The sni per shoul d use armor-pi erci ng rounds for anti materi al
mi ssi ons to take out the weapon, not the crew. The crew i s easi er to
repl ace.
L-18. Short of opti cal or l aser range fi nders and i n an offensi ve rol e, the
mi l -rel ati on formul a (mortar-crew mi l system) wi l l hel p the sni per
determi ne accurate range. I n the defensi ve rol e, the surest method of
determi ni ng preci se range i s by tri angul ati on.
M-1
Appendix M
Sniper Team Debriefing Format
After the mi ssi on, the sni per empl oyment offi cer or S-3 representati ve
di rects the sni per team to an area where i t prepares for a debri efi ng. The
team remai ns i n the area unti l cal l ed to the operati ons center.
SNIPER TEAM FUNCTIONS
M-1. The sni per team wi l l
Lay out and account for al l team and i ndi vi dual equi pment.
Consol i date al l captured materi al and equi pment.
Revi ew and di scuss the events l i sted i n the mi ssi on l ogbook from
i nserti on to return, i ncl udi ng detai l s of each enemy si ghti ng.
Prepare an overl ay of the teams route, AO, i nserti on poi nt, extracti on
poi nt, and si gni fi cant si ghti ng l ocati ons.
S-3 FUNCTIONS
M-2. An S-3 representati ve control s the debri efi ng. He di rects the team
l eader to
Di scuss any enemy si ghti ngs si nce the l ast communi cati ons wi th the
radi o base stati on.
Gi ve a step-by-step account of each event l i sted i n the mi ssi on l ogbook
from i nserti on unti l reentry of the FLOT, i ncl udi ng the detai l s of al l
enemy si ghti ngs.
Compl ete a mi ssi on report (Fi gure M-1, pages M-2 and M-3) and draw
an overl ay as di scussed. The team l eader ei ther compl etes the report or
has the observer compl ete di fferent secti ons. The team l eader then
returns the report and overl ay to the S-3 representati ve, whi l e the
observer performs postmi ssi on mai ntenance tasks.
M-3. When the debri efi ng i s compl ete, the S-3 representati ve rel eases the
sni per team back to i ts parent uni t.
FM 3-05.222

M-2

Team Number _____ Date-Ti me Group (DTG): ______
To _______________
Maps Used: 1:25,000: __________________________________________________________________
1:50,000: _____________________________________________________________________________
1:250,000: ____________________________________________________________________________
Speci al : ______________________________________________________________________________
A. Si ze and Composi ti on of Team: ______________________________________________________
Team Leader : ________________
Observer: ____________________
B. Mi ssi on: __________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
C. Pri ori ty I ntel l i gence Requi rements (PI R) (Use attached sheet):
D. Conti nui ng I ntel l i gence Requi rements (CI Rs) (Use attached sheet):
E. Ti me of Departure (DTG):
Method of I nserti on: _______________________________________________________________
Poi nt of Departure (Si x-di gi t gri d coordi nates): _______________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
F. Enemy Spotti ng En Route (Use attached sheet, i f needed):
1. Gr ound Acti vi ty: ________________________________________________________________
2. Ai r Acti vi ty: ____________________________________________________________________
3. Mi scel l aneous Acti vi ty: __________________________________________________________
G. Routes (Out) (Provi de overl ay): Di smounted
By Foot: __________________________________________________________________________
By Vehi cl e (State type): ____________________________________________________________
By Ai rcraft (State type): ____________________________________________________________
H. Terrai n (Use attached sheet i n the fol l owi ng format):
Key Terrai n Terrai n Compartment
Si gni fi cant Terrai n Terrai n Corri dor
Deci si ve Terrai n Map Correcti ons
Avenues of Approach (State si ze)
I . Enemy Forces and I nstal l ati ons (Use attached sheet):
Figure M-1. Sample Mission Report for Debriefing

FM 3-05.222

M-3
J. Mi scel l aneous I nformati on (Use attached sheet, i f necessary):
1. Lack of Ani mal s or Strange Ani mal Behavi or: _____________________________________
2. Muti l ated Pl ants: ______________________________________________________________
3. Uncommon I nsects: _____________________________________________________________
4. Abandoned Mi l i tary Equi pment (Check for and i ncl ude number and type):
a. Out of Fuel : _________________________________________________________________
b. Unservi ceabl e (Esti mate why): ________________________________________________
c. Destroyed or Damaged on Purpose by Enemy Forces: ___________________________
d. Operati onal Equi pment Left I ntact: ___________________________________________
5. Abandoned Towns/Vi l l ages: _____________________________________________________
K. Resul ts of Encounters wi th Enemy Force and Local Popul ace:__________________________
L. Condi ti on of Team, I ncl udi ng Di sposi ti on of Dead and Wounded: ______________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
M. Al l Maps Returned or Any Other I denti fi abl e Materi al Returned wi th Team:
Yes; No; What I s Mi ssi ng?; State I tem and Where Approxi matel y Lost: _________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
N. Concl usi ons and Recommendati ons: ________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
O. Captured Enemy Equi pment and Materi al : __________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
P. Ti me of Extracti on (DTG): _________________________________________________________
Method of Extracti on: _____________________________________________________________
Extracti on Poi nt (Si x-di gi t gri d coordi nates): ________________________________________
Q. Routes (Back) (Pr ovi de over l ay): ____________________________________________________
1. Di smounted by Ground (E&E): __________________________________________________
2. Fl i ght Route Back: _____________________________________________________________
R. Enemy Spotti ng En Route to Base (Use attached sheet, i f needed):
1. Gr ound Acti vi ty: _______________________________________________________________
2. Ai r Acti vi ty: ___________________________________________________________________
3. Mi scel l aneous Acti vi ty: _________________________________________________________
S. Ti me of Return (DTG): ____________________________________________________________
Poi nt of Return (Si x-di gi t gri d coordi nates): _________________________________________
Team Leader : _____________________________________________________________________
(Pri nt Name) (Grade)
____________________________________________________________________
(Uni t) (Si gnature)
Addi ti onal Remarks by I nterrogator/Debri efer : __________________________________________

Figure M-1. Sample Mission Report for Debriefing (Continued)
N-1
Appendix N
Sniper Range Complex
Sni per trai ni ng requi res cl osel y l ocated ranges desi gned for conducti ng
i ni ti al or sustai nment trai ni ng programs. I ndi vi dual ranges shoul d al l ow
the sni per to trai n and test i n fi el d fi re, observati on, range esti mati on,
and stal ki ng exerci ses. Li ve-fi re ranges shoul d be grouped together to
reduce constructi on costs and l and use by combi ni ng surface danger
areas. Setti ng targets, scori ng, and cri ti qui ng students requi res movi ng
up and down range whi l e adjacent ranges are bei ng used. Areas for
trai ni ng fi el dcraft and other exerci ses shoul d be cl ose enough to mai ntai n
trai ni ng tempo but not i nterfere wi th ongoi ng l i ve-fi re exerci ses. Ranges
shoul d al so be sel f-sustai ni ng, to i ncl ude i ntegrated admi ni strati ve,
cl assroom, and storage structures. Fi gures N-1 through N-3, pages N-2
and N-3, show a recommended sni per range devel opment pl an.
Figure N-1. Sniper Range Complex
FM 3-05.222
N-2
Figure N-2. Proposed KD Ranges
FM 3-05.222

N-3
Figure N-3. SOTIC Compound


O-1
Appendix O
Aerial Platforms
Sni per teams on todays modern battl efi el d may occasi onal l y fi nd that
stayi ng on the ground to conduct thei r mi ssi on i s not feasi bl e or tacti cal l y
sound. Mi ssi on anal ysi s may determi ne that the aeri al pl atform i s the most
tacti cal l y advantageous method of empl oyment. SOF el ements, i n
conjuncti on wi th avi ati on assets, are cal l ed upon to conduct ai rborne sni per
duti es i n support of ai rmobi l e qui ck reacti on force (QRF) operati ons. These
el ements provi de the ground commander wi th accurate l ethal ai rborne fi re
support. To accompl i sh thei r mi ssi on, sni pers must be hi ghl y ski l l ed i n the
art of aeri al mi ssi on pl anni ng. Thi s appendi x provi des i nformati on that wi l l
al l ow uni ts to trai n and mai ntai n SOF profi ci ency i n ai rborne sni per
duti es. Thi s trai ni ng wi l l enabl e sni pers to provi de i mmedi ate, safe,
accurate, and l ethal fi res i n support of the ground commander duri ng QRF
conti ngency operati ons.
Safety consi derati ons are paramount and appl y to al l fri endl y forces and
ai rcraft (A/C). Cri ti cal to thi s operati onal capabi l i ty i s the abi l i ty to
mi ni mi ze col l ateral damage to ci vi l i an noncombatants and property. The
mai n effort i s to maxi mi ze the sni pers abi l i ty to sel ecti vel y engage and
neutral i ze hi gh-val ue poi nt targets from vari ous angl es (el evati ons) at
ranges of up to 250 meters, and to suppress area targets at ranges of up
to 400 meters. The end state wi l l be SOF sni pers and avi ati on assets
trai ned and profi ci ent i n the pl anni ng, preparati on, and conduct of safe
ai rborne sni per operati ons.
MISSION PLANNING REQUIREMENTS
O-1. Duri ng mi ssi on anal ysi s, sni pers must determi ne i f condi ti ons requi re
the use of an aeri al pl atform. Si tuati ons requi ri ng aeri al sni per support
usual l y ari se duri ng urban or mari ti me (for exampl e, vi si t, board, search, and
sei zure [VBSS]) operati ons. Pl anners must conduct a thorough mi ssi on
anal ysi s so as not to rul e out the possi bi l i ty of usi ng hel i copters as a fi ri ng
pl atform duri ng routi ne SF trai ni ng and operati ons. Sni pers must al so be
abl e to arti cul ate the addi ti onal requi rements for fi ri ng from vari ous rotary-
wi ng A/C, communi cati ons (COMM) wi th the pi l ot, COMM wi th other
members of the team, and COMM wi th ground forces.
O-2. The fi rst pl anni ng requi rement for usi ng aeri al pl atforms i s to
determi ne the commanders i ntent and whether or not there wi l l be
hel i copters avai l abl e for use by the sni pers. I f the commanders i ntent i s to
conduct a del i berate assaul t, then hel i copters may not be the pl atform of
choi ce due to the possi bi l i ty of l oss of surpri se, whi ch i s paramount duri ng a
FM 3-05.222
O-2
del i berate assaul t opti on. The next step i s to l ook at the capabi l i ti es of the
gi ven A/C and what i s to be accompl i shed duri ng the mi ssi on.
O-3. Each mi ssi on objecti ve has speci fi c requi rements that must be met to
succeed. Therefore, pl anners must anal yze uni t capabi l i ti es and determi ne
whi ch COAs wi l l meet these requi rements. Factors to be consi dered i ncl ude
Di stance from FOB to cri si s area.
Ti me on stati on (fuel requi rements).
Number of A/C requi red to support sni pers and assaul ters (can A/C do
doubl e duty?).
Can the assaul t force endure l apses i n coverage, or do they requi re
conti nuous coverage?
Weather.
Ni ght-fl yi ng capabi l i ty of supporti ng A/C.
A/C crew fami l i ari ty wi th support of SOF-type mi ssi ons.
A/C crew fami l i ari ty wi th support of aeri al -pl atform mi ssi ons.
Make-up of enemy forces expected i n cri si s area.
Weapons capabi l i ti es of expected enemy forces.
CSAR capabi l i ti es i n case of downed A/C i n cri si s area.
A/C type (will it support the weapons and weapons support to be used?).
O-4. I f a mi ssi on requi res an aeri al pl atform wi th the capabi l i ty to provi de
preci si on fi re be present duri ng al l phases of the operati on, then the number
of A/C versus the number of avai l abl e sni pers must be consi dered. Loi ter ti me
for any gi ven A/C wi l l have a major i nfl uence on thi s aspect. Ul ti matel y, the
restrai nts of the A/C wi l l di ctate how a mi ssi on i s accompl i shed.
O-5. The aeri al mi ssi on pl anni ng requi rements can easi l y be defi ned usi ng
the fol l owi ng fi ve Ws:
Whoi s fl yi ng the mi ssi on and who i s the sni per team?
Whattype of mi ssi on i s to be executed (assaul t, SFAUC) and what
type of A/C i s to be used?
Wheni s the mi ssi on to be fl own and when are rehearsal s?
Wherei s the mi ssi on to be fl own (urban or rural )?
Whyi s the uni t conducti ng the mi ssi on and what are the desi red
resul ts?
O-6. The uni t l eader then puts thi s i nformati on i nto a fi ve-paragraph
operati ons order format and bri efs i t as an annex duri ng the sni per bri efback.
SUPPORT OF GROUND SNIPERS AND GROUND ASSETS
O-7. When supporti ng ground-based sni pers, the aeri al pl atform can act as
an observati on post rel ati ng posi ti ons of both fri endl y and enemy forces, a
bl ocki ng posi ti on to sl ow ei ther the advance or retreat of enemy personnel , a
preci si on fi ri ng pl atform to reduce poi nt- or crew-served targets encountered
by the assaul t force, and ul ti matel y as an evacuati on vehi cl e for assaul t force
members wounded duri ng the operati on and the i tems recovered. I n an urban
FM 3-05.222
O-3
envi ronment, the aeri al pl atform can act as a crowd deterrent agai nst
noncombatants who may be massi ng for demonstrati ons agai nst current or
ongoi ng operati ons, such as rotor downwash from a l ow-hoveri ng A/C. I f
extended operati ons are a possi bi l i ty or heavy fi ghti ng i s encountered, the
aeri al pl atform can act as an on-cal l resuppl y asset i f suppl i es are pre-
posi ti oned i nsi de before takeoff.
O-8. Duri ng a VBSS, the aeri al pl atform becomes the pri mary shooti ng
pl atform and evacuati on vehi cl e for the assaul t force due to the di stance from
l and that the operati on may be taki ng pl ace. Sni pers can orbi t the shi p that i s
boarded and provi de coveri ng fi re for the assaul t force whi l e they are on the
weather deck and engage targets of opportuni ty that may appear from wi thi n
the shi p whi l e the assaul t force i s cl eari ng the i nteri or of the vessel . The
aeri al pl atform may al so act as a COMM l i nk to the FOB duri ng the
operati on due to the reduced COMM capabi l i ty caused by the metal hul l of
the shi p.
O-9. I t i s i mportant to remember that hel i copters have thei r own gun
systems. These i ncl ude M-60 and M-240 machi neguns and M-134 mi ni guns.
Al though normal l y used i n the defensi ve rol e, they are equal l y effecti ve when
used offensi vel y. Sni pers and ai r safety offi cers (ASOs) must be prepared to
desi gnate targets for the ai rcrew. Thi s method al l ows the sni per team to use
an area engagement weapon wi th a hi gh vol ume of fi re to suppress targets
beyond the capabi l i ti es of the sni pers preci si on weapons fi re. Sni pers must
al so fami l i ari ze themsel ves wi th the functi oni ng of the A/Cs weapons systems
and be prepared to take over thei r operati on i f requi red. Vari ati ons i n the
confi gurati ons of the weapons when modi fi ed for A/C use means operator
trai ni ng i s requi red. Thi s trai ni ng i s especi al l y i mportant when usi ng the
M-134.
URBAN OPERATIONS
O-10. A del i berate urban assaul t or mi ssi ons requi ri ng the use of SFAUC
techni ques are two si tuati ons that may requi re the use of hel i borne sni pers.
I n ei ther of the fol l owi ng scenari os, aeri al pl atforms are a hi ghl y effecti ve
way to provi de SOF sni pers and thei r supported assaul t force wi th an
advantage.
Urban Assault
O-11. Condi ti ons surroundi ng the use of aeri al pl atforms i n urban
operati ons must be exami ned careful l y. Al though hel i copters are common i n
many ci ti es, fl i ght routes i nto the objecti ve area may not coi nci de wi th normal
aeri al traffi c patterns. Thi s acti on may al ert the adversary to an i mpendi ng
assaul t. Establ i shi ng fl i ght corri dors and conducti ng fl ybys wi th
nonthreateni ng ci vi l i an hel i copters duri ng the preassaul t phase may cause
the enemy to become used to the i dea of hel i copters i n the area. However,
unusual aeri al traffi c patterns can al so arouse suspi ci on and may l ead to a
premature compromi se of the operati on. Usi ng hel i copters as a di versi on
duri ng the assaul t may al so be a possi bi l i ty.
O-12. Anyti me a hel i copter i s bei ng consi dered for use as a fi ri ng pl atform,
careful attenti on must be pl aced on the type of fi re i t wi l l be requi red to
provi de. Wherever possi bl e, the mi ssi on to provi de preci si on fi re shoul d not
FM 3-05.222
O-4
be rel egated sol el y to an aeri al pl atform. The l ess stabl e posi ti on provi ded by
an aeri al pl atform as compared to a ground-based posi ti on makes i t more
di ffi cul t to accompl i sh the sni per mi ssi on. Careful consi derati on must al so be
gi ven to enemy standoff (for exampl e, RPGs) and ADA capabi l i ti es.
SF Advanced Urban Combat
O-13. I n thi s scenari o, the aeri al pl atform wi l l most l i kel y be used i n
support of the SOF mi ssi on. Unl i ke the del i berate urban assaul t, where the
l ocati on of the cri si s si te and possi bl y even the cri si s poi nt i s known, thi s
operati on fi nds the assaul t force movi ng through an urban envi ronment
ei ther l ooki ng for the i tems that they must recover or, after havi ng recovered
the i tems, encounteri ng an enemy force that i s hi nderi ng thei r evacuati on of
the cri si s area.
AERIAL PLATFORM TRAINING
O-14. Ai rborne sni per trai ni ng wi l l be conducted i n fi ve phases. A detai l ed
di scussi on of each phase fol l ows.
Phase IPlanning
O-15. Pl anni ng consi sts of coordi nati on and deconfl i cti on between SOF,
range control (for trai ni ng operati ons), and avi ati on assets. A major poi nt for
deconfl i cti on, especi al l y for trai ni ng, i s obtai ni ng the necessary wai vers to
remove seats and seatbel ts from the A/C. When usi ng a UH-60 hel i copter, i t
i s possi bl e to l eave the four rear seats and one forward-faci ng center seat
wi thout l osi ng any capabi l i ti es except troop transport. To remove al l seats
requi res greater pl anni ng ti me to obtai n a wai ver to remove seats. Dependi ng
on the avi ati on uni t and A/C type, a wai ver may be requi red to remove
sel ected seats to opti mi ze ri ggi ng confi gurati on. The amount of ti me
necessary to effect a seat-removal wai ver depends on the permi ssi on
authori ty l evel .
O-16. Normal l y, several coordi nati on meeti ngs are necessary and a good
projected pl anni ng ti me i s 2 to 3 weeks i n advance. Al l resources must be
consi dered, to i ncl ude avai l abl e avi ati on assets, sni per ammuni ti on, door
gunner ammuni ti on, transportati on, range schedul i ng, targets, bal l i sti c
bl ankets, ri ggi ng materi al s, harnesses, and ongoi ng operati ons. Once trai ned,
pl anni ng for a mi ssi on can take pl ace i n a matter of hours. Phase I ends after
fi nal coordi nati on i s compl ete.
Phase IIPreparation
O-17. Premi ssi on preparati on consi sts of obtai ni ng targets and ammuni ti on,
range and target preparati on, A/C ri ggi ng, ai rcrew bri ef, range safety bri ef,
range operati on bri ef, and rehearsal s (Fi gure O-1, page O-5 through O-7).
Sni per personnel wi l l be organi zed i nto l i fts. The range safety offi cer (RSO)
wi l l desi gnate one i ndi vi dual as the ASO for each l i ft. The desi gnated ASO
wi l l be ASO for the l i ft fol l owi ng hi s sni per l i ft, thus stayi ng on the A/C after
fi ri ng and bei ng i mmedi atel y knowl edgeabl e of requi rements. The range
NCOI C wi l l bri ef ASOs, sni pers, and range personnel on the ground of thei r
duti es; the NCOI C i s al so i n charge of conduct of the range. Assi stant range
NCOI C wi l l i ssue gui dance to ground personnel and prepare targets and
FM 3-05.222
O-5
ammuni ti on. The A/C commander wi l l recei ve a copy of the fl i ght mani fest
from the range NCOI C. Phase I I ends after fi nal rehearsal s and upon mutual
agreement between A/C commander, range OI C, and RSO that al l
requi rements have been met to ensure safe trai ni ng.
Roll Call/Introductions
Senior sniper.
Sniper team leaders and observers.
Pilot (each A/C).
Co-pilot (each A/C).
Crew chiefs.
Questions to Aircrew
Type of A/C available.
Number of A/C available.
Time and location of crew brief.
Number of packs that can be carried (sniper team/equipment plus ground
force/equipment).
Time to target area.
Time over target area.
General Information
Type of operation.
Safety instructions.
Primary radio frequency (A/C to ground force C2, A/C to FOB).
Alternate radio frequencies.
A/C call signs.
Ground force C2 call sign.
Target area description (in general from the air).
Marking SOP for FLOT of ground force.
Known obstacles in area to A/C.
Coordination Data
Time and location of rehearsals.
Time A/C available for rigging (sniper teams must also tell aircrew approximate time to rig
A/C).
Approximate takeoff time.
Initial ingress speed.
Direction of ingress (given in relation to target area, such as from west over building #1).
Figure O-1. Sample Pilot and Sniper Team Air Brief or Pilots Brief

FM 3-05.222
O-6
Initial altitude on ingress.
Initial distance from primary target (initial target to be engaged by sniper team).
Sectors of responsibility (if more than one A/C is used).
Initial direction of racetrack (clockwise, counterclockwise).
Preferred location in A/C for primary shooter.
Scheme of Maneuver: A Brief Overview of Operation
Clearance to engage.
Infiltration of ground force (if required).
Race track (time to complete).
Location of targets.
Position of A/C to primary target.
Close on target.
Engagement of secondary targets (or targets of opportunity).
Turnover time (if refueling is needed or exfiltration of wounded before mission
accomplishment).
Maximum time on target.
Exfiltration of ground force or PC.
Operational Information
Number of passengers on each A/C (to include aircrew and sniper teams).
Number of snipers per A/C.
Location of snipers.
Type of weapons to be employed.
Location of ammunition in A/C.
Location of senior sniper (by A/C call sign; or if he is on the ground, a senior sniper will
need to be designated for control of aerial platform snipers).
Type and Number of Equipment Needed: Equipment Requirements to Be Provided
by Aircrew
ICS.
Gunners belts.
Head sets.
Floatation devices (if over water).
Sequence of Events
Rig A/C.
Inspect rig (primary sniper rigs, observer inspects).
Rehearsal positions.
Figure O-1. Sample Pilot and Sniper Team Air Brief or Pilots Brief (Continued)
FM 3-05.222
O-7
COMM check (radios and intercom systems).
Senior sniper demonstrates hand-and-arm signals for the following:
Time to target (10 minutes, 5 minutes, 2 minutes, and 30 seconds).
Clear to load and make ready.
Cleared hot.
Cease fire.
Observe and look.
Make safe.
No COMM.
Rest easy.
Slide (commands given to helicopter: forward, aft, right, and left).
Nose (right, left).
Tail (right, left).
Hover.
Altitude (increase, decrease).
Open distance to target.
Close distance to target.
Abort engagement.
Emergency Procedures
A/C problem (snipers will take all commands from aircrew).
Loss of COMM.
Weapons malfunction.
Aid to injured persons while in flight.
Emergency exit procedures.
Figure O-1. Sample Pilot and Sniper Team Air Brief or Pilots Brief (Continued)
Phase IIIRange Fire
O-18. RSO and A/C crew chi ef ensure A/C i s ri gged properl y and al l
personnel are both seated wi th seat bel ts fastened (requi red for takeoff and
l andi ng) and secured i n the A/C usi ng RSO-approved harnesses and l ocki ng
carabi ners. Sni per equi pment and gear wi l l be secured i n the A/C usi ng
secure qui ck-rel ease equi pment (such as carabi ners or fastex buckl es as
appropri ate). After recei vi ng approval from RSO, A/C l i fts and trai ni ng
commences. Sni pers remove seat bel ts and assume thei r shooti ng posi ti ons on
command from the ASO. Upon recei pt of CLEAR TO FI RE command from
RSO, the A/C commander gi ves the WEAPONS FREE command to the ASO.
The ASO then gi ves the sni per approval to fi re at desi gnated targets, and
ensures the sni per adheres to al l safety consi derati ons. I f COMM l i nk
between sni per and pi l ot i s not avai l abl e, commands rel ati ng to A/C atti tude
and al ti tude wi l l be rel ayed vi a hand-and-arm si gnal s through the ASO (see
FM 3-05.222
O-8
COMM secti on bel ow). Anyone, at any ti me, i s authori zed to cal l CEASE FI RE
i f an unsafe act i s observed. On order from the ASO, sni per changeout wi l l
occur whi l e ai rborne between passes. He noti fi es the A/C commander and
ensures personnel remai n secured i n the A/C wi th a safety harness at al l
ti mes. When changi ng out l i fts, the RSO wi l l cal l CEASE FI RE and noti fy the
A/C commander when CLEAR TO LAND. Li fts wi l l l oad the A/C upon
noti fi cati on of the crew chi ef, and the procedure i s repeated. To maxi mi ze
val uabl e l i mi ted ai rborne trai ni ng ti me, changeouts must be safel y and
swi ftl y executed. Phase I I I concl udes at the fi nal cease-fi re. I f possi bl e, the
A/C wi l l l and and personnel wi l l parti ci pate i n the after-acti on revi ew (AAR)
i mmedi atel y fol l owi ng trai ni ng to capture ai rcrew perspecti ve, i deas, and
techni ques whi l e fresh.
Phase IVAfter-Action Review
O-19. An i mmedi ate AAR i s conducted wi th al l parti ci pants to conti nue to
refi ne TTPs, address rel evant poi nts, and capture l essons l earned. The range
OI C admi ni sters the AAR wi th suggesti ons from seni or sni pers. The AAR
spans Phase I through Phase I I I , and Phase I V i s compl ete when the AAR i s
fi ni shed.
Phase VRecovery
O-20. Recovery consi sts of accountabi l i ty, range pol i ce, cl eari ng the range,
and weapons cl eani ng. Recovery i s compl ete as per detachment SOP, range
NCOI C gui dance, and per approval from each el ement commander.
COMMUNICATIONS
O-21. Communi cati ons wi l l be one of the most compl ex aspects of an aeri al
mi ssi on. Radi o nets duri ng standard SOF mi ssi ons can become extremel y
crowded. Addi ng one or more A/C to the equati on must be careful l y thought
out. Communi cati ons requi rements wi l l need to be met by the sni per TOC i n
coordi nati on wi th the company COMM secti on. Compati bi l i ty of equi pment
and communi cati ons securi ty (COMSEC) i tems must be consi dered, then
radi o nets and pri ori ti es of use must be coordi nated. Ei ther C-E or the
company COMM secti on wi l l provi de any addi ti onal radi os that may be
requi red. The company COMM secti on wi l l ensure the ai rcrew i s ful l y bri efed
as to the needs of the sni per team. The sni per commander wi l l recei ve the
COMM pl an duri ng the sni per bri ef so that any confl i cts can be corrected
before the bri ef to the ground force commander and the start of rehearsal s.
Pri mary responsi bi l i ty for provi di ng cryptographi cs needed by the A/C wi l l
fal l to the sni per TOC radi o operator i n conjuncti on wi th the company COMM
secti on. The aeri al sni per team observer (before the fi rst rehearsal ) wi l l veri fy
the COMM pl an wi th a compl ete COMM check.
Special Communications Requirements
O-22. Any COMM pl an must i ncl ude provi si ons for pri mary, al ternate,
conti ngency, and emergency COMM methods. I t must provi de COMM
systems for the fol l owi ng requi rements:
Ground to ai r and ai r to ground.
Ground to ground.
FM 3-05.222
O-9
Requesti ng DUSTOFF and aeri al MEDEVAC.
Sni per to ground commander and ground commander to sni per.
O-23. The fol l owi ng radi o nets, ei ther sol e-use or shared, must be provi ded
for:
A/C to A/C (i f mul ti pl e A/C are used).
A/C to ground force C2.
A/C sni per team to pi l ot (can be accompl i shed usi ng I CS).
A/C sni per team to ground force C2.
A/C sni per team to ground-based sni per teams.
A/C to FOB.
A/C sni per team to FOB (can be accompl i shed by usi ng A/C to FOB net
vi a I CS rel ay).
O-24. Commands and verbi age from sni per or ASO to pi l ot can ori gi nate
from ei ther dependi ng on COMM capabi l i ti es; for exampl e, COMM hel mets.
The pri mary means of COMM between the sni per team and the ai rcrew
shoul d be di rect COMM. The ai rcrew COMM hel met wi th two COMM feeds
wi l l normal l y sati sfy thi s requi rement. These hel mets are sti l l new and thei r
i ssue to U.S. Army SF uni ts i s currentl y l i mi ted. A substi tute that wi l l meet
thi s need can be fabri cated usi ng repai r parts obtai ned from an el ectroni c
mai ntenance shop. The push-to-tal k button i s ergonomi cal l y l ocated usi ng a
hook-and-l oop fastener to al l ow the sni per to communi cate di rectl y wi th
ei ther the pi l ot or the ground commander. The basi s for thi s fabri cati on can
be a U.S. Navy crewman hel met or a U.S. Army combat vehi cl e crewman
hel met. These hel mets are recommended because thei r shape does not
i nterfere wi th the sni pers cheek-to-stock wel d.
O-25. The al ternate COMM pl an i s more i ndi rect and, unfortunatel y, l ess
responsi ve. The ASO recei ves targeti ng i nformati on from the ground
commander vi a headset and organi c A/C radi os. The ASO then desi gnates
targets for the sni per di rectl y usi ng a target desi gnator (for exampl e, l aser
i l l umi nator) or i ndi rectl y usi ng reference poi nts or the cl ock-ray method. The
sni per gi ves the ASO hand-and-arm si gnal s to adjust the atti tude of the A/C
so that he can engage the target. The ASO rel ays these commands to the
pi l ot.
Hand-and-Arm Signals From the Sniper to the Air Safety Officer
NOTE: Most pi l ots prefer to recei ve the commands i n a countdown gi ven i n
feet. An exampl e i s UP 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5
O-26. The fol l owi ng are fai rl y standard commands and are mostl y sel f-
expl anatory. The commands most confused are TAI L LEFT and TAI L RI GHT,
and are used to pi vot the A/C. Pi l ots normal l y thi nk about the atti tude of the
A/C i n terms of movi ng the tai l because that i s how thei r control s operate. A
TAI L LEFT command moves the nose of the A/C to the ri ght, and vi ce versa.
UP. Sni per uses thumb poi nti ng up wi th remai ni ng fi ngers cl osed
(standard thumbs-up si gnal ). Sni per wi l l normal l y gi ve thi s command
once, and ASO wi l l make a determi nati on on hei ght and rel ay thi s to
FM 3-05.222
O-10
the pi l ot. Sni per can hal t the A/C by gi vi ng the command HOVER, or
gi ve the command UP to gai n more al ti tude.
DOWN. Sni per uses thumb poi nti ng down wi th remai ni ng fi ngers
cl osed (standard thumbs-down si gnal ). Sni per wi l l normal l y gi ve thi s
command once, and ASO wi l l make a determi nati on on hei ght and
rel ay thi s to the pi l ot. Sni per can hal t the A/C by gi vi ng the command
HOVER, or the command DOWN to l ose more al ti tude.
HOVER. Sni per cl enches hi s fi st i n the standard FREEZE command.
Thi s command can be used at any ti me to hal t the movement of the
A/C. ASO rel ays to the pi l ot.
SLI DE LEFT or SLI DE RI GHT. Techni que 1Sni per opens pal m,
fi ngers and thumb extended and joi ned, and makes a pushi ng moti on
to the l eft or to the ri ght. Techni que 2Sni per extends i ndex fi nger
from a cl enched fi st and poi nts l eft or ri ght. Ei ther techni que may be
used as l ong as the sni per and ASO have coordi nated beforehand. The
ASO rel ays command to the pi l ot.
FLY FORWARD or FLY BACKWARD. Sni per extends i ndex fi nger from a
cl enched fi st and poi nts forward or backward. The ASO rel ays thi s to
the pi l ot.
PI VOT LEFT or PI VOT RI GHT. Sni per, wi th fi ngers and thumb
extended and joi ned, pal m sl i ghtl y down i n the most natural and
comfortabl e posi ti on, poi nts ei ther l eft or ri ght i n the di recti on he
wi shes the A/C to turn. Sni per normal l y uses the hover command to
stop the A/Cs turn. ASO rel ays thi s to the pi l ot.
AERIAL SNIPER EMPLOYMENT
O-27. I nherent to effecti ve sni per marksmanshi p from ai rborne pl atforms i s
to accuratel y engage targets at rapi dl y changi ng ranges and angl es, whi l e
movi ng, and sti l l mai ntai n muzzl e and si tuati onal awareness. However,
numerous methods can be used si nce the ranges and angl es change so rapi dl y
and normal sni per rangi ng procedures are i neffecti ve. When shooti ng at an
angl e, the round stri kes hi gher than normal ; the greater the angl e, the hi gher
i t wi l l stri ke. An effecti ve techni que at 200 meters (m) or bel ow (not the onl y
techni que) i s to zero the ri fl e or set the comeups at ei ther 175 m or 200 m and
ai m (or hol d off) for the actual range to target. At ranges greater than 200 m,
sni per experi ence comes i nto pl ay and hol d-offs become cri ti cal . There i s no
secret reci pe for doi ng thi s, and because ranges and angl es change rapi dl y,
changi ng scope setti ngs whi l e shooti ng i s not recommended. Conducti ng
unknown di stance angl e shooti ng (for exampl e, i n mountai nous terrai n) usi ng
i nsti ncti ve rangi ng techni ques i s good trai ni ng to offset these factors. Al so
knowi ng the vari ous hol d-offs for set zeros (for exampl e, 300, 400, and 500)
wi l l al l ow for a si ngl e el evati on change to accommodate further ranges. As an
exampl e, a shi ft to the 400-meter setti ng may permi t engagement out 500
meters usi ng stated mi l -hol ds for that zero.
O-28. Target i denti fi cati on or sel ecti on can be conducted i n two basi c
manners, dependi ng on the type of COMM avai l abl e to the sni per. I f the
sni per i s equi pped wi th a hel met that has i ntegrated COMM l i nks, the
ground commander can tal k di rectl y to the sni per and i denti fy targets. I f
FM 3-05.222
O-11
hel met COMM i s not an opti on, then the ASO can act as the spotter. I f the
ASO acts as the spotter, i t i s recommended that he use l ow magni fi cati on,
wi de-angl e bi nocul ars duri ng the day for the wi dest fi el d-of-vi ew possi bl e. At
ni ght, the choi ce of opti cs i s I AW personal preference and avai l abi l i ty. The
ASO wi l l recei ve target i denti fi cati on and report i t to the sni per, essenti al l y
just poi nti ng the target out. Thi s method requi res practi ce between the sni per
and the ASO to establ i sh the nonverbal sni per di al ogue necessary due to
the hi gh background noi se present when conducti ng ai rborne operati ons. I t
can be practi ced on the ground to maxi mi ze trai ni ng conducted i n the ai r.
O-29. Ai rborne sni pers essenti al l y have three di fferent posi ti ons to fi re
from, regardl ess of weapon or A/C type. The prone posi ti on can be used, but
hel i copter vi brati ons are transmi tted di rectl y to the gun vi a ei ther the bi pod
or the el bow and arm i f usi ng a sl i ng-supported posi ti on. The fl oor-seated
posi ti on, i n conjuncti on wi th the ri fl e sl i ng support, i s probabl y the best
posi ti on. I t al l ows for both el bows to be supported on the i nsi de of the knees,
whi ch hel ps the l egs to act as shock absorbers el i mi nati ng the majori ty of the
vi brati on. Thi s posi ti on al so affords very good fi el ds of fi re wi thout pl aci ng
the sni per i n an awkward posi ti on that woul d sacri fi ce accuracy.
A vari ati on of the seated posi ti on that works wel l for tal l er sni pers onboard
UH-60 A/C i s to remai n i n one of the forward faci ng rear seats adjacent to the
door and use the ri fl e sl i ng-supported si tti ng posi ti on.
O-30. Vari ati ons to the seated posi ti on i ncl ude usi ng shooti ng mats fol ded
and taped i nto posi ti on on the hel i copter seat. Use of the crew door i n the
H-60-seri es hel i copters ai ds greatl y i n acqui ri ng targets and accuracy of the
sni per. Other posi ti on ai ds are rucksacks, wi th a parti al l y fi l l ed ai r mattress
stuffed i nsi de and covered wi th shooti ng mats or sl eepi ng mats, used as a
support for the si tti ng posi ti on when a sni per i s seated on the fl oor or ramp of
the A/C. Thi s setup must be strapped to the fl oor to prevent shi fti ng. Sni pers
can al so use a uti l i ty strap across the door or ramp for support or pl ace
paddi ng on the fl oor to hel p el i mi nate vi brati ons. Usi ng the strap i s the
sni pers preference and i s al so useful for heavy sni per systems. However,
unl ess a heavy sni per system such as the Barret .50 cal i ber or M500 .50
cal i ber i s used, the use of straps across the door i s counterproducti ve to
accuracy. Attempts i n the past to use bungee cords or stretchabl e el asti c-type
ropes have onl y been parti al l y successful and general l y compromi se accuracy
for weapon support. Bal l i sti c bl ankets ri gged on the fl oor and used for sni per
protecti on do provi de some vi brati on dampeni ng characteri sti cs i n the fl oor-
seated posi ti on, but the use of addi ti onal paddi ng i s recommended, i f possi bl e.
Sni pers must ensure the bal l i sti c bl ankets and any addi ti onal paddi ng are
ri gged securel y i n the A/C to avoi d dangerous paddi ng shi fts or sl i di ng.
COORDINATING INSTRUCTIONS
O-31. A cri ti cal component of usi ng ai rborne sni pi ng pl atforms i s devel opi ng
adequate and appropri ate rul es of engagement (ROE). ROE are normal l y
deri ved from gui dance and promul gated through the OPORD and order-of-
ground commander. The fol l owi ng are ROE consi derati ons or methods of

FM 3-05.222
O-12
reacti on that shoul d be revi ewed by any uni t tasked to perform the aeri al
sni per mi ssi on:
I f A/C recei ves fi re at any ti me, sni pers wi l l return fi re I AW ROE i n a
manner desi gned to i mmedi atel y ki l l or neutral i ze any enemy
personnel .
I f fri endl y ground el ements are engaged at any ti me, sni pers wi l l
del i ver accurate fi re on hosti l es I AW the ROE.
Sni pers wi l l sel ecti vel y engage targets desi gnated by ground
commander as meeti ng ROE.
I f hosti l e el ements shoul d run and are i denti fi ed as havi ng weapons,
sni pers wi l l use as much effecti ve fi re as needed to deter or suppress
hosti l es I AW the ROE to prevent fri endl y casual ti es.
I f hosti l e el ements run but are not i denti fi ed as havi ng weapons,
warni ng shots wi l l be fi red and A/C sni pers wi l l conti nue to cover the
QRF.
AERIAL SWS SELECTION CONSIDERATIONS
O-32. Ai rborne sni per el ements are expected to provi de organi c di rect fi re to
the ground commander usi ng desi gnated sni per systems. Due to muzzl e bl ast,
i t i s recommended that 7.62-mm sni per systems and smal l er be used i n
l i ghter, smal l er hel i copters confi gured wi th si de doors such as UH-60 and
UH-1. The bl ast from .50-cal i ber sni per weapons can cause pi l ot di stracti on.
Sni per systems of up to .50 cal i ber may be used from A/C that are equi pped
wi th a tai l ramp, such as the CH-47 and CH-53 seri es of hel i copters.
O-33. The M4 carbi ne (or the speci al purpose ri fl e) works wel l i n an
ai rborne sni per rol e due to i ts l i ght wei ght, hi gh rate of fi re, and extensi ve
sel ecti on of l ow-magni fi cati on opti cs. At ni ght, i t has a wi de vari ety of ni ght
vi si on accessori es and nonvi si bl e l asers avai l abl e. The pri mary drawback i s
i ts cal i ber, 5.56 mm, whi ch has poor stoppi ng power and termi nal bal l i sti cs i n
compari son wi th 7.62 mm and l arger. I t i s strongl y recommended that the 77-
grai n, 5.56-mm round be used i n l i eu of the standard bal l round, due to
superi or bal l i sti cs. I ts effecti ve range i s not consi dered a l i abi l i ty due to the
short ranges i nherent i n ai rborne sni pi ng. However, to stabi l i ze the weapon,
sl i ngs shoul d be modi fi ed si mi l ar to the l eather sl i ngs suppl i ed wi th the M24
SWS. When usi ng the sl i ng for support wi th the M4 carbi ne, the SOFMOD ki t
rai l i nterface system (RI S) shoul d be used to mi ni mi ze barrel strai n, whi ch
changes POI consi derabl y. I f the use of aftermarket parts i s an opti on, the
sni per can use an i nexpensi ve one-pi ece tubul ar hand guard that free-fl oats
the barrel and al l ows the sl i ng swi vel to be sol i d mounted on the hand guard
rather than the barrel . Because thi s i s a semi permanent adaptati on that
prevents M4 RI S accessori es (l i ghts, l aser si ghts) from bei ng used, i t has
l i mi ted appl i cati ons.
O-34. The 7.62-mm, gas-operated sni per ri fl es (M21, Armal i te AR-10, or the
Kni ght SR25) equi pped wi th l ow or vari abl e magni fi cati on or red dot scopes
are excel l ent choi ces for ai rborne sni pi ng. They provi de a hi gh rate of fi re,
good external and termi nal bal l i sti cs, accuracy, medi um wei ght, sl i ng-
supported capabi l i ty, and task-opti mi zed opti cs. Hi gh magni fi cati on (10x and
above) can be used, but drawbacks si mi l ar to those of the 10x-equi pped M24
FM 3-05.222
O-13
SWS wi l l be encountered (see above). Sni pers shoul d conduct extensi ve
seated dry and range fi re dri l l s to achi eve accurate resul ts.
O-35. Al though the M24 SWS (or any manual l y operated bol t gun wi th
hi gh-magni fi cati on opti cs) works i n an ai rborne sni per rol e, i t has several
drawbacks. The system i s rel ati vel y heavy, whi ch can cause sni per fati gue
and di ffi cul ty i n rapi d target acqui si ti on. I t has a sl ow rate of fi re that
negati vel y i mpacts engagement capabi l i ti es duri ng mul ti pl e target scenari os.
I t i s di ffi cul t to keep the 10x (or greater) magni fi cati on scope steady on the
target due to A/C vi brati ons and wi nd gusts. However, the M24 and other
guns equi pped wi th hi gh magni fi cati on opti cs can sti l l be made to work very
wel l wi th hi ghl y trai ned sni pers or good i nsti ncti ve shooters. Usi ng a sl i ng
and conducti ng extensi ve seated dry and range fi re dri l l s duri ng normal
ground-range fi re can opti mi ze the use of hi gh magni fi cati on opti cs. One key
i s that the shooter must be abl e to fi re wi th both eyes open so as to
superi mpose the reti cl e over the target as seen by the l eft eye.
O-36. Effecti ve opti cs i ncl ude Ai mpoi nt scopes, Ai mpoi nt scopes wi th 2x
magni fi ers, and Advanced Combat Opti cal Gunsi ght (ACOG) or Day Opti cal
Scope (4x). I f avai l abl e, durabl e vari abl e-powered tacti cal scopes such as the
Leupol d 3.510x or 4.514x seri es are very vi abl e when used at l ow
magni fi cati on. Wi th a vari abl e-powered scope, the crosshai rs on Leupol d
1-i nch and 30-mm di ameter scopes (and most other U.S.-manufactured
scopes) are on the second focal pl ane, as opposed to the fi rst focal pl ane. For
practi cal purposes, thi s means that the crosshai rs remai n the same si ze
regardl ess of the magni fi cati on. Therefore, the mi l dots are normal l y
cal i brated to be accurate at onl y one magni fi cati on, normal l y the scopes
hi ghest power. Many European scopessuch as Kahl es, Schmi dt & Bender,
Swarovski , and Zei ssare fi rst focal pl ane scopes, so i f a European-
manufactured, vari abl e-powered tacti cal scope i s used, the reti cl e and mi l
dots may change power wi th magni fi cati on. The newer LR seri es scopes by
Leupol d, wi th new reti cl e, and the newer Gen I I reti cl es by Premi er i n the
Leupol d are posi ti oned i n the fi rst focal pl ane, and the mi l s stay true mi l s
throughout the power range.
SUPPORT AND EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
O-37. Usi ng an aeri al pl atform as a fi ri ng posi ti on pl aces further
requi rements on the sni per team due to ti me and equi pment requi red to set
up for and conduct such a mi ssi on. Basi c equi pment wi l l be as per the SFODA
SOP. Each i ndi vi dual sni per team wi l l determi ne thei r speci al equi pment
requi rements. Any addi ti onal equi pment requi red to support the pl atform i s
determi ned by the type of A/C.
O-38. Al l sni per personnel wear body armor and a protecti ve hel met. The
day pack, whi ch contai ns ammuni ti on, muni ti ons, and si gnal i ng devi ces,
shoul d be secured i n the A/C by a snap l i nk or fastex buckl e and l ocated so
that i t i s avai l abl e for qui ck weapon rel oads. The day pack or addi ti onal
rucksack shoul d al so contai n the fol l owi ng addi ti onal i tems:
Ni ght vi si on opti cs.
Maps.
Emergency COMM equi pment.
FM 3-05.222
O-14
Emergency medi cal ki t.
Food and water.
The sni per shoul d not wear hi s l oad-beari ng equi pment to faci l i tate accuracy.
However, LBEs shoul d be proxi mal l y l ocated and secured (attached to day
pack or snap l i nked/secured wi th fastex buckl e i n the A/C).
AVIATION
O-39. For trai ni ng purposes on a smal l l and-based range, one A/C shoul d be
used to mi ni mi ze di stracti ons and maxi mi ze safety. The UH-60, UH-1, CH-47,
and CH-53 are al l vi abl e sni per pl atforms; the trai ni ng depends on the
mi ssi on and assets avai l abl e. The use of more than one A/C on a smal l l and-
based range i s feasi bl e, but cri ti cal to safe conduct of the range i s the use of a
person experi enced i n A/C control .
O-40. For trai ni ng purposes on a l arger l and-based range or water-based
range, more than one A/C may safel y be fi red from. I f possi bl e, a tacti cal ai r
control party, combat control team, or SO termi nal attack control l er shoul d be
used to control mul ti -A/C trai ni ng mi ssi ons. I f USAF control personnel are
not avai l abl e to assi st, a competent Speci al Forces qual i fi cati on course
(SFQC) graduate fami l i ar wi th cl ose ai r support may be the A/C control l er
I AW the ri sk assessment, range offi cer i n charge (OI C), and appl i cabl e l ocal
pol i ci es and regul ati ons.
O-41. The sni per pl anni ng cel l wi l l need to provi de a sol i d ti mel i ne to the
sni per command el ement so they can coordi nate for the A/C to be avai l abl e
for ri ggi ng and rehearsal s wi thout i nterferri ng wi th ongoi ng ground force
rehearsal s. I t i s cruci al for the sni pers to rehearse wi th the A/C crew to
devel op the coordi nati on requi red to functi on as a team.
AIRCRAFT EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
O-42. Al l sni pers must recei ve a detai l ed bri efi ng and conduct rehearsal s on
emergency shutdown procedures for the A/C (to i ncl ude fuel suppl y) and any
A/C gun systems. Sni pers shoul d know and rehearse the l ocati on of al l exi ts,
medi cal equi pment, fi re exti ngui shers, A/C COMM systems, ammuni ti on, and
survi val i tems. They must al so be i nstructed on A/C destructi on, wi th pri ori ty
and means of destructi on desi gnated for al l systems. Speci al emphasi s shoul d
be pl aced on cryptographi c i tems.
AIRCRAFT RIGGING OF A UH-60 (Modify as Appropriate for Other A/C Types)
O-43. Seats. I f permi tted, remove al l seats to al l ow more room for both
sni pers and any personnel bei ng evacuated. FAA regul ati ons requi re that a
seat be present for each person i n the A/C, and that personnel are seated and
secured duri ng takeoff and l andi ng. I f seat removal i s not wai verabl e, then
remove the center (forward) secti on of seats, l eavi ng one seat i n the center
between or behi nd the pi l ots seat faci ng forward, and l eave the four seats i n
the back, whi ch face forward i n the A/C. Thi s confi gures the A/C to accept
four sni pers i n the rear seats and one ASO i n the forward-faci ng (navi gators)
seat.
FM 3-05.222
O-15
O-44. Ballistic Blankets. The number of bal l i sti c bl ankets abl e to be
secured to the hard poi nts on the fl oor i s determi ned by the si ze of the
bl ankets and l ocati on of mounti ng straps. I deal l y, the enti re fl oor of the A/C
wi l l be covered by a mi ni mum of one thi ckness of bal l i sti c bl anket, wi th
overl aps on adjoi ni ng bl ankets. I f avai l abl e, two thi cknesses are preferred.
Personnel shoul d ensure the bl ankets are secured ti ghtl y to the fl oor and use
100-mph tape l i beral l y at the doors to prevent wi nd gusts from l i fti ng the
bl ankets duri ng fl i ght.
O-45. Additional Padding. The bal l i sti c bl ankets provi de some vi brati on-
dampi ng capabi l i ti es for fl oor-seated or prone sni pers. Thi s capabi l i ty can be
i mproved by usi ng addi ti onal paddi ng, such as foam rubber or sl eepi ng mats.
Dependi ng on the materi al used, the paddi ng may be pl aced over or under
the bal l i sti c bl ankets. Personnel shoul d ensure that paddi ng i s secured
regardl ess of type or pl acement; paddi ng shi fts duri ng operati ons can be
unsafe.
O-46. Safety Hookup. A safety ri ng constructed of cl i mbi ng rope or 1-i nch
tubul ar nyl on connected to no l ess than four hard poi nts i s recommended.
The safety ri ng shoul d consi st of two separated ropes or one rope wi th a bi ght
i n i t that forms two separated ropes. Thi s provi des redundancy i n the event of
fai l ure. At four l ocati ons on the doubl e-l ooped rope, correspondi ng to the
l ocati on of the fl oor hard poi nts, personnel shoul d i sol ate the rope further by
constructi ng four bi ghts i sol ated wi th knots. Fi gure-ei ght l oops are very good
for thi s task. Personnel can use l ocki ng carabi ners to attach each l oop to a
fl oor hard poi nt. They must modi fy the bal l i sti c bl anket coveri ng the center of
the fl oor between the doors to al l ow access to the fl oor hard poi nts.
O-47. There are vari ous sni per and ASO safety harnesses that are checked
and approved by the RSO. The ASO ensures a safe hookup wi thi n the A/C
before takeoff. The safety harness vari ati ons are as fol l ows:
Ai rcrew safety harness (monkey harness).
Commerci al cl i mbi ng harness.
Seat, hi p rappel wi th safety l i ne (Swi ss seat).
Safety l i ne.
O-48. The safety l i ne connecti ng the sni pers harness to the safety ri ng
shoul d be constructed of cl i mbi ng rope or 1-i nch tubul ar nyl on, and connected
wi th a l ocki ng snap l i nk. I t shoul d be l ong enough to al l ow freedom of
movement wi thi n the A/C, but short enough to prevent personnel from
exi ti ng the A/C.
PERSONNEL REQUIREMENTS (FOR TRAINING)
O-49. Ground personnel i ncl ude the fol l owi ng:
OI C.
Noncommi ssi oned offi cer i n charge (NCOI C).
Assi stant NCOI C.
Range safety offi cer.
A/C ground control l er.
FM 3-05.222
O-16
Range safeti es.
Medi c.
Range personnel .
O-50. Ai r personnel i ncl ude the fol l owi ng:
Ai rborne OI C or A/C commander (normal l y the mi ssi on ai r commander
or A/C commander).
Ai r safety offi cer (provi ded by QRF personnel ).
Sni pers.
Ai rcrew.
O-51. Attachments and detachments i ncl ude the fol l owi ng:
Tacti cal ai r control party, combat control team, or SO termi nal attack
control l er.
Sni pers not organi c to the detachment.
Addi ti onal range personnel .
Tasks to Maneuver Elements
O-52. Duti es and responsi bi l i ti es i ncl ude the fol l owi ng:
OI C oversees conduct of the range.
NCOI C provi des organi zati on of the l i fts and range operati on.
RSO
Ensures a safe overal l range setup and operati on.
Provi des safety bri ef to al l .
Bri efs the ASO on duti es and responsi bi l i ti es.
Checks A/C ri ggi ng.
Mai ntai ns cl ose contact wi th A/C control l er on the ground.
Advi ses and assi sts the OI C and NCOI C.
ASO
Ensures the overal l safety of sni pers and A/C.
Provi des safety-l i ne hookups of sni pers.
Tel l s sni pers when to l oad, go hot, and cease fi re. He al so vi sual l y
i nspects to ensure weapon cl ear.
Ensures sni pers fi re i n safe di recti on at desi gnated targets.
Dependi ng on avai l abl e COMM, control s A/C usi ng headset for
sni pers to effecti vel y engage targets.
Range assi stant NCOI C
Recei ves di recti on from range NCOI C.
Provi des the targets.
A/C ground control l er
I nforms A/C when range i s hot.
Control s A/C as necessary.
FM 3-05.222
O-17
Provi des condui t between ground personnel and A/C.
Range safeti es
Ensure ground personnel remai n i n safe area.
Ensure range remai ns cl ear.
Range personnel
Consi st of al l excess personnel and sni pers not currentl y fi ri ng.
Assi st wi th targets and range operati ons as di rected.
Ai r commander
Oversees enti re A/C and ai rcrew.
Ensures detai l ed A/C safety and crew bri efs are i ssued.
Target Materials and Recommendations
O-53. To achi eve maxi mum benefi t from l i mi ted ai rborne trai ni ng ti me, i t i s
recommended that targets be used whi ch gi ve i mmedi ate feedback to the
sni pers. A consi derati on when choosi ng targets i s the effect of rotor wash on
target materi al s and the amount of target mai ntenance requi red duri ng
trai ni ng. Targets that requi re mi ni mum mai ntenance duri ng range fi re wi l l
el i mi nate wasted ti me due to target changeout or servi ci ng. The fol l owi ng are
suggested target materi al s i n order of preference from best to worst:
Steel/ I ron Maidens. Excel l ent choi ce for targets. Provi de i mmedi ate
sni per feedback, requi re mi ni mal attenti on once set up, and good for
i ncorporati ng i nsti ncti ve di stance judgi ng duri ng trai ni ng. Pri mary
drawbacks are heavy wei ght and di ffi cul ty i n i ni ti al fabri cati on.
Personnel shoul d spray pai nt targets to assi st wi th feedback. They
must al so ensure that A/C remai ns a safe di stance from steel targets.
Clay Pigeons and Clay Roof Tiles. Good choi ce for targets; however,
they must be repl aced as they are destroyed. Good feedback to the
sni per, i nexpensi ve cost, and avai l abi l i ty make these a good choi ce.
Pri mary drawbacks are the smal l si ze and ti me spent repl aci ng targets
duri ng trai ni ng.
Balloons, I nflated Surgical Gloves, and I nflated Condoms. Fai r choi ce
for targets, but several drawbacks make them l ess preferred. Bal l oons
are normal l y smal l i n si ze, whi ch i s not representati ve of the center
mass of a man-si zed target. A l ot of ti me i s al so requi red to i nfl ate the
bal l oons. Addi ti onal l y, the rotor wash or very hot weather tends to ki l l
many bal l oons, whi ch can gi ve i mproper feedback to the sni pers and
defi ni tel y cause l ost trai ni ng ti me due to target mai ntenance.
Paper Targets. Poor choi ce; l east preferred. Provi des no feedback to
sni per and requi res ti me-consumi ng target mai ntenance duri ng trai ni ng.


Glossary-1
Glossary
AAR after-acti on revi ew
A/C ai rcraft
accuracy I n sni pi ng, the abi l i ty of the sni per and hi s weapon to del i ver
preci si on fi re on a desi red target. Accur acy can easi l y be
measured as the abi l i ty to group al l shots cl ose to a desi red
i mpact poi nt. The devi ati on from the desi red i mpact poi nt or the
si ze of the group i s a functi on of range. Accuracy i s the product of
uniformity.
action The mechani sm of a sni per ri fl e or other fi rearm that normal l y
performs l oadi ng, feedi ng, l ocki ng, fi ri ng, unl ocki ng, extracti ng,
and ejecti on. Al so known as the recei ver or frame.
ADA ai r defense arti l l ery
adjustable objective Fi ne-focusi ng ri ng on the objecti ve l ens of a tel escope that hel ps
to el i mi nate par al l ax.
adjusted aiming point An ai mi ng poi nt that al l ows for gravi ty, wi nd, target movement,
zero changes, or MOPP fi r i ng. Al so known as a hol d.
ammunition lot A quanti ty of cartri dges made by one manufacturer under
uni form condi ti ons from the same materi al s. Ammuni ti on wi thi n
a l ot i s expected to perform i n a uni form manner.
ammunition lot number Code number that i denti fi es a parti cul ar quanti ty of ammuni ti on
from one manufacturer. I t i s usual l y pri nted on the ammuni ti on
case and the i ndi vi dual boxes i n whi ch the ammuni ti on comes.
AO area of operati ons
APFT Army Physi cal Fi tness Test
API armor-pi erci ng i ncendi ary
ART automati c rangi ng tel escope
ASO ai r safety offi cer
ATB appears to be
ball ammunition General -purpose standar d servi ce ammuni ti on wi th a sol i d core
(usual l y of l ead) bul l et.
ballistic coefficient A number used to measure how easi l y a bul l et sl i ps through the
ai r (aerodynami c effi ci ency). Most bul l ets have bal l i sti c
coeffi ci ents between .100 and .700. Hi gher bal l i sti c coeffi ci ents
are requi red for l ong-range shooti ng.
ballistics A sci ence that deal s wi th the moti on and fl i ght characteri sti cs of
projecti l es i n the weapon, i nternal ; out of the weapon, external ;
and effect on the target, termi nal .
FM 3-05.222

Glossary-2
BC bal l i sti c coeffi ci ent
BDC bul l et drop compensator
BDU battl e dress uni form
beat The sni pers operati onal area where establ i shed control measures
(boundari es, l i mi ts) defi ne hi s terri tory.
berdan primer Form of pri mer that does not have an i ntegral anvi l . Sti l l found i n
Europe, i t i s rel oaded wi th di ffi cul ty.
BMCT begi nni ng morni ng ci vi l twi l i ght
BMNT begi nni ng morni ng nauti cal twi l i ght
boat tail bullet A bul l et wi th a tapered base to reduce aerodynami c drag. Drag
partl y comes from the effects of cavi tati on (turbul ence) and the
progressi ve reducti on of the di ameter toward the rear of the
bul l et al l ows the ai r to fi l l i n the voi d.
boxer primer Standard pri mer wi th an i ntegral anvi l .
BRASS breathe, rel ax, ai m, sl ack, squeeze
brass Empty cartri dge case.
breech The chamber end of the barrel .
bullet drop The amount that a bul l et fal l s hori zontal l y due to the effect of
gravi ty.
bullet drop compensator Any devi ce that i s i ntegral to the ri fl e tel escope that i s desi gned
to compensate for the bul l ets tr ajectory.
C centi grade
C2 command and control
CA Ci vi l Affai r s
cal caliberThe measurement taken wi thi n the barrel from groove
to groove or from the outsi de di ameter of the bul l et.
CARVER cri ti cal i ty, accessi bi l i ty, recuperabi l i ty, vul ner abi l i ty, effect,
recogni zabi l i ty
CAS cl ose ai r support
CAT category
CBT combatti ng terrori sm
CD counterdrug
chamber Part of the bore, at the br eech, formed to accept and support the
cartri dge.
chronograph An i nstrument used to measure the vel oci ty of a projecti l e.
CIR conti nui ng i ntel l i gence requi rement
FM 3-05.222

Glossary-3
clandestine operation An activi ty to accompl i sh i ntell igence gathering, counterintel li gence,
or other simil ar activi ties sponsored or conducted by governmental
departments or agencies in such a way as to assure secrecy or
conceal ment of the operation. I t differs from covert operations in that
the emphasi s i s pl aced on the concealment of the operation, rather
than on the concealment of the sponsors i denti ty.
CLP cl eaner, l ubri cant, preservati ve
CM countermi ne
CO combat operati ons
cold-bore shot The fi rst shot from a cl ean, unfi red weapon.
collimator Boresi ghti ng devi ce.
COMM communi cati ons
COMSEC communi cati ons securi ty
concealment Protecti on from vi ew. Thi s i s not necessari l y the same as cover.
Cover provi des conceal ment, but conceal ment does not al ways
provi de cover.
COOR coordi nati on
cover Protecti on from hosti l e gunfi re. Cover i s a rel ati ve term. Cover
that i s thi ck enough to stop pi stol bul l ets may not be adequate
protecti on agai nst ri fl e bul l ets. Thi s i s a cruci al fact to keep i n
mi nd when sel ecti ng cover.
covert operation An operati on that i s pl anned and executed as to conceal the
i denti ty of, or permi t pl ausi bl e deni al by, the sponsor(s). Thi s
di ffers from a cl andesti ne operati on i n that emphasi s i s pl aced on
the conceal ment of the sponsors i denti ty, rather than on the con-
ceal ment of the operati on.
CP command post
crimp The bendi ng i nward of the mouth of the case i n or der to gri p the
bul l et or around the pri mer to seal i t.
cross dominance A sol di er wi th a domi nant hand and a domi nant eye that are not
on the same si de; for exampl e, a ri ght-handed fi rer wi th a
domi nant l eft eye.
crown The techni que used to fi ni sh the barrel s muzzl e. The ri fl i ng at
the end of the barrel can be sl i ghtl y rel i eved, or recessed. The
purpose i s to protect the forward edge of the ri fl i ng from damage,
whi ch can rui n accuracy.
CS Stands for 0-chl orobenzal mal nonni tri l ei s actual l y a whi te sol i d
powder usual l y mi xed wi th a di spersal agent, l i ke methyl ene
chl ori de, whi ch carri es the parti cl es through the ai r. CS i s more
stabl e, more potent, and l ess toxi c than the more commonl y used
CN agent.
CSAR combat search and rescue
FM 3-05.222

Glossary-4
CT counterterrori sm
CUP copper uni ts of pressure
DA Department of the Army: di rect acti on
deflection The change i n the path of the bul l et due to wi nd or passi ng
through a medi um.
detailed search A systemati c observati on of a target area i n detai l , usi ng
overl appi ng observati on i n a 180-degree arc, 50 meters i n depth,
star ti ng i n and worki ng away from the observer.
DOD Department of Defense
drag The aerodynami c resi stance to a bul l ets fl i ght.
drift The hori zontal devi ati on of the projecti l e from i ts l i ne of
departure due to i ts rotati onal spi n or the effects of the wi nd.
drop The di stance that a pr oj ecti l e fal l s due to gr avi ty measur ed
fr om the l i ne of depar tur e.
dry firing Ai mi ng and fi ri ng the weapon wi thout l i ve ammuni ti on. Thi s i s
an excel l ent techni que to i mprove marksmanshi p ski l l s and does
not cause any damage to a center-fi re fi rearm. I t i s best done wi th
an expended case i n the chamber to cushi on the fi ri ng pi ns fal l .
DTG date-ti me group
E-4 speci al i st
E&E evasi on and escape
E&R evasi on and recovery
EECT endi ng eveni ng ci vi l twi l i ght
EENT endi ng eveni ng nauti cal twi l i ght
effective wind The average of al l of the varyi ng wi nds encountered.
EFL effecti ve focal l ength
EST esti mate
exit pupil The smal l ci rcl e of l i ght seen comi ng from the ocul ar l ens of an
opti cal devi ce when hel d at arms l ength. The exi t pupi l can be
determi ned mathemati cal l y by di vi di ng the objecti ve l ens
di ameter (i n mi l l i meters) by the magni fi cati on. The resul t wi l l be
the di ameter of the exi t pupi l i n mi l l i meters. (Exampl e: for a 6- x
42-mm tel escope: 42 mm di vi ded by 6 = 7 mm.) The si ze of the
exi t pupi l wi l l hel p i n determi ni ng the effecti veness of the opti cal
devi ce i n l ow-l i ght condi ti ons. The human pupi l di l ates to
approxi matel y 7 mm under l ow-l i ght condi ti ons, and a tel escope
wi th a 7-mm exi t pupi l wi l l provi de the maxi mum l i ght possi bl e to
the sni pers eye.
exterior or external What happens to the bul l et between the ti me i t exi ts the
ballistics barrel and the ti me i t arri ves at the target.
FM 3-05.222

Glossary-5
eye relief The di stance that the eye i s posi ti oned behi nd the ocul ar l ens of
the tel escopi c si ght. A two- to three-i nch di stance i s average. The
sni per adjusts the eye rel i ef to ensure a ful l fi el d of vi ew. Thi s
di stance i s al so necessary to prevent the tel escope from stri ki ng
the sni pers face duri ng recoi l .
F fahrenhei t
FDC fi re di recti on center
FEBA forward edge of the battl e area
FFP forward fi ri ng posi ti on
FID forei gn i nternal defense
FLIR forward-l ooki ng i nfrared
FLOT forward l i ne of troops
FM fi el d manual
FN Fabr i que Nati onal e
FO forward observer
FOB forward operati onal base
follow-through The conti nued mental and physi cal appl i cati on of marksmanshi p
fundamental s after each r ound has been fi red.
fouling Bui l dup of copper and powder resi due i n the bore. These two
types of foul i ng requi re di fferent cl eani ng sol vents for compl ete
removal .
fps feet per second
free-floating barrel A bar r el that i s compl etel y fr ee of contact wi th the stock. Thi s i s
cr i ti cal to accur acy because of bar rel har moni cs. As the bul l et i s
tr avel i ng down the bar r el , the bar r el i s vi br ati ng l i ke a tuni ng
for k. Any contact wi th the bar r el wi l l dampen or modi fy these
vi br ati ons wi th (usual l y) a negati ve i mpact on shot-gr oup si ze or
poi nt of i mpact.
ft feet
gn grai n
GPS gl obal posi ti oni ng system
grain A uni t of measure; 7,000 grai ns are equal to 1 pound. Used to
descri be bul l et wei ght (for exampl e, 173 grai ns) or powder charge.
grooves The l ow poi nt of ri fl i ng wi thi n a barrel .
group For med from numerous shots fi r ed at a tar get usi ng the same
poi nt of ai m, for checki ng accur acy. For standardi zati on, i t i s
best to fi re fi ve-shot gr oups wi th the same ai mi ng poi nt. I t i s a
stati sti cal fact that gr oup si ze wi l l i ncr ease wi th the number of
shots fi r ed.
GT general techni cal
FM 3-05.222

Glossary-6
GV gi ven vari abl e
GW guerri l l a warfare
HA humani tari an assi stance
hand load Al so cal l ed rel oad. Nonfactory-manufactured ammuni ti on.
hand stop A devi ce attached to the weapons fore-end (modi fi ed wi th a metal
rai l ) desi gned to prevent the supporti ng hand from sl i di ng
forward.
hasty search A very rapi d check for enemy acti vi ty; pri mar i l y used as a
securi ty measure to determi ne i mmedi ate threats or danger to
the sni per when occupyi ng posi ti ons.
HD humani tari an demi ni ng
headspace I n ri fl es, the di stance from the shoul der of the car tri dge case to
the head of the case. For bottl e-necked cases, the measur i ng poi nt
i s centered on the shoul der and i s known as the datum l i ne. For
bel ted magnum cases, the headspace i s measured from the front
of the bel t to the head of the case. Thi s di mensi on i s cr i ti cal for
the safety of the shooter, as wel l as the accuracy of the weapon
system.
HELR hi gh-effi ci ency, l ow-refl ecti on
hide The term used to descri be sni per posi ti ons, normal l y conceal ed
from the enemy.
hold-off A shooti ng techni que used to compensate for bul l et tr ajectory by
usi ng a modi fi ed poi nt of ai m above or bel ow the desi red poi nt of
i mpact. Al so used to descri be the modi fi ed poi nt of ai m used to
compensate for wi nd or target movement.
hold-over The modi fi ed poi nt of ai m used above the tar get to compensate
for bul l et tr ajector y.
hold-under The modi fi ed poi nt of ai m used bel ow the tar get to compensate
for a pr ojecti l e on i ts upwar d axi s of i ts tr ajector y. Thi s i s al so
used when shooti ng at angl es (sl opes).
hollow-point Descri bes a bul l et wi th a hol l ow cavi ty i n the ti p desi gned to
enhance termi nal bal l i sti cs. Al though the Si err a MatchKi ng
bul l ets are hol l ow poi nts, thei r desi gn i s i ntended to i mprove
accuracy, not termi nal bal l i sti cs. Thi s bul l et type has been
approved by the Judge Advocate General for combat use.
HUMINT human i ntel l i gence
IAD i mmedi ate acti on dri l l s
IAW i n accordance wi th
ID i denti fi cati on
indexing targets The method that a sni per team empl oys to i denti fy targets wi thi n
i ts effecti ve fi el d of fi re.
FM 3-05.222

Glossary-7
interior ballistics What happens to the bul l et before i t l eaves the muzzl e of the ri fl e.
Cal cul ati ons are used to measure pressure forces i nsi de the
cartri dge and barrel duri ng fi ri ng.
IO i nformati on operati ons
IR i nfrared, i nformati on requi rement
jacket The copper coveri ng over the l ead core of a bul l et.
KD known di stance
keyhole When the bul l et hi ts the target other than poi nt fi rst. Usual l y
i ndi cated by an el l i pti cal bul l et hol e. Caused by i nadequate
rotati onal stabi l i zati on of the bul l et (usual l y due to i nsuffi ci ent
barrel twi st; the twi st i s too sl ow), defl ecti on of the bul l et by
objects i n the bul l ets path, or other factors.
KIM A memory game named after the mai n character i n Ki pl i ngs
novel Kim.
L&S Leupol d and Stevens
lands The hi gh poi nts i n the r i fl i ng of a bar r el . Thi s i s the par t of the
bar r el that actual l y engr aves the bul l et, i mpar ts the spi n to
the bul l et, and ul ti matel y stabi l i zes the bul l et.
LBE l oad-beari ng equi pment
lead The modi fi ed poi nt of ai m i n front of a movi ng target needed to
ensure a hi t. Thi s depends on the r ange to, and the speed of, the
target.
LOC l i ne of communi cati ons
loophole Fi ri ng port. A hol e cut to conceal the sni per but al l ow hi m to
engage targets i n hi s sector.
LOS l i ne of si ght
LP l i steni ng post
LR l ong range
LSR l i ght sni per ri fl e
mean radius The average radi us of shot di spersi on from the center of a shot
group.
METL mi ssi on-essenti al task l i st
METT-TC mi ssi on, enemy, terrai n and weather, troops and support
avai l abl eti me avai l abl e and ci vi l consi derati ons
mid-range trajectory The hi ghest poi nt i n the bul l ets fl i ght. Thi s occurs, techni cal l y,
sl i ghtl y beyond the hal fway mark of the di stance at whi ch the
ri fl e i s zeroed. Thi s i s the hi ghest verti cal di stance of the bul l et
above the l i ne of si ght.
Mil Mi l radi an, 6283 i n a ci rcl e, 3.44 (3.5 rounded) MOA i n a mi l . Onl y
a mi l i tary compass has 6400 i n a ci rcl e.
FM 3-05.222

Glossary-8
mil An angul ar uni t of measurement equal to 1/6283 of a compl ete
revol uti on (there are 6283 mi l s i n 360 degrees). The mi l i s used to
esti mate di stance and si ze based on the mi l -rel ati on for mul a:
1 mi l equal s 1 meter at 1,000 meters. There are 3.44 MOA i n 1
mi l . (However, roundi ng to 3.5 eases cal cul ati ons and causes an
acceptabl e error that i s wi thi n 1 i nch at 1000 meters.)
mil dot Used to descri be the reti cl e i n tel escopi c si ghts. (For exampl e, the
M3A that has 3/4 MOA dots that are 1 mi l apar t.)
MILES mul ti pl e i ntegrated l aser engagement system
minute of angle A uni t of angul ar measurement equal to 1/60th of a degree.
Al though usual l y approxi mated as 1 i nch per 100 yards of range,
i t i s actual l y equal to 1.0472 i nches per 100 yards of range or 3 cm
at 100 meter s.
mirage The heat waves or the refl ecti on of l i ght through l ayers of ai r of
di fferent densi ti es and temperatures. Wi th opti cal ai ds, mi rage
can be seen even on the col dest days. Mi rage i s used to esti mate
the effecti ve wi nd to be appl i ed to the si ght of the SWS.
mm mi l l i meter
MMPI Mi nnesota Mul ti -Phasi c Personal i ty I nventory
MOA mi nute of angl e (1.0472 i nches at 100 yards or 2.9 centi meters at
100 meter s)
MOPP mi ssi on-ori ented protecti ve posture
MOUT mi l i tary operati ons i n ur ban terrai n
mph mi l es per hour
MRE meal s, ready to eat
MSR mai n suppl y route
MSS mi ssi on support si te
MTT mobi l e trai ni ng team
muzzle The end of the barrel where the bul l et l eaves the barrel .
muzzle velocity The speed of a projecti l e as i t l eaves the muzzl e of the weapon.
NADS ni ght augmented day scope
NATO North Atl anti c Treaty Organi zati on
natural point of aim The di recti on that the body and ri fl e combi nati on i s ori ented
whi l e i n a stabl e, rel axed fi ri ng posi ti on.
natural respiratory pause The temporary cessati on of breathi ng after an exhal ati on and
before an i nhal ati on.
NBC nucl ear, bi ol ogi cal , and chemi cal
NCO noncommi ssi oned offi cer
neck The porti on of a cartri dge case that hol ds the bul l et.
FM 3-05.222

Glossary-9
NM Nati onal Match
No. number
NVD ni ght vi si on devi ce
OAKOC observati on and fi el ds of fi re, avenues of approach, key terrai n,
obstacl es, and cover and conceal ment
objective lens The l ens at the front of the tel escope. I t i s usual l y l arger i n
di ameter than the ocul ar l ens.
ocular lens The l ens at the rear of the tel escope, nearest the sni pers eye.
OIC offi cer i n charge
OP observati on post
OPCON operati onal control
OPFOR opposi ng forces
ORP objecti ve ral l y poi nt
parallax The apparent movement of the target i n rel ati on to the reti cl e
when the sni per moves hi s eye i n rel ati on to the ocul ar l enss exi t
pupi l . When the targets i mage i s not focused on the same focal
pl ane as the tel escopes reti cl e, paral l ax i s the resul t. Current i ssue
U.S. Army ri fl e tel escopes have a fi el d paral l ax adjustment that
when properl y used makes paral l ax error an i nsi gni fi cant factor.
PIR pri ori ty i ntel l i gence requi rements
POA point of aimThe exact l ocati on on a target wi th whi ch the ri fl e
si ghts are al i gned.
POI point of impactThe poi nt that a bul l et stri kes; usual l y
consi dered i n rel ati on to the poi nt of ai m.
powder The propel l ant materi al used i n most ammuni ti on.
PRC popul ace and resources control
primer A smal l expl osi ve cap i n the center of the head of the car tri dge
case that i s struck by the fi ri ng pi n to fi re the round. I t consi sts of
a smal l cup fi l l ed wi th a detonati ng mi xture that provi des the
fl ame (actual l y, a shock wave) that converts the propel l ant
powder i nto a gas.
primer pocket The r ecess i n the base of the car tr i dge case that accepts the
pr i mer . I n mi l i tar y ammuni ti on, i t i s usual l y cr i mped and
seal ed wi th a l acquer seal ant for water pr oofi ng.
probability of hit Refers to the chance (denoted as a percentage) that a gi ven round
wi l l hi t the target at a gi ven range. Probabi l i ty of hi t val ues range
from 0 to 1.0.
PSG pl atoon sergeant
PSYOP psychol ogi cal operati ons
QRF qui ck reacti on force
FM 3-05.222

Glossary-10
rail A metal track i nstal l ed i n the fore-end of weapon to accept a hand
stop or sl i ng.
ranging The techni que that a sni per uses to compensate for bul l et
trajectory by adjusti ng the bal l i sti c cam of an adjustabl e or
rangi ng tel escope.
RAP rear area protecti on
RBC ri fl e bore cl eaner
recoil lug The heavy metal protrusi on beneath the front of the acti on
desi gned to stabi l i ze the acti on i n the stock and transfer the recoi l
to the stock.
reload Hand-l oaded ammuni ti on.
reticle (reticule) The si ghti ng i mage, usual l y crosshai r s, i n a tel escopi c si ght.
retina The l i ght-sensi ti ve l ayer at the back of the eye. I t consi sts of rod
(bl ack and whi te sensi ti ve for ni ght vi si on) and cone (col or
sensi ti ve for day vi si on) cel l s.
rifle cant Any l eani ng of the r i fl e to the l eft or r i ght fr om a ver ti cal
posi ti on dur i ng fi r i ng. Ri fl e cant shoul d be el i mi nated because
of the potenti al for i ncr easi ng mi sses at l onger r anges.
rifling The spi ral grooves i n the bore of fi rearms that spi n the bul l et to
provi de i t wi th rotati onal stabi l i ty. Thi s wi l l ensure that the
bul l et fl i es true wi th a poi nt-fi rst atti tude.
rimfire A cartri dge whose pri mi ng compound i s l ocated i n the ri m of the
cartri dge case and general l y of cal i ber .22. Thi s type of
ammuni ti on i s di scharged by a stri ke of the fi ri ng pi n to the ri m.
Thi s ammuni ti on i s general l y consi dered nonrel oadabl e.
rimless The ri m of the cartri dge i s the same di ameter as the body of the
case.
rimmed The r i m of the car tr i dge i s l ar ger i n di ameter than the body of
the car tr i dge case.
rings The metal devi ces used to suppor t the scope. They ar e usual l y
1 i nch or 30 mm i n di ameter .
RIS rai l i nterface system
ROE rul es of engagement
round Refers to a compl ete cartr i dge.
RPG rocket-propel l ed grenade
RSO range safety offi cer
S-3 battal i on or br i gade operati ons staff offi cer
SA securi ty assi stant
SALUTE si ze, acti vi ty, l ocati on, uni t, ti me, and equi pment
SAR search and rescue
FM 3-05.222

Glossary-11
SB Speci al Bal l
SC survey and communi cati ons
SCBS Shooters Choi ce Bore Sol vent
scout An i ndi vi dual who i s usual l y ahead of hi s parent organi zati on to
conduct survei l l ance on the enemy, conduct reconnai ssance, and
report i nformati on to hi s parent organi zati on.
SEO sni per empl oyment offi cer
service rifle The pri mary ri fl e of a mi l i tary force.
SF Speci al Forces
SFAUC Speci al Forces advanced urban combat
SFODA Speci al Forces operati onal detachment A
SFQC Speci al Forces qual i fi cati on course
silencer See suppressor.
SI MRAD Commonl y used euphemi sm referri ng to the AN/PVS-9(KN-200),
AN/PVS-9A(KN-200F), and KN-250 fami l y of cl i p-on ni ght
vi si on scopes that mount to day opti cs (M3A) by usi ng a modi fi ed
front ri ng mount.
sniper specialist An i ndi vi dual tr ai ned i n sni per empl oyment (preferabl y sni per
qual i fi ed) who advi ses the commander or operati ons offi cer (S-3)
on proper sni per empl oyment.
sniper team Two sni pers of equal trai ni ng and abi l i ty; the foundati on of sound
sni per empl oyment.
SO speci al operati ons
SOF speci al operati ons forces
SOI si gnal operati on i nstructi ons
SOP standi ng operati ng procedure
SOPMOD speci al operati ons program modi fi cati ons
SOTIC Speci al Operati ons Target I nterdi cti on Course
speed of sound 1,120.22 fps at standard condi ti ons. Projecti l es tr avel i ng faster
than thi s pass through the sound barri er twi ce: once when they
exceed the sound barri er (wi thi n the barrel ) and once when they
reenter subsoni c speeds. Thi s effect causes a soni c crack caused
by the compressed ai r waves as the round passes thr ough the ai r.
SR speci al reconnai ssance
SRC sni per range compl ex
SSO sunri se/sunset overl ay
stalking The sni pers art of movi ng unseen i nto a fi ri ng posi ti on, engagi ng
hi s target, and then wi thdrawi ng undetected.
FM 3-05.222

Glossary-12
STANO survei l l ance, target acqui si ti on, and ni ght observati on
stock weld The contact of the cheek wi th the stock of the weapon.
suppressor A devi ce desi gned to muffl e or mi ni mi ze the sounds of the
di schargi ng of a fi rearm. I t wi l l al so reduce the vi sual muzzl e
bl ast of the weapon as wel l . I t i s usual l y fi tted onto the muzzl e
but can al so be an i ntegral assembl y wi th the barrel . Thi s usual l y
works wi th subsoni c ammuni ti on to el i mi nate the bul l ets soni c
crack as wel l ; however, the shooter wi l l need to get very cl ose to
use thi s ammuni ti on. The sni per can use ful l -l oad ammuni ti on as
the soni c crack can confuse the enemy as to the true l ocati on of
the shooter. The subsoni c ammuni ti on wi l l gi ve a whi rri ng noi se
that i s a di rect l i ne to the shooter.
surveillance The systemati c observati on of areas, pl aces, persons, or thi ngs by
vi sual , aural , el ectroni c, photographi c, or other means. The sni per
makes extensi ve use of fi xed and rovi ng survei l l ance to acqui re
targets or assess target vul nerabi l i ti es.
swivel The attachment poi nt for the sl i ng to the stock.
SWS sni per weapon system
target indicators Any si gn that can enabl e an observer to detect the l ocati on of the
enemy, hi s i nstal l ati ons, or hi s equi pment.
TC trai ni ng ci rcul ar
terminal ballistics What happens to the bul l et when i t comes i nto contact wi th the
target. The study of the effect of a bul l ets i mpact on the target.
terminal velocity The speed of the bul l et upon i mpact wi th the target. Thi s wi l l
determi ne the effecti veness of the bul l et because of i ts di rect
contri buti on to energy and energy transfer.
TM techni cal manual
TOC tacti cal operati ons center
torque The turni ng force appl i ed to screws or bol ts.
trace The ai r turbul ence created by the shock wave of a bul l et as i t
passes through the ai r . Thi s ai r turbul ence can be observed (wi th
an opti cal ai d) i n the form of a vapor trai l as the bul l et travel s
toward the target.
tracer Type of ammuni ti on that i s vi si bl e at ni ght due to i ts phosphorous
compound i n the base of the bul l et.
tracking Engagi ng movi ng targets where the l ead i s establ i shed and
mai ntai ned; movi ng wi th the target as the tri gger i s squeezed.
Al so used to descri be the techni que of fol l owi ng the enemy by hi s
marki ngs l eft on the terrai n.
trajectory The fl i ght path the bul l et takes from the ri fl e to the target. The
path of a bul l et i n fl i ght.
FM 3-05.222

Glossary-13
trapping A techni que for engagi ng movi ng targets. The ai mi ng poi nt i s
establ i shed forward of the target. The ri fl e i s hel d stati onary and
fi red as the target approaches the ai mi ng poi nt. Al so known as
the Ambush Techni que.
TRP target reference poi nts
TTP tacti cs, techni ques, and procedures
twist The rate of pi tch of the ri fl i ng i n a fi rearms bore. Usual l y
measured by the l ength of barrel i n i nches requi red for the bul l et
to make one compl ete revol uti on, and expressed as a twi st r ate
(for exampl e, 1 turn i n 11.2 i nches: 1/11.2).
U.S. Uni ted States
USA Uni ted States Ar my
USAF Uni ted States Ai r Force
USAJ FKSWCS Uni ted States Ar my John F. Kennedy Speci al Warfare Center
and School
USASFC Uni ted States Ar my Speci al Forces Command
USC Uni ted States Code
USMC Uni ted States Mar i ne Corps
USN Uni ted States Navy
UW unconventi onal warfare
VBSS vi si t, board, search, and sei zure
velocity The speed of the projecti l e.
windage The di stance or amount of hori zontal correcti on that a sni per
must use to hi t hi s target, due to the effects of wi nd or dri ft. The
adjustment on the tel escope or i ron si ghts to compensate for
hori zontal defl ecti on of the bul l et.
x The power of opti cal magni fi cati on (for exampl e, 10x, 3x9x).
zero The range at whi ch the poi nt of ai m and the poi nt of i mpact are
one and the same.
Bibliography-1
Bibliography
AR 40-501. Standards of Medical Fitness. 28 March 2002.
AR 385-63. Policies and Procedures for Firing Ammunition for Training, Target Practice,
and Combat. 15 October 1983.
ARTEP 7-8-MTP. Mission Training Plan for the Infantry Rifle Platoon and Squad.
29 September 1994.
ARTEP 7-92-MTP. Mission Training Plan for the Infantry Reconnaissance Platoon and
Squad. 26 May 2002.
ARTEP 31-807-30-MTP. Mission Training Plan for the Special Forces Operational
Detachment A (SFODA). 1 June 2001.
Avery, Ralph. Combat Loads for the Sniper Rifle. Desert Publications, Cornville, AZ 86325.
1981. (ISBN 0-87947-544-7).
Chandler, Norman A. Death From Afar. Iron Brigade Publishing, P.O. Box D, St. Marys
City, MD 20686. 1 March 1992.
DA Pam 350-38. Standards in Weapons Training. 1 October 2002.
DA Pam 350-39. Standards in Weapons Training (Special Operations Forces). 1 October 2002.
Davis, Jr., Wm. C. Handloading. National Rifle Association of America, 1600 Rhode Island
Ave., N.W., Washington, DC 20036. 1981. (ISBN 0-935998-34-9).
Ezell, Edward C. Small Arms of the World, 12th Edition. Stackpole Books, Cameron and
Kelker Streets, P.O. Box 1831, Harrisburg, PA 17105. 1983. (ISBN 0-8117-1687-2).
FM 3-05.20. Special Forces Operations. 26 June 2001.
FM 7-8. Infantry Rifle Platoon and Squad. 22 April 1992.
FM 20-3. Camouflage, Concealment, and Decoys. 30 August 1999.
FM 21-75. Combat Skills of the Soldier. 3 August 1984.
FM 23-9. M16A1 and M16A2 Rifle Marksmanship. 3 July 1989.
FM 23-10. Sniper Training. 17 August 1994.
FM 90-10. Military Operations on Urbanized Terrain (MOUT). 15 August 1979.
FM 3-06.11 (FM 90-10-1). Combined Arms Operations in Urban Terrain. 28 February 2002.
George, Lt. Col. John. Shots Fired in Anger. National Rifle Association of America, 1600
Rhode Island Ave., N.W., Washington DC 20036. 1987. (ISBN 0-935998-42-X).
Henderson, Charles. Marine Sniper: 93 Confirmed Kills. Stein and Day, Scarborough House,
Briarcliff Manor, NY 10510. 1986. (ISBN 0-425181-650).
FM 3-05.222
Bibliography-2
Hogg, Ian V. The Cartridge Guide. Stackpole Books, Cameron and Kelker Streets,
P.O. Box 1831, Harrisburg, PA 17105. 1982. (ISBN 0-8117-1048-3).
Hunnicutt, Robert W., ed. Semi-Auto Rifles: Data and Comment. National Rifle Association
of America, 1600 Rhode Island Ave., N.W., Washington, DC 20036. December 1988.
(ISBN 0-935998-54-3).
Idriess, Ion L. The Australian Guerrilla: Sniping. Paladin Press, P.O. Box 1307, Boulder,
CO 80306. January 1989. (ISBN 0-87364-104-3).
Long, Duncan. Modern Sniper Rifles. Paladin Press, P.O. Box 1307, Boulder, CO 80306.
June 1988. (ISBN 0-87364-470-0).
Lonsdale, Mark V. Advanced Weapons Training for Hostage Rescue Teams. S.T.T.U. Training
Division, P.O. Box 491261, Los Angeles, CA 90049. 1988. (ISBN 0-939235-01-3).
Lonsdale, Mark V. CQB: A Guide to Unarmed Combat and Close Quarter Shooting. S.T.T.U.
Training Division, P.O. Box 491261, Los Angeles, CA 90049. June 1991.
(ISBN 0-939235-03-X).
Lonsdale, Mark V. Sniper Counter Sniper: A Guide for Special Response Teams. S.T.T.U.
Training Division, P.O. Box 491261, Los Angeles, CA 90049. August 1993.
(ISBN 0-939235-00-5).
Mace, Boyd. The Accurate Varmint Rifle. Precision Shooting, Inc., 37 Burnham Street, East
Hartford, CT 06108. 1991.
McBride, Herbert W. A Rifleman Went to War. Lancer Militaria, P.O. Box 886, Mt. Ida,
AR 71957. 1987. (ISBN 0-935856-01-3).
McBride, Herbert W. The Emma Gees. Lancer Militaria, P.O. Box 886, Mt. Ida, AR 71957.
1988. (ISBN 0-935856-03-X).
NRA Highpower Rifle Rules. National Rifle Association of America, 1600 Rhode Island Ave.,
N.W., Washington, DC 20036. 1992.
Page, Warren. The Accurate Rifle. Stoeger Publishing Company, 55 Ruta Court,
South Hackensack, NJ 07606. 1973. (ISBN 0-88317-023-X).
Presidential Executive Order 12333, United States Intelligence Activities, Part II, paragraph 2-11.
4 December 1981.
Ramage, C. Kenneth, ed. Lyman Reloading Handbook, 46th Edition. Lyman Publications,
Rt. 147, Middlefield, CT 06455. 1982.
Ross, Ellen, ed. Highpower Rifle Shooting, Volume III. National Rifle Association of America,
1600 Rhode Island Ave., N.W., Washington DC 20036. 1985.
Sasser, Charles W., and Craig Roberts. One Shot - One Kill (Snipers). Pocket Books/Simon &
Schuster Inc., 1230 Avenue of the Americas, New York, NY 10020. April 1990.
Senich, Peter R. Limited War Sniping. Paladin Press, P.O. Box 1307, Boulder, CO 80306.
1977. (ISBN 0-87364-126-4).
FM 3-05.222
Bibliography-3
Senich, Peter R. The Complete Book of U.S. Sniping. Paladin Press, P.O. Box 1307, Boulder,
CO 80306. April 1988. (ISBN 0-87364-460-3).
Senich, Peter R. The German Sniper: 19141945. Paladin Press, P.O. Box 1307, Boulder,
CO 80306. September 1982. (ISBN 0-87364-223-6).
Shore, Captain C. With British Snipers to the Reich. Paladin Press, P.O. Box 1307, Boulder,
CO 80306. 1988. (ISBN 0-87364-475-1).
Skennerton, Ian. The British Sniper: British & Commonwealth Sniping & Equipments,
19151983. Ian D. Skennerton, P.O. Box 56, Margate Q. 4019, Australia. 1983.
(ISBN 0-949749-03-6).
Stevens, R. Blake. U.S. Rifle M14 - From John Garand to the M21. Collector Grade
Publications Incorporated. P.O. Box 250, Station E, Toronto, Canada M6H 4E2.
January 1991. (ISBN 0-88935-110-4).
Thompson, Leroy. The Rescuers: The Worlds Top Anti-Terrorist Units. Paladin Press,
P.O. Box 1307, Boulder, CO 80306. 1986.
TM 9-1005-223-20. Organizational Maintenance Manual (Including Repair Parts and
Special Tools List) for Rifle, 7.62-mm, M14 W/E (NSN: 1005-589-1271), M14A1 W/E
(NSN: 1005-072-5011) and Bipod, Rifle, M2 (NSN: 1005-711-6202). 2 August 1972.
TM 9-1005-306-10. Operators Manual for 7.62-mm M24 Sniper Weapon System (SWS)
(NSN: 1005-01-240-2136). 23 June 1989.
TM 9-1265-211-10. Operators Manual for Multiple Integrated Laser Engagement System
(MILES) Simulator System, Firing, Laser: M89 (NSN: 1265-01-236-6725) for
M16A1/M16A2 Rifle and Simulator System, Firing, Laser: M90 (NSN: 1265-01-236-
6724) for M249, Squad Automatic Weapon (SAW). 28 February 1989.
TM 11-5855-203-10. Operators Manual for Night Vision Sight, Individual Served Weapon,
AN/PVS-2 (NSN: 5855-00-087-2947), AN/PVS-2A (5855-00-179-3708), and AN/PVS-2B
(5855-00-760-3869). 29 August 1974.
TM 11-5855-213-10. Operators Manual for Night Vision Sight, Individual Served Weapon,
AN/PVS-4 (NSN: 5855-00-629-5334). 1 February 1993.
TM 11-5855-262-10-1. Operators Manual for Night Vision Goggle, AN/PVS-7A
(NSN: 5855-01-228-0939). 15 March 1993.
Truby, J. David. Silencers, Snipers and Assassins. Paladin Press, P.O. Box 1307, Boulder,
CO 80306. June 1987. (ISBN 0-87364-012-8).
U.S. Army Special Operations Command (USASOC) Regulation 350-1. Training. 28 July 1995.
Ward, Joseph T. Dear Mom: A Snipers Vietnam. Ivy Books (Ballantine Books), New York,
NY. October 1991.
Index-1
Index
A
administrative prerequisites,
1-1, 1-2
aerial platforms, O-1
aiming, 3-19
ammunition, 2-10
alternatives, 2-12, 2-13
types and characteristics,
2-10 through 2-12
art of sniping, L-1
assessment tests
objective, 1-4
subjective, 1-4
B
ballistics, 3-37, 3-38, 3-43, H-1
binoculars, 2-14 through 2-16
bolt assembly, 2-2
breath control, 3-28
C
camouflage, 4-39
clothing, 4-6 through 4-8
equipment, for, 4-8, 4-9
fundamentals, 4-1
materials, 4-6
types of, 4-5
CARVER process, 5-12, 5-13
civil affairs, 5-18
civil disturbance assistance,
5-37 through 5-40
cleaning the SWS, 2-25
through 2-28
collateral activities, 5-18
combat search and rescue,
5-30
conventional defensive
operations, 5-35 through
5-37
conventional offensive
operations, 5-32 through
5-34
counterterrorism operations,
5-29
countertracking, 4-25, 4-38,
4-39
cover and concealment, 4-10,
4-11, 5-39, I-5
D
debriefing format, M-1
deception techniques
backward walking, 4-40
big tree, 4-40, 4-41
cut the corner, 4-41
slip the stream, 4-42
Artic circle, 4-39, 4-42
fishhook, 4-43
direct action, 5-24 through 5-28
dog-tracker teams, 4-34
through 4-38
E
employment
methods, 5-1
planning, 5-2
organization, 5-5
command and control, 5-7
environmental effects on firing
humidity, 3-65
light, 3-65
temperature, 3-65
wind, 3-59 through 3-61
eye relief, 3-19, 3-20
F
final focus point, 3-33, 3-34
firing phases, 3-31 through
3-33
firing positions, 3-1 through
3-4, 6-17
Hawkins, 3-6
other supported positions,
3-13, 3-14
prone backward, 3-7
prone supported, 3-5
sitting supported, 3-8
sling-supported kneeling,
3-10, 3-11
sling-supported prone, 3-6,
3-7
sling-supported sitting, 3-8,
3-9
squatting, 3-11
standing unsupported, 3-12,
3-13
supported kneeling, 3-9, 3-10
supported standing, 3-11,
3-12
foreign internal defense, 5-23
foreign/nonstandard sniper
weapons systems, F-1
G
ghillie suit, 2-30, 4-7, 4-8
H
hides, 4-67 through 4-69, 6-13
construction of, 4-77 through
4-79, I-4
types of, 4-70 through 4-77
hold-off, 3-69, 3-71, 3-72
I
iron sights, 3-19, 3-51 through
3-53
K
keep-in-memory (KIM) games,
4-91, 4-92
FM 3-05.222
Index-2
L
Leupold & Stevens M3A
telescope, 2-7
logbook, K-1
M
maintenance, 2-30, 2-33, 2-34,
2-38
marksmanship training, 3-1
methods of estimation
100-meter unit-of-measure,
4-62, 4-63
appearance-of-objects, 4-63
combination, 4-64
military sketch, 4-84 through
4-87, 5-13
mil relation (worm formula),
4-60, 4-61
minute of angle, 3-37 through
3-39
mission-essential tasks list, B-1
mission packing list, D-1
movement, types of
backward, 4-16
hands and knees crawl, 4-13
high crawl, 4-13, 4-14
low crawl, 4-14, 4-15
medium crawl, 4-14, 4-15
night, 4-17
turning while crawling, 4-15,
4-16
walking, 4-13
moving targets, 3-72 through
3-76
M24 sniper rifle, 2-1
M3A telescope, 2-7
M49 observation telescope,
2-16, 3-58
M82A1 caliber .50 SWS, E-1
N
night vision goggles
AN/PVS-5, 2-26
AN/PVS-7, 2-26, 2-27
night vision sights
AN/PVS-2, 2-18, 2-19, 3-52
AN/PVS-4, 2-19, 2-20, 3-56
O
observation, 4-43, 4-45, 4-46,
I-3
devices, 2-13 through 2-28
techniques, 4-53
observation log, 4-82 through
4-84
obstacles and barriers, 3-77,
3-78
operation order, 5-14 through
5-16
organization, sniper team, 1-5,
1-6
P
parallax, 3-34
personal qualities, 1-1, 1-3
point interdiction, 5-1
point of aim, 3-26, 3-27
psychological operations, 5-18
R
range card, 4-80, 4-81
range complex, N-1
range estimation, 4-57 through
4-59, J-1
range finders, 4-61
AN/GVS-5, 2-28
AN/PVS-6, 2-28
reconnaissance and
surveillance, 4-17, 5-1
S
safety, 2-2, 4-17, 5-7
shot groups, 3-46 through 3-48
sight alignment, 3-20 through
3-22
sighting, 3-19
sight picture, 3-21, 3-22
slope firing, 3-66 through 3-69
sniper data book (cards), 3-48
through 3-51, K-1
sniper rifle telescope
characteristics, G-1, G-2
adjustments, G-2
sniper weapon system (SWS),
2-1
SOTIC (special operations
target interdiction course)
graduates, 1-2, 1-5, 1-7
Soviet telescopes, F-5 through
F-8
special operations missions,
5-16
special reconnaissance, 5-26
stalking, 4-17 through 4-20,
C-13
stock adjustment, 2-4
surveillance devices, 2-32,
2-33
sustainment, C-1
T
target analysis, 5-10
team firing techniques, 3-17
telescopes, G-1
telescopic sight, 2-6, 3-24,
3-25, G-4
tracking, 3-75, 3-76, 4-25
through 4-33
training exercises, I-1
trigger assembly, 2-2
trigger control, 3-29 through
3-31
tripod, 2-14, 3-15, 3-16
troubleshooting, 2-41
U
urban hides
hasty, 6-14, 6-15
prepared, 6-15 through 6-17
urban terrain, 6-1
movement techniques in,
6-7, 6-8
building entry techniques in,
6-9
engagement techniques in,
6-24, 6-25
FM 3-05.222
Index-3
unconventional warfare, 5-21
United States telescopes, F-4
through F-8
W
weights, measures, and
conversion tables, A-1
wind classification, 3-59, 3-60
wind velocity, 3-60 through
3-64
Z
zeroing, 3-51
with iron sights, 3-52, 3-53
with telescopic sights, 3-54,
3-55

FM 3-05.222 (TC 31-32)
25 APRIL 2003





By Order of the Secretary of the Army:





ERIC K. SHINSEKI
General, United States Army
Chief of Staff



Official:





JOEL B. HUDSON
Administrative Assistant to the
Secretary of the Army
0308508








DISTRIBUTION:

Active Army, Army National Guard, and U.S. Army Reserve: To be distributed in
accordance with initial distribution number 115434, requirements for FM 3-
05.222.























































PIN: 080733-000